JP2021006079A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured such that a "time-shortening function" by a big win type "time-shortening A" is imparted even if a big win type counter C2 corresponding to a big win type "probability variable A" is won when reaching a limit, a time-shortening completion condition based on a small win of a second special pattern is not satisfied since a small win game by the second special pattern is difficult to occur in this case, and a "time-shortening function" imparted by satisfaction of another time-shortening completion condition is completed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 82

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol) and a second gaming state (for example, a high probability state of a special symbol) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). And are configured to be able to occur, and the game state after the end of the corresponding game or the game is configured to be able to transition to the second game state until a predetermined number of hits occur, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number of times. In addition, there is also one having a function (so-called limiter function) of transitioning the game state after the corresponding or game to the first game state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295672

For such a game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a predetermined first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a predetermined second entry means different from the predetermined first entry means, and the predetermined second entry means. A first movable means that can be changed into a state in which the game ball is difficult to flow into or cannot flow into the first ball-entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined first ball-entry means. Predetermined information based on the first driving means capable of changing the first movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state, and a game ball entering the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means. The information acquisition means for acquiring the above, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, the specific ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means and the predetermined second ball entry means, and the above. According to the second movable means capable of changing between a difficult inflow state in which the game ball is difficult to flow into the specific entry means or an inflowable state in which the game ball can flow into the specific entry means, and the determination means. By using the determination result, the second driving means capable of changing the second movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state, a gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state, and a determination result of the determination means can be obtained. A gaming machine including a dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information in the display means by using the determination means, wherein the determination means is used for the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Based on the above, at least one of the first result that does not give the player a game value and the second result that can give a predetermined game value to the player can be derived, and the dynamic display execution means. Is a first dynamic execution means capable of executing the first dynamic display, which is the dynamic display, based on the entry into the predetermined first entry means, and the entry into the predetermined second entry means. A second dynamic execution means capable of executing a second dynamic display different from the first dynamic display, and the first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means. The second driving means includes the same-time execution means capable of executing the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means at the same time, and the second driving means is the predetermined first ball entry means by the determination means. Alternatively, when the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined second entry means, the specific entry means can be inflowed for a maximum of a specific period for a specific period. The game state changing means is provided with a possible state means and an N times execution means for executing the specific period N times (N is a natural number) by the specific period inflowable state means, and the game state changing means is few. Even if it is not, the game state can be changed to a predetermined predetermined game state and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and the dynamic display executing means is the first dynamic display in the predetermined game state. As the execution time of the first dynamic short-term means capable of selecting an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display, and as the execution time of the first dynamic display in the specific gaming state, the second In the first dynamic long-term means capable of selecting an execution time longer than the execution time of the dynamic display and the predetermined gaming state, the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display. A second dynamic long-term means that can select the execution time, and a second that can select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the specific gaming state. The first dynamic long-term means includes, as the execution time of the first dynamic display, at least an execution time that can be selected by the second dynamic short-term means and the inflow for the specific period. A first total period setting means that can set a first total period equal to or greater than the sum of the N times specific period obtained by multiplying the specific period by the N times execution means by the specific period in the possible state means). ..

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second dynamic long-term means is selected by at least the first dynamic short-term means as the execution time of the second dynamic display. A second total that can set a second total period equal to or greater than the sum of the obtained execution time and the N times specific period obtained by multiplying the specific period in the specific period inflowable state means by N by the N times execution means. It is equipped with a period setting means.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second driving means has a predetermined start period before the specific period is started by the specific period inflowable state means. The first total period setting means includes, as the execution time of the first dynamic display, at least the first total period and the start period in the start period execution means. A period equal to or greater than the total of, can be set.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claims 1 to 3, wherein the second driving means executes a predetermined end period after the specific period ends by the specific period inflowable state means. The first total period setting means is configured to be capable of setting a period equal to or greater than the sum of the first total period and the end period in the end period executing means.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claims 1 to 4, wherein the second driving means has the specific period of 1 and the next specific period of the means capable of flowing into the specified period. In between, the interruption period executing means for executing the interruption period (for example, interval time) that makes the specific ball entry means difficult to flow in is provided, and the first total period setting means is the first total period and the said. Suspension period A period equal to or greater than the total of the suspension period in the execution means can be set.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a predetermined first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a predetermined second entry means different from the predetermined first entry means, and the predetermined first entry means. A first movable means that can be changed into an inflow difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to flow into or cannot flow into, and an inflowable state in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined first entry means, and the first movable means. Information acquisition that acquires predetermined information based on the first driving means that can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state and the game ball entering the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means. To the means, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, the specific ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means and the predetermined second ball entry means, and the specific ball entry means. A second movable means that can be changed into an inflow difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to flow in or cannot flow in, and an inflowable state in which the game ball can flow into the specific entry means, and the determination result by the determination means are used. By using the second driving means capable of changing the second movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state, the gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state, and the determination result of the determination means. A gaming machine including a dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information in the display means, wherein the determination means at least is based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. It is configured so that either a first result that does not give the player a game value or a second result that can give a predetermined game value to the player can be derived, and the dynamic display executing means is the predetermined first result. The first dynamic execution means capable of executing the first dynamic display, which is the dynamic display, based on the entry into the ball entry means, and the movement based on the entry into the predetermined second entry means. A second dynamic execution means capable of executing a second dynamic display different from the first dynamic display, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means, and the second movement. The second driving means includes the same-time execution means capable of executing the second dynamic display by the target execution means at the same time, and the second driving means is the predetermined first ball entry means or the predetermined second by the determination means. When the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, the specific period inflowable state means capable of making the specific entry means inflowable for a maximum of a specific period, and the inflowable state means. The game state changing means is provided with N times execution means for executing the specific period N times (N is a natural number) by the specific period inflowable state means, and the game state changing means is at least at a predetermined place. The game state can be changed between a fixed game state and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and the dynamic display executing means sets the execution time of the first dynamic display in the predetermined game state. Execution of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display in the first dynamic short-term means capable of selecting an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display and the specific gaming state. A first dynamic long-term means capable of selecting an execution time longer than the time, and an execution time longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display are selected as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the predetermined gaming state. A second dynamic long-term means to obtain, and a second dynamic short-term means capable of selecting an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the specific gaming state. The first dynamic long-term means includes, as the execution time of the first dynamic display, at least the execution time that can be selected by the second dynamic short-term means, and the above-mentioned in the specific period inflow enable state means. A first total period setting means that can set a first total period equal to or greater than the sum of the N times specific period obtained by multiplying the specific period by N by the N times execution means). This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second dynamic long-term means has at least an execution time that can be selected by the first dynamic short-term means as the execution time of the second dynamic display, and the specific period in the specific period inflowable state means. A second total period setting means capable of setting a second total period equal to or greater than the sum of the N times specific period obtained by multiplying N by the N times execution means is provided. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second driving means includes a start period executing means that executes a predetermined start period before the specific period is started by the specific period inflowable state means, and the first total period setting means is provided. As the execution time of the first dynamic display, at least a period equal to or longer than the total of the first total period and the start period in the start period execution means can be set. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines according to claims 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second driving means includes end period execution means for executing a predetermined end period after the end of the specific period by the specific period inflowable state means, and the first total period setting means is the first. It is possible to set a period equal to or greater than the total of one total period and the end period in the end period execution means. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines according to claims 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second driving means has an interruption period (for example, an interval) that makes the specific ball-entry means difficult to flow in between the specific period of 1 by the specific period inflowable state means and the next specific period. The first total period setting means can set a period equal to or greater than the sum of the first total period and the suspension period in the suspension period executing means. Will be done. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view in a front view of the V winning device, and (b) is a diagram showing the behavior of a sphere distributed to the left path by the sorting device of the V winning device, and (c). ) Is a diagram showing the behavior of the spheres distributed to the right path by the distribution device of the V winning device. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine, and is mainly a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of each counter, each holding ball storage area, and holding ball execution area. It is a figure which showed an example of a jackpot random number table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 1, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 2. It is a figure which showed the example of the hold number table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern table for loss schematically. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation pattern table for a jackpot schematically. It is a figure which showed an example of the production time for each fluctuation element of a variation production. It is a timing chart showing whether or not a ball is detected by the V winning opening switch at two timings of "timing A" and "timing B" in the case of "7 round V open jackpot". It is a timing chart which showed the situation which the jackpot state occurred without shortening the fluctuation time of the variation effect in the case of "7 round V open jackpot". It is a timing chart which showed the situation which the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect was shortened, and the jackpot state occurred when "7 round V open jackpot" occurred. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal figure, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal figure fluctuation time table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal figure fluctuation time table. It is a figure which showed the example of the electric service control table schematically. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of an audio lamp control device. It is a figure which showed an example of the V prize suggestion table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the pending change table schematically. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the 1st hold information storage area, 2nd hold information storage area, and execution information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the V drive processing which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing control processing of a winning device executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of the V winning apparatus executed by MPU in the main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process during opening of a variable winning device executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the V winning chance effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the counter subtraction process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a figure showing the transition from the "V winning chance production" performed by the third symbol display device to the first round of the jackpot without a new start winning, and (a) is the "V winning chance production". Is a diagram showing a state immediately after the start of "", (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the left symbol row is stopped from the state of (a), and (c) is a state of (b). Therefore, it is a figure showing the state in which the variation effect of 1 is digested and the next variation effect held is started. In (d), the “V winning chance effect” is completed from the state of (c). It is a figure which showed the state, (e) is a figure which showed the state which started the fluctuation effect which became the cause of occurrence of "V prize chance production" from the state of (d), and (f) is a figure which showed. It is a figure which showed the state which the jackpot symbol appeared from the state of (e), and (g) is the figure which showed the state which suggests that the V winning device is opened from the state of (f). (H) is a diagram showing a state in which the "V non-acquisition notification effect" indicating that the ball could not be won in the V winning opening was executed from the state of (g). It is a figure showing the transition from the "V prize chance production" performed on the third symbol display device to the first round of the jackpot after the new start prize is generated, and (a) is the "V prize chance production". Is a diagram showing a state immediately after the start of "", (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the left symbol row is stopped from the state of (a), and (c) is a state of (b). Therefore, it is a figure showing the state in which the variation effect of 1 is digested and the next variation effect held is started. In (d), the “V winning chance effect” is completed from the state of (c). It is a figure which showed the state, (e) is a figure which showed the state which started the fluctuation effect which became the cause of occurrence of "V prize chance production" from the state of (d), and (f) is a figure which showed. It is a figure which showed the state which the jackpot symbol appeared from the state of (e), and (g) is the figure which showed the state which suggests that the V winning device is opened from the state of (f). (H) is a diagram showing a state in which the "V acquisition notification effect" indicating that the ball is won in the V winning opening is executed from the state of (g). It is a flowchart which showed the V prize chance effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the transition from "V prize chance production" performed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment to the 1st round of a jackpot without generating a new start prize, (a). , It is a figure which showed the state immediately after "V prize chance production" was started, (b) is a figure which showed the state which the left symbol row stopped from the state of (a), (c) is a figure which showed. , (B) is a diagram showing a state in which one variation effect is digested and the next pending variation effect is started, and (d) is a "V prize" from the state of (c). It is a figure which showed the state which "chance production" was completed, and (e) is a figure which showed the state which the fluctuation production which caused the occurrence of "V prize chance production" was started from the state of (d). , (F) is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot symbol appears from the state of (e), and (g) suggests that the V winning device is released from the state of (f). It is a figure which showed the state which is, (h) is the figure which showed the state which "V acquisition effect" which shows that the ball was won by the V winning opening from the state of (g) is executed. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the 1st hold information storage area, 2nd hold information storage area, and execution information storage area in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation time management process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V prize chance effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the shortening time update process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the transition from the "V prize chance production" performed by the 3rd symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment to the 1st round of a jackpot after a new start prize is generated, and (a) is It is a figure which showed the state immediately after "V prize chance production" was started, and (b) is "V drive suggestion display" and "variation time integrated display" in "V prize chance production" from the state of (a). Is a diagram showing a state in which "" is displayed, and in (c), a new start winning prize is generated from the state of (b), and "additional display" is made to "remaining time display". It is a figure which showed the state immediately before, (d) is a figure which showed the state which "additional display" was applied to "remaining time display" from the state of (c), (e) is a figure which showed (d. ), "V winning chance production" is continuously displayed, "V drive suggestion display" and "variation time integration display" are displayed, and "launch continuation suggestion" is displayed. Yes, (f) is a diagram showing a state in which "suggestion to stop firing" is displayed from the state of (e), and (g) is a V winning device released from the state of (f). It is a figure which showed the state suggesting that, and (h) shows the state which "V acquisition notification effect" which shows that the ball was won by the V winning opening from the state of (g) is executed. It is a figure shown. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic front view of the game board which showed the flow-down mode of the ball launched in the left-handed game in the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state". It is a schematic front view of the game board which showed the flow-down mode of the ball launched in the right-handed game in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time shortening state". It is a schematic front view of the game board which showed the flow-down mode of the ball fired in the right-handed game at the time of "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed the structure of each counter, each holding ball storage area, and each holding ball execution area schematically. It is a figure which showed an example of a jackpot random number table schematically. Special Figure 1 is a diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table. Special Figure 2 is a diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table. It is a figure which showed the game specification according to the game state in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the reserved number table for special figure 1 schematically. It is a figure which shows an example of the reserved number table for special figure 2 schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table. , An example of the C table of the stop pattern table is schematically shown, and FIG. 3D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss / small hit, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for special figure 1 big hit. Is. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for special figure 2 loss / small hit, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for special figure 2 big hit. Is. It is a figure which showed the example of the jackpot open table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the small hit open table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the time saving end condition table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal figure, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal figure fluctuation table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal electric power. It is a figure which showed an example of the role opening table schematically. In the left-handed game in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", the ball at the through gate, the left special figure 1 starting port, the right special figure 1 starting port, the special figure 1 small winning opening, and the special figure 2 starting port. Detection timing, variable display of normal symbol, variable display of 1st special symbol and variable display of 2nd special symbol, and drive timing of ordinary electric service, special figure 1 haunting plate and common prize opening opening / closing plate It is a timing chart which shows the relationship with. In the right-handed game in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the ball at the through gate, the left special figure 1 starting port, the right special figure 1 starting port, the special figure 1 small winning opening, and the special figure 2 starting port The detection timing, the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol, and the drive timing of the ordinary electric service, the special figure 1 haunting plate, and the common grand prize opening opening / closing plate. It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between. In the right-handed game in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the detection timing of the ball at the through gate, the left special figure 1 starting port, the right special figure 1 starting port, the special figure 1 small winning opening and the special figure 2 starting port , The relationship between the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, and the drive timing of the ordinary electric service, the special figure 1 haunting plate and the common grand prize opening opening / closing plate. It is a timing chart shown schematically. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of an audio lamp control device. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of each holding information storage area and each execution information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the limit processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 change process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 change process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving counting process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the hit process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot opening / closing control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the common grand prize opening opening processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening / closing control processing executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a small winning opening which is executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric service control process which is executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a figure which schematically showed the execution mode of the variation effect in each game state in the 3rd symbol display device, and (a) is the variation of 1st special symbol in "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state". It is a figure which showed the execution mode of the effect, (b) is the figure which showed the execution mode of the variation effect of the 1st special symbol in the "time shortening state", (c) is the figure which showed the execution mode of the variation effect of the 1st special symbol It is a figure which showed the execution mode of the variation effect of the 2nd special symbol, and (d) is the figure which showed the execution mode of the variation effect of the 1st special symbol in "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state".

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings (ball entry openings) 63, 64, 65a, 71, 74a and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached. The details of the game board 13 will be described later in FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, is changed. Further, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content in the notice display executed in the variation display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variation display of the third symbol is referred to as "variation effect"). Also used as.

Further, the variable effect is an effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, and as described later, a ball fired in the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (see FIG. 3). For example, it is executed when a prize is won in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 (see FIG. 3) described later, and the symbol (third symbol described later) is changed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. It is a production that presents to the player the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery performed for the prize by combining the symbols.

Further, the stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, are unified. In the pachinko machine 10, the “city stage” and “sky” are used. There are three stages, "Stage" and "Island Stage". The above-mentioned variable effects and various effects such as "reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

Further, the "reach display" refers to a display one step before the "big hit display" indicating that a big hit occurs in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. .. Specifically, the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, stops at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 5) does not stop yet and continues to fluctuate. It means the state of being.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "reach display" is roughly divided into one unit element constituting the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit element constituting the effect is referred to as a "variable element"). It is executed by developing from the variable element of the "normal reach", and is executed by developing from the variable element of "super reach" which has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of the "normal reach" and the variable element of the same "normal reach". There is a variable element of "special reach" that has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of "super reach".

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed invisible to the player in the fluctuation effect. This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Then, every time the frame button 22 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "city stage"-> "empty stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

Further, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, the variable element of "normal reach" is changed to the variable element of "super reach". When developing into a variable element of "special reach", a selection screen of a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 among the variable elements of "normal reach". It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is displayed. It is configured so that the selected candidate is changed when the player presses it. Then, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is determined based on the production candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". As for the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the determination.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player directs the pachinko machine 10 in a predetermined direction (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10). It may be configured by an operation lever that can be tilted forward (forward, backward, right and left). Then, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be determined based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted.

Further, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side side view of the upper plate 17, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 can be any arrangement position as long as it can be pressed by the player. It may be arranged, for example, on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower plate 50 described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined "reach display", and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, lighting portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (Light Emitting Diode; hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") are provided. ..

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and at the time of jackpot or "reach display", the built-in LEDs are lit or blinked to cause the illumination units 29 to 33. Lights up or flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the "reach display" one step before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in the front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (Acrylonirile Butadiene Style) in which the area around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 is chrome-plated, hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS". .) A resin plating member 36 is attached.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6). The touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the operation handle 51, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) to detect.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit, hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and a lottery. A random number generator used for the above, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, a specific configuration of the game board 13 and a detailed configuration of the V winning device 72 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. First, as shown in FIG. 3, in the game board 13, a large number of nails, windmills, rails 61, 62, and balls for ball guidance are awarded to a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view. A general winning opening 63 that can obtain a predetermined winning ball, a variable winning device 65 that is opened when a big hit of the third symbol occurs, and a V winning device 72 that can be opened in some of the big hits of the third symbol. The first start port 64 and the second start port 71, which trigger the lottery of the third symbol, the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of the second symbol, and the ball can enter the second start port 71 when the ball is opened. The variable display unit 80 and the like having the ordinary electric service 71a, the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol display device 83, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12.

The general winning port 63, the first starting port 64, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting port 71, the ordinary electric service 71a, the V winning device 72, and the variable display device unit 80 are attached to the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the formed through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 3) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center (hereinafter, the act of firing a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as "right-handed". , The act of passing the fired ball through the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as "left-handed"). In the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the ball can enter the first starting port 64, while the ball enters the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting port 71, and the V winning device 72. It is configured to be difficult to do. Further, in a right-handed game, a ball can enter the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting port 71, and the V winning device 72, while it is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 64. It is configured.

Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol display device 37 (hereinafter referred to as a symbol display device 37) provided with a first LED group 37a and a second LED group 37b composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means on the upper right side of the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 3). , The first symbol display device 37 may be referred to as a “special symbol display device 37” for convenience of explanation). The special symbol display device 37 sets the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later (hereinafter, the variation display of both special symbols is ". "Dynamic display") is displayed, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The first LED group 37a determines the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation display has not been executed, among the balls that have won (winned) in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, which will be described later. It is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of jackpot rounds (hereinafter, the round may be simply referred to as "R") and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the first LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The first LED group 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

The "round" in the jackpot is a large winning opening opening / closing plate 65b that opens / closes the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, which will be described later, or a V that opens / closes the V winning device 72 in order to divide the number of winning balls in the jackpot. The period from the opening of the winning device opening / closing plate 72a to the closing of the winning device opening / closing plate 72a. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, "30 seconds" has passed since the large winning opening 65a was started to open, or 10 balls are won while the large winning opening 65a is open, or "5 seconds" have passed since the V winning device 72 was opened, or 10 balls are being opened while the V winning device 72 is open. By winning a prize, one "round" is executed.

The second LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs, that is, an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 also composed of 6 LEDs. In the upper LED group 37b1, a first special symbol indicating a determination result of the first lottery game executed based on the ball entering the first starting port 64 is dynamically displayed. Further, in the lower LED group 37b2, a second special symbol indicating a determination result of the second lottery game executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 71 is dynamically displayed.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 is dynamically operated until a variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning a prize in the first starting port 64 provided in the center of the board surface of the game board 13 elapses. After display (in the first embodiment, the uppermost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 is turned on one by one, and the lower LED is repeatedly displayed), a symbol showing the determination result (first embodiment). Then, the stop display is performed with any of a total of 64 types of stop symbols) depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the six LEDs.

Further, the lower LED group 37b2 is dynamically displayed until a variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning a prize in the second starting port 71 provided on the right side side of the game board 13 elapses (dynamic display time). In the first embodiment, the lower LEDs are lit one by one in order from the uppermost LED of the lower LED group 37b2, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a symbol showing the determination result (in the first embodiment, Depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the 6 LEDs, the stop display is performed with any of 64 types of stop symbols).

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, it corresponds to the type (type) of the big hit. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the ball enters the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is determined to be a big hit (big hit lottery), and if each hit or fail judgment is determined to be a big hit, , The jackpot type is also determined according to the winning openings 64 and 71.

The jackpot types determined in the first embodiment are "15 round V open jackpot", "7 round V open jackpot", and "7 round V closed jackpot" based on the winning of the first starting port 64. Is prepared (see FIG. 9A). Further, based on the winning of the second starting port 71, "15 round V open jackpot" and "15 round V closed jackpot" are prepared (see FIG. 9B).

The jackpot type of "15 rounds V open jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds, and the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round of the jackpot and is variable from the second round to the 15th round. It is a big hit that the winning device 65 is opened.

Further, the jackpot type of "7 rounds V open jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, and the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round of the jackpot as in "15 rounds V open jackpot". Then, from the second round to the seventh round, the variable winning device 65 is a big hit.

The jackpot type of "15 rounds V closed jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds, and the variable winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the 15th round of the jackpot, and the V winning device 72 is opened. It is a big hit that is not done.

The jackpot type of "7 round V closed jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of 7 rounds, and like the "15 round V closed jackpot", all variable winning devices 65 from the 1st round to the 7th round of the jackpot Is released, and the V winning device 72 is a big hit that is not opened.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the V winning device 72 in a front view, and FIG. 4B shows the behavior of the spheres distributed to the right path 75 by the sorting device 73 of the V winning device 72. FIG. 4C is a diagram showing the behavior of a sphere distributed to the left side path 74 by the distribution device 73 of the V winning device 72.

The V winning device 72 is arranged on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). The V winning device 72 mainly passes the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a that opens / closes the V winning device 72 and the ball that has flowed into the V winning device 72 with the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a open. The pre-distribution path 72c, the distribution device 73 provided on the downstream side of the pre-distribution path 72c, and the ball that has flowed into the V winning device 72 when the distribution device 73 is in a state of rising to the right in front view. The left side path 74 through which the ball flows down, the V winning port 74a capable of detecting a ball passing through the left side path 74, and the ball flowing into the V winning device 72 when the sorting device 73 is in a state of rising to the left in front view. It is composed of a right-hand route 75 (see FIG. 4 (a)).

The V-winning device opening / closing plate 72a is configured to be displaceable into a protruding state protruding from the game board 13 board surface and an immersive state immersed in the game board 13 board surface by the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b (see FIG. 6) described later. ing. Specifically, in the normal state, the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a is brought into a protruding state by turning off the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b, and the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a causes the upper part of the V winning device 72 (path before distribution). The 72c upstream side) is closed so that the ball does not flow into the V winning device 72. Then, when the above-mentioned "15 round V open jackpot" or "7 round V open jackpot" is won, the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is operated for a predetermined period (in the first embodiment, "5" in the first round of both jackpots. By turning it on for "seconds"), the V prize device opening / closing plate 72a is immersive, the upper part of the V prize device 72 (upstream side of the pre-distribution path 72c) is opened, and the ball played right-handed is the V prize device 72. It is configured to flow in.

The sphere that has flowed into the V winning device 72 always reaches the sorting device 73 via the pre-sorting path 72c, and is sorted to either the left side path 74 or the right side path 75 depending on the driving mode of the sorting device 73. Be done.

The distribution device 73 is arranged on the downstream side of the pre-distribution route 72c, on the upstream side of the left side route 74 and the right side route 75, and at the boundary portion between the left side route 74 and the right side route 75. The distribution device 73 is configured so that the distribution plate 73a can be rotationally driven around the rotation shaft portion 73b, and the V distribution drive solenoid 73c (see FIG. 6) described later has a fixed cycle (in the first embodiment, " It is configured to distribute the ball flowing down into the V winning device 72 to either the left side path 74 or the right side path 75 as it is switched on and off in units of 10 seconds. Specifically, the left path 74 is closed and the right path 75 is opened by turning off the V distribution drive solenoid 73c (see FIG. 4B), and the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned on. By doing so, the right side path 75 is blocked and the left side path 74 is opened (see FIG. 4C) so as to switch at regular intervals.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the balls flowing into the V winning device 72 with the V sorting drive solenoid 73c turned off are sorted to the right path 75 by the sorting plate 73a of the sorting device 73. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4C, the sphere that has flowed into the V winning device 72 with the V distribution drive solenoid 73c turned on is distributed to the left path 74 by the distribution plate 73a of the distribution device 73. And pass through the V winning opening 74a.

In the first embodiment, when the ball flows into the left side path 74 and wins the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open, after the big hit, each special symbol is compared with the "normal game state". It is configured to shift to a gaming state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "probability fluctuation state") in which the normal symbol is in a high probability state as well as in a high probability state. On the other hand, when the V winning device 72 is not opened during the big hit, or even if the V winning device 72 is opened, the ball does not flow into the left side path 74 and the ball does not win the V winning opening 74a. After the big hit, the game state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "time reduction state") in which each special symbol is in a low probability state while the normal symbol is in a high probability state as in the "normal game state". It is configured to migrate.

Here, the "normal game state" refers to a game state that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability of each special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are normal states (that is,). , Low probability state) and the opening of the ordinary electric service 71a for a short time. That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state", and the hit probability of the normal symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". Therefore, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71a is also short. Details will be described later, but in the case of the "normal game state", a game state in which the ball is likely to win the second starting port 71 when a so-called right-handed game is played (hereinafter, a state in which the ball is easily won in the second starting port 71). This is not the "winning assistance state"), but the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In the "normal game state", when the ball is launched by a right-handed game (for example, detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67), the player and the player know that the unencourageed game is being executed. In order to suggest to the people involved in the hall, it is configured to output a predetermined alarm sound (for example, "Please return to the left-handed game"). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of the non-encouragement right-handed game in the "normal game state" and to realize the game playability according to the game specifications.

Next, the "time reduction state" is a state in which the jackpot probability of each special symbol is as low as the "normal game state", but the so-called "time saving function" in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased is added. To say. That is, in the "time shortened state", the ordinary electric service 71a provided on the right side of the front view of the second starting port 71 is likely to be opened, and as a result, the winning assist function is activated and the ball is moved to the second starting port 71. Is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball.

That is, the "time shortened state" is a state in which the jackpot by the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", but the hit by the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric service 71a becomes longer. Therefore, in the "time shortened state", the ball launched by the right-handed game can be easily won in the second starting port 71, so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed. 2 It is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 piece / prize) based on a prize in the starting port 71 and play a game while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time reduction state" is a predetermined number of times after the jackpot (in the first embodiment) when the ball does not win the V winning opening 74a in each jackpot type. , 100 times) Until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the hit probability of the normal symbol becomes a high probability state. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times is executed, the state is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

Next, in the "probability fluctuation state", after the end of the jackpot, the jackpot probability of each special symbol after that is increased as an added value, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, and the ordinary electric service 71a is won. The auxiliary function is activated.

That is, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which the jackpot result by the special symbol is easily derived, the hit result by the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric service 71a is extended. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", since the ball launched by the right-handed game is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 71, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed and the second starting is performed. It is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 piece / prize) based on the winning of the mouth 71 and play the game while suppressing the decrease of the number of balls held, and further, a jackpot game based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol (special). It is possible to play a game in a state in which a game state) is likely to occur.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball wins in the V winning opening 74a in each jackpot type in which the V winning device 72 can be opened, a predetermined number of times after the jackpot (in the first embodiment, Until the dynamic display of the special symbol (100 times) is executed (so-called special time; hereinafter, the acronym of Special Time (special time) may be abbreviated as "ST"). The jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes a high probability state. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed, it is configured to shift from the "probability fluctuation state" to the "normal game state".

Here, a display mode of the second LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "15 round V open jackpot", and the jackpot type " There are 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the "7 round V open jackpot" and 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "7 round V closed jackpot", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Then, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, the stop display of the loss can be recognized, while the jackpot type "15 round V open jackpot", "7 round V open jackpot" or "7". It is difficult to identify which stop display of "Round V closed jackpot".

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, and 32 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "15 round V open jackpot", the jackpot. There are 31 types of display patterns corresponding to the type "15 round V closed jackpot", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Then, like the upper LED group 37b1, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, the stop display of the loss can be recognized, while either the jackpot type "15 round V open jackpot" or "15 round V closed jackpot". It is difficult to identify whether it is a stop display.

With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not grasped. , It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. For this reason, it is difficult to identify whether or not the V winning device 72 is a jackpot type that is opened only from the display result of the variable effect, and a game property is created in which the player can guess which game state the player is in. You can improve your interest.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the game area of the game board 13, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won.

Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 "starts" the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the ball entering the second starting port 71 (hereinafter, the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71). A liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply "display") that performs a variation effect of the third symbol while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37, triggered by a "winning"). A third symbol display device 81 composed of (abbreviated as "device") and an LED that variablely displays a normal symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of a normal symbol is referred to as "variable display") triggered by the passage of a ball of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device 83 (hereinafter, the second symbol display device 83 may be referred to as a "normal symbol display device 83" for convenience of explanation) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 6) described later, for example, left, middle, and right. Three symbol rows (not shown) are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 5) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is used for controlling the main control device 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed by the special symbol display device 37, the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is performed by using the third symbol of the third symbol display device 81. It is a thing. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", The main design with "9") has a large number added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") are the characters such as cannabis, baths, helmets, etc. that almost fill the front of the wooden box. An attached symbol that imitates is added, and an even number is added so that an even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of any of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is produced. It is configured so that a big hit will occur after the fluctuation production is finished. For example, when the jackpot type of "15 round V open jackpot" is won, a variable effect in which the main symbols with the numbers "7" are aligned is mainly performed. In addition, when the jackpot type of "7 round V open jackpot" is won, a variable effect is mainly performed in which the main symbols with the numbers "3" are aligned. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of "15 round V closed jackpot" or "7 round V closed jackpot" is won, the main symbol with a number other than the numbers "3" or "7", that is, " A variable effect is performed in which the main symbols with the numbers "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8" or "9" are aligned.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when each of the jackpot types of "15 round V open jackpot" and "7 round V open jackpot" is won, all the main symbols can appear. .. Specifically, for example, even when the "15 round V open jackpot" or the "7 round V open jackpot" is won, the same main symbols with the numbers "2" and "8" are aligned. A production may be performed. By configuring in this way, for example, at the time when the variable effect is stopped, the content of the game value that can be given cannot be determined, and the promotion effect during the jackpot can be performed to provide a wide variety of games. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds are reserved with the main display area Dm that fluctuates the third symbol. It is composed of a cockpit display area Db that displays the number of balls and the like, and the other upper 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds that displays a notice effect, a character, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. The left symbol column Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. The right symbol column Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order (or descending order) of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variation effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, the arrangement of numbers may be different from each other. For example, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged so as to appear in descending order, while in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols may appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols; hereinafter referred to as "big hit display") is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The sphere is first started while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the first special symbol or the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. When a ball is entered into the mouth 64, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of reserved balls) is held up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figures 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the first reserved symbol display area Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. Also shown. In the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved symbol (“○” symbol in the normal display mode) for each reserved ball of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls is one). White circle symbols)) are displayed, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figures 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d.

That is, in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Is one time, and when two reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 1 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, one for each, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is twice, and when a total of three reserved symbols are displayed in each of the special figure 1 first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed. Is 3 times, and when a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is 4 times. Further, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 and there is a holding variable effect. Indicates not to.

Further, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the sphere is displayed. 2 When a ball is entered into the starting port 71, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of reserved balls) is held up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figures 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d of the second reserved symbol display area Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. Also shown. In the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, as in the case of the first reserved symbol display area Db1, one reserved symbol (one reserved ball) for each reserved ball of the second special symbol (one reserved ball). In the normal display mode, "○" symbols (white circle symbols)) are displayed, and the number of reserved spheres is increased according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figures 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d. Is displayed.

That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Is one time, and when a total of two reserved symbols are displayed in each of the special figure 2 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db2a and Db2b, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed. 2 times, and when a total of 3 reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 2 1st to 3rd reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2c, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is displayed. Is 3 times, and when a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 2 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is 4 times. Further, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 and there is a variable effect of being reserved. Indicates not to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and only one of the lottery games is executed. It is configured in. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when any of the running lottery games is completed and the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are stored, respectively, The second lottery game of the second special symbol is preferentially executed (so-called special figure 2 priority change) over the first lottery game of the first special symbol. The lottery game may be executed in the order of winning (so-called change in the order of winning), or the first lottery game of the first special symbol may be executed with priority over the second lottery game of the second special symbol. It may be configured to execute the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation).

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, an execution symbol display area Db0 for displaying an execution symbol indicating that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm is provided. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. It is configured to display an execution symbol larger than each reserved symbol displayed in each reserved symbol display area Db1a to Db1d and Db2a to Db2d. Further, in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol. To.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted when the variation effect is completed, and along with the deletion of the execution symbol, the displayed reserved symbol is on the lower side (on the right side if it is the first special symbol, the first). 2 If it is a special symbol, it will be moved and displayed as a reserved symbol (on the left). Specifically, for example, in a situation where the reserved symbol of the second special symbol does not exist and there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. When the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted in accordance with the above, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. It is displayed by moving (shifting). Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

Further, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When this is done, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol display area Db2d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution symbol is continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 while the variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when the variation effect is completed, the execution symbol is deleted. That is, when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variation effect is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. If it is not, it indicates that the variation effect is not executed (is not continued) in the main display area Dm.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the "hold change notice" can be executed by using the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This "hold change notice" is to change the display color of the hold symbol and the execution symbol in a plurality of stages from before the execution of the variation effect to during the execution of the jackpot expectation of the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm. It is a notice suggested by.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a "holding change notice", the display color of the holding symbol and the execution symbol is changed from "white" which is a normal display mode to "blue" or red in a blue display mode. It is configured to be changeable to "red" in the display mode of. This pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the selection ratio of the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is different when the "big hit display" occurs in the variable effect or when the "reach display" occurs. By changing the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol from the normal display mode (“white”) to another display mode (for example, “blue”), the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol becomes “ It is possible to suggest to the player for each display color the possibility that "reach display" or "big hit display" may occur.

Specifically, in the "holding change notice", the variation indicated by the holding symbol and the executing symbol when the holding symbol and the execution symbol are displayed in the "blue" mode rather than the normal display mode ("white"). In the production, the ratio of "reach display" and "big hit display" is set high. In addition, when the reserved symbol and the executed symbol have a display mode of "red" rather than "blue", the ratio of "reach display" or "big hit display" is higher in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol. Set.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "red", the mode of the effect mainly "super reach" in the variable effect indicated by the "red" reserved symbol or the executed symbol (mainly). The mode of production may be referred to as "directed mode") or "special reach" directed mode (hereinafter, "super reach" directed mode or "special reach" directed mode may be collectively referred to as "super reach or higher" directed mode. ) Is set to be confirmed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is the degree of expectation of appearance of "reach display" and "big hit display" in the order of normal ("white") → "blue" → "red". Is set to be high. The details of the "pending change notice" will be described later.

In addition, when the reserved symbol is shifted due to the execution (digestion) of the variation effect in the state where the displayed mode of the reserved symbol is changed by this "hold change notice", the display mode of the changed reserved symbol is shifted. It is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected in the previous reserved symbol or executed symbol. That is, when the display mode of the reserved symbol changes, even when the changed reserved symbol shifts to another reserved symbol display area Db1a to Db1d, Db2a to Db2d or the execution symbol display area Db0 with the execution of the variation effect. The display mode before the shift is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to "red" in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, the reserved symbol changes from the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c to the special figure 1 second reserved. When shifting from the symbol display area Db1b → special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a → execution symbol display area Db0, the “red” reserved symbol or execution symbol is configured to be continuously displayed. To.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variation effect based on the entry into the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is set. The number of balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. If the third symbol display device 81 does not display the information related to the number of reserved balls (reserved symbols, etc.), the "reserved change notice" by the reserved symbols cannot be executed, so other character symbols, etc. are additionally added. By making it appear, it may be configured to execute a look-ahead notice similar to the "pending change notice".

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, respectively, for the maximum number of holding lamps of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the holding balls are set according to the number of holding lamps in the lit state. It may display a number. When the number of reserved balls is displayed by the hold lamp, it is natural that the same look-ahead notice as the "hold change notice" of the first embodiment is executed by providing a plurality of types of display colors of the hold lamp. Is possible.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying a character and a preview effect image, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of a notice symbol is displayed, and the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm is in a state where it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual. Suggested to the player.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in the first embodiment) normally performs a predetermined operation, and the variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm. Based on this, a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, or the color of the headband, which is usually white, changes, or another character appears. Is done.

Further, in the sub display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a dialogue notice suggesting whether or not a big hit occurs in the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm, and a specific effect (for example, V prize described later) Various notice effects such as the remaining time of (chance effect, etc.) are displayed. The detailed contents will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main control device 110 performs a winning lottery for the normal symbol due to the turning on. It should be noted that the through gate 67 only serves as a lottery opportunity for the variable display of the normal symbol, and is configured so that the prize balls and the like are not paid out even when the balls pass.

An ordinary electric service 71a is arranged on the right side side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The ordinary electric service 71a is mainly composed of a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the rotating plate.

The main control device 110 of the first embodiment normally maintains the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 71a in an upright state and covers the right side portion of the second starting port 71 when viewed from the front, thereby covering the second starting port. The inflow of balls into 71 is prevented. Then, when the winning is won by the variable display of the normal symbol, the rotating solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 71a is in an upright state for a predetermined time. It is driven to the right side by a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees) to the open state (tilted state) so that the ball can flow into the second starting port 71, and the variable display device unit is played right-handed. The ball flowing down on the right side of the front view of the 80 is configured to be in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 71, that is, in a winning assisting state.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning in the variable display of the normal symbol changes according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability state (for example, 1/10), and it is difficult to win in the variable display of the normal symbol, so that the normal electric service 71a The rotating plate is made difficult to be in the open state (tilted state) so that it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 71. On the other hand, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state (for example, 9/10), and it is easy to win in the variable display of the normal symbol. The rotating plate of the winning combination 71a is easily opened (tilted) so that the second starting port 71 can be easily won.

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol from the "normal gaming state" as in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state", the number of times of the normal electric service 71a is changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The time for which the moving plate rotates and the number of times for the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 71a to rotate may be changed at one time. Specifically, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state", the time for the rotating plate of the normal electric service 71a to rotate is made longer than in the "normal game state", or the normal electric power is applied once. The number of times the rotating plate of the winning combination 71a rotates may be made larger than in the “normal gaming state”. Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortened state", the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the rotation time of the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 71a is lengthened, and the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 71a is extended. At least two of the number of rotations of the above may be increased at the same time.

The ordinary symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as display symbols (ordinary symbols) are alternately lit each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the first embodiment), the ordinary electric service 71a provided on the right side of the front view of the second starting port 71 Is in the operating state for a predetermined time, and when it is stopped at a symbol other than the predetermined symbol (the symbol of "x" in the first embodiment), the normal electric service 71a is in the non-operating state (the closed state is maintained). Has been done.

The number of reserved balls of the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the above-mentioned second symbol holding lamp 84 (hereinafter, regarding the second symbol holding lamp 84, for convenience of explanation, "ordinary symbol holding lamp 84". It is also lit and displayed. Four ordinary symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps 84, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the normal symbol hold lamp 84.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. It may be done by using a part of 81. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the passage of the through gate 67 may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may not be used for lighting display.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the first starting port 64, the first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on due to the turning on of the first starting port switch. At 110 (see FIG. 6), a lottery for the jackpot of the first special symbol is made. Then, the dynamic display according to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group 37b1 of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect based on the first special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81. Will be done. The first starting port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

On the right side side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view, a second starting port 71 is provided so that a ball can enter only when the normal electric service 71a is in the open state. When the ball enters the second starting port 71, the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on due to the turning on of the second starting port switch. At 110 (see FIG. 6), a lottery for the jackpot of the second special symbol is made. Then, the display according to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect based on the second special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81. .. The second starting port 71 is also one of the winning openings in which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters.

A horizontally long rectangular large winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion of the variable winning device 65 at the lower right side of the game board 13 in the front view. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot, and the third symbol display device 81 is provided with a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (for example, three sets of the same symbol ("777"). "Etc.)) is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot game. After that, depending on the jackpot type, the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65b provided in the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a provided in the V winning device 72 is opened, and the ball is opened in the big winning opening 65a. The gaming state shifts to a special gaming state (big hit game) in which a prize is easily won in the inside or in the V winning device 72. As this special game state, until the large winning opening 65a or the V winning device 72, which is normally closed, satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, in the case of the large winning opening 65a, "30 seconds" elapses, or a ball Is open until 10 pieces are won, until "5 seconds" elapses in the case of the V winning device 72, or until 10 balls are won.

When the large winning opening 65a is opened, it is closed when a predetermined time elapses from the opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, and after the closing, the large winning opening 65a is opened again. The opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 65a is configured to be repeatable up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state (big hit state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is allowed to win a ball in the big winning opening 65a in the game. As a value (game value), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

Further, the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round when the V winning device 72 wins a jackpot that can be opened, and is closed when a predetermined time elapses from the opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, and the V winning device 72 is closed. After that, the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened. The opening / closing operation of the V winning device 72 is configured to be open only once at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state (big hit state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is allowed to win a ball in the V winning device 72 in the game. As a value (game value), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65a, 71, 72 are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read-only memory (Read Only Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and controls stored in the ROM 202. Random access memory (Random Access Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing a program, and other interrupt circuits and timer circuits. Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display and the variation effect of each special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 includes a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a hold number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a fluctuation pattern table 202e, a random number table 202f per normal figure, a normal figure fluctuation time table 202g, and a normal electric service control table 202h. At least stores. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like perform a big hit lottery, a dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, a variable effect setting of the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a variable display display result on the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. Therefore, it is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 19.

For the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot symbol are used. The jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the fluctuation effect, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuation pattern selection. The variable type counter CS1 used for is used.

Further, the counter C4 per normal figure is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the counter C4 per normal figure.

Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0".

Each counter is updated, for example, at "4 ms" intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are irregular in the main process (see FIG. 36). Is updated to, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 includes a first holding ball storage area 203d composed of four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four holding areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e composed of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and each of these areas has a ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899") and reaches the maximum value (for example, "899" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). After reaching "0", it returns to "0". In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. Will be done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of "0 to 899". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start opening 64 (starting prize), the first hold first 1 to 2 provided in the first hold ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start port 64 (first special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first holding area of any of the fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 71 (starting winning), the second holding first 1 to 2 provided in the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second starting opening 71 (second special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any second holding area of the fourth area.

The value of the random number for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. That is, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the hold area of the first hold ball storage area 203d matches the value of the jackpot random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, it is judged as a big hit. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the holding area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e matches the value of the jackpot random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, it is judged as a big hit.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot random number table 202a is commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal gaming state" or the "time shortened state" (each special). The first symbol (for the low-probability state) used in the case of the low-probability state (the period that is not the "probability fluctuation state") and the first symbol (the first symbol) that has a higher probability that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be a big hit than the low-probability state It can be divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state (during probability change)" which is the high probability state of each special symbol). Then, the number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state of each special symbol is three, and the value "7,307,582". Is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of each special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time reduction state") is set to be 3/900 = 1/300.

On the other hand, the number of random value (big hit random value) that becomes a big hit in the high probability state of each special symbol is 9, and the value "28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750, 866 ”is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of each special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9/900 = 1/100.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are each jackpot random number value so as not to be duplicated. Is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value can be easily predicted from the outside, so that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, the jackpot is changed by changing the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take the value of "", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, a big hit is made among the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area as the first holding area where the random number counter C1 is stored. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71, a big hit among the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 71. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area as the second holding area where the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, unless the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number (big hit random number value) that is a jackpot. That is, if it is a random number that is lost (lost random number value), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the 1st reserved ball storage area 203d or the 2nd reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (big hit random number value) that becomes a jackpot, a variation effect is produced. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are the ones at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b includes a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. And are provided.

Here, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B. FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 9B is also stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure which shows typically an example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the jackpot type table 202b is provided according to the type of special symbol (that is, whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol), and the special symbol is provided. The jackpot type according to the type of is associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the jackpot types are "15 round V open jackpot", "7 round V open jackpot", "15 round V closed jackpot", and "7 round V". "Closed jackpot".

In the "15 round V open jackpot", since the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round, it is possible to make the V winning opening 74a win a ball at the opening timing, and after the jackpot ends, the "probability fluctuation state" Is a jackpot type that can occur.

Further, in the "7th round V open jackpot", as in the "15th round V open jackpot", the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round, so that the ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing. It is a jackpot type that is possible and a "probability fluctuation state" can occur after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, in the "15 round V closed jackpot", since the V winning device 72 is not opened and the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a, the jackpot type is always "time shortened" after the jackpot ends. is there.

Further, in the "7 round V closed jackpot", as in the "15 round V closed jackpot", the V winning device 72 is not opened and the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a, so that the ball must be won after the jackpot ends. It is a jackpot type that is in a "time reduction state".

In any of the jackpot types, when 10 balls are won against the open V winning device 72 or the variable winning device 65, the open V winning device 72 or the variable winning device 65 is closed (that is, that is). , The maximum number of winnings is 10). In addition, the opening time at the start of the jackpot is "10 seconds", the interval time of each round is "2 seconds", and the ending time at the end of the jackpot is "10 seconds (not shown)". ..

Further, in the "15 round V open jackpot" and the "7 round V open jackpot", the V winning device 72 opened in the first round has the maximum open time set to "5 seconds", so that the open time It is configured so that it is difficult to win 10 balls (details will be described later) that are fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds". Therefore, the V winning device 72 opened in the first round of the "15th round V opening jackpot" and the "7th round V opening jackpot" is closed based on the condition of the maximum number of winnings, rather than the maximum opening time (that is, that is). It is configured to be easily closed with the passage of "5 seconds"). By configuring the opening time of the V winning device 72 to be relatively short in this way, the V winning opening 74a that can give a "probability fluctuation state" is configured to be difficult to be illegally opened, and is not intended. It is possible to suppress the addition of game value.

In the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, possible values of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are associated with each jackpot type.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 of FIG. 9A, the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "15 rounds V open jackpot", and "7 rounds V open jackpot". The value of the jackpot type counter C2 "30 to 94" is associated with the jackpot type counter C2, and the value "95 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "7 round V closed jackpot".

In the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d becomes a jackpot. If it is a value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "15 rounds V open jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "50", the jackpot type is "7 rounds". If "V open jackpot" is determined and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "97", "7 round V closed jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

That is, when a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is the first lottery game, the jackpot type of "15 round V open jackpot" is 30%, and the jackpot type of "7 round V open jackpot" is 65. %, The jackpot type of "7 round V closed jackpot" is 5%, and you will win.

Further, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 of FIG. 9B, the value "0 to 94" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "15 rounds V open jackpot", and "15 rounds V closed". The value “95 to 99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the “big hit”. That is, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, the jackpot of 15 rounds is given.

In the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol in the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203e becomes a jackpot. If it is a value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same first holding area is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "17", "15 rounds V open jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "98", the jackpot type is "15 rounds". "V closing jackpot" is decided.

That is, when a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is the second lottery game, the jackpot type of "15 round V open jackpot" is 95%, and the jackpot type of "15 round V closed jackpot" is 5. You will be elected at the rate of%.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the selection ratio of "15 round V open jackpot", which has the highest game value in the first lottery game with the first special symbol, is 30%, while the selection ratio of the second special symbol is the second. In the 2 lottery games, the selection rate of "15 round V open jackpot" is 95%, so the lottery game with the 2nd special symbol has a higher game value for the player than the lottery game with the 1st special symbol. It has become. For this reason, the player first wins a big hit by winning a ball in the first starting port 64 which can win in the "normal game state", obtains the game value by the big hit, and executes it accompanying the big hit. How to receive a lot of lottery by the second special symbol in the possible "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", that is, how to enter the second starting port 71 rather than entering the first starting port 64 The gameplay is born, and variations are provided in the game to enhance the fun of the game.

The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", reach the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then return to "0".

In the first embodiment, the number of held fluctuation effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 determine the rough production mode of the fluctuation effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of jackpot and loss. Be selected. Specifically, a "non-reach (normal)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, a "non-reach (shortened)" production mode, and a unit element constituting the "normal reach" production as "reach display". A "normal reach (normal)" production mode and a "normal reach (shortened)" production mode in which only one unit element constituting the production is executed (hereinafter, a unit element constituting the production may be referred to as a "variable element"), and the "normal reach" Developed from the variable elements of "Super Reach" and "Super Reach (shortened)", and also developed from the variable elements of "Normal Reach". A "special reach (normal)" effect mode in which the variable element of the "special reach" is executed and a "special reach (shortened)" effect mode are selected.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, the "non-reach (normal)" production mode and the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode (hereinafter, the "non-reach (normal)" production mode and the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode are collectively referred to. (Sometimes referred to as "non-reach" effect mode ") means that each symbol sequence is used in the third symbol display device 81 in which three symbol rows (not shown) are varied as a special symbol variation effect. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the second symbol sequence that stops first after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" that shuffles at high speed is performed, and "reach display" does not occur.

The fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is, for example, in the fluctuation production of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol displayed in each symbol row scrolls at high speed downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. It refers to the variable element that is being used. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the fluctuation effect displayed last time is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is performed except for a specific effect mode ("non-reach (shortened)" effect mode). It is configured to be used.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element means that in the third symbol fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, after the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, the third symbol is slowed down at a speed visible to the player. A variable element that scrolls to. In the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation", each symbol sequence is stopped and displayed in order while making the player recognize the display content of the third symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the 2 symbol rows (for example, the left symbol row and the right symbol row) that are stopped and displayed first, it is assumed that "reach display" has occurred and it develops into a variable element of "normal reach". When a different third symbol is stopped in the second symbol string to be stopped and displayed first, the remaining symbol string is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is ended.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, then the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol sequence is stopped in order and stopped first. A different third symbol stops in the two symbol rows, the remaining one symbol row stops, and the variation effect of 1 ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is not performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the end of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, each symbol sequence is simultaneously displayed. A different third symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol row (for example, the second symbol row that is stopped first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode), and the other symbol rows are also stopped and displayed. The variation effect of 1 ends. The details of each variable element will be described later.

Among the production modes, the "normal reach (normal)" production mode and the "normal reach (shortened)" production mode (hereinafter, the "normal reach (normal)" production mode and the "normal reach (shortened)" production mode are collectively referred to as "normal reach (shortened)" production mode. (Sometimes referred to as "normal reach" effect mode ") means that in the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81, immediately after the same third symbol is stopped in the second symbol sequence to be stopped and displayed first. It is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed and does not develop into other "reach display", that is, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". In addition, in this "normal reach (normal)" effect mode and "normal reach (shortened)" effect mode, the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" to be executed is either the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (normal)" or "high speed fluctuation". (Abbreviated) ”is different, and all the remaining variables are common.

Among the production modes, the "super reach (normal)" production mode and the "super reach (shortened)" production mode (hereinafter, the "super reach (normal)" production mode and the "super reach (shortening)" production mode are collectively referred to. Then, it may be referred to as "" super reach "directing mode"), which is one of the "reach display" directing modes in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach". It is one. In addition, in this "super reach (normal)" production mode and "super reach (shortening)" production mode, the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" to be executed is the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (normal)" or " Only the variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (shortening)" are different, and all the remaining variable elements are common.

Among the production modes, the "special reach (normal)" production mode and the "special reach (shortened)" production mode (hereinafter, the "special reach (normal)" production mode and the "special reach (shortening)" production mode are collectively referred to. Then, it may be referred to as "super reach" production mode), which is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which the fluctuation element of "special reach" is executed by developing from the fluctuation element of "normal reach". Is. In addition, in this "special reach (normal)" production mode and "special reach (shortening)" production mode, the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" to be executed is the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation (normal)" or " Only the variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (shortening)" are different, and all the remaining variable elements are common.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is the first hold provided in the first hold ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start port 64. Of the first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first holding area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second start port 71, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is the second hold provided in the second hold ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second start port 71. Of the first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second holding area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, depending on the success or failure (big hit or loss) in the variable effect, the current game state, and the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols currently pending. The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected according to the number of fluctuation effects (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols on standby.

In the first embodiment, when determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the hold number table 202c (see FIG. 10) provided in the ROM 202, whether or not the variation effect is appropriate and the current gaming state are determined. , Any stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the current number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode that is a rough mode of the variation effect is selected. After that, a detailed fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected for each stop pattern table 202d is different. A plurality of the stop pattern tables 202d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variation effect according to the suitability of the variation effect, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "normal gaming state". This is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed according to whether or not there is (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable effect.

This is because the first reason is to change the degree of expectation of a big hit for each production mode. That is, depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or lost, the stop pattern, that is, the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode. By configuring the mode so that the selection ratio is different, the degree of expectation of a big hit is changed for each production mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode are easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" production is performed. It is configured so that the mode and the "normal reach" production mode can be easily selected.

With this configuration, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode can be easily hit, and the "normal reach" production mode and the "non-reach" production mode are difficult to hit. It can be a production or a production without a big hit, and the degree of expectation of a big hit can be differentiated for each production mode. Therefore, when a production that is easy to hit a big hit appears in a variable production, it is suggested to the player that a big hit is likely to occur while the production that is easy to hit is being performed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, specifically, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to win a big hit, and it is difficult to select an effect that is hard to hit a big hit. (That is, the effect mode (stop pattern), which is a rough content of the variation effect, is selected based on the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14)). On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is lost, it is difficult to select an effect that is easy to hit big, and it is easy to select an effect that is hard to hit big. Stop pattern table 202d (that is, variable pattern table 202e1 for loss (see FIG. 13). ))) Is configured to select the effect mode (stop pattern) of the variable effect. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a big hit is likely to occur in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. If this is the case, it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the jackpot for each effect mode (stop pattern), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

The second reason is that the number of times of waiting for the first special symbol variation effect has reached the upper limit, and the number of times of entering the first starting port 64 or waiting for the second special symbol variation effect is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible waste balls (so-called no lottery of special symbols due to overflow prizes) based on the entry of balls into the second starting port 71 in the state of reaching.

Specifically, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and the variation effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. In the gaming state in which the ball easily enters the second starting port 71 in the "variable state" and the "time shortened state", the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is easily reached. In these gaming states, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected, balls entering the second start port 71 frequently occur when the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached, and the second start port is bent. Despite entering 71, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", if a variation effect having a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol is reserved during the execution of the variation effect. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is put into the first starting port 64, and the player is awakened to the game, and the variable effect is digested. The game is interrupted by stopping the firing of balls until the number of reserved balls can be obtained again.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is easily reached, or the game state is close to (or matches) the maximum number of reserved balls. The number of reserved balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variation time is easily selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of balls into the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. it can.

Further, as a third reason, when the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is small, the variation effect can be achieved by setting a long execution time of the variation effect and delaying the end of the variation effect. This is to keep it running for a long time. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is small (not present), a ball is newly inserted into either the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 within the fluctuation time of the variable effect being executed. If the ball is not made, the next variation effect cannot be started, and the demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 even though the ball is fired and the game is played, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. Instead, I get excited about the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 because the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will stop playing on the pachinko machine 10 because it is determined that it is difficult to obtain the game value.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variation time is easily selected when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81, and to maintain the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 for a long time.

Here, the details of the hold number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the hold number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect is performed based on the ball entering the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, whether the variation effect is correct or not is determined. Refer to the holding number table 202c based on the gaming state at that time and the total number of holdings of the variation effects of special figures 1 and 2 at that time, and select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4. It is configured in. Then, a rough effect mode of the variation effect is determined based on any one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c of FIG. 10, the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "1 to 3" at the time of extracting the loss in the "normal game state". , Or when the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "1" at the time of extracting the loss of the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the stop pattern A table 202d1 of table 202d (see FIG. 11A) is selected.

In addition, when the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 to 8" at the time of extracting the loss in the "normal game state", or in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction". When the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "2 to 8" at the time of extracting the loss of "state", the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 11 (b)). See) is selected.

On the other hand, in the "normal game state", when all the jackpots are won (that is, "15 round V open jackpot", "7 round V open jackpot", "15 round V closed jackpot" and "7 round V closed jackpot" At the time of extraction. The same shall apply hereinafter.) When the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "1 to 3", or in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state". , When all the jackpots are won and the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "1", C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 12A). Is selected.

In addition, in the "normal game state", when all the jackpots are won and the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 to 8", or "probability fluctuation state". Or "time reduction state", when all the jackpots are won and the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "2 to 8", the stop pattern table 202d D table 202d4 (see FIG. 12B) is selected.

That is, regardless of whether the jackpot is won or not (that is, when the jackpot is lost), one of the stop pattern tables 202d (A table 202d1, A table 202d1,) is based on the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time. B table 202d2, C table 202d3 or D table 202d4) is selected.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected at the time of loss, and FIG. 11A is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d. (B) is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. Further, FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing a stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 12A is a diagram schematically showing an example of C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. 12 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 11A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (normal)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach (normal)" effect mode. Is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (normal)" effect mode is set to "98" and "99".

In addition, in A table 202d1, "non-reach (shortening)" production mode, "normal reach (shortening)" production mode, "super reach (shortening)" production mode and "special reach (shortening)" production mode (hereinafter, "non-reach (shortening)" production mode The "reach (shortened)" production mode, the "normal reach (shortening)" production mode, the "super reach (shortening)" production mode, and the "special reach (shortening)" production mode may be collectively referred to as the "shortened production mode". The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to (there is), and it is set so that none of the shortened effect modes is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (shortened)" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the stop pattern selection counter corresponding to the "super reach (shortened)" effect mode is set to. The range of C3 is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (shortening)" effect mode is set to "98,99".

In the B table 202d2, a "non-reach (normal)" production mode, a "normal reach (normal)" production mode, a "super reach (normal)" production mode, and a "special reach (normal)" production mode (hereinafter, "non-reach)" production mode. The "reach (normal)" production mode, the "normal reach (normal)" production mode, the "super reach (normal)" production mode, and the "special reach (normal)" production mode may be collectively referred to as the "normal production mode". The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to (there is), and it is set so that none of the normal effect modes is selected.

That is, in the A table 202d1, 75% of the "non-reach (normal)" production mode, 20% of the "normal reach (normal)" production mode, 3% of the "super reach (normal)" production mode, and "special reach (normal)" production mode. ) ”The effect mode is set to be a selection ratio of 2%. Further, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach (shortening)" production mode is 20%, the "super reach (shortening)" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach (shortening)" production mode. ) ”The effect mode is set to be a selection ratio of 2%.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode. It is configured as follows. Further, in the A table 202d1, the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "normal reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode. Has been done. Further, in the A table 202d1, the "super reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "super reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "super reach (normal)" effect mode. It is configured as follows. Further, in the A table 202d1, the "special reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "special reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "special reach (normal)" effect mode. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, since the normal effect mode in the predetermined effect mode is selected for the A table 202d1 and the shortened effect mode in the predetermined effect mode is selected for the B table 202d2, the A table 202d1 is selected as compared with the B table 202d2. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation production to be performed tends to be relatively long. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202d1.

In this way, when the lottery result of the loss is extracted, the effect mode of the variation effect is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the variation effect on hold. For example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened and the number of times the variable effect is executed is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be improved.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is small, in order to secure the ball entry time into the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is used. Select a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode with a long variable effect time. As a result, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, which has a longer variation effect time than when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, can be performed, so that the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 can be performed. The situation in which the variation effect is executed by making it easier to secure the ball entry time to the ball and increasing the possibility that a new start winning prize will occur during the execution time of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. Can be maintained.

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is different in the selection mode in the variation effect of the loss, but the first start port 64 Alternatively, substantially the same effect mode is selected by determining the variation effect based on the ball entering the second starting port 71 and determining the variation effect based on the start of the variation effect based on the entry. It is configured in.

Specifically, in the case of a variable effect of loss, either A table 202d1 or B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, but A table 202d1 And B table 202d2, "non-reach (normal)" production mode or "non-reach (shortened)" production mode, "normal reach (normal)" production mode or "normal reach (shortening)" production mode, "super reach (normal)" The values of the stop pattern counters C3 assigned to the ")" effect mode or "super reach (shortened)" effect mode, or the "special reach (normal)" effect mode or "special reach (shortened)" effect mode are the same. It is set.

That is, based on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect, only the normal effect mode or the shortened effect mode is selected in each effect mode, and the time of the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" is different. Then, substantially the same production mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same (same type) even when the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). The production mode of is selected. As a result, even when a pre-reading notice such as "pending change notice" is given based on the production mode selected at the time of starting prize, the contents of the variable production to be executed are substantially the same (same type), and the pre-reading is performed. In the variable effect that is the target of the advance notice, it is possible to execute an effect that does not cause a discrepancy with the content of the look-ahead notice.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12A, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach (normal)” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The stop pattern selection counter C3 that is set and corresponds to the "super reach (normal)" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the stop pattern selection counter that corresponds to the "special reach (normal)" effect mode. The range of C3 is set to "40" to "99".

Since the C table 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit and the "reach display" always occurs, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected. Further, in the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to each shortened effect mode, and none of the shortened effect modes is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12B, in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach (shortening)” effect is set to “0” to “4”. Stop pattern selection counter that is set and corresponds to the "super reach (shortened)" effect mode The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is set to "5" to "39", and the stop pattern selection counter corresponding to the "special reach (shortened)" effect mode The range of C3 is set to "40" to "99".

Note that the D table 202d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit like the C table 202d3, and the "reach display" always occurs, so that the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected. Further, in the D table 202d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to each normal effect mode, and it is set so that none of the normal effect modes is selected.

Therefore, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is 5% for the "normal reach (normal)" production mode, 35% for the "super reach (normal)" production mode, and 60% for the "special reach (normal)" production mode. Is set to. Further, in the D table 202d4, the selection ratio is 5% for the "normal reach (shortened)" production mode, 35% for the "super reach (shortening)" production mode, and 60% for the "special reach (shortening)" production mode. Is set to.

Therefore, since the normal effect mode is selected for the C table 202d3 and the shortened effect mode is selected for the D table 202d4, the variation time of the variable effect selected for the C table 202d3 is relatively longer than that of the D table 202d4. It can be said that it is easy to become. In other words, it can be said that the D table 202d4 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the C table 202d3.

In this way, even when the lottery result of the jackpot is extracted, as in the case where the lottery result of the loss is extracted, the effect mode of the variation effect is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the pending variation effect. Constitute. For example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the “special reach (shortened)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened and the number of times the variable effect is executed is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be improved.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is small, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, the "special reach (shortening)" effect mode is used. Select a "special reach (normal)" production mode with a long variable production time. As a result, it is possible to perform a normal effect mode in which the variation effect time is longer than when the shortened effect mode is selected, so that it becomes easy to secure the ball entry time into the first start port 64 or the second start port 71. By increasing the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the situation in which the variation effect is being executed can be maintained.

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is different even in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of the jackpot, as in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of the loss. However, the determination of the variation effect based on the ball entering the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 and the determination of the variation effect based on the start of the variation effect based on the ball entry. , It is configured so that substantially the same production mode is selected.

Specifically, in the case of the jackpot variable effect, either the C table 202d3 or the D table 202d4 is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, but the C table 202d3 And D table 202d4, "normal reach (normal)" production mode or "normal reach (shortened)" production mode, "super reach (normal)" production mode or "super reach (shortening)" production mode, or "special reach" The values of the stop pattern counters C3 assigned to the "(normal)" effect mode or the "special reach (shortened)" effect mode are set to be the same.

That is, based on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect, only the normal effect mode or the shortened effect mode is selected in each effect mode, and the time of the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" is different. Then, substantially the same (same type) production mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same (same type) even when the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). The production mode of is selected. As a result, even if a look-ahead notice such as "hold change notice" is given based on the effect mode selected at the time of starting prize, the contents of the variable effect to be executed are substantially the same, and the target of the look-ahead notice is In the variable effect that has become, it is possible to execute an effect that does not cause a discrepancy with the content of the pre-reading notice.

From the above, in the variable production at the time of jackpot winning, the selection ratio is high in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode, and in the variable production at the time of loss, the "normal reach" production mode The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of> "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, it is highly possible that the jackpot display results will appear in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode for the jackpot expectation when each "reach display" appears. It is configured to be. As a result, the player can be shown the degree of expectation for the jackpot depending on the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy the uplifting feeling of the big hit according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed by the player.

Further, by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect at that time, the game is performed. Based on this, by shortening the execution time of the variable effect and increasing the number of times the variable effect is executed, it is possible to select an effect mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

When the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is large, the stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the variation element of "low speed variation" is omitted in each effect mode. Further, the stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the selection rate of each effect mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the execution of the pre-reading notice and the number of reserved balls in the pre-reading notice such as "hold change notice" The number of reserved balls at the time of executing the variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead notice may differ. In such a case, it is necessary to maintain the consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the drive cycle of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c that opens and closes the V winning opening 74a (see FIG. 4) is set to "20 seconds". Specifically, the on / off of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is switched every "10 seconds", and the distribution plate 73a driven by the V distribution drive solenoid 73c causes the left path 74 having the V winning opening 74a. A state in which (see FIG. 4) is opened to close the right side route 75 (see FIG. 4) (see FIG. 4C), and a state in which the left side route 74 is closed and the right side route 75 is opened (FIG. 4 (b). ) And) are configured to alternate. Therefore, depending on whether the variation effect to be executed is performed in the normal variation mode or the shortened variation mode performed in a time shorter than the normal variation mode by "10 seconds", the V prize device is based on the variation result of the variation effect. When the 72 is opened, whether or not the ball flows into the V winning opening 74a is changed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 has a configuration in which, for example, "1" is added in order within the range of "0 to 99", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"), it returns to "0". The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) described later, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 36). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first start port 64. Of the first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 71. Of the second reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved area.

This fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is detailed by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the finer symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1. It is decided, and whether or not the notice effect is executed and the execution mode of the notice effect (for example, mini character notice, cut-in notice, etc.) are decided.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to control the detailed advance notice lottery or the like necessary for executing the variation effect in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation effect can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare the command of the total variation pattern of the variation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the variation effect is performed by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110. You can increase the degree of freedom in choosing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 whose game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. In this pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern table 202e, the variation pattern table 202e1 for loss, which is commonly used in all gaming states when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, and the first special symbol and A variable pattern table 202e2 for jackpots, which is commonly used in all gaming states at the time of jackpots of the second special symbol, is prepared.

FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e1 for loss stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e2 for jackpots stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, each variation pattern table 202e1 and 202e2 are grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode at the time of loss, the "E0: non-reach (shortening)" production and the "non-reach (normal)" production, which are referred to when the "non-reach (shortening)" production mode is determined, "E1: Non-reach (normal)" referred to when the mode is determined, and "E2: Normal reach (normal)" referred to when the "normal reach (normal)" production mode is determined. "E3: For Super Reach (Normal)", which is referred to when the "Super Reach (Normal)" production mode is determined, and "E4", which is referred to when the "Special Reach (Normal)" production mode is determined. : For "Special Reach (Normal)" and for "E5: Normal Reach (Shortened)", which is referred to when the "Normal Reach (Shortened)" production mode is determined, and for "Super Reach (Shortened)" production mode is determined. It is divided into "E6: Super Reach (shortened)" which is referred to in the case of "E7: Special Reach (shortened)" and "E7: Special Reach (shortened)" which is referred to when the production mode of "Special Reach (shortened)" is decided. (See FIG. 13).

In addition, as the production mode at the time of a big hit, the "E8: normal reach (normal)" production mode and the "super reach (normal)" production mode, which are referred to when the "normal reach (normal)" production mode is determined, have been determined. For "E9: Super Reach (Normal)" referred to in the case, for "EA: Special Reach (Normal)" referred to when the "Special Reach (Normal)" production mode is determined, and "Normal Reach (Normal)" "EB: Normal reach (shortening)" that is referred to when the "shortened" effect mode is determined, and "EC: Super reach (shortened)" that is referred to when the "super reach (shortened)" effect mode is determined. ) ”And“ ED: Special reach (shortened) ”which is referred to when the“ special reach (shortened) ”production mode is determined (see FIG. 14).

Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value), that is, If the value is a loss, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls held at that time with reference to the hold number table 202c, and the same hold area is used. The effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, the fluctuation pattern (variation time. Hereinafter, the "variation pattern" is referred to as "variation time"" associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area. It is of course possible to replace it), but it is determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect held in the holding area.

In the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, "E0: non-reach (shortened)" includes "high-speed fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation (" high-speed fluctuation ()) in which the total fluctuation time is "3 seconds". One variation pattern of "short)" "variable elements only" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (shortened)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is only the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” (FIGS. 13 and 14). In the above, the description of "variable element" is omitted) "is set to" 0 to 99 ", and only" only the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" "is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in any of the game states, the variation type counter. "Only the variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" are associated with all the values ("0 to 99") that CS1 can take. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "only the variation element of" high-speed variation (short) "is always selected as the variation pattern".

Here, with reference to FIG. 15, each fluctuation element constituting the fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the effect time for each variable element of the variable effect. As described above, the variable element is a unit element that constitutes each effect executed in the variable effect, and one variable effect is formed by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the fluctuation elements, the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" (hereinafter, the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" and " The variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" may be collectively abbreviated as "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation "), the variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation ", the variable elements of" pseudo-ream ", and" The variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" and the variable element of "re-variation" are provided.

The "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element and the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element are fluctuations that scroll at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol, as described above. It is an element. The variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" is performed for "13 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation effect when the normal effect mode is selected, and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" has the shortened effect mode. When selected, it is performed for "3 seconds" at the beginning of the variation effect (see FIG. 15). When the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" or the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" ends, the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" described later is started (executed) or "executed" described later. The variable element of the "pseudo-ream" is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as it is.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is visually recognized by the player after the above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5A) of the third symbol display device 81. A variable element that scrolls the third symbol at a low speed at a possible speed. The variable element of this "low speed fluctuation" is performed for "2 seconds" after the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" except for the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode (see FIG. 15).

In the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation", the third symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 5 (a)) while causing the player to recognize the display content of the third symbol. Stop and display the design. When the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it develops into a variable element of "normal reach" as "reach display" occurs, while the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 When a different third symbol is stopped (excluding the chance symbol symbol described later), the middle symbol sequence Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is terminated (in the "pseudo-ream" described later). Except when developing). In the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation", the time when the "reach display" is established and the middle symbol string Z2 fluctuates by several frames and the time when the middle symbol string Z2 is stopped without the "reach display" being established. Is configured to be at the same time.

Therefore, in the production mode other than the "non-reach (shortening)" production mode, the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" is after the fluctuation element of the "high speed fluctuation (long)" is performed for "13 seconds" or "high speed". After the variable element of "variation (short)" is performed for "3 seconds", it is performed for "2 seconds". Then, in the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation", each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 5 (a)) is stopped in order, and the "loss display", the "reach display", or the "chance eye symbol" described later is displayed. Appearing, the variable element of the "slow fluctuation" ends.

When the "loss display" is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation", the fluctuation effect ends and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 5B) of the cockpit display area Db. The execution symbol is deleted.

The "pseudo-ream" variable element is a variable element that executes the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element again when a predetermined stop mark is temporarily displayed in the above-mentioned "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. Say. That is, in the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation", when the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, the third symbol having a number "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed (for example, the left symbol). The third symbol of "7" in the column Z1 and "8" in the right symbol column Z3 is stopped and displayed), and then the same as the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 when the middle symbol column Z2 is stopped. When the third symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, the third symbol of "7" in the left symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 and "8" in the right symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed (that is, the stop stitch "778"). Applicable. Hereinafter, the combination is referred to as a "chance pattern"), the variable element of the "pseudo-ream" is executed, and the execution symbol (pending symbol) displayed in the cockpit display area Db is not digested. , The variable production will continue.

The variable element of this "pseudo-ream" is performed for "5 seconds" after the variable element of "slow fluctuation". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable element of the "pseudo-ream" is executed, the symbols that always generate the "reach display" (for example, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed). A situation in which the three symbols are the same and the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is continued. Hereinafter, "reach forming symbol") is displayed so as to develop into a variable element of "normal reach" described later. It is configured. In addition, in the variable element of this "pseudo-ream", the "reach forming symbol" may not be displayed, and the "missing display" may be displayed to end the variable effect.

Therefore, before the variable element of this "pseudo-ream" is executed, the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is again displayed from the chance symbol by stopping and displaying the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation". Once started, the effect is executed as if the variable effect had been started once again.

In the first embodiment, a maximum of one "pseudo-ream" effect can be executed in the variable effect. In addition, in 1 variation effect, the variation element of "pseudo-ream" may be executed a plurality of times.

The variable element of "normal reach" is "in the variable element of" low speed fluctuation "or the variable element of" pseudo-ream ", the two symbol rows (that is, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3) that stop first are" It is a variable element that is performed when the "reach forming symbol" is stopped and displayed, and indicates whether or not a jackpot occurs depending on the variation result of the remaining symbol sequence (that is, the middle symbol sequence Z2). This "normal reach" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the "low speed variation" variable element or the "pseudo-ream" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, the pattern of directly displaying "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying "big hit display", and the pattern of "super reach" There are a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "special reach", and a pattern that once makes a temporary "loss display" appear and then executes the variable element of "re-variation". Has been done.

The variable element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol sequence is continued, and in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a predetermined effect (for example, "competitive effect"). This "super reach" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern in which the "loss display" is directly displayed and a pattern in which the "big hit display" is directly displayed are temporarily provided. A pattern is prepared in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "loss display" is displayed.

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol sequence is continued, and the variable element of the third symbol display device 81 It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a special effect (for example, "battle effect") different from the above predetermined effect. This "special reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays the "loss display" and a pattern that directly displays the "big hit display" are temporarily provided. There is a pattern that "re-variates" after the "loss display" appears.

It is configured to develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element, but instead of this configuration, reach formation after the "low speed fluctuation". When the symbol stops, it may be configured so as to suddenly develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without going through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "loss display" appears once in any of the "reach display", and the "big hit display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern in which the “big hit display” appears after the execution of the fluctuation element of the “re-variation” is prepared.

Further, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of "loss display", the variable element of "re-variation" is not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily stopped "loss display" to one of the "big hit displays", so in the case of "loss display" that has not won the jackpot. If you go to, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the fluctuation element of this "re-variation" is configured so as to be selected only in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14) and not in the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 13).

Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. In the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, "E1: non-reach (normal)" includes "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" with a total fluctuation time of "15 seconds". One of the fluctuation patterns (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace the "fluctuation pattern" with the "fluctuation time").

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach (normal)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 99" for "element", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed in any of the game states, the variation type counter. A "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ a variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is associated with all possible values ("0 to 99") of CS1. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode in the variation effect of each special symbol, "the variation element of" high speed variation (long) "+ the variation element of" low speed variation "" is always selected as the variation pattern. ..

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, in "E2: normal reach (normal)", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "25 seconds" + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "and" 30 seconds "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "variation element +" Low-speed fluctuation "variation element +" Pseudo-ream "variation element +" Normal reach " Two fluctuation patterns with "variation element" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach (normal)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0-29" for "normal reach" fluctuation element, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation It is "30 to 99" for "element".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode, is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed fluctuation (long) ". ) ”Variable element +“ Low speed fluctuation ”variable element +“ Normal reach ”variable element” fluctuation pattern is 30%, “High speed fluctuation (long)” variable element + “Low speed fluctuation” variable element + “Pseudo” The fluctuation pattern of "ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 70%.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, in "E3: Super Reach (normal)", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "35 seconds" Element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Two fluctuation patterns of "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element "are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Has been done.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super Reach (normal)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". "0-49" for "element +" normal reach "variable element +" super reach "variable element", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "pseudo-ream" The variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach" is "50 to 99".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode, is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed variation ( "Long)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Super reach" fluctuation factor 50%, "High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + " The fluctuation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 50%.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, in "E4: Special reach (normal)", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "45 seconds" Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Two fluctuation patterns of "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element "are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Has been done.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: special reach (normal)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". "0-79" for "element +" normal reach "variable element +" special reach "variable element", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "pseudo-ream" The variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "special reach" is "80 to 99".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode, is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed variation ( "Long)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Special reach" fluctuation factor 80%, "High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + " The fluctuation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 20%.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, in "E5: normal reach (shortened)", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "15 seconds" + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "and" High-speed fluctuation (short) "variation element with total fluctuation time of" 20 seconds "+" Low-speed fluctuation "variation element +" Pseudo-ream "variation element +" Normal reach " Two fluctuation patterns with "variation element" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach (shortened)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0-29" for "normal reach" fluctuation element, "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation It is "30 to 99" for "element".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode, which is the shortened effect mode, is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed fluctuation (short) ". ) ”Variable element +“ Low speed fluctuation ”variable element +“ Normal reach ”variable element” fluctuation pattern is 30%, “High speed fluctuation (short)” variable element + “Low speed fluctuation” variable element + “Pseudo The fluctuation pattern of "ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, the normal production mode "E2: normal reach (normal)" and the shortened production mode "E5: normal reach (shortening)" are variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation". The execution time of other variable elements and the lottery rate of the presence or absence of the variable element of "pseudo-ream" are also the same. Therefore, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the variation effect which is the "normal reach" effect mode is based on the number of reserved balls of the variation effect at the start of the variation effect which is the "normal reach" effect mode. Whether or not the fluctuation time is shortened by "10 seconds" (hereinafter, the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect according to the number of reserved balls may be referred to as a "variation shortening function") is determined.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, in "E6: Super reach (shortened)", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "25 seconds" Element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Two fluctuation patterns of "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element "are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Has been done.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: super reach (shortened)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element "for" 0-49 "," high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" pseudo-ream " The variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach" is "50 to 99".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode, which is the shortened effect mode, is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed variation ( "Short)" fluctuation factor + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Super reach" fluctuation factor 50%, "High speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + " The fluctuation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 50%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss, the normal production mode "E3: super reach (normal)" and the shortened production mode "E6: super reach (shortening)" are "high-speed fluctuations". Only the execution time of the variable element of is different, and the execution time of other variable elements and the lottery ratio of the presence or absence of the variable element of "pseudo-ream" are also configured to be the same. Therefore, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the "super reach" effect mode is based on the number of reserved balls of the variation effect at the start of the variation effect, which is the "super reach" effect mode. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation effect is shortened by "10 seconds".

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, in "E7: Special reach (shortened)", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "35 seconds" Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Two fluctuation patterns of "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element "are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Has been done.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: special reach (shortened)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". "0-79" for "element +" normal reach "variable element +" special reach "variable element", "high-speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "pseudo-ream" The variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "special reach" is "80 to 99".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode, which is the shortened effect mode, is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed variation ( "Short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element "variation pattern is 80%," high speed fluctuation (short) "variation element +" The fluctuation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 20%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, the normal production mode "E4: special reach (normal)" and the shortened production mode "E7: special reach (shortening)" are "high-speed fluctuations". Only the execution time of the variable element of is different, and the execution time of other variable elements and the lottery ratio of the presence or absence of the variable element of "pseudo-ream" are also configured to be the same. Therefore, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the "special reach" effect mode is based on the number of reserved balls of the variation effect at the start of the variation effect, which is the "special reach" effect mode. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation effect is shortened by "10 seconds".

In this way, when each effect mode is selected as the variation pattern of the "reach display" at the time of loss, the time of the variation element of the "high-speed variation" is "10 seconds" in each of the normal effect mode and the shortened effect mode. It is configured so that the lottery ratios of other variable factors and fluctuation patterns are the same. Therefore, regardless of the "reach display", the variation time of the variation effect that can be executed is "10 seconds" depending on the number of reserved balls of the variation effect at the start of the variation effect in which the "reach display" is executed. It is possible to change only.

When the "non-reach" effect mode is selected as the variation pattern at the time of loss, the effect mode is determined as the variation pattern as it is, so that the variation pattern is determined without using the variation type counter CS1. It may be configured. Further, although the selection is made using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination for selection (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to at the time of jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a jackpot, or in the second special symbol. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the corresponding second holding ball storage area 203e is a value that becomes a jackpot, the game state at that time and the game state at that time are referred to with reference to the holding number table 202c. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of reserved balls at that time, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is used in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area. Determined as a variation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, the number of reserved balls at the time of jackpot and the fluctuation shortening function does not operate ("1 to 3" in "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" is " In the case of "1 piece". The same shall apply hereinafter), the normal effect mode "E8: normal reach (normal)" has a total fluctuation time of "25 seconds" and "high-speed fluctuation (long)". Fluctuation element + Fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + Fluctuation factor of "normal reach" and fluctuation factor of "high speed fluctuation (long)" of total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" + fluctuation factor of "low speed fluctuation" + "Pseudo-ream" variable element + "normal reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "with an overall fluctuation time of" 35 seconds " Fluctuation element of "Revariation" + Fluctuation element of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + Fluctuation element of "Low speed fluctuation" + Fluctuation of "Pseudo-ream" with total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" Four fluctuation patterns of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: normal reach (normal)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0-4" for "normal reach" fluctuation element, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation "5-14" for "elements", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element " 15-34 "," High-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" Low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Pseudo-ream "variable element +" Normal reach "variable element +" Re-variable "variable element" It is "35-99".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode, is selected in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed fluctuation (long) ". ) ”Variable element +“ Low speed fluctuation ”variable element +“ Normal reach ”variable element” fluctuation pattern is 5%, “High speed fluctuation (long)” variable element + “Low speed fluctuation” variable element + “Pseudo” The fluctuation pattern of "ream" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor is 10%, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "re-variation" 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "" fluctuation element "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variation factor +" low-speed fluctuation "variation factor +" pseudo-ream "variation factor +" normal reach "variation factor +" re-variation The fluctuation pattern of "variation factor" is set to be selected at a ratio of 65%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode, which is the normal effect mode selected at the time of a big hit, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" Fluctuation elements of "variable elements of" + "variable elements of" re-variation "" are easy to select (65% of the total). In addition, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Pseudo-ream" variable element + "normal reach" variable element "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" re-variable "variable element ], Each variation pattern can be selected so that a jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the overall variation is set in "E9: Super Reach (normal)", which is a normal effect mode selected when the jackpot is hit and the number of reserved balls does not activate the variation shortening function. The total fluctuation time is "35 seconds", "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor. "40 seconds" "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element, and the whole Fluctuation time of "45 seconds" "High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Super reach" fluctuation factor + "Re-variation" fluctuation "Element" and "High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element with total fluctuation time of "50 seconds" + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + " Four fluctuation patterns of "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E9: Super Reach (normal)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". "0-9" for "element +" normal reach "variable element +" super reach "variable element", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "pseudo-ream" Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach" vs. "10-29", variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" "Variable element of" + "Super reach" variable element + "30-59" for "Re-variable" variable element, "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low-speed fluctuation" variable element + It is "60 to 99" for "pseudo-ream" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element + "re-variable" variable element ".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode, is selected in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed variation ( "Long)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Super reach" fluctuation factor "variation pattern is 10%," High speed fluctuation (long) "variation factor +" 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "low speed fluctuation" + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + " Fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "super reach" + fluctuation factor of "re-fluctuation" 30%, fluctuation factor of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "variation factor of" high speed fluctuation (long) " The fluctuation pattern of "low speed fluctuation" + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation factor "is selected at a ratio of 40%. Is set to.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode, which is the normal production mode selected at the time of a big hit, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" + "variable element of" super reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is easily selected (40% of the total). In addition, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variation factor + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Pseudo-ream" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Super reach" fluctuation factor "," High-speed fluctuation (long) "variation factor +" Low-speed fluctuation "variation By configuring each variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" super reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" to be selected, a jackpot can be obtained from any variation pattern. It is possible to provide the expected playability.

Next, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the overall variation is set to "EA: Special Reach (normal)", which is a normal effect mode selected when the jackpot is hit and the number of reserved balls does not activate the variation shortening function. The total fluctuation time is "45 seconds", "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor. "50 seconds" "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element, and the whole Fluctuation time of "55 seconds" "High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Special reach" fluctuation factor + "Re-variation" fluctuation "Elements" and "60 seconds" of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + " Four fluctuation patterns of "special reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "EA: special reach (normal)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element "0 to 19", "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach" vs. "20-39", variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" "Variable element of" + "Special reach" variable element + "Re-variable" variable element "for" 40-69 "," High-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" Low-speed fluctuation "variable element + It is "70 to 99" for "pseudo-ream" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element + "re-variable" variable element ".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode, is selected in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed variation ( "Long)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Special reach" fluctuation factor 20%, "High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + " 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "low speed fluctuation" + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + " Fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "special reach" + fluctuation factor of "re-fluctuation" 30%, fluctuation factor of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "variation factor of" high speed fluctuation (long) " The fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream" + the fluctuation element of "normal reach" the fluctuation element of "special reach" + the fluctuation element of "re-variation" is selected at a ratio of 30% Is set to.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode, which is the normal production mode selected at the time of a big hit, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" "Variable element of" + "Re-variable" variable element "or" High-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" Low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Pseudo-ream "variable element +" Normal reach "variable element + Fluctuation element of "special reach" + Fluctuation element of "re-variation" "variation pattern is easy to select (30% of the total). In addition, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variation factor + Any variation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element can be selected. It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit even from a fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the overall variation time is set to "EB: normal reach (shortening)", which is a shortening effect mode selected in the case of a jackpot and the number of reserved balls in which the variation shortening function is activated. Is "15 seconds" "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element "and the total fluctuation time is" 20 seconds "" high speed fluctuation ( "Short)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "and" High speed fluctuation (short) "with total fluctuation time of" 25 seconds " Fluctuation element of "Slow fluctuation" + Fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + Fluctuation factor of "Re-variation" and Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (short)" with total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" + Four fluctuation patterns of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared to be selectable, and for each fluctuation pattern The value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each other.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "EB: normal reach (shortened)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0-4" for "normal reach" fluctuation element, "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation "5-14" for "elements", "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element " For "15-34", "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element " It is "35-99".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode, which is the shortened effect mode, is selected in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed fluctuation (short) ". ) ”Variable element +“ Low speed fluctuation ”variable element +“ Normal reach ”variable element” fluctuation pattern is 5%, “High speed fluctuation (short)” variable element + “Low speed fluctuation” variable element + “Pseudo” 10% of the fluctuation pattern of "ream" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor, "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "re-variation" 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "variable elements", "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" The fluctuation pattern of "variation factor" is set to be selected at a ratio of 65%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode, which is the shortened effect mode selected at the time of a big hit, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" Fluctuation elements of "variable elements of" + "variable elements of" re-variation "" are easy to select (65% of the total). In addition, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Pseudo-ream" variable element + "normal reach" variable element "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" re-variable "variable element ], Each variation pattern can be selected so that a jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

Further, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the normal production mode "E8: normal reach (normal)" and the shortened production mode "EB: normal reach (shortening)" are variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation". The execution time of other variable elements, the presence or absence of "pseudo-ream" variable elements, or the presence or absence of "re-variable" variable elements are set to be the same. There is. Therefore, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the "normal reach" effect mode is based on the number of reserved balls of the variation effect at the start of the variation effect, which is the "normal reach" effect mode, as in the case of loss. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation effect is shortened by "10 seconds".

Next, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the overall variation is set in "EC: Super Reach (shortening)", which is a shortening effect mode selected in the case of a jackpot and the number of reserved balls in which the variation shortening function is activated. The total fluctuation time is "25 seconds", "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor. "30 seconds" "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element, and the whole Fluctuation time of "35 seconds" "High-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Super reach" fluctuation factor + "Re-variation" fluctuation "Element" and "High-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element with total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + " Four fluctuation patterns of "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "EC: super reach (shortened)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". "0-9" for "element +" normal reach "variable element +" super reach "variable element", "high-speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "pseudo-ream" Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach" vs. "10-29", variable element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" "Variable element" + "Super reach" variable element + "Re-variable" variable element "for" 30-59 "," High-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" Low-speed fluctuation "variable element + It is "60 to 99" for "pseudo-ream" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element + "re-variable" variable element ".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode, which is the shortened effect mode, is selected in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed variation ( "Short)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element "variation pattern is 10%," High speed fluctuation (short) "variation element +" 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "low speed fluctuation" + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor, "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + " Fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "super reach" + fluctuation factor of "re-variation" 30%, fluctuation factor of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "variation factor of" high speed fluctuation (short) " The fluctuation pattern of "low speed fluctuation" + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation factor "is selected at a ratio of 40%. Is set to.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode, which is the shortened production mode selected at the time of a big hit, "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" + "variable element of" super reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is easily selected (40% of the total). In addition, "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor "," high-speed fluctuation (short) "variation factor + Fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "pseudo-ream" + fluctuation factor of "normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "super reach", fluctuation factor of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + fluctuation of "low speed fluctuation" By configuring each variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" super reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" to be selected, a jackpot can be obtained from any variation pattern. It is possible to provide the expected playability.

Further, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the normal production mode "E9: super reach (normal)" and the shortened production mode "EC: super reach (shortening)" are "high-speed fluctuations". Only the execution time of the variable element of is different, and the execution time of other variable elements, the presence or absence of the variable element of "pseudo-ream", or the lottery ratio of the presence or absence of the variable element of "re-variation" is also the same. It is configured. Therefore, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the "super reach" effect is determined according to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect at the start of the variation effect, which is the "super reach" effect mode, as in the case of loss. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation effect, which is the effect mode, is shortened by "10 seconds".

Next, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the overall variation is set to "ED: special reach (shortening)", which is a shortening effect mode selected when the jackpot is hit and the number of reserved balls is activated by the variation shortening function. The total fluctuation time is "35 seconds", "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor. "40 seconds" "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element, and the whole Fluctuation time of "45 seconds" "High-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Special reach" fluctuation factor + "Re-variation" fluctuation "Element" and "High-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element with total fluctuation time of "50 seconds" + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + " Four fluctuation patterns of "special reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "ED: special reach (shortened)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". "0-19" for "element +" normal reach "variable element +" special reach "variable element", "high-speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "pseudo-ream" Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach" vs. "20-39", variable element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" "Variable element of" + "Special reach" variable element + "Re-variable" variable element "for" 40-69 "," High-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" Low-speed fluctuation "variable element + It is "70 to 99" for "pseudo-ream" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element + "re-variable" variable element ".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode, which is the shortened effect mode, is selected in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" High-speed variation ( "Short)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "variation pattern is 20%," high speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "low speed fluctuation" + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor, "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + " Fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "special reach" + fluctuation factor of "re-fluctuation" 30%, fluctuation factor of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "variation factor of" high speed fluctuation (short) " The fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream" + + the fluctuation element of "normal reach" the fluctuation element of "special reach" + the fluctuation element of "re-variation" is selected at a ratio of 30%. Is set to.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode, which is the shortened production mode selected at the time of a big hit, "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" "Variable element of" + "Re-variable" variable element "or" High-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" Low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Pseudo-ream "variable element +" Normal reach "variable element + "Special reach" fluctuation element + "Re-variation" fluctuation element "variation pattern is easy to select (30% of the total). In addition, "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor "," high-speed fluctuation (short) "variation factor + Any variation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element can be selected. It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit even from a fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the normal production mode "EA: special reach (normal)" and the shortened production mode "ED: special reach (shortening)" are "high-speed fluctuations". Only the execution time of the variable element of is different, and the execution time of other variable elements, the presence or absence of the variable element of "pseudo-ream", or the lottery ratio of the presence or absence of the variable element of "re-variation" is also the same. It is configured. Therefore, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the "special reach" effect is determined according to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect at the start of the variation effect, which is the "special reach" effect mode, as in the case of loss. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation effect, which is the effect mode, is shortened by "10 seconds".

In this way, when each effect mode is selected as the variation pattern of the "reach display" at the time of a big hit, the time of the variation element of the "high-speed variation" is "10 seconds" in each of the normal effect mode and the shortened effect mode. It is configured so that the lottery ratios of other variable factors and fluctuation patterns are the same. Therefore, regardless of the "reach display", the variation time of the variation effect that can be executed is "10 seconds" depending on the number of reserved balls of the variation effect at the start of the variation effect in which the "reach display" is executed. It is possible to change only.

Here, referring to FIGS. 16 to 18, when a big hit occurs in which the V winning device 72 is opened, the timing at which the V winning device 72 is opened and the V winning opening 74a are opened by the distribution device 73. Whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a will be described depending on the timing of the winning. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing whether or not a ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 74b at two timings of “timing A” and “timing B” in the case of “7 round V open jackpot”. Yes, FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing a situation in which a jackpot state occurs without shortening the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect when a “7 round V open jackpot” occurs, and FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing a situation in which a jackpot state occurs. It is a timing chart which showed the situation which the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect was shortened, and the jackpot state occurred in the case of "round V open jackpot".

In FIG. 16, when the “7 round V open jackpot” is won, the drive timing of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is shown in the central portion of the drawing, and “7 round V” is shown at a predetermined “timing A” above the central portion of the drawing. The case where the "open jackpot" has occurred is shown, and the timing different from "timing A" is shown below the central part of the drawing (specifically, "10 seconds" after "timing A". Hereinafter, "timing B" is used. ) Shows the case where "7 round V open jackpot" occurred.

As described above, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is switched on and off every "10 seconds", and a series of operations (that is, operations from being turned on to being turned on again) are performed in a cycle of "20 seconds". ) Is repeatedly executed. Then, as the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned on or off, the distribution plate 73a is opened and closed so that the ball can flow into either the left side path 74 or the right side path 75.

Here, when a "7 round V open jackpot" occurs at "timing A", a predetermined opening effect ("OP" in the figure; hereinafter, the opening effect may be referred to as "OP effect") is specified. The effect time (“10 seconds” in the first embodiment) is performed, and then the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on in synchronization with the timing when the first round (1R; the same applies hereinafter) is started. Then, after a predetermined opening time (“5 seconds” in the first embodiment) has elapsed from the on of the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b, the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned off. In this "timing A", the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned off while the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is on, that is, at the timing when a ball can flow into the V winning device 72. The left side path 74 is closed and the right side path 75 is opened by the distribution plate 73a of the distribution device 73. Therefore, if the "7 round V open jackpot" is won in this "timing A", the ball may flow into the V winning device 72 based on the winning of the "7 round V open jackpot". Since the left side path 74 having the V winning opening 74a is not opened at the timing when the ball can flow into the winning device 72, the ball does not flow into the V winning opening 74a.

On the other hand, when a "7 round V open jackpot" occurs in "timing B", the OP effect is performed for a predetermined effect time ("10 seconds" in the first embodiment) as in the case of "timing A", and then. The V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on in synchronization with the timing at which 1R is started. Then, after a predetermined opening time (“5 seconds” in the first embodiment) has elapsed when the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on, the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned off. In this "timing B", the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned on while the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on, that is, at the timing when the ball can flow into the V winning device 72. The left side path 74 is opened and the right side path 75 is closed by the distribution plate 73a of the distribution device 73. Therefore, in the case of this "timing B", when the ball can flow into the V winning device 72 based on the winning of the "7 round V open jackpot", the left route 74 having the V winning opening 74a is reached. The ball flows in, and the ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 74b.

In the "7 round V open jackpot" at both timings, after the end of the 1st round in which the V winning device 72 is opened, the big winning opening solenoid 65c is repeatedly turned on or off after the 2nd round to reach the variable winning device 65. While the ball can flow in, the V winning device 72 is not opened after the second round, and the ball cannot flow into the V winning device 72. Then, after the end of the 7th round, a predetermined ending effect (“ED” in the figure; hereinafter, the ending effect may be referred to as “ED effect”) is set to a predetermined effect time (“10 seconds” in the first embodiment). ) After that, the jackpot state is ended, and the special symbol variation effect can be executed.

Here, if the ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 74b during the jackpot state, the gaming state after the jackpot state ends is changed to the "probability fluctuation state", while the ball is moved by the V winning opening switch 74b. If it is not detected, even if it is a "7 round V open jackpot", the gaming state after the jackpot state ends is configured to transition to the "time shortened state".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot in which the V winning device 72 is opened (that is, "7 round V opening jackpot" or "15 round V opening jackpot". Hereinafter, the jackpot in which the V winning device 72 is opened is defined. (Sometimes collectively referred to as "V opening jackpot"), the V winning device 72 is opened "10 seconds" after the opening effect is started, and the V winning device 72 is closed "5 seconds" after that. The period from the start of the jackpot to the opening and closing of the V winning device 72 is fixedly set. Further, the drive cycle of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is set longer than the opening time of the V winning device 72. Therefore, even if a V-open jackpot is won, depending on the timing of its occurrence, a situation in which a ball may flow into the V-winning opening 74a while the V-winning device 72 is open and the V-winning opening 74a There will be a situation in which the ball cannot flow into the V winning opening 74a and a situation in which the ball cannot flow into the V winning opening 74a. With this configuration, it is possible to make the "probability fluctuation state" different depending on the timing of the big hit, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 17, when the "7 round V open jackpot" is won, at the start of the variation effect in which the "7 round V open jackpot" occurs at the same timing as the "timing A" in FIG. The number of reserved balls of the special symbol is less than "4", the fluctuation shortening function does not operate in the fluctuation effect (that is, no shortening), the variation effect is executed in the normal effect mode, and the jackpot is won. The situation that occurs will be explained. In this situation, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is not turned on at the timing (period) when the V winning device 72 is opened, and the ball is not detected by the V winning port switch 74b.

In the example shown in FIG. 17, first, in the "normal game state", a starting prize of 1 (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize 1") is generated from the state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0", and the starting prize is generated. Two new start prizes are generated during the execution of the loss (that is, "E0: non-reach (normal)") variation effect ("variation 1" in FIG. 17) for "15 seconds" based on the start prize 1. .. Of the two start-up prizes, the variation effect of the loss (that is, "E0: non-reach (normal)") for "15 seconds" based on the previous start-up prize (hereinafter referred to as "start-up prize 2") ( While "variation 2") is extracted in FIG. 17, the jackpot of "7 round V open jackpot" for "40 seconds" (that is, that is, based on the later starting prize (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize 3")) The variation effect (“variation 3” in FIG. 17) of “E9: super reach (normal)”) is extracted.

Here, in the voice lamp control device 113, at the timing when the "starting prize 2" and the "starting winning 3" occur, the timing at the time of winning the "starting winning 2" and the "starting winning 3", that is, each variation effect Is configured to be able to execute the advance hit / fail judgment of each variation effect at the timing before the start of the variation effect (hereinafter, the advance hit / fail determination of the variation effect before the start of the variation effect is referred to as "look-ahead determination"). .. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 is lost after the variation effect for "15 seconds" is performed in the variation effect based on the "starting prize 2" by the look-ahead determination at the time when the "starting prize 2" is generated. In addition, a "7 round V open jackpot" occurs after the fluctuation effect for "40 seconds" is performed in the variation effect based on the "starting prize 3" by the look-ahead judgment at the time when the "starting prize 3" occurs. I am aware of that.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 recognizes the opening / closing drive timing (cycle) of the distribution device 73 in the V winning device 72 by a command (V opening command described later) from the main control device 110, and is currently executing. The execution time of the variation effect, each execution time of the held variation effect, the opening time due to the occurrence of the jackpot, and the opening timing (period) of the V winning device 72 are recognized. Therefore, by determining each of these times, the voice lamp control device 113 opens the V winning device 72 when a "7 round V opening jackpot" occurs due to the variation effect based on the "starting winning 3". It becomes possible to recognize whether or not the ball can flow into the V winning opening 74a at the timing.

In the example shown in FIG. 17, the voice lamp control device 113 does not generate an additional new start prize in the state at the time when the “start prize 3” occurs (the integrated time of the fluctuation time of each fluctuation effect). When a jackpot based on "Starting prize 3" occurs in a situation where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol does not activate the variable shortening function, balls flow into the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot is open. I am aware that it will be an impossible situation. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute the "V prize chance effect" (see FIG. 46 described later) when the "starting prize 3" occurs, and wins the execution lottery. Displays a "launch promotion suggestion (see FIG. 46 (b) described later)" that prompts the player to launch the ball in the "V winning chance production".

Here, the "V winning chance production" means whether or not a ball flows into the V winning opening 74a in the V winning device 72 when the V winning device 72 is opened in the case of winning a big hit. This is a production that suggests to the player. In this "V winning chance production", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation production being executed, the fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation production, the opening time at the time of the jackpot, etc. are grasped at the start winning prize of the fluctuation production that generates the jackpot. At the same time, when the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a is grasped, the jackpot game is executed with the current number of reserved balls of the variable effect, and the V winning device 72 is opened, the ball wins the V winning opening 74a. It is configured to suggest whether or not to do so.

Specifically, in the "V winning chance effect", the variable effect that generates the big hit is executed with the number of reserved balls at the time of acquiring the variable effect that can generate the big hit, and the big hit game is performed based on the result of the variable effect. When the ball is not won in the V winning opening 74a even though the V winning device 72 is opened, the "launching" prompting the player to launch the ball in the "V winning chance production" is executed. "Promotion suggestion" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 46 (b) described later).

The "launch promotion suggestion" in this "V winning chance production" is to the player because the ball does not flow into the V winning opening 74a even if a big hit occurs in this situation (normal production mode). Before the start of the variable production based on the "starting prize 3", obtain "3" or more new starting prizes (that is, the number of reserved balls is "4"), and perform the variable production based on the "starting prize 3". It suggests that it should be executed in the shortened effect mode instead of the normal effect mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a predetermined ratio is obtained when a jackpot is won in the fluctuation effect, or when any "reach display" is extracted even when a loss is extracted. It is configured to execute "V winning chance production". With this configuration, it is possible to improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10 by urging the player to launch a ball during the "V winning chance production" even in the fluctuation production at the time of loss. In addition, by configuring it so that it is not possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur in the pending variable production only by executing the "V winning chance production", the jackpot can be achieved while encouraging the player to launch the ball. It is possible to create a gameplay that guesses whether or not it occurs, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 17, as a result of performing the "V winning chance production", no new starting prize is generated during the "V winning chance production", and the timing at which the variable production based on the "starting prize 3" is started. Then, the number of reserved balls, which is the variable effect based on the "starting prize 3", is "1". Therefore, the variable effect based on the start winning prize 3 is executed in the normal effect mode (that is, in the "E9: super reach (normal)" performed for "40 seconds"). At this time, the "V prize chance effect" ends in synchronization with the start timing of the variable effect based on the start prize 3. After that, the variation effect based on the start prize 3 is executed in the normal variation mode, the "7 round V open jackpot" is generated in the variation effect, and the jackpot state is entered based on the occurrence of the "7 round V open jackpot". To do. In this jackpot state, the V-winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on after the OP effect executed for "10 seconds", and the ball can flow into the V-winning device 72.

However, at the timing when the ball can flow into the V winning device 72 based on this "7 round V open jackpot", the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is in the off state, the left side path 74 is closed, and the right side path 75 is opened. It is in a state of being. Therefore, as suggested in "V winning chance production", in the jackpot, when the V winning device 72 is opened, the ball flows into the right path 75 and does not flow into the left path 74, so that the V winning opening switch 74b is used. The ball is not detected (see FIG. 46 (h) described later), and the gaming state after the jackpot ends transitions to the “time shortened state”.

Next, referring to FIG. 18, when the "7 round V open jackpot" is won, the start of the variable effect in which the "7 round V open jackpot" occurs at the same timing as the "timing A" in FIG. Occasionally, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "4", the fluctuation shortening function is activated in the fluctuation effect (that is, there is shortening), the variation effect is executed in the shortened effect mode, and a big hit occurs. Explain the situation. In this situation, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned on at the timing (period) when the V winning device 72 is opened, and the ball can be detected by the V winning port switch 74b.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, as in the example shown in FIG. 17, first, in the "normal game state", the "starting prize 1" is generated from the state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0", and the "starting prize 1" is generated. Two new start prizes are generated during the execution of the loss (that is, "E0: non-reach (normal)") variation effect ("variation 1" in FIG. 18) for "15 seconds" based on "winning 1". .. Of the two starting prizes, the variation effect of the loss (that is, "E0: non-reach (normal)") for "15 seconds" based on the previous starting prize "starting prize 2" (in FIG. 18 " While "variation 2") is extracted, the jackpot of "7 round V open jackpot" for "40 seconds" based on the later starting prize "starting prize 3" (that is, "E9: Super Reach (normal)) ”) Fluctuation effect (“Variation 3” in FIG. 18) is extracted.

Here, in the voice lamp control device 113, as in the example shown in FIG. 17, at the timing when the “starting prize 2” and the “starting prize 3” occur, the time when the “starting prize 2” and the “starting prize 3” are won. The timing of each variation effect, that is, the pre-reading determination of each variation effect before the start of each variation effect, and the pre-reading determination at the time when the "starting prize 2" occurs, "15 seconds" in the variation effect based on the "starting prize 2". The fluctuation effect for "40 seconds" is generated in the variation effect based on the "starting prize 3" due to the pre-reading judgment at the time when the "starting prize 3" occurs and the loss occurs after the variation effect is performed. It is recognized that "7 round V open jackpot" will occur after it is done.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 recognizes the opening / closing drive timing (cycle) of the distribution device 73 in the V winning device 72 by a command (V opening command described later) from the main control device 110, and is currently executing. It recognizes the execution time of the variation effect, each execution time of the held variation effect, the opening time due to the occurrence of a big hit, and the opening timing (period) of the V winning device 72. Therefore, by determining each of these times, the voice lamp control device 113 opens the V winning device 72 when a "7 round V opening jackpot" occurs due to the variation effect based on the "starting winning 3". It becomes possible to recognize whether or not the ball can flow into the V winning opening 74a at the timing.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, as in the example shown in FIG. 17, the voice lamp control device 113 is newly started with the situation at the time when the “starting prize 3” occurs (the integrated time of the fluctuation time of each fluctuation effect). When a jackpot based on "Starting Winning 3" occurs in a situation where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol does not activate without winning a prize, the V winning slot is opened while the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot is open. We are aware that the ball cannot flow into 74a. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute the "V winning chance effect" (see FIG. 47 described later) when the "starting winning 3" occurs, and wins the execution lottery. Displays a "launch promotion suggestion (see FIG. 47 (b) described later)" that prompts the player to launch the ball in the "V winning chance production".

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 18, as a result of performing the "V winning chance production", three new starting prizes are generated during the "V winning chance production", and the variable production based on the "starting prize 3" starts. At the timing of this, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect including the variable effect based on the "starting prize 3" becomes "4" (see FIG. 47 (d) described later). Therefore, the variable effect based on the "starting prize 3" is different from the time when the "starting winning 3" occurs, and is in a shortened effect mode (that is, "EC: super reach (shortening)" performed for "30 seconds"). It will be executed. Then, the "V winning chance production" suggests that the variable production of the "starting winning 3" activates the fluctuation shortening function, so that the ball is ready to win a prize in the V winning opening 74a (FIG. 47 (described later)). e)), the process ends in synchronization with the start timing of the variable effect based on the "starting prize 3". After that, the variation effect based on the "starting prize 3" is executed in a shortened variation mode in which the variation time is shortened for "10 seconds" from the normal variation mode grasped at the time of the occurrence of the "starting prize 3". In the variable effect, a "7 round V open jackpot" is generated, and the jackpot state is entered based on the occurrence of the "7 round V open jackpot". In the jackpot state, the V-winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on after the OP effect executed for "10 seconds", and the ball can flow into the V-winning device 72.

In this case, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is on, the left side path 74 is opened, and the right side path 75 is closed at the timing when the ball can flow into the V winning device 72. Therefore, as suggested in the "V winning chance production", in the jackpot, the ball flows into the left side path 74 when the V winning device 72 is opened, and the ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 74b (FIG. 47 (h) described later). ), The gaming state after the jackpot ends will transition to the "probability fluctuation state".

In this way, even if the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a at the start winning stage even though the V winning device 72 has won the jackpot to be opened, until the start of the jackpot. By setting the number of reserved balls of the special symbol to the state in which the variable shortening function is activated, the phase of the opening / closing timing of the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened is shifted, and the ball is moved to the V winning opening 74a. Can create a situation where can win a prize. Therefore, by configuring the player to obtain the presence or absence of winning the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot by his own operation (the number of starting winnings based on the launch), he feels a sense of accomplishment when the V winning opening 74a is won. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the "launch promotion suggestion" in the "V winning chance production", the number of launching balls in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The counter C4 per normal figure is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 99", reaches the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then returns to "0". Further, when the counter C4 per normal figure makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the counter C4 per normal figure.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), and is 1 for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). It is updated several times and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

The value of the counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24 in the first embodiment)), and the timing at which it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 is detected. Then, it is stored in any of the normal map holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i in the order of being stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h, with respect to the value of the counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i. Make a hit judgment.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table 202f (see FIG. 19 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each game state, and the normal symbol hold ball is executed. When the value of the per-figure counter C4 stored in the area 203i matches the value of the hit random number set by the per-figure random number table 202f, it is determined to be a hit. Then, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set with reference to the normal symbol variation time table 202 g (see FIG. 19B) according to the game state, and after the variable display time elapses in the normal symbol display device 83, A symbol "○" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). After that, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71a is set by referring to the ordinary electric service control table 202h (see FIG. 19C) according to the game state, and the ordinary electric service 71a is opened during the opening time. During that time, a ball can be awarded to the second starting port 71.

On the other hand, when the value of the normal figure counter C4 stored in the normal figure holding area does not match the value of the hit random number set by the random number table 202f per normal figure (see FIG. 19A). , It is judged as a loss. Then, the variable display time is set with reference to the normal figure variation time table 202 g (see FIG. 19B) according to the game state, and after the variable display time elapses in the normal symbol display device 83, the stop symbol (normal) A symbol of "x" is lit and displayed as a symbol).

Here, the details of the random number table 202f per normal figure will be described with reference to FIG. 19A. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202f per normal figure stored in the ROM 202.

As described above, the random number table 202f per normal figure shows the period in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not the low probability state (probability fluctuation state” or “time reduction state” of the normal symbol which is the “normal game state” ( The game state of the pachinko machine 10 for the "normal symbol low probability state" used in the case of (including the big hit of the special symbol)) has a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the "normal symbol low probability state". It can be divided into two types, one for the "normal symbol high probability state" used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" which is the state. Then, the number of hit random numbers included in each of the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that hit the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state" different, the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state" can be used. , The probability of winning in the variable display of ordinary symbols is changed.

As shown in FIG. 19A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values of the counter C4 per normal figure, which is a hit in the case of the “normal symbol low probability state”, is 10, and the value “90”. ~ 99 ”is defined (set) in the random number table 202f per pachinko machine. That is, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal symbol low probability state" (that is, the "normal game state") is set to be 10/100 = 1/10.

On the other hand, the number of values of the counter C4 per normal figure, which is a hit in the "normal symbol high probability state", is 90, and the values "01 to 99" are specified (set) in the random number table 202f per normal figure. ing. That is, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal symbol high probability state" (that is, the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state") is set to be 90/100 = 9/10.

As a result, by changing the winning / failing probability of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in whether or not the normal electric service 71a is easy to open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 71a can be easily opened, so that a prize can be won to the second starting port 71 side, or the normal electric service 71a is difficult to open. By making the situation in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second starting port 71 depending on the game state, it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

In particular, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol high probability state" is set, the normal electric service 71a is easily released, and the ball fired by the right-handed game. Is configured to easily win a prize in the second starting port 71. In other words, the ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" is configured to easily win a prize in the second starting port 71 and to easily activate the fluctuation reduction function of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol low probability state" is reached, the normal electric role 71a is difficult to open, and the ball fired by the right-handed game wins the second starting port 71. It is configured to be difficult to do. Further, since the first starting port 64 is not equipped with a device for assisting the winning such as the ordinary electric service 71a, the ball fired by the left-handed game is also configured so as to be difficult to win the winning in the first starting port 64. ing. Therefore, in other words, in the "normal game state", even if the right-handed ball is played, it is difficult for the right-handed ball to win the second starting port 71, and the ball launched in the left-handed game is also , It is difficult to win a prize in the first starting port 64, and it is difficult to activate the fluctuation shortening function of the special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, the details of the normal figure variation time table 202g for determining the variable display time of the ordinary symbol will be described. FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the normal map fluctuation time table 202g stored in the ROM 202.

The normal symbol variation time table 202g is divided into two types, one for the "normal symbol low probability state" and the other for the "normal symbol high probability state", as in the random number table 202f per normal symbol. Then, it is set for the "normal symbol low probability state" (that is, for the "normal game state") and for the "normal symbol high probability state" (that is, for the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state"). The variable display time of the normal symbol is set differently. In this way, by making the variable display time of the normal symbol different between the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state", the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" can be obtained. The time for deriving the winning / failing result of a normal symbol is changed.

As shown in FIG. 19B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the case of the "normal symbol low probability state" is "10 seconds". It is specified in the fluctuation time table 202 g. That is, in the "normal symbol low probability state", the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stop symbol is set to be "10 seconds" without exception.

On the other hand, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the case of the "normal symbol high probability state" is defined in the normal symbol fluctuation time table 202g so as to be "0.5 seconds". That is, in the "normal symbol high probability state", the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stop symbol is set to be "0.5 seconds" without exception.

As a result, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is possible to change the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 until the normal electric service 71a is released. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it becomes a hit with the variable display caused by the passage of the through gate 67, and the ordinary electric service 71a is released based on the corresponding situation, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is possible to make a difference depending on the game state whether or not the ball can flow into the second starting port 71 as it is. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol for each game state, it is possible to make the winning mode for the through gate 67 and the second starting port 71 of one ball different, and the game performance differs for each game state. Can be born.

Next, the ordinary electric service control table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (c). FIG. 19C is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the ordinary electric service control table 202h stored in the ROM 202. The ordinary electric service control table 202h is referred to when the ordinary symbol hits, and the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71a is defined based on the gaming state at the timing when the ordinary symbol hit occurs.

The ordinary electric service control table 202h is divided into groups based on the game state in which ordinary symbols are drawn. Specifically, for the "normal symbol low probability state" referred to in the "normal game state" and for the "normal symbol high probability state" referred to in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". , The opening mode (opening time) of the ordinary electric service 71a is changed.

As shown in FIG. 19 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the ordinary electric service 71a is set when the ordinary symbol is won in the "ordinary symbol low probability state", that is, the "normal game state". The opening time of the normal electric service control table 202h is specified so as to be "0.1 seconds". That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal symbol low probability state", the normal electric service 71a is set to be released for "0.1 seconds".

On the other hand, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71a set when the ordinary symbol is won in the "ordinary symbol high probability state", that is, the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" is set to "3 seconds". Is specified in the ordinary electric service control table 202h. That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal electric service high probability state", the normal electric service 71a is configured to be released for "3 seconds".

As a result, by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric service 71a according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the ordinary electric service 71a is open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 71a is open for a long period of time, so that it is easy to win a prize on the second starting port 71 side, or the normal electric service 71a is open. By making it difficult for the ball to win the second starting port 71 due to the short situation depending on the gaming state, it is possible to create different game characteristics for each gaming state.

In particular, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol high probability state" is set, the opening period of the normal electric service 71a is extended, and the game is fired by the right-handed game. The ball is configured so that it can easily win a prize in the second starting port 71. In other words, a ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 71, and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation production of the second special symbol is likely to accumulate. It is configured so that the shortening function is easy to operate.

In this way, by providing each gaming state in which the high-probability state or low-probability state of the special symbol and the high-probability state or low-probability state of the normal symbol are combined, the gameability is changed to each gaming state, and variations It is possible to provide abundant games and improve the interest of the games.

In particular, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" in which the fluctuation shortening function is easily activated, it is easy to select whether or not to activate the fluctuation shortening function based on the player's intention. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", when the corresponding fluctuation production is executed in the normal production mode at the stage when the "V winning chance production" occurs, the winning assistance function is activated. By winning the ball in the second starting port 71, the corresponding variation effect can be easily shortened, and the ball can be easily flowed into the V winning port 74a.

The hit probability of the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the variable display time of the variable display are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, any ratio may be used as long as the probability that the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is easier to win the normal symbol than the "normal game state". For example, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in the "normal game state". May be set to about 1/100 to make it difficult to hit, or the hit probability of a normal symbol in the "probability fluctuation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2. Further, any time may be used as long as the variable display time is shorter in the "probability fluctuation state" than in the "normal game state". For example, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the "normal game state" is "10 seconds" or more. It may be a long time (for example, "30 seconds") or a short time less than "10 seconds" (for example, "1 second").

Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric service 71a are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71a, any opening time may be used as long as the opening time in the "probability fluctuation state" is more advantageous to the player than in the "normal gaming state". For example, "normal" The opening time of the ordinary electric service 71a in the "game state" may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, "3 times"). ) May be set. Further, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71a in the "probability fluctuation state" may be a long time of "3 seconds" or more (for example, "5 seconds"), or a short time of less than "3 seconds" (for example, "1"). Seconds ") may be used. Further, the number of times the ordinary electric service 71a is opened in the "probability fluctuation state" may be set to a large number of times (for example, "3 times") or more.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and inputs / outputs. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as an output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I / O") are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 35) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, The NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, and a normal figure reserved ball number counter 203g. , The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i, the probability variation transition flag 203j, and the V drive timer 203k

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is based on the start winning prize to the first start port 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) which is periodically executed every "4 milliseconds". Maximum number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to 4 times.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S915 in FIG. 35). Then, every time the starting prize to the first starting port 64 is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 26). S203). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S308 in FIG. 27).

Like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b has a second start detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) that is periodically executed every "4 milliseconds". Dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 based on the start winning prize to the mouth 71 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) up to 4 times.

Similar to the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S915 in FIG. 35). Then, every time the start winning prize to the second starting port 71 is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 26). See S206). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S305 in FIG. 27).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the reserved ball number command. Notifies the voice lamp control device 113 (see S210 in FIG. 26). The hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first hold ball number counter 203a or the second hold ball number counter 203b is incremented by 1. Command.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself for the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command. it can. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol is held without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a start winning prize is detected, the main control device 110 sends a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 to dynamically display (variate) each special symbol managed by the voice lamp control device 113. Even if the number of reserved balls in the effect) deviates from the actual number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next received hold is received. The deviation can be corrected by the ball count command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the hold ball number counter 203a or the first hold ball number counter 203a is added by 1 in the hold ball number command. 2 Counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6) due to the above-mentioned start winning that triggered the addition of not only the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b but also the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the above is also included.

That is, when there is a start prize, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main controller 110 is a hold ball. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by several commands.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation effect based on each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command is executed. A look-ahead judgment is made before the fluctuation effect is executed, and what happens to the fluctuation effect (whether or not it becomes a big hit, what happens to the fluctuation time, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variation effect. Then, based on the judgment result based on the pre-reading judgment, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, determine the effect mode of the above-mentioned "winning chance effect", and determine the effect content of the "pending change notice". ing.

It should be noted that the hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls of the fluctuation effect and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of entering the ball into the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, and the command is described. It may be configured to generate a command similar to the fluctuation pattern command based on the incoming ball and the stop type command (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) and transmit them to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, regarding the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the start winning prize is detected in the first starting port 64. , A memory for storing each value of the variable type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the sphere has won the first starting port 64 (starting winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are calculated from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In the first holding ball storage area 203d, four holdings are made so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the first special symbols can be stored (held) up to four times. It has areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 7).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the start winning prize is detected in the second starting port 71. , A memory for storing each value of the variable type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the second starting port 71 (starting winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are calculated from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In the second holding ball storage area 203e, four holdings are made so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the second special symbols can be stored (held) up to four times. It has areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 7).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed, or the movement of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a memory for storing data (each value of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of target display and fluctuation effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display Data corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above in order to execute processing such as dynamic display of the device 81 and setting of fluctuation effect ( When the data corresponding to the start winning prize related to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e among the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), it corresponds to one start winning prize of the data. The data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the start prize related to the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the start prize related to the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one of the starting prizes of the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the first special symbol relates to the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on the condition that the dynamic display (variable effect) is not held. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the movement of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to set the target display and the variation effect.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter used for the jackpot lottery is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variation effect. A jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first starting port 64 (starting winning). The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the second starting port 71 (starting winning).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas), the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are stored. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

Further, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved ball storage areas 1 to 4) like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Similar to the first holding ball storage area 203d, the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) have a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. Has been done.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, 203e3, and the variation type counter storage area 203d4, 203e4 are set to 1. Although they are collectively provided in each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64 (starting winning) is for a maximum of four times. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (1st holding 1st to 4th areas). Will be remembered. That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the start winning to the first start port 64, which is older in time, is stored, and in the first hold first area, the first start port 64, which is the oldest in time, is stored. The data corresponding to the start winning prize will be stored.

Further, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71 (starting winning) is stored up to four times. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (2nd holding 1st to 4th areas). To. That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the start winning to the second start port 71, which is older in time, is stored, and in the second reserved first area, the second start port 71, which is the oldest in time, is stored. The data corresponding to the start winning prize will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing values, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. There is.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) is stored in the second hold first area of the second hold ball storage area 203e. In this case, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the first of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When the data is stored in the hold first area, the data stored in the first hold first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the hold ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 28), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery result is performed. And determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, it determines whether or not the data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 in the second reserved first area is used as the jackpot random number in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 in the second hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 is shifted, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 in the second hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the shift of the data to the hold ball execution area 203f is completed, the second hold ball first area becomes empty, so that it is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the second hold ball storage area 203e. ) Is packed into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the first embodiment, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data is shifted only in the second reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. It is assumed that it has been done. In this state, when the data in the second hold first area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203f and the second hold first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 has data in other areas (second to fourth). Is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data in the second reserved fourth area. To the second hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. Shifts to one area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the second hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data is not stored in the second hold first area of the second hold ball storage area 203e when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, the MPU 201 then holds the first hold. It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the sphere storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if the data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is used as the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 in the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 in the first hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 is shifted, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 in the first hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the hold ball execution area 203f is completed, the first hold ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the first hold ball storage area 203d. ) Is packed into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the first embodiment, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the data is shifted only in the first reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a when the start determination of the variation effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. It is assumed that it has been done. In this state, when the data in the first hold first area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203f and the first hold first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 has data in other areas (second to fourth). Is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data in the first reserved fourth area. To the first hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a at the time when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first reserved second area to the first reserved ball number. Shifts to one area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has a second special symbol variation effect than the first special symbol variation effect in a situation where both the first special symbol variation effect and the second special symbol variation effect are suspended. It is configured to give priority to the execution of the variation effect of the special symbol. Here, when the above-mentioned "V winning chance production" is executed based on winning the V opening jackpot, for example, in the variable production of the first special symbol, the V opening jackpot is won and the "V winning chance production" is performed. If a new start prize for the second special symbol is generated during the process, the variation effect of the new second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation effect of the first special symbol. Therefore, there is a possibility that the production time of the "V winning chance production" and the start time of the variable production for winning the V opening jackpot will be different.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state", it is difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second starting port 71, so that the variation effect of the second special symbol is less likely to occur, and the first special It is configured so that the variation effect of the second special symbol is less likely to occur while the variation effect of the symbol is being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the variation effect of the second special symbol from being interrupted during the "V prize chance effect" based on the start prize of the first special symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production time of the "V winning chance production" from being different from the start time of the variable production that wins the V opening jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The normal figure reservation ball count counter 203g is usually based on the passage of a ball through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) that is periodically executed every "4 milliseconds". This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) for variable display of a normal symbol performed by the symbol display device 83 up to four times.

Similar to the reserved ball number counters 203a and 203b, the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203g is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S615 in FIG. 35). Then, each time the passage of a ball through the through gate 67 is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display related to the normal symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (not shown). On the other hand, the normal figure reservation ball number counter 203 g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol is executed (not shown).

The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h is a memory for storing the normal figure per counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in connection with the detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67. When the MPU 201 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), it acquires the value of the counter C4 per normal figure from the counter buffer 203c and stores the normal figure holding ball. Store in area 203h. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas (normal figure) so that data (value of counter C4 per normal figure) corresponding to one holding ball of a normal symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. It has reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 7).

The normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is a memory for storing data (value of counter C4 per normal figure) to be referred to in the process of winning lottery or variable display of a normal symbol being executed or starting execution. is there.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball is executed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery of the normal symbol and a setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. Of the data (value of the counter C4 per normal figure) stored in the storage area 203h, one data is shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, the details of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i will be described. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform processing such as a winning lottery for normal symbols and setting of variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. To.

As described above, the normal symbol hit counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery is used to set the normal symbol winning lottery and the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h stores the value of the counter C4 per normal figure acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the through gate 67.

The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h is composed of four holding areas (the normal figure holding first to fourth areas). Each of the four holding areas (the first to fourth areas for holding the normal figure) is provided with a counter storage area for the normal figure (not shown) for storing the value of the counter C4 for the normal figure.

As described above, the data (value of the counter C4 per normal figure) acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h for up to four times. Data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (1st to 4th areas for holding the normal drawing). That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the passage of the sphere to the old through gate 67 in time is stored, and the first area on hold in the normal map stores the sphere to the oldest through gate 67 in time. The data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

On the other hand, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is composed of only one area. Similar to the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is provided with a normal figure holding counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the normal figure holding counter C4.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the data stored in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203h of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203h is transferred to the normal figure hold ball execution area 203i. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is referred to in the normal figure variation processing (see S112 in FIG. 24), and based on the reference data and the game state, a winning lottery is performed and a variable display is performed. Determine the content of. In the ordinary symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main control device 110.

The details of data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the random value of the counter storage area (not shown) per the normal figure of the normal figure hold first area of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203h is set. , Shifts to the counter storage area (not shown) for the normal map holding ball execution area 203i.

Then, when the shift of the data to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is completed, the normal figure holding ball first area becomes empty, so that it is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h. Shift processing is performed to pack the (held) data into the areas (first to third) where the area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h, the data is shifted only in the normal figure holding area (1st to 4th) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the normal drawing holding ball storage area 203h will be described. For example, the value of the normal figure holding ball number counter 203g when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made is "4", and the entire area (1st to 4th) of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h is set. Suppose the data is stored. In this state, when the data in the first area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the execution area 203i for holding the normal figure and the first area for holding the normal figure becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to another area (second to fourth). Each of the data of is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the first area for holding the normal figure, the data in the third area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the second area for holding the normal figure, and the data in the fourth area for holding the normal figure is shifted. Is shifted to the third area where the data is reserved.

Further, for example, if the value of the normal figure holding ball counter 203g when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made is "2", the MPU 201 normally uses only the data of the normal figure holding second area. Figure Hold Shifts to the first area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the normal map holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The probability change transition flag 203j is a flag for indicating that the transition to the “probability fluctuation state” is performed in the on state. The probability variation transition flag 203j is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see S915 in FIG. 35). Then, when the ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 74b during the jackpot (see S443: Yes in FIG. 31), the probabilistic transition flag 203j in the off state is set to ON (see S445 in FIG. 31). After that, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 33), when the probability variation transition flag 203j is turned on, the gaming state after the jackpot end is set to the "probability fluctuation state", that is, the ST counter described later (see FIG. 33). When “100” is set for the value (not shown) (see S482 in FIG. 33), the probabilistic transition flag 203j in the on state is set to off (see S483 in FIG. 33).

The V drive timer 203k is a timer for determining whether the V winning opening 74a is in the open state or the closed state. The V drive timer 203k is set when the V distribution drive solenoid 73c that periodically opens and closes the V winning opening 74a is initially set in the start-up process (see FIG. 35) performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see FIG. 35). (See S910 in FIG. 35), the value of the V drive timer 203k is also initialized. Specifically, when the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is set to the off state in the initial setting, V is used to count that the V winning opening 74a is maintained in the closed state for "10 seconds" from that timing. Clear the drive timer 203k to "0".

Then, the value of the V drive timer 203k is set to "Every time the V drive process (see S101) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) executed every" 4 milliseconds "is executed in the main controller 110. 1 "is added at a time. Then, when the value of the V drive timer 203k reaches "2500" (see S152: Yes in FIG. 25), the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is switched on or off (see S154 or S155 in FIG. 25). After that, the value of the V drive timer 203k is cleared to "0" based on the on / off switching of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c (see S157 in FIG. 25).

In this way, the value of the V drive timer 203k is cleared to "0" at the timing when the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is switched on or off. After that, the value of the V drive timer 203k is added by "1" every "4 milliseconds", and it is determined whether or not the added value of the V drive timer 203k reaches "2500". Then, when the value of the V drive timer 203k reaches "2500", the V winning opening 74a is "2500 x 4 milliseconds = 10000 milliseconds" by switching the V distribution drive solenoid 73c on or off again. It is opened or closed every (that is, "10 seconds"), and by repeating this, the opening or closing of the V winning opening 74a is alternately switched every "10 seconds".

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, a normal symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of a large winning opening opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65. The large winning opening solenoid 65c for driving the opening and closing of the shaft to the front side and the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a of the V winning device 72 are projected (that is, closed) or immersed from the surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). V prize device opening / closing solenoid 72b for opening / closing drive in the opened state (that is, open state), V distribution drive solenoid for opening / closing the distribution plate 73a for opening / closing the V winning port 74a in the V winning device 72. 73c, a normal electric service solenoid (not shown) for driving the normal electric service 71a, and other solenoid 209 are connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, in the input / output port 205, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a large winning opening switch 65d for detecting a ball won in the variable winning device 65, and a V winning opening 74a of the V winning device 72. The V winning port switch 74b for detecting the winning ball and the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected, and the MPU 201 outputs signals from various switches 208 and the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 includes audio output from the audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, on / off output from the lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, variable effect, and "variation effect. It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as "V prize chance effect" and "hold change notice".

The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, the command is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the command cannot be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured so that commands can be transmitted and received to each other.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the rear image such as the "super reach" effect mode, and the display control device 114 is displayed on the display control device 114 based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Instruct the display device 81 to display.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and "" The display control of "V winning chance production" and "holding change notice" is executed.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34). The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Here, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. In the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221 as fixed value data, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, and a V prize suggestion At least the table 222e and the pending change table 222f are stored. Of these tables 222a to 222f, the tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is there.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the fluctuation pattern table 222d, the hold display setting process (see FIG. 40), which is a look-ahead process, is executed.

Then, by this hold display setting process (see FIG. 40), what kind of effect the pending variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead processing will be as a result (whether or not it will be a big hit, "reach display"". (Whether or not it will be) is judged before the execution of the variable effect, and the execution of various effects is decided, or the production content (whether or not to execute) of the "V prize chance production" with reference to the V prize suggestion table 222e. And its contents), and the effect contents of the "hold change notice" are determined with reference to the hold change table 222f. The details of the V winning suggestion table 222e and the pending change table 222f will be described later.

The RAM 223 includes a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, a sub second reserved ball number counter 223c, a sub V drive timer 223d, a V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e, a V winning chance effect effect flag 223f, and a holding fluctuation time. At least the integration counter 223g, the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h, the total counter 223i, the remaining time timer 223j, the holding change counter 223k, the first holding information storage area 223m, the second holding information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o are provided. ing.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation effect should be started in the ON state. The fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1211 in FIG. 39). Then, it is turned off when the variation effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1402 in FIG. 43).

The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 triggers the variation start flag 223a to be turned on, and when there is a standby variation effect, the variation effect process for executing the standby variation effect (FIG. FIG. 43).

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a variation effect of the first special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and causes the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b. Therefore, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is managed.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is added by entering the ball into the first starting port 64, and the first reserved ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the value of is added, the value after addition of the first hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is stored in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1204 in FIG. 39).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and these When the mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set along with the reception, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (see S1409 in FIG. 43). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, so that the main control The value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110.

The sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (movement) of the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), similarly to the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the second special symbol based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and causes the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. Therefore, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the second special symbol is managed.

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol by entering the second starting port 71, and the second reserved ball number counter 203b in the main control device 110. When the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the value of is added, the value after addition of the second hold ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is stored in the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1204 in FIG. 39).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted by the main control device 110, and these When the mode of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set along with the reception, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (see S1406 in FIG. 43). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c, so that the main control The value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110.

The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved symbol and the executed symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (FIG. FIG. (See S1204 of 39), at the timing of updating the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball counter 223c in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command (S1409 or S1409 in FIG. 43). (Refer to S1406), a display hold ball number command is displayed in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the sub first hold ball number counter 223b and the value of the sub second hold ball number counter 223c after storage or update. It is transmitted to the control device 114 (see S1311 in FIG. 40 or S1410 in FIG. 43).

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub first hold ball number counter 223b and the sub second hold ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 113 Drawing an image so that the reserved symbol corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c and the executed symbol indicating the variation effect during execution are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 5B) of the third symbol display device 81. To control.

As described above, the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is synchronized with the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. The value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 5B) of the third symbol display device 81 is also the number of reserved balls counter 203a and the second reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of 203b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved spheres on which the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is reserved.

The sub-V drive timer 223d is a timer for the voice lamp control device 113 to recognize whether the V winning opening 74a is in the open state or the closed state, like the V drive timer 203k of the main control device 110. The sub-V drive timer 223d is initialized (for example, "0" is cleared) in the initial setting (see S1001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. To. Then, when a V opening command indicating that the V winning opening 74a has been opened is received from the main control device 110, "20000" is set (see S1202 in FIG. 39). After that, in the main process (see FIG. 38), the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is larger than "0" in the counter subtraction process (see FIG. 45) executed every "1 millisecond". When it is determined (see S1601: Yes in FIG. 45), the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is subtracted by "1" (see S1602 in FIG. 45).

In this way, "20000" is set to the value of the sub V drive timer 223d at the timing when the V opening command indicating that the V winning port 74a has been opened is received from the main controller 110, and then "1 millisecond". By subtracting the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d by "1" and determining the subtracted value of the sub-V drive timer 223d, the V winning opening 74a opened and closed with "20 seconds" as one cycle. The voice lamp control device 113 can recognize whether the device is open or closed.

Specifically, the V opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 is transmitted at the timing when the V winning opening 74a is opened, and the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is set every "1 millisecond". The configuration is such that "1" is subtracted at a time. Therefore, when the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is "20000" or less and larger than "10000", "10 seconds" has not passed since the V winning opening 74a was opened. It becomes possible to recognize that the winning opening 74a is open. On the other hand, if the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is "10000" or less and larger than "0", it is in a state where "10 seconds" or more have passed since the V winning opening 74a was opened and "20". Since the "seconds" have not passed, the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize that the V winning opening 74a is closed.

The V-winning suggestion lottery counter 223e is a counter that draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute a "V-winning chance effect" that suggests winning a ball into the V-winning opening 74a when a big hit is made. In the first embodiment, when the V winning device 72 wins the jackpot that is opened, when the V winning device 72 wins the jackpot that is not opened, and when the "reach display" of the loss is extracted, "V" It is configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not to execute the "winning chance production", and to execute the "V winning chance production" when the lottery is won. Hereinafter, when the jackpot where the V winning device 72 is opened is won, when the jackpot where the V winning device 72 is not opened is won, and when the "reach display" of the loss is extracted, "V" A variable production in which the "winning chance production" can be executed may be referred to as a "V winning chance production possible variable production".

The V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e is first initialized (for example, "0") in the initial setting (see S1001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Cleared). Then, in the counter update process (see S1113 of FIG. 38) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, 1 is added in order within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”), and the maximum value (for example, “0”) is added. In the case of a counter that can take a value of "~ 99", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e is updated once (for example, "1" is added) every time the main process loops once.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the V winning chance production possible variable effect is executed, the value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e and the V winning suggestion table 222e are referred to. Whether or not to execute "V prize chance production" is decided.

Here, the V winning suggestion table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the V winning suggestion table 222e. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the V winning chance can be produced and the variable effect can be produced at the time when the start winning is performed when the V winning chance can be produced and the variable effect is performed. Based on the type of effect and the value of the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e at that time, the V prize suggestion table 222e is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to perform the "V prize chance effect".

Specifically, in the V prize suggestion table 222e, it is divided into "loss" and "big hit". Then, for each of the divided groups, that is, for "non-reach" (only when "missing") when the "non-reach" production mode is extracted, the "normal reach" production mode is extracted. "V prize" for "normal reach" in the case of "normal reach", for "super reach" when the "super reach" production mode is extracted, and for "special reach" when the "special reach" production mode is extracted. The values of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the execution lottery of "chance production" are associated with each other.

In the V prize suggestion table 222e, the value of the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V prize chance production" is not associated with the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "loss". That is, in the "non-reach" effect mode, the "V winning chance effect" is not executed.

In the V-winning suggestion table 222e, "90 to 99" is associated with the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "loss" as the value of the V-winning suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V-winning chance production". .. That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is extracted, the "V winning chance effect" is executed with a probability of 10%.

In the V prize suggestion table 222e, "70 to 99" is associated with the "super reach" production mode at the time of "loss" as the value of the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V prize chance production". There is. That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is extracted, the "V winning chance effect" is executed with a probability of 30%.

In the V winning suggestion table 222e, "50 to 99" is associated with the "special reach" production mode at the time of "loss" as the value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V winning chance production". There is. That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is extracted, the "V winning chance effect" is executed with a probability of 50%.

In this way, even when each "reach display" at the time of "loss" is extracted, the "V winning chance production" is executed at a predetermined ratio. With this configuration, by executing the "launch promotion suggestion" in the "V winning chance production", the player can perform a variable production at the time of "loss" in which the V winning device 72 is not opened. It is possible to encourage the launch of a ball and improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in each "reach display", the higher the ratio of the jackpot being derived, the easier it is to execute the "V winning chance production". With this configuration, when the "V winning chance production" that makes sense when a jackpot is won is executed, the "reach display" with a high expectation of a jackpot can be executed. Can be suggested to the player before the occurrence of, and as the suggestion, the "V winning chance production" and the "reach display" that can be expected to be a big hit are executed at the same time, so that each production (that is, " It is possible to expect the player to derive a big hit from the case where "reach display" or "V winning chance production") is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, in the V prize suggestion table 222e, "50 to 99" is associated with the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" as the value of the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V prize chance effect". ing. That is, regardless of the winning jackpot type, if the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "big hit" is extracted, the "V winning chance production" is executed with a probability of 50%.

In the V prize suggestion table 222e, "30 to 99" is associated with the "super reach" production mode at the time of "big hit" as the value of the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V prize chance production". There is. That is, regardless of the winning jackpot type, if the "super reach" production mode at the time of "big hit" is extracted, the "V winning chance production" will be executed with a 70% probability.

In the V prize suggestion table 222e, "10 to 99" is associated with the "special reach" production mode at the time of "big hit" as the value of the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V prize chance production". There is. That is, regardless of the winning jackpot type, if the "special reach" production mode at the time of "big hit" is extracted, the "V winning chance production" is executed with a probability of 90%.

In this way, in each production mode at the time of "big hit", "V winning chance production" is executed at a predetermined ratio regardless of the result of the big hit type. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the "launch promotion suggestion" in the "V winning chance production". As a result, regardless of whether the V winning device 72 is opened or not, the player is prompted to launch the ball by the "launch promotion suggestion" of the "V winning chance production", and the pachinko machine 10 is operated. Can be improved.

Further, by being able to execute the "V winning chance production" when the V winning device 72 is won in the open jackpot type, the player himself / herself operates (based on firing) whether or not the V winning opening 74a is won in the jackpot. It can be configured so that it can be obtained depending on the number of starting prizes). As a result, in the "V winning chance production", the ball can be fired based on the player's own intention to activate the fluctuation shortening function, so that the ball is sent to the V winning opening 74a based on the player's own operation. It is possible to create a situation in which a prize can be won, to feel a sense of accomplishment based on the creation, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the easier it is to win the "V winning chance production", and the easier it is to win the big hit, the higher the possibility of winning the V winning opening 74a. .. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, the game value obtained can be changed depending on the effect mode of the variable effect extracted in addition to the jackpot type, so that the type of effect mode can be given to the player during the game (during the variable effect). It is possible to play the game while paying attention to the above, and it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The V winning chance effect flag 223f is a flag indicating that the "V winning chance effect" is executed in the ON state. This V prize chance effect flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and when the execution lottery of the "V prize chance effect" is won, that is, the value of the above-mentioned V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e and the V prize suggestion. It is turned on when the execution lottery of "V winning chance production" is won based on the table 222e (see S1303 in FIG. 40). Then, when the "V winning chance effect" ends, that is, when the value of the remaining time timer 223j, which will be described later, indicating the execution time of the "V winning chance effect" becomes "0" (S1607: Yes in FIG. 45). ), The V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned off (see S1608 in FIG. 45).

As described above, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a remaining time timer, which will be described later, indicating the execution time (remaining time) of the “V winning chance effect” when the V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned on. By updating the value of 223j, the "V winning chance effect" is configured to be performed until the variable effect that triggered the execution of the "V winning chance effect" is started.

The hold fluctuation time integration counter 223g is based on the winning of the jackpot at which the V winning device 72 is opened, that is, the winning of "15 rounds V open jackpot" or "7 rounds V open jackpot" in the look-ahead determination at the time of starting winning. When the "V prize chance effect" is performed, the time of the variable effect held at the time of the start prize and the time of the jackpot are excluded, excluding the remaining time of the variable effect being executed at the time of the start prize. It is a counter for storing the integrated time with the opening time (that is, the time until the V winning device 72 is opened).

The value of the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223g is first initialized in the initial setting (see S1001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (for example, ". 0 "is cleared). Then, when the jackpot in which the V winning device 72 is opened (hereinafter, the jackpot in which the V winning device 72 is opened may be referred to as "V opening jackpot") is won, the variation effect of the V opening jackpot is produced. The fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect performed until the fluctuation effect of the V open jackpot is executed are extracted, and the total fluctuation time of each extracted fluctuation time is the pending fluctuation time integration counter. It is set to a value of 223 g (see S1352 in FIG. 41).

Specifically, for example, when the "V winning chance effect" based on the V open jackpot is won, if the variable effect held at that time is only the variable effect that generates the V open jackpot, that is the case. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect that generates the V open jackpot is set in the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g. Further, for example, when the "V winning chance production" based on the V open jackpot is won, the variable productions held at that time are the variable effects that generate the V open jackpots and the variable effects of 1 loss. In this case, the total time of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect that generates the V open jackpot and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of 1 loss is set in the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223g. Further, for example, when the "V winning chance production" based on the V open jackpot is won, the variable productions held at that time are the variable effects that generate the V open jackpot and the variable effects that are lost in 2. In this case, the total time of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect that generates the V open jackpot and each fluctuation time of the variation effect of each loss of 2 is set in the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g. Further, for example, when the "V winning chance production" based on the V open jackpot is won, the variable productions reserved at that time are the variable effects that generate the V open jackpot and the variable effects of 3 losses. In this case, the total time of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect that generates the V open jackpot and each fluctuation time of the variation effect of each loss of 3 is set in the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g.

Then, for the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g in which the fluctuation time of the reserved fluctuation effect is set, the time from the end of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the V open jackpot to the opening of the V winning device 72 after the start of the jackpot, that is, , A value (that is, "10000") corresponding to the production time (that is, "10 seconds") of the opening effect of the V open jackpot is added (see S1353 in FIG. 41). The value of the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223g is cleared to "0" when the "V winning chance production" ends, that is, when the value of the remaining time timer 223j, which will be described later, is no longer larger than "0". (See S1609 in FIG. 45).

As a result, the holding fluctuation time integration counter 223g set at the time of winning the "V winning chance effect" when the V winning device 72 is opened (that is, the processing of S1352 and S1353 in FIG. 41) is being executed. The time from the start of fluctuation of one or a plurality of pending fluctuation effects to the opening of the V winning device 72 in the jackpot state can be recognized on the voice lamp control device 113 side, excluding the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of. ..

The execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h is a counter for counting the execution time of the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

The value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h is initialized (for example, "0") in the initial setting (see S1001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Will be cleared). Then, at the timing when the variation effect is started, the variation time of the variation effect to be executed is extracted, and the extracted variation time is set to the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h.

Specifically, for example, when the variation effect to be executed is a variation effect of "15 seconds" of loss, "150,000" is set in the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h. If the variable effect to be executed is a variable effect of "40 seconds", which is a big hit, "40000" is set in the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h.

Then, in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 38), in the counter subtraction process (see S1110 in FIG. 38) executed every "1 millisecond", the value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h. Is a value greater than "0" (S1603: Yes in FIG. 45) and is subtracted by "1" (see S1604 in FIG. 45).

As a result, the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect during execution can be grasped by referring to the value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h. Therefore, by referring to the value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h at the time of winning the "V winning chance effect" based on the V opening jackpot, the variation effect during execution during the time until the V winning device 72 is opened. The remaining fluctuation time of the sound lamp control device 113 can be recognized.

The total counter 223i is used to determine whether or not a ball wins in the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened when the "V winning chance production" based on the V opening jackpot is won. It is a counter that can be used. The total counter 223i is first initialized (for example, "0" is cleared) in the initial setting (see S1001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. To. Then, when the execution of the "V winning chance effect" based on the V open jackpot is won, first, the same as the total variable time of the pending variable effect and the opening effect stored in the above-mentioned pending variable time integration counter 223 g. The total time (total value) with the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect during execution stored in the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h described above is set in the total fluctuation counter 223i (see S1354 in FIG. 41).

As a result, at the start winning of the variable effect that wins the V open jackpot, the variable time of the pending variable effect, the effect time of the opening effect, and the execution time of the variable effect being executed are added to the total counter 223i. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the opening start timing of the V winning device 72 can be grasped from the starting winning timing.

Then, when the time corresponding to the value of the total counter 223i elapses from the timing of the start winning, that is, at the timing when the opening of the V winning device 72 is started, is the V winning opening 74a in the open state? In order to determine whether or not, first, the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d at that time is subtracted from the value of the total counter 223i (see S1355 in FIG. 41). The sub-V drive timer 223d is configured so that "20000" is set at the timing when the V winning opening 74a is opened and "1" is subtracted every 1 millisecond elapses. Therefore, by subtracting the value of the sub V drive timer 223d from the value of the total counter 223i, the timing at which the opening of the V winning opening 74a is started next is once extracted after the start winning is generated.

Next, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d from the value of the total counter 223i is divided by the value corresponding to 20 seconds, which is the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a (that is, "20000"). By subtracting the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d from the value of the total counter 223i and dividing by the value corresponding to the drive cycle of the V winning opening 74a, the cycle in which the opening of the V winning opening 74a is started from the start winning timing ( Timing) can be grasped.

Then, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d from the value of the total counter 223i is divided by the value corresponding to the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a, and the remainder value of the value is determined. At the timing, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the ball can win the V winning opening 74a when the V winning device 72 is opened. Specifically, since the opening time of the V winning device 72 is "5 seconds" (that is, "5000 milliseconds"), the value of the remainder of the divided value (hereinafter, the symbol indicating the remainder value per divided). (Use "X" as) is within the range of "0≤X <5000", the V winning opening 74a is open while the V winning device 72 is open, and the V winning opening 74a is open. The situation is such that the ball can win a prize. On the other hand, if the remainder of the divided value is within the range of "10000 ≤ X <15000", the V winning opening 74a is closed while the V winning device 72 is open, and the V winning opening 74a is closed. The situation is such that the ball cannot win the mouth 74a. Further, if the remainder of the divided value is within the range of "5000 ≦ X <10000" or within the range of "15000 ≦ X <20000", while the V winning device 72 is open, The opening and closing of the V winning opening 74a are mixed, and the ball may or may not win the V winning opening 74a.

As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can win a ball in the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot is opened when the start winning of the variable effect in which the V opening jackpot occurs. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not the situation will occur. Specifically, the value of the total counter 223i is set at the start of the "V winning chance production", the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is subtracted from the value of the total counter 223i, and the subtracted value is used as the V winning opening. If the remainder when divided by the opening / closing cycle of 74a (that is, "20000") is within the range of "10000 ≦ X <15000", the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a. In this case, the player is urged to shoot a ball during the "V winning chance production", the fluctuation production is suspended until the number of reserved balls for which the fluctuation shortening function is activated is reached, and at least the fluctuation production of the V open jackpot is started. By activating the fluctuation shortening function before, it is possible to change from a situation where the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a to a situation where the ball can win the V winning opening 74a.

The remaining time timer 223j is a counter for counting the production time of the “V winning chance production”. The value of the remaining time timer 223j is first initialized (for example, "0") in the initial setting (see S1001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Will be cleared). Then, when the execution lottery of the "V prize chance production" is won, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation production and the fluctuation during execution are held before the fluctuation production that triggered the winning of the "V prize chance production". The remaining time of the effect is extracted, and a value corresponding to the integrated time of the fluctuation time is set in the remaining time timer 223j (see S1305 in FIG. 40).

After that, in the main process (see FIG. 38), in the counter subtraction process (see FIG. 45) executed every "1 millisecond", the "V winning chance effect" is being executed, that is, the V winning chance effect flag. When 223f is turned on and it is determined that the value of the remaining time timer 223j is larger than "0" (see S1606: Yes in FIG. 45), the value of the remaining time timer 223j is "1". Is subtracted (see S1606 in FIG. 45). Then, when the value of the remaining time timer 223j is no longer larger than "0" (see S1607: No in FIG. 45), the "V winning chance effect" is configured to end.

In this way, when the "V prize chance production" is won, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation production held before the fluctuation production that triggers the execution of the "V prize chance production" and the fluctuation production being executed By setting a value corresponding to the remaining time of the remaining time timer 223j in the remaining time timer 223j and executing the "V winning chance production" based on the value of the remaining time timer 223j, the execution trigger of the "V winning chance production" is obtained. The start timing of the variable production and the end timing of the "V prize chance production" are matched, and a series of productions are performed in synchronization (immediately after the end of the "V prize chance production", the V prize chance production is possible. By starting it), it is possible to perform an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

The hold change counter 223k is a counter for drawing a display mode of the “hold change notice” in the hold symbol and the execution symbol in the cockpit display area Db. In the first embodiment, as the "holding change notice", the display color of the holding symbol and the execution symbol is changed from white (that is, "none"), which is a normal display mode, to "blue", which is a blue display mode, or It is configured to be changeable to "red" in the red display mode.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 by the hold ball number command received from the main control device 110, and the jackpot. The read-ahead process can be executed based on the random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the fluctuation pattern table 222d. In the look-ahead processing, the "hold change notice" is given by grasping the effect mode of the variation effect indicated by the hold ball number command and referring to the value of the hold change counter 223k and the hold change table 222f based on the effect mode. Whether or not to do it will be drawn.

The pending change counter 223k is sequentially added by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in the counter update process (see S1113 of FIG. 38) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the maximum value is increased. (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the hold change counter 223k is updated once (for example, 1 addition) for each loop of the main process.

Here, the pending change table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the pending change table 222f. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the hold change table 222f based on the value of the hold change counter 223k at that time, and displays the “hold change notice”. The aspect is determined.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the pending change table 222f, the variation effect of each special symbol is divided into a case of "loss" and a case of "big hit". Then, the divided groups are further divided according to the effect mode, and the value of the hold change counter 223k corresponding to the display mode of the "hold change notice" is assigned to each group.

Specifically, at the time of "loss" of the variable effect, for the "non-reach" effect mode, for the "normal reach" effect mode, for the "super reach" effect mode, and "super reach" effect mode, which can be selected at the time of the "loss". It is divided into groups for "special reach" production mode. Further, at the time of a big hit, it is divided into a group for a "normal reach" production mode, a "super reach" production mode, and a "special reach" production mode. Then, the possible values of the pending change counter 223k are associated with each of the divided groups.

In the hold change table 222f, in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "loss", the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to blue, "none" which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"). Two display modes of "blue" are selectably prepared, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode. In the first embodiment, when "None" is selected in which the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol does not change, the "pending change notice" is not executed.

In addition, in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" and the "normal effect mode" at the time of "loss" described later, the display mode of "red" in which the color of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol changes to red. The value of the pending change counter 223k is not associated so that is not selected. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is "red" in the "pending change notice", the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is "super". This is to confirm that the "more than reach" effect mode is executed. Therefore, in the "non-reach" production mode in which "super reach or higher" does not appear, "red" in the "pending change notice" is set not to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223k and the “hold change notice” in the “non-reach” effect mode at the time of “loss” is “0 to 98” and “0 to 98” for “none”. It is "99" for "blue". Since no value is assigned to "red", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 99%, the display mode of "blue" is 1%, and "red". The display mode of is set to be selected at a ratio of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected at the time of "non-reach" at the time of "loss", the display mode of "none" is easily selected (99%), and the "hold change notice" itself is unlikely to occur. It is set.

In the hold change table 222f, in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "loss", the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), "none", and changes to blue. Two display modes, "blue", are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode. In addition, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "loss", "super reach or higher" and "big hit display" do not appear as in the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss. Therefore, the value of the hold change counter 223k is not associated so that the display mode of "red" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to red is not selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223k and the “hold change notice” in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of “loss” is “0 to 89” and “blue” with respect to “none”. Is "90 to 99". Since no value is assigned to "red", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 90%, the display mode of "blue" is 10%, and the display mode is "red". The aspect is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "loss", the display mode of "none" is easily selected (90%), but the "non-reach" production mode at the time of "loss". The setting (1% → 10%) makes it easier to select the display mode of “blue”.

In the hold change table 222f, in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "loss", the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to blue, "none" which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"). Three display modes, "blue" and "red" that changes to red, are selectably prepared, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode. In addition, since the "super reach" production mode at the time of "loss" executes the variable element of "super reach", the display mode of "red" suggesting "super reach or higher" is selected, so that the display mode is changed on hold. The value of the counter 223k is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223k and the “hold change notice” in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of “loss” is “0 to 49” and “0 to 49” for “none”. It is "50 to 89" for "blue" and "90 to 99" for "red".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 50%, the display mode of "blue" is 40%, and the display mode is "red". The display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of "loss", the display mode of "blue" is higher than the "non-reach" production mode or the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "loss". The setting is easy to select (1%, 10% → 40%). In addition, the display mode of "red", which has a higher expectation of big hit than the display mode of "blue", is also set to be selectable.

In the hold change table 222f, the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is that the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol does not change "none (white)", changes to blue "blue", and red. Three display modes of changing "red" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode. In addition, since the "special reach" production mode at the time of "loss" executes the variable element of "special reach", the display mode of "red" suggesting "super reach or higher" is selected, so that the display mode is changed on hold. The value of the counter 223k is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223k and the “hold change notice” in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of “loss” is “0 to 29” and “0 to 29” for “none”. It is "30 to 79" for "blue" and "80 to 99" for "red".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 30%, the display mode of "blue" is 50%, and "red". The display mode is set to be selected at a ratio of 20%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "special reach" production mode at the time of "loss", the "non-reach" production mode at the time of "loss" or the "non-reach" production mode at the time of "loss" is the same as the "super reach" production mode at the time of "loss". The setting (1%, 10% → 30%) makes it easier to select the "blue" display mode than the "normal reach" effect mode. In addition, the setting (0%, 10% → 20%) makes it easier to select the "red" display mode than the "non-reach" effect mode, the "normal reach" effect mode, or the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "loss". It has become.

In this way, even if it is a variable effect of "loss", by executing an effect equivalent to the "pending change notice" that can occur even at the time of "big hit", "big hit" may occur. It is possible to increase the expectation of a person's jackpot and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously executing "holding change notice" and "V winning chance production".

Conventionally, when a look-ahead effect such as "hold change notice" is executed, the player expects a big hit in the change effect corresponding to the "hold change notice" at the stage when the "hold change notice" is displayed, and the player There is a tendency to stop firing the ball and wait for the game until the variation effect is executed. In this case, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced until the stop result of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the “pending change notice” is derived.

Therefore, even when the "hold change notice" and the "V winning chance production" are configured to be able to be executed at the same time and the "hold change notice" is displayed as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. It is possible to improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10 by encouraging the player to launch a ball by "V winning chance production". In addition, by overlapping the "pending change notice" and the "V winning chance production", the player's expectation for a big hit can be further amplified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, in the hold change table 222f, in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to "none", which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), and blue. Two display modes, "blue", are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode. In addition, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, since "super reach or higher" does not appear, the hold change counter is used so that the display mode of "red" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to red is not selected. The value of 223k is not associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223k and the “hold change notice” in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of “big hit” is “0 to 29” and “blue” with respect to “none”. Is "30 to 99". Since no value is assigned to "red", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 30%, the display mode of "blue" is 70%, and the display mode is "red". The aspect is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "big hit", the "blue" display mode is more likely to be selected than the "none" display mode (70%), and "missing". It is set so that the "pending change notice" is more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal reach" production mode at the time.

In the hold change table 222f, in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to blue, "none" which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"). Three display modes, "blue" and "red" that changes to red, are selectably prepared, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223k and the "hold change notice" in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is "0 to 19" and "0 to 19" with respect to "none". It is "20 to 79" for "blue" and "80 to 99" for "red".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 20%, the display mode of "blue" is 60%, and the display mode is "red". The display mode is set to be selected at a ratio of 20%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of "big hit", the "blue" display mode is more likely to be selected than the "none" display mode (60%), and "missing". It is set so that the "pending change notice" of the "blue" and "red" display modes can be more easily selected than in the case of the "super reach" production mode at the time of "" ("blue": 30% → 60%, " Red ": 10% → 20%).

In the hold change table 222f, in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to blue, "none" which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"). Three display modes, "blue" and "red" that changes to red, are selectably prepared, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223k and the “hold change notice” in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of “big hit” is “0 to 9” and “0 to 9” for “none”. It is "10 to 49" for "blue" and "50 to 99" for "red".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 40%, and the display mode is "red". The display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the "red" display mode is more likely to be selected than the "none" display mode or the "blue" display mode (50). %), And it is set so that the "pending change notice" of the "red" display mode is more easily selected than in the case of the "special reach" production mode at the time of "loss" (20% → 50%).

In this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the propriety and effect mode of the variable effect indicated by the hold ball number command, and is based on the propriety and effect mode. By configuring to determine whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" and the display mode, the result of the change effect is suggested to the player by the hold symbol before the change effect is executed, and the change effect is executed. Until then, by having the player predict whether or not the pending variable effect will be a big hit, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, by configuring the "hold change notice" to be easy to execute when the "big hit" is a variable effect, the appearance of the "hold change notice" gives the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the variable production of the "big hit", by simultaneously executing the "hold change notice" and the "V winning chance production", the display mode of the "hold change notice" is confirmed and the jackpot expectation is predicted. Based on the prediction result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to launch the ball in the "V winning chance production". Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The first reserved information storage area 223 m is information for performing a fluctuation effect of the first special symbol on hold, that is, is acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 with a start winning, and is a hold ball number command. This is an area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted by.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223m and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the first special symbol. It is configured to perform the production.

The second reserved information storage area 223n is information for performing a fluctuation effect of the second special symbol on hold, that is, is acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 with a start winning, and is a hold ball number command. This is an area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the second separate symbol transmitted by.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold information storage area 223n and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the second special symbol. It is configured to perform a production.

The execution information storage area 223o is acquired from the information of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning in the main control device 110. This is an area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the above-described first hold information storage is performed in order to execute the setting of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Information (counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) for performing a variation effect stored in the first reserved information storage first area of the area 223 m or the second reserved information storage second area of the second reserved information storage area 223n. Each value of) is shifted to this execution information storage area 223o.

Here, with reference to FIG. 23, details of the first reserved information storage area 223m, the second reserved information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o will be described. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the first reserved information storage area 223 m, the second reserved information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o.

The first reserved information storage area 223 m has four areas, the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223m1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and the jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored are stored. At least 223m2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223m3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223m4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Further, the second reserved information storage area 223n has four areas of the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, similarly to the first reserved information storage area 223m. In each of the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223n1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, respectively. At least 223n2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223n3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223n4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Further, in the execution information storage area 223o, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223o1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed is stored, and the jackpot type counter The jackpot type counter storage area 223o2 in which the value of C2 is stored, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223o3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and the variation type counter storage area in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At least 223o4 is provided.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223o is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed.

In addition, the first reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variation effect held first in time among the reserved first special symbol variation effects, and is the first hold. The second area for storing information is an area corresponding to the second oldest reserved variation effect of the first special symbol among the reserved variation effects of the first special symbol, and the first reserved information storage third area. The area is the area corresponding to the first special symbol variation effect that is held third in time among the reserved first special symbol variation effects, and the first hold information storage fourth area is reserved. This is the area corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, which is the fourth oldest reserved effect in terms of time among the variation effects of the first special symbol.

Further, the second reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect that is first reserved in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects, and is the second reserved area. The information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect held second in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects, and is the second reserved information storage third area. The area is the area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect that is held third in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects, and the second hold information storage fourth area is reserved. This is the area corresponding to the variational effect of the second special symbol, which is the fourth oldest reserved effect in terms of time among the variable effects of the second special symbol.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 and the corresponding special symbol Is extracted from the reserved ball count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the corresponding first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively. Jackpot random number counter storage area 223m1,223n1, jackpot type counter storage area 223m2,223n2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 223m3,223n3, variable type counter storage area 223m4 in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command. , 223n4.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4) and corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special held at that time is held. The number of fluctuation effects of the symbol is X, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command are held at the Xth position in time among the reserved first special symbol variation effects. Since it corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 in the first hold information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command in the first hold X area of the first hold ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold X area of the main control device 110 are stored in the first hold information storage X area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 is stored in the first hold information storage area 223 m or the second hold information storage area 223n. The process of shifting the input information to the execution information storage area 223o is executed. That is, when the hold information regarding the second special symbol exists, the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol held first in time is started, so that the second special symbol held first is executed. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the first area for storing the second reserved information corresponding to the variation effect of the current execution information storage area 223o corresponding to the variation effect currently being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223o1 to 223o4. On the other hand, when the hold information regarding the second special symbol does not exist and only the hold information regarding the first special symbol exists, the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol held first in time is started. Therefore, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first holding information storage first area corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the first reserved first special symbol are currently set. It is moved to each storage area 223o1 to 223o4 of the execution information storage area 223o corresponding to the variation effect during execution.

Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the execution information storage area 223o, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage first area. 2 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second holding information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second holding information storage second area, and the second The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage third area.

Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first hold information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the execution information storage area 223o, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first holding information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first holding information storage first area, and the first is 1 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the holding information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first holding information storage second area, and the first The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the holding information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first holding information storage third area.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223o. Further, in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas and the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively, the first reserved first to first reserved ball storage areas 203d of the main control device 110 are stored. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the 4 areas and the 2nd reserved 1st to 4th areas of the 2nd reserved ball storage area 203e are stored. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area. It is stored in 223o, the first reserved information storage area 223m, and the second reserved information storage area 223n.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the pre-reading process such as the above-mentioned "hold change notice" or "V winning chance production" is performed, it is held by the sub first hold ball number counter 223b and the sub second hold ball number counter 223c. Grasp the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suspended among the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas and the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are pre-read, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect is a big hit, the fluctuation time, and the like.

Specifically, for example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223b is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223c is "0", the variation effect of the first special symbol is produced. Since the number of reserved balls in the first holding information is 1 and the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the second special symbol is 0, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for the first holding information storage first area. Is read ahead and a judgment is made. Further, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is "4", the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the 2nd special symbol is 4 times, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read and determined for the 4th area for storing the 2nd reserved information. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the voice lamp control device 113 accesses RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. Can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a first hold information storage area 223 m and a second hold information storage area 223 n, and changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol held by the main control device 110. Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effect are also stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223 m and the second hold information storage area 223n are also stored. By referring to, the look-ahead process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113. That is, when the reserved 1st special symbol and / and the 2nd special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will be the variation time? Etc.) can be determined before the execution of the variable effect to determine the execution of various effects.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 starts the variation effect in which the V open jackpot occurs by pre-reading the effect mode of each variation effect stored in the first hold information storage area 223 m and the second hold information storage area 223n. When a prize is generated, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the ball can win a prize in the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot is opened. Then, when the V open jackpot is won, the "V winning chance production" is executed at a predetermined ratio, and when the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a as it is, the "V winning chance production" is in progress. Encourage the player to fire the ball. As a result, when the fluctuation effect is suspended until the number of reserved balls for which the fluctuation reduction function is activated is reached, the fluctuation reduction function is activated at least before the start of the fluctuation effect of the V open jackpot, thereby winning a V prize. It is possible to change from a situation in which the ball cannot win in the mouth 74a to a situation in which the ball can win in the V winning mouth 74a.

The shift process described above in the first hold information storage area 223 m, the second hold information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o is the number of reserved balls (variation pattern) when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received. Based on the values of the sub 1st reserved ball count counter 223b and the sub 2nd reserved ball count counter 223c before the update based on the reception of the command and the stop type command is performed, the 1st reserved ball number storage 1st to 4th areas Data is moved (shifted) only in the areas corresponding to the reserved fluctuation effects among the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas.

For example, the value of the sub first hold ball counter 223b before the update when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "4", and the entire area of the first hold information storage area 223 m (first hold information storage). It is assumed that the data is stored in the first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first hold information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223o, the data in the second hold information storage second area is shifted to the first hold information storage first area, and the first hold information is stored. The data in the storage third area is shifted to the first hold information storage second area, and the data in the first hold information storage fourth area is shifted to the first hold information storage third area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub 1st reserved ball counter 223b before the update when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the 1st reserved information storage 1st area is executed. It shifts to 223o, shifts the data in the first hold information storage second area to the first hold information storage first area, and ends the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold information storage third and fourth areas where the fluctuation effect is not held, the number of data shifts can be reduced. , The control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas is stored in an area where the area number is one smaller (execution information storage area 223o or It may be configured to shift to the first reserved information storage first to third areas or the second reserved information storage first to third areas), respectively. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in each of the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 39) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and "V" It controls continuous advance notice effects such as "winning chance effect" or "pending change notice".

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 36. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and the main process will be described.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, a V drive process for opening / closing the V winning port 74a in the V winning device 72 is executed (S101). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the V winning opening 74a is opened and closed at a cycle of 20 seconds. Specifically, by switching the V distribution drive solenoid 73c on and off every "10 seconds", the drive mode of the distribution plate 73a that opens and closes the V winning opening 74a is changed. ..

Here, the V drive process (S101) will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a V drive process (S101) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit.

In this V drive process (S101), first, the value of the V drive timer 203k is added by "1" (S151). Since the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) of the main controller 110 is executed every "4 milliseconds", the value of the V drive timer 203k is also "4 milliseconds" by performing the processing of S151. It increases by "1" for each.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V drive timer 203k added in S151 is larger than "2500" (S152). As a result of the determination, if the value of the V drive timer 203k is not larger than "2500" (S152: No), it means that the switching timing of the drive mode of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c has not yet arrived. The process is skipped and the V drive process (S101) is terminated. After the V drive process (S101) is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

On the other hand, in the process of S152, when it is determined that the value of the V drive timer 203k is larger than "2500" (S152: Yes), at least "2500 x 4 mm" after the V drive timer 203k is initialized. Since "seconds = 10 seconds" has passed, the switching timing of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c has arrived. Therefore, next, in order to switch the drive mode of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c, it is first determined whether or not the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is on (S153). When it is determined that the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is on (S153: Yes), it is the timing when "10 seconds" have passed since the V distribution drive solenoid 73c was turned on, so that the V distribution is performed. The drive solenoid 73c is turned off (S154), the value of the V drive timer 203k is cleared to "0" (S157), and the V drive process (S101) is completed. After the V drive process (S101) is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). By turning off the V distribution drive solenoid 73c in the process of S154, the left path 74 is blocked by the distribution device 73 and the right path 75 is opened.

On the other hand, in the process of S153, if it is determined that the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is not on, that is, if the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is off (S153: No), the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is used. Since it is the timing when "10 seconds" have passed since it was turned off, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c was turned on (S155), and the V distribution drive solenoid 73c was turned on, so that the V winning opening 74a was opened (S). A V-opening command indicating that the timing (the ball can flow in) has been set (S156), and the process shifts to S157. By turning on the V distribution drive solenoid 73c in the process of S155, the right side path 75 is blocked by the distribution device 73 and the left side path 74 is opened.

The V-opening command set here is immediately transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 in FIG. 23), which will be described later. In this way, by immediately transmitting the V opening command to the voice lamp control device 113 immediately after the V winning port 74a is opened, the opening timing of the V winning port 74a and the voice lamp grasped by the main control device 110 It is possible to synchronize (substantially synchronize) with the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a grasped by the control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this V opening command, it sets "20000" in the sub V drive timer 223d provided in the RAM 223 (see S1202 in FIG. 39), and the timing at which the V winning opening 74a is opened. It is configured so that it can be grasped that it has become.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. After the completion of the V drive process (S101), the external output process is then executed (S102). In the timer interrupt processing and the main processing, commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S102, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, as described above, the V open command set in the V drive process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the voice lamp control device performs the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 27) and the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 28) which is one of the special figure fluctuation processing. Send to 113. In addition, the opening command, V winning device opening command, V winning device closing command, variable winning device opening command, variable winning device closing command, V acquisition command, ending command, etc. set in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 29) described later are executed. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball launch signal set when launching a ball in the launch control process described later (see S113 in FIG. 24) is transmitted to the launch control device 112. In this external output process (S102), a V-opening command that can be directly linked to the addition of the game value (“probability fluctuation state”) may be preferentially output.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S103), and then the jackpot process for executing the process at the time of the jackpot of the first symbol (third symbol) is executed (S104). .. This jackpot process (S104) will be described later in FIG. 29.

After S104, next, the ordinary electric service control process for executing the drive control process of the ordinary electric service 71a is executed (S105). Briefly, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbol, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, " When the "○" symbol) appears and becomes a hit state, the normal electric service 71a is opened for a predetermined time, while when the lost symbol of the normal symbol (for example, the "x" symbol) appears, the normal electric service 71a Keep closed.

After the process of S105, the process of reading various winning switches is then executed (S106). That is, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch 208 is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S102) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next. Further, based on the ball detection information in the V winning port switch 74b, a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is provided with a V acquisition command indicating that the ball has won in the V winning port 74a to the voice lamp control device 113. Set to. As a result, the V acquisition command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S102) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value is cleared. The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure hit counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure per counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (first embodiment). Then, when they reach "899", "99", "99", "99", "99"), respectively, they are cleared to "0" respectively. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure hit counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure hit counter C4. Is read as the initial value of, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure per counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is executed (S109). The details of this start winning process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

Next, a gate passing process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S110). When it is determined in the gate passing process (S110) that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is acquired from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is the normal figure. It is stored in the holding ball storage area 203h, and the holding number of the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol holding lamp 84.

After the gate passage process (S110) is executed, a process for dynamically displaying each special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 based on the process content of the start winning process (S109) and a third symbol display device 81 The special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol according to the above is executed (S111). The details of the special figure variation processing (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

Next, based on the processing content of the gate passing process (S110), it is a setting process for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not, and for performing variable display of the normal symbol based on the determination result on the ordinary symbol display device 83. Figure variation processing is executed (S112). In this normal symbol variation processing (S112), a lottery for winning or losing a normal symbol is performed according to whether the winning probability of the normal symbol is a high probability state or a low probability state. Then, the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the display result according to the hit / fail result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83.

After executing the normal figure fluctuation process (S112), the launch control process is executed (S113), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S114) to end the timer interrupt process. ..

The launch control process (S113) is provided on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining whether to turn on / off the firing of a ball. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S102) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the start winning process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S109).

The start winning process (S109) determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, and if there is a winning, the winning value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is won. The process of storing (holding) in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the ports 64 and 71 is executed. In addition, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this start winning process (S109), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the first start port switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) into the first start port 64, which is read in the switch read process (see S106 in FIG. 24). The ball entering the first starting port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 24).

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64 (there was a starting prize) (S201: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the first held in the main control device 110). 1 It is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol (N1) is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, even if there is a prize in the first start port 64, if the number of operation pending balls N1 <4 (S202: No), this start prize process (S109) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). Return to.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N1 <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of pending balls N1) is added by 1 (S203). Then, since it is a prize to the first starting port 64 corresponding to the first special symbol this time, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S204), and processing is performed. To S209.

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting port 64 (S201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting port 71 (starting winning). (S205). Here, as in the case of the first starting port 64, the second starting port switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) into the second starting port 71, which is read in the switch reading process (see S106 in FIG. 24). Based on the output signal of, the ball entering the second starting port 71 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 24).

When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 71 (there was a starting prize) (S205: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the second held in the main control device 110). 2 It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number N2 of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S206). Then, if there is no winning in the second starting port 71 (S205: No), or even if there is a winning in the second starting port 71, the number of pending balls N2 <4 (S206: No), this The start winning process (S109) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N2 <4 (S206: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of pending balls N2) is added by 1 (S207). Then, since the winning is given to the second starting port 71 corresponding to the second special symbol this time, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S208) and processed. To S209.

In the processing of S209, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 7) and set as the storage destination in S204 or S208. Of the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the first reserved ball storage area 203e provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, or the second reserved ball storage area 203d, the first reserved ball storage area 203d When specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball counter 203a. Each is held (stored) in the storage area 203d4 (S209). When the second reserved ball storage area 203e is designated as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 and the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b are stopped. It is held (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4, respectively (S209).

Specifically, for example, in the processing of S204 based on the winning of the first starting port 64, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S203. If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the first holding first area. If the value of the first reserved sphere counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved sphere counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, in each storage area of the first hold third area, if the value of the first hold ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", in each storage area of the first hold fourth area, counters C1 to C3, respectively. , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Further, for example, in the processing of S208 based on the winning of the second starting port 71, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination, and the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after the addition by the processing of S207. If is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved first area. If the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved third area, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "4", counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved fourth area. , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of operating reserved balls N1 or the number of operating reserved balls N2) after the addition by the processing of S203 or S207, and the first by the processing of S209. Voice the hold ball number command including each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the hold ball storage area 203d or the second hold ball storage area 203e. In order to transmit to the lamp control device 113, the hold ball number command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S210). As a result, the hold ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 in FIG. 24) that is executed next. When the process of S210 is completed, the start winning process (S109) is completed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

As the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command in the processing of S210, the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S209 may be used, or the first hold in the processing of S209. The value stored (held) in the ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e may be read out and used.

Further, in the processing of S201 and S205, when a ball wins the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71 at the same time, the winning process of the ball to the first starting port 64 is preferentially executed, and the second starting Wait for the ball winning process to enter the mouth 71, and execute the ball winning process to the waiting second starting port 71 in the start winning process (S109) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). It may be configured as.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a special figure variation process (S111), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this special figure variation processing (S111).

This special symbol variation processing (S111) controls the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 regarding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing (S111), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently a big hit (S301). The jackpots include during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (that is, the jackpot opening). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game (that is, the jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S301, if the jackpot of any of the special symbols is in progress (S301: Yes), the special symbol variation process (S111) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

In the processing of S301, if it is determined that the jackpot is not being achieved (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S302), and the special symbol is determined. If the display mode of the display device 37 is not during dynamic display (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. ..

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b (the second special reserved in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation (N2) of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the symbol is larger than “0” (S304). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variable start processing (S310), which will be described later, starts the execution of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable effects) related to the second special symbol (variable effects). This is because the number of reserved balls related to the special symbol is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S306). This data shift process (S306) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second hold first to fourth areas of the second hold ball storage area 203e toward the hold ball execution area 203f. 2 Hold 1st area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold The data in each area is shifted, such as in the third area.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is "0" (S304: No), then the first reserved ball number counter 203a It is determined whether or not the value of (the number of operation-holding balls N1 of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is larger than "0" (S307). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S307: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol. First, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S308). This is because the variable start process (S310), which will be described later, starts the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable effect) related to the first special symbol. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S309). This data shift process (S309) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first hold first to fourth areas of the first hold ball storage area 203d toward the hold ball execution area 203f. 1 Hold 1st area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold The data in each area is shifted, such as in the third area.

After the data shift processing of S306 or S309, the fluctuation start processing for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the hold ball execution area 203f by the data shift processing. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). The fluctuation start processing (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

In the process of S307, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S307: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not the state is in the state, that is, whether or not the demonstration is in progress (S311). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation holding ball number N1 or operation). It is determined that the demonstration is in progress until it is determined that any value of the number of reserved balls N2) is larger than "0".

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S311: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as it is. The demo command set in the process of S312 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 in FIG. 24). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control to display the effect.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation effect is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation is stopped, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined in the process of S311 that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S312 when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the execution and the fluctuation stop. As a result, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the player can be shown the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration effect immediately.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed (S313). ). The display time during dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display time. If (variation time) has not elapsed (S313: No), the display of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

In the first embodiment, in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, for example, from the start of the dynamic display until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, the second LED group 37b corresponding to the fluctuating special symbol ( That is, a display mode in which the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2) is turned on or off in a predetermined lighting pattern is set.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variable time) of the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S313: Yes), the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol. (S315). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S310) described later with reference to FIG. 28. In the fluctuation start processing (S310), whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the processing of S306 or S309. If it is a jackpot, a jackpot type counter The symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is determined by the value of C2.

In the first embodiment, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a jackpot, each lighting pattern corresponds to the type of the jackpot. The LED group is lit and displayed.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the display of the second LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37. In order to synchronize and display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S316), and the process shifts to S317. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a finalized manner by receiving the display confirmation command.

In the process of S317, in order to determine whether or not it is in the “probability fluctuation state”, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than “0” (S317). This ST counter is used when the probability variation transition flag 203j is set to ON in the jackpot end processing (see S411 in FIG. 29) in the jackpot processing described later, that is, when the "probability fluctuation state" is started. It is configured so that "100" is set (see S482 in FIG. 33).

In the processing of S317, if the value of the ST counter is not "0" (S317: Yes), it is a "probability fluctuation state", and the dynamic display (variation effect) of any of the special symbols has been completed once. The value of the ST counter is subtracted by 1 (S318), and the process shifts to S319. On the other hand, in the processing of S317, if the value of the ST counter is "0" or less (S317: No), it is a "normal game state" or a "time shortened state", so the processing of S318 is skipped and the processing is performed. Move to S319. It should be noted that the game state is configured to shift from the "probability fluctuation state" to the "normal game state" at the timing when the value of the ST counter subtracted in the process of S318 becomes "0" (not shown). ..

In the process of S319, in order to determine whether or not it is in the "time reduction state", it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than "0" (S319). The time saving counter is set to "100" when the probability variation transition flag 203j is off in the jackpot end processing (see S411 in FIG. 29) in the jackpot processing described later (see S484 in FIG. 33).

In the processing of S319, if the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (S319: Yes), it is in the "time reduction state", and the dynamic display (variation effect) of any of the special symbols has ended once. The value of the time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (S320), the special figure variation processing (S110) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). On the other hand, in the processing of S319, if the value of the time reduction counter is "0" or less (S319: No), it is not in the "time reduction state", so the processing of S320 is skipped and this special figure variation processing (S111) Is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). It should be noted that the game state is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state" at the timing when the value of the time reduction counter subtracted in the processing of S320 becomes "0" (not shown). ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the fluctuation start processing (S310), which is one of the special figure fluctuation processing (S111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S310). In this fluctuation start processing (S310), a big hit or a loss lottery (big hit lottery) is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game state, and the special symbol display device 37 and the third 3. The dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start processing (S310), first, in order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than "0" (S321). As a result of the determination, if the value of the ST counter is "0" (S321: No), the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time shortened state", and the jackpot probability of each special symbol is the low probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S322), and the processing is shifted to S324. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ST counter is larger than "0" (S323: Yes), the gaming state is the "probability fluctuation state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S323), and the processing is shifted to S324.

In the process of S324, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8) set in S322 or S323. The jackpot lottery (win / fail determination) process is performed (S324).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the gaming state (mode) at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), “7,307” , 582 ”is defined as a jackpot random number value. In addition, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), “28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866” is a big hit. It is defined as a random value.

In the process of S324, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match, the jackpot is hit. It is determined that. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S324 (S324: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special figure 1 jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol. Based on the table 202b1 (see FIG. 9A) or the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 9B) corresponding to the second special symbol, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S325).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, "15 rounds V open jackpot" or "7 rounds V open". It is determined whether it is a "big hit", a "15 round V closed jackpot", or a "7 round V closed jackpot". Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 (display mode of the second LED group 37b) is set.

Specifically, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. The jackpot type is determined based on the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 9A). Further, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special feature. FIG. 2 The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 9B).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S326), and the process proceeds to S329. Specifically, the jackpot type (display mode) determined in S325, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, the first reserved ball number counter 203a or (and) the second. A rough effect mode is selected based on the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, and a specific dynamic display is performed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected rough effect mode. The dynamic time (fluctuation time) of (variation effect) is determined. In the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used is selected according to the jackpot type (display mode).

Specifically, in the process of S326, in the C table 202d3 or the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the jackpot, it is associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f. Select the desired production mode. Then, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit in the process of S324 (S324: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S327). In the process of S327, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f and the first hold ball number counter. Based on the value of 203a or (and) the second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, as the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode and a "non-reach" effect mode are used. "(Normal)" production mode, "Normal reach (shortened)" production mode, "Normal reach (normal)" production mode, "Super reach (shortened)" production mode, "Super reach (normal)" production mode, "Special reach (shortened)" production mode ) ”Direction mode or“ Special reach (normal) ”production mode is set. In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is stopped corresponding to each effect mode depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a “probability fluctuation state”, a “time shortening state”, or a “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the pattern selection counter C3 is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S328), and the process proceeds to S329. In the process of S328, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol. Specifically, in the group of the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S327, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Select the variation pattern associated with. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

In this way, the effect mode and fluctuation pattern setting process at the time of big hit and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number values C3 and CS1. Therefore, the program can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

In the process of S329, the variation that notifies the display control device 114 of the variation time according to the variation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S326 and S328. Set the pattern command (S329). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is "15 rounds V open jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "40 seconds" is selected, the jackpot -A variation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "15 rounds V open jackpot" and "40 seconds" is set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and a fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "35 seconds" is selected, a fluctuation pattern command indicating loss and "super reach" of "35 seconds" is set. .. In this way, even if the variation effect has the same variation time, by setting the variation pattern command together with the propriety of the variation effect and the content of the rough variation pattern, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform the effect mode including the result. It is possible to grasp the content and the fluctuation time of the above, and to determine the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect in detail based on the information.

Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S325 or S327 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S330), and the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 24). ) Return. Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "15 round V open jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.) is not specified. Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "15 round V open jackpot". If the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "7 rounds V open jackpot", the "7 rounds" without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "3" symbol, etc.) Set a stop type command that indicates "V open jackpot".

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach (normal)" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the specific third symbol (for example, "787") is not specified and the game is lost. Set a stop type command to indicate that it is the "super reach (normal)" effect mode of the time. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach (shortened)" production mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737") is not specified, and the command is lost. Set a stop type command that indicates that the "normal reach (shortened)" effect mode of. Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach (normal)" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the specific third symbol (for example, "258") is not specified and the game is lost. Set a stop type command to indicate that it is a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode of time.

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variation effect in the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success or failure and makes them. For details, the stop result of the fluctuation effect can be determined based on the information of.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are executed in the process of S102 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command or a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, and transmits the fluctuation pattern command or the display type command to the display control device 114.

Next, the jackpot process (S104), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this jackpot process (S104).

In this jackpot process (S104), when a jackpot of a special symbol occurs, the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening of the variable winning device 65 and / or the V winning device 72 is set according to the type of jackpot, and the variable winning device The opening time of the 65 and / or V winning device 72 is set. Then, in the case of the jackpot state, the winning device open / close control process (S409) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 is executed, and the jackpot state ends at the timing when the jackpot state ends. The jackpot end process (S411) to be set is executed.

In the jackpot process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S401). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is not hit (S401: No), then it is determined whether or not the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is completed (S402). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is not completed (S402: No), this jackpot process (S104) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). If the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is completed (S402: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the dynamic display (variation effect) (S403).

As a result of the determination in S403, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the dynamic display (variation effect) (S403: No), the jackpot process (S104) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 24). See). On the other hand, if it is determined in the dynamic display (variable effect) that the jackpot has been won (S403: Yes), in order to execute the control regarding the winning jackpot, first, is the number of rounds of the winning jackpot 15R? Whether or not, that is, whether or not the jackpot type "15 round V open jackpot" or "15 round V closed jackpot" is won is determined (S404).

As a result of the determination in S404, if the number of rounds of the winning jackpot is 15R (S404: Yes), the round counter is set to "15" in order to perform the opening control of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 15 times in this jackpot. Is set (S405), and the process shifts to S407. On the other hand, when the number of winning rounds of the jackpot is not 15R, that is, when the number of winning rounds of the jackpot is 7R (S404: No), the opening control of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 is set to 7 in this jackpot. In order to perform this time, "7" is set in the round counter (S406), and the process shifts to S407. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), the round is controlled while the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 is openly controlled. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot being executed is terminated.

In the process of S407, in order to transmit the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot to the voice lamp control device 113, the opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S407), and then the jackpot (In the first embodiment, "10 seconds" common to all jackpot types) is set (S408), the jackpot process (S104) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). ..

If it is determined in the process of S401 that the jackpot has already been hit (S401: Yes), the winning device opening / closing control process (S409) for executing the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 30, a winning device open / close control process (S409), which is one process of the jackpot process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the winning device open / close control process (S409). As described above, in this winning device open / close control process (S409), the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 is based on the number of times the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 is opened set in the jackpot process (S104). Executes opening / closing control.

In this winning device open / close control process (S409), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning device 72 is open (S421). As a result of the determination, if the V winning device 72 is open (S421: Yes), the V winning device opening / closing process (S422) that controls the opening / closing of the open V winning device 72 is performed, and this winning device opening / closing process (S422) is performed. S409) is finished. After the completion of the winning device opening / closing process (S409), the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 29). The details of this V-winning device opening process (S422) will be described later.

In the process of S421, when it is determined that the V winning device 72 is not open (S421: No), then it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 65 is open (S423). As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device 65 is open (S423: Yes), the variable winning device opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the open variable winning device 65 is performed (S424), and this winning device opening / closing process (S424) is performed. S409) is finished. After the completion of the winning device opening / closing process (S409), the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 29). The details of this variable winning device opening process (S424) will be described later.

If it is determined in the processing of S423 that the variable winning device 65 is not open (S423: No), then the timing (that is, the timing) in which the opening time set in S408 of the jackpot processing (see FIG. 29) has elapsed (that is, It is determined whether or not (immediately after the end of the opening time) (S425). As a result of the determination, if the opening time has elapsed (S425: Yes), in order to start the first round of the jackpot game, whether or not the jackpot type in this jackpot is a V open jackpot, that is, the V winning device 72 is set. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is to be opened (that is, "15 round V open jackpot" or "7 round V open jackpot") (S426).

As a result of the determination in S426, when it is determined that it is a V open jackpot, that is, when it is determined that it is a "15 round V open jackpot" or a "7 round V open jackpot" (S426: Yes), one round. In order to open the V winning device 72 to the eyes, first, the opening setting of the V winning device 72 (for example, turning on the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b) is performed (S427). Next, a V-winning device release command indicating that the V-winning device 72 is released is generated, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S428), and the process shifts to S429.

The V winning device release command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 in FIG. 24). Upon receiving this V winning device release command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes various controls indicating that the V winning device 72 is open (for example, generation of a display V winning device opening command). It is configured.

In the process of S429, the maximum opening time of the V winning device 72 (“5 seconds” in the first embodiment) is set (S429). Then, "10" is set to the value of the winning counter (not shown) for counting the number of winning balls to the V winning device 72 or the variable winning device 65 (S430), and this winning device opening / closing process (S409) is performed. finish. After the completion of the winning device opening / closing process (S409), the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 29).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is not a V open jackpot as a result of the determination in S426, that is, it is determined to be a "15 round V closed jackpot" or a "7 round V closed jackpot" (S426: No). In order to open the variable winning device 65 in the first round, first, the variable winning device 65 is set to open (for example, the large winning opening solenoid 65c is turned on) (S431). Next, a variable winning device release command indicating that the variable winning device 65 is released is generated, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S432), and the process shifts to S433.

The variable winning device release command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 in FIG. 24). Upon receiving the variable winning device release command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes various controls (for example, generation of a display variable winning device opening command) indicating that the variable winning device 65 is open. It is configured.

In the process of S433, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 (“30 seconds” in the first embodiment) is set (S433), and the process shifts to S430.

In the processing of S425, when it is determined that the opening time set in S408 of the jackpot processing (see FIG. 29) has not elapsed (S425: No), the processing during opening of the V winning device (see FIG. 31) described later It is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed the interval time set in S453 or S470 of the variable winning device opening process (see FIG. 32) described later (S434). As a result of the determination, if the interval time has elapsed (S434: Yes), the process shifts to S431 in order to start any of the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the process of S434, if it is determined that the timing does not allow the interval time to elapse, the winning device open / close control process (S409) is terminated. After the completion of the winning device opening / closing process (S409), the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 29).

Here, with reference to FIG. 31, the V winning device opening processing (S422), which is one of the winning device opening / closing control processing (S409) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the V winning device (S422). In this V-winning device opening process (S422), it is determined whether or not a ball is detected by the V-winning port switch 74b, and whether or not the closing condition of the open V-winning device 72 is satisfied. Execute processing etc.

In the process during opening of the V winning device (S422), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening switch 74b is turned on, that is, whether or not the ball has won the V winning opening 74a (S441).

In the processing of S441, if the V winning opening switch 74b is not turned on (S441: No), the ball has not won in the V winning opening 74a, so the processing of S442 to S444 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S445. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S441, when the V winning opening switch 74b is turned on (S441: Yes), the ball has already won the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open, and the probability variation transition flag 203j is turned on. It is determined whether or not it is done (S442). As a result of the determination, if the probability variation transition flag 203j is not turned on (S442: No), it is the first time that the ball has won the V winning opening 74a since the V winning device 72 was opened, so the probability variation transition flag 203j is set to on. (S443). Next, a V acquisition command indicating the winning of the ball to the V winning port 74a is generated, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S444), and the process shifts to S445.

The V acquisition command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 in FIG. 24). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this V acquisition command, the ball wins the V winning opening 74a, and various controls related to the fanfare effect (for example, indicating that a "probability fluctuation state" is given after the jackpot ends (for example). It is configured to execute (generation of display V acquisition command, etc.).

On the other hand, in the processing of S442, when it is determined that the probability variation transition flag 203j is turned on (S442: Yes), the ball has already won the V winning opening 74a, so the processing of S443 and S444 is skipped. Then, the process shifts to S445.

In the process of S445, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the V winning device 72 set in S429 of the above-mentioned winning device opening / closing control process (S409) has elapsed (S445). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the V winning device 72 has elapsed (S445: Yes), the closing condition of the V winning device 72 is satisfied, and the closing timing of the V winning device 72 in that round is obtained. The process shifts to S450 in order to clear the value of the counter "0" (S446) and close the V winning device 72. The closing process of the V winning device 72 from S450 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S445, if the opening time of the V winning device 72 has not elapsed (S445: No), then the ball wins in the V winning device 72 and before the distribution in the V winning device 72. It is determined whether or not the V winning device switch (not shown) provided on the path 72c (see FIG. 4) is turned on (S447). As a result of the determination, if the V winning device switch is turned on (S447: Yes), it means that the ball has flowed into the V winning device 72, so the value of the winning counter (not shown) is subtracted by 1 (S448). ), Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter subtracted by 1 is larger than "0" (S449). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S449: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 or more balls are won in the V winning device 72 and V winning. Since the closing condition of the device 72 is satisfied, the process shifts to S450 in order to close the V winning device 72.

In the process of S447, when it is determined that the V winning device switch is not turned on (S447: No), or in the processing of S449, it is determined that the value of the winning counter is larger than "0". If (S449: Yes), the closing condition of the V winning device 72 is not satisfied, and in order to continue opening the V winning device 72, the processes of S450 to S453 are skipped and the V winning device is opened. The intermediate processing (S422) is completed. After the completion of the V-winning device opening processing (S422), the process returns to the winning device open / close control process (see FIG. 30).

In the closing process of the V winning device 72 from S450, first, the closing setting of the V winning device 72 (for example, turning off the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b) is performed (S450), and then the V is applied to the voice lamp control device 113. A V winning device closing command indicating that the winning device 72 has been closed is set (S451), and the process shifts to S452. The V winning device closing command set in the process of S451 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next as an external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 in FIG. 24). ), It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, in the process of S452, since the V winning device 72 opens and closes and one round (that is, the first round) is digested, the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1 (S452), and the next round (that is, that is). The interval time (for example, "2 seconds") until the start (variable winning device 65 is opened) is set (S453), the V winning device opening process (S422) is completed, and the winning is won. Return to the device open / close control process (see FIG. 30).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a variable winning device opening process (S424), which is one process of the winning device opening / closing control process (S409) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the process during opening of the variable winning device (S424). In this variable winning device opening process (S424), a process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened is satisfied is executed.

In this variable winning device opening process (S424), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in S433 of the above-mentioned winning device opening / closing control process (S409) has elapsed (S461). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has elapsed (S461: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is satisfied, and the closing timing of the variable winning device 65 in that round is obtained. The process shifts to S466 in order to clear the value of the counter "0" (S462) and close the variable winning device 65. The closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S466 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S461, unless the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has elapsed (S461: No), then the large winning opening switch (shown) provided in the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. It is determined whether or not the ball has been turned on, that is, whether or not the ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 65a (S463).

In the process of S463, if the ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 65a (S463: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S464), and then the value of the winning counter subtracted by 1 is from "0". It is determined whether or not the value is large (S465). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S465: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 or more balls are won in the large winning opening 65a and a variable winning is made. Since the closing condition of the device 65 is satisfied, the process shifts to S466 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

In the processing of S463, when it is determined that the ball has not won the large winning opening 65a (S463: No), or in the processing of S465, the value of the winning counter is larger than "0". If it is determined (S465: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is not satisfied, and in order to continue opening the variable winning device 65, the processing of S466 to S470 is skipped and the variable winning device 65 is skipped. The processing (S424) during device opening is terminated. After the completion of the variable winning device opening process (S424), the process returns to the winning device opening / closing control process (see FIG. 30).

In the closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S466, first, the variable winning device 65 is closed (for example, the large winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off) (S466), and then the voice lamp control device 113 is given a variable winning. A variable winning device closing command indicating that the device 65 has been closed is set (S467), and the process shifts to S468. The variable winning device closing command set in the process of S467 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next as an external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 in FIG. 24). ), The sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, in the processing of S468, since one round of the variable winning device 65 was exhausted, the value of the round counter was decremented by 1 (S468), and whether or not the value of the deducted round counter was greater than "0". (S469). When the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S469: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (the number of remaining open times of the variable winning device 65) remains. Therefore, the interval time (for example, "2 seconds") until the next variable winning device 65 is opened is set (S470), the variable winning opening processing (S424) is terminated, and the winning device opening / closing control process (S440) is completed. (See FIG. 30).

On the other hand, in the processing of S469, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S469: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the V winning device 72 and the V winning device 72 in this jackpot Since all the opening operations of the variable winning device 65 have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the interval time is not set (that is, S470 is skipped), and this variable winning device opening process (S424) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the winning device open / close control process (see FIG. 30).

Returning to the jackpot process (S104) of FIG. 29, the description will be continued. After the completion of the winning device open / close control process (see FIG. 30) in S409, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S410). As a result of the determination, if the round counter is a value larger than "0" (S410: Yes), the jackpot state is continued, so that the jackpot end setting process S411 is skipped and this jackpot process (S104) is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S410, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S410: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the V winning device 72 and the V winning device 72 in this jackpot Since all the opening operations of the variable winning device 65 have been completed, the jackpot end process (S411) is performed and the jackpot process (S104) is terminated in order to end the jackpot state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 33, a jackpot end process (S411), which is one process of the hit process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S411). In this jackpot end process (S411), a process of setting an ST counter and a time saving counter is executed based on the winning jackpot type.

In this jackpot end process (S411), first, it is determined whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a during this jackpot and the probability variation transition flag 203j is turned on (S481). As a result of the determination, if the probability change transition flag 203j is turned on (S481: Yes), the ball has won the V winning opening 74a, so that the game state after the jackpot is finished is dynamically displayed with a special symbol (variable effect). ) Is executed 100 times, so that the ST counter value is set to "100" (S482), the probability variation transition flag 203j is set to off (S483), and the process goes to S485. Transition.

On the other hand, in the processing of S481, if the probability variation transition flag 203j is not turned on (S481: No), the ball has not won the V winning opening 74a during this jackpot, so the transition condition to the "probability fluctuation state" Is not established. Therefore, in order to set the game state after the big hit to the "time reduction state" until the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed 100 times, "100" is set to the value of the time reduction counter (S484). ), The process shifts to S485.

Next, in the process of S485, an ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending effect is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S485). Then, the jackpot end setting process for setting the ending time and the like is performed (S486), the jackpot end process (S411) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 29). The ending command set in the process of S485 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 in FIG. 24) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that the jackpot ends, controls the lamp, and transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 sends the display control device 114. Based on the reception of the display ending command, control is performed so that the ending effect (for example, suggestion of the game state after the end of the big hit) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 29), it is set whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is the "probability fluctuation state" depending on whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, it is possible to create a playability of how to make a ball win in the V winning opening 74a which is driven to open and close at a fixed cycle, to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the NMI interrupt process executed in the main control device 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The MPU 201 in which the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power failure occurrence information (S801). ), Ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, weight processing (“1 second” in the first embodiment). ) Is executed (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is shifted to S913 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S913 even in such a case.

As will be described in S926 of FIG. 36, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to “0” (S914), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of shutting off the drive power is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the sphere can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the initial setting (that is, off) of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is performed (S910), and the value of the V drive timer 203k is initialized (that is, that is) according to the initial setting of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c. "0" is cleared), and the process shifts to S912. In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the process is started from the state where the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned off, that is, the state where the V winning port 74a is closed, so that when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Even if the V winning opening 74a is opened by turning on the V distribution drive solenoid 73c, the game can always be started from the state where the V winning opening 74a is closed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a drive abnormality or the like of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c, and it is possible to suppress the winning of a ball into the V winning opening 74a based on the drive abnormality.

If a momentary power failure or voltage drop (so-called momentary power failure) occurs, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c and the V drive timer 203k are not initialized, and the state before the momentary power failure occurs is maintained. You may. When a momentary power failure occurs, the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 may be maintained. In that case, the opening / closing mode of the V winning opening 74a recognized by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device. If there is a discrepancy between the opening / closing mode of the V winning opening 74a recognized in 113, the “V winning chance production” may not be properly executed. Therefore, when a momentary power failure occurs, the values of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c and the V drive timer 203k are maintained in the state before the momentary power failure, so that the opening / closing mode of the V winning opening 74a recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 Consistency with can be achieved.

In the process of S912, interrupts are permitted (S912). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 36) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power off process are roughly classified.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S921: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S922, S923).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S922). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899”, “99” in the first embodiment). , Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 24) (S923), and the process shifts to the process of S921.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 24 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (“4 milliseconds” in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is controlled, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the display control regarding the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 83 is performed. .. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state. Come on. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S922 and S923, which are one process of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the counter C4 per normal figure) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the normal figure per counter C4 that use these as the initial value of the update are randomly updated. It can be given sex.

Further, in the processing of S921, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 34 is executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S924 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S924), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and voice lamp control device 113). (S925). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S926), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S927), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S921 is executed at a timing at the end of one cycle of the processes of S922 and S923 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). As a result, in the main processing of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the update of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed. .. Therefore, when returning from the power cut-off state, the process can be started from the process of S921 after the start-up process (see FIG. 35) is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S921 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S921 can be started. As a result, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Further, in the first embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and in the main process, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Although the case of execution has been described, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing is executed every predetermined time (for example, "2 milliseconds") in the main processing described later. It may be configured. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S103), the jackpot processing (S104), the ordinary electric service control processing (S105), and the switch reading processing (S105) executed in the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment ( A part or all of S106) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (“2 milliseconds”) has elapsed is provided in the main process, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed. , Each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be randomly updated even in such a configuration.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 45, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process (see FIG. 37) that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 38) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1117 (see FIG. 38) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110, the power cutoff process of S1117 is executed. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1117. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1117 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1117, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1117 is executed (see S1116 in FIG. 38). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1117 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the operation is started after the power failure of S1117 is completed after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1008 is performed via the processes of S1004 to S1006. This is the case where the process is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the processing of S1008 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, the processing of S1004 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if "1 millisecond" or more has not elapsed (S1101). S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1111 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1110. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to process in a short cycle (within "1 millisecond") in S1102 to S1110 to determine whether or not "1 millisecond" has elapsed, whereas in S1111 This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation effect processing and the command determination processing of S1112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 37, the process proceeds to the process of S1102 as it is.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds") when the power is turned on, and the notification is a voice output device 226 or a lamp display device. It is done by 227. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without being notified by the power on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot effect process for executing the effect related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1112 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106. The details of this jackpot effect processing (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

Next, in the process of S1106, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and during the valid period. This is a process for setting the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to the process of S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Runs in time.

Next, in the process of S1110, a counter (that is, a sub-V drive timer 223d and an execution variation time) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 and set by the command determination process (S1112) and the variation effect process (S1111) described later are performed. The counter subtraction process (S1110) for subtracting (updating) the counting counter 223h) and the timer (that is, the remaining time timer 223j) by 1 every "1 millisecond" is executed (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111. The details of this counter subtraction process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In the process of S1111, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect process is a process for starting the variation effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Is executed (S1111), and the process shifts to S1112. The details of this variation effect processing (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

In the process of S1112, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1112), and the process proceeds to the process of S1113. Details of this command determination process (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

In S1113, a counter update process for updating various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1113). For example, the counter that determines the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is updated, the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e that draws the "V prize chance effect" is updated, and the hold change counter 223k that draws the "hold change notice" is updated. , It is performed in this counter update process. The counter is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (“0 to 99” in this embodiment), reaching the maximum value (“99”), and then returning to “0”.

When the processing of S1113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1114 (S1114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1116), and the power-off process is executed (S1117). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1114 (S1114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1115: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for the repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1112). This command determination process (S1112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 as described above. Judge the command that was executed.

In the command determination process (S1112), first, among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed, and the main control device 110 reads and analyzes the first command. It is determined whether or not the V opening command has been received (S1201). Then, when it is determined that the command during V opening is received (S1201: Yes), it is the timing when the V winning opening 74a is opened, so "20000" is set to the value of the sub V drive timer 223d (S1202). ), This command determination process (S1112) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

The sub-V drive timer 223d set here is decremented by 1 every "1 millisecond" in the counter subtraction process (see FIG. 45) described later (see S1602 in FIG. 45 described later). By discriminating the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the opening / closing mode (opening / closing timing) of the V winning opening 74a. Specifically, if the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is "20,000" or less and larger than "10000", the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp that the V winning opening 74a is open. If the value is "10000" or less and larger than "0", the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp that the V winning opening 74a is closed.

In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the V open command has not been received (S1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1203). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S1203: Yes), the hold ball number of the main controller 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, the first hold ball number counter 203a and / or the second The value of the reserved ball number counter 203b) is extracted and stored in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and / or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1204).

Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 also included in the hold ball number command is updated in S1204, and the sub first hold ball number counter 223b. Alternatively, the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the first reserved information storage area 223 m indicated by the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223c, or the second reserved information storage first of the second reserved information storage area 223n. ~ Stored in the fourth area (S1205).

That is, when the value (number of reserved balls) of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the extracted jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, Each value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223 m1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223 m2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223 m3, and the variable type counter storage area 223 m4 in the first hold information storage X area, respectively. To.

Therefore, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command based on the winning of the first starting port 64 are set to the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first starting port 64 (starting winning). When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol included in the reserved ball number command is X, which is acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the above, the reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110 is held. It is a value stored in the X area. That is, the same information (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110 is stored in the first reserved information storage area 223 m of the voice lamp control device 113. Become.

Further, when the value (number of reserved balls) of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the extracted jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, Each value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223n1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223n2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223n3, and the variable type counter storage area 223n4 in the second hold information storage X area, respectively. To.

Therefore, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command based on the winning of the second starting port 71 are the values of the main control device 110 when the ball wins the second starting port 71 (starting winning). When the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol included in the reserved ball number command is X, it is acquired from the counter buffer 203c, and the reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control device 110 is held. It is a value stored in the X area. That is, the same information (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control device 110 is stored in the second reserved information storage area 223n of the voice lamp control device 113. Become.

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, every time there is a starting winning prize. , S1204, the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223b and / or the sub second reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the first reserved ball counter 203a or the second of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the values of the sub first reserved ball count counter 223b and / or the sub second reserved ball count counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are the first reserved ball count counter 203a and / of the main control device 110. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and / or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected at the time of detecting the start winning. , The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and / or the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 can be adjusted.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223 m and the second hold information storage area 223n, thereby referring to the look-ahead setting process described later (FIG. 40). See), the look-ahead judgment (processing) can be executed. That is, when the reserved variable effect is executed, what the result of the variable effect will be (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) is determined before executing the variable effect. , The voice lamp control device 113 executes control such as determining the execution of various effects, determining whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" and the display mode, and determining the execution of the "V winning chance effect". can do.

After the processing of S1205, the look-ahead setting processing (S1206) is performed in order to determine the display mode of the reserved symbol and the execution of the "V winning chance production" based on the various information indicated by the reserved ball number command received this time, and the main Return to the process (see FIG. 38). The details of this look-ahead setting process (S1206) will be described later in FIG. 40.

In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1203: No), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1207). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1207: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1208).

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 43) described later, a display variation pattern that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting commands. After that, the command determination process (S1112) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

In the process of S1207, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1207: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1209). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1209: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1210).

The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 43) described later, when a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect is set. Used for. After that, the variation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect is started is set to on (S1211), the command determination process (S1112) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

The stop type command indicates the stop type of the variation effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command when the variation effect is started. This command is always sent from 110. By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the processing of S1211, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 43) executed later, the extraction is performed based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the reserved ball number command. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect and the variation pattern type of the variation effect extracted from the received variation pattern command match. Also, whether or not the stop type of the variation effect extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the reserved ball count command matches the stop type of the variation effect extracted from the received stop type command. Is judged. As a result of these judgments, when the fluctuation pattern based on the hold ball count command and the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command do not match in the fluctuation effect of 1, or the stop type and stop type command based on the hold ball count command If the stop type based on is not the same, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

When it is determined that the stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1209 (S1209: No), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1212: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reception of the confirmation command is set (S1213), and this command determination process is performed. (S1112) is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

When it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1212 (S1212: No), then the commands related to the jackpot, that is, the opening command, the V winning device opening command, the V winning device closing command, and the V acquisition command , It is determined whether or not a variable winning device opening command, a variable winning device closing command, an ending command, or the like has been received (S1214). Then, when it is determined that the above command regarding the jackpot has not been received (S1214: No), processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S1216), this command determination processing (S1112) is terminated, and the main Return to the process (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, when it is determined that the commands related to the jackpot have been received (S1214: Yes), the process shifts to the jackpot command processing (S1215) in order to execute the processing corresponding to the commands related to the jackpot. After the jackpot command processing (S1215) is completed, the command determination processing (S1112) is terminated and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 38).

Next, the look-ahead setting process (S1208) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead setting process (S1208). As described above, this look-ahead setting process (S1208) is executed when the hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110. Then, in the look-ahead setting process (S1208), it is determined whether or not to execute the "V winning chance effect", and in the "V winning chance effect", whether or not it is the timing when the ball can win the V winning opening 74a. The "launch promotion suggestion" that suggests is executed. Further, in this look-ahead setting process (S1208), it is determined whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" in the hold symbol, and the display hold ball number command is set according to the decision content.

In this look-ahead determination process (S1208), the MPU 221 first determines whether or not the V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned on (S1301). As a result of the determination, if the V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned on (S1301: Yes), the setting process of "V winning chance effect" has already been executed, so the processing of S1302 to S1307 is skipped and processed. To S1308.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the V winning chance effect flag 223f is not turned on (S1301: No), then the "V winning suggestion table 222e" and the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e are used. It is determined whether or not the lottery for "chance production" has been won (S1302). As described above, the lottery of "V prize chance production" is performed based on the value of the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e and the V prize suggestion table 222e, and if the lottery of "V prize chance production" is not won. (S1302: No), "V winning chance production" is not set, the processing of S1303 to S1307 is skipped, and the processing is shifted to S1308.

In the process of S1302, if the lottery of "V winning chance production" is won (S1302: Yes), in order to set "V winning chance production", first, the overlapping "V winning chance production" is set. In order to prevent processing, the V winning chance production flag 223f is set to ON (S1303), and then the V winning chance production command for notifying the display control device 114 that the "V winning chance production" is executed. Is set (S1304), and the process shifts to S1305.

The V winning chance effect command set in the process of S1304 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the V winning chance effect command executes a process of displaying the "V winning chance effect" on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, in the process of S1305, the variation stored in the reserved information storage areas 223m and 223n up to one before the reserved information storage areas 223m and 223n in which the variation effect won in the execution of the "V winning chance effect" is stored. Each fluctuation time of the effect and the remaining fluctuation time indicated by the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h at the present time are extracted, and the integrated time is set in the remaining time timer 223j. As a result, the cumulative time of each variation effect executed until the variation effect won for the execution of the "V prize chance effect", that is, the execution time of the "V prize chance effect" is set to the remaining time timer 223j. Will be done.

Specifically, for example, when the "V winning chance effect" is won in the third hold of the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation effect of the second special symbol is not held, that is, the first 1 When the hold information won in the "V winning chance production" is stored in the first hold information storage third area of the hold information storage area 223 m, and the hold information is not stored in the second hold information storage area 223n. The variation time of each variation effect stored in the first area before the first reserved information storage third area, that is, in the first reserved information storage first area and the first reserved information storage second area was extracted and extracted. A value corresponding to the integrated time of each fluctuation time is set in the remaining time timer 223j.

Then, according to the value of the remaining time timer 223j set in S1305, a remaining time command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution time of the "V winning chance effect" is set (S1306), and V When the open jackpot is won, the V winning chance effect setting process for setting whether or not to execute the accurate "launch promotion suggestion" for the player is performed (S1307), and the process is shifted to S1308.

The remaining time command set in the process of S1306 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). To. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the remaining time command performs "remaining time display" according to the remaining time command, and sets the execution time of the "V winning chance effect" executed by the third symbol display device 81. Execute the process to display.

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307).

In this V winning chance effect setting process (S1307), when the variable effect won by the V opening jackpot is suspended, the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot is opened. Determine if it is time for the ball to win. Then, as a result of the determination, when the variation effect is executed at the timing when the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a, the variation shortening function is activated before the variation effect for winning the V open jackpot is executed. That is, in order to accumulate four reserved balls of the special symbol, the player is made to display the "launch promotion suggestion" suggesting the launch of the ball in the "V winning chance production".

In the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307), first, it is determined whether or not there is a V open jackpot in the reserved variable effect (S1351). In this determination, in the first reserved information storage area 223 m and the second reserved information storage area 223n, a jackpot is won, and the jackpot type is "15 round V open jackpot" or "7 round V open jackpot". It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is stored.

As a result of the processing of S1351, when it is determined that there is a V open jackpot in the reserved fluctuation effect (S1351: Yes), when the V winning device 72 is opened, does the ball win the V winning opening 74a? In order to accurately determine whether or not it is, first, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation effect stored in the hold information storage areas 223m and 223n up to the hold information storage areas 223m and 223n in which the V open jackpot is stored is extracted. , The integrated time is set in the hold variable time integrated counter 223 g (S1352), and the process shifts to S1353.

In the process of S1352, for example, when the V open jackpot is stored in the third hold of the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation effect of the second special symbol is not reserved, that is, the first hold information. When the hold information of the V open jackpot is stored in the first hold information storage third area of the storage area 223 m and the hold information is not stored in the second hold information storage area 223n, the first hold information storage first 1 to The variation time of each variation effect stored in the third area is extracted, and a value corresponding to the integration time of each extracted variation time is set in the hold variation time integration counter 223g. By the processing of S1352, the time from the start of the variable effect of the reserved special effect to the end of the variable effect of the V open jackpot is set in the hold variable time integration counter 223 g, excluding the time of the variable effect being executed. Will be done.

In the process of S1353, "10000", which is a value corresponding to the execution time of the opening effect, is added to the value of the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g set in the process of S1352 (S1353), and the process shifts to S1354. By the processing of S1353, the time from the end timing of the fluctuation effect of the V opening jackpot, that is, the start timing of the V opening jackpot to the opening of the V winning device 72 in the first round is set to the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223g. It will be added. Therefore, the data set (stored) in the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g at the time when the processing of S1353 is performed is the first round of the V open jackpot from the start of the hold fluctuation effect of the special effect. A value corresponding to the time until the V winning device 72 is opened is set.

Next, in the processing of S1354, the total value of the value of the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223g and the value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h is set in the total counter 223i (S1354), and the processing shifts to S1355. That is, in the process of S1354, the time from the start of the pending special effect variation effect to the opening of the V winning device 72 in the first round of the V opening jackpot, and the remaining time of the running variation effect. The total time will be set in the total counter 223i. Therefore, the value indicated by the total counter 223i at the time when the processing of S1354 is performed is from the time when the start winning corresponding to the V opening jackpot occurs until the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot is opened. It is a value corresponding to time.

Then, in the process of S1355, the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d at that time is subtracted from the value of the total counter 223i set in S1354 (S1355), and the process shifts to S1356. The value indicated by the total counter 223i at the time when the processing of S1355 is performed is a state in which the time until the next opening of the V winning opening 74a is subtracted from the time set in S1354.

Next, in the processing of S1356, the value of the total counter 223i after the processing of S1355 is divided by the time corresponding to the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a, that is, "20000", and the remaining value X (X is) at that time. It is determined whether or not the natural number) is within the range of “10000 ≦ X <15000” (S1356). When the above residual value is "10000 ≤ X <15000" (S1356: Yes), the V winning opening 74a is completely closed by the distribution plate 73a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. In this state, even if the V winning device 72 is opened, the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, in this situation (normal production mode), even if a big hit occurs, the ball does not flow into the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, in the "V winning chance production", the "launch" that prompts the player to launch the ball. A display launch promotion suggestion command for displaying "promotion suggestion" is set (S1357), the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) is terminated, and the process returns to the look-ahead setting process (see FIG. 40).

The display launch promotion suggestion command set in the process of S1357 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 38). Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display launch promotion suggestion command prompts the player to launch the ball in the "V winning chance effect" (FIGS. 46 (b) and (c) described later, or , See FIGS. 47 (b) and (c)) ”is displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1356, when the above-mentioned residual value is not "10000 ≦ X <15000" (S1356: No), that is, the above-mentioned residual value is "0 ≦ X <10000" or When "15000 ≤ X <20000", it means that there is at least a timing when the V winning opening 74a is opened, so that the ball can win the V winning opening 74a even in this situation. Therefore, in order not to display the "launch promotion suggestion" in the "V prize chance effect", the process of S1357 is skipped, the V prize chance effect setting process (S1307) is terminated, and the look-ahead setting process (see FIG. 40). ) Return.

In this way, the opening timing of the V winning device 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a are discriminated, and at the start winning stage of the variable effect of winning the V opening jackpot, the V winning device 72 is won the opening jackpot. Even in the situation where the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a, by encouraging the player to launch the ball in the "V winning chance production" to generate the starting prize, V Make sure that the fluctuation shortening function can be activated before the execution of the fluctuation effect that wins the open jackpot. Then, the phase of the opening / closing timing of the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened can be shifted to create a situation in which the ball can win the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, by configuring the player to obtain the presence or absence of winning the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot by his own operation (the number of starting winnings based on the launch), he feels a sense of accomplishment when the V winning opening 74a is won. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the "launch promotion suggestion", the number of launching balls in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

If it is determined in the process of S1351 that the V open jackpot is not stored in the pending variable effect (S1351: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1357, and in the "V winning chance effect", the player Set a display launch promotion suggestion command to display a "launch promotion suggestion" that prompts the player to launch a ball. When the V open jackpot is not stored in the pending variable effect, the "V winning chance effect" to be executed is a so-called Gase effect, which is executed even though the V winning device 72 is not released. .. Therefore, even in this case, the "launch promotion suggestion" is displayed to encourage the player to launch the ball. The player who sees the "launch promotion suggestion" wants the ball to win the V winning opening 74a in the event of a big hit, so regardless of whether the "V winning chance production" is a so-called crap production. , Fire a ball and try to move to a situation where the fluctuation shortening function can be activated. For this reason, by displaying the "launch promotion suggestion" in the so-called "V winning chance production", the number of launched balls during the "V winning chance production" can be increased and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. it can.

Returning to FIG. 40, the description will be continued. In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" has been won based on various information indicated by the hold ball number command received this time (S1308). As described above, the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" is performed by the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first hold information storage area 223 m or the second hold information storage area 223n based on the hold ball number command received this time. Based on the value of CS1, the propriety and the effect mode are extracted. Then, based on the extracted pass / fail and the effect mode, the value of the hold change counter 223k at that time and the hold change table 222f (see FIG. 22) are referred to, and whether or not the “hold change notice” can be executed and displayed. Determine the aspect.

If, as a result of the processing of S1308, the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" is won (S1308: Yes), the hold indicating the display mode (for example, "blue") which is the execution lottery result of the "hold change notice". The change information is stored in the sub first reserved ball count counter 223b or with respect to the reserved display information storage area (not shown) provided for each of the first reserved information storage area 223 m or the second reserved information storage area 223n. It is stored in the hold display information storage area indicated by the value of the sub second hold ball number counter 223c (S1309), and the process shifts to S1311. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1308, if the execution lottery of the "holding change notice" is not won (S1308: No), the holding change information (that is, Null data) indicating that the "holding change notice" is not executed is displayed. It is stored in the hold display information storage area indicated by the value of the sub first hold ball number counter 223b or the sub second hold ball number counter 223c (S1310), and the process shifts to S1311. As a result, it is possible to store in the hold display information storage area whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" for each change effect.

In the process of S1310, by writing the Null data to the corresponding hold display information storage area, for example, duplicate use of the information related to the "hold change notice" stored in the hold display information storage area before writing is prevented. This makes it possible to prevent an inconsistency in the production (for example, the “holding change notice” is “red” even though the production is a variable production in the “non-reach” production mode).

Next, in the process of S1311, the display control device 114 is notified of the values of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c and the reserved change information stored in the reserved display information storage area. A command for the number of reserved balls for display is set (S1311), the look-ahead setting process (S1208) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 39).

The display reserved ball count command set in the process of S1304 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display hold ball number command displays the hold symbol according to the hold ball number and hold change information indicated by the display hold ball number command in the cockpit of the third symbol display device 81. The process of displaying in the area Db (see FIG. 5B) is executed.

Next, the jackpot command process (S1215) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing (S1215). In this jackpot command processing (S1215), as described above, commands related to jackpots received from the main control device 110 (opening command, V winning device opening command, V winning device closing command, V acquisition command, variable winning device opening command, Executes processing based on the variable winning device closing command or ending command, etc.).

In this jackpot command processing (S1215), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1371). As a result of the determination, if the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1371: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1372), and then the jackpot effect flag (FIG. 6) is used to execute the effect related to the jackpot. (Not shown) is set to on (S1373). After the processing of S1373, the jackpot command processing (S1215) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 39).

The display opening command set in S1372 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). .. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display opening command recognizes the start of the jackpot and executes a process so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect of starting the jackpot (for example, the opening effect). To do.

In the process of S1371, when the opening command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1371: No), then it is determined whether or not the V winning device release command is received from the main control device 110 (S1374). As a result of the determination, if the V winning device release command is received from the main control device 110 (S1374: Yes), the display V winning device release command is set (S1375), and this jackpot command processing (S1215) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38).

The display V winning device release command set in S1375 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display V winning device release command recognizes that the V winning device 72 at the time of the V opening jackpot has been released, and suggests that the V winning device 72 is released. The process is executed so that the effect to be performed (see FIG. 46 (g) or FIG. 47 (g) described later) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1374, when the V winning device release command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1374: No), then it is determined whether or not the V winning device closing command is received from the main control device 110 (S1374: No). S1376). As a result of the determination, if the V winning device closing command is received from the main control device 110 (S1376: Yes), the display V winning device closing command is set (S1377), and this jackpot command processing (S1215) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38).

The display V winning device closing command set in S1377 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that received the display V winning device closing command recognizes that the V winning device 72 at the time of the V opening jackpot is closed, and suggests that the V winning device 72 is closed. The process is executed so that the effect to be performed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1376, when the V winning device closing command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1376: No), then it is determined whether or not the V acquisition command is received from the main control device 110 (S1378). .. As a result of the determination, if the V acquisition command is received from the main control device 110 (S1378: Yes), the display V acquisition command is set (S1379), the jackpot command processing (S1215) is terminated, and the command determination is made. Return to the process (see FIG. 38).

The display V acquisition command set in S1379 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). To. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display V acquisition command recognizes that the ball has won the V winning opening 74a at the time of the V opening jackpot, and the ball has won the V winning opening 74a. The process is executed so that the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect (see FIG. 47 (h) described later) that suggests that the “probability fluctuation state” is given after the jackpot ends.

In the process of S1378, when the V acquisition command is not received from the main controller 110 (S1378: No), then it is determined whether or not the variable winning device release command is received from the main controller 110 (S1380). .. As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device release command is received from the main control device 110 (S1380: Yes), the display variable winning device release command is set (S1381), and the jackpot command processing (S1215) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38).

The display variable winning device release command set in S1381 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display variable winning device release command recognizes that the variable winning device 65 at the time of a big hit has been released, and the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened in the third symbol display device 81. The process is executed so as to display the effect according to (that is, the number of rounds).

In the process of S1380, when the variable winning device release command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1380: No), then it is determined whether or not the variable winning device closing command is received from the main control device 110 (S1380: No). S1382). As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device closing command is received from the main control device 110 (S1382: Yes), the display variable winning device closing command is set (S1383), and the jackpot command processing (S1215) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38).

The display variable winning device closing command set in S1383 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display variable winning device closing command recognizes that the variable winning device 65 at the time of a big hit is closed, and shows that the variable winning device 65 is closed. (For example, the process is executed so as to display the interval effect).

In the process of S1382, when the variable winning device closing command is not received from the main controller 110 (S1382: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command is received from the main controller 110 (S1384). As a result of the determination, if the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1384: Yes), the display ending command is set (S1385), and then the jackpot effect flag is turned off in order to end the effect related to the jackpot. After setting (S1386), the jackpot command process (S1215) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 39).

The display ending command set in S1385 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). .. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display ending command recognizes the end of the jackpot and executes a process so that the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect (for example, an ending effect) that ends the jackpot. To do.

In the process of S1384, when the ending command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1384: No), the process corresponding to other commands related to the jackpot (for example, the prize ball command) is performed (S1387), and this jackpot command is performed. The process (S1215) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 39).

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation effect process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this variation effect processing (S1111). This variation effect process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 38), and various processes for executing the variation effect are executed in the third symbol display device 81.

In the variation effect processing (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), at least the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation effect The process (S1111) is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off in order to start the fluctuation effect. (S1402) Next, it is determined whether or not the data related to the variation effect is stored in the second reserved information storage area 223n (S1403). As a result of the determination, if the data related to the variation effect is stored in the second reserved information storage area 223n (S1403: Yes), it is included in the second reserved information storage first area provided in the second reserved information storage area 223n. The data is shifted to the execution information storage area 223o (S1404), and the data included in the second hold information storage second to fourth areas provided in the second hold information storage area 223n is stored in the second hold information storage first. ~ Shift to the third area (S1405), subtract 1 from the value of the sub second reserved ball count counter 223c (S1406), and shift the process to S1410.

That is, in this case, the change effect of the second special symbol held is reduced by one, and the execution of the change effect of the second special symbol held first in time is started, so that the change effect is held first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the first area of the second reserved information corresponding to the changed fluctuation effect are set to the execution information storage area 223o corresponding to the variation effect being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223o1 to 223o4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage third area.

As a result, in the execution information storage area 223o, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored, and the second hold information storage first In each of the fourth areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control device 110 are stored. become.

On the other hand, in the process of S1403, when it is determined that the data related to the variation effect is not stored in the second hold information storage area 223n (S1403: No), the variation effect executed this time is related to the first special symbol. Therefore, the data included in the first hold information storage first area provided in the first hold information storage area 223 m is shifted to the execution information storage area 223o (S1407), and further, the data is provided in the first hold information storage area 223 m. The data included in the first reserved information storage 2nd to 4th areas is shifted to the 1st reserved information storage 1st to 3rd areas (S1408), and the value of the sub 1st reserved ball counter 223b is subtracted by 1. (S1409), the process shifts to S1410.

That is, in this case, the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol held first in time is started, so that the first special symbol is held first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first area of the first hold information corresponding to the changed fluctuation effect are set to the execution information storage area 223o corresponding to the variation effect being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223o1 to 223o4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first holding information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first holding information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first hold information storage third area.

As a result, in the execution information storage area 223o, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored, and the first hold information storage first In each of the fourth areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110 are stored. become.

Next, in the process of S1410, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c updated in the process of S1406 or S1409 and the hold change information stored in the hold display information storage area are input. A display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 is set (S1410), and the process shifts to S1411.

The display hold ball number command set in S1410 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Will be done. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display reserved ball count command executes the process so that the reserved symbol and the executed symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are displayed. When displaying the execution symbol, display control is performed so that the hold symbol and the execution symbol are displayed in the display mode of the determined "hold change notice".

In the process of S1411, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223o, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to display, a display variation pattern command is set based on the acquired variation pattern (S1411), and the process shifts to S1412.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). To. The display control device 114 starts the display control of the variation effect so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Next, in the process of S1412, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223o, the stop type of the variation effect to be executed from now is acquired, and the stop type of the acquired variation effect is set. Based on this, the display stop type command is set (S1412), and the process shifts to S1413.

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). To. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect executed by the display variation pattern command set by the process of S1411 is confirmed and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is set. To do.

In the processing of S1413, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect stored in the execution information storage area 223o is extracted, and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time is set in the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h (S1413), and the processing is performed. Move to S1414. The value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h set here is decremented by 1 every "1 millisecond" in the counter subtraction process of the main process (see S1110 in FIG. 38) (see S1604 in FIG. 45 described later). ). As a result, the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be accurately counted.

In the processing of S1414 to S1417, it is determined whether or not a situation is established in which the ball can win the V winning opening 74a when the "V winning chance production" is performed before the start of this variable effect. When the ball can win a prize in the V winning opening 74a, a process for suggesting to the player is executed.

Specifically, first, in the process of S1414, it is determined whether or not the "V winning chance effect" is executed before the execution of the variation effect this time and it is the end timing (S1414). As a result of the determination, if it is the end timing of the "V winning chance effect" (S1414: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V open jackpot occurs in the variable effect executed this time (S1415). As a result of the determination, if a V opening jackpot occurs in the variable effect executed this time (S1415: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. (S1416).

When the V winning opening 74a is in the open state at the time of winning the variable effect that generates the V opening jackpot, the time from that point until the V winning opening 74a is opened again is "opening of the remaining V winning opening 74a". Time + V closing time of winning opening 74a (that is, “10 seconds”) ”. Then, it will be repeated in a cycle of "20 seconds". Further, when the V winning opening 74a is closed at the time of winning the variable effect that generates the open jackpot, the time from that point until the V winning opening 74a is opened again is "the remaining V winning opening 74a. "Closed time". Then, it will be repeated in a cycle of "20 seconds". Therefore, in the processing of S1416, at the start of the variable effect that generates the V open jackpot, the timing at which the V winning device 72 counted at the start winning of the variable effect that generates the V open jackpot is opened, and the V winning opening 74a The opening timing is determined based on the above-mentioned opening (opening / closing) cycle, and the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened at the start of the fluctuation effect in which the V opening jackpot occurs. Therefore, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a.

In the process of S1416, for example, the remainder value X when the value of the total counter 223i set in the process of S1352 to S1356 of the V winning chance effect setting process (see FIG. 41) is divided by "20000" is "10000 ≦". Whether or not the variable effect to be executed is executed in the shortened effect mode within the range of X <15000 "(that is, whether the shortened effect mode is executed only in the variable effect in which the V open jackpot occurs). Whether or not) is determined. As a result of the determination, the remainder value X when the value of the total counter 223i set in the processing of S1352 to S1356 of the V winning chance effect setting process (see FIG. 41) is divided by "20000" is "10000 ≤ X <15000". If it is within the range of (S1416: Yes), the ball can win the V winning opening 74a, so the process shifts to S1417. It should be noted that the remaining value X is within the range of “0 ≦ X <5000”, and even when the variable effect to be executed from now on is executed in the normal effect mode, the ball can win the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, in this case as well, the process shifts to S1417.

Further, for example, when the value of the total counter 223i set in the processing of S1352 to S1356 of the V winning chance effect setting process (see FIG. 41) is divided by "20000", the residual value X is "0≤X <5000". Whether or not the variable effect to be executed is executed in the shortened effect mode (that is, whether or not the shortened effect mode is executed in the variable effect in which the V open jackpot occurs) within the range of In addition to determining, it is determined whether or not the shortened effect mode has been executed once in the variation effect executed before the variation effect in which the V open jackpot occurs. As a result of the determination, the remainder value X when the value of the total counter 223i set in the processing of S1352 to S1356 of the V winning chance effect setting process (see FIG. 41) is divided by "20000" is "10000 ≤ X <15000". If it is within the range of (S1416: Yes), the ball can win the V winning opening 74a, so the process shifts to S1417. It should be noted that the remaining value X is within the range of "10000 ≦ X <15000", and even when the variable effect to be executed from now on is executed in the normal effect mode, the ball can win the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, in this case as well, the process shifts to S1417.

In the process of S1417, a preparation completion command for notifying the display control device 114 that the ball can win the V winning opening 74a is set (S1417), and this variation effect processing (S1111) is terminated. Return to the main process (see FIG. 38).

The ready command set in the process of S1417 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). To. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the preparation completion command also opens the V winning opening 74a when the V winning device 72 is opened in the V opening jackpot that may occur from now on, and the ball wins the V winning opening 74a. The process of displaying the "preparation completion effect (see FIG. 47 (e) described later)" that suggests the player to obtain the information is executed.

As a result, at the start of the variable effect of winning the V open jackpot, it is determined whether or not a situation where the ball can win the V winning opening 74a can be created, and the situation where the ball can win the V winning opening 74a. If so, it is configured to suggest that the ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the start of the variation effect. With this configuration, the presence or absence of a prize in the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot can be obtained by the player's own operation (the number of starting prizes based on the launch), and the content is suggested to the player. It is possible to feel a sense of accomplishment when a prize is given to the V winning opening 74a, and to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the process of S1414, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the "V winning chance effect" (S1414: No), in the process of S1415, it is determined that the V open jackpot does not occur in the variable effect executed this time. (S1415: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S1416 that the V winning opening 74a is not opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened when the V opening jackpot occurs (S1416: No). No), since it cannot always be said that the ball can win the V winning opening 74a, the processing of S1417 is skipped, the variation effect processing (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 38).

In the process of S1416, when it is determined that the situation where the ball can win the V winning opening 74a and the situation where the ball cannot win are mixed at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, that is, the V winning chance effect setting The remainder value X when the value of the total counter 223i set in the processing of S1352 to S1356 of the processing (see FIG. 41) is divided by "20000" is within the range of "5000 ≤ X <10000" or If it is within the range of "15000 ≤ X <20000", instead of the above-mentioned preparation completion command, it is an ambiguous effect that causes the player to guess whether or not the ball can win the V winning opening 74a. It may be configured to set an ambiguous display command to display "ambiguous suggestion display".

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the jackpot effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this jackpot effect processing (S1105). This jackpot effect processing (S1105) is executed every "1 millisecond" in the main process (see FIG. 38) of the voice lamp control device 113, and the jackpot effect flag (not shown) is turned on based on the reception of the opening command. When set to, each process related to the effect at the time of a big hit is performed.

In this jackpot effect processing (S1105), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect flag is set to ON (S1501). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot effect flag is not set to ON (S1501: No), the jackpot effect process (S1105) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, when the jackpot effect flag is set to on (S1501: Yes), since the jackpot is in progress, the process shifts to S1502 in order to execute the effect related to the jackpot.

In the process of S1502, it is determined whether or not it is the start of the second round of the jackpot game (S1502). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is the start of the second round of the jackpot game (S1502: Yes), then the ball wins the V winning opening 74a during this jackpot (that is, during the first round). Whether or not it is determined (S1503). This determination is performed depending on whether or not a V acquisition command is received from the main control device 110.

In the process of S1503, if it is determined that the ball has won the V winning opening 74a (S1503: Yes), the ball is won in the V winning opening 74a in this jackpot, and after the jackpot ends, the "probability fluctuation state" The V acquisition notification effect command for notifying the execution of the "V acquisition notification effect" that suggests the transition to "" is set (S1504), and the process is transferred to S1506.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1503, if it is determined that the ball has not won the V winning opening 74a (S1503: No), the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a in this jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot, " A V unacquired notification effect command is set to notify the player of the execution of the "V unacquired notification effect" that suggests the player to shift to the "time shortened state" without being given the "probability fluctuation state" (S1505). The process shifts to S1506.

The V acquisition notification effect command or the V non-acquisition notification effect command set in the process of S1504 or S1505 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 38). ) Is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the V acquisition notification effect command or the V non-acquisition notification effect command suggests the game state to be shifted after the jackpot ends at this timing (at the start of the second round). A process for displaying "notification effect (see FIG. 47 (h) described later)" or "V unacquired notification effect (see FIG. 46 (h) described later)" is executed.

As a result, it is configured to suggest a gaming state in which a transition is made based on whether or not a ball is won in the V winning opening 74a. With this configuration, the presence or absence of a prize in the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot can be obtained by the player's own operation (number of starting prizes based on launch), and the achievement content (result) is suggested to the player. By doing so, it is possible to feel a sense of accomplishment when the V winning opening 74a is won, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S1506, the effect process during the other jackpot is executed (S1506), the jackpot effect process (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

Next, the counter subtraction process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this counter subtraction process (S1110). This counter subtraction process (S1110) is executed every "1 millisecond" in the main process (see FIG. 38) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a command determination process (see FIG. 39) and a variation effect process (see FIG. 43). Each process of subtracting (updating) each counter or the like set in is performed.

In this counter subtraction process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is larger than "0" (S1601). As a result of the determination, if the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is larger than "0" (S1601: Yes), the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is subtracted by 1 (S1602), and the process shifts to S1603. On the other hand, if the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is not larger than "0" (S1601: No), the process of S1602 is skipped and the process shifts to S1603.

As a result, the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is subtracted by 1 every "1 millisecond". Therefore, by referring to the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d in the voice lamp control device 113, the V winning opening 74a is opened and closed. It becomes possible to grasp the aspect.

In the process of S1603, it is determined whether or not the value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h is larger than "0" (S1603). As a result of the determination, if the value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h is larger than "0" (S1603: Yes), the value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h is subtracted by 1 (S1604), and the process shifts to S1605. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h is not larger than "0" (S1603: No), the processing of S1604 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1605.

As a result, the value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h is decremented by 1 every "1 millisecond". Therefore, by referring to the value of the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h in the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation during execution It becomes possible to grasp the remaining time of the production.

In the process of S1605, it is determined whether or not the V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned on (S1605). As a result of the determination, if the V winning chance effect flag 223f is not turned on (S1605: No), the "V winning chance effect" is not being executed, so this counter subtraction process (S1110) is terminated and the main process is performed. Return to (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, when the V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned on (S1605: Yes), since the "V winning chance effect" is being executed, first, the value of the remaining time timer 223j is subtracted by 1 (S1606). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining time timer 223j subtracted in the process of S1606 is larger than "0" (S1607).

If it is determined in the processing of S1607 that the value of the remaining time timer 223j is larger than "0", the execution time of the "V winning chance effect" remains, so the processing of S1608 to S1610. Is not performed, the counter subtraction process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining time timer 223j is not larger than "0" (S1607: No), that is, when the value of the remaining time timer 223j is "0" or less, "V winning chance" Since the end timing of "directing" has arrived, the V winning chance directing flag 223f is set to off (S1608), and then the value of the hold fluctuation time integration counter 223g is cleared to "0" (S1609). Then, a chance effect end command for notifying the end of the "V winning chance effect" is set (S1610), the counter subtraction process (S1110) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

The chance effect end command set in the process of S1610 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 38). Will be done. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the chance effect end command recognizes that the "V prize chance effect" has ended, and indicates that the "V prize chance effect" has ended (FIG. 46 (d) described later). ) And (e), or the process of displaying (see FIGS. 47 (d) and (e)) is executed.

As a result, the value of the remaining time timer 223j is decremented by 1 every "1 millisecond" during the execution of "V winning chance effect". Therefore, refer to the value of the remaining time timer 223j in the voice lamp control device 113. Then, it becomes possible to grasp the remaining time of the "V prize chance production" and the end timing of the "V prize chance production".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, the “V winning chance effect” in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the variation effect that caused the “V winning chance effect”. , And an execution example of the jackpot effect based on the variable effect will be described.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the transition from the “V winning chance effect” performed by the third symbol display device 81 to the first round of the jackpot without generating a new starting winning prize. First, FIG. 46 (a) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the “V winning chance production” is started, and FIG. 46 (b) is a diagram in which the left symbol column Z1 is stopped from the state of FIG. 46 (a). It is a figure which showed the state which was done. Then, FIG. 46 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the variation effect of 1 is digested from the state of FIG. 46 (b) and the next variation effect that is held is started, and FIG. 46 (d). ) Is a diagram showing a state in which the “V winning chance production” is completed from the state of FIG. 46 (c). Further, FIG. 46 (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable effect that caused the occurrence of the “V winning chance effect” is started from the state of FIG. 46 (d), and FIG. 46 (f) is a diagram. It is a figure which showed the state which the jackpot symbol appeared from the state of FIG. 46 (e). FIG. 46 (g) is a diagram showing a state suggesting that the V winning device 72 is open from the state of FIG. 46 (f), and FIG. 46 (h) is a diagram showing a state of FIG. 46 (h). It is a figure which showed the state which "V non-acquisition notification effect" which shows that the ball was not made to win a prize in V winning opening 74a from the state of g) is executed. In FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (h), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted (the same applies to the description in FIGS. 47, 49, or 57 below).

In the state of FIG. 46 (a), a new start prize for the first special symbol is obtained while the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed (that is, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is in the “high-speed fluctuation”). Is generated, and in the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a indicating the previous start winning prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as "starting winning 1" in the description of FIG. 46), "hold". While the "change notice" has not occurred, the hold displayed in the special figure 1 second hold symbol display area Db1b indicating the later start prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as "start prize 2" in the explanation of FIG. 46). In the symbol, a "pending change notice" has occurred, indicating that the reserved symbol has changed to "red".

In the variable effect corresponding to this "starting prize 2", the "15 round V open jackpot" is won, and as described above, the reserved symbol "pending change" displayed in the special drawing 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. In addition to winning the "red" in the "notice", he also won the "V winning chance production" based on the variable effect, indicating the state immediately after the "V winning chance production" was started.

Here, in FIG. 46A, when the variable effect being executed and the variable effect pending are all executed and a V open jackpot based on the “starting prize 2” occurs, the variable effect based on the “starting prize 2” is generated. Is executed in the normal production mode, it is determined in advance that the V winning opening 74a is closed at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot is opened. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, "V prize chance production" is performed, "launch promotion suggestion" is displayed in the "V prize chance production", and the variation production of "starting prize 2" is newly started. Generate 3 or more starting prizes, set the number of reserved balls of the special symbol to "4" at the start of the variable production of "Starting prize 2", and shorten the variable production based on "Starting prize 2". Suggest to the player what to do.

In the state of FIG. 46 (a), the character displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds has generated a line indicating that "V winning chance effect" has occurred, and the line display is small on the left. It is displayed in the area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display "It's a chance!" That directly suggests that "V winning chance production" has occurred appears, and in the right small area Ds3, "launch promotion suggestion" appears. The text display "Please shoot as many balls as possible in time!" Is appearing, which indicates one form. It should be noted that the "launch promotion suggestion" is a content suggesting that the ball is to be won in the first starting port 64 (for example, "make a lot of prizes") or a content suggesting that the fluctuation shortening function is activated (for example). , "Accumulate four holds of the first special symbol") and the like may be displayed.

The player who saw the "V prize chance production" and "launch promotion suggestion" and the "pending change notice" speculates that a big hit will occur in the fluctuation production of "starting prize 2", and in this situation It is speculated that the ball may not flow into the V winning opening 74a even if a big hit occurs as it is. Then, the ball is fired in order to make the first starting port 64 (or the second starting port 71) win the ball in order to set the number of holdes for the fluctuation shortening function to operate.

Conventionally, when a display mode (for example, "red") with a high expectation of a big hit appears in the "hold change notice", the player can make a big hit in the variation effect corresponding to the "hold change notice". Predict. Then, in order to concentrate on the transition (effect) until the display result of the fluctuation effect appears, after the appearance of the "pending change notice", the firing of the ball is stopped until the display result of the fluctuation effect appears. During that time, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 was reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even when the display mode having a high expectation of big hit is displayed in the "hold change notice", the "launch promotion suggestion" is displayed in the "V winning chance production". By doing so, the player is allowed to continue firing balls until the number of reserved balls in which the fluctuation shortening function is activated, the number of launched balls is increased in the situation where the "hold change notice" appears, and the pachinko machine 10 is operated. Can be improved.

Next, in FIG. 46 (b), from the situation of FIG. 46 (a), the symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 of the main display area Dm, and the symbol fluctuation continues in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3. Indicates the situation.

Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the character display of "launch!", Which is a form of "launch promotion suggestion", is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, "V winning chance production" is displayed. The "remaining time display" of the remaining time (here, "remaining time 19:45") is displayed. This "remaining time display" indicates the remaining time of the "V winning chance production", that is, the time until the fluctuation of the "starting winning 2" starts. At this timing, no new start prize has been generated.

In this way, by displaying the remaining time of the "V prize chance production" and irritating the player that a new start prize must be generated within that time, a new start prize is generated during the "V prize chance production". It is possible to create a game with a sense of urgency as to whether or not a start-up prize can be generated, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, in FIG. 46 (c), from the situation of FIG. 46 (b), the situation in which the variable effect being executed is finished and the variable effect based on the “starting prize 1” is started, that is, each of the main display areas Dm. It shows the situation where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are "high-speed fluctuation". In this case, the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting prize 1" displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in FIG. 46B is shifted and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the special figure 1 The reserved symbols corresponding to the "starting prize 2" displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b are shifted and displayed in the special drawing 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a.

Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the character display of "still more!", Which is a form of "launch promotion suggestion", is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, the "remaining time display" at this point is displayed. (Here, "remaining time 13.25") "is displayed. Even at this timing, no new start prize has been generated.

Next, FIG. 46 (d) shows a situation in which the variation effect based on the “starting prize 1” is completed and the display result is displayed from the situation of FIG. 46 (c). In this situation, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm, the stop symbol of the chance symbol and the middle symbol row Z2 are different from each other (“788” in FIG. 46 (d), hereinafter referred to as the chance symbol. A stop result in which only the middle symbol string Z2 is different may be referred to as a "Gasechance pattern").

Further, in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, the "remaining time display (here," remaining time 00.00 ")" at this time is displayed. Therefore, it suggests to the player that the "V prize chance production" has ended. Even at this timing, no new start prize has been generated.

Therefore, during the execution of the "V prize chance production", a new start prize cannot be generated, and the variable production based on the "start prize 2" which is the execution target of the "V prize chance production" is usually performed. It will be executed in the production mode. In this case, even if a V open jackpot occurs, the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, as an effect suggesting to the player that the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a, "V" At the end of "Winning chance production", a Gase chance symbol that is not a chance symbol is displayed. Specifically, in the process of S1607 of the counter subtraction process (see FIG. 45) described above, when it is determined that the remaining time timer 223j is not a value larger than "0", that is, the "V winning chance effect" is completed. At the same time, the same processing as in S1416 of the variation effect processing (see FIG. 43) is executed, it is determined whether or not the ball can win the V winning opening 74a in the current situation, and the ball enters the V winning opening 74a. When the player wins a prize, the chance symbol symbol is displayed, while when the ball does not win the V winning opening 74a, the subtraction chance symbol is displayed. With this configuration, the conditions shown in "V prize chance production" can be achieved by displaying the Gase chance pattern at the end of "V prize chance production" as shown in FIG. 46 (d). It can be suggested to the player that there is no such thing.

Next, in FIG. 46 (e), from the situation of FIG. 46 (d), the variable effect based on the “starting prize 1” is finished, and the variable effect based on the “starting prize 2” is started, that is, the main display. It shows a situation where each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in the region Dm is "high-speed fluctuating". In this case, the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting prize 2" displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in FIG. 46 (d) is shifted and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0.

Further, in the small left area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, since the preparation completion command could not be received, the production is not the "preparation completion effect (see FIG. 47 (e) described later)", and the V winning opening 74a The character display "As it is ...", which is an "unfinished production" that suggests to the player that the ball cannot win the prize, is displayed. In addition, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a disappointing expression. Therefore, by recognizing the "unprepared effect", the player predicts that the V winning opening 74a will not be opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened when the V opening jackpot occurs. can do.

Next, FIG. 46 (f) shows a situation in which the variation effect based on the “starting prize 2” is completed and the display result is displayed from the situation of FIG. 46 (e). In this situation, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm, a "big hit display" in which three "7" symbols corresponding to the "15 round V open jackpot" are arranged appears.

However, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is shown in FIG. 46 (e) even though the "big hit display" of the "15 round V open jackpot" appears. Similarly, it is displayed with a disappointed look.

Next, in FIG. 46 (g), from the situation of FIG. 46 (f), a display indicating that "15 rounds V open jackpot" occurs and the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round of the jackpot. (In the example of FIG. 46 (g), the characters "V winning chance" and "Aim for V!" Are displayed). However, at this timing, since the V winning opening 74a is not opened, even if the V winning device 72 is opened, the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a.

Next, in FIG. 46 (h), from the situation of FIG. 46 (g), the first round of the jackpot is completed, the V winning device 72 is closed, and the ball is inserted into the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open. Is displayed as "Failed to win ...", which is a "V unacquired notification effect" indicating that the prize was not won. Therefore, after the end of this jackpot, it is suggested to the player that the player does not shift to the "probability fluctuation state" but shifts to the "time reduction state".

Next, referring to FIG. 47, unlike the situation of FIG. 46, the number of reserved balls is accumulated by the time the variable effect in which the V open jackpot occurs is executed, and the variable effect in which the V open jackpot occurs is shortened. The case where it is executed will be described.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the transition from the “V winning chance production” performed by the third symbol display device 81 to the first round of the jackpot after a new start winning is generated, and is shown in FIG. 47 (a). Is a diagram showing a state immediately after the “V winning chance production” is started, and FIG. 47 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the left symbol column Z1 is stopped from the state of FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which one variation effect is digested and the next pending variation effect is started from the state of FIG. 47 (b). ) Is a diagram showing a state in which the “V winning chance production” is completed from the state of FIG. 47 (c), and FIG. 47 (e) is a diagram showing the “V winning chance production” from the state of FIG. 47 (d). FIG. 47 (f) is a diagram showing a state in which the fluctuation effect that is the cause of the occurrence is started, and FIG. 47 (f) is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot symbol appears from the state of FIG. 47 (e). FIG. 47 (g) is a diagram showing a state suggesting that the V winning device 72 is open from the state of FIG. 47 (f), and FIG. 47 (h) is a diagram showing a state of FIG. 47 (g). It is a figure which showed the state which "V acquisition notice effect" which shows that the ball was won by the V winning opening 74a is executed.

Similar to FIG. 46 (a), the state of FIG. 47 (a) is newly changed while the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed (that is, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is in "high-speed fluctuation"). Two start-up prizes for the first special symbol are generated, and in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a indicating the previous start-up prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as "start-up prize 1" in the description of FIG. 47). While the "hold change notice" has not occurred in the displayed hold symbol, the special figure 1 second hold symbol indicating the later start winning prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as "starting prize 2" in the explanation of FIG. 47). In the reserved symbol displayed in the display area Db1b, a "pending change notice" is generated, indicating a state in which the reserved symbol is changed to "red".

In the variable effect corresponding to this "starting prize 2", the "15 round V open jackpot" is won, and as described above, the reserved symbol "pending change" displayed in the special drawing 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. In addition to winning the "red" in the "notice", he also won the "V winning chance production" based on the variable production, indicating that the "V winning chance production" has started.

Here, in FIG. 47 (a), as in FIG. 46 (a), when all the variable effects being executed and the variable effects being held are executed and a V open jackpot based on the “starting prize 2” occurs, “ When the variable effect based on "Starting prize 2" is executed in the normal effect mode, it is preliminarily determined that the V winning opening 74a is closed at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot is opened. .. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, "V prize chance production" is performed, "launch promotion suggestion" is displayed in the "V prize chance production", and the variation production of "starting prize 2" is newly started. Generate 3 or more starting prizes, set the number of reserved balls of the special symbol to "4" at the start of the variable production of "Starting prize 2", and shorten the variable production based on "Starting prize 2". Suggest to the player what to do.

In the state of FIG. 47 (a), the character displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds has generated a line indicating that "V winning chance effect" has occurred, and the line display is small on the left. It is displayed in the area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display "It's a chance!" That directly suggests that "V winning chance production" has occurred appears, and in the right small area Ds3, "launch promotion suggestion" appears. The text display "Please shoot as many balls as possible in time!" Is appearing, which indicates one form.

Next, in FIG. 47 (b), from the situation of FIG. 47 (a), the symbol is stopped in the left symbol row Z1 of the main display area Dm, and the symbol fluctuation continues in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3. Indicates the situation. Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the character display of "launch!", Which is a form of "launch promotion suggestion", is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, "V winning chance production" is displayed. The "remaining time display" of the remaining time (here, "remaining time 19:45") is displayed. This "remaining time display" indicates the remaining time of the "V winning chance production", that is, the time until the fluctuation of the "starting winning 2" starts. At this timing, no new start prize has been generated.

Next, in FIG. 47 (c), from the situation of FIG. 47 (b), the situation in which the variable effect being executed is finished and the variable effect based on the “starting prize 1” is started, that is, each of the main display areas Dm. It shows the situation where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are "high-speed fluctuation". In this case, the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting prize 1" displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in FIG. 47 (b) is shifted and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the special figure 1 The reserved symbols corresponding to the "starting prize 2" displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b are shifted and displayed in the special drawing 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a.

At this timing, two new start prizes of the first special symbol are generated from the situation of FIG. 47 (b), and among the two start prizes, the new start prize (hereinafter, in the description of FIG. 47, " The reserved symbol corresponding to (sometimes referred to as "starting prize 3") is displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b, and a new starting prize (hereinafter, "starting prize" is described in FIG. 47). The reserved symbol corresponding to (may be referred to as "4") is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, a new start prize was generated from the situation of FIG. 47 (b), but a "launch promotion suggestion" indicating that the state in which the fluctuation shortening function is not activated has not yet been reached. The character display of "more!", Which is one form of the above, is displayed, and the "remaining time display (here," remaining time 13.25 ")" at this point is displayed in the right small area Ds3. ..

Next, FIG. 47 (d) shows a situation in which the variation effect based on the “starting prize 1” is completed and the display result is displayed from the situation of FIG. 47 (c). In this situation, chance eye symbols (“778”) appear in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm.

At this timing, one new start prize of the first special symbol is generated from the situation of FIG. 47 (c), and the new start prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as "start prize 5" in the description of FIG. 47). ) Is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1b.

Further, in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, the "remaining time display (here," remaining time 00.00 ")" at this time is displayed. Therefore, it suggests to the player that the "V prize chance production" has ended.

Therefore, by generating three new start prizes during the execution of the "V prize chance production", the variable production based on the "start prize 2" that is the execution target of the "V prize chance production" is shortened. It will be executed in the embodiment. In this case, since the ball can win the V winning opening 74a when the V opening jackpot occurs, as a production suggesting to the player that the ball can win the V winning opening 74a, "V winning chance". A chance symbol is displayed at the end of "Direction". Specifically, in the process of S1607 of the counter subtraction process (see FIG. 45) described above, when it is determined that the remaining time timer 223j is not a value larger than "0", that is, the "V winning chance effect" is completed. At the same time, the same processing as in S1416 of the variation effect processing (see FIG. 43) is executed, it is determined whether or not the ball can win the V winning opening 74a in the current situation, and the ball enters the V winning opening 74a. When the player wins a prize, the chance symbol symbol is displayed, while when the ball does not win the V winning opening 74a, the subtraction chance symbol is displayed. With this configuration, the conditions shown in "V prize chance production" could be achieved by displaying the chance symbol at the end of "V prize chance production" as shown in FIG. 47 (d). Can be suggested to the player.

Next, in FIG. 47 (e), from the situation of FIG. 47 (d), the variable effect based on the “starting prize 1” is finished, and the variable effect based on the “starting prize 2” is started, that is, the main display. It shows a situation where each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in the region Dm is "high-speed fluctuating". In this case, the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting prize 2" displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in FIG. 47 (d) is shifted and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the special figure 1 second The reserved symbols corresponding to the "starting prize 3" displayed in the reserved symbol display area Db1b are shifted and displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a and displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c. The reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting prize 4" is shifted and displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b, and corresponds to the "starting prize 5" displayed in the special figure 1 4th reserved symbol display area Db1d. The reserved symbol is shifted and displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

Further, in the small left area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the character display "Ready!", Which is the "preparation completion effect" by receiving the preparation completion command, is displayed. Further, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a changed manner with a happy expression. Therefore, by recognizing the "preparation completion effect", the player predicts that the V winning opening 74a will be opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened when the V opening jackpot occurs. can do.

Next, FIG. 47 (f) shows a situation in which the variation effect based on the “starting prize 2” is completed and the display result is displayed from the situation of FIG. 47 (e). In this situation, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm, a "big hit display" in which three "7" symbols corresponding to the "15 round V open jackpot" are arranged appears.

Further, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed with a happy expression as in FIG. 47 (e).

Next, in FIG. 47 (g), from the situation of FIG. 47 (f), a display indicating that "15 rounds V open jackpot" occurs and the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round of the jackpot. (In the example of FIG. 47 (g), the characters "V winning chance" and "Aim for V!" Are displayed). At this timing, since the V winning opening 74a is opened, the ball can win the V winning opening 74a when the V winning device 72 is opened.

Next, in FIG. 47 (h), from the situation of FIG. 47 (g), the first round of the jackpot is completed, the V winning device 72 is closed, and the ball is inserted into the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open. The character display of "V acquisition success!", Which is a "V acquisition notification effect" indicating that the player has won a prize, is displayed. Therefore, after the end of this jackpot, the player is suggested to shift to the "probability fluctuation state".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the period from the start of the jackpot to the opening and closing of the V winning device 72 is fixedly set for the V opening jackpot, and the V swing The drive cycle of the minute drive solenoid 73c is set longer than the opening time of the V winning device 72. Therefore, even if a V-open jackpot is won, depending on the timing of its occurrence, a situation in which a ball may flow into the V-winning opening 74a while the V-winning device 72 is open and the V-winning opening 74a There will be a situation in which the ball cannot flow into the V winning opening 74a and a situation in which the ball cannot flow into the V winning opening 74a. With this configuration, it is possible to make the "probability fluctuation state" different depending on the timing of the big hit, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as such, when the variation effect is executed, the variation shortening function is activated when the number of reserved balls exceeds a predetermined number. Then, the variable effect during execution, the variable effect on hold, the opening timing of the V winning device 72 at the time of a big hit, and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a are configured to be pre-read at the start winning of the special symbol. .. Then, as a result of the determination, if the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is fluctuated and shortened before the start of the jackpot. By setting the function to operate, it is possible to shift the phase of the opening / closing timing of the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. With this configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which the ball can win the V winning opening 74a depending on the playing result of the player during the "V winning chance production". Therefore, by configuring the player to obtain the presence or absence of winning the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot by his own operation (the number of starting winnings based on the launch), he feels a sense of accomplishment when the V winning opening 74a is won. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the "launch promotion suggestion" in the "V winning chance production", the number of launching balls in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, it is configured to execute the "V winning chance effect" at a predetermined ratio even at the time of extracting each "reach display" at the time of "loss" and at the time of extracting a jackpot that is not a V open jackpot. With this configuration, the "launch promotion suggestion" is executed in the "V winning chance production", and the variable production of the jackpot that is not the V winning jackpot or the V winning device 72 is not opened. Even so, it is possible to encourage the player to launch the ball and improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in each "reach display", the higher the ratio of the jackpot being derived, the easier it is to execute the "V winning chance production". By configuring in this way, it is suggested to the player that "reach display" with a high expectation of big hit can be executed when "V winning chance production" which is meaningful when a big hit is won is executed. be able to. Therefore, by simultaneously executing the "V winning chance production" and the "reach display" that can be expected to be a big hit, the player is expected to derive the big hit more than when each production is executed independently. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the easier it is to win the "V winning chance production", and the easier it is to win the big hit, the higher the possibility of winning the V winning opening 74a. .. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, the game value obtained can be changed depending on the effect mode of the variable effect extracted in addition to the jackpot type, so that the type of effect mode can be given to the player during the game (during the variable effect). It is possible to play the game while paying attention to the above, and it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the "hold change notice" and the "V prize chance production" can be executed at the same time, and even when the "hold change notice" is displayed, the "V prize chance production" gives the player a ball. It is possible to promote the launch and improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, by overlapping the "pending change notice" and the "V winning chance production", the player's expectation for a big hit can be further amplified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortening state" in which the fluctuation shortening function is easily activated, it is easy to select whether or not to activate the fluctuation shortening function based on the player's intention. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", when the corresponding fluctuation production is executed in the normal production mode at the stage when the "V winning chance production" occurs, the winning assistance function is activated. By winning the ball in the second starting port 71, the corresponding variation effect can be easily shortened, and the ball can be easily flowed into the V winning port 74a.

Further, in the "normal game state", it is difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second starting port 71, so that the variation effect of the second special symbol is less likely to occur, and the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed. It is configured so that the variation effect of the second special symbol is less likely to occur inside. With this configuration, the variation effect of the second special symbol, which can be changed preferentially over the first special symbol, will not be interrupted during the "V prize chance effect" based on the start prize of the first special symbol. Can be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production time of the "V winning chance production" from being different from the start time of the variable production that wins the V opening jackpot.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "V winning chance production", it is determined whether or not the ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, and the V winning opening 74a is determined. In the case where the ball cannot win a prize, a "launch promotion suggestion" is displayed to encourage the player to launch the ball so that the fluctuation shortening function is activated. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the "V winning chance production", when the ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, the "launch stop suggestion" is given. Is displayed, and the player is configured to stop firing the ball and wait in the current situation.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same components and processes as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 48, the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

In the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) of the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the V opening jackpot is won, the V winning opening 74a is inserted at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. Determine if the ball can win. Then, as a result of the determination, when the variation effect of generating the V opening jackpot is executed at the timing when the ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, the variation of winning the V opening jackpot is executed. In order to maintain the current state until the effect is executed, instead of the processes of S1356 and S1357 of the V prize chance effect setting process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment, the game is performed in the "V prize chance effect". Have a person display a "launch stop suggestion" suggesting that the ball should be stopped (see S1361 and S1362 in FIG. 48).

In the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) of the second embodiment, in the processing of S1361 performed after the processing of S1355, the value of the total counter 223i after the processing of S1355 corresponds to the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a. It is determined whether or not the time to be performed, that is, the value X (X is a natural number) remaining at that time is within the range of “0 ≦ X <5000” (S1361). When the above residual value is "0 ≤ X <5000" (S1361: Yes), the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened in the current state (number of reserved balls). In this state, when the V winning device 72 is opened, a ball can win a prize in the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, if a big hit occurs in this situation, the ball will flow into the V winning opening 74a, so in the "V winning chance production", in order to display the "launch stop suggestion" that urges the player to stop firing the ball. The display launch stop suggestion command is set (S1362), the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) is terminated, and the process returns to the look-ahead setting process (see FIG. 40).

The display launch stop suggestion command set in the process of S1362 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display launch stop suggestion command prompts the player to stop firing the ball in the “V winning chance production” (see FIGS. 49 (b) and 49 (c) described later). Refer to) ”is displayed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1361 when the above-mentioned residual value is not "0 ≦ X <5000" (S1361: No), that is, the above-mentioned residual value is "5000 ≦ X <20000". If there is, at least there is a timing when the V winning opening 74a is closed, so even if a big hit occurs in this situation (normal production mode), the ball can flow into the V winning opening 74a. Since there is a possibility that there is no such thing, in the "V prize chance production", a display launch promotion suggestion command for displaying the "launch promotion suggestion" that prompts the player to launch the ball is set (S1357), and this V prize is won. The chance effect setting process (S1307) is terminated, and the process returns to the look-ahead setting process (see FIG. 40).

In this way, in the situation where the ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened at the stage of starting the variable production that wins the V opening jackpot, the "V winning chance production" By urging the player to stop firing the ball in the above situation and setting the situation so that the variable effect of winning the V opening jackpot can be executed as it is, the ball is sent to the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. Can create a situation where you can win a prize. Therefore, by configuring the player to obtain the presence or absence of winning the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot by the player's own operation (maintaining the status quo based on the suspension of firing), the feeling of accomplishment when the V winning opening 74a is won is felt. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the “V winning chance effect” in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the variable effect that caused the “V winning chance effect”, and the variable effect. An execution example of the jackpot effect based on the variable effect will be described.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the transition from the “V winning chance production” performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment to the first round of the jackpot without generating a new starting winning prize. 49 (a) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the “V winning chance production” is started, and FIG. 49 (b) is a diagram in which the left symbol column Z1 is stopped from the state of FIG. 49 (a). It is a figure which showed the state, and FIG. 49 (c) is a figure which showed the state which 1 variation effect was digested from the state of FIG. 49 (b), and the next pending variation effect was started. Yes, FIG. 49 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the “V winning chance production” is completed from the state of FIG. 49 (c), and FIG. 49 (e) is a diagram showing a state of “V winning chance production” from the state of FIG. 49 (d). It is a figure which showed the state which the fluctuation effect which became the occurrence factor of "V prize chance production" was started, and FIG. 49 (f) showed the state which the jackpot symbol appeared from the state of FIG. 49 (e). FIG. 49 (g) is a diagram showing a state suggesting that the V winning device 72 is open from the state of FIG. 49 (f), and FIG. 49 (h) is a diagram. It is a figure which showed the state which "V acquisition notification effect" which shows that the ball was won by the V winning opening 74a from the state of 49 (g) is executed.

In the state of FIG. 49 (a), a new start prize of the first special symbol is won while the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is being executed (that is, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is in the “high-speed fluctuation”). Is generated, and in the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a indicating the previous start winning (hereinafter, may be referred to as "starting winning 1" in the description of FIG. 49), "hold". While the "change notice" has not occurred, the hold displayed in the special figure 1 second hold symbol display area Db1b indicating the later start prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as "start prize 2" in the description of FIG. 49). In the symbol, a "pending change notice" has occurred, indicating that the reserved symbol has changed to "red".

In the variable effect corresponding to this "starting prize 2", the "15 round V open jackpot" is won, and as described above, the reserved symbol "pending change" displayed in the special drawing 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. In addition to winning the "red" in the "notice", he also won the "V winning chance production" based on the variable production, indicating that the "V winning chance production" has started.

Here, in FIG. 49 (a), when the variable effect being executed and the variable effect pending are all executed and a V open jackpot based on the “starting prize 2” occurs, the variable effect based on the “starting prize 2” is generated. Is executed in the normal effect mode, it is determined in advance that the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot is opened. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the "V winning chance production" is performed, the "launch stop suggestion" is displayed in the "V winning chance production", and the variation production of the "starting winning 2" is newly started. It is necessary to maintain the current state until the variable production of "starting prize 2" is started, and to execute the variable production based on "starting prize 2" in the normal production mode without generating a new starting prize. Suggest to the player.

In the state of FIG. 49 (a), the character displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds has generated a line indicating that "V winning chance effect" has occurred, and the line display is small on the left. It is displayed in the area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display "It's a chance!" That directly suggests that "V winning chance production" has occurred appears, and in the right small area Ds3, "launch stop suggestion". The text display "Please wait without hitting the ball!" Appears, which indicates one form.

Next, in FIG. 49 (b), from the situation of FIG. 49 (a), the symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 of the main display area Dm, and the symbol fluctuation continues in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3. Indicates the situation. Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display of "Don't hit!" Which is a form of "launch stop suggestion" is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, "V winning chance production". The "remaining time display" of the remaining time (here, "remaining time 19:45") is displayed. This "remaining time display" indicates the remaining time of the "V winning chance production", that is, the time until the fluctuation of the "starting winning 2" starts. At this timing, no new start prize has been generated due to the influence of the "launch stop suggestion".

Next, in FIG. 49 (c), from the situation of FIG. 49 (b), the situation in which the variable effect being executed is finished and the variable effect based on the “starting prize 1” is started, that is, each of the main display areas Dm. It shows the situation where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are "high-speed fluctuation". In this case, the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting prize 1" displayed in the special drawing 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in FIG. 49B is shifted and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the special drawing 1 is displayed. The reserved symbols corresponding to the "starting prize 2" displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b are shifted and displayed in the special drawing 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a.

Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the character display "It is a little more patience!" Which is a form of "launch stop suggestion" is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, "" at this point is displayed. The remaining time display (here, "remaining time 13.25") "is displayed. Even at this timing, no new start prize has been generated due to the influence of the "launch stop suggestion".

Next, FIG. 49 (d) shows a situation in which the variation effect based on the “starting prize 1” is completed and the display result appears from the situation of FIG. 49 (c). In this situation, chance eye symbols (“778”) appear in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm.

Further, in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, the "remaining time display (here," remaining time 00.00 ")" at this time is displayed. Therefore, it suggests to the player that the "V prize chance production" has ended.

Even at this timing, no new start prize has been generated due to the influence of the "launch stop suggestion". Therefore, the variable production based on the "starting prize 2" that is the target of the execution of the "V winning chance production" without generating a new starting prize during the execution of the "V winning chance production" is the "starting prize 2". It will be executed in the normal effect mode recognized at the time of occurrence. In this case, since the ball can win the V winning opening 74a when the V opening jackpot occurs, as a production suggesting to the player that the ball can win the V winning opening 74a, "V winning chance". A chance symbol is displayed at the end of "Direction". Specifically, in the process of S1607 of the counter subtraction process (see FIG. 45) described above, when it is determined that the remaining time timer 223j is not a value larger than "0", that is, the "V winning chance effect" is completed. At the same time, the same processing as in S1416 of the variation effect processing (see FIG. 43) is executed, it is determined whether or not the ball can win the V winning opening 74a in the current situation, and the ball enters the V winning opening 74a. When the player wins a prize, the chance symbol symbol is displayed, while when the ball does not win the V winning opening 74a, the subtraction chance symbol is displayed. With this configuration, the conditions shown in "V winning chance production" could be achieved by displaying the chance symbol at the end of "V winning chance production" as shown in Fig. 49 (d). Can be suggested to the player.

Next, in FIG. 49 (e), from the situation of FIG. 49 (d), the variable effect based on the “starting prize 1” is finished, and the variable effect based on the “starting prize 2” is started, that is, the main display. It shows a situation where each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in the region Dm is "high-speed fluctuating". In this case, the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting prize 2" displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in FIG. 49 (d) is shifted and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0.

Further, in the small left area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the character display "Ready!", Which is the "preparation completion effect" by receiving the preparation completion command, is displayed. Further, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a changed manner with a happy expression. Therefore, by recognizing the "preparation completion effect", the player predicts that the V winning opening 74a will be opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened when the V opening jackpot occurs. can do.

Next, FIG. 49 (f) shows a situation in which the variation effect based on the “starting prize 2” is completed and the display result is displayed from the situation of FIG. 49 (e). In this situation, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm, a "big hit display" in which three "7" symbols corresponding to the "15 round V open jackpot" are arranged appears.

Further, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed with a happy expression as in FIG. 49 (e).

Next, in FIG. 49 (g), from the situation of FIG. 49 (f), a display indicating that "15 rounds V open jackpot" occurs and the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round of the jackpot. (In the example of FIG. 49 (g), the characters "V winning chance" and "Aim for V!" Are displayed). At this timing, since the V winning opening 74a is opened, the ball can win the V winning opening 74a when the V winning device 72 is opened.

Next, in FIG. 49 (h), from the situation of FIG. 49 (g), the first round of the jackpot is completed, the V winning device 72 is closed, and the ball is inserted into the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open. The character display of "V acquisition success!", Which is a "V acquisition notification effect" indicating that the player has won a prize, is displayed. Therefore, after the end of this jackpot, the player is suggested to shift to the "probability fluctuation state".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variable effect during execution, the variable effect on hold, the opening timing of the V winning device 72 at the time of a big hit, and the opening of the V winning opening 74a. The timing is configured to be pre-read at the start winning of a special symbol. Then, as a result of the determination, in the situation where the ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened at the stage of the start winning of the variable effect that wins the V opening jackpot, "V winning" By urging the player to stop firing the ball in the "chance production" and setting the situation so that the variable production that wins the V opening jackpot can be executed as it is, the V winning opening is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. It is possible to create a situation where the ball can win a prize at 74a. Therefore, by configuring the player to obtain the presence or absence of winning the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot by the player's own operation (maintaining the status quo based on the suspension of firing), the feeling of accomplishment when the V winning opening 74a is won is felt. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 57. In the pachinko machines 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when the "V winning chance production" is executed, the content (execution time) of the "V winning chance production" once set is executed as it is, and a new start is performed. It was configured not to modify the "V winning chance production" that is being executed based on the occurrence of a winning.

Here, for example, the "V winning chance production" based on the execution of the variable effect in which the V open jackpot does not occur (hereinafter, the "V winning chance production" based on the execution of the variable production in which the V opening jackpot does not occur is changed to "Gase V". (Sometimes referred to as "winning chance production") is set, and if a V open jackpot occurs in a new start prize that occurs during the execution of the "Gase V winning chance production", "Gase V winning chance production" Then, since it is not possible to suggest the opening timing of the V winning device 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a in the V opening jackpot based on the new starting winning, the player operates the ball to the V winning opening 74a by his / her own operation. It may be difficult to win a prize.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when a new start winning is generated during the execution of the "Gase V winning chance production" and a V opening jackpot is generated in the starting winning, the executing "Gase V" is executed. The content of the "winning chance production" is modified so that the player can be suggested whether or not the ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened based on the V opening jackpot.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described mainly on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment are used for the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. The description will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 50, details of the first hold information storage area 223 m, the second hold information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. To do. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the first reserved information storage area 223 m, the second reserved information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o in the third embodiment. The configuration of the first reserved information storage area 223m, the second reserved information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o in the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the first reserved information storage area 223m and the second The hold information storage area 223n and the execution information storage area 223o are provided with a fluctuation time information storage area 223m6, 223n6, 223o6 for storing the fluctuation time of the stored (holding or executing) fluctuation effect. That is the point. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation time information storage areas 223m6, 223n6 of the reserved information storage areas 223m and 223n are areas in which data relating to the fluctuation time of the reserved fluctuation effect can be stored. Further, the execution information storage area 223o is an area that can store data related to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect being executed, and is a fluctuation time management process executed every 1 ms in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 51) described later. In (see FIG. 54), the remaining time of the variation effect being executed is counted. These fluctuation time information storage areas 223m6, 223n6, 223o6 store values obtained by converting the execution time of the fluctuation effect that can be executed into milliseconds (that is, "20,000" in the case of the variation effect of "20 seconds"). It is configured in.

First, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the first hold information storage area 223 m, the first hold information storage first to fourth areas, or the second hold information storage area 223n, the second hold information storage. Of the first to fourth areas, the first reserved information storage area X or the first area corresponding to the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball counter 223c updated by the reserved ball command. 2 Pre-reading processing (S1391 of pre-reading setting processing (see FIG. 52)) is performed based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223m1 to 223m4, 223n1 to 223n4 in the reserved information storage X area, and the pre-reading processing is performed. The data related to the fluctuation time generated based on the result is stored in the fluctuation time information storage areas 223m6 and 223n6 of the same first hold information storage X area or the second hold information storage X area, respectively.

Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the first hold information storage area 223 m or the second hold information storage area 223n, and The shift process is executed in the execution information storage area 223o. That is, the variation effect of the reserved first special symbol or the second special symbol is reduced by one, and when the variation effect of the second special symbol is suspended, the second special symbol that is reserved first in time. If the execution of the variation effect is started, the variation effect of the second special symbol is not suspended, and the variation effect of the first special symbol is suspended, the first special symbol that is suspended first in time Since the execution of the variation effect is started, each of the storage areas 223n1 to 223n6 of the second hold information storage first area corresponding to the first reserved variation effect, or each of the first hold information storage first areas. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m6 are moved to the storage areas 223o1 to 223o6 of the execution information storage area 223o corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed. ..

Further, the values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223m1 to 223m6, 223n1 to 223n6 of the reserved information storage second area corresponding to the shifted special symbol are shifted. Hold information storage corresponding to the special symbol Moved to each storage area 223m1 to 223m6, 223n1 to 223n6 of the first area, and each storage area of the hold information storage third area corresponding to the shifted special symbol 223m1-223m6, 223n1 The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the ~ 223n6 are moved to the respective storage areas 223m1 to 223m6 of the hold information storage second area corresponding to the shifted special symbol and shifted. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223m1 to 223m6, 223n1 to 223n6 of the reserved information storage fourth area corresponding to the special symbol are converted into the shifted special symbol. It is moved to each storage area 223m1 to 223m6, 223n1 to 223n6 of the corresponding hold information storage third area.

Then, with the progress of the variation effect executed based on the values of the respective values C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223o, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed every 1 ms. In the variable time management process (see FIG. 54), the value of the variable time information storage area 223o6 of the execution information storage area 223o is updated (subtracted). Therefore, by discriminating the fluctuation time information storage area 223o6, the remaining time of the fluctuation effect being executed can be grasped at any time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the fluctuation time management process (see S1151) every 1 millisecond in the main process, and changes in the execution information storage area 223o that stores the fluctuation time during execution. The value of the time information storage area 223o6 is subtracted, and whether or not a new start prize has occurred is determined. If a new start prize has occurred, the first hold information is stored based on the start prize. Data related to the fluctuation time is stored in the fluctuation time information storage areas 223m6 and 223n6 of the area 223m or the second reserved information storage area 223n.

Specifically, after the counter subtraction process (S1110) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process, the fluctuation time management process (S1151) is performed, and after the execution of the fluctuation time management process (S1151), the fluctuation time management process is performed. The process shifts to S1111.

Here, the variable time management process (S1151) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a variable time management process (S1151) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment.

In this fluctuation time management process (S1151), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect is being executed (S1701). As a result of the determination, if the variation effect is being executed (S1701: Yes), the time data stored in the variation time information storage area 223o6 of the execution information storage area 223o is updated (that is, "1" is subtracted) (S1702). ). Then, the remaining fluctuation time command based on the time data stored in the fluctuation time information storage area 223o6 of the updated execution information storage area 223o is set (S1703), and the process shifts to S1704. If it is determined in the process of S1701 that the variation effect is not being executed (S1701: No), the processes of S1702 and S1703 are skipped and the variation time management process (S1151) is terminated. After the variation time management process (S1151) is completed, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 51).

The remaining time command set in the process of S1703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 51). To. In the display control device 114, the display control of the “V winning chance effect” (for example, the “block display” described later) in the third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining time of the variable effect during execution indicated by the remaining time command. Etc.) is executed.

Next, the look-ahead setting process (S1208) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead setting process (S1208) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the look-ahead setting process (S1208) of the third embodiment, a new start prize is generated while the "V prize chance production" based on the fluctuation effect of the loss is being executed, and the variation effect based on the start prize is generated. When a V opening jackpot occurs, the "V winning chance production" is extended, and the opening timing of the V winning device 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a based on the V opening jackpot are determined again to determine the V opening jackpot. When the above occurs, it is suggested to the player whether or not the ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a.

In the look-ahead determination process of the second embodiment, if the V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned on in S1301 (S1301: Yes), the setting process of "V winning chance effect" has already been executed. , It is determined whether or not the V open jackpot occurs in the variable effect based on the new start winning award generated during the execution of this "V winning chance effect" (S1321). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that a V open jackpot will occur due to the fluctuation effect based on the new start prize generated during the "V prize chance production" (S1321: Yes), then the running "V prize chance production" is being executed. It is determined whether or not the "directing" is a "gase V winning chance production" based on the variable production of loss (S1322).

In the process of S1322, if it is determined that the "V winning chance production" being executed is the "Gase V winning chance production" based on the fluctuation effect of the loss (S1322: Yes), the content of the "V winning chance production" First, the variation time of each variation effect stored in the hold information storage areas 223m and 223n before the variation effect based on the hold information storage areas 223m and 223n in which the V open jackpot is stored is set. Each is extracted, and the value corresponding to the integrated time of the fluctuation time is added to the remaining time timer 223j (S1323), and the process is shifted to S1324. Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation production that caused the "Gase V winning chance production" is "40 seconds" and the fluctuation production to be executed next is the V open jackpot, V The fluctuation time of the fluctuation production that is executed before the open jackpot occurs and is the cause of the "Gase V prize chance production" that is not counted as the execution time of the "V prize chance production". "40000" corresponding to "40 seconds" is added to the remaining time timer 223j. As a result, it is possible to extend the execution time of the running "V winning chance effect" that caused the "Gase V winning chance effect" until the start of the variable effect that generates the V open jackpot.

In the process of S1324, the addition time command is set according to the time added in the process of S1323 (S1324), the process is shifted to the V winning chance effect setting process of S1307, and the content of "V winning chance effect" is set again. To do.

The addition time command set in the process of S1324 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 38). To. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the addition time command recognizes the extension time in the "V winning chance effect" and executes a process of adding and displaying the value indicated by the addition time command to the "remaining time display".

In addition, in the process of S1321, when the V open jackpot does not occur in the variable effect based on the new start winning (S1321: No), or in the process of S1322, the "V winning chance effect" being executed is lost. If it is not based on the variation effect (S1322: No), the process shifts to S1308 without performing the processes of S1323 and S1324 in order to execute the executing "V winning chance effect" as it is.

In the process of S1322, in the case of V open jackpot, that is, "V prize chance production" based on "15 round V open jackpot" or "7 round V open jackpot", "V prize chance production" is set (corrected) again. Is not performed, and the process shifts to S1308. This suggests to the player whether or not the ball is already winning in the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot in the executing "V winning chance production". Therefore, if the content of the "V winning chance production" being executed is changed in this case, it is suggested that the ball wins the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the previous V opening jackpot. There is a risk that the content will be changed and the exact content of the "V winning chance production" that has already been performed will be inaccurate. Therefore, even if a start winning prize that generates a new V opening jackpot occurs during the execution of the "V winning chance production" based on the V opening jackpot, the running "V winning chance production" is extended (corrected). Instead, the running "V winning chance production" is configured to be executed as it is. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the production contents of the "V winning chance production".

Further, in the processing of S1322, in the case of a jackpot that is not a V open jackpot, that is, a "V prize chance production" based on "15 round V closed jackpot" or "7 round V closed jackpot", "V prize chance production" is performed again. Is not set (corrected), and the process shifts to S1308. This is because if a V-open jackpot occurs in a variable production based on a new start prize during the execution of a "V-winning chance production" based on a jackpot that is not a V-open jackpot, the execution time of the jackpot that is not a V-open jackpot is The opening time of the variable winning device 65 is not constant, and its end timing cannot be accurately recognized at this point. Here, if the "V winning chance production" being executed based on the starting prize that generates the V opening jackpot is extended, the "V winning chance production" continues until the jackpot that is not the V opening jackpot is being executed. At the same time, it ends during the jackpot, and there is a discrepancy in the content of the production. Therefore, even if a start prize that generates a V open jackpot occurs during the execution of the "V prize chance production" based on a jackpot that is not a V open jackpot, the extension (correction) of the running "V prize chance production" is It is configured so that the running "V winning chance production" is executed as it is without performing it. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the production contents of the "V winning chance production".

Further, in the look-ahead setting process (S1208) of the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect based on the received hold ball number command is read ahead, and the fluctuation time information storage areas 223m6 provided in the hold information storage areas 223m and 223n. , 223n6 is configured to be stored.

Specifically, in the look-ahead setting process (S1208), after the process of S1311, the variation time of each variation effect is based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage areas 223m and 223n. Are extracted, and the data corresponding to the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation time information storage areas 223m6, 223n6 provided in the hold information storage areas 223m and 223n (S1391), and the look-ahead setting process (S1208) is completed. , Return to the command determination process (see FIG. 39).

In this way, by extracting the fluctuation time of each fluctuation effect and storing each variation time data each time a start prize is generated, it is possible to smoothly control the display in the "V prize chance production". It will be possible. Further, by performing display control based on the fluctuation time data stored in the fluctuation time information storage areas 223m6 and 223n6 of the reserved information storage areas 223m and 223n, the "block display" in the "V winning chance production" described later can be performed. It becomes possible to execute.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) of the third embodiment.

The V-winning chance effect setting process (S1307) of the third embodiment is also executed when a V-opening jackpot may occur due to a new start winning during the execution of the "V-winning chance effect" based on the variable effect of loss. It is configured to. Therefore, if a V open jackpot can occur in a new start winning, the processing of S1352 to S1356 is executed, and whether or not the ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. Is determined.

Then, in the processing of S1356, the value of the total counter 223i after the processing of S1355 is divided by the time corresponding to the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a, that is, "20000", and the remaining value X (X is) at that time. It is determined whether or not the natural number) is within the range of “10000 ≦ X <15000” (S1356). When the above residual value is "10000 ≤ X <15000" (S1356: Yes), the V winning opening 74a is completely closed by the distribution plate 73a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. In this state, even if the V winning device 72 is opened, the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, in this situation (normal production mode), even if a big hit occurs, the ball does not flow into the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, in the "V winning chance production", the "launch" that prompts the player to launch the ball. A display launch promotion suggestion command for displaying "promotion suggestion" is set (S1357), the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) is terminated, and the process returns to the look-ahead setting process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1356, when the residual value is not "10000 ≤ X <15000" (S1356: No), then whether the residual value is within the range of "0 ≤ X <5000". Whether or not it is determined (S1365). When the above residual value is "0≤X <5000" (S1365: Yes), the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened in the current state (number of reserved balls). In this state, when the V winning device 72 is opened, a ball can win a prize in the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, if a big hit occurs in this situation, the ball will flow into the V winning opening 74a, so in the "V winning chance production", in order to display the "launch stop suggestion" that urges the player to stop firing the ball. The display firing stop suggestion command is set (S1366), the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) is terminated, and the process returns to the look-ahead setting process (see FIG. 52).

In the process of S1356, when the residual value is not "10000 ≤ X <15000" (S1356: No), and in the process of S1365, the residual value is "0 ≤ X <5000". (S1365: No), that is, when the above-mentioned residual value is "5000 ≤ X <10000" or "15000 ≤ X <20000", at least V winning opening 74a Since there is a timing when is open, the ball can win the V winning opening 74a even in this situation. Therefore, in the "V prize chance production", neither the "launch promotion suggestion" nor the "launch stop suggestion" is displayed, and the process of S1366 is skipped so that the player can think and play the game by himself / herself. The V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) is finished, and the process returns to the look-ahead setting process (see FIG. 40).

In this way, when a V open jackpot occurs based on a new start prize at the time of executing "Gase V prize chance production", the content of "V prize chance production" is modified (extended) and the V prize device is used. To discriminate between the opening timing of 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a, and to suggest to the player whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot. Configure to. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately suggest to the player the situation in which the ball wins the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot, and to the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot. It is possible to obtain the presence or absence of a prize by the player's own operation (the number of starting prizes based on the launch), to make the player feel a sense of accomplishment when winning the V prize opening 74a, and to improve the interest of the game. Further, when the "launch promotion suggestion" is displayed, the number of launching balls in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the variation effect processing (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a variation effect process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the shortening update process (S1451) for determining whether or not the fluctuation effect to be executed is the shortened effect mode at the start of the variation effect. There is.

Specifically, in the variation effect process (S1111) of the third embodiment, after the process of S1413, a shortened update process for determining whether or not the variation effect to be executed from now on is executed in the shortened effect mode is performed (shortening update process). S1451), and then the process shifts to S1414.

Here, the shortened update process (S1451) executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a shortened update process (S1451) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment.

In this shortened update process (S1451), first, it is determined whether or not the variable effect to be executed from now on is executed in the shortened effect mode (S1471). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the variation effect to be executed is executed in the shortened effect mode (S1471: Yes), the variation time is "10 seconds" shorter than the variation time of the variation effect determined at the time of starting winning. Is executed, first, "10000" is subtracted from the time data of the fluctuation effect stored in the fluctuation time information storage area 223o6 of the execution information storage area 223o (S1472). As a result, the consistency between the variation time of the variation effect actually performed and the time data of the variation effect stored in the execution information storage area 223o is maintained.

After the processing of S1472, the remaining fluctuation time command based on the time data stored in the fluctuation time information storage area 223o6 of the execution information storage area 223o subtracted in the processing of S1471 is set (S1473), and this shortened update is performed. The process (S1451) is finished, and the process returns to the variation effect (see FIG. 55).

The remaining time command set in the process of S1473 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 51). To. In the display control device 114, the "V winning chance effect" is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining time of the variable effect being executed (execution time of the variable effect to be executed) indicated by the remaining time command. Display control (for example, the number of "block displays" described later) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the “V winning chance effect” in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the variable effect that caused the “V winning chance effect”, and the variable effect that caused the “V winning chance effect”, and An execution example of the jackpot effect based on the variable effect will be described.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the transition from the “V prize chance effect” performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment to the first round of the jackpot after a new start prize is generated. FIG. 57 (a) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the “V winning chance production” of the third embodiment is started, and FIG. 57 (b) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the “V winning chance production” is started, and FIG. It is a figure which showed the state which "V drive suggestion display" and "variation time integrated display" were displayed in "chance effect". Then, FIG. 57 (c) is a diagram showing a state immediately before a new start winning prize is generated from the state of FIG. 57 (b) and the "additional display" is made with respect to the "remaining time display". FIG. 57 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the "additional display" is applied to the "remaining time display" from the state of FIG. 57 (c). Further, in FIG. 57 (e), "V winning chance production" is continuously displayed from the state of FIG. 57 (d), "V drive suggestion display" and "variation time integrated display" are displayed, and "launch promotion" is displayed. It is the figure which showed the state which "suggestion" is displayed, and FIG. 57 (f) is the figure which showed the state which "suggestion to stop firing" is displayed from the state of FIG. 57 (e). FIG. 57 (g) is a diagram showing a state suggesting that the V winning device 72 is open from the state of FIG. 57 (f), and FIG. 57 (h) is a diagram showing a state of FIG. 57 (h). It is a figure which showed the state which "V acquisition notification effect" which shows that the ball was won by the V winning opening 74a from the state of g) is executed.

In the state of FIG. 57 (a), a new start prize of the first special symbol is obtained while the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed (that is, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is in the “high-speed fluctuation”). Is generated, and in the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a indicating the previous start winning (hereinafter, may be referred to as "starting winning 1" in the description of FIG. 57), "hold". While the "change notice" has not occurred, the hold displayed in the special figure 1 second hold symbol display area Db1b indicating the later start prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as "start prize 2" in the explanation of FIG. 57). In the symbol, a "pending change notice" has occurred, indicating that the reserved symbol has changed to "blue".

In the variable effect corresponding to this "starting prize 2", in the variable effect of loss, the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode (for example, the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" of 25 seconds in "E2: normal reach" + "Fluctuating element of" low speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "") has been extracted, and as described above, "holding change notice" of the holding symbol "holding change notice" displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. In addition to winning the "blue", the "Gase V winning chance production" was also won based on the variable production, indicating that the "Gase V winning chance production" has started.

Here, in FIG. 57A, the executing variation effect and the pending variation effect are all executed, and the character displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is the “V winning chance effect”. Has been generated, and the dialogue display is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display "It's a chance!" That directly suggests that "V winning chance production" has occurred appears, and in the right small area Ds3, "launch promotion suggestion" appears. The text display "Aim at the target!", Which indicates one form, appears.

Next, in FIG. 57 (b), from the situation of FIG. 57 (a), as the “V winning chance effect” of the third embodiment, the opening / closing mode of the V winning opening 74a is placed on the left symbol row Z1 of the main display area Dm. A "V-drive suggestion display" is displayed, and a plurality of "block displays" that schematically show the fluctuation time of the reserved fluctuation effect are displayed on the middle symbol column Z2 of the main display area Dm. The "variable time integrated display" is displayed, and the same character symbol as the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed on the right symbol column Z3 of the main display area Dm. Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the character display "Match the chance!", Which is a form of "launch promotion suggestion", is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, "V winning chance production" is displayed. The "remaining time display" of the remaining time (here, "remaining time: 41.45") is displayed. In this state, the variation effect of the special symbol executed in the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed in the display area in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm.

Here, "V drive suggestion display" and "variation time integrated display" will be described. The "V drive suggestion display" is configured by alternately connecting a "chance" display suggesting an open state of the V winning opening 74a and a "blank" display suggesting a closed state of the V winning opening 74a. ing. The connected "chance" display and "blank" display are configured to be scrolled from the upper part of the screen to the lower part of the screen so as to be linked with a change in the "variable time integrated display" described later.

The "variable time integrated display" is composed of a plurality of "block displays" that schematically show the variable time of the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held, and each of the accumulated "block displays" gives a "V winning chance". The execution time (duration) of "directing" is schematically suggested. This "block display" is configured to change over time with the passage of the variation effect. Specifically, in the "V winning chance effect" of the third embodiment, an effect of changing the "block display" of the "variable time integrated display" is executed as the variable effect progresses. More specifically, the "block display" displayed at the lowermost end of this "variable time integrated display" is erased so as to be crushed with the passage of time from "5 seconds" to "10 seconds". Such a production is executed. When the "block display" is crushed (erased), the "block display" other than the crushed "block display" is displayed so as to fall (scroll) at the bottom of the screen.

As the "fluctuation time integrated display" in FIG. 57 (b), the "block display" of 2 corresponding to the variable effect being executed (hereinafter, the "block display" corresponding to the variable effect being executed is displayed in order from the bottom of the screen. (Sometimes referred to as “block display 0”) and “starting prize 1” (that is, the reserved symbol of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in FIG. 57 (b)) of 2 corresponding to the variation effect. "Block display" (hereinafter, "block display" corresponding to the variation effect based on "starting prize 1" may be referred to as "block display 1") and "starting prize 2" (that is, FIG. 57 (b). ), The "block display" of 4 corresponding to the variation effect based on the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b (hereinafter, the "block display" corresponding to the variation effect based on the "starting prize 2"). (Sometimes referred to as "block display 2") and are displayed in a stacked manner.

In addition, an "arrow symbol" facing the left side of the screen is connected and displayed on the left side portion of the "block display" displayed at the top of the "block display 2" of the "variable time integrated display". .. This "arrow symbol" is displayed so that the tip of the arrow overlaps with the "V drive suggestion display", and the position pointed to by this "arrow symbol" is determined by the V winning device 72 based on this "V winning chance production". The opening / closing mode of the V winning opening 74a when opened is shown. Specifically, when the "arrow symbol" points to the "chance" display, a ball wins in the V winning opening 74a when the V winning device 72 is opened based on this "V winning chance production". If the "arrow symbol" points to the "blank" display while suggesting the situation to be obtained, the V winning opening 74a will be entered when the V winning device 72 is opened based on this "V winning chance production". It suggests a situation where the ball cannot win.

As described above, the "V drive suggestion display" and the "variable time integrated display" in this "V winning chance production" are configured to be scrolled in conjunction with each other. Specifically, the "variable time integrated display" is configured. At the timing when the "block display" of 1 of the "display" is deleted, the "V drive suggestion display" is also scrolled to the lower part of the screen by the display height of the deleted "block display". Therefore, the content of the "V drive suggestion display" pointed to by the "arrow symbol" of the "fluctuation time integrated display" is configured to be the same when the "block display" is erased with the passage of the fluctuation time. Has been done.

In the state of FIG. 57 (b), the "arrow symbol" connected to the "block display" at the top of the "fluctuation time integrated display" points to the "blank" display of the "V drive suggestion display". If the V winning device 72 is opened based on the "V winning chance production" in the situation, the V winning opening 74a is not opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, and the ball wins in the V winning opening 74a. It suggests an impossible situation. At this timing, no new start prize has been generated.

Next, in FIG. 57 (c), from the situation of FIG. 57 (b), the change of the special symbol is changed in the situation in which the changing effect during execution has passed and continues, that is, in the display area in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. It shows the situation where the production is "high-speed fluctuation". Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, "more!" Which is a form of "launch promotion suggestion" is displayed. In the right small area Ds3, the "remaining time display" of the remaining time of the "V winning chance production" (here, "remaining time 38:44") is displayed.

At this timing, one new start prize of the first special symbol is generated from the situation of FIG. 57 (b), and a new start prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as "start prize 3" in the explanation of FIG. 57). The reserved symbol corresponding to is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c. In the variable effect corresponding to this "starting prize 3", the "15 round V open jackpot" was won, and the "red" of the reserved symbol "pending change notice" displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c. It shows the state of winning.

In the "variable time integrated display" in FIG. 57 (c), since the variable time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 57 (b), "block display 0" is displayed by S1703 of the variable time management process (see FIG. 52). One of the constituent "block displays" has been erased, and the "block display 1" is displayed as a "block display" of 1. Then, in the upper part of the screen of "block display 0", as in FIG. 57 (b), "block display 1" composed of 2 "block display" and "block display" composed of 4 "block display" are formed. 2 ”is displayed in a stack.

Further, in the "variable time integrated display" in FIG. 57 (c), the "block display" of 4 corresponding to the variable effect based on the "starting prize 3" (hereinafter, "starting prize 3" corresponding to the variable effect " "Block display" may be referred to as "block display 3"), indicating a state in which the screen is dropped from above the screen. This "block display 3" is displayed so as to correspond to the fluctuation time of the "starting prize 3" based on the process of S1391 of the look-ahead setting process (see FIG. 53), and then is stacked above the "block display 2". The player is shown that the execution time of the "V winning chance production" has increased due to the increase in the "block display" which is the "variable time integrated display".

Here, in FIG. 57 (c), when the variable effect being executed and the variable effect pending are all executed and a V opening jackpot based on the "starting prize 3" occurs, the variable effect based on the "starting prize 3" is generated. Is executed in the normal production mode, it is determined in advance that the V winning opening 74a is closed at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot is opened. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in order to suggest to the player whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a in the V opening jackpot based on the "starting winning 3", first, "Gase V winning" The execution time of the "V winning chance production" is extended by the execution time of the variable production of the "starting prize 2" that caused the "chance production". Specifically, with respect to the "remaining time display" currently displayed in the right small area Ds3, an "additional display" of "+40.00" is displayed in the upper right upper display area of the main display area Dm. An effect of adding the "additional display" to the "remaining time display" is executed. That is, in the scene of FIG. 57 (c), it is shown that the execution time of the "V winning chance effect" is added by "40 seconds" so as to correspond to the increase in the "block display 3".

Then, in the state of FIG. 57 (c), the "arrow symbol" connected to the "block display 3" stacked at the top of the "variable time integrated display" displays the "blank" of the "V drive suggestion display". In this situation, if the V winning device 72 is opened based on the "V winning chance production", the V winning opening 74a is not opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, and the V winning opening is not opened. It suggests a situation where the ball cannot win a prize at 74a.

That is, FIG. 57 (c) suggests to the player that the "V winning chance production" has been extended, and in the current state, even if a V opening jackpot occurs, the V winning opening 74a shows that the ball cannot win. Furthermore, the launch of the ball is promoted by the "launch promotion suggestion", a new start prize is generated during the execution of the extended "V prize chance production", and a special symbol is generated at the start of the variable production of the "start prize 3". It is suggested that the number of reserved balls should be set to "4" and the variable effect based on the "starting prize 3" should be executed in the shortened effect mode.

Next, in FIG. 57 (d), from the situation of FIG. 57 (c), the state in which the variation effect corresponding to "block display 0" and "block display 1" is completed, that is, the display of the upper left portion of the main display area Dm is displayed. In the area, the variable effect of the special symbol is stopped and displayed as the "Gasechance pattern". Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, "launch!" Which is a form of "launch promotion suggestion" is displayed. Further, in the right small area Ds3, the "remaining time display" of the remaining time of the "V winning chance production" (here, "remaining time 40:00") is displayed. This "remaining time display" indicates the remaining time of the "V winning chance production" modified (extended) based on the "starting winning 3", that is, the time until the fluctuation of the "starting winning 3" starts. ing. At this timing, no new start prize has been generated.

In this case, the variation effect executed in FIG. 57 (c) has been completed, and it corresponds to the "starting prize 1" displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in FIG. 57 (c). The variable effect corresponding to the reserved symbol is also deleted. Then, the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting prize 2" displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b in FIG. 57 (c) is shifted and displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a. At the same time, the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting prize 3" displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c in FIG. 57 (c) is shifted and displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. ..

In the "fluctuation time integrated display" in FIG. 57 (d), since the fluctuation time has elapsed from the state of FIG. Each "block display" constituting "block display 1" has been deleted. Then, the "block display 2" composed of the "block display" of 4 and the "block display 3" composed of the "block display" of 4 are stacked and displayed.

Further, in the state of FIG. 57 (d), as in the state of FIG. 57 (c), the "arrow symbol" connected to the "block display 3" stacked on the uppermost stage of the "variable time integrated display" is "V". It points to the "blank" display of the "drive suggestion display", and if the V winning device 72 is opened based on the "V winning chance production" in this situation, the V winning device 72 is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. It suggests that the mouth 74a is not opened and the ball cannot win the V winning mouth 74a.

Next, in FIG. 57 (e), from the situation of FIG. 57 (d), the variation effect corresponding to the “block display 2” is started and the “reach display” is executed, that is, the main display area Dm. In the display area of the upper left part, the variation effect of the special symbol is displayed as the "reach forming symbol". Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, "still more!" Which is a form of "launch promotion suggestion" is displayed. Further, in the right small area Ds3, the "remaining time display" of the remaining time of the "V winning chance production" (here, "remaining time 24:35") is displayed.

In this case, in FIG. 57 (d), the variation effect by the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting prize 2" displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a is executed, and the variation effect is erased. The reserved symbols corresponding to the "starting prize 3" displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b are shifted and displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a.

Further, at this timing, one new start prize of the first special symbol is generated from the situation of FIG. 57 (d), and a new start prize (hereinafter, referred to as "start prize 4" in the explanation in FIG. 57) may be generated. The reserved symbol corresponding to (is) is displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. In the variation effect corresponding to this "starting prize 4", the "pending change notice" is not won and is displayed in the display mode of "white".

In the "variable time integrated display" in FIG. 57 (e), since the variable time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 57 (d), the "block display 2" is displayed by S1703 of the variable time management process (see FIG. 52). One of the constituent "block displays" has been erased, and the "block display 2" is displayed by the "block display" of 3. Then, as in FIG. 57 (d), the "block display 3" composed of the "block display" of 4 is stacked and displayed on the upper part of the screen of the "block display 2".

Further, in the "variable time integrated display" in FIG. 57 (e), the "block display" of 2 corresponding to the variable effect based on the "starting prize 4" (hereinafter, the "block display" corresponding to the variable effect based on the "starting prize 4" "Block display" may be referred to as "block display 4"), indicating a state in which the "block display" has fallen from above the screen. This "block display 4" is displayed so as to correspond to the fluctuation time of the "starting prize 4" based on the process of S1391 of the look-ahead setting process (see FIG. 53), and then is stacked above the "block display 3". Be done. Even if the "block display 4" is stacked above the "block display 3" as the "variable time integrated display", the execution time of the "V winning chance production" does not increase. Therefore, the connection position of the "arrow symbol" connected to the "block display 3" does not change either.

That is, FIG. 57 (e) suggests to the player that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the new start winning, but as it stands, even if a V opening jackpot occurs, the V winning opening 74a shows that the ball cannot win. Furthermore, the "launch promotion suggestion" is used to promote the launch of balls to generate a further start prize, and at the start of the variable production of "start prize 3", the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is set to "4", and the "start prize" It is suggested that the variable effect based on "3" should be executed in the shortened effect mode.

Next, in FIG. 57 (f), from the situation of FIG. 57 (e), the state in which the “reach display” is continuously executed after the execution variation effect has elapsed, that is, the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In the display area of, the variation effect of the special symbol is displayed as the "reach forming symbol". Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, "Ready, stop hitting", which is a form of "suggestion to stop firing", is displayed. Further, in the right small area Ds3, the "remaining time display" of the remaining time of the "V winning chance production" (here, "remaining time 16:35") is displayed.

At this timing, two new start prizes of the first special symbol are generated from the situation of FIG. 57 (e), and among the two start prizes, the new start prize (hereinafter, in the description of FIG. 57, " The reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting prize 5") is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c (see FIG. 5), and a new starting prize (hereinafter, FIG. 57) will be described later. The reserved symbol corresponding to the “starting prize 6”) is displayed in the special drawing 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d (see FIG. 5). In the variable effect corresponding to the "starting prize 5" and the "starting prize 6", the "pending change notice" is not won and is displayed in the display mode of "white".

In the "variable time integrated display" in FIG. 57 (f), since the variable time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 57 (e), the "block display 2" is displayed by S1703 of the variable time management process (see FIG. 52). One of the constituent "block displays" has been erased, and the "block display 2" is displayed by the "block display" of 2. Then, in the upper part of the screen of the "block display 2", as in FIG. 57 (d), the "block display 3" composed of the "block display" of 4 and the "block display" composed of the "block display" of 2 are formed. 4 ”is displayed in a stack.

Further, in the "variable time integrated display" in FIG. 57 (f), the "block display" of 2 corresponding to the variable effect based on the "starting prize 5" (hereinafter, "the variable effect based on the" starting prize 5 "" is supported. "Block display" may be referred to as "block display 5"), which falls from the upper part of the screen and is piled up above the "block display 4", and 2 corresponding to the variation effect based on the "starting prize 6". The "block display" (hereinafter, the "block display" corresponding to the variation effect based on the "starting prize 6" may be referred to as the "block display 6") falls from the upper part of the screen and is above the "block display 5". It is displayed stacked in.

Here, during this "V winning chance production", that is, before the start of the variable production based on the "starting prize 3", the number of reserved balls of the special symbol can be accumulated "4". Therefore, since the variation effect based on the "starting prize 3" is executed in the shortened effect mode, in the shortened update process (see FIG. 56) of the variation effect process, the variation time information storage area 223o6 of the execution information storage area 223o "10000" corresponding to "10 seconds" is subtracted from the value (see S1472 and S1473), and to indicate that, the hammer symbol held by the character symbol is the "block" in the "variable time integrated display". The state in which the "block display" of 1 of "display 3" is skipped from the stacked "variable time integrated display" and the "block display" is skipped is shown on the right side of the screen. Then, each "block display" (that is, "block display 3", "block display 4", "block display 5", and "block display 6") stacked above the flipped "block display"). However, it is shown that it has fallen to the lower side of the screen like a Dharma doll.

In this case, the position pointed to by the "arrow symbol" connected to the "block display" at the top of the "block display 3" is shifted by the skipped "block display", and the "blank" display is changed to the "chance". It has changed to the display.

That is, in FIG. 57 (f), the "arrow symbol" of the "variable time integrated display" is changed to the "chance" of the "V drive suggestion display" by suggesting that the number of reserved balls has been increased due to the new start winning. Since it points to the display, it is suggested to the player that the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened when the V opening jackpot occurs.

Next, in FIG. 57 (g), from the situation of FIG. 57 (f), a variation effect based on the "starting prize 3" is executed, and in the variation effect, a "15 round V open jackpot" is generated, and the jackpot is hit. In the first round, a display indicating that the V winning device 72 is open (in the example of FIG. 57 (g), the characters "V winning chance" and "Aim for V!") Appear. There is. At this timing, since the V winning opening 74a is opened, the ball can win the V winning opening 74a when the V winning device 72 is opened.

Next, in FIG. 57 (h), from the situation of FIG. 57 (g), the first round of the jackpot is completed, the V winning device 72 is closed, and the ball is inserted into the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open. The text display of "V acquisition success!", Which is a "V acquisition notification effect" indicating that the prize has been won, is displayed. Therefore, after the end of this jackpot, the player is suggested to shift to the "probability fluctuation state".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when a V opening jackpot occurs based on a new start winning at the time of executing the "Gase V winning chance production", the "V winning chance production" While modifying (extending) the contents of, the opening timing of the V winning device 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a are determined, and a ball is inserted into the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot. It is configured to suggest to the player whether or not it is a winning situation. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately suggest to the player the situation in which the ball wins the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot, and to the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot. It is possible to obtain the presence or absence of a prize by the player's own operation (the number of starting prizes based on the launch), to make the player feel a sense of accomplishment when winning the V prize opening 74a, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the case of "V winning chance production" based on the V opening jackpot, the setting (correction) of "V winning chance production" is not performed again. This suggests to the player whether or not the ball is already winning in the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot in the executing "V winning chance production". Therefore, if the content of the "V winning chance production" being executed is changed in this case, it is suggested that the ball wins the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the previous V opening jackpot. There is a risk that the content will be changed and the exact content of the "V winning chance production" that has already been performed will be inaccurate. Therefore, even if a start winning prize that generates a new V opening jackpot occurs during the execution of the "V winning chance production" based on the V opening jackpot, the running "V winning chance production" is extended (corrected). Instead, the running "V winning chance production" is configured to be executed as it is. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the production contents of the "V winning chance production".

Further, even in the case of "V prize chance production" based on a jackpot that is not a V open jackpot, the setting (correction) of "V prize chance production" is not performed again. This is because if a V-open jackpot occurs in a variable production based on a new start prize during the execution of a "V-winning chance production" based on a jackpot that is not a V-open jackpot, the execution time of the jackpot that is not a V-open jackpot is The opening time of the variable winning device 65 is not constant, and its end timing cannot be accurately recognized at this point. Here, if the "V winning chance production" being executed based on the starting prize that generates the V opening jackpot is extended, the "V winning chance production" continues until the jackpot that is not the V opening jackpot is being executed. At the same time, it ends during the jackpot, and there is a discrepancy in the content of the production. Therefore, even if a start prize that generates a V open jackpot occurs during the execution of the "V prize chance production" based on a jackpot that is not a V open jackpot, the extension (correction) of the running "V prize chance production" is It is configured so that the running "V winning chance production" is executed as it is without performing it. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the production contents of the "V winning chance production".

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the execution time of the fluctuation effect, the opening timing of the V winning device 72, and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a that is constantly driven constantly, and the contents thereof are used as a remaining time command or V winning. It is visualized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by transmitting it to the display control device 114 by a device release command or the like. Then, before the V winning device 72 is opened, whether or not the ball can win the V winning opening 74a in the running situation is also displayed. In addition, when the execution time of the variable effect is changed, the effect according to the changed content is executed. With this configuration, the change in the obtained game value is displayed according to the change in the game situation due to the game result that the player voluntarily performs, and the sense of accomplishment is achieved when the game value is obtained. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment is provided by adding a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment to the embodiment or exchanging a part or a plurality of parts of the structure of the embodiment with each other. The embodiment may be modified to form the configuration. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification example 1>
In each of the above embodiments, as "V winning chance production", "suggestion to stop firing" is performed in the case where the V winning opening 74a can be won, and in the case where the V winning opening 74a cannot be won, ""Suggestion of launch promotion" was performed, and the player was instructed to launch the ball as "V prize chance production". On the other hand, as the "V winning chance production", an expression that directly suggests the probability of winning the V winning opening 74a may be performed. Specifically, for example, if a ball can win a prize in the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open, a character display such as "100%" or "90%" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Appears in. Further, if the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open, a character display such as "0%" or "10%" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Further, if the situation where the ball can win the V winning opening 74a and the situation where the ball cannot win is mixed while the V winning device 72 is open, the ball cannot win the situation. The ratio of situations in which a prize can be won (for example, "50%" in the case of half and half) may be configured to appear in the third symbol display device 81.

<Modification 2>
In each of the above embodiments, as "V winning chance production", "suggestion to stop firing" is performed in the case where the V winning opening 74a can be won, and in the case where the V winning opening 74a cannot be won, ""Suggestion of launch promotion" was performed, and the player was instructed to launch the ball as "V prize chance production". On the other hand, as the "V winning chance production", a message expression that indirectly suggests the probability of winning the V winning opening 74a may be performed. Specifically, for example, if a ball can win a prize in the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open, a character display such as "great chance!" Or "lucky!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device. Appears in 81. In addition, if the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open, the third symbol display such as "Dangerous ..." or "Maybe it's no good ..." is displayed. Appears in device 81. Furthermore, if the situation where the ball can win the V winning opening 74a and the situation where the ball cannot win while the V winning device 72 is open are mixed, "Which one?" Or "It's okay to go, You may configure it so that "I don't go" or the like appears on the third symbol display device 81.

<Modification example 3>
In each of the above embodiments, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes a predetermined value or more (for example, "4" or more in the "normal game state"), the normal effect mode is switched to the shortened effect mode. Was there. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches a predetermined value, it may be configured to be executed in an extended effect mode in which the time of the variable effect of the special symbol is extended. In this case, the time width for switching from the normal effect mode to the extended effect mode is configured to be related to the drive cycle of the V winning opening 74a. With this configuration, the winning result for the V winning opening 74a can be different depending on whether the V open jackpot is performed in the normal effect mode or the extended effect mode, as in the case of performing the shortened effect mode. it can. Further, the reserved number table 202c may be used so that the normal effect mode, the shortened effect mode, and the extended effect mode can be executed.

<Modification example 4>
In each of the above embodiments, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes a predetermined value or more (for example, "4" or more in the "normal game state"), the normal effect mode is switched to the shortened effect mode. Was there. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes the first predetermined value (for example, "2") or more, the shortened effect mode is selected, and the second predetermined value is larger than the first predetermined value. When the value (for example, "4 pieces") or more is reached, the normal effect mode may be selected again.

Specifically, for example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, which is a situation that is likely to occur as a game situation in the "normal game state", is "1" to "3", a variable effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the effect is varied. When the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "4", the variation effect is performed in the shortened effect mode. Then, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, which is a situation that is unlikely to occur as a game situation in the "normal game state", is "5" to "8", it is configured to perform a variable effect in the normal effect mode. On the other hand, it is easy to acquire the number of reserved balls of a special symbol by firing a ball in a right-handed game, and it is possible that the number of reserved balls in a special game is not acquired by not firing a ball in a right-handed game. Alternatively, as the game situation in the "time shortened state", when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, which is a situation that can be selected according to the player's intention, is "1" to "4", a variable effect is performed in the normal effect mode. , "5" or "6" will perform the variable effect in the shortened effect mode, "7" will perform the variable effect in the normal effect mode, and "8" will perform the variable effect again in the shortened effect mode. Constitute. With such a configuration, it becomes easy for the player to control the fluctuation time until the V winning device 72 is opened according to the player's intention. In particular, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" in which any special symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be reserved, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is generated in advance. By acquiring the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol that is preferentially changed, it becomes easier to select whether to execute the variable effect in the normal effect mode or the shortened effect mode according to the player's intention. It is possible to easily obtain the presence or absence of a prize in the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot by the player's own operation (the number of starting prizes based on the launch).

<Modification 5>
In each of the above embodiments, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes a predetermined value or more (for example, "4" or more in the "normal game state"), the variation from the normal effect mode to the shortened effect mode is one step. It was configured to select different production modes at different times. On the other hand, the variation time (effect mode) of the variation effect may be switched to a plurality of stages according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, for example, when the number of reserved balls is "1 or 2", it is shorter than the normal effect mode, when it is "3", it is shorter than the shortened effect mode, and when it is "4" or more, it is shorter than the shortened effect mode. It is configured so that the ultra-shortening effect mode in which the fluctuation time is selected is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the pattern of whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a when the V opening jackpot occurs, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 6>
In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing time of the V winning opening 74a is set to be the same as the opening / closing time. On the other hand, the V winning opening 74a may be opened and closed so that the opening time and the closing time of the V winning opening 74a are different.

<Modification 7>
In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a (that is, opening “10 seconds”, closing “10 seconds”) and the shortening of the fluctuation time when the normal effect mode is changed to the shortened effect mode (that is, that is). It was configured to match "10 seconds"). On the other hand, the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a and the shortening of the fluctuation time when the normal effect mode is changed to the shortened effect mode may not match and may be configured to be different times. Specifically, for example, the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a is set to "5 seconds" for opening and "5 seconds" for closing, and the shortened variation time is "3 seconds" when the normal effect mode is changed to the shortened effect mode. It is configured to be. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 8>
In each of the above embodiments, in the V opening jackpot, the time from the stop of the fluctuation effect to the opening of the V winning device 72, that is, the opening time is fixedly set to "10 seconds" for any V opening jackpot. Was there. On the other hand, even if a plurality of types of opening times for the V opening jackpot are provided, and variations are provided in the time from the stop of the fluctuation effect to the opening of the V winning device 72 according to the type of the V opening jackpot. Good. Specifically, for example, even in the case where the same "7 round V open jackpot" is displayed and the "big hit display" by the main symbol of "3" appears on the third symbol display device 81. Different jackpot types are provided for the opening time of "10 seconds" and "5 seconds". With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the V winning device 72 from the display result of the variation effect, which is surprising. You can realize the game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 9>
In each of the above embodiments, when the execution lottery of the "V winning chance production" is won, it is configured to be immediately executed regardless of the pending variable production. On the other hand, if you win the execution lottery of "V prize chance production", you should immediately wait without performing "V prize chance production" and start "V prize chance production" when the predetermined conditions are met. It may be configured. Specifically, for example, when the execution lottery of "V prize chance production" is won, the "V prize chance production" starts from the start of the fluctuation production immediately before the fluctuation production won in the execution lottery of "V prize chance production". It may be configured to perform "directing". When a ball is launched based on the "launch promotion suggestion" of the "V prize chance production" and a variable effect that is a shortened effect mode is executed, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is set at the start of the variable effect that generates the V open jackpot. When the number is "4", the shortened effect mode is executed, and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "4" even at the start of the variation effect executed before the execution of the variation effect that generates the V open jackpot. Therefore, when the shortened effect mode is executed and the shortened effect mode is executed twice in the variation effect of 2, V is accumulated even though the number of reserved balls is accumulated as instructed in the "V winning chance effect". A situation occurs in which the ball cannot win a prize in the winning opening 74a. Therefore, since each of the variable effects of 2 is executed in the shortened effect mode, the ball wins the V winning opening 74a even though the shortened effect mode is executed according to the suggestion content of the "V winning chance effect". It is possible to suppress the occurrence of events such as not being obtained.

<Modification example 10>
In each of the above embodiments, the winning probability of the "V winning chance production" is changed according to the type of the extracted production mode. On the other hand, the jackpot probability (probability setting value) of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be changeable by hall personnel and the like, and the winning probability of "V winning chance production" is changed according to the jackpot probability (probability setting value). It may be configured to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a depending on the probability set value, and it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 11>
In each of the above embodiments, the normal effect mode and the shortened effect mode can be selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol in any of the gaming states. On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, the normal effect mode or the shortened effect mode may not be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the player can obtain the winning or not of the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot by his own operation according to the game state, and the variation of the game is enriched. You can improve the interest of the game.

<Modification example 12>
In each of the above embodiments, the V winning device 72 is configured to be opened only in one round (that is, the first round) in the V opening jackpot. On the other hand, the V winning device 72 may be configured to open in a plurality of rounds in the V opening jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to easily generate a "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

<Modification example 13>
In each of the above embodiments, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 in one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the maximum opening time is set in one round. It was configured so that the maximum number of winnings could be won before the time passed. On the other hand, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 in one round is set so that the maximum opening time can elapse before winning, and the execution time required from the start to the end of one jackpot is set as a fixed time. It may be configured to be. Specifically, for example, the maximum number of winnings of the variable winning device 65 in one round is set to "10", while the maximum opening time is set to "5 seconds". In the pachinko machine 10, since the balls are fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds", "10" balls cannot be fired within "5 seconds". Therefore, since it is difficult for the maximum number of winning balls to win before the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 in one round elapses, the variable winning device 65 is not closed due to the maximum number of winnings, but the maximum opening time. It is configured to be closed as the process progresses. Then, in all rounds, the variable winning device 65 will be closed after the lapse of the maximum opening time. As a result, the time required from the start to the end of one jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "the previous jackpot") becomes constant (fixed). In this case, in the pachinko machine 10 that can be given a "probability fluctuation state" by winning a prize in the V winning opening 74a that is opened and closed at a fixed cycle, a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "later jackpot") is used in the pending fluctuation effect. ) Occurs, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a in the previous jackpot before the first jackpot is started (for example, during the variable effect of deriving the first jackpot). At the same time, since the opening timing of the V winning device 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a in the later jackpot can be grasped, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the ball wins in the V winning opening 74a in the later jackpot. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the V winning opening 74a is opened and closed at regular intervals, it is grasped before the start of the previous jackpot that the jackpots occur continuously, the result is suggested in advance, and the interest of the game is improved. it can.

<Modification 14>
In each of the above embodiments, the pre-reading effects of the "V winning chance effect" and the "pending change notice" are configured to be executed by separate lottery. On the other hand, the lottery for the pre-reading effect of the "V winning chance effect" and the "holding change notice" may be simultaneously performed by the same lottery counter or the like. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of processes and reduce the control burden regarding the lottery for the look-ahead effect.

<Modification 15>
In each of the above embodiments, the variation effect is controlled by the so-called special figure 2 priority variation in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation effect of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the variation effect may be controlled by the so-called variation in the order of winning, in which the variation effect is executed in the order of winning. With this configuration, the ball wins the second starting port 71 during the execution of the "V winning chance production" based on the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, as in the special figure 2 priority fluctuation, and the second special It is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production content of the "V winning chance production" by interrupting (prioritizing) the variation production of the symbol.

<Modification 16>
In each of the above embodiments, in the "normal game state" in which the variation effect of the first special symbol is easily executed, the start prize of the second special symbol is unlikely to occur, and the "V prize" based on the variation effect of the first special symbol is formed. During the execution of "chance production", the fluctuation production of the second special symbol was interrupted so that it would be difficult to execute. On the other hand, if the start prize of the second special symbol occurs during the execution of the "V prize chance production" based on the variation effect of the first special symbol, the content of the executing "V prize chance production" is corrected. Alternatively, it may be configured to be interrupted (erased). With this configuration, in the "V winning chance production", there is a discrepancy in the production content that the "launch promotion suggestion" is executed even though the ball can still win the V winning opening 74a. Can be prevented from occurring.

<Modification 17>
In each of the above embodiments, a lottery for a jackpot is performed using two types of special symbols. On the other hand, a lottery effect of a big hit may be performed with only one type of special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable effect of other special symbols from being interrupted during the execution of the "V winning chance effect", and to prevent a discrepancy in the effect contents.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above embodiments, the reserved number table 202c is commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, a separate hold number table may be provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the hold number table to be referred to may be changed for each variation effect of each special symbol.

<Modification 19>
In each of the above embodiments, the V winning device 72 is configured to be opened based on the winning of the V opening jackpot. On the other hand, in the special symbol lottery, the V winning device 72 may be opened when a small hit different from the big hit is won. With this configuration, the "probability fluctuation state" is not given because the ball does not win in the V winning opening 74a at the time of a big hit, but a large number of balls are paid out and a large number of balls are not paid out at the time of a small hit. It is possible to create a playability such that a "probability fluctuation state" is given, to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game. Further, it is necessary to open the variable winning device 65 and the V winning device 72 in the big hit by opening the variable winning device 65 in the case of a big hit and opening the V winning device 72 in the case of winning a small hit. It is possible to reduce the control burden at the time of a big hit.

<Modification 20>
In each of the above embodiments, the lottery game of 1 special symbol can be acquired in one firing mode, that is, in the left-handed game, only the lottery game of the first special symbol can be acquired, and in the right-handed game, the first 2 It was configured so that only lottery games with special symbols could be acquired. On the other hand, in one firing mode, a lottery game of a plurality of special symbols may be configured to be acquireable. Specifically, for example, a distribution unit in which the first start port and the second start port are assembled is provided, and the balls flowing into the distribution unit are alternately started at the first start port or the second start by the distribution device. It is configured to be distributed to the mouth. With this configuration, the lottery game of each special symbol can be acquired in one firing mode, and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol can be acquired up to the maximum number of reserved balls of each special symbol. By making it easier to increase the range of change in the total number of reserved balls of a special symbol from the situation where only the maximum number of reserved balls of a symbol can be obtained, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 21>
In each of the above embodiments, the ball passes through the V winning device 72, which can give a predetermined profit (prize ball, etc.) to the player by winning the ball during the right-handed game, which is advantageous for the player. A V winning opening 74a that generates a "profit fluctuation state" is provided, a ball is distributed to either the left side path 74 or the right side path 75 by a distribution device 73 provided in the V winning device 72, and the ball is fired by a right-handed game. It was configured to make a difference whether or not the ball was won in the V winning opening 74a in the V winning device 72. On the other hand, a distribution mechanism (for example, a distribution valve, a rotating body, etc., the same applies hereinafter) that is driven at a constant cycle is provided on the surface of the game board 13 outside the V prize device 72 to win a V prize. Before winning the prize in the device 72, the flow direction of the ball flowing down the game area may be distributed by the distribution mechanism so as to make a difference whether or not the V winning device 72 is won.

Specifically, for example, a distribution mechanism is provided above the front view of the game board 13 of the V winning device 72 (see FIG. 3), and the distribution mechanism is placed in the game area on the left side of the front view of the distribution mechanism. A fixed cycle (for example, a cycle equal to or greater than the firing interval of the ball (for example, "for example," " It is configured to switch in "0.6 seconds" or more)). Then, the V winning device 72 is arranged in the game area (flow path) below the right side of the front view of the sorting mechanism, and the ball distributed to the right side of the front view of the sorting mechanism can win the V winning device 72 (. On the other hand, it is configured so that the ball distributed to the left side of the front view of the distribution mechanism cannot (difficultly) win the V winning device 72. With this configuration, when a ball is continuously fired in a right-handed game, all the balls flowing down the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 win the V winning device 72 by the above-mentioned distribution mechanism. It is possible to make a difference between the situation where it is possible to obtain (easy) or the situation where it is not possible (difficult) to win all the V winning devices 72 by the above distribution mechanism, and whether or not the V winning opening 74a is won by the distribution mechanism It is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games by changing. In this case, by notifying the V winning device 72 whether or not the ball can be won by the "V winning chance production", it is easy to make the V winning device 72 win the ball, and many games are played by the player. It is possible to easily add value.

The winning device in which the balls sorted by the distribution mechanism can win a prize may be a winning device other than the V winning device 72, for example, the variable winning device 65, the first starting port 64, or the second starting. It may be a mouth 71, a through gate 67, a general winning mouth 63, or a variable winning device dedicated to a small hit that can be opened at the time of winning a small hit. In this case, in the winning devices 65, 71 having an opening / closing plate covering the winning opening, such as the variable winning device 65, the second starting port 71, or the variable winning device dedicated to small hits, the ball is produced by "V winning chance production". By notifying whether or not the situation is such that a player can win a prize, it is possible to make it easier for the player to acquire the game value.

<Modification 22>
In each of the above embodiments, the ball passes through the V winning device 72, which can give a predetermined profit (prize ball, etc.) to the player by winning the ball during the right-handed game, which is advantageous for the player. A V winning opening 74a that generates a "profit fluctuation state" is provided, a ball is distributed to either the left side path 74 or the right side path 75 by a distribution device 73 provided in the V winning device 72, and the ball is fired by a right-handed game. It was configured to make a difference whether or not the ball was won in the V winning opening 74a in the V winning device 72. On the other hand, the V winning device 72 is provided at a position where the ball can win during the left-handed game, and whether or not the ball launched in the left-handed game wins the V winning opening 74a in the V winning device 72 is different. It may be configured as follows.

In this case, the ball launched in the left-handed game is divided into a winning route that can (easily) win the V winning device 72 and a difficult winning route that cannot (difficultly) win the V winning device 72. A distribution mechanism is provided, and before winning the V winning device 72, the flow direction of the ball flowing down the game area is distributed by the distribution mechanism, and whether or not the V winning device 72 is awarded is distributed. It may be configured.

Specifically, for example, the distribution mechanism is arranged on a stage (not shown) in which a ball flowing in from a warp port (not shown) on the left side of the front view of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 3) can stay. .. Then, the distribution mechanism is used to distribute the ball to the winning route where the ball can (easily) win the V winning device 72, and the V winning route is a route other than the winning route. The device 72 is configured to be changeable to a winning difficult route distribution state in which the ball is distributed to the winning difficult route where the ball cannot (difficultly) win. In addition, the winning path distribution state of the distribution mechanism and the winning difficult path distribution state are switched at a fixed cycle (for example, a cycle equal to or longer than the firing interval of the sphere (for example, "0.6 seconds" or more)). Configure to. Then, the ball distributed to the winning path by the distribution mechanism is configured to be able to win (easily) win the V winning device 72, while the ball distributed to the difficult winning path by the distribution mechanism is the V winning device 72. It is configured so that it cannot (difficultly) win a prize. With this configuration, whether or not the ball launched in the left-handed game and staying on the stage of the center frame 86 can (easily) win the V winning device 72 by the distribution mechanism is different. By changing whether or not to win the V winning opening 74a by the distribution mechanism, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game. In this case, by notifying the V winning device 72 whether or not the ball can be won by the "V winning chance production", it is easy to make the V winning device 72 win the ball, and many games are played by the player. It is possible to easily add value.

The route through which the balls distributed by the distribution mechanism can flow down may be a route other than the route that can win the V winning device 72, and for example, a route that can flow into the variable winning device 65 or a first route. 1 A route that can flow into the starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, a route that can flow into the through gate 67, a route that can flow into the general winning port 63, or a variable winning device dedicated to small hits that can be opened when a small hit is won. It may be a route or the like that can flow into. In this case, in the winning devices 65, 71 having an opening / closing plate covering the winning opening, such as the variable winning device 65, the second starting port 71, or the variable winning device dedicated to small hits, the ball is produced by "V winning chance production". By notifying whether or not the situation is such that a player can win a prize, it is possible to make it easier for the player to acquire the game value.

<Modification example 23>
In the above embodiment, the "V winning chance production" is executed until the start of the variable production that is the target of the "V winning chance production" by winning the V opening jackpot. On the other hand, as the end timing of the "V prize chance production", from the start of the variable production subject to the "V prize chance production" until the first predetermined timing arrives, or in the "V prize chance production" It may be configured to execute the "V winning chance effect" until the second predetermined timing before the target variable effect is started. In this case, as the first predetermined timing, the end timing of the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" of the fluctuation production that is the target of the "V winning chance production", the end timing of the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation", and the "normal reach" The end timing of the variable element and the start timing of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach", or the end timing of each "reach display" and the start timing of the variable element of "re-variation" Etc. are exemplified. Further, as the second predetermined timing, the end of the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" of any fluctuation production executed one to three times before the fluctuation production that is the target of the "V winning chance production". The timing, the end timing of the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", or the end timing of the variable element of "normal reach" and the start timing of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" are exemplified. To.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

In slot machines, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by bonuses (features) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the bonus ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the prize ball number table 202e, and is equivalent to the bonus ratio management chip or the bonus ratio management chip. In the control device that executes the function, the number of winning combinations (the symbols are aligned on the valid line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of winning combinations during the bonus game period, and the winning combination during the AT period. You may manage the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio by counting the number of winning combinations.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below. In addition, each of the concepts of various inventions shown below adds a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the concept of another invention to the concept of the invention, or a part or a plurality of the configurations of the concept of the other invention. The concept of the invention may be modified and constructed by exchanging with a part or the like.

<Group A: Discriminates between the V winning opening that opens and closes at a predetermined cycle and the game status during execution, and notifies whether or not the game ball wins in the V winning opening>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters the ball entrance provided in the game area. If a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the above, and a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable ball-entry means is opened so that the player is given a predetermined game value. It is configured in.

In such a gaming machine, when a distribution mechanism for distributing whether or not the game ball flows down to the winning area where the game ball can flow in is arranged, and the game ball distributed by the distribution mechanism flows into the winning area. There is a pachinko machine that generates a game value that is advantageous to a player (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a first starting port 64) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, S209 of the start winning process (S109)) that acquires predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
By using the determination result by the determination means, an advantageous state means (for example, a jackpot process (S104)) that puts the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) that can be the second state is provided. In the game machine
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, V winning opening 74a) and
A passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) that switches the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball is difficult to pass or cannot pass.
A second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203j) that can generate a second advantageous state (for example, a “probability fluctuation state”) that is advantageous for the player when the game ball passes through the special area.
A game ball inflow determination means (for example, a hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g and an execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h) for determining the timing at which a game ball can flow into the passage switching means.
Passage determination means for determining whether or not the special area is in the passable state by the passage switching means at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow determining means. (For example, sub-V drive timer 223d and total counter 223i) and
A game characterized in that the passage determination result notification means (for example, "launch promotion suggestion" of "V winning chance production") for notifying the determination result of the passage determination means before the start of the advantageous state is provided. Machine A0.

According to the game machine A0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the variable input can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a second state in which the game ball can enter. By providing the ball means and using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means sets the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state in which the second state can be set. Here, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass to the special area, and the passable state in which the game ball can pass through the special area and the game ball is difficult to pass through the special area. It is switched to a difficult-to-pass state where it cannot pass. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Here, the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means is determined by the game ball inflow determining means, and at the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the passage switching means. , Whether or not the special area is in a passable state is determined by the passage switching means. Then, the passage determination result notification means notifies the determination result of the passage determination means before the start of the advantageous state. That is, before the advantageous state is started, the advantageous state is determined by determining the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means and whether or not the ball can pass through the special area by the passage switching means at that timing. In, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area, and notify the player of the determination result before the advantageous state is started. As a result, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state, the player can recognize whether or not a second advantageous state can occur during the advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine A0
The passage switching means
The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the passable state and the difficult pass state of the special region are switched at a fixed cycle (for example, "10 seconds") that is not linked to the timing of deriving the determination result by the determination means.

According to the game machine A1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A0, the following effects are played. That is, the passage switching means switches between the passable state and the difficult-to-pass state of the special region at a fixed cycle that is not linked to the derivation timing of the determination result by the determination means. That is, whether or not the game ball can pass to the special area is switched at a fixed cycle that is not linked to the occurrence of an advantageous state that can occur by using the determination result of the determination means, and the passage switching means is switched by the game ball inflow means. The timing at which the game ball can flow in is determined.

Conventionally, when the passable timing of the special region is configured so as not to be linked with the derivation timing of the determination result by the determination means, the occurrence timing of the advantageous state using the determination result by the determination means that can generate an advantageous state and the second advantage Since the passability of the game ball to the special area where the state can be generated is not linked, the second advantageous state occurs in the advantageous state even when the advantageous state occurs depending on the judgment result by the determination means. Whether or not to obtain it could not be notified according to the determination result of the determination means.

Therefore, according to the game machine A1, at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the game ball can pass through a special area which is switched at a fixed cycle without interlocking with the derivation timing of the determination result by the determination means. It is possible to determine whether or not the advantageous state is present, determine whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area in the advantageous state, and notify the player of the determination result before the advantageous state is started. .. As a result, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state, the player can recognize whether or not a second advantageous state can occur during the advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine A0 or A1
A second variable ball entry means (for example, V winning device 72) having the special area and capable of changing into a third state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter. When,
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second variable entry state changing means (for example, the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a) capable of setting the second variable entry means to the fourth state in the advantageous state. , Equipped with
The passage determination means
When the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state by the second variable ball entry state changing means, the passage switching means determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. A game machine A2 characterized by doing.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A0 or A1, the following effects are played. That is, a second variable ball entry means that has a special area and can be changed into a third state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and depends on the determination means. By using the determination result, the second variable ball entry state changing means can make the second variable ball entry state the fourth state in the advantageous state. Then, when the second variable entry means is in the fourth state by the second variable entry state changing means by the passage determination means, whether or not the special area can be passed by the passage switching means is determined. It is determined. That is, when the second variable entry means is in the fourth state in which the game ball can enter using the determination result by the determination means, the special area provided in the second variable entry means is the game ball. It is possible to determine whether or not the passable state is passable, and notify the player of the determination result before the advantageous state is started. As a result, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state, the player can recognize whether or not a second advantageous state can occur during the advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine A2
The game ball inflow determination means
A period determining means (for example, a hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g and an execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h) for determining the period until the second variable ball entry means reaches the fourth state is provided.
The passage determination means
The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the special area is in the passable state when the period by the period determining means elapses.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2, the following effect is played, that is, the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state by the period determination means provided in the game ball inflow determination means. The period until is determined. Then, the passage determining means determines whether or not the special area is in a passable state when the period by the period determining means elapses. As a result, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state, the player can recognize whether or not a second advantageous state can occur during the advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine A3
With the dynamic display execution means (for example, the display control device 114) that executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed in the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) by using the determination result by the determination means. ,
A storage means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, an introduction effect executing means (for example, an opening command) that executes an introduction effect (for example, an opening effect) until the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state. Prepare,
The period determination means
The remaining time of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means, the waiting execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the introduction effect executing means. A game machine A4 characterized by determining the execution time of the introduction effect.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A3, the following effect is played, that is, by using the judgment result by the judgment means, the identification information performed in the display means by the dynamic display execution means. Dynamic display is performed. In addition, the storage means stores predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number. Further, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the introduction effect executing means executes the introduction effect until the second variable ball entry means is set to the fourth state. Here, the remaining time of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means, the execution time of the waiting dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the execution of the introduction effect by the introduction effect execution means. The time is determined by the period determination means. That is, the remaining time of the dynamic display during execution, the execution time of the stored dynamic display during standby, and the introduction effect of being executed until the second variable ball entry means in the advantageous state becomes the fourth state. The execution time is determined, and it is determined whether or not the special region is in the passable state at the timing when the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state. As a result, it becomes possible to notify whether or not the game ball passes through the special area during the execution of the dynamic display, and the player can generate a second advantageous state during the advantageous state before the start of the advantageous state. It has the effect of being able to recognize whether or not it is possible and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine A4
A game characterized in that the second variable ball entry means includes a period changing means (for example, a change from a normal effect mode to a shortened effect mode) for changing a predetermined period until the fourth state is reached. Machine A5.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A4, the following effect is played, that is, a predetermined period until the second variable ball entry means becomes the fourth state is changed by the period changing means. .. As a result, the passing determination result notification means notifies the determination result of whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state, and then the second variable entry means reaches the fourth state. By configuring the period of the game so that it can be changed, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine A5
The period changing means
From the dynamic display executed when the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value (for example, "4") and is less than the first predetermined value. The gaming machine A6 is characterized by comprising a shortened execution means (for example, a "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode) for shortening the execution time of the dynamic display.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A5, the following effects are played. That is, when the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value, the dynamic execution is executed when the number of predetermined information is less than the first predetermined value by the shortened execution means provided in the period changing means. The execution time of dynamic display is shorter than that of display. As a result, the period until the second variable ball entry means becomes the fourth state can be changed according to the number of stored predetermined information. Therefore, after notifying the determination result of whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state by the passage determination result notification means, the player launches the game ball to enter the second variable ball. By configuring the period until the means becomes the fourth state so as to be changeable according to the player's game mode (launch mode), there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

<Group B: Change the fluctuation time according to the number of reserved balls, change whether or not the ball wins in the V winning opening when the fluctuation time is changed>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters the ball entrance provided in the game area. If a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the above, and a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable ball-entry means is opened so that the player is given a predetermined game value. It is configured in.

In such a gaming machine, when a distribution mechanism for distributing whether or not the game ball flows down to the winning area where the game ball can flow in is arranged, and the game ball distributed by the distribution mechanism flows into the winning area. There is a pachinko machine that generates a game value that is advantageous to a player (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group B was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a first starting port 64) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, S209 of the start winning process (S109)) that acquires predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
With the dynamic display execution means (for example, the display control device 114) that executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed in the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) by using the determination result by the determination means. ,
Storage that stores the predetermined information up to a predetermined number when the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means when the dynamic display is being executed by the display means by the dynamic display execution means. Means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) and
When the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value (for example, "4"), the dynamic display is easily selected when it is less than the first predetermined value. Selection changing means (for example, "normal reach (shortened)" effect mode) that makes it easy to select a second execution time different from the first execution time, and
A variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
When a predetermined display result (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display, the advantageous state means (for example, a big hit state) that puts the variable ball entry means into the second state. For example, in a game machine equipped with a jackpot process (S104))
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, V winning opening 74a) and
A passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) that switches the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball is difficult to pass or cannot pass.
When the game ball passes through the special area, a second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203j) that can generate a second advantageous state (for example, a “probability fluctuation state”) that is advantageous for the player is used. Prepare,
When the second execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the selection changing means, the game ball passes through the special area as compared with the case where the first execution time of the dynamic display is selected. The result changes (for example, when the normal effect mode is changed to the shortened effect mode, the V winning opening 74a is won).
A game machine B0 characterized by this.

According to the game machine B0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means by using the determination result by the determination means. Will be done. Further, when the dynamic display is being executed by the display means by the dynamic display execution means and the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means, the storage means stores the predetermined information up to a predetermined number. .. Then, when the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value, the first execution time of the dynamic display that is easily selected when the number is less than the first predetermined value by the selection changing means A different second execution time is easily selected. Further, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display. In such a case, the advantageous state means sets the variable ball entry means in an advantageous state in which the second state can be set. Here, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass to the special area, and the passable state in which the game ball can pass through the special area and the game ball is difficult to pass through the special area. It is switched to a difficult-to-pass state where it cannot pass. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the second execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the selection changing means, the passing result of the game ball to the special area changes as compared with the case where the first execution time of the dynamic display is selected. .. As a result, the result of passing the game ball to the special area can be changed depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is executed in the first execution time or the second execution time. Whether or not the second advantageous state occurs can be changed depending on the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine B0
The passage switching means
The passable state and the difficult-to-pass state of the special area are switched for a certain period of time (for example, "10 seconds") that is not linked to the execution of the dynamic display.
For the certain period
The gaming machine B1 characterized in that the difference between the first execution time and the second execution time is the same.

According to the game machine B1, in addition to the effect of the game machine B0, the following effects are played. That is, the passage switching means switches between the passable state and the difficult-to-pass state of the special area in a fixed period that is not linked to the execution of the dynamic display. Then, the fixed period and the difference between the first execution time and the second execution time are made the same. That is, it is possible to make the special region passable state or difficult to pass state depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is the first execution time or the second execution time. This has the effect of making it possible to change the passing result of the game ball to the special area according to the execution time of the dynamic display, enriching the variation of the game, and improving the interest of the game. ..

In the game machine B0 or B1
A second variable ball entry means (for example, V winning device 72) having the special area and capable of changing into a third state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter. When,
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second variable entry state changing means (for example, the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a) capable of setting the second variable entry means to the fourth state in the advantageous state. ,
The remaining time of the dynamic display during execution by the dynamic display execution means, the execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the second variable entry ball in the advantageous state. Time counting means (for example, hold fluctuation time integration counter 223g and execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h) for counting the first state time until the means reaches the fourth state.
Passage determination means (for example, a total counter) for determining whether or not the special area is in the passable state when the remaining time, the execution time, and the first state time, which are counted by the time counting means, have elapsed. 223i) and
The game machine B2 is characterized by comprising a passage determination result notification means (for example, a "launch promotion suggestion" of "V winning chance production") for notifying the determination result of the passage determination means.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B0 or B1, the following effects are played. That is, a second variable ball entry means that has a special area and can be changed into a third state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and depends on the determination means. By using the determination result, the second variable ball entry state changing means can make the second variable ball entry state the fourth state in the advantageous state. Here, the remaining time of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means, the execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the second variable ball entry means are the fourth in an advantageous state. The first state period until the state is reached is counted by the time counting means. Further, when the remaining time, the execution time, and the first state time counted by the time counting means have elapsed, whether or not the special area is in the passable state is determined by the passing determination means. Then, the passage determination result notification means notifies the determination result of the passage determination means. This makes it possible to accurately determine whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can enter the second variable ball entry means having the special area. , The determination result can be notified. As a result, by accurately notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area, the player can recognize whether or not a second advantageous state can occur, and aims to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine B2
The selection changing means
At least, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the second execution time can be selected in the dynamic display in which the second variable ball entry means can be in the fourth state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2, the following effects are played. That is, the selection changing means is configured so that at least the second execution time can be selected in the dynamic display in which the second variable ball entering means can be set to the fourth state. As a result, as the execution time of the dynamic display in which the second variable ball entry means can be set to the fourth state, the second variable is made depending on whether the first execution time is selected or the second execution time is selected. There is an effect that the passing result of the game ball to the special area provided in the ball entry means can be changed, the variation of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines B0 to B3
The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the second execution time is shorter than the first execution time.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B0 to B3, the following effects are played. That is, the second execution time is shorter than the first execution time. As a result, the passing result of the game ball to the special area can be changed according to whether or not the execution time of the dynamic display is short, the variation of the game is enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved. , Has the effect.

In any of the game machines B0 to B3
The game machine B5 characterized in that the second execution time is longer than the first execution time.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B0 to B3, the following effects are played. That is, the second execution time is configured to be longer than the first execution time. As a result, the passing result of the game ball to the special area can be changed according to whether or not the execution time of the dynamic display is long, the variation of the game is enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved. , Has the effect.

In any of the game machines B0 to B5
The passage determination result notification means is
The gaming machine B6 is provided with advance notification means (for example, "suggestion of promotion of launch" of "V winning chance production") that notifies the determination result of the passage determination means before the start of the advantageous state.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B0 to B5, the following effects are played. That is, the advance notification means provided in the passage determination result notification means notifies the determination result of the passage determination means before the start of the advantageous state. As a result, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state, the player can recognize whether or not a second advantageous state can occur during the advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group C: suggests launch mode>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters the ball entrance provided in the game area. If a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the above, and a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable ball-entry means is opened so that the player is given a predetermined game value. It is configured in.

In such a gaming machine, when a distribution mechanism for distributing whether or not the game ball flows down to the winning area where the game ball can flow in is arranged, and the game ball distributed by the distribution mechanism flows into the winning area. There is a pachinko machine that generates a game value that is advantageous to a player (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group C have been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a first starting port 64) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, S209 of the start winning process (S109)) that acquires predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
In a gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means (for example, a jackpot process (S104)) that makes an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) advantageous for the player by using the determination result by the determination means.
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, V winning opening 74a) and
A passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) that switches the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball is difficult to pass or cannot pass.
A second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203j) that can generate a second advantageous state (for example, a “probability fluctuation state”) that is advantageous for the player when the game ball passes through the special area.
A game ball inflow determination means (for example, a hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g and an execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h) for determining the timing at which a game ball can flow into the passage switching means.
Passage determination means for determining whether or not the game ball launched by the launching means passes through the special region at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow determining means. (For example, total counter 223i) and
Based on the determination result of the passage determination means, the launch mode notification means for notifying the launch mode of the game ball capable of passing through the special area (for example, the "launch promotion suggestion" of the "V winning chance effect"). A game machine C0 characterized by being equipped.

According to the game machine C0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means makes the gaming state advantageous to the player. Here, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass to the special area, and the passable state in which the game ball can pass through the special area and the game ball is difficult to pass through the special area. It is switched to a difficult-to-pass state where it cannot pass. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Here, the game ball inflow means determines the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, and the passage determination means allows the game ball to flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow determination means. At the timing, it is determined whether or not the game ball launched by the launching means passes through the special area. Then, based on the determination result of the passage determination means, the launch mode notification means notifies the launch mode of the game ball that can pass through the special area. As a result, the result of passing the game ball to the special area can be changed according to whether or not the launch mode of the game ball that can pass through the special area is notified, and the variation of the game is enriched. It has the effect of improving the interest of the people.

In the game machine C0
The game ball inflow determination means
The passage switching means is provided with a time counting means (for example, a hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g and an execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h) for counting the time until the timing when the game ball can flow in.
The passage determination means
The game machine C1 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the game ball passes through the special area based on the counting result by the time counting means.

According to the game machine C1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C0, the following effects are played. That is, the time counting means counts the time until the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means. Then, the passage determining means determines whether or not the game ball passes through the special area based on the counting result of the time counting means. As a result, the launch mode of the game ball that can pass through the special area is based on the time until the game ball flows into the passage switching means and whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area. Be notified. Then, depending on whether or not the launch mode is notified, the passing result of the game ball to the special area can be changed, the variation of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

In the game machine C1
With the dynamic display execution means (for example, the display control device 114) that executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed in the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) by using the determination result by the determination means. ,
When the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display executing means and the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means, the information acquisition means acquires the predetermined information up to a predetermined number. A storage means for storing the predetermined information (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) and
When the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value (for example, "4"), the dynamic display is easily selected when it is less than the first predetermined value. The gaming machine C2 is characterized by comprising a selection changing means (for example, a "normal reach (shortened)" effect mode) that makes it easy to select a second execution time different from the first execution time.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C0 or C1, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means by using the determination result by the determination means. Further, when the dynamic display is being executed by the display means by the dynamic display execution means and the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means, the information acquisition means acquires the predetermined information up to a predetermined number by the storage means. Predetermined information is stored. Then, when the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value, the first execution time of the dynamic display that is easily selected when the number is less than the first predetermined value by the selection changing means A different second execution time is easily selected. That is, by changing the start time of the advantageous state according to the execution time of the dynamic display depending on the first execution time or the second execution time, the passable state or the difficult-to-pass state of the special region in the advantageous state is changed. obtain. As a result, the result of passing the game ball to the special area can be changed depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is executed in the first execution time or the second execution time. Whether or not the second advantageous state occurs can be changed depending on the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine C2
The launch mode notification means
When the game ball inflow determination means determines that the game ball does not pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the launch instruction means for instructing the launch of the game ball (for example, A game machine C3 characterized by having "suggestion of launch promotion").

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C2, the following effects are played. That is, when it is determined by the game ball inflow determining means that the game ball does not pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the game is played by the launch instruction means provided in the launch mode notification means. The launch of the ball is instructed. That is, when it is determined that the game ball does not pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the player is instructed to launch the game ball, and predetermined information stored in the storage means. By setting the number of to a predetermined first predetermined value, the execution time of the dynamic display can be changed. As a result, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the special area in the advantageous state at the beginning, the dynamic display is stored in the first predetermined value or more and the execution time of the dynamic display is changed. , The game ball can be passed to a special area. Therefore, by following the launch instruction of the game ball by the launch instruction means, the passing result of the game ball to the special area can be changed, the variation of the game is enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is.

In the game machine C2
The launch mode notification means
When the game ball inflow determination means determines that the game ball passes through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the launch stop instruction means for instructing the stop of the launch of the game ball ( For example, the gaming machine C4 characterized by having "suggestion to stop launching").

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball inflow determining means determines that the game ball passes through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the game is played by the launch stop instruction means provided in the launch mode notification means. You are instructed to stop firing the ball. That is, when it is determined that the game ball passes through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the player is instructed to stop firing the game ball, and the game ball is stored in the storage means. By preventing the number of pieces of information from becoming a predetermined first predetermined value, it is possible to prevent the execution time of the dynamic display from being changed. As a result, when the passage of the game ball to the special area in the advantageous state is initially in a passable state, the game ball can be passed to the special area by maintaining that state. Therefore, by following the launch stop instruction of the game ball by the launch stop instruction means, it is possible to pass the game ball to the special area, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine C2
The launch mode notification means
When it is determined by the game ball inflow determining means that the game ball passes through the special area and the game ball cannot pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the game ball is launched. A game machine C5 characterized in that it does not give instructions regarding.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C2, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball inflow discriminating means determines that the game ball passes through the special area and the game ball cannot pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the launch mode notification means is used. , Is configured not to give instructions regarding the launch of the game ball. As a result, when the passage of the game ball to the special area in the game state is unclear, the player is made to decide whether to fire or stop the firing, thereby enriching the variation of the game and improving the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to plan.

In the game machine C2
The launch mode notification means
When it is determined by the game ball inflow determining means that the game ball passes through the special area and the game ball cannot pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the game ball is launched. The gaming machine C6 is provided with a launch ambiguous instruction means that does not clearly indicate an aspect.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C2, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball inflow determining means determines that the game ball passes through the special area and the game ball cannot pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the launch mode notification means is used. It is configured so that the launch mode of the game ball is not clearly instructed by the launch ambiguous instruction means provided. Specifically, for example, an interpretable instruction is notified to both the launch instruction and the launch stop. As a result, when the passage of the game ball to the special area in the game state is unclear, the player is made to decide whether to fire or stop the firing, thereby enriching the variation of the game and improving the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to plan.

In addition, "not clearly suggested" means, for example, when both the launch suggestion and the launch stop are inferred, or both the launch suggestion and the launch stop are inferred or difficult. An example is a case where a launch suggestion and a launch stop are simultaneously displayed and instructed.

In the game machine C3
The launch mode notification means
The game machine C7 is characterized in that the launch of the game ball is instructed by the launch instruction means even when the advantageous state is not obtained due to the determination result by the determination means.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C3, the following effects are played. That is, even if the determination result by the determination means does not result in an advantageous state, the launch instruction means provided in the launch mode notification means instructs the launch of the game ball. This has the effect of instructing the player to launch the game ball and improving the operation of the game machine even when the advantageous state is not obtained.

<Group D: Special 1 Special 2, prevent the dynamic display of Special Figure 2 from being interrupted when executing the time-lapse effect and the time-lapse effect in a plurality of consecutive first dynamic displays>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters the ball entrance provided in the game area. If a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the above, and if an advantageous state such as a win is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable ball-entry means is opened so that the player is given a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group D has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first start port 64) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
The first information acquisition means (for example, start) that acquires at least the first information (value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1) based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. S209) of the winning process (S109) and
A first storage means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) that stores the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, up to a predetermined number.
A second ball entering means (for example, a second starting port 71), which is capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means and is different from the first ball entering means,
A second information acquisition means (for example, start) that acquires at least the second information (value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b2) based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. S209) of the winning process (S109) and
A second storage means (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 203e) that stores the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means with a predetermined number as the upper limit.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means or the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and
With the dynamic display execution means (for example, the display control device 114) that executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed in the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) by using the determination result by the determination means. ,
When a predetermined display result (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display, an advantageous state means (for example, a big hit process (S104)) for making an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) advantageous for the player. ), In a game machine equipped with
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic display executing means for executing a first dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, and a first dynamic display executing means.
A second dynamic display executing means for executing a second dynamic display (for example, dynamic display of a second special symbol) based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means is provided.
The first dynamic display execution means is
In a plurality of continuous first dynamic displays, a time elapsed effect suggesting the passage of time up to a predetermined timing in any one of the first dynamic displays (for example, "remaining time display" of "V winning chance effect"). Equipped with a time-lapse production execution means, to execute
When the time lapse effect is executed by the time lapse effect executing means, it becomes difficult or impossible to execute the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display executing means (for example, in the "normal game state"). It is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 71, or in a left-handed game, only the first starting port 64 can be won, and in a right-handed game, only the second starting port 71 can be won).
A game machine D0 characterized by this.

According to the game machine D0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first entry means. Based on the ball, at least the first information is acquired by the first information acquisition means. Then, up to a predetermined number, the first storage means stores the first information acquired by the first acquisition information means. Further, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the second ball entry means, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, at least by the second information acquisition means. The second information is acquired. Then, up to a predetermined number, the second storage means stores the second information acquired by the second acquisition information means. Then, the determination means determines the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means or the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and by using the determination result by the determination means, it is dynamic. The display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means. When a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display, the advantageous state means becomes an advantageous state for the player. Here, the first dynamic display execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the first dynamic display based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, and the dynamic display execution means is also executed. The second dynamic display execution means provided in the above performs the second dynamic display based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means. Then, the time lapse effect executing means provided in the first dynamic display executing means indicates the passage of time up to a predetermined timing in any of the first dynamic displays in a plurality of continuous first dynamic displays. The production is executed. Here, when the time lapse effect is executed by the time lapse effect executing means, it is difficult or impossible to execute the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display executing means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second dynamic display from being interrupted and executed during the time-lapse effect that is executed so as to straddle the plurality of first dynamic displays, and there is a discrepancy in the effect content of the time-lapse effect. It is possible to prevent it from occurring. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an accurate production.

In the game machine D0
The launching means
A first launch mode means (for example, a left-handed game) that launches a game ball in a predetermined first launch mode, and
A second launch mode means (for example, a right-handed game) that launches a game ball in a second launch mode different from the first launch mode by the first launch mode means is provided.
The first launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball in the first launching mode by the first launching mode means, while the second launching mode is configured to be difficult or impossible to enter in the second launching mode. And at the same time
The second launching means is configured to be capable of entering the ball in the second launching mode by the second launching mode means, while the first launching mode by the first launching mode means makes it difficult or impossible to enter the ball. A game machine D1 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine D1, in addition to the effect of the game machine D0, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball is launched in the predetermined first launch mode by the first launch mode means provided in the launch means, and the second launch mode means different from the first launch mode by the second launch mode means also provided in the launch means. The game ball is launched in the launch mode. Then, the first ball-entry means is configured to be able to enter the ball in the first launch mode by the first launch mode means, while the second launch mode by the second launch mode means is configured to be difficult or impossible to enter. To. Further, the second ball-entry means is configured to be able to enter the ball in the second launch mode by the second launch mode means, while the first launch mode by the first launch mode means is configured to be difficult or impossible to enter. To. As a result, during the time lapse effect that can be executed when the game is performed in the first launch mode, the second dynamic display is difficult to be executed or additionally configured in the first launch mode, and the second dynamic display is configured during the time lapse effect. (2) It is possible to prevent the dynamic display from being interrupted and executed, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production content of the time-lapse effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an accurate production.

In the game machine D0 or D1
A movable means (for example, ordinary electric service 71a) that can change into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which the game ball can enter. With
In a predetermined first gaming state (for example, "normal gaming state"), the movable means is difficult to be set to the second state, while
A gaming machine D2 characterized in that, in a second gaming state (for example, a "probability fluctuation state") different from the first gaming state, the movable means can be easily set to the second state from the first gaming state.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D0 or D1, the following effects are played. That is, the movable means is configured to be able to change into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which the game ball can enter. Then, in the predetermined first gaming state, the movable means is difficult to be in the second state, while in the second gaming state different from the first gaming state, the movable means is more likely to be in the second state than in the first gaming state. Will be done. As a result, at least in the first game state, it is possible to prevent the second dynamic display from being interrupted and executed during the time lapse effect that is executed so as to straddle the plurality of first dynamic displays. It is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production content of the production. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an accurate production.

In any of the game machines D0 to D2
The time-lapse effect executing means is
The time lapse effect is executed so as to straddle the preceding first dynamic display executed first and the following first dynamic display executed after the preceding first dynamic display.
The predetermined timing is
The gaming machine D3, which is at any timing related to the trailing first dynamic display.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D0 to D2, the following effects are played. That is, the time lapse effect is produced so as to straddle the preceding first dynamic display executed first and the trailing first dynamic display executed after the preceding first dynamic display by the time lapse effect executing means. It is executed, and the predetermined timing is set to any timing related to the subsequent first dynamic display. As a result, the time-lapse effect that is executed up to the predetermined timing of the preceding first dynamic display and the following first dynamic display is being executed, and the preceding first dynamic display and the following first dynamic display are being executed. It is possible to prevent the second dynamic display from being interrupted and executed in the meantime, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production content of the time-lapse effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an accurate production.

In any of the game machines D0 to D3
The dynamic display execution means
When the first information is stored in the first storage means and the second information is stored in the second storage means, the first dynamic display or the second operation is performed in the order of storage. The gaming machine D4 is characterized by comprising an generation order execution means (for example, a winning order variation) for executing a target display.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D0 to D3, the following effects are played. That is, when the first information is stored in the first storage means and the second information is stored in the second storage means, it is stored by the generation order execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. The first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is executed in the same order. As a result, when a plurality of first information is stored first and the time lapse effect is executed based on the execution of the first dynamic display based on the first information, the second dynamic display interrupts. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production contents of the time-lapse effect based on the execution of the plurality of first dynamic displays, and it is possible to execute an accurate effect and improve the interest of the game. , Has the effect.

In any of the game machines D0 to D3
The dynamic display execution means
When the first information is stored in the first storage means and the second information is stored in the second storage means, the second information stored in the second storage means Priority execution means (for example, special figure 2 priority variation) that executes the second dynamic display based on the first dynamic display with priority over the first dynamic display based on the first information stored in the first storage means. With,
The time-lapse effect executing means is
When the second information is acquired by the second information acquisition means during the execution of the time lapse effect, the effect discontinuing means for interrupting or stopping the time lapse effect being executed is provided. Game machine D5 to play.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D0 to D3, the following effects are played. That is, when the first information is stored in the first storage means and the second information is stored in the second storage means, the second storage is performed by the priority execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. The second dynamic display based on the second information stored in the means is executed with priority over the first dynamic display based on the first information stored in the first storage means. Then, when the second information is acquired by the second information acquisition means during the execution of the time lapse effect, the effect discontinuation means provided in the time lapse effect execution means interrupts or cancels the time lapse effect being executed. To. As a result, even if the execution of the second dynamic display is executed with priority over the execution of the first dynamic display, the second dynamic can be performed by interrupting or canceling the time-lapse effect during execution. It is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the content of the effect, such as the time-lapse effect being executed during the execution of the display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an accurate production.

In any of the game machines D0 to D5
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, V winning opening 74a) and
A passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) that switches the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball is difficult to pass or cannot pass.
A second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203j) that can generate a second advantageous state (for example, a “probability fluctuation state”) that is advantageous for the player when the game ball passes through the special area.
A game ball inflow determination means (for example, a hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g and an execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h) for determining the timing at which a game ball can flow into the passage switching means.
Passage determination means for determining whether or not the special area is in the passable state by the pass switching means at the timing when the game ball can flow into the pass switching means determined by the game ball inflow means ( For example, a total counter 223i) and
The time-lapse effect executing means is
The gaming machine D6, characterized in that the time lapse effect is executed based on the determination result of the passage determination means.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D0 to D5, the following effects are played. That is, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the special area, and the passable state in which the game ball can pass through the special area and the game ball is difficult or difficult to pass through the special area. It is switched to an impossible passage difficult state. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Here, the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means is determined by the game ball inflow determining means, and at the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the passage switching means. , Whether or not the special area is in a passable state is determined by the passage switching means. Here, the time lapse effect execution means executes the time lapse effect based on the determination result of the passage determination means. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production content of the time-lapse effect that is executed based on whether or not the game ball passes through the special area, and it is possible to execute an accurate effect to perform the game. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the game machine D6
A second variable ball entry means (for example, V winning device 72) having the special area and capable of changing into a third state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter. When,
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second variable entry state changing means (for example, the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a) capable of setting the second variable entry means to the fourth state in the advantageous state. , Equipped with
The passage determination means
When the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state by the second variable ball entry state changing means, the passage switching means determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. A game machine D7 characterized by doing.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D6, the following effects are played. That is, a second variable ball entry means that has a special area and can be changed into a third state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and depends on the determination means. By using the determination result, the second variable ball entry state changing means can make the second variable ball entry state the second state in the advantageous state. Then, when the second variable entry means is in the fourth state by the second variable entry state changing means by the passage determination means, whether or not the special area can be passed by the passage switching means is determined. It is determined. That is, when the second variable entry means is in the fourth state in which the game ball can enter using the determination result by the determination means, the special area provided in the second variable entry means is the game ball. It is determined whether or not it is in a passable state, and the time lapse effect is executed based on the determination result. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production content of the time-lapse effect that is executed based on whether or not the game ball passes through the special area, and it is possible to execute an accurate effect to perform the game. It has the effect of improving the interest.

<Group E: Correct the content of the Gase production by achieving the conditions of the main production during the Gase production, the main production, and the Gase production>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters the ball entrance provided in the game area. If a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the above, and if an advantageous state such as a win is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable ball-entry means is opened so that the player is given a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group E has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

An information acquisition means (for example, the first starting port 64) for acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and
A storage means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display control device 114) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information by using the determination result by the determination means.
When a predetermined display result (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display, an advantageous state means (for example, a big hit process (S104)) for making an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) advantageous for the player. ), In a game machine equipped with
In the dynamic display, a continuous effect executing means capable of executing a continuous effect (for example, "V winning chance effect") that is continuously executed across the plurality of dynamic displays, and
During the execution of the continuous effect, which is executed when the predetermined display result does not appear, the predetermined display result is obtained based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the storage means. When it can appear, a V open jackpot is generated based on the start winning prize generated during the execution of the effect changing means (for example, "Gase V winning chance effect") that is configured to be able to change the content of the continuous effect being executed. In some cases, the running "Gase V winning chance production" is extended), and the gaming machine E0 is characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine E0, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored by the storage means up to a predetermined number. .. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means. Will be done. When a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display, the advantageous state means becomes an advantageous state for the player. Here, in the dynamic display, the continuous effect execution means can execute the continuous effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of dynamic displays, and is executed when a predetermined display result does not appear. When a predetermined lottery result can appear based on predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the storage means during the execution of the continuous effect, the content of the continuous effect being executed is changed by the effect changing means. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the content of the continuous effect being executed can be changed even when the predetermined information for displaying the predetermined display result is acquired during the execution of the continuous effect being executed across a plurality of dynamic displays. Then, it becomes possible to make the production contents consistent. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an accurate production while enriching the variation of the game by the continuous production.

In the game machine E0
The continuous effect executing means is
A continuous production lottery means (for example, a V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e) for drawing whether or not to execute the continuous production with a predetermined probability, and
As a result of the lottery by the continuous effect lottery means, when the execution of the continuous effect is won for the specific dynamic display, at least the specific dynamic display won for the execution of the continuous effect is started. It is provided with a continuous production continuation means (for example, executed until a variable production for which the "V winning chance production" is targeted) is started.
The effect changing means is
During the execution of the continuous effect, which is executed when the predetermined display result does not appear, the predetermined display result is obtained based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the storage means. When the predetermined display result can be displayed, the effect extension means for extending the continuous effect until the dynamic display that can display the predetermined display result is started (for example, "additional display" of "V winning chance effect"). A game machine E1 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine E1, in addition to the effect of the game machine E0, the following effects are played. That is, a continuous effect lottery means provided in the continuous effect lottery means draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute the continuous effect with a predetermined probability, and as a result of the lottery by the continuous effect lottery means, a specific dynamic display is continuously targeted. When the execution of the effect is won, the continuous effect continuation means continues the continuous effect at least until the specific dynamic display won for the execution of the continuous effect is started. Then, when the predetermined display result can be displayed based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the storage means during the execution of the continuous effect that is being executed when the predetermined display result does not appear. In addition, the effect extending means provided in the effect changing means extends the continuous effect until the dynamic display capable of displaying a predetermined display result is started. As a result, predetermined information for displaying a predetermined display result is acquired during execution of a continuous effect being executed across a plurality of dynamic displays based on a dynamic display in which a predetermined display result cannot be displayed. Even in this case, the content of the continuous effect being executed can be extended and executed until the dynamic display in which a predetermined display result can appear is started. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an accurate production while enriching the variation of the dynamic display by the continuous production straddling a plurality of dynamic displays.

In the game machine E0 or E1
The continuous effect executing means is
In a plurality of continuous dynamic displays, the continuous effect of time lapse effect (for example, "remaining time display" of "V winning chance effect") suggesting the passage of time up to a predetermined timing in any of the dynamic displays. The game machine E2 is characterized by being provided with a time-lapse effect executing means for executing as.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E0 or E1, the following effects are played. That is, the time-lapse effect executing means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes a time-lapse effect indicating the passage of time up to a predetermined timing in any of the dynamic displays as a continuous effect in a plurality of continuous dynamic displays. Will be done. As a result, even when the time lapse effect is performed across a plurality of dynamic displays for which the predetermined display result cannot be derived, when the dynamic display for deriving the predetermined display result is acquired, the execution is in progress. It is possible to make the contents of the effect consistent by changing the content of the time-lapse effect of the above from the content that cannot derive the predetermined display result to the content that can derive the predetermined display result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an accurate production while enriching the variation of the dynamic display by the continuous production straddling a plurality of dynamic displays.

In any of the game machines E0 to E2
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, V winning opening 74a) and
A passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) that switches the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball is difficult to pass or cannot pass.
A second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203j) that can generate a second advantageous state (for example, a “probability fluctuation state”) that is advantageous for the player when the game ball passes through the special area.
A game ball inflow determination means (for example, a hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g and an execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h) for determining the timing at which a game ball can flow into the passage switching means.
Passage determination means for determining whether or not the special area is in the passable state by the passage switching means at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow determining means. (For example, a sub-V drive timer 223d and a total counter 223i).
The continuous effect executing means is
The gaming machine E3, characterized in that the continuous effect is executed based on the determination result of the passage determination means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines E0 to E2, the following effects are played. That is, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the special area, and the passable state in which the game ball can pass through the special area and the game ball is difficult or difficult to pass through the special area. It is switched to an impossible passage difficult state. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Here, the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means is determined by the game ball inflow determining means, and at the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the passage switching means. , Whether or not the special area is in a passable state is determined by the passage switching means. Then, the continuous effect execution means executes the continuous effect based on the determination result of the passage determination means. As a result, it is possible to change the content of the continuous effect executed based on whether or not the game ball passes through the special area, and to ensure the consistency of the effect content. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an accurate production while enriching the variation of the game by the continuous production.

In any of the game machines E3
A second variable ball entry means (for example, V winning device 72) having the special area and capable of changing into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter. When,
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second variable entry state changing means (for example, the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a) that can make the second variable entry means the second state in the advantageous state , Equipped with
The passage determination means
When the second variable ball entry means is in the second state by the second variable ball entry state changing means, the passage switching means determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. A game machine E4 characterized by doing.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the following effects are played. That is, a second variable ball entry means that has a special area and can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and depends on the determination means. By using the determination result, the second variable ball entry state changing means can make the second variable ball entry state the second state in the advantageous state. Then, when the second variable entry means is in the second state by the second variable entry state changing means by the passage determination means, whether or not the special area can be passed by the passage switching means is determined. It is determined. That is, when the second variable entry means is in the second state in which the game ball can enter using the determination result by the determination means, the special area provided in the second variable entry means is the game ball. It is determined whether or not it is in a passable state, and a continuous effect is executed based on the determination result. As a result, it is possible to change the content of the continuous effect executed based on whether or not the game ball passes through the special area, and to ensure the consistency of the effect content. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an accurate production while enriching the variation of the game by the continuous production.

<Group F: The big hit consecutive villa notification is executed before the previous big hit>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters the ball entrance provided in the game area. If a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the above, and a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable ball-entry means is opened so that the player is given a predetermined game value. It is configured in.

In such a gaming machine, when a distribution mechanism for distributing whether or not the game ball flows down to the winning area where the game ball can flow in is arranged, and the game ball distributed by the distribution mechanism flows into the winning area. There is a pachinko machine that generates a game value that is advantageous to a player (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the F group has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a first starting port 64) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, S209 of the start winning process (S109)) that acquires predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means.
A storage means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
By using the determination result by the determination means, an advantageous state means (for example, a jackpot process (S104)) that puts the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) that can be the second state is provided. In the game machine
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, V winning opening 74a) and
A passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) that switches the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball is difficult to pass or cannot pass.
A second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203j) that can generate a second advantageous state (for example, a “probability fluctuation state”) that is advantageous for the player when the game ball passes through the special area.
A second variable ball entry means (for example, V winning device 72) having the special area and capable of changing into a third state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter. When,
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second variable entry state changing means (for example, the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a) capable of setting the second variable entry means to the fourth state in the advantageous state. , Equipped with
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state in which the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state, the period from the start to the end of the advantageous state is executed for a certain period of time (for example, the opening time of the jackpot, one round). The time required for, the interval time, and the ending time are each fixed number of seconds).
A game ball inflow determination means (for example, a hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g and an execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h) for determining the timing at which a game ball can flow into the passage switching means.
Passage determination means for determining whether or not the special area is in the passable state by the passage switching means at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow determining means. (For example, sub-V drive timer 223d and total counter 223i) and
A pre-determination means (for example, look-ahead determination process (S1208)) for determining whether or not the advantageous state based on the execution means is executed in each of the plurality of predetermined information stored in the storage means. , And the passage determination means
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the advantageous state based on the executing means is executed in each of the plurality of predetermined information stored in the storage means, the advantageous state is determined in each of the advantageous states. A multi-passage determination means for determining whether or not a game ball passes through a special area,
Passage determination result notification means for notifying the determination result of the plurality of passage determination means before the advantageous state based on the fixed period execution means, which is executed first based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, is started. And, a game machine F0 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine F0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. Based on this, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, up to a predetermined number, the storage means stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquired information means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the variable input can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a second state in which the game ball can enter. By providing the ball means and using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means sets the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state in which the second state can be set. Here, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass to the special area, and the passable state in which the game ball can pass through the special area and the game ball is difficult to pass through the special area. It is switched to a difficult-to-pass state where it cannot pass. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Here, a second variable ball entry means that has a special area and can be changed into a third state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and the determination means. By using the determination result according to the above, the second variable ball entry state changing means can make the second variable ball entry state the fourth state in the advantageous state. Then, in the advantageous state in which the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state, the period from the start to the end of the advantageous state is executed for a certain period by the fixed period execution means provided in the advantageous state means. Further, the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means is determined by the game ball inflow determining means, and the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow means by the passage determining means. Whether or not the special area is in a passable state is determined by the pass switching means. Here, in each of the plurality of predetermined information stored in the storage means, the pre-determination means determines whether or not the advantageous state based on the execution means is executed for a certain period of time. Then, when it is determined by the prior determination means that the advantageous state based on the execution means is executed for each of the plurality of predetermined information stored in the storage means, the plurality of passage determination means provided in the passage determination means. It is determined whether or not the game ball passes through the special area in each advantageous state. Then, the passage determination result notification means also provided in the passage determination means provides an advantageous state based on the fixed-time execution means in which the determination result of the plurality of passage determination means is executed first based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means. Be notified before it starts. That is, while the second variable ball-entry means having the special area executes the advantageous state in which the fourth state is obtained for a certain period of time, the special area is in the passable state or passes at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means. By determining whether it is a difficult state, it is determined whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area in each of the plurality of advantageous states, and the determination result is given to the player before the previous advantageous state is started. It can be notified. As a result, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area in each of the plurality of advantageous states before the start of the previous advantageous state, the player generates a second advantageous state during each advantageous state. It is possible to recognize whether or not to obtain it, and for example, by obtaining a feeling of exhilaration by recognizing the occurrence of a continuous second advantageous state, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine F0
The passage switching means
The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the passable state and the difficult pass state of the special region are switched at a fixed cycle (for example, "10 seconds") that is not linked to the derivation timing of the determination result by the determination means.

According to the game machine F1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F0, the following effects are played. That is, the passage switching means switches between the passable state and the difficult-to-pass state of the special region at a fixed cycle that is not linked to the derivation timing of the determination result by the determination means. That is, whether or not the game ball can pass to the special area is switched at a fixed cycle that is not linked to the occurrence of an advantageous state that can occur by using the determination result of the determination means, and the passage switching means is switched by the game ball inflow means. The timing at which the game ball can flow in is determined.

Conventionally, when the special region is configured so as not to be linked with the derivation timing of the determination result by the determination means, the occurrence timing of the advantageous state using the determination result by the determination means that can generate an advantageous state and the second advantageous state are generated. Since the passability of the game ball to the special area to be obtained is not linked, whether or not the second advantageous state can occur in the advantageous state even when the advantageous state occurs depending on the determination result by the determination means. Could not be notified according to the determination result of the determination means.

Therefore, according to the game machine F1, the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means is grasped, and the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means is linked with the timing of deriving the determination result by the determination means. It is determined whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area that can be switched at regular intervals without any action, and whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area in the advantageous state is determined, and the determination result is determined. The player can be notified before the advantageous state is started. As a result, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state based on the determination result of the determination means, the player can generate the second advantageous state during the advantageous state. It has the effect of being able to recognize whether or not it is, and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine F0 or F1
The passage determination means
When the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state by the second variable ball entry state changing means, the passage switching means determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. A game machine F2 characterized by doing.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F0 or F1, the following effects are played. That is, whether or not the special area can be passed by the passage switching means when the second variable entry means is in the fourth state by the passage determination means and the second variable entry state changing means is in the fourth state. It is determined. That is, when the second variable entry means is in the fourth state in which the game ball can enter using the determination result by the determination means, the special area provided in the second variable entry means is the game ball. It is possible to determine whether or not the passable state is passable, and notify the player of the determination result before the advantageous state is started. As a result, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area in each of the plurality of advantageous states before the start of the previous advantageous state, the player generates a second advantageous state during each advantageous state. It has the effect of being able to recognize whether or not to obtain it, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F2
The game ball inflow determination means
A period determining means (for example, a hold fluctuation time integration counter 223 g and an execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h) for determining the period until the second variable ball entry means reaches the fourth state is provided.
The passage determination means
The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the special area is in the passable state when the period by the period determining means elapses.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines F0 to F2, the following effects are played. That is, the period until the second variable ball entry means reaches the fourth state is determined by the period determination means provided in the game ball inflow determination means. Then, the passage determining means determines whether or not the special area is in a passable state when the period by the period determining means elapses. As a result, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area in each of the plurality of advantageous states before the start of the previous advantageous state, the player generates a second advantageous state during each advantageous state. It has the effect of being able to recognize whether or not to obtain it, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine F3
With the dynamic display execution means (for example, the display control device 114) that executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed in the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) by using the determination result by the determination means. ,
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, an introduction effect executing means (for example, an opening command) that executes an introduction effect (for example, an opening effect) until the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state. Prepare,
The period determination means
The remaining time of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means, the execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the introduction effect of the introduction effect execution means. A game machine F4 characterized by discriminating from the execution time.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F3, the following effects are played. That is, by using the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means. Further, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the introduction effect execution means executes the introduction effect until the second variable ball entry means is set to the fourth state. Here, the remaining time of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means, the execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the execution time of the introduction effect by the introduction effect execution means are set. , It is determined by the period determination means. That is, the remaining time of the dynamic display being executed, the execution time of the stored dynamic display, and the execution time of the introduction effect executed until the second variable ball entry means in the advantageous state becomes the fourth state. Is determined, and it is determined whether or not the special region is in the passable state at the timing when the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state. As a result, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area in each of the plurality of advantageous states before the start of the previous advantageous state, the player generates a second advantageous state during each advantageous state. It has the effect of being able to recognize whether or not to obtain it, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine F4
A game characterized in that the second variable ball entry means includes a period changing means (for example, a change from a normal effect mode to a shortened effect mode) for changing a predetermined period until the fourth state is reached. Machine F5.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F4, the following effect is played, that is, the period changing means changes a predetermined period until the second variable ball entering means becomes the fourth state. .. As a result, the passing determination result notification means notifies the determination result of whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state, and then the second variable entry means reaches the fourth state. By configuring the period of the game so that it can be changed, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine F5
The period changing means
From the dynamic display executed when the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value (for example, "4") and is less than the first predetermined value. The gaming machine F6 is provided with a shortened execution means (for example, a "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode) for shortening the execution time of the dynamic display.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of the game machine F5, the following effects are played. That is, when the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value, the dynamic execution is executed when the number of predetermined information is less than the first predetermined value by the shortened execution means provided in the period changing means. The execution time of dynamic display is shorter than that of display. As a result, the period until the second variable ball entry means becomes the fourth state can be changed according to the number of stored predetermined information. Therefore, after notifying the determination result of whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state by the passage determination result notification means, the player launches the game ball to enter the second variable ball. By configuring the period until the means becomes the fourth state so as to be changeable according to the player's game mode (launch mode), there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

<Group G: Version compatible with the distribution mechanism in the game area>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters the ball entry means provided in the game area. If a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the above, and a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable ball-entry means is opened so that the player is given a predetermined game value. It is configured in.

In such a gaming machine, when a distribution mechanism for distributing whether or not the game ball flows down to the winning area where the game ball can flow in is arranged, and the game ball distributed by the distribution mechanism flows into the winning area. There is a pachinko machine that generates a game value that is advantageous to a player (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the G group was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a first starting port 64) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
An operating means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) that can perform a constant operation from a predetermined operation start timing and act on a flow mode of a game ball launched from the launching means.
An operation flow-down means (for example, opening of the variable winning device 65 at the time of a big hit) that allows the game ball to flow down toward the operation means in a predetermined gaming state.
An information acquisition means (for example, S209 of the start winning process (S109)) that acquires predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
By using the determination result of the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means (for example, the display control device 114).
When the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means during the execution of the dynamic display in the display means, the storage means for storing the predetermined information (for example, storing the first holding ball) up to a predetermined number. Area 203d) and
Execution time setting means (for example, "normal reach (for example," normal reach (for example, "normal reach"), which can set different execution times of the dynamic display for the same determination result by the determination means according to the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means. "Normal)" production mode and "normal reach (shortened)" production mode),
A dynamic time determining means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S310)) for determining the execution time of the dynamic display before the start of the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means,
A special gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined display result (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display executed according to the execution time determined by the dynamic time determining means. In a game machine provided with a special game starting means (for example, jackpot processing (S104)) for starting the game.
The operating means
In the predetermined gaming state, a first state in which the game ball can flow down to a predetermined first path (for example, the right side path 75) and a second path (for example, the left side path 74) that is more advantageous to the player than the first path. It is configured to be changeable to the second state where the game ball can flow down.
Depending on the timing at which the special gaming state is started, there are cases where the operating means is in the first state and cases where the operating means is in the second state.
The gaming machine G0, characterized in that the state of the operating means can be identified before the start of the special gaming state.

According to the game machine G0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means. In addition, the operating means can act on the flow-down mode of the game ball launched from the launching means by performing a certain operation from the predetermined operation start timing, and the operating flow-meaning means the operating means in the predetermined gaming state. The game ball is configured to be able to flow down toward. Then, the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means is determined by the determination means. Here, by using the determination result of the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means, and the information acquisition means determines during the execution of the dynamic display in the display means. When the information is acquired, the storage means stores the predetermined information up to a predetermined number. Further, the execution time setting means can set different dynamic display execution times for the same determination result by the determination means according to the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means. The determination means determines the execution time of the dynamic display before the start of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. Then, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed according to the execution time determined by the dynamic time determination means, the special game start means starts a special game state advantageous to the player. Will be done. Here, the operating means can cause the game ball to flow down to a predetermined first path in a predetermined game state, and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to a second path that is more advantageous to the player than the first path. It is configured to be variable to the state. Further, depending on the timing at which the special gaming state is started, there are cases where the operating means is in the first state and cases where the operating means is in the second state. Here, the state of the operating means can be identified before the start of the special gaming state. As a result, a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display in which different execution times can be set for the same judgment result by the judgment means depending on whether the operation means is in the first state or the second state. By making it identifiable before the start of the special game state that is started in the case, it is possible to identify whether or not the game ball flows into the second path that is advantageous to the player in the state before the start of the special game state. It becomes possible to do. As a result, there is an effect that the player can improve the interest of the game by obtaining an uplifting feeling by recognizing the situation that is advantageous to the player before the special game state is started. .. Further, since the execution time of the dynamic display executed for the same determination result by the determination means can be changed according to the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means, it is acquired according to the game mode of the player. By changing the number of stored predetermined information, it is possible to make different whether or not the game ball flows into the second path according to the player's intention (game mode). As a result, by recognizing the movement of the movement means, the player can aim for the inflow of the game ball into the second path, which is advantageous for the player, before the start of the special game state, and the variation of the game can be obtained. It has the effect of making it abundant and improving the interest of the game.

As the "predetermined operation start timing", for example, the timing when the power of the game machine is turned on, the timing when the predetermined initialization process is completed and the normal process is started, and the predetermined dynamic display are started. Examples thereof include timing, timing at which a specific effect is started in a predetermined dynamic display, timing at which a special gaming state is started, timing at which a specific round of a special gaming state is started, and the like.

In the game machine G0
During the execution of the dynamic display, the display content changing means (for example, "V winning chance effect") that can change the predetermined display content according to the timing at which the special gaming state is started and the state of the operating means. ”), A game machine G1 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine G1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G0, the following effects are played. That is, the display content changing means can change the predetermined display content according to the timing at which the special gaming state is started and the state of the operating means during the execution of the dynamic display. That is, it is possible to make the player recognize the state of the operating means before the start of the special gaming state by the predetermined display content that can be changed according to the start timing of the special gaming state and the state of the operating means. As a result, before the start of the special game state, it becomes possible for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball flows into the second path, which is advantageous for the player, by changing the predetermined display content. .. As a result, the player can improve the interest of the game by recognizing the situation that is advantageous to the player before the start of the special game state. There is.

In the game machine G0 or G1
The operating means
The gaming machine G2, characterized in that the first state and the second state are switched at a fixed cycle (for example, "10 seconds").

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G0 or G1, the following effects are played. That is, the first state and the second state are switched at regular intervals by the operating means. The execution time of the dynamic display is different from the above-mentioned fixed cycle, and one execution time is set from a plurality of predetermined execution times according to the determination result by the determination means. Therefore, the start of the special gaming state that may occur after the lapse of the set execution time and the operating means for switching from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state at regular intervals are not linked or It is difficult to configure.

Conventionally, when the timing at which the game ball can flow into the second path is configured so as not to be linked with the execution of the dynamic display, the game status during execution using the judgment result by the judgment means capable of generating a special game state. And, since the inflow of the game ball to the second path, which is advantageous for the player due to the inflow of the game ball, is not linked, even if a special game state occurs after the dynamic display is executed. , Whether or not the game ball flows into the second path could not be identified before the start of the special game state.

Therefore, according to the game machine G2, the start of the special game state determines whether or not the game ball is in the second state in which the game ball can pass to the second path which is not linked with the dynamic display or is difficult to be switched at a fixed cycle. Make it identifiable before. As a result, by suggesting to the player whether or not the game ball passes through the second path before the start of the special gaming state, the player has an advantage for the player because the game ball enters the second path. It has the effect of being able to recognize whether or not this is the case, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines G0 to G2
The execution time setting means
When the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value (for example, "4"), the dynamic display is easily selected when it is less than the first predetermined value. A selection changing means (for example, a "normal reach (shortened)" effect mode) that makes it easy to select a second execution time different from the first execution time is provided.
When the second execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the selection changing means in the predetermined gaming state, the second execution time of the dynamic display is selected as compared with the case where the first execution time of the dynamic display is selected. The inflow result of the game ball into the route may change (for example, when the normal effect mode is changed to the shortened effect mode, the V winning opening 74a is won).
A game machine G3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G0 to G2, the following effects are played. That is, when the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value, it is easy to be selected when it is less than the first predetermined value by the selection changing means provided in the execution time setting means. The second execution time, which is different from the first execution time of the target display, is easily selected. Then, when the second execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the selection changing means in the predetermined game state, the game ball to the second path is compared with the case where the first execution time of the dynamic display is selected. The inflow result of is configured to be variable. As a result, the inflow result of the game ball into the second path can be changed depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is the first execution time or the second execution time, and there are abundant variations of the game. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine G3
The fixed cycle is
The gaming machine G4, characterized in that the difference between the first execution time and the second execution time is the same.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G3, the following effects are played. That is, the difference between the first execution time and the second execution time is the same as the fixed period in which whether or not the game ball flows into the second path is switched. That is, it is possible to make different whether or not the game ball flows into the second path depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is the first execution time or the second execution time. As a result, the inflow result of the game ball to the second path can be changed according to the execution time of the dynamic display, the variation of the game is enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

In the game machine G3 or G4
Based on the state of the operating means, the firing suggesting means (for example, "launching" of "V winning chance production" suggesting the launching of a game ball that can flow into the second path before the start of the special gaming state The gaming machine G5 characterized by having "promotion suggestion").

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the launch suggestion means suggests the launch of a gaming ball that can flow into the second path prior to the start of the special gaming state, based on the state of the operating means. As a result, the inflow result of the game ball into the second path can be changed according to whether or not the launch of the game ball that can flow into the second path is suggested, and the variation of the game is enriched. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine G5
The launch suggestion means
In the state of the operating means at the specific timing, when the game ball does not flow into the second path, the launch instruction means (for example, "launch promotion suggestion") for instructing the launch of the game ball is provided. The game machine G6.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball does not flow into the second path in the state of the operating means at the specific timing, the launch instruction means provided in the launch suggestion means instructs the launch of the game ball. As a result, even if the game ball does not flow into the second path at the beginning, the game ball flows into the second path by storing the dynamic display by the first predetermined value or more and changing the execution time of the dynamic display. Can be made. Therefore, by following the launch instruction of the game ball by the launch instruction means, the inflow result of the game ball into the second path can be changed, the variation of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

In the game machine G5 or G6
The launch suggestion means
When the game ball flows into the second path in the state of the operation means at the specific timing, the launch stop instruction means (for example, "launch stop suggestion") for instructing the stop of the launch of the game ball is provided. A game machine G7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G5 or G6, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball flows into the second path in the state of the operating means at a specific timing, the launch stop instruction means provided in the launch suggestion means instructs the launch of the game ball to be stopped. That is, when the game ball flows into the second path in the state of the operating means at a specific timing, the player is instructed to stop the firing of the game ball, and the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined number. 1 By preventing the value from becoming a predetermined value, it is possible to prevent the execution time of the dynamic display from being changed. As a result, when the game ball can flow into the second path at a specific timing at the beginning, the game ball can flow into the second path by maintaining that state. Therefore, by following the launch stop instruction of the game ball by the launch stop instruction means, the game ball can flow into the second path, the variation of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The configuration of any of the game machines A0 to A6 is limited to any one of the game machines B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, and G0 to G7. The configuration may be applied.

The configuration of any of the game machines B0 to B6 is limited to any one of the game machines A0 to A6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, and G0 to G7. The configuration may be applied.

The configuration of any of the game machines C0 to C7 is limited to any one of the game machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, and G0 to G7. May be applied.

The configuration of any of the game machines D0 to D7 is limited to any one of the game machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, and G0 to G7. The configuration may be applied.

The configuration of any of the game machines E0 to E4 is limited to any one of the game machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, F0 to F6, and G0 to G7. May be applied.

The configuration of any of the game machines F0 to F6 is limited to any one of the game machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, and G0 to G7. The configuration may be applied.

The configuration of any of the game machines G0 to G7 is limited to any one of the game machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, and F0 to F6. The configuration may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of the game machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, and G0 to G7, the game machine X1 is a slot machine. .. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, and G0 to G7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. X2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, and G0 to G7, the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine X3 characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

<Fourth Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 115, a fourth embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 58 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, FIG. 59 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 58, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 58) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 60) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64, 65, 71a, 74, 75 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 65) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 58) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch (not shown) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). ..

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in the front view (see FIG. 58), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 60), which will be described later, is changed. Further, the frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content in the so-called super reach, which is one aspect of the variable effect.

The variable effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as described later, a ball fired in the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (the first special symbol (hereinafter, hereinafter, the first special symbol (hereinafter, described below)). The left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a or the second special symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure 2") corresponding to "special figure 1"). In response to the entry into the special figure 2 starting port 74 (see FIG. 60) corresponding to the above (starting prize), the display corresponds to either the first special symbol or the second special symbol depending on the game state. After the symbol to be played (the third symbol described later) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery performed for the start winning prize is presented to the player by the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped. It is a production to do. The first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed according to the game state will be described later.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "sky stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Various effects such as the above-mentioned variation effect and the reach effect executed during the variation effect are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during a period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "city stage"-> "sky stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

Further, when the effect element of "normal reach" described later is started in the variation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect element of "normal reach" is changed to the effect element of "super reach" described later. When it is developed into an effect element, the selection screen of the effect element of "super reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the effect element of "normal reach".

On the selection screen, a plurality of effect element candidates that can be selected as the effect element of "super reach" are displayed, and one of the effect element candidates is selected. If the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect element candidate is changed. Then, the content of the effect element of "super reach" is determined based on the effect element candidate selected when developing into the effect element of "super reach" (that is, at the end of the selection screen), and the content of the effect element of "super reach" is determined according to the content. The effect element of "Super Reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player directs the pachinko machine 10 in a predetermined direction (for example, forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10). , Rear, right and left) may be configured with an operating lever that can be tilted. Then, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the effect element of "super reach" may be selected based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in the front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 60). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. The ball launch interval in the ball launch unit 112a is set to be about 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 62) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 62). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid.

On the main board constituting the main control device 110, a setting key 501 used by a person concerned with the hall or the like to change the set probability setting value or to confirm the set probability setting value, and When you want to initialize the setting change switch 502 and the pachinko machine 10 (main controller 110) used when updating the probability setting value by operating during the setting change, or when you want to initialize the probability setting value during the setting change. The RAM erase switch 503 used when confirming (determining) the probability setting value and the probability display device 504 capable of displaying the probability setting value are provided.

The setting key 501, the setting change switch 502, and the RAM erasing switch 503 are provided so as to project from the main board through the holes provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by a person concerned with the hall or the like without opening the board box 100. It is possible. On the other hand, the probability display device 504 is provided on the main substrate covered by the substrate box 100.

The setting key 501 is an off side indicated by "OFF" and an on side indicated by "ON" by inserting a dedicated key managed by a person involved in the hall into the keyhole provided in the setting key 501. It is configured to be rotatable between the two positions. The setting key 501 turns off when it is located on the off side, turns on when it is located on the on side, and once it is rotated to each state, it is rotated again by the administrator or the like. Each state is configured to be maintained unless manipulated.

The setting change switch 502 is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated when the probability setting value is changed (that is, the “setting change mode” described later). The setting change switch 502 normally outputs an off signal, and outputs an on signal when pressed.

The RAM erase switch 503 is a switch for erasing (initial state) the backup data stored in the pachinko machine 10 by being operated when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, the RAM erase switch 503 is used when the update of the probability setting value is finished (that is, the "setting change mode" is finished) when the probability setting value is changed (that is, the "setting change mode" described later). Will be done.

In the fourth embodiment, when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (that is, when the power switch is turned on), the main control device is provided on the condition that the setting key 501 is in the off state. A RAM erase signal for clearing the backup data is output to 110. When the RAM erase signal is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 also issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Further, the MPU 201 recognizes that when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed in the updateable state of the probability set value (that is, the “setting change mode” described later), the probability setting value is set by recognizing that the update of the probability set value is terminated. It ends the updateable state of the value and shifts to the normal game state.

The probability display device 504 displays the probability set value when the probability set value is confirmed (that is, the “setting confirmation mode” described later) or when the probability set value is changed (that is, the “setting change mode” described later). It is configured as follows. The probability display device 504 is turned off in a normal state (for example, in a game-enabled state or when the power is turned off) to hide the probability set value, while the probability set value should be displayed (that is, described later). In the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode"), the current probability setting value is lit and displayed.

Here, the start-up mode at the time of power-up of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the states of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. It is configured in.

There are four start-up modes for the pachinko machine 10, a "RAM clear mode", a "setting change mode", a "setting confirmation mode", and a "normal mode".

The "RAM clear mode" is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

The "setting change mode" is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in this "setting change mode", the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504, and the probability setting value is updated every time the setting change switch 502 is operated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10 is updated by pressing the setting change switch 502 during this "setting change mode", and the probability is updated with the update of the probability setting value. The display of the display device 504 is also changed.

The "setting confirmation mode" is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in this "setting confirmation mode", the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504.

The "normal mode" is a start-up mode other than these "RAM clear mode", "setting change mode", and "setting confirmation mode", and when the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 or stored in the RAM 203. In the mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power is turned off by executing various start-up processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203, except when the stored data is corrupted. is there.

In the fourth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 503 (that is, in the off state) and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 Start up in "normal mode". Further, when the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "RAM clear mode".

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "setting change mode". Further, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "setting confirmation mode".

When the data is erased in the "RAM clear mode", when the update of the probability setting value is completed in the "setting change mode" and the setting key 501 is turned off, or in the "setting confirmation mode". When the setting key 501 is turned off, each mode is terminated and the mode shifts to the "normal mode" so that the game of the pachinko machine 10 can be started.

In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned off, the hall personnel and the like can use the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. As the startup mode, it is possible to select whether to use the "RAM clear mode" or the "normal mode", which is a startup mode that is not related to the probability set value.

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the hall personnel and the like start up the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on. As the mode, it is possible to select whether to set the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode" related to the probability setting value.

That is, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, a start-up mode irrelevant to the probability set value and a start-up mode related to the probability set value can be selected. Then, when the startup mode is set to be irrelevant to the probability set value, whether the startup mode is set to "RAM clear mode" or "normal mode" depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. On the other hand, when setting the startup mode related to the probability setting value, the startup mode is set to "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. You can choose whether to.

Here, when the probability setting value is changed, the jackpot probability in the game is changed. Therefore, if the game is continued by taking over the game state before the power is turned off, for example, the jackpot probability in the pending fluctuation effect and The pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined game performance, such as a discrepancy with the jackpot probability of the variable effect to be acquired from now on, and the jackpots counted as the limit number of times described later are accumulated while the jackpot probabilities are different. May not be exhibited. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 changes the probability set value in the "setting change mode", the data stored in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). On the other hand, since the "setting confirmation mode" is a start-up mode that only confirms the probability set value, the data stored in the RAM 203 is retained (cleared) so that the game state before the power is turned off can be inherited and the game can be continued. do not do).

Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, when starting the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" in which the data of the RAM 203 is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 while turning on the setting key 501. When starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting confirmation mode" in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off. I decided to turn on the power.

In this way, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10. .. Then, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "RAM clear mode" or the "setting change mode" that clears the data stored in the RAM 203, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is supplied while pressing (while turning on) the RAM erase switch 503. Turn on. That is, if the hall personnel and the like understand the meaning of each start-up mode, they can easily understand what kind of operation is required for the pachinko machine 10 required for the start-up mode to be started up from now on.

Further, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode", a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily checking the probability setting value and searching for the pachinko machine 10 having a high probability of jackpot, or arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability (high setting). Further, since the RAM erase switch 503 is usually provided at a position that is not easily touched by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability in that respect as well.

Further, there are two switches and the like that should be operated at the same time even when they are started up in the "setting change mode", and they can be sufficiently operated with both hands, so that the operability is good. From the above, the hall personnel and the like can easily and easily select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by properly using the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 on / off.

When starting up in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode", a door opening switch (not shown) that detects whether or not the inner frame 12 is open when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. ) Is on, that is, the inner frame 12 may be open.

This is because, in order to change or confirm the probability setting value, it is necessary for hall personnel and the like to visually recognize the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. This is because 12 needs to be open. Therefore, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is in the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 is not started in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode". As in the case where the setting key 501 is off, if the RAM erase switch 503 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "normal mode", and if the RAM erase switch 503 is on, the pachinko machine is in the "RAM clear mode". Launch 10 As a result, even though the inner frame 12 is closed while the setting key 501 is on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the pachinko machine starts up in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode". It is possible to suppress that the game is not started at 10. Further, in order to open the inner frame 12, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, the player can open the inner frame 12 without permission, check the probability setting value to search for the pachinko machine 10 having a high probability of jackpot, or change the probability setting value to a high probability without permission. Can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60, the game board 13 has a transparent resin base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, and a general winning opening. 63, left side special figure 1 starting port 64, special figure 1 appearing plate 65a and special figure 1 small winning opening 65 composed of obstacle member 65c, through gate 67, right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and ordinary electric service 71b. The right side special figure 1 unit 71, the first flow path member 72, the second flow path member 73, the special figure 2 starting port 74, the common grand prize opening 75, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 58) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 65) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 60) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 60) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

General winning opening 63, left special drawing 1 starting port 64, special drawing 1 small winning opening 65, through gate 67, right special drawing 1 unit 71, special drawing 2 starting port 74, common large winning opening 75, variable display device unit 80 Is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed by a screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 58) of the front frame 14.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered to enter the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a (starting prize) or the special figure 2 starting port 74 (starting prize). As a result, a liquid crystal display that performs a variation effect of the third symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the game state while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 (hereinafter, simply "display device"). It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of (abbreviated as ")" and an LED that variablely displays a normal symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of a normal symbol is referred to as "variable display") triggered by the passage of a ball of a through gate 67. An ordinary symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 65) described later, for example, left, middle, and right. Three symbol rows (not shown) are displayed.

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the game state is displayed by the special symbol display device 37 according to the control of the main control device 110, whereas the special symbol display device 37 is displayed according to the game state. The display is performed by the third symbol display device 81. The detailed contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described later in FIG. 64. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The ordinary symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as display symbols (ordinary symbols) are alternately lit each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the fourth embodiment), the ordinary electric service 71b provided on the right side special figure 1 unit 71 is used. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The number of reserved balls of the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the special symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the normal symbol reservation lamp 84. Four ordinary symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps 84, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the normal symbol hold lamp 84.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the fourth embodiment, as well as the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. It may be done by using a part of 81. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the passage of the through gate 67 may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may not be used for lighting display.

Within the game area of the game board 13, around the variable display device unit 80, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. More specifically, three general winning openings 63 are arranged on the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80, and the first described later is provided on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80. One general winning opening 63 is arranged in the flow path member 72.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a left side special figure 1 starting port 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the left side special figure 1 starting port 64, the left side first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the left side first starting port switch. Then, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 65), which will be described later, draws a jackpot for the first special symbol. Then, the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the first special symbol according to the game state. The variation effect of the third symbol is executed. The left side special figure 1 starting port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A through gate 67 is provided above the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the through gate 67, the through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and due to the turning on, the main control device 110 hits a normal symbol. A lottery will be held. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the through gate 67 passes almost all the balls fired in the so-called right-handed game described later (for example, 90% or more of the balls fired in the right-handed game). It is arranged at the position. The arrangement position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the position where almost all the balls fired in the right-handed game pass, but the position where about 10% to 80% of the balls fired in the right-handed game pass. It may be configured to be arranged.

As a result of the lottery of the normal symbol performed on the ball passing through the through gate 67, if it is determined to be a hit, the symbol of "○" is stopped and displayed through the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 83. After that, the ordinary electric service 71b provided above the front view of the right side special drawing 1 starting port 71a, which will be described later, operates. As a result, the plate of the ordinary electric service 71b, which makes it difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, changes from the state where the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is closed to the board surface of the game board 13. The ball is immersive and movable inside, and the ball can enter the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a for a predetermined time, or the ball is easier to enter than in the closed state.

A special drawing on the right side of the game board 13 above the right side of the front view, below the above-mentioned through gate 67, where the ordinary electric service 71b and the ball can enter only when the ordinary electric service 71b is in the open state. The right side special figure 1 unit 71 in which the 1 starting port 71a is unitized is arranged. When a ball enters the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a provided in the right side special figure 1 unit 71, the right side first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first starting port switch on the right side, a lottery for the jackpot of the first special symbol is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 65) described later as in the case of turning on the first starting port switch on the left side. .. Then, the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the first special symbol according to the game state. The variation effect of the third symbol is executed. The right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is also one of the winning holes in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, as in the case of the left side special figure 1 starting port 64.

As described above, above the front view of the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, a plate-shaped ordinary electric service 71b covering the opening through which the ball enters the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is provided. ing. The ordinary electric service 71b projects from the board surface of the game board 13 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 to cover the opening to the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, and is immersed in the board surface of the game board 13. The right side special figure 1 is configured to be displaceable in an open state in which the opening of the starting port 71a is opened. The right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is in a closed state in which the normal electric service 71b protrudes from the board surface in the normal state, and the ball cannot enter (or is difficult to enter) the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped at the symbol of "○", the ordinary electric service 71b above the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is operated for a predetermined time according to the gaming state. While the ordinary electric service 71b is being operated, the ordinary electric service 71b is immersed in the board surface from the state of protruding from the board surface, and the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is opened. When the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is opened, the ball can enter the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, or the ball is more likely to enter the ball than in the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, the ball stops at the symbol "○" and hits, and the right special figure 1 starting port 71a is opened, so that the ball moves to the right special figure 1 starting port 71a. It is possible to enter a ball and make a lot of big hit lottery related to the first special symbol.

Here, a detour passage 71d is provided above the ordinary electric service 71b as a means for prolonging the residence time of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b. The detour passage 71d communicates with the depth direction guide passage 71d1 for guiding the ball in the depth direction of the game board 13 and the depth direction guide passage 71d1, and causes the ball flowing down the depth direction guide passage 71d1 to flow down the game board 13. It is composed of a front direction guide passage 71d2 that guides the vehicle to the front side (front side). By this detour passage 71d, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b is once guided in the depth direction of the game board 13, and the ball guided in the depth direction is guided to the front side of the game board 13 again. The ball is configured to roll on the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b. If this detour passage 71d is not provided, it takes about 1.5 seconds to roll the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b from the left side in the front view to the right side in the front view, but the detour passage 71d is provided. As a result, the time required to roll the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b from the left side in the front view to the right side in the front view can be extended to about 3 seconds.

With this configuration, the timing at which the ball rolls on the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b is divided into a plurality of timings, and the ordinary electric service 71b opens at any of the timings, so that the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a It is possible to flow in to the side. Therefore, the ordinary electric service 71b is in an open (immersive) state while rolling on the ordinary electric service 71b or at the timing (that is, about 3 seconds) guided from the detour passage 71d onto the ordinary electric service 71b. If it becomes (is), due to the weight of the ball, it can flow down in the vertical direction of the game board 13 and win a prize at the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, while rolling on the ordinary electric service 71b. If the closed (protruding) state of the ordinary electric service 71b is maintained during the operation and while flowing down the detour passage 71d, the normal electric service 71b rolls completely from the left end to the right end and is on the right side. It is configured to flow down to the right side of the front view of the game board 13 of the special figure 1 unit 71. The details will be described later, but in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to less than "3 seconds" (that is, "0.5 seconds"), and the normal symbol is won. By increasing the probability, the variable display of the normal symbol ends while the ball is rolling above the normal electric service 71b, and as a result, the normal symbol hits, so that the normal electric service A ball rolling above 71b flows into the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a.

The residence lengthening means for prolonging the residence time of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, for example, a deceleration member for decelerating the flow speed of the sphere by colliding with the rolling sphere is configured so that the period in which the sphere rolling on the ordinary electric service 71b exists is extended. You may.

A first flow path member 72 having a general winning opening 63 is arranged below the above-mentioned right side special figure 1 unit 71 on the right side side of the game board 13 in a front view, and the first flow path member 72. A second flow path member 73 is arranged on the right side of the front view. In the fourth embodiment, the first flow path member 72 and the second flow path member 73, and the above-mentioned right side special figure 1 unit 71, cause a flow path of a sphere flowing down the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the front view. The compartments are formed. Specifically, the left flow path formed on the left side of the front view of the first flow path member 72 in which the sphere passing through the left side of the right side special figure 1 unit 71 can flow down to the common large winning opening 75 side, which will be described later. A right-hand flow path is configured in which a ball that has passed through the right side of the right-side special figure 1 unit 71 when viewed from the front can flow down to the special figure 2 starting port 74 (and common grand prize opening 75) side, which will be described later.

Further, a general winning opening 63 is provided in the central portion of the first flow path member 72, and is formed from the left flow path formed on the left side of the right side special figure 1 unit 71 to the right side of the right side special figure 1 unit 71. A sphere that is about to flow into the right flow path, or a sphere that is about to flow from the right flow path formed on the right side of the right side special figure 1 unit 71 to the left side flow path formed on the left side of the right side special figure 1 unit 71. , It is configured to win a prize in this general winning opening 63. With this configuration, the movement of the sphere from the left side flow path to the right side flow path or from the right side flow path to the left side flow path is suppressed. With this configuration, it is possible to divide the game area in which the ball flows down for each game state (that is, to determine whether or not the ball can win the special figure 2 starting port 74), and it corresponds to the game specifications. Appropriate games can be realized.

A special drawing 2 starting port 74 is arranged below the second flow path member 73 described above on the right side side of the game board 13 in a front view. When the ball enters the special drawing 2 starting port 74, the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and this is caused by the turning on of the second starting port switch. , The main control device 110 (see FIG. 65), which will be described later, draws a big hit for the second special symbol. Then, the display according to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the second special symbol according to the game state. The variation effect of the third symbol is executed. It should be noted that the special drawing 2 starting port 74 is also one of the winning openings in which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters.

A special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 is formed below the left special drawing 1 starting port 64 described above. In the pachinko machine 10, when the first lottery game (first special symbol) in the main control device 110 becomes a small hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the special symbol described later becomes a small hit stop symbol. The special LED group 37b of the symbol display device 37 is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (equivalent to the stop symbol corresponding to the loss) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the small hit. Is done. After that, the gaming state transitions to a specific gaming state (small hit) in which the ball can win a prize. As a specific game state corresponding to the first special symbol, the special figure 1 haunting plate 65a, which is normally immersed in the game board 13 for a predetermined number of times (once), is set for a predetermined time (for example, 0. It protrudes to the front side of the game board 13 until 1 second elapses or 10 balls are won. The ball rolls on the upper surface of the special figure 1 infestation plate 65a in a state where the special figure 1 infestation plate 65a is projected, so that the ball can win a prize in the special figure 1 small winning opening 65. In addition, when a ball wins in the special figure 1 small prize opening 65, 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. The special figure 1 small winning opening 65 may be configured to be opened when a small hit game or a big hit game is won in the lottery game of the second special symbol.

An obstacle member 65c is arranged between the left side special drawing 1 starting port 64 and the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65. The obstacle member 65c completely covers the upper side of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 and the special drawing 1 infestation plate 65a in front view, and the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the game area is the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 and the special figure 1. FIG. 1 is configured so that it does not easily flow down to the infestation plate 65a side. Further, a plurality of nails are planted around the obstacle member 65c, and the nails are configured so that the ball does not easily flow into the arrangement positions of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 and the special figure 1 haunting plate 65a. Has been done. With this configuration, even if the first special symbol hits a small hit and the special figure 1 haunting plate 65a protrudes from the game board 13, the left special figure 1 starting port 64 is not won. The ball that has flowed down is configured so that it is difficult to win a prize in the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 by the obstacle member 65c and the nail.

A common grand prize opening 75 is arranged below the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view and below the front view of the first flow path member 72 and the second flow path member 73.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 59) becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot, and the third symbol display device 81 is provided with a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (for example, three sets of the same symbol ("777"). "Etc.)) is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot game. After that, the common grand prize opening opening / closing plate 75a provided in the common grand prize opening 75 is displaced from the protruding state to the immersive state, and the ball is placed in a special game state (big hit game) in which it is easy to win a prize in the common grand prize opening 75. The state transitions. As this special game state, a predetermined condition is satisfied for the common grand prize opening 75 which is normally closed for a predetermined opening time (10 seconds (at the time of the first hit) or 5 seconds (at the time of consecutive villas) in the fourth embodiment). (For example, until "30 seconds" have passed, or until 10 balls are won). In addition, after opening the common big prize opening 75 in all rounds of this big hit, after a predetermined ending time (10 seconds (at the time of the first hit) or 5 seconds (at the time of consecutive villas) in the fourth embodiment), each It is configured to perform dynamic display.

When the common grand prize opening 75 is opened at the time of a big hit, it closes when a predetermined time elapses from the opening or when a predetermined number of prizes are detected (so-called interval time. In the fourth embodiment, it closes for 1 second). After the closing, the common grand prize opening 75 is opened again. The opening / closing operation of the common winning opening 75 can be repeated up to 10 times (10 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state (big hit state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is allowed to win a ball in the common prize opening 75 in the game. A larger amount of prize balls will be paid out than usual as a value (game value) of.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 59) is a small hit, the small hit is made after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so as to be the stop symbol of, and the third symbol display device 81 is provided with a stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (for example, a combination of symbols having a predetermined relationship). ("135 (odd number arrangement)", etc.)) is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a small hit game. After that, the common grand prize opening opening / closing plate 75a provided in the common grand winning opening 75 is displaced from the protruding state to the immersive state, and the ball is easily won in the common grand winning opening 75 in a specific gaming state (the second special symbol). The game state transitions to (small hit game). As a specific gaming state corresponding to this second special symbol, the common grand prize opening 75, which is normally closed, has a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) and a specific condition shorter (less) than the special gaming state. It is released until it is established (for example, until "3 seconds" elapses, or until 10 balls are won).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 59) is a small hit, the small hit is made after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. While the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so as to be the stop symbol of the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol corresponding to the loss (for example, a combination of symbols having no predetermined relevance) is displayed. It is configured so that the same stop symbol as ((such as loose eyes)) is displayed so that the occurrence of the small hit game is not clearly indicated to the player.

Although the details will be described later, the small hit game in the first special symbol frequently appears in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, but due to the request in the game specifications (suppression of giving excessive game value), the above-mentioned obstacle member 65c And, depending on the arrangement of the nails, it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to win the special figure 1 small winning opening 65, which makes it possible to win a prize based on the winning of the small hit of the first special symbol, and the actual game value for the player Is configured not to be granted. In this way, if a stop symbol peculiar to winning a small hit game is displayed for a player who is not given a substantial game value, a display result different from the lost eye appears. Although it is expected that the game value will be given by the player, the game value will not be given contrary to the expectation, so that the player may be awakened to the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the winning of the small hit of the first special symbol, which is not given the game value to the player due to the game specifications, is displayed to the player with the same display result as the lost eye. By not explicitly indicating it, it is possible to prevent the player from getting excited about the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 60) of the game area, a special symbol display device 37 provided with a state LED group 37a composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a special LED group 37b is arranged. Has been done. The special symbol display device 37 "dynamically displays" the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 59) (hereinafter, the variation display of both special symbols). (Sometimes referred to as "display") is made, and the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The state LED group 37a is a ball whose variation display has not been executed among the balls that have won (winned) in the left side special figure 1 start port 64, the right side special figure 1 start port 71a, or the special figure 2 start port 74. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The state LED group 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

In addition, the "round" in the jackpot means from the opening to the closing of the common jackpot 75 in order to divide the number of prize balls of the jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has a common jackpot. It is configured so that one "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have passed since the opening of the winning opening 75 is started, or when 10 balls are won while the common large winning opening 75 is open. .. In addition, the "round" in the small hit means that the balls can flow into the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 in order to divide the number of small winning balls, and then the inflow is disabled. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, it is "0.1 seconds" after the special figure 1 small winning opening 65, which is in the inflow state due to the small hit in the first special symbol, is in the inflow state. It is configured so that one "round" is executed by winning 10 balls while the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 can flow in, and the small hit in the second special symbol. One "round" is executed when "3 seconds" have passed since the opening of the common grand prize opening 75, which is in a state where inflow is possible, or when 10 balls are won while the common grand prize opening 75 is open. It is configured to be.

The special LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs, that is, an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 also composed of 6 LEDs. In the upper LED group 37b1, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed. Further, in the lower LED group 37b2, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed.

Specifically, in the upper LED group 37b1, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 provided on the lower side of the board surface of the game board 13 or the right side special figure 1 starting port provided on the right side of the board surface of the game board 13 Dynamic display until the variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of 71a elapses (in the fourth embodiment, the uppermost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 is ordered one by one from the lower LED. After (repeated display of the lighting pattern), the stop display is displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result (in the fourth embodiment, any of a total of 64 types of stop symbols depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the six LEDs). Will be done.

Further, the lower LED group 37b2 dynamically displays until the fluctuation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 74 provided on the right side side of the game board 13 elapses. (In the fourth embodiment, the lower LEDs are lit one by one from the uppermost LED of the lower LED group 37b2, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a symbol showing the determination result (in the fourth embodiment). , One of a total of 64 types of stop symbols) is displayed as a stop depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the six LEDs.

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, it corresponds to the type (type) of the big hit. Each LED group 37b1 and 37b2 is lit and displayed in the lighting pattern. Details of the stop patterns of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2 will be described later.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously and in parallel executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37. There is. Therefore, for example, the ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 74 while the upper LED group 37b1 fluctuates based on the winning of the ball to the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. In this case, based on the winning, the dynamic display of the special figure 2 is immediately started even in the lower LED group 37b2.

In this pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether or not a ball is a big hit (big hit lottery) for entering a ball into the left special figure 1 starting port 64, the right special drawing 1 starting port 71a, or the special drawing 2 starting port 74. At the same time, if it is determined to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot is also determined.

The jackpot types determined here are "probability variation A" corresponding to "10 rounds (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as" R ") probability variation jackpot", "probability variation B" corresponding to "4R probability variation jackpot", "Time saving A" corresponding to "10R time saving jackpot" and "Time saving B" corresponding to "4R time saving jackpot" are prepared (see FIGS. 68 and 69).

Here, the jackpot type of "probability variation A" corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is that after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, each special symbol is in a high probability state as compared with the "normal game state". , It is a big hit that shifts to a game state in which a normal symbol is a low probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state").

In addition, the jackpot type of "probability variation B" corresponding to "4R probability variation jackpot" is that after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol becomes a high probability state until the next jackpot occurs. The winning probability of a normal symbol is a jackpot that shifts to a gaming state (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a "probability fluctuation state") in which the probability is high until the dynamic display of each special symbol is executed 100 times. .. In the "probability fluctuation state" based on the jackpot type "probability variation B", after the dynamic display of each special symbol is executed 100 times, it becomes the "latent probability fluctuation state" described later.

Furthermore, the jackpot type of "time saving A" corresponding to "10R time saving jackpot" is a low probability state in which the jackpot probability of each special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state" after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. On the other hand, it is a big hit that shifts to a game state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "time reduction state") in which the hit probability of a normal symbol becomes a high probability state until the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed 100 times. Is.

In addition, the jackpot type of "time saving B" corresponding to "4R time saving jackpot" is that after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is "normal game" like the jackpot type "time saving A". It is a big hit that shifts to the "time reduction state", which is a high probability state until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, while the hit probability of the normal symbol becomes a low probability state equivalent to the "state". ..

In the fourth embodiment, the number of time reductions given by the jackpot type "time reduction A" and the jackpot type "time reduction B" is configured to be the same, but the jackpot type "time reduction A" and the jackpot type "time reduction A" The number of time reductions given in "Time reduction B" may be different (for example, 100 times and 50 times). In addition, one of the jackpot types may be configured so that the "time saving function" described later does not occur.

Here, each game state will be described in more detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the "normal gaming state" is a gaming state that is not a "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", a "probability fluctuation state", a "latent probability fluctuation state", or a "time reduction state". The jackpot probability of each special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are in the normal state (that is, the low probability state), and the normal electric service 71b is opened in a short time (that is, the non-open extension state). ).

That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is lower than in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "latent probability fluctuation state", and the "probability fluctuation state" and The probability of hitting a normal symbol is lower than in the "time shortened state", and the opening time of the normal electric service 71b is also short. The details will be described later, but in the "normal game state", even if the player plays a so-called right-handed game, the ball is likely to win a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a (hereinafter, the right side special figure 1 starting port). The state in which the ball is easy to win in 71a is not the "winning assistance state"), and the ball does not win in the common grand prize opening 75, and the left side special figure 1 starts by the left-handed game. There is no choice but to play a game aiming to win a prize in the mouth 64, which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Even if a small hit game occurs based on the winning of the left special figure 1 starting port 64, the protrusion time of the special figure 1 haunting plate 65a is set to a short time based on the small hit of the first special symbol. In addition, since the obstacle member 65c makes it difficult for the ball to flow down to the arrangement positions of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 and the special drawing 1 infestation plate 65a, it is based on the winning in the left special drawing 1 starting port 64. Some small hit games are configured so as not to give the player a game value.

Here, the right-handed game means an act of firing a ball with a force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80, and refers to the front of the game board 13 of the variable display device unit 80. A ball can win a through gate 67 arranged on the right side of the view, a special drawing 1 starting port 71a on the right side, a general winning opening 63 of the first flow path member 72, a special drawing 2 starting opening 74, or a common large winning opening 75. .. On the other hand, the left-handed game means the act of passing the launched ball through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view, and is the left side special figure 1 starting port 64, special figure 1 small winning opening 65, or the game board 13. A ball can win a prize in a plurality of general winning openings 63 arranged on the left side of the front view.

In the fourth embodiment, the right-handed game is allowed only in the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state" or the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", and the right-handed game is allowed in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state". When a game is played, it has a predetermined alarm function in order to prevent the player from performing the right-handed game. Specifically, when the passage of the ball is detected by the through gate 67 arranged on the right side of the front view of the game board 13 in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, It is determined that the right-handed game is being executed, and the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 65) is configured to output an alarm sound, while the right-handed game is encouraged in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state". In the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the alarm sound is not output even if the ball passes through the through gate 67.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of the right-handed game by the player in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is not encouraged. In addition, the left-handed game is not prohibited in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time shortening state", but the left-handed game in the above-mentioned game state is a winning assistance state or the second special Since it is not possible to receive the benefits of the small hit game of the design, the game specification is such that the player is significantly disadvantaged. In this case, it may be configured to notify the player that the right-handed game should be performed. Hereinafter, when the term is referred to as a right-handed game or a left-handed game, it means a state in which the ball is fired in the above-mentioned firing modes, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the "normal gaming state" occurs at the time of initialization of the pachinko machine 10, and the jackpot type "time saving A" or "time saving B" (see FIG. 68 or FIG. 69). In the "time reduction state" that occurs later, after the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the fourth embodiment), the above "normal game state" is changed from the "time reduction state". It is configured to move to.

Next, in the "time shortened state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is a low probability state as in the "normal game state", but with respect to the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the normal electric power is used. It refers to a state in which a function (hereinafter, the above function may be referred to as a "time saving function") is added so that the opening time of the combination 71b is also long. That is, in the "time shortened state", the jackpot by the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", but the hit by the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric service 71b becomes longer. Therefore, in the "time shortened state", the so-called winning assistance state is set, and almost all the balls launched by the right-handed game win the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. Although the details will be described later, in the "time reduction state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be continuously executed, and the prize ball based on the winning of the right special figure 1 starting port 71a (for example, It is possible to play a game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by obtaining 1 piece / prize). In other words, in the "time shortened state", almost all the balls launched by the right-handed game win the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and do not flow down to the downstream side (that is, the special figure 2 starting port 74 side). It is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the "time reduction state" is a predetermined number of times (13th) after the jackpot of the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" (see FIG. 88). In the embodiment, it is maintained until the dynamic display of the special symbol (50 times) is executed. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times is executed, the state is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

In addition, in the "time shortened state" or the "probability fluctuation state" described later, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol, the time during which the normal electric service 71b is released or the normal depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times that the ordinary electric service 71b is released may be changed at one time according to the symbol. Specifically, in the "time shortened state" or the like, the time during which the ordinary electric service 71b is released is longer than in the "normal game state", or the number of times the ordinary electric service 71b is released per time. May be greater than in the "normal gaming state". Further, in the "time shortened state", at least two of increasing the hit probability of the normal symbol, prolonging the opening time of the normal electric service 71b, and increasing the number of times of opening the normal electric service 71b are performed at the same time. You may do so.

Next, the "probability fluctuation state" is a high-probability state in which the jackpot probability of each special symbol thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, and the normal electric service 71b It refers to a gaming state (that is, an extended opening state) in which the opening time is also long. That is, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which the jackpot result by the special symbol is easily derived, the hit result by the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric service 71b becomes longer. The details will be described later, but in the "probability fluctuation state", as in the "time reduction state", the so-called winning assistance state is set, and almost all the balls launched by the right-handed game win a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. Therefore, the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be continuously executed, and a prize ball (for example, 1 piece / prize) based on the winning of the right side special drawing 1 starting port 71a is obtained and the holding ball It is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease. In other words, in the "probability fluctuation state", almost all the balls launched by the right-handed game win the right special figure 1 starting port 71a as in the "time shortened state", and the front view of the right special figure 1 unit 71. It is set so that it does not flow down to the right side (that is, the start port 74 side of special figure 2).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as the "probability fluctuation state", after the jackpot of the jackpot type "probability variation B" (see FIGS. 68 and 69), until the dynamic display of each special symbol is executed 100 times. The jackpot probability of each special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are both maintained in a high probability state. That is, when the player enters the "probability fluctuation state", the probability of winning the special symbol continues to be high until the jackpot game with each special symbol occurs, while the "probability fluctuation state" occurs. After that, after the dynamic display of each special symbol has passed 100 times, the winning probability of the normal symbol shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state. Therefore, after the "probability fluctuation state" occurs, the jackpot of the special symbol is won. After the dynamic display of each special symbol has passed 100 times without occurring, the process shifts to the "latent probability fluctuation state" described later.

Next, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is a high-probability state in which the jackpot probability of each special symbol is increased, while the hit probability of the normal symbol is in a low-probability state as in the "normal game state", and is also a normal electric power. It refers to a gaming state (that is, a non-opening extension state) in which the opening time of the combination 71b is also short. That is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is a state in which the jackpot result by the special symbol is easily derived, while the hit result by the ordinary symbol is difficult to be derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric service 71b is short. The details will be described later, but in this case, even if the player plays a so-called right-handed game, the ball is not in the winning assistance state in which the ball is likely to win the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, and the ball is placed in the common large winning opening 75. Is in a state where no prize is won, and as in the "normal game state", right-handed games are prohibited, and there is no choice but to play a game aiming to win a prize in the left special figure 1 starting port 64 by left-handed games, and the special symbol is high. Since it is in a probabilistic state, it is a more advantageous game state for the player than the "normal game state".

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured to be the same as the effect of the third symbol display device 81 or the like in the “normal game state” and the “latent probability fluctuation state”, and is configured to be the same as the “normal game state” and the “latent game state”. It is configured so that it is difficult to distinguish it from the "probability fluctuation state". Further, even in the "probability fluctuation state", it may be the same as the effect of the third symbol display device 81 or the like in the "time reduction state". With this configuration, even if the "probability fluctuation state" ends and shifts to the "latent probability fluctuation state", the "latent probability fluctuation state" is more advantageous to the player than the "normal gaming state". Can be difficult for the player to discriminate, and even if the "time reduction state" ends and shifts to the "normal game state", the "normal game state" is more disadvantageous to the player than the "latent probability fluctuation state". It can be difficult for the player to determine that. Therefore, even when the production in the "normal game state" is executed, it is possible to make the player guess that it may be in the "latent probability fluctuation state" and continue the game, and the pachinko machine 10 operates. Can be promoted.

Next, the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is based on one end condition of the "time saving function" described later (that is, the small hit game in the second special symbol) after the entry of the "small hit frequent occurrence high probability state". By immediately establishing the common big prize opening 75), the big hit probability of each special symbol after that is increased as an added value after the big hit, while the winning probability of the normal symbol is "normal". It is a game state in which the probability is as low as the "game state" and the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b is short. That is, the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is a state in which the jackpot result by the special symbol is easily derived, while the hit result by the normal symbol is difficult to be derived from the "time reduction state" and the "probability fluctuation state". The opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b is shorter than the "time reduction state" and the "probability fluctuation state". The details of the end condition of the "time saving function" in each game state will be described later.

The details will be described later, but in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", even if the ball is passed through the through gate 67 by performing a right-handed game, it is difficult for a hit to occur in the variable display of the normal symbol, and the hit Even if the normal electric service 71b is opened after winning, the closing time of the normal electric service 71b becomes long, and it becomes difficult for the ball to win the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. Therefore, since the closing time of the ordinary electric service 71b is long, the ball rolls completely on the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b from the left end of the front view to the right end of the front view, and flows down to the right side of the front view of the right side special figure 1 unit 71.

Then, in this "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the sphere that has flowed down to the right side in the front view of the right side special figure 1 unit 71 is then formed by the first flow path member 72 and the second flow path member 73. It flows down the right flow path and flows down to the arrangement position of the special drawing 2 starting port 74 or the arrangement position of the common winning opening 75. Here, when the ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 74, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, and when the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the small hit is obtained. Based on this, the common grand prize opening 75 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until the maximum opening time of 3 seconds elapses or until 10 balls are won). .. Since the common grand prize opening 75 has a larger number of prize balls based on winning than the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and the special figure 2 starting port 74 (winning to the common grand prize opening 75 → 15 prize balls, Right side Special figure 1 Starting port 71a winning → 3 pieces, Special figure 2 Starting port 74 winning → 1 prize ball), winning a small hit game in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", and more common It is possible to increase the number of balls held by the player by winning a ball in the large winning opening 75. Then, by setting the dynamic display of the second special symbol to frequently win the small hit game (distribution. 98% in the fourth embodiment), the small hit in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is set. It is possible to frequently pay out prize balls by playing games. As a result, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", it is possible to realize the playability of how to keep the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" for a long time and how to make the common large winning opening 75 win a lot of balls. Can be done.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", after the big hit of the big hit type "probability change A" (see FIGS. 68 and 69), until the next big hit game is started (so-called so-called). (Until the next jackpot), while the jackpot probability of each special symbol is in a high probability state, one condition of the time saving end condition (opening (operation) of 1 of the common jackpot 75 described later) is satisfied immediately after the jackpot ends. As a result, the hit probability of a normal symbol is maintained in a low probability state. That is, once the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is entered, the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" will continue until the big hit game by each special symbol occurs.

With this configuration, first, in the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", a left-handed game is performed, and the jackpot game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the jackpot game is used. While gaining game value, the game is realized whether the subsequent game state becomes the accompanying "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" according to the jackpot type. it can. Then, in the "time reduction state", the playability of how to perform the right-handed game and win the jackpot game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol while the winning assistance state is effective is determined. realizable. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", what kind of jackpot type is the next jackpot game that can occur relatively early compared to the "normal game state" while maintaining the winning assistance state by performing a right-handed game. It is possible to realize the playability of whether or not it becomes. Furthermore, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", a right-handed game is performed, and although there is no winning assistance state, the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the ball is sent to the common large winning opening 75. By winning a prize, it is possible to realize the playability of how to continue the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" without winning the big hit game while increasing the number of balls held. The driving mode of the ordinary electric service 71b in each gaming state, the special drawing 1 haunting plate 65a, and the driving mode of the common large winning opening opening / closing plate 75a of the common large winning opening 75 will be described later.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, a launch mode of the ball encouraged in each gaming state and a flow-down mode of the ball launched by the launch mode will be described. Note that, in FIGS. 61 to 63, only game parts having high importance in terms of game specifications are described, and other game parts (low importance in terms of game specifications) are not described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 61, the flow mode of the ball in the “normal game state” or the “latent probability fluctuation state” will be described. FIG. 61 is a schematic front view of the game board 13 showing the flow-down mode of the ball launched in the left-handed game in the “normal game state” or the “latent probability fluctuation state”.

In the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state", the left-handed game is encouraged and the right-handed game is prohibited. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, the player can see the front of the variable display device unit 80. The ball is launched by a left-handed game so that the ball flows down the game area on the left side. The ball launched in the left-handed game flows down the game area on the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80, is guided to the central part of the game board 13 by a windmill or a nail, and wins a prize in the left special figure 1 starting port 64. Arranged so that it can be done. On the other hand, in the left-handed game, a ball may win a through gate 67 arranged on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80, the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, the special drawing 2 starting port 74, and the common large winning opening 75. Each part is arranged so that there is no such thing. In addition, although the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is also arranged in the range where the ball flows down by the left-handed game, as described above, it is difficult for the ball launched in the left-handed game to flow in due to the obstacle member 65c and the nail. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state", whether the ball launched by the left-handed game is made to win a prize in the left special figure 1 starting port 64 and is won a big hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. The playability of whether or not is set. When a right-handed game is performed in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state", the player is urged to stop the right-handed game when the passage of the ball is detected by the through gate 67. The "right-handed prohibition" notification is executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the voice output device (see FIG. 65).

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the flow mode of the sphere in the “probability fluctuation state” or the “time reduction state” will be described. FIG. 62 is a schematic front view of the game board 13 showing the flow-down mode of the ball launched in the right-handed game in the “probability fluctuation state” or the “time reduction state”.

In the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the right-handed game is encouraged, so that the player can see the ball flow down the game area on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 as shown in FIG. Fire the ball by right-handed game as if. The ball launched in the right-handed game flows down the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the front view, and almost all the balls first pass through the through gate 67. Then, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down to the upper side of the right side special figure 1 unit 71, and reaches the arrangement position of the ordinary electric service 71b. At this time, due to the ball passing through the through gate 67, the variable display of the normal symbol is the time until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the right side special figure 1 unit 71 (normal electric service 71b). It is executed in "0.5 seconds" shorter than (for example, 1 second), and in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is 99%, so that in almost all variable displays. The normal symbol is won, and the normal electric service 71b is displaced from the closed state to the open state based on the hit. Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the open state of the normal electric service 71b is also executed "3 seconds" x "3 times", so that almost all the balls fired by the right-handed game are on the right side. The right side special figure 1 starting port 71a in the special figure 1 unit 71 is won, and the right side flow path on the right side of the right side special figure 1 unit 71 is not reached.

In addition, the ball that has reached the left flow path on the left side of the front view of the right side special figure 1 unit 71 due to the momentum of the ball launched in the right-handed game wins a prize in the general winning opening 63 provided in the first flow path member 72. Or, it flows down to the lower side thereof, rolls on the upper surface of the common large winning opening opening / closing plate 75a of the closed common large winning opening 75, and flows into the out opening 66. That is, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state", the ball cannot win the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, while the ball cannot win the special figure 2 starting port 74 ( It is configured to be difficult).

In the right-handed game, each part is arranged so that the ball cannot win the left special figure 1 starting port 64 and the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 arranged below the front view of the variable display device unit 80. ing.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, a prize is frequently given to the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, and the first special symbol based on the prize is dynamically displayed. 1 It is a game specification in which a small hit game with a special symbol frequently appears (that is, a small hit probability of 98%). However, since the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is configured so that only the ball launched by the left-handed game can win a prize, in the situation where the right-handed game is continued, the small hit game of the first special symbol is performed. Even if the special figure 1 infestation plate 65a protrudes based on the winning of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 and the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 can be won, the ball cannot win the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65. It is configured in.

Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", whether or not the ball launched by the right-handed game is made to win a prize in the right special figure 1 starting port 71a and is won a big hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. The playability is set. When a left-handed game is performed in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state", the right-handed game is started when the ball is detected by the left special figure 1 starting port 64 or the general winning opening 63. The “right-handed encouragement” notification that prompts the player to do so is executed by the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device (see FIG. 65).

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the flow mode of the sphere in the “small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state” will be described. FIG. 6 is a schematic front view of the game board 13 showing a flow mode of a ball launched in a right-handed game in a “small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state”.

In the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", as in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the right-handed game is encouraged, so that the player can perform the variable display device unit 80 as shown in FIG. The ball is fired by a right-handed game so that the ball flows down the game area on the right side of the front view. The ball launched in the right-handed game flows down the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the front view, and almost all the balls first pass through the through gate 67. Then, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down to the upper side of the right side special figure 1 unit 71, and reaches the arrangement position of the ordinary electric service 71b. At this time, due to the ball passing through the through gate 67, the variable display of the normal symbol shows the time until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the right side special figure 1 unit 71 (normal electric service 71b). It is executed in "30 seconds" which is much longer than (for example, 1 second), and in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is 1%, so that the normal symbol is displayed in almost all variable displays. There is a long period of time when the ordinary electric service 71b is maintained in a closed state without being won. Further, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the open state of the normal electric service 71b is executed "0.1 seconds" x "once" even when the hit is won by the variable display of the normal symbol. Therefore, the ball launched by the right-handed game does not win the right special figure 1 starting port 71a in the right special figure 1 unit 71, but rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric service 71b, and the right special figure 1 unit 71 It reaches the right flow path on the right side of the front view.

Then, the sphere that has flowed down the right flow path on the right side of the right side special drawing 1 unit 71 when viewed from the front flows down between the first flow path member 72 and the second flow path member 73, and is arranged below the special drawing. 2 Flows down to the starting port 74 side or the common grand prize opening 75 side. In the fourth embodiment, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the jackpot winning probability in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 1.0% to 2.0% (set value 1 to set value 6). On the other hand, since the winning probability of the small hit is set to 98% (common to all set values) (see FIG. 67), the small hit game is configured to occur more frequently than the big hit game and the loss.

Therefore, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the small hit game of the second special symbol frequently appears based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 74, and the common large winning opening 75 is the predetermined number of times (in the small hit game). (For example, 3 times), until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until 3 seconds have passed for each opening of 1 or 10 balls have won a prize), the common large winning opening opening / closing plate 75a is placed on the game board 13 side. Immerse yourself in a state in which the ball can flow into the common large winning opening 75 (that is, a small hit game state).

Then, the ball launched in the right-handed game and flowing down the right flow path of the right special figure 1 unit 71 flows down to the common large winning opening 75 side if the special figure 2 starting port 74 does not win. A prize is won in the common large winning opening 75 opened based on the above-mentioned small hit game, and 15 balls are paid out as prize balls for each winning ball.

The ball that reaches the left flow path on the left side of the front view of the right side special figure 1 unit 71 due to the momentum of the ball launched in the right-handed game wins a prize in the general winning opening 63 provided in the first flow path member 72. Or, it flows down to the lower side and flows into the common large winning opening 75 that is open based on the small hit of the second special symbol.

In this way, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the ball can be won in the special figure 2 starting port 74, and the second lottery game by the second special symbol is executed to execute the small hit game of the second special symbol. Achieves the playability of how to make the common large winning opening 75, which is opened based on the winning of the small hit game, win a lot of balls by continuing the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" for a long time. can do.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. Next, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to loss, 12 types of display patterns corresponding to small hits, and a display corresponding to the big hit type "probability change A". There are 12 types of patterns, 13 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation B", 13 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A", and 13 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving B". A total of 64 types of display patterns are provided. Each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each big hit type or small hit, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, it can recognize that the stop display of the loss has been stopped, while the jackpot types "probability change A", "probability change B", and "time reduction A". It is difficult to identify which of the stop display is "short time B" or "small hit".

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 12 types of display patterns corresponding to the small hit, and the big hit type "probability change A". There are 12 types of display patterns, 13 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation B", 13 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time reduction A", and 13 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time reduction B". A total of 64 types of display patterns are provided. Each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each big hit type or small hit, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, it can recognize that the stop display of the loss has been stopped as in the lower LED group 37b2, while the jackpot types "probability change A" and "probability change A", " It is difficult to distinguish whether the stop display is "probability change B", "time reduction A", "time reduction B", or small hit.

With this configuration, even if each big hit type or small hit is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, all the big hit types and small hits corresponding to each stop display are displayed. If it is not known, it will be difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type or small hit. Therefore, for example, even if the "probability variation B" ("probability variation A") is won, the jackpot result corresponding to the "time reduction B" ("time reduction A") as a temporary display on the third symbol display device 81. While displaying, it is possible to effectively execute a jackpot promotion effect that promotes the jackpot result corresponding to "time saving B" to the jackpot result corresponding to "probability change B" in the middle of the jackpot game, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, which is executed in synchronization with the dynamic display of each special symbol in the special symbol display device 37, is set for each game state. That is, while the special symbol variation effect encouraged in each gaming state is configured to be executed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 64) of the third symbol display device 81, it is encouraged in each gaming state. The non-encouragement (non-encouragement) special symbol variation effect is not executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and is described later in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 or the fourth symbol display for special figure 2. It is configured to run in region 88.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", and "time reduction state", the fluctuation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the third symbol display device. It is executed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 64) of 81, and is executed in the fourth symbol display area 87 (see FIG. 64) for special figure 1, while the display corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Is executed only in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 64), and even when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm. The variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the dynamic display of is not executed. On the other hand, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the fourth symbol for special diagram 2 is executed. While it is executed in the display area 88, the display corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed only in the fourth symbol display area 87 for the special figure 1, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. Even if this is the case, the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed in the main display area Dm.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 64B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9" according to each of the above-mentioned gaming states. For example, in the "normal game state", each main symbol is configured by adding numbers "0" to "9" on the rear symbol composed of a wooden box, of which odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7) are added. In the main design with, 9), a large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol. The configuration and variation mode of the main symbol in each gaming state will be described later in FIG. 115.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 65) described later is a big hit, for example, in the "normal game state", the same main symbol is an effective line. The fluctuation display (variation effect) aligned on L1 is performed, and the jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is completed. When shifting to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends, a fluctuation effect is performed in which the main symbols with the "7" number added (corresponding to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability variation symbol") are aligned on the effective line L1. , When shifting to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends, the main symbol with an odd number excluding "7" (that is, "1", "3", "5" or "9") is added ("probability change"). When a variable display is performed in which (corresponding to the symbol ") is aligned on the effective line L1 and the state shifts to the" time reduction state "after the jackpot ends, even numbers (that is," 0 "," 2 "," 4 "," A variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to the “time saving symbol”) to which “6” or “8”) are added are aligned on the effective line L1. The type of jackpot type "time saving A" or "time saving B" is configured to notify the player by the end of round 4 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds display the third symbol (main symbol) in a variable manner (variable effect). The main display area Dm and the other upper 1/3 are sub-display areas Ds for displaying notice effects, characters, and the like. Further, a cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls for dynamic display of the special symbol executed in the main display area Dm is provided on the lower bottom side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. The symbol string Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, the symbol string Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, and the display area is displayed. The symbol string Z3 is displayed on Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as an effective line L1, and in the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol set for each game state, the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. The third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot of the special symbol set for each gaming state.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying a character and a preview effect image, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db is the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 and the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a (hereinafter, left side special figure 1 starting port 64 and right side special figure 1) corresponding to the special symbols set for each gaming state. The start port 71a may be generically referred to as "special figure 1 start port 64, 71a") or the variation display (variation effect) of the balls entered in the special figure 2 start port 74 has not been executed. This is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls.

In the small area Ds3 to the right of the sub-display area Ds, the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 that can be changed in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls, and the movement of the second special symbol The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 which can be changed in synchronization with the target display and the number of reserved balls is configured to be displayable.

The fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 includes a number display 87a for special figure 1 that displays the number of pending dynamic display of the first special symbol numerically, and a dynamic display of the first special symbol (variation effect). It is composed of a variable region 87b for special figure 1 that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The hold number display 87a for the special figure 1 is configured so that the hold number of the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be displayed as a numerical symbol in the range of “0” to “4”. Specifically, when the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved numbers in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 0, and the reserved number for special figure 1 is reserved. When the number display 87a displays "1", it indicates that the number of holds for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 1, and the hold number display 87a for the special figure 1 displays "2". If, it indicates that the number of pending numbers of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 2, and if the number of reserved numbers displayed 87a for the special figure 1 is displayed as "3", the number of the first special symbol is displayed. If it indicates that the number of holds for dynamic display is 3, and the number of holds for special figure 1 display 87a is "4", the number of holds for dynamic display of the first special symbol is 4. It shows that there is. That is, the reserved number display 87a for the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol display area 87 for the special figure 1 is the content of the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. "Normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. , It is displayed so as to match the content of the number of reserved balls in the reserved symbol display area Db1 described later.

The variable region 87b for the special figure 1 is a display area for executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol and showing the result, and the display color of the square symbol is configured to be changeable. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the variable region 87b for special diagram 1 is white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → It changes at high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, it is configured to repeat the change again during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol such as white → red → .... Then, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the variable region 87b for special diagram 1 is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display. More specifically, when the square symbol of the variable region 87b for special figure 1 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was lost, and the square symbol of the variable region 87b for special figure 1 is lost. When stopped in red, it means that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was a big hit, and when the square symbol in the variable region 87b for special figure 1 stopped in blue, the dynamic display of the first special symbol was dynamic. It is configured to indicate that the display was a small hit. That is, the square symbol of the variable region 87b for special figure 1 is displayed so as to correspond to the display content of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is mainly displayed. In the "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" displayed in the area Dm, it is configured to synchronize with the display content of the main display area Dm.

The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 is a number display 88a for special figure 2 that displays the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol numerically, and a dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect). It is composed of a variable region 88b for special figure 2 that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The hold number display 88a for the special figure 2 is configured so that the hold number of the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be displayed as a numerical symbol in the range of “0” to “4”. Specifically, when the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved numbers for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0, and the reserved number for special figure 2 is reserved. When the number display 88a displays "1", it indicates that the number of holds for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 1, and the hold number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "2". If, it means that the number of pending numbers of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 2, and if the number of reserved numbers displayed 88a for special figure 2 is displaying "3", the number of the second special symbol is displayed. If it indicates that the number of holds for dynamic display is 3, and the number of holds for special figure 2 display 88a is "4", the number of holds for dynamic display of the second special symbol is 4. It shows that there is. That is, the reserved number display 88a for the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol display area 88 for the special figure 2 is the content of the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. The content of the number of reserved balls in the reserved symbol display area Db1 described later in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed to match.

The variable area 88b for special figure 2 is a display area for executing the dynamic display of the second special symbol and showing the result, and like the variable area 87b for special figure 1, the display color of the square symbol can be changed. Has been done. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the variable region 88b for special diagram 2 is white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → It changes at high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, it is configured to repeat the change again during the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol such as white → red → .... Then, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special diagram 2 is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display. More specifically, when the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special figure 2 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special symbol was lost, and the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special figure 2 is lost. When stopped in red, it means that the dynamic display of the second special symbol was a big hit, and when the square symbol in the variable region 88b for special figure 2 stopped in blue, the dynamic display of the second special symbol was dynamic. It is configured to indicate that the display was a small hit. That is, the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special figure 2 is displayed so as to correspond to the display content of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is mainly displayed. In the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" displayed in the area Dm, it is configured to synchronize with the display content of the main display area Dm.

On the actual display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, in the "normal game state", a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 64 (b). .. In the sub-display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the small area Ds1 on the left and the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, sometimes performing a special action different from the predetermined action, or usually a black boy. The color of the hair and the color of the normally white headband will change, and another character will appear to give a notice.

On the other hand, in the "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) corresponds to the first special symbol. When the ball enters the special figure 1 starting ports 64, 71a while the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol is being performed, or in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the third symbol is displayed. When the ball enters the special figure 2 starting port 74 while the device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. The number of balls entered (number of balls held) is held up to 4 times each. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the reserved number display 87a for the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol display area 87 for the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol display area 88 for the special figure 2. It is also displayed in the hold number display 88a, and is further shown in the first to fourth hold symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the hold symbol display area Db1 in the cockpit display area Db.

In the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved ball (one reserved ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the game state. Each symbol (“○” symbol (white circle symbol) in the normal display mode) is displayed, and according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, depending on the game state. The number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is set to be displayed (priority display) is displayed.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the first special symbol is set to be displayed according to the gaming state. Alternatively, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one and two reserved symbols are displayed in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, respectively, the game state. Indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the above, is two times, and each of the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c has a total of three. When the reserved symbol is displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game state is three times, and the first to fourth reserved symbols are displayed. When a total of four reserved symbols are displayed in each of the areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game state is four times. Show that. When the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the gaming state is 0. Indicates that there is no variable effect that is held at times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, but only one of the lottery games can be executed. May be configured to execute. When only one of the lottery games is executed, when one of the running lottery games is completed, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are stored respectively. The second lottery game of the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority change), or in the order of winning (so-called special figure 2 priority change). A special symbol lottery game may be executed according to the so-called change in the order of winning. Further, the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation effect of the second special symbol may be configured to be simultaneously displayable on the third symbol display device 81.

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, an execution symbol display area Db0 for displaying an execution symbol indicating that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm is provided. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1a, and an execution symbol larger than each reserved symbol displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d It is configured to be displayed. Further, in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted when the variation effect is completed, and the displayed reserved symbol is moved and displayed as the lower reserved symbol along with the deletion of the execution symbol. Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol. In this case, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a is moved (shifted) and displayed as the executed symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

In the fourth embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the entry into the special drawing 1 starting port 64, 71a or the special drawing 2 starting port 74 is configured to be held up to 4 times, respectively. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight), respectively. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, respectively, for the maximum number of holding lamps of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the holding balls are set according to the number of holding lamps in the lit state. It may display a number.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 58).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65, 71a, 74, 75 are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). In addition, the balls that have entered the winning openings 63, 64, 65, 71a, 74, and 75 pass through the switch for detecting the entry of the balls provided for each winning opening, and then go to the ball discharge path. You will be guided. The ball guided to the ball discharge path passes through an out switch (not shown) for detecting the guided ball, and then is discharged to the island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and is mainly a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device 110.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Then, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 108) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, a normal symbol hold lamp 84, and a common grand prize opening opening / closing plate 75a of the common grand prize opening 75. Large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing drive, special figure 1 special drawing 1 for opening and closing plate 65a for special drawing 1 small winning opening 65, special figure 1 solenoid for opening and closing plate (not shown), ordinary electric Various solenoids 209 including solenoids for ordinary electric service (not shown) for driving the combination 71b are connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a big hit lottery or a small hit lottery for each special symbol, a dynamic display setting in the special symbol display device 37, a variable effect setting in the third symbol display device 81, and a variable display in the normal symbol display device 83. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the lottery of the display result is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 includes a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a hold number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a variation pattern table 202e, a jackpot opening table 202f, a small hit opening table 202g, a time saving end condition table 202h, and a normal drawing. It stores at least a random number table 202i, a normal map fluctuation table 202j, and an ordinary electric service opening table 202k. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by various counters and the like stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 66, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described. These counters and the like are a big hit lottery, a small hit lottery, a setting of dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, a setting of a variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of the display result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as. Further, in the description of the various counters, the various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 79.

In the fourth embodiment, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery, the setting of the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81 are used for the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery. Used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 used to select the stop type of the jackpot symbol, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select the effect mode of the variation effect, and the jackpot random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern are used.

Further, the random number counter C4 per normal figure is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used as the initial setting value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure.

Each of these counters is composed of a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaches the maximum value of each, and then returns to "0".

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 87). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 includes a first holding ball storage area 203d composed of four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four holding areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e composed of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided. In the first reserved ball storage area 203d, a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a jackpot random number counter C1, according to the timing of entering the left side special figure 1 start port 64 or the right side special figure 1 start port 71a. Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. Further, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is set according to the timing of entering the ball at the start port 74 of the special figure 2. Are stored respectively.

In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type random number C1 are updated by software processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 88) (so-called soft random number). Instead of this, the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be updated by a random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random number (so-called hard random number). With such a configuration, it is difficult to grasp the random number value being updated from the outside, and the security performance can be improved.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 9999") to reach the maximum value (for example, "9999" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999"). After reaching "0", it returns to "0". In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. Will be done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of "0 to 9999", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of "0 to 9999". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 87).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in the fourth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a (starting prize), the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a (first special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first holding area of any of the first holding first to fourth areas provided in the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the above. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 74 (starting prize), the second reserved ball storage area 203e provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 74 (second special symbol) is provided. It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 in the second holding area of any of the first to fourth areas.

The value of the random number for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot or a small hit is set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each set value. That is, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the hold area of the first hold ball storage area 203d is set for each set value by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the small hit, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 in the holding area of the second holding ball storage area 203e is set for each set value by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the second special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the small hit, it is determined to be a small hit. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same jackpot random number table 202a is used for the jackpot determination and the small hit determination based on the first special symbol and the jackpot determination and the small hit determination based on the second special symbol. It is configured in.

Here, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a commonly used in the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol and the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot random number table 202a of the fourth embodiment has a low special symbol whose game state is "normal game state" or "time shortened state" for each set value of the set value "1" to the set value "6". "Probability fluctuation state" and "latent probability fluctuation state" for the low probability state used in the case of the probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol with a higher probability that the game state will be a big hit than the low probability state of the special symbol. Alternatively, it can be divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state".

Then, the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently for each set value. Further, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values required for displacing from the low probability state to the high probability state is compensated from the number of lost random number values corresponding to the loss. That is, when increasing the number of jackpot random numbers in order to displace the special symbol from the low probability state to the high probability state, the number of lost random numbers is reduced instead of the small hit random values, and the decrease is the jackpot random number. It is configured to be assigned as a number. In this way, by making the number of jackpot random numbers different according to the game state, the probability of winning a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in each special symbol, the number of small hit random values included in each set value and in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set to be the same. That is, the number of small hit random numbers in each special symbol is the same for each set value, and is configured to be the same in the low-probability state and the high-probability state. In this way, by making the number of small hit random values the same for each set value in each special symbol, and for the low probability state and the high probability state, all the set values and the gaming state in each special symbol are used. The ratio of game value given considering only the small hit game in is the same.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the low-probability state to the high-probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is lost in all the set values. It is configured to supplement from the number of. Further, the number of small hit random numbers of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is configured so as not to be changed for each set value. That is, the number of lost random numbers is reduced by the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change and the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the change from the low probability state to the high probability state for each setting. Then, the decrease is compensated by allocating the jackpot random number value, and the number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol small hit random value is the same for each first special symbol or the second special symbol setting. .. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, which increases the man-hours when designing the game specifications. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values due to the setting change is used as the loss random number value corresponding to the loss role in the jackpot random number counter C1 that does not give the player a game value. It is configured to compensate from the number.

Unlike the big hit role and the small hit role, the lost role is a role that does not give a game value. Therefore, a data lamp (not shown) provided for each pachinko machine 10 and displaying the game result and the like in the pachinko machine 10. It is a role that is not clearly (largely) displayed in. Here, if the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game, which is easily displayed clearly (on a large scale) on the data lamp, and the number of small hit random numbers corresponding to the small hit game are both changed for each setting. When the player glances (confirms) the appearance rate of the two elements of the big hit game and the small hit game with the data lamp, it becomes easy to guess the setting determination of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, for example, when the player finds out the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to a low setting (for example, the set value "1"), the player does not play the game on the pachinko machine 10 and pachinko. There is a risk that the operation of the machine 10 will decrease.

Therefore, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values due to the setting change of the probability set value is not given to the player in the jackpot random number counter C1 and is not clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp. By configuring so as to compensate from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to, the setting discriminating factor by the player is only the appearance rate of the big hit, and the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is hard to be detected from the appearance rate of the small hit. be able to. Therefore, the discriminating element of the probability setting value is limited to the appearance rate of the winning combination based on one random value, and for example, even if the setting value is low (that is, the setting value "1", etc.) The game can be continued without being detected, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the lower the set value, the less likely it is that a big hit will occur, and the higher the set value, the more likely it is that a big hit will occur. In the "probability fluctuation state", the lower the set value, the longer the stay period in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" tends to be. As a result, the lower the set value, the greater the number of times a small hit is won in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", so that the game value given in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" increases. Therefore, even when the set value is low, it is possible to increase the game value that can be given to the player by entering the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" as compared with the case where the set value is high. Therefore, by providing the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the advantages and disadvantages in the setting difference can be reversed, the variation of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the jackpot random number table 202a of the fourth embodiment, when the set value is "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (big hit random number value) that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a. The number of the numbers is 50, and the value "0 to 49" is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "1" is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5). %) Is set to be.

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that become big hits in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 100, and the value "0 to 99" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, the "probability fluctuation state", the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol with the set value "1" is 100/10000 = 1. It becomes / 100 (that is, 1%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is twice as easy to hit the jackpot from the low probability state.

When the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 9,800, and the low probability state and the low probability state In any of the high probability states, the jackpot random number value "200 to 9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the set value "1" to the set value "6" is 9800/10000 = 98/100 (that is, 98%) in any of the gaming states. Therefore, the winning probability of the small hit is set to be the same in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 150 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. , The value "50 to 199" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 100 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "100 to 199" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "1" is 150/10000 = 1.5 / 100 (that is, 1.5). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state of each special symbol (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") is 100/10000 = It is set to be 1/100 (that is, 1%).

That is, in the set value "1", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of each special symbol is compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state". However, the number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" (that is, 150 or less).

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 52, and the value "0 to 51" is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "2" is 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52). %) Is set to be.

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that become big hits in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 120, and the value "0 to 119" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of each special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") is 120/10000 = 1. It is .2 / 100 (that is, 1.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is about 2.3 times easier to hit the jackpot from the low probability state.

Further, when the set value is "2", the number of random numbers (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the same as in the case of the set value "1". , Both are 9,800, and the jackpot random number value "200 to 9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 148 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. , The value "52 to 199" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 80 numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "120 to 199" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "2" is 148/10000 = 1.48 / 100 (that is, 1.48). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state of each special symbol (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") is 80/10000 = It is set to be 0.8 / 100 (that is, 0.8%).

That is, even in the set value "2", as in the case of the set value "1", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of each special symbol is calculated as the number of lost random values in the "normal game state". The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" (that is, 150) while being configured to decrease and compensate from the decrease. The following) is configured.

Therefore, the jackpot probability of the set value "2" in the jackpot random number table 202a is slightly improved as compared with the set value "1" (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 1% → 1.2%), which is a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “1”.

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 54, and the value "0 to 53" is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "3" is 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54). %) Is set to be.

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that become big hits in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 140, and the value "0 to 139" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol of the set value "3" is 140/10000 = 1. It is .4 / 100 (that is, 1.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 2.6 times more likely to hit the jackpot from the low probability state.

Further, when the set value is "3", as in the case of the set values "1" and "2", the value of the random number (small hit random number value) that becomes a small hit in the low probability state and the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a. The number of) is 9,800, and the jackpot random number value “200 to 9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 146 values other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. , The value "54 to 199" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 60 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "140 to 199" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "3" is 146/10000 = 1.46 / 100 (that is, 1.46). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state of each special symbol (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") is 60/10000 = It is set to be 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%).

That is, even in the set value "3", as in the case of the set values "1" and "2", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of each special symbol is disturbed in the "normal game state". The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while reducing the number of numerical values and compensating for the decrease. That is, it is configured so that the number is 150 or less).

Therefore, the jackpot probability of the set value "3" in the jackpot random number table 202a is slightly improved as compared with the set value "2" (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 1.2% → 1.4%), which is a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value "2".

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 56, and the value "0 to 55" is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "4" is 56/10000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56). %) Is set to be.

On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that become big hits in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 160, and the value "0 to 159" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol of the set value "4" is 160/10000 = 1. It is .6 / 100 (that is, 1.6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is about 2.9 times easier to hit the jackpot from the low probability state.

Further, when the set value is "4", the value of the random number that becomes a small hit in the low probability state and the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a (small hit random number value) as in the case of the set values "1" to "3". The number of) is 9,800, and the jackpot random number value “200 to 9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 144 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. , The value "56 to 199" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 40 numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "160 to 199" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "4" is 144/10000 = 1.44 / 100 (that is, 1.44). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state of each special symbol (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") is 40/10000 = It is set to be 0.4 / 100 (that is, 0.4%).

That is, even in the set value "4", as in the case of the set values "1" to "3", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of each special symbol is disturbed in the "normal game state". The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while reducing the number of numerical values and compensating for the decrease. That is, it is configured so that the number is 150 or less).

Therefore, the jackpot probability of the set value "4" in the jackpot random number table 202a is slightly improved as compared with the set value "3" (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 1.4% → 1.6%), which is a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 58, and the value "0 to 57" is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "5" is 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58). %) Is set to be.

On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that become jackpots in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 180, and the value "0 to 179" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol of the set value "5" is 180/10000 = 1. It is .8 / 100 (that is, 1.8%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is about 3.1 times easier to hit the jackpot from the low probability state.

Further, when the set value is "5", as in the case of the set values "1" to "4", the value of the random number (small hit random number value) that becomes a small hit in the low probability state and the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a. The number of) is 9,800, and the jackpot random number value “200 to 9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 142 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. , The value "58 to 199" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 20 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "180 to 199" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "5" is 142/10000 = 1.42 / 100 (that is, 1.42). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state of each special symbol (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") is 20/10000 = It is set to be 0.2 / 100 (that is, 0.2%).

That is, even in the set value "5", as in the case of the set values "1" to "4", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of each special symbol is disturbed in the "normal game state". The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while reducing the number of numerical values and compensating for the decrease. That is, it is configured so that the number is 150 or less).

Therefore, the jackpot probability of the set value "5" in the jackpot random number table 202a is slightly improved as compared with the set value "4" (low probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 1.6% → 1.8%), which is a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “4”.

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 60, and the value "0 to 59" is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "6" is 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6). %) Is set to be.

On the other hand, when the set value is "6", the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that become jackpots in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 200, and the value "0 to 199" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol of the set value "6" is 200/10000 = 2. It becomes / 100 (that is, 2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 3.3 times easier to hit the jackpot from the low probability state.

Further, when the set value is "6", the value of the random number that becomes a small hit in the low probability state and the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a (small hit random number value) as in the case of the set values "1" to "5". The number of) is 9,800, and the jackpot random number value “200 to 9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 140 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. , The value "60 to 199" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Further, there is no random number value (lost random number value) that is lost in the high probability state, and the number is 0, and the value corresponding to the lost random number value is not defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "6" is 140/10000 = 1.4 / 100 (that is, 1.4). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state of each special symbol (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") is 0/10000 = It is set to be 0/100 (that is, 0%).

That is, in the high probability state of the special symbol at the set value "6", the lottery result of the loss is not derived, and only one of the big hit and the small hit is derived. Further, in the high probability state of the special symbol with the so-called high setting (for example, the set value "4" or "5"), the lottery result of the loss is derived from the so-called low setting (for example, the set value "1" or "2"). It is configured to be difficult to do. With this configuration, the set value can be inferred depending on whether or not the loss result appears during the high probability state of the special symbol. For example, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the second special symbol When it is difficult to derive the loss result as the lottery result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the set value is good (so-called high setting). Therefore, it is possible to create a game property of whether or not a loss result is derived during a high probability state of a special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, the set value "6" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability as compared with the set value "5" (low probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high). Probability state: 1.8% → 2%), which is a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

In this way, by changing the jackpot winning probability for each probability set value and changing the jackpot winning ease, it is possible to change the ball output rate for each probability set value, which is given to the player. You can change the amount of game value you get. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of game playability of the game played in the pachinko machine 10 and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 66, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take the value of "", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (in the fourth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, the second RAM 203 provided corresponding to the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. 1 Of the first reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203d, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reserved area as the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the special drawing 2 starting port 74, among the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 2 starting port 74. , The jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area as the second holding area.

Here, for example, a random number (big hit random number value) or a small hit in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved area 1 in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a jackpot. If it is not a random number (small hit random number value), that is, a random number that is lost (lost random number value), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are lost. It will be the time.

On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the 1st reserved ball storage area 203d or the 2nd reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (big hit random number value) that becomes a jackpot, a variation effect is produced. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are the ones at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number (small hit random number value) that becomes a small hit, it fluctuates. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in the production are those for small hits. In the fourth embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit, in this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the small hit do not refer to the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. The unique small hit type is determined.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b includes a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. And are provided.

Here, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the second special symbol also stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the corresponding special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, after the initialization by clearing the RAM of the pachinko machine 10, the number of jackpots of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (10 times in the fourth embodiment. Every time it reaches (may be called), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot at the time of reaching the predetermined number of times is always shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is prohibited. The function (so-called limit (limiter) function) is installed. That is, every time the number of jackpots of the special symbol reaches 10 times after the initialization by clearing the RAM of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the number of jackpots of the special symbol reaches the limit number is referred to as "at the time of reaching the limit". In (there is), the jackpot type that will be in the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is not selected (hereinafter, the jackpot type that will be in the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is not selected, "the limiter is activated". It is configured so that only the jackpot type that becomes a low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends can be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of jackpots of the special symbol has not reached the limit, that is, the number of jackpots after initialization or after reaching the limit is 1 to 9 times (hereinafter, the jackpot of the special symbol after initialization or after reaching the limit). The number of times from 1 to 9 times may be referred to as "before reaching the limit"), so that the jackpot type that becomes a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends can be selected.

With this configuration, the special symbol can always be in the low-probability state every time a predetermined number of jackpots occur, and the high-probability state of the special symbol continues to continue, resulting in an excessive jackpot "renso". It can be suppressed from occurring. As a result, the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 (the number of payout balls (safe number of balls) divided by the number of out balls, so-called machine allocation. Hereinafter, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result far from the “ball output rate” appears), and it is possible to configure the game value given to the player so as not to become too high. In addition, in order to make the ball ejection rate of this pachinko machine 10 equal to the ball ejection rate of a normal pachinko machine that does not have a limiter function, the amount of decrease in the ball ejection rate due to the limitation of the number of "renso" is special. It is possible to make up for the big hit of the symbol by making it easy to occur, or to make up for the continuation rate of the high probability state of the special symbol before reaching the limit, which is not possible with a normal pachinko machine that does not have a limiter function. It is possible to realize a versatile playability that cannot be achieved.

In addition, the "renso" means that an advantageous state occurs again from a state that is clearly advantageous to the player, and in the fourth embodiment, the "probability fluctuation state" and "time" in which the right-handed game is performed are performed. It means the case where one of the big hits is won again in the "shortened state" or the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". Therefore, if a big hit is won in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which a right-handed game can be performed, it corresponds to "renso" and "probability fluctuation state". , "Time reduction state" or "Small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is not notified whether it is "normal game state" or "probability fluctuation state", and the winning assistance function is also operating. If any of the jackpots is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", that is, in the left-handed game, it does not correspond to the so-called "renso" (corresponds to the so-called "first" jackpot).

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the jackpot type table 202b is divided into a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and further divided according to whether the number of jackpots reaches the limit or when the limit is reached. Then, it is further divided into a group with the game state in which the jackpot has occurred, and in the group, the type of the special symbol (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the special symbol. It is a table in which the jackpot type corresponding to the type of the jackpot type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as a jackpot type, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of a special symbol becomes a high probability state until the next jackpot, while the hit probability of a normal symbol is once. Is in a high probability state, but the common big winning opening 75 operates once based on the winning of the small hit game of the second special symbol, so that the hit probability of the normal symbol becomes a low probability state. After the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds and the "probability change A" corresponding to the "state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the number of executions of the dynamic display of the special symbol is Until it is performed 100 times, the probability of hitting a special symbol is low after the "probability variation B" corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is high and the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds. Although it is a probability state, until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the "time reduction A" corresponding to the "time reduction state" in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is a high probability state and the maximum number of rounds However, after 4 rounds of jackpot, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a low probability state, but until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the hit probability of the normal symbol becomes a high probability state. There is a "time saving B" corresponding to the "state".

In the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, the jackpot types that can be selected based on whether or not the limit is reached at the time when the jackpot occurs and the game state are configured to be different, and each jackpot type is configured. On the other hand, possible values of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type are associated with each other.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 68, if the jackpot of the first special symbol occurs before the limit is reached and in the "normal game state", the jackpot is hit against the "probability change A". The value "0 to 19" of the type counter C2 is associated, the value "20 to 89" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "probability variation B", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A". The values "90 to 94" are associated with each other, and the value "95 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "time saving B". In addition, if the jackpot of the first special symbol occurs before reaching the limit and in the "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" , The value "0 to 9" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "probability variation A", and the value "10 to 89" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "probability variation B", and "time saving A" The value of the jackpot type counter C2 "90 to 94" is associated with "", and the value "95 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving B".

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol in the "normal game state" before reaching the limit, the jackpot random number counter stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d. When the value of C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is the special figure 1 jackpot type table. Determined from 202b1, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "probability variation A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "25", the jackpot type is " If "probability change B" is determined and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "91", "time saving A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "96", the jackpot type is " Time saving B ”is determined.

On the other hand, in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" before reaching the limit, the first reserved ball storage area 203d If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first hold areas is a value that becomes a jackpot, it is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first hold area. The jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type is "probability change A". Is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "12", "probability variation B" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "91", the jackpot type is "time saving A". Is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "96", "time saving B" is determined as the jackpot type.

Therefore, in the "normal game state", when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the limit, the jackpot type of "probability change A" is 20% and the jackpot type of "probability change B" is 70%. , The jackpot type of "time saving A" is 5%, and the jackpot type of "time saving B" is 5%. In addition, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the limit. The jackpot type of "Probability change A" is 10%, the jackpot type of "Probability change B" is 80%, the jackpot type of "Time saving A" is 5%, and the jackpot type of "Time saving B" is 5%. Will be done.

Therefore, the "normal game state" before reaching the limit and the "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", "time shortening state" or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" are special with the same 90% probability. Although a high probability state of the symbol is given, the jackpot type "probability variation A" is more likely to be selected (20%> 10%) in the "normal game state", and the jackpot type "probability variation B" is less likely to be selected accordingly. It is composed of (70% <80%). In addition, the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" have the same 10% probability of "time reduction state". Is given, and the jackpot type "time reduction A" and the jackpot type "time reduction B" are selected at the same selection ratio (5% each).

As a game state, a "latent probability fluctuation state" or a "probability fluctuation state" in which the special symbol has a high probability state or a winning assistance function rather than the "normal game state" in which the special symbol is neither a high probability state nor has a winning assistance function. , "Time shortening state" or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is a more advantageous gaming state for the player, so in "normal gaming state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", It is configured so that the most advantageous jackpot type "probability variation A" can be easily selected when a jackpot of a special symbol occurs from the "time shortened state" or the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state".

Next, in the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 68, when the jackpot of the first special symbol occurs when the limit is reached, all the gaming states (that is, the “normal gaming state” and the “latent probability fluctuation” are generated. In the "state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". The same shall apply hereinafter), the "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time" before reaching the limit. In the "shortened state" or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the value "0 to 9" of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to "probability variation A" is associated as "time saving A", and the "latent probability" before reaching the limit. In the "fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the value "10 to 89" of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to "probability variation B" is "time reduction B". The value "90 to 94" of the jackpot type counter C2, which corresponds to "time saving A" in all the gaming states before reaching the limit, is associated as "time saving A" as it is, and everything before reaching the limit. The value "95 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to "time saving B" in the game state of is associated with "time saving B" as it is.

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol in all the gaming states when the limit is reached, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d. When the value of is a value that becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7" or "94", "time saving A" is determined as the jackpot type, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "11" or "95". If so, "time saving B" is determined as the jackpot type.

Therefore, in all the gaming states, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol when the limit is reached, the jackpot type of "time saving A" is 15% and the jackpot type of "time saving B" is 85%. You will be elected at a rate.

Therefore, when the jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "probability variation B") that generates a high probability state of the special symbol in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol before reaching the limit reaches the limit, at least the special symbol It is configured to replace the jackpot type that generates a low probability state (that is, the jackpot type "time saving A" or "time saving B"). Therefore, in a situation where the limit is reached when the next big hit occurs, a state in which a left-handed game is performed to execute a dynamic display of the first special symbol (that is, a "normal game state" or a "latent probability fluctuation state"). ), Even if the jackpot is won, the player will not be in the "probability fluctuation state" but will be in the "time reduction state", which is disadvantageous to the player (less advantageous) than before the limit was reached. The same shall apply hereinafter.) The structure is such that the game result can be easily derived.

In this way, in the jackpot type based on the jackpot of the first special symbol selected when the limit is reached, a "time reduction state" is generated in all jackpots and a "time reduction function" is added. With this configuration, even after the jackpot when the limit is reached, the height of the special symbols of the jackpot types "Probability Change A" and "Probability Change B" will be high again while the "Time saving function" is operating. By winning a jackpot that generates a probabilistic state, it is possible to create a playability that indicates whether or not to generate a consecutive villa state again, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 69, all the gaming states (that is, "normal gaming state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "probability fluctuation" are before the limit is reached. When a jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in the "state", "time shortened state", or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state"), the value "0 to 79" of the jackpot type counter C2 is set for "probability variation A". The value "80 to 89" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "probability variation B", and the value "90 to 94" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "time saving A". The value “95 to 99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the “time saving B”.

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol in all the gaming states before reaching the limit, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the second reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. When the value of is a value that becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area is the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "probability variation A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "83", the jackpot type is "probability variation". If "B" is determined and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "93", "time reduction A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "98", the jackpot type is "time reduction". "B" is determined.

Therefore, in all game states, if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol before reaching the limit, the jackpot type of "probability change A" is 80%, the jackpot type of "probability change B" is 10%, The jackpot type of "time saving A" is 5%, and the jackpot type of "time saving B" is 5%.

Therefore, before reaching the limit, the selection ratio of the jackpot type "probability variation A" in the second special symbol is composed of 80%. As a result, in the second special symbol that can be drawn only in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", a lot of game value is given (that is, a big hit of 10 rounds) in all the game states before reaching the limit. In addition, the game state after the big hit state becomes a game state in which the big hit type "probability change A" in which the small hit game of the second special symbol frequently appears until the next big hit is easily given.

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 69, when the jackpot of the second special symbol occurs when the limit is reached, “probability change A” is obtained before the limit is reached, regardless of the gaming state. The value "0 to 79" of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to is associated as "time saving A", and the value "80 to 89" of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to "probability variation B" before reaching the limit. Is associated as "time reduction B", and the value "90 to 94" of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to "time reduction A" before the limit is reached is associated as "time reduction A" as it is, and "time reduction A" is associated before the limit is reached. The value "95 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to "time saving B" is directly associated with "time saving B".

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol in all the gaming states when the limit is reached, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any second holding area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. When the value of is a value that becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area is the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7" or "94", "time saving A" is determined as the jackpot type, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "11" or "95". If so, "time saving B" is determined as the jackpot type.

Therefore, in all the gaming states, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the limit is reached, the jackpot type of "time saving A" is 15% and the jackpot type of "time saving B" is 85%. You will be elected at a rate.

Therefore, the jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "probability variation B") that generates a high probability state of the special symbol in the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol before reaching the limit is the height of the special symbol when the limit is reached. It is configured to replace the jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B") that does not generate a probability state but generates only a high probability state of a normal symbol. For this reason, in a situation where the limit is reached when the next big hit occurs, the right-handed game is performed to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol (that is, the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state"). In this case, when the jackpot is won, it is configured so that "time saving A", in which more rounds are executed than when the limit number of times is reached in the first special symbol, is easily given. It is more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the second special symbol than to win the jackpot in the first special symbol. For this reason, when the limit is reached, the game result depends on whether or not the player stays in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". Therefore, the player changes to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" before reaching the limit. It is possible to create a game-like nature of rushing in and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the jackpot type based on the jackpot of the second special symbol selected when the limit is reached, a "time reduction state" is generated in all jackpots and a "time reduction function" is added. With this configuration, even after the jackpot when the limit is reached, the height of the special symbols of the jackpot types "Probability Change A" and "Probability Change B" will be high again while the "Time saving function" is operating. By winning a jackpot that generates a probabilistic state, it is possible to create a playability that indicates whether or not to generate a consecutive villa state again, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the so-called "normal game state" and "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the execution of the left-handed game is encouraged, or the "probability fluctuation" in which the execution of the right-handed game is encouraged. In the "state" and the "time shortened state", it is difficult to make the ball win the special figure 2 starting port 74. In other words, the ball can be won in the special figure 2 starting port 74 only in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". However, in the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", the player is configured to perform a left-handed game and perform a game based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Although the launching prohibition notification is given by performing the striking game, the game based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is also configured to be able to be executed. Therefore, in the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with each of the game states in order to correspond to the above-mentioned event.

In addition, the probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the game mode (launch mode) in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the transition of the game state based on each jackpot type and the like won in each game state (so-called game). Flow) will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing game specifications for each game state in the pachinko machine 10. Note that FIG. 70 illustrates the transition of the gaming state based on the launch mode encouraged in each game state, and is not encouraged in each game state (for example, in the “small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state”). Since the transition of the game state based on the variation effect of the first special symbol by the left-handed game is an irregular case, its illustration and description will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as described above, 5 of "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" There are two gaming states. The player can win a prize in the game state in which he / she is staying, or can easily win a prize. Left side special figure 1 starting port 64, right side special figure 1 starting port 71a or special figure 2 starting port 74 (hereinafter, left side special figure 1). The starting port 64, the right side special drawing 1 starting port 71a or the special drawing 2 starting port 74 may be simply referred to as "starting port 64, 71a, 74"), and one of the starting ports 64 is fired. , 71a, 74 Play the game while paying attention to whether or not a big hit or a small hit (limited to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") occurs in the dynamic display of the special symbol executed when the ball is won. Do.

In the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, first, the game is started in the "normal game state". This "normal game state" is a game state that is shifted based on the end of the "time reduction state" in addition to the initial state of the pachinko machine 10. This "normal game state" is configured to end when a jackpot is won in any of the special symbols. Further, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of any of the special symbols is in a low probability state, and the jackpot is less likely to occur than in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like. Further, in the "normal game state", the hit probability of the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the winning assist function is not operating (so-called no electric support state), and the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a It is difficult to win the ball. Therefore, in the "normal game state", the player performs a left-handed game and shoots a ball toward the left special figure 1 starting port 64 to generate a big hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Play the game aiming at. Then, when a ball wins a prize in the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 and a big hit occurs in the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the winning, the game of the transition destination after the big hit ends according to the big hit type of the big hit. The state is determined.

Further, in the "normal game state" in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is easier to be executed than the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 5 seconds at the shortest and 120 at the longest. While it is configured to be executed for seconds, it is configured so that the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is uniformly executed for 600 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel at the same time, but the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed. By setting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol to a time much longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol (120 seconds <600 seconds), the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be assumed in the "normal game state". Even if it is executed, it is easy to stop the dynamic display of the first special symbol first. The details of the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol will be described later.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as described above, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. If a big hit or a small hit is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), a big hit or a small hit is also won in the dynamic display of the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol). When the player is elected, the special symbol whose dynamic display is stopped first is given priority, and the special symbol whose dynamic display is stopped later is given the winning result of the priority jackpot or small hit. It is configured to stop (disappear) the big hit or small hit of. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the opening control of the common winning opening 75 from becoming complicated due to the simultaneous occurrence of big hits or small hits by each special symbol, and the player. It is possible to provide playability that is easy to understand. Then, in the "normal game state", the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished by the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol that is easily derived first, and the first It is possible to give priority to the granting of game value based on a big hit or a small hit based on the dynamic display of a special symbol.

As described above, in the "normal game state", the left-handed game is encouraged, while the right-handed game is prohibited, and if the right-handed game is executed, it is fired by the right-handed game. It is configured to give a right-handed prohibition notification due to the passage of the through gate 67 by the ball.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in each jackpot state based on the dynamic display of the special symbol, the execution of the dynamic display of the special symbol is prohibited, and the execution is suspended. The variable display of the symbol is ready to be executed. The hit probability of the normal symbol and the operation mode of the normal electric service 71b in this state are configured to be in a state equivalent to the "normal game state" (that is, a low probability state and a non-open extension state). .. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, since the ordinary electric service 71b is in the non-open extension state during the jackpot game, the ball may flow down to the right flow path on the right side of the front view of the right special figure 1 unit 71. Therefore, the ball is configured to win a prize at the special drawing 2 starting port 74. However, in game states other than the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol is more likely to be stopped before the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is also displayed. Since small hit games frequently occur (about 98%) even in the dynamic display of symbols, the dynamic display of the second special symbol held during the big hit is displayed based on the winning of the small hit game of the first special symbol. It can be extinguished.

Next, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is one of the special symbols (substantially the first special symbol) in which the jackpot does not occur in the "probability fluctuation state" that occurs after the jackpot type "probability variation B" ends. It is a gaming state that is transferred after the dynamic display of is executed 100 times. This "latent probability fluctuation state" is configured to end when a jackpot is won in any of the special symbols. Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot probability of any special symbol is in a high probability state, and the jackpot is more likely to occur than in the "normal game state" or the like. Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", as in the "normal game state", the hit probability of the normal symbol is in the low probability state, and the winning assist function is not operating (so-called state without electric support). ), It is difficult to win a ball in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the player performs a left-handed game in the "normal game state" and shoots a ball toward the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 to perform the first special symbol. The game is played with the aim of generating a big hit in the dynamic display. Then, when a ball wins a prize in the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 and a big hit occurs in the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the winning, the game of the transition destination after the big hit ends according to the big hit type of the big hit. The state is determined.

Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is more easily executed than the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the same as in the "normal game state". Is configured to be executed for a minimum of 5 seconds and a maximum of 120 seconds, while the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is uniformly executed for 600 seconds. Therefore, by setting the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol to a time much longer (120 seconds <600 seconds) than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, it is assumed that the "latent probability fluctuation state" is set. ], Even when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be easily stopped first.

Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", as in the "normal game state", the big hit or the small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the big hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol which is easy to be derived first. Alternatively, it can be extinguished by a small hit, and the addition of the game value based on the big hit or the small hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be prioritized.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the effect mode in the "latent probability fluctuation state" (for example, the content of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81) and the effect mode in the "normal game state" are the same. It is configured so that it is difficult or impossible for the player to determine which game state the player is in by executing the game and visually recognizing the effect mode. Then, even when the jackpot type "probability variation B" that generates the "probability fluctuation state" is won, the same effect as the jackpot type "time reduction B" that generates the "time reduction state" is executed (so-called). , Dummy time saving state), after the dummy time saving state ends, even though it is a "latent probability fluctuation state", by executing the same effect as the "normal game state", the "time shortening state" can be set. After the game is finished, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess which game state it is. Therefore, even when the apparent "time reduction state" is completed, the operating status of the pachinko machine 10 is improved by making the player guess that it may be the "latent probability fluctuation state" and continuing the game. While making it possible, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", as in the "normal game state", the left-handed game is encouraged, while the right-handed game is prohibited, and if the right-handed game is executed. Is configured to give a right-handed prohibition notification due to the passage of the through gate 67 by the ball fired by the right-handed game.

Next, the "time reduction state" is a gaming state in which the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" is shifted after the jackpot ends. This "time reduction state" is configured to end when a jackpot is won in any of the special symbols, or when the dynamic display of any of the special symbols is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends. There is. Further, in the "time shortened state", the jackpot probability of any special symbol is in a low probability state, and as in the "normal game state", the jackpot is less likely to occur than in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like. .. On the other hand, in the "time shortened state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is high, and the winning assistance function is activated (so-called electric support state. The variable display time of the normal symbol is short. In addition, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b is long), and it is easy to win the ball to the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a by performing the right-handed game. Therefore, during the "time reduction state", the player performs a right-handed game and shoots a ball toward the through gate 67 and the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Play the game with the aim of generating a big hit. Then, when a ball wins the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and a big hit occurs in the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the winning, the game state of the transition destination is determined according to the big hit type of the big hit. To.

Further, in the "time reduction state" in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is easier to be executed than the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is similar to the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state". The dynamic display variation time is configured to be executed for a minimum of 5 seconds and a maximum of 120 seconds, while the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be executed uniformly for 600 seconds. ing. Therefore, by setting the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol to a much longer time (120 seconds <600 seconds) than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, it is assumed that the "time reduction state" is obtained. Even when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed in, the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be easily stopped first.

Further, in the "time reduction state", as in the "normal game state", the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the big hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol which is easy to be derived first. Alternatively, it can be extinguished by a small hit, and the addition of the game value based on the big hit or the small hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be prioritized.

As described above, in the "time shortened state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the right-handed suggestion notification for urging the player to perform the right-handed game is provided.

Next, the "probability fluctuation state" is a gaming state that is transferred after the jackpot of the jackpot type "probability variation B" is completed. This "probability fluctuation state" is when a jackpot is won in any of the special symbols, or when the dynamic display of any special symbol is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends (in this case, the "latent probability fluctuation state"). ”), It is configured to end. Further, in the "probability fluctuation state", the jackpot probability of any special symbol is in a high probability state, and as in the "latent probability fluctuation state", a jackpot of a special symbol is more likely to occur than in the "normal game state" or the like. It has become. Further, in the "probability fluctuation state", the hit probability of the normal symbol is in the high probability state, and the winning assist function is activated (so-called electric support state. The variable display time of the normal symbol is short. In addition, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b is long), and it is easy to win the ball to the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a by performing the right-handed game. Therefore, during the "probability fluctuation state", the player performs a right-handed game and shoots a ball toward the through gate 67 and the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Play the game with the aim of generating a big hit. Then, when a ball wins the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and a big hit occurs in the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the winning, the game state of the transition destination is determined according to the big hit type of the big hit. To.

Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is more easily executed than the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the same as in the "normal game state" and the like. Is configured to be executed for a minimum of 5 seconds and a maximum of 120 seconds, while the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is uniformly executed for 600 seconds. Therefore, by setting the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol to a time much longer (120 seconds <600 seconds) than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the "probability fluctuation state" is tentatively set. Even when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed in, the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be easily stopped first.

Further, in the "probability fluctuation state", as in the "normal game state", the jackpot or small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol which is easily derived first. Alternatively, it can be extinguished by a small hit, and the granting of the game value based on the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be prioritized.

As described above, in the "probability fluctuation state", as in the "time reduction state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the right-handed suggestion notification for urging the player to perform the right-handed game is configured. There is.

Next, the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is a gaming state that is transferred after the end of the big hit of the big hit type "probability change A". This "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is configured to end when a big hit is won in any of the special symbols. In addition, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the jackpot probability of any special symbol is in a high probability state, and as in the "probability fluctuation state", a jackpot of a special symbol occurs from the "normal game state" or the like. It is in a state where it is easy to do. Further, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the "time saving function" is given after the big hit ends, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is once set to the high probability state, but one of the time saving end conditions described later When the condition (that is, the opening (operation) of 1 of the common grand prize opening 75 based on the small hit game of the second special symbol is satisfied), the "time saving function" is completed and the winning probability of the normal symbol is immediately (the second). 2 Shift to a low probability state (after winning the small hit game with a special symbol). Therefore, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the hit probability of the normal symbol is substantially in the low probability state, and the winning assist function is not operating (so-called state without electric support), so the right. It is difficult for a ball to win a prize in the right-side special figure 1 starting port 71a even if a hitting game is performed, and the ball launched in the right-handed game rolls on the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b, and the front view of the right side special figure 1 unit 71 It flows down the right flow path on the right side. Then, the sphere that has flowed down the right side flow path on the right side of the right side special figure 1 unit 71 flows down between the first flow path member 72 and the second flow path member 73, and is the special figure 2 starting port 74 or common. It flows down to the large winning opening 75 side, and the ball can win a prize at the special drawing 2 starting opening 74. For this reason, the player performs a right-handed game during the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" and shoots a ball toward the special figure 2 starting port 74 and the common grand prize opening 75, and the second special symbol The game is played with the aim of generating small hits (and big hits) in the dynamic display. Then, when a ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 74 and a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the winning, the common large winning opening 75 is determined based on the winning of the small hit game. For the number of times (that is, 3 times) and a predetermined period (that is, 3 seconds), the ball is opened so that the ball can win a prize, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is won in the open common large winning opening 75. By causing the player to play, a predetermined game value (that is, 15 prize balls / 1 prize) is given to the player.

Further, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is different from the "normal game state" and the like. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is configured to be executed for a minimum of 5 seconds and a maximum of 120 seconds, while the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is uniformly executed for 600 seconds. Therefore, by setting the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol to a time much longer (120 seconds <600 seconds) than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, it is assumed that "small hit frequency occurrence probability". Even when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed in the "variable state", the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be easily stopped first.

Further, as described above, when a big hit or a small hit is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol (for example, the second special symbol), the movement of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) When a big hit or a small hit is won even in the target display, the big hit or small hit of the special symbol whose dynamic display stops first is given priority, and the winning result of the priority big hit or small hit is used later. It is configured to stop (disappear) the big hit or small hit of the special symbol whose target display is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the opening control of the common winning opening 75 from becoming complicated due to the simultaneous occurrence of big hits or small hits by each special symbol, and the player. It is possible to provide playability that is easy to understand. Then, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", unlike the "normal game state", the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol is dynamically displayed of the second special symbol which is easy to be derived first. It is possible to extinguish by a big hit or a small hit based on the above, and give priority to the addition of the game value based on the big hit or the small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

As a result, in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", and "time reduction state", the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is accumulated (for example, the dynamic display of the first special symbol). Even if the player enters the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" with the number of holdings of 4), the dynamic display of the second special symbol is small before the dynamic display of the first special symbol is confirmed. When the winning game occurs frequently, the big hit game and the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol that is held can be eliminated.

As described above, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", as in the "time reduction state" and the "probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged and the player is encouraged to play the right-handed game. It is configured to provide suggestion notification.

In addition, when shifting from the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" to the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", that is, the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". Even if the player enters the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" in the state where the second special symbol is held (for example, the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol is four), the dynamic display of the second special symbol is dynamic. By frequently performing small hit games in the dynamic display of the first special symbol before the display is confirmed, the large hit games and small hit games in the pending dynamic display of the second special symbol are extinguished. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 66, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", reach the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then return to "0".

In the fourth embodiment, the number of held fluctuation effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 determine the rough production mode of the fluctuation effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of jackpot and loss. Be selected. Specifically, only the "non-reach (long)" production mode or the "non-reach (short)" production mode in which the "reach display" does not occur and the variable element of the "normal reach" as the "reach display" are executed. The "normal reach" production mode and the "super reach" production mode in which the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed and the variable element of the "super reach" is executed, and the "special reach" which is also developed from the variable element of the "normal reach". Six production modes are selected: a "special reach" production mode in which the variation element of "" is executed, and a "ultra-long fluctuation" production mode in which the fluctuation time is much longer than the fluctuation time that can be selected in the above production mode. ..

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, the "non-reach (long)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter, the "non-reach (long)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode are collectively referred to. (Sometimes referred to as "non-reach" effect mode ") means that each symbol sequence is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in which three symbol sequences (not shown) are varied as a special symbol variation effect. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the second symbol sequence that stops first after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, and "reach display" does not occur.

The fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" is, for example, in the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol displayed in each symbol row is displayed at high speed downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. A variable element that is scrolled to. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the fluctuation effect displayed last time is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is performed except for a specific effect mode ("non-reach (short)" effect mode). It is configured to be used.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element means that in the third symbol fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, after the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, the third symbol is slowed down at a speed visible to the player. A variable element that scrolls to. In the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation", each symbol sequence is stopped and displayed in order while making the player recognize the display content of the third symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the 2 symbol rows (for example, the left symbol row and the right symbol row) that are stopped and displayed first, it is assumed that "reach display" has occurred and it develops into a variable element of "normal reach". When a different third symbol is stopped in the second symbol string to be stopped and displayed first, the remaining symbol string is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is ended. The details of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" or each variable element including the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, then the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol sequence is stopped in order and stopped first. A different third symbol stops at the two symbol rows, the remaining 1 symbol row stops, and the variation effect of 1 ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is not performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the end of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, each symbol sequence is simultaneously displayed. A different third symbol stops at 2 symbol rows (for example, 2 symbol rows that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode), and other symbol rows also stop, and 1 changes. The production ends.

Among the effect modes, the "normal reach" effect mode means "in the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81, immediately after the same third symbol in the second symbol sequence to be stopped and displayed first stops. It is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed and does not develop into other "reach display", that is, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach".

Among the production modes, the "super reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach".

Among the production modes, the "special reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable element of "special reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach".

Among the production modes, the "ultra-long fluctuation" production mode is uniformly selected with a fluctuation time of "600 seconds" which is much longer than the fluctuation time (that is, 5 seconds to 120 seconds) that can be selected in the above production mode. It is an effect mode. In this "ultra-long variation" effect mode, when the dynamic display of a special symbol that is not encouraged is executed in each gaming state, for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal gaming state" is executed. At that time, or when the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is executed, the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is configured to be selected without exception.

Since the special symbol for which the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is selected is a special symbol that is not encouraged (not encouraged) in each gaming state, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 64). (See) does not change (execute), but changes only in the special symbol display device 37 (see FIG. 60), the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 87, or the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 88 (see FIG. 64). It is configured to be displayed. With this configuration, the discomfort (bad impression) caused by the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, which takes a long time until the final display, is executed in the main display area Dm, which is the main display area of the game result, is generated. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing a comfortable game without making the player feel.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in the fourth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. Of the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the above, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 2 start port 74, the jackpot random number counter in the second hold first to fourth areas provided in the second hold ball storage area 203e corresponding to the special figure 2 start port 74. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second holding area in which C1 is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 has a stop pattern selection counter C3 according to whether or not the variation effect is correct, the current game state, and the number of variation effects (number of reserved balls) of each special symbol currently pending. The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the values is configured differently. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected according to the number of fluctuation effects (number of reserved balls) of each special symbol on standby.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the hold number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the appropriateness of the variation effect, the current gaming state, and the current gaming state. Any stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) is selected. In this hold number table 202c, the hold number table 202c1 for special figure 1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the hold number for special figure 2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol are displayed. A table 202c2 is provided. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode that is a rough mode of the variation effect is selected. After that, a detailed fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected for each stop pattern table 202d is different. A plurality of the stop pattern tables 202d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variation effect according to the suitability of the variation effect, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state". Or, this is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed according to whether the player is in the "normal gaming state" and (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable effect.

This is because the first reason is to change the degree of expectation of a big hit for each production mode. That is, depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or lost, the stop pattern, that is, the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode. By configuring the mode so that the selection ratio is different, the degree of expectation of a big hit is changed for each production mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode are easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" production is performed. It is configured so that the mode and the "normal reach" production mode can be easily selected.

With this configuration, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode can be easily hit, and the "normal reach" production mode and the "non-reach" production mode are difficult to hit. It can be a production or a production without a big hit, and the degree of expectation of a big hit can be differentiated for each production mode. Therefore, when a production that is easy to hit a big hit appears in a variable production, it is suggested to the player that a big hit is likely to occur while the production that is easy to hit is being performed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, specifically, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to hit the jackpot, and it is difficult to select an effect that is hard to hit the jackpot. The effect mode (stop pattern), which is a rough content of the variable effect, is selected based on the above. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, the effect mode (stop pattern) of the variable effect is determined based on the stop pattern table 202d, which makes it difficult to select an effect that is easy to hit and is easy to select an effect that is difficult to hit. Configure to select. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a big hit is likely to occur in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. If this is the case, it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the jackpot for each effect mode (stop pattern), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

The second reason is that the ball enters the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a in a state where the waiting number of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, or the second. This is to reduce as much as possible waste balls (so-called no lottery of special symbols due to overflow winning) based on the entry of balls into the special figure 2 starting port 74 when the number of waiting times for the special symbol variation effect has reached the upper limit.

Specifically, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and the variation effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. Therefore, for example, In the gaming state in which the ball easily enters the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state", the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is easily reached. In these gaming states, if the variation effect of the first special symbol with a long variation time is selected, the ball enters the right special symbol 1 starting port 71a frequently when the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reached. , Even though the ball entered the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", if the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol with a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been reached, the fluctuation effect is selected. Since the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is not consumed during the execution of the variation effect, even if a ball enters the left special symbol 1 starting port 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol cannot be obtained. Further, even in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", if the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol with a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has been reached, the fluctuation effect is executed. Since the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not consumed inside, even if a ball enters the special figure 2 starting port 74 during that time, the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is inserted into the left side special figure 1 starting port 64, the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a or the special figure 2 starting port 74. However, the game is interrupted by stopping the firing of the balls until the fluctuation effect is digested and the number of reserved balls can be obtained again. If the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will affect the management of the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) corresponding to the dynamic display of the special symbol encouraged as a gaming state. In the gaming state and the number of reserved balls close to (or match with) the maximum number of reserved balls, it is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variation time is easily selected. As a result, the left side special figure 1 start port 64 or the right side special figure 1 start port 71a or the special figure 2 start when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. It is possible to suppress the entry of the ball into the mouth 74.

Further, the third reason is that the execution time is set to be long and the end of the variation effect is delayed, so that the state in which the variation effect is executed is maintained for a long time. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is small (not present), the balls are located at the starting ports 64, 71a, 74 corresponding to the special symbols encouraged as a gaming state within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. The next variation effect cannot be started unless a new ball is inserted, and the demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 even though the ball is fired and the game is played, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. Instead, I get excited about the game. Further, the player enters the ball into the left side special figure 1 starting port 64, the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, or the special figure 2 starting port 74 because the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81. There is a risk of recognizing that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult to play, determining that the platform is difficult to obtain the game value, and stopping the game on the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variation time is easily selected when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small. There is. As a result, the situation in which the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol encouraged for each gaming state is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 is unlikely to occur, and the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened. Can be maintained.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a so-called simultaneous variable machine capable of simultaneously executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in parallel, and the lottery game is encouraged. When no special symbol (for example, the second special symbol in the "normal game state") is reserved and the total number of both reserved symbols is 5 or more, that is, the number of reserved special symbols is not encouraged. When there are at least one and multiple dynamic displays of the encouraged special symbols are held (for example, the maximum number of reserved symbols is 4), the dynamic display of the newly started special symbols (encouragement) The dynamic display of the special figure 1 may be performed for a long time (for example, 600 seconds) to reduce the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of the special symbol. With this configuration, when a ball is won at the starting ports 64, 71a, 74 that cause the dynamic display of special symbols that are not recommended as game specifications, the dynamic display of each special symbol is executed. By reducing the efficiency, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of imparting the game value. As a result, the player can hesitate to execute the dynamic display of the special symbol that is not encouraged in the predetermined game state (that is, the "normal game state"), and the game is different from the assumed game specification. Can be suppressed and the occurrence of disadvantages to the hall can be reduced.

Here, the details of the hold number table 202c will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71 is a diagram schematically showing the reserved number table 202c1 for special figure 1, and FIG. 72 is a diagram schematically showing the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the variation effect is performed based on the ball entering the left side special figure 1 start port 64 or the right side special figure 1 start port 71a, the variation effect is performed. With reference to the number of reservations table 202c1 for special figure 1 based on the success or failure of the above, the game state at that time, and the number of reservations of the variation effect of special figure 1 at that time, any of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 can be used. It is configured to select. Further, when the variation effect is performed based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 74, the appropriateness of the variation effect, the game state at that time, and the variation effect of the special figure 2 at that time are also performed. It is configured to refer to the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2 based on the reserved number and select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3. Then, a rough effect mode of the variation effect of each special symbol is determined based on any of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c1 for the special figure 1 of FIG. 71, the left-handed game is performed, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is encouraged in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation". When the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is "1 to 3" at the time of the loss extraction or the small hit extraction of the first special symbol in the "state", or the right-handed game is performed. When the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is "1" at the time of loss extraction or small hit extraction of the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", the stop pattern table The A table 202d1 of 202d (see FIG. 73A) is selected.

In addition, when the left-handed game is performed and the first special symbol is lost or the small hit is extracted in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is encouraged. , When the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is "4", or when the right-handed game is performed in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" when the loss is extracted or the small hit is extracted. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is "2 to 4", the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 73B) is selected.

Further, the jackpot of the first special symbol in a gaming state other than the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" (that is, "normal gaming state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state"). At the time of winning, the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 73 (FIG. 73)) regardless of the jackpot type and the number of reserved balls (that is, 1 to 4) in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. c) See) is selected.

That is, if any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3) is selected based only on the fact that the jackpot is won, regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game state at that time, and the jackpot is won. Only when the player does not win (that is, at the time of loss or small hit), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time.

Even when a big hit is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a big hit is won, a relatively short fluctuation pattern is easily selected in the stop pattern table 202d (for example, a "super reach" production mode in which the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is 5 seconds, or " It may be configured so that the "special reach" effect mode, etc.) can be selected.

In this case, in each effect mode in which the "reach display" is executed, it is configured to select an effect mode in which only the time of the variable element portion of the "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to 5 seconds. With this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation effect is started with the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being four times, even if the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed in 5 seconds. At the time when the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds ends (when it is recognized as the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds), "reach display" may occur in the fluctuation production. Therefore, even when the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, the effect mode in which "reach display" is executed other than the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is executed. By doing so, at the time of executing the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds, it is possible to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss.

In addition, in the dynamic display of the non-encouragement 1st special symbol in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is performed and the dynamic display of the 2nd special symbol is encouraged, any derivation result (that is, that is). Regardless of the number of reserved balls (that is, 1 to 4) in any of the loss, small hit or big hit) and the dynamic display of the first special symbol, only the above-mentioned "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is selected. D table 202d4 (see FIG. 73D) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2 of FIG. 72, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is encouraged, and the left-handed game is performed in the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", or In the dynamic display of the second special symbol that is not encouraged in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is performed, any of the derivation results (that is, loss, small hit or big hit), and the first 2 D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d in which only the above-mentioned "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls (that is, 1 to 4) in the dynamic display of the special symbol (FIG. 73 (d)) is selected.

On the other hand, when the right-handed game is performed and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is encouraged, and the second special symbol is lost or the small hit is extracted in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the second special When the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the symbol is "1", the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 73A) is selected.

In addition, when a right-handed game is performed and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is encouraged, the second special symbol is lost or the second special symbol is extracted in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". When the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the symbol is "2 to 4", B table 202d2 (see FIG. 73B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Furthermore, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is performed and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is encouraged, which jackpot type and the second special symbol are used. The C table 202d3 (see FIG. 73C) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls (that is, 1 to 4) in the dynamic display of the symbol.

Here, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 73 (b) schematically shows an example of B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 73 (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 73 (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d. It is the figure which showed.

As shown in FIG. 73A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95" to "95". It is set to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode and the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, and the "non-reach (short)" effect is produced. The mode and the "ultra-long variation" effect mode are set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98,99". In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, and the "non-reach (long)" effect is produced. The mode and the "ultra-long variation" effect mode are set not to be selected.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. Further, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

Therefore, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a relatively long fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation effect as compared with the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202d1.

Here, the selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode with the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 are set to be the same.

In this way, when the lottery result of the loss is extracted, the effect mode of the variation effect is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the variation effect on hold. For example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened and the number of times the variable effect is executed is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be improved.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is small, the ball entry time to the left special figure 1 starting port 64, the right special drawing 1 starting port 71a, or the special drawing 2 starting port 74 is secured. Therefore, the "non-reach (long)" production mode in which the variable production time is longer than the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected. As a result, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, which has a longer variation effect time than when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected, can be performed. Therefore, the left side special figure 1 start port 64 or the right side special figure It becomes easier to secure the ball entry time to the 1 start port 71a or the special figure 2 start port 74, and there is a possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. By raising the height, it is possible to maintain the situation in which the variable effect is being executed.

In the fourth embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variation effect of the loss, but the left side special figure 1 start The determination of the variation effect based on the ball entering the opening 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a or the special figure 2 starting port 74 and the determination of the variation effect based on the start of the variation effect based on the entry. , It is configured so that substantially the same production mode is selected.

Specifically, in the case of the variable effect of loss, either one of the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, but the A table 202d1 And B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is the same, and is assigned to another effect mode. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

That is, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. The same production mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same even when the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even if the look-ahead notice is given based on the effect mode selected at the time of the start winning, the change effect that is the target of the look-ahead notice does not cause a discrepancy with the content of the look-ahead notice. Can be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73C, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is "40" to "40". It is set to "99". In the C table 202d3, the stop pattern table 202d is selected at the time of a big hit, and the "reach display" always occurs, so that each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected. Further, in the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, and the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is set not to be selected.

That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is set so that the "normal reach" effect mode is 5%, the "super reach" effect mode is 35%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 60%.

Therefore, in the variable production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode, and in the variable production at the time of loss, the "normal reach" production mode> The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, it is highly possible that the jackpot display results will appear in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode for the jackpot expectation when each "reach display" appears. It is configured to be. As a result, the player can be shown the degree of expectation for the jackpot depending on the type of the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy the uplifting feeling of the jackpot according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (d), in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is set to "0" to "99". Has been done. That is, in the D table 202d4, the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is set so that the selection ratio is 100%. Therefore, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode, and the "ultra-long fluctuation" It is set so that an effect mode other than the effect mode is not selected.

Based on the above, the game is being performed by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect at that time. By shortening the execution time of the variation effect and increasing the number of executions of the variation effect based on the above, it is possible to select an effect mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variation effect.

In addition, the dynamic display of the special symbol that is not encouraged in each game state, that is, the movement of the second special symbol in the "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", or "time reduction state". As for the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the target display or the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is selected in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, and each gaming state. Dynamic display of the special symbol encouraged in, that is, dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", or " A fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is selected. As a result, the execution time of the dynamic display of the non-encouragement special symbol in each gaming state can be lengthened, and it is possible to make it difficult to derive the variation result of the non-encouragement dynamic display.

When "reach display" is selected when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is large (for example, "4"), the stop pattern in which the effect element of the "high-speed fluctuation" of each "reach display" is shortened. A table 202d may be provided. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is large, the stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed variation" is omitted in each effect mode. Further, the stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the selection rate of each effect mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, the number of reserved balls at the time of the pre-reading notice execution decision and the pre-reading notice are applied when the pre-reading notice is given. The number of reserved balls at the time of executing the variable effect may be different. In such a case, a process for maintaining consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect is required, which complicates the process.

Further, the same stop pattern table 202d can be selected at the time of loss extraction and at the time of small hit extraction, but instead, at the time of small hit extraction, a stop pattern table 202d different from that at the time of loss extraction is selected. It may be configured to be possible.

Returning to FIG. 66, the description will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be added by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 87). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, the second RAM 203 provided corresponding to the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. 1 Of the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203d, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the special drawing 2 starting port 74, the second holding first to fourth held in the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 2 starting port 74. Of the areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second holding area.

This fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is detailed by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the variation pattern. The determination of the fluctuation pattern is specifically the determination of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have a reach type and detailed symbols of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to control the detailed advance notice lottery or the like necessary for executing the variation effect in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation effect can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare the command of the total variation pattern of the variation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the variation effect is performed by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110. You can increase the degree of freedom in choosing. Furthermore, the game state (not only the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol, but also the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, the remaining time of the variable effect, the remaining time of the variable display, the ordinary electric service 71b In the pachinko machine 10 whose remaining opening time (including the number of times) of the machine changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, which is appropriate according to the gaming state. You can perform various effects.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. The pachinko machine 10 uses the variation pattern table 202e1 as the variation pattern table 202e1 for special figure 1 loss / small hit, which is commonly used in all gaming states at the time of loss or small hit of the first special symbol. The special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is commonly used in all gaming states when the first special symbol is a big hit, and the second special symbol when it is lost or small hit, in all gaming states. The special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3, which is commonly used, and the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4, which is commonly used in all gaming states at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol, are It is prepared.

FIG. 74 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 74 (b) is a special figure stored in the ROM 202. 1 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table 202e2 for big hits, and FIG. 75 (a) schematically shows an example of a variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss / small hits stored in ROM 202. FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the variation pattern tables 202e1 to 202e4 are grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode at the time of loss or small hit, "E0: non-reach (long)" and "non-reach (non-reach)" referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined. "Short)" for "E1: non-reach (short)" that is referred to when the production mode is decided, "E2: for normal reach" that is referred to when the "normal reach" production mode is decided, and "super" "E3: Super Reach" that is referred to when the "reach" production mode is decided, "E4: Special Reach" that is referred to when the "special reach" production mode is decided, and "ultra-long variation" It is classified into "E5: ultra-long fluctuation" which is referred to when the production mode is determined. In addition, as the effect mode at the time of a big hit, "E2: for normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E3: super" referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined. "E4: Special Reach", which is referred to when the "reach" and "special reach" production modes are determined, and "E5: ultra-long", which is referred to when the "ultra-long fluctuation" production mode is determined. It is divided into those for "fluctuation". Then, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the fourth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value), that is, If the value is a loss (that is, a lost random number value) or a small hit value (that is, a small hit random number value), the gaming state at that time is referred to with reference to the reserved number table 202c1 for Special Figure 1. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of reserved balls at that time, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area and the stop pattern table 202d. To do. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss / small hit, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is set in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the reserved fluctuation production.

Here, each fluctuation element constituting the fluctuation pattern will be described. The variable element constitutes a part of the variable effect of 1, and each variable element is combined to form the variable effect of 1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as the fluctuation elements, the fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "normal reach", the fluctuation element of "super reach", and the fluctuation element of "special reach" Variable elements and “re-variable” variable elements are provided.

As described above, the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is a fluctuation element that scrolls at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. The fluctuation element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation production when the "non-reach (short)" production mode or the like is selected (hereinafter, referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (short)"). (In some cases), when a "non-reach (long)" production mode or the like is selected, "10 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the fluctuation production (hereinafter, it may be referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"). When the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is selected, "595 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the variation effect (hereinafter, it may be referred to as "high-speed variation (ultra-long)"). When the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" ends, the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" described later is started (executed), or the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is started after the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element of "5 seconds", "10 seconds", or "595 seconds", and the third symbol is visibly scrolled and changed to "" It is a variable element that shows whether or not "reach display" is generated. The variable element of this "low speed fluctuation" is not executed when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected, and the effect mode other than the "non-reach (short)" effect mode (for example, "non-reach (long)" effect mode is not executed. When ")" effect mode or "ultra-long variation" effect mode) is selected, "5 seconds" is performed after the variation element of "high-speed variation".

That is, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "ultra-long variation" effect mode, the variation element of the "low speed variation" is performed, so that the final stop symbol sequence of the third symbol display device 81 (fourth embodiment). Then, the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 64) stops while decelerating, while in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed, the third symbol display device 81 Each symbol sequence of is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bita stop) without going through the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation". If the "reach display" is not executed after the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" is completed, the fluctuation effect is configured to end as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode has a variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" of "10 seconds" and a variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" of "5 seconds". The fluctuation effect is composed of the fluctuation pattern including. Further, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variation effect is configured by the variation pattern of only the variation elements of the "high-speed variation" of "5 seconds". Further, in the "ultra-long variation" effect mode, the variation effect is composed of a variation pattern including a variation element of "high speed variation" of "595 seconds" and a variation element of "low speed variation" of "5 seconds".

The variable element of "normal reach" remains when the same symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as "reach forming symbol") is stopped and displayed in the two symbol sequences that stop first in the variable element of "low speed fluctuation". It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs depending on the fluctuation result of the symbol sequence of. This "normal reach" variation element is performed "5 seconds" after the "low speed variation" variation element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays "loss display" (including when a small hit is won, the same applies hereinafter) and a direct "big hit display" are displayed. , A pattern that develops into a variable element of "super reach", a pattern that develops into a variable element of "special reach", and a pattern that once makes a temporary "loss display" appear, and then "re-appears". A pattern for executing the fluctuation element of "fluctuation" is prepared.

The variable element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol sequence is continued, and in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a predetermined effect (for example, "battle effect"). This "super reach" variable element is performed "30 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, after executing the variable element of "super reach", a pattern (including when a small hit is won) that directly displays "loss display" and a direct "big hit display" are displayed. There are two patterns, one is to make a temporary "missing display" appear, and the other is to execute the variable element of "re-variation".

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol sequence is continued, and in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a special effect (for example, "competitive effect") different from the above-mentioned predetermined effect. This "special reach" variable element is performed "90 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, after executing the variable element of the "special reach", a pattern (including when a small hit is won) that directly displays a "loss display" and a direct "big hit display" appear. A pattern to be performed and a pattern to be "re-variated" after the temporary "loss display" is displayed are prepared.

It is configured to develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element, but instead of this configuration, reach formation after the "low speed fluctuation". When the symbol stops, it may be configured so as to suddenly develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without going through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "loss display" appears once in any of the "reach display", and the "big hit display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, a pattern in which the “big hit display” appears after the execution of the fluctuation element of the “re-variation” is prepared.

Further, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of "loss display", the variable element of "re-variation" is not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily stopped "loss display" to one of the "big hit displays", so in the case of "loss display" that has not won the jackpot. If you go to, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the fluctuation elements of this "re-variation" are selected only in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, 202e4 (see FIGS. 74 (b) and 75 (b)), and the loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1, 202e3. (See FIGS. 74 (a) and 75 (a)), it is configured not to be selected.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the first special symbol is lost or small hit, "E0: non-reach (long)" is set to One fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time. Hereinafter, "fluctuation pattern" is referred to as "fluctuation time"" of "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "" with a total fluctuation time of "15 seconds" Of course, it is possible to replace with.) Is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach (long)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "variable elements of", and only "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in any game state, the variation type. A "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ a variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is associated with all possible values ("0 to 9") of the counter CS1. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, "the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. To.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E1: non-reach (short)" includes only the fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" with the total fluctuation time of "5 seconds". 』One fluctuation pattern is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach (short)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "". It is set to "0 to 9", and only "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in any game state, the variation type. "Only the variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" are associated with all the values ("0 to 9") that the counter CS1 can take. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "only the variation element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E2: normal reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "20 seconds". One fluctuation pattern of "variation element of" + "variation element of" normal reach "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0 to 9" for "variable element of" normal reach "", and only the "variable element of" high speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "" Is set to be selectable.

That is, in any game state, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 is taken. "Fluctuating element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "" is associated with all the obtained values ("0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element. Is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E3: Super Reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "50 seconds". ”Fluctuating element +“ Normal reach ”variable element +“ Super reach ”variable element” is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". It is "0-9" for the element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach", and the variable element of the "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low speed fluctuation". + "Normal reach" variable element + "Super reach" variable element "can only be selected.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in any game state, the variation type counter CS1 is set. For all possible values ("0-9"), "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor " Are associated with each other. That is, in the case of the "super reach" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is always "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element. + "Variable element of" super reach "" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E4: special reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "110 seconds". "Variable element +" Normal reach "variable element +" Special reach "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". It is "0 to 9" for the element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "special reach", and the variable element of the "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low speed fluctuation". + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element "is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in any game state, the variation type counter CS1 is set. For all possible values ("0-9"), "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor " Are associated with each other. That is, in the case of the "special reach" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is always "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element. + "Variable element of" special reach "" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E5: ultra-long variation" includes the variation element of "high-speed variation (ultra-long)" with the total variation time of "600 seconds" + " One fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: ultra-long fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "variable elements of", and only "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, in any game state, when the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 "Fluctuating element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is associated with all possible values ("0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "ultra-long variation" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. ..

In addition, since the effect mode is determined as the variation pattern as it is in the variation pattern at the time of loss or small hit in Special Figure 1, the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. .. Further, although the selection is made using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination for selection (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (b), the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold area having the first hold ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a jackpot, the number of holds for special figure 1 With reference to the table 202c1, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time, the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area. The effect mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area was held in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation production.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for special figure 1 jackpot, "E2: normal reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" of "20 seconds" + "low speed fluctuation". "Normal reach" fluctuation element "and" 30 seconds "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variation element +" low-speed fluctuation "variation element +" normal reach "variation element +" re-variation " Two fluctuation patterns with "variation element" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0-2" for "normal reach" fluctuation factor, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "re-variation" fluctuation It is "3 to 9" for "element".

That is, in any game state, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, "high-speed variation (long)" Fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor "variation pattern is 30%," high speed fluctuation (long) "variation factor +" low speed fluctuation "variation factor +" normal reach "variation The fluctuation pattern of "element + fluctuation element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 1, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" The fluctuation pattern of "variation factor" is easy to select (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element to be selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, in "E3: Super Reach", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "50 seconds" Element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Two fluctuation patterns of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Has been done.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element "0 to 3", "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" It is "4-9" for "variable element + variable element of" super reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in any game state, "" high-speed variation (long) "". Fluctuation element of "Slow fluctuation" + Fluctuation element of "Normal reach" + Fluctuation pattern of "Super reach" is 40%, Fluctuation element of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" super reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 1, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" + "variable element of" re-variation "" is easily selected (60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, in "E4: special reach", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "110 seconds" Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Two fluctuation patterns of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Has been done.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "for" 0-4 "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "variable element It is "5-9" for "variable element + variable element of" special reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in any game state, "" high-speed variation (long) "". Fluctuation element of "Slow fluctuation" + Fluctuation element of "Normal reach" + Fluctuation pattern of "Special reach" is 50%, Fluctuation element of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" special reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 1, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" Fluctuation pattern of "Fluctuating element" and "Variating element of" High speed fluctuation (long) "+ Variable element of" Low speed fluctuation "+ Variable element of" Normal reach "+ Variable element of" Super reach "+ Variable element of" Re-variation " ”Fluctuating patterns are selected evenly (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide game playability in which a jackpot can be expected equally in any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, in "E5: ultra-long fluctuation", the total fluctuation time is "600 seconds" as in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1. One fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element "is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: ultra-long fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "variable elements of", and only "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, in any game state, when the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. All values ("0-9") are associated with "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "". That is, in the case of the "ultra-long variation" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. .. In addition, when the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is selected and a big hit or a small hit is won, the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is a dynamic display of a special symbol that is not encouraged. The big hit display or small hit display does not appear in the symbol display device 81, and after the selected fluctuation time (that is, 600 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol display device 37 and the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 or The display result corresponding to the big hit or the small hit is derived (displayed) in the fourth symbol display area 88 for the special figure 2.

In this way, when a jackpot is won, by configuring it so that a relatively long fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, the entertainment of the game is improved by enhancing the production content of the fluctuation production in which the jackpot occurs. be able to. In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if there is a loss, the variation effect can be shortened by making it easy to select a relatively short variation pattern. It can be digested efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (a), the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the second special symbol is lost will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a jackpot value, that is, a value that is lost (that is, a lost value). , Lost random number value) or a small hit value (that is, a small hit random number value), refer to the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2 and refer to the game state at that time and the reserved at that time. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of balls, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 is determined based on the selected production mode. In the group (group) of the fluctuation pattern table 202e3 for loss / small hit, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is set in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the reserved fluctuation production.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the second special symbol is lost or small hit, "E0: non-reach (long)" is set to One fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "" with a total fluctuation time of "10 seconds" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach (long)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "variable elements of", and only "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3, which is referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in any game state, the variation type. A "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ a variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is associated with all possible values ("0 to 9") of the counter CS1. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, "the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. To.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, in "E1: non-reach (short)", only the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" with the total fluctuation time of "5 seconds" 』One fluctuation pattern is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach (short)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "". It is set to "0 to 9", and only "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3, which is referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in any game state, the variation type. "Only the variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" are associated with all the values ("0 to 9") that the counter CS1 can take. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "only the variation element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, in "E2: normal reach", the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "15 seconds" One fluctuation pattern of "variation element of" + "variation element of" normal reach "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0 to 9" for "variable elements of" normal reach "", and only "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "" It is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3, which is referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in any game state, the variation type counter CS1 is taken. "Fluctuating element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "" is associated with all the obtained values ("0 to 9"). In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element. Is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, in "E3: Super Reach", the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "45 seconds" "Variable element +" Normal reach "variable element +" Super reach "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element "is set to" 0-9 "," high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element + Only "normal reach" variable elements + "super reach" variable elements "can be selected.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in any game state, the variation type counter CS1 is set. For all possible values ("0-9"), "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor " It is associated. That is, in the case of the "super reach" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is always "high speed variation (short)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element. + "Variable element of" super reach "" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, in "E4: special reach", the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "105 seconds" "Variable element +" Normal reach "variable element +" Special reach "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "is set to" 0-9 "," high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element + Only "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "can be selected.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3, which is referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in any game state, the variation type counter CS1 is set. For all possible values ("0-9"), "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor " Are associated with each other. That is, in the case of the "special reach" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is always "high speed variation (short)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element. + "Variable element of" special reach "" is selected.

Next, in Special Figure 2 Loss / Small Hit Fluctuation Pattern Table 202e3, "E5: Ultra-long variation" includes the variation element of "High-speed variation (ultra-long)" with the total variation time of "600 seconds" + " One fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: ultra-long fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "variable elements of", and only "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3, which is referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in any game state, the variation type counter CS1 "Fluctuating element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is associated with all possible values ("0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "ultra-long variation" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "the variation element of" high-speed variation (ultra-long) "+ the variation element of" low-speed variation "" is always selected as the variation pattern. ..

In this way, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, which is easy to be executed (execution efficiency is good) mainly during the right-handed game of the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol. It is configured so that a shorter time is selected as compared with the above, and the time efficiency of the game is high (good).

Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that becomes a jackpot, the number of holdings for special figure 2 With reference to the table 202c2, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area. The effect mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e4, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area was held in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation production.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e4 for special figure 2 jackpot, "E2: normal reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation factor of "low speed fluctuation" of "15 seconds" + "low speed fluctuation". "Normal reach" fluctuation element "and" High-speed fluctuation (short) "variation element +" Low speed fluctuation "variation element +" Normal reach "variation element +" Re-variation "with the total fluctuation time of" 25 seconds " Two fluctuation patterns with "variation element" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0-2" for "normal reach" fluctuation factor, "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "re-variation" fluctuation It is "3 to 9" for "element".

That is, in any game state, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, which is referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the "high-speed variation (short)" Fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor 30%, "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation The fluctuation pattern of "element + fluctuation element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 2, "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" The fluctuation pattern of "variation factor" is easy to select (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element to be selected, the game can be played in a time-efficient manner. On the other hand, it is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e4, in "E3: Super Reach", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "45 seconds" Element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Two fluctuation patterns of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Has been done.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element "for" 0-3 "," high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "variable element It is "4-9" for "variable element + variable element of" super reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in any game state, "" high-speed variation (short) "". Fluctuation element of "Slow fluctuation" + Fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + Fluctuation pattern of "Super reach" is 40%, Fluctuation element of "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" super reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 2, "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" + "variable element of" re-variation "" is easily selected (60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern while playing the game in a time-efficient manner.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e4, in "E4: special reach", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "105 seconds" Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Two fluctuation patterns of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Has been done.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "for" 0-4 "," high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "variable element It is "5-9" for "variable element + variable element of" special reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, which is referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in any game state, "" high-speed variation (short) "". Fluctuation element of "Slow fluctuation" + Fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + Fluctuation pattern of "Special reach" is 50%, Fluctuation element of "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" special reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 2, "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" Fluctuation pattern of "Fluctuation element" and "Fluctuation element of" High speed fluctuation (short) "+ Fluctuation element of" Low speed fluctuation "+ Fluctuation factor of" Normal reach "+ Fluctuation factor of" Special reach "+ Fluctuation factor of" Re-variation " ”Fluctuating patterns are selected evenly (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a game that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern while playing the game in a time-efficient manner.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e4, in "E5: ultra-long fluctuation", the total fluctuation time is "600 seconds" as in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3. One fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element "is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: ultra-long fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "variable elements of", and only "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, in any game state, when the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. "Fluctuating element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is associated with all values ("0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "ultra-long variation" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "the variation element of" high-speed variation (ultra-long) "+ the variation element of" low-speed variation "" is always selected as the variation pattern. ..

As described above, in the gaming state in which the dynamic display of the predetermined special symbol is not encouraged, in the "ultra-long variation" effect mode selected when the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the non-encouragement special Regardless of the extraction result of the dynamic display of the symbol (that is, whether it is a loss, a small hit, or a big hit), the effect mode that can be selected when the dynamic display of the special symbol is encouraged. A variation time (ie, 600 seconds) that is much longer than the variation time (ie, 5 seconds to 120 seconds) is selected. Therefore, for example, even if the dynamic display of the non-encouragement special symbol is suspended due to the winning during the jackpot game or the winning before the start of the jackpot game, the dynamic display of the non-encouragement special symbol is displayed. It is possible to execute the dynamic display of the encouraged special symbol a plurality of times (at least, at least the maximum number of reserved balls of each special symbol (for example, 5 times or more)) while the above is executed. As a result, even when a plurality of dynamic displays of non-encouragement special symbols are suspended when the game state is switched, it is possible to eliminate them by a small hit or the like in the dynamic display of the encouraged special symbols. ..

In particular, in a predetermined gaming state (eg, "time reduction state"), it is encouraged within the execution time (ie, 600 seconds) of one dynamic display of the non-encouragement special symbol (eg, the second special symbol). By configuring the dynamic display (that is, maximum 120 seconds) of the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in the fourth embodiment) or more of the dynamic display of the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) to be feasible. , When the dynamic display of the special symbol to be encouraged is switched (for example, from "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" to "time reduction state"), all the dynamic display of the reserved non-encouragement special symbol is confirmed. It is possible to eliminate the dynamic display of the non-encouragement special symbol by the big hit result or the small hit result of the dynamic display of the encouraged special symbol without displaying it.

With this configuration, for example, when shifting from the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" to the "time reduction state", the movement of the second special symbol suspended in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" The target display can be extinguished by a small hit game or the like in the dynamic display of the first special symbol acquired in the subsequent "time reduction state". As a result, it is possible to smoothly shift the game state and provide the player with a game that does not cause a sense of discomfort while suppressing the appearance of an unintended game result.

The fluctuation pattern when a small hit is won is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the "normal game state", a special effect provided specially may be performed, or the "small hit" may be performed. In the "frequent probability fluctuation state", when a small hit is won in the second special symbol by lottery, a long fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern selected in the "special reach" effect mode) may be performed.

Returning to FIG. 66, the description will be continued. The random number counter C4 per normal figure is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 99", reaches the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then returns to "0". Further, when the random number counter C4 per normal figure makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), and is used for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88). It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 87).

The value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88 in the fourth embodiment)), and it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67. At the timing, it is stored in any of the normal map holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i in the order of being stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h, and becomes the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i. On the other hand, a hit judgment is made.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table 202i (see FIG. 76 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each game state (for example, 50 / in the low probability state). 100, 99/100, etc. in a high probability state), and the value of the counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i of the RAM 203 is the hit set by the random number table 202i per normal figure. If it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a hit. Then, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set (for example, 30 seconds when the winning assist function is not activated, and the winning assist function is activated) by referring to the normal figure fluctuation table 202j (see FIG. 76 (b)) according to the game state. The time is 0.5 seconds, etc.), and after the variable display time elapses on the normal symbol display device 83, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (ordinary symbol). After that, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b is set by referring to the ordinary electric service opening table 202k (see FIG. 76 (c)) according to the game state (for example, 0.1 seconds when the winning assist function is not activated). (1 time, 5 seconds x 3 times when the winning assistance function is activated, etc.), the normal electric service 71b is opened during the opening time, and during that time, the ball can be won in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. To.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal figure counter C4 stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i does not match the value of the hit random number set by the random number table 202i per normal figure, it is determined to be lost. To. Then, the variable display time is set with reference to the normal figure fluctuation table 202j according to the game state, and after the variable display time elapses in the normal symbol display device 83, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). It is lit and displayed.

Here, the details of the random number table 202i per figure will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (a). FIG. 76A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202i per normal figure stored in the ROM 202.

As described above, in the random number table 202i per drawing, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is based on the "normal gaming state", the "latent probability fluctuation state", or the common large winning opening 75 based on the execution of the small hit game. A low-probability state of a normal symbol that is a "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" for which the "time saving function" has ended (a period that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state" (including during a jackpot of a special symbol)) The "normal symbol low probability state" used in the case and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 are the "probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state" in which the probability that the normal symbol will be hit is higher than the "normal symbol low probability state". It can be divided into two types, one for the "normal symbol high probability state" used in the case of the "time reduction state" or the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the common large winning opening 75 is not yet operated. Then, the number of hit random numbers included in each of the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that hit the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state" different, the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state" can be used. , The probability of winning is changed.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the number of values of the random number counter C4 per normal figure, which is a hit in the case of the "normal symbol low probability state", is 50, and the value " "50 to 99" is defined (set) in the random number table 202i per normal figure. That is, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal symbol low probability state" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "super probability fluctuation state") is set to be 50/100 = 1/2.

On the other hand, the number of values of the random number counter C4 per normal figure, which is a hit in the "normal symbol high probability state", is 99, and the values "1 to 99" are specified (set) in the random number table 202i per normal figure. Has been done. That is, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal symbol high probability state" (that is, the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state") is set to be 99/100.

As a result, by changing the winning / failing probability of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in whether or not the normal electric service 71b is easily opened (immersed). As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 71b is likely to be opened (immersed), so that the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a can win a prize, or the normal electric service 71b By making it difficult for the ball to win the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a due to the situation where it is difficult to open (immerse), it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

In particular, among the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" in which right-handed games are encouraged, the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" (common large winning opening 75) Including the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" that has not yet been activated. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" may be described as a "normal symbol low probability state"). It is configured so that the normal symbol high probability state is reached, the normal electric service 71b can be easily opened, and the ball launched by the right-handed game can easily win a prize in the right special figure 1 starting port 71a. In other words, a ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state" is configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74. There is. On the other hand, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", after the big hit ends, the end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied early, so that the "normal symbol low probability state" is reached, and the normal electric service 71b is difficult to open, so right-handed. The ball launched by the game is configured to roll completely on the ordinary electric service 71b from the left end to the right end and flow down to the start port 74 side of the special figure 2. In other words, it is difficult for a ball hit right in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74 from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state", and the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a It is structured so that it is easy to win a prize.

In addition, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the common big winning opening 75 is in the "normal symbol high probability state" until it is activated once, and the small hit game or the big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Until the game appears once, the normal electric service 71b is easy to open (the variable display time of the normal symbol is short, the winning probability of the variable display of the normal symbol is high, and the opening time of the normal electric service 71b is long). The ball launched in the right-handed game is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. Here, since the ball launched in the right-handed game during the big hit game before entering the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is configured so that the special figure 2 starting port 74 can also win the prize. At the end of the jackpot game, it is highly probable that the maximum number of reserved balls (that is, 4) is accumulated in the second special symbol. In this case, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the dynamic display of the second special symbol is encouraged, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set to non-encouragement. The dynamic display of the non-encouragement 1st special symbol that won a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a during the "normal symbol high probability state" is a small hit game in the dynamic display of the encouraged 2nd special symbol. Or it can be extinguished by a jackpot game. Further, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the small hit game is configured to frequently occur in the dynamic display of the encouraged second special symbol. Therefore, the dynamic display of the first special symbol acquired during the "normal symbol high probability state" in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is changed to the small in the dynamic display of the second special symbol held during the jackpot game. It is possible to provide the player with a game that does not cause a sense of incongruity by smoothly shifting the game state while suppressing the appearance of an unintended game result by immediately extinguishing the game by a hit game or a big hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76 (b), the details of the normal figure variation table 202j for determining the variable display time of the ordinary symbol will be described. FIG. 76 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the normal figure variation table 202j stored in the ROM 202.

The ordinary symbol variation table 202j is divided into two types, one for the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the other for the "ordinary symbol high probability state", like the random number table 202i per ordinary symbol. Then, for "normal symbol low probability state" (that is, for "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state" and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") and for "normal symbol high probability state" (that is, "probability"). The variable display time of the normal symbol set in the "variable state" and the "time shortened state") is set differently. In this way, by making the variable display time of the normal symbol different between the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state", the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" can be obtained. The time for deriving the winning / failing result of a normal symbol is changed.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the “normal symbol low probability state” is set to “30 seconds”. It is specified in the fluctuation table 202j. That is, in the "normal symbol low probability state", the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stop symbol is set to be "30 seconds" without exception.

On the other hand, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the case of the "normal symbol high probability state" is defined in the normal symbol fluctuation table 202j so as to be "0.5 seconds". That is, in the "normal symbol high probability state", the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stop symbol is set to be "0.5 seconds" without exception.

As a result, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball rolling on the normal electric service 71b is in a situation where the variable display result can be easily derived during the rolling. Can be caused. As a result, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage is executed, the upper surface of the normal electric service 71b is rolled from the left end to the right end (that is, about). (3 seconds), the variable display result is derived, and the ordinary electric service 71b is opened (immersed) based on the derived result, or while the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b is rolled from the left end to the right end. , The situation in which the ball rolls completely on the upper surface of the normal electric service 71b from the left end to the right end without deriving the variable display result is different depending on the game state, so that different game characteristics can be produced for each game state. ..

In particular, among the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" in which right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", the "normal symbol high probability" "State", while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 71b, the normal electric service 71b is in an open (immersive) state, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is on the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. It is structured so that you can win a prize. In other words, a ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state" is configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74. There is. On the other hand, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the "normal symbol low probability state" is set (early), and the normal electric service 71b is closed (protruded) while the sphere is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 71b. It is easy to maintain the state, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is configured to roll completely on the ordinary electric service 71b from the left end to the right end and flow down to the special figure 2 starting port 74 side. In other words, it is difficult for a ball hit right in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" to win a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state", and the special figure 2 starting port 74 It is structured so that it is easy to win a prize.

Next, the ordinary electric service opening table 202k will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (c). FIG. 76 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the ordinary electric service opening table 202k stored in the ROM 202. The ordinary electric service opening table 202k is referred to at the time of hitting the ordinary symbol, and the opening (immersion) time and the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric service 71b are defined based on the gaming state at the timing when the ordinary symbol hit occurs.

The ordinary electric service opening table 202k is divided into groups based on the game state in which ordinary symbols are drawn. Specifically, it is for "normal symbol low probability state" referred to in "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", and "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction". The opening mode (number of times and time) of the ordinary electric service 71b is changed for the "ordinary symbol high probability state" referred to in "state".

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the "normal symbol low probability state", that is, the "normal game state", the "latent probability fluctuation state", or the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" The number of times the ordinary electric service 71b is opened is "1 time", and the opening time is defined by the ordinary electric service opening table 202k so that the opening time is "0.1 seconds" when the normal symbol is won. ing. That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal symbol low probability state", the normal electric service 71b is set to be released for a total of "0.1 seconds".

On the other hand, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric service 71b set when the ordinary symbol is won in the "ordinary symbol high probability state", that is, the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" is "3 times". The opening time is specified by the ordinary electric service opening table 202k so as to be "5 seconds". That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal power high probability state", the normal power 71b is configured to be released for a total of "15 seconds".

The closing time (so-called interval time) between the opening of 1 of the ordinary electric service 71b and the next opening is set to be "0.5 seconds". Therefore, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal symbol high probability state", the opening and closing of the normal electric service 71b is intermittently repeated for a total of "16.5 seconds".

As a result, by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric service 71b according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the ordinary electric service 71b is open (immersed). As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 71b is open (immersed) for a long period of time, so that it is easy to win a prize on the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a side, or the normal electric service 71b. By making it different depending on the game state whether the ball is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 74 due to the short open (immersive) situation, it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

In particular, among the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" in which right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", the "normal symbol high probability" It is configured so that the opening period of the normal electric service 71b becomes longer, and the ball launched by the right-handed game can easily win a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. In other words, a ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state" is configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74. There is. On the other hand, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", it becomes the "normal symbol low probability state" (early), the opening period of the normal electric service 71b is shortened, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is on the right side special figure 1. It is configured so that it can flow down to the start port 74 side of the special figure 2 without winning a prize in the start port 71a. In other words, it is difficult for a ball hit right in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" to win a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state", and the special figure 2 starting port 74 It is structured so that it is easy to win a prize.

In this way, by providing five gaming states in which the high-probability state or low-probability state of the special symbol, the high-probability state or low-probability state of the normal symbol, and the left-handed game or the right-handed game are combined, respectively. It is possible to change the game playability to the game state, provide a game with abundant variations, and improve the interest of the game.

The hit probability of the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the variable display time of the variable display are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, any ratio may be used as long as the probability that the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is easier to win the normal symbol than the "normal game state". For example, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in the "normal game state". May be set to about 1/100 to make it difficult to hit, or the hit probability of a normal symbol in the "probability fluctuation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2. Further, any time may be used as long as the variable display time is shorter in the "probability fluctuation state" than in the "normal game state". For example, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the "normal game state" is less than "30 seconds". It may be a short time (for example, "1 second", "5 seconds", etc.).

Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric service 71b are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b may be any opening time as long as the "probability fluctuation state" is more advantageous to the player than the "normal gaming state". For example, "normal" The opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b in the "gaming state" may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, "3 times"). ) May be set. Further, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b in the "probability fluctuation state" may be a long time of "5 seconds" or more (for example, "10 seconds"), or a short time of less than "5 seconds" (for example, "1"). Seconds ") may be used. Further, the number of times the ordinary electric service 71b is opened in the "probability fluctuation state" may be a large number of times "3 times" or more (for example, "10 times"), or a small number of times less than "3 times" (for example, "1"). It may be "times").

Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 66, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and inputs / outputs. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as an output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I / O") are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 87) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 85) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, The NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 108) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball counter 203a, a second reserved ball counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a first reserved ball execution area 203f, and a second reserved ball execution. Area 203g, Fuzu holding ball storage area 203h, Fuzu holding ball execution area 203i, Probability variation flag 203j, Limit counter 203k, Time saving flag 203m, Special figure 1 time saving counter 203n, Special figure 2 time saving counter 203o, Total time saving counter 203p, It has at least a special electric 2 hour reduction counter 203q.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Special figure based on the entry of the ball into the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a or the special figure 2 starting port 74 may be referred to as "starting prize"). The maximum number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the symbol display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) is set to 4. It is a counter that counts up to times.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 85). Then, each time the starting prize for the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is detected and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol increases, the maximum value " 1 is added up to "4" (see S303 in FIG. 89). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S5102 in FIG. 92).

Like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is a special figure 2 starting port detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Based on the start winning prize for 74, the dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) up to 4 times.

Similar to the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 85). Then, every time the start winning prize to the special figure 2 start port 74 is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. See S309 of 89). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S5402 in FIG. 95).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the reserved number of balls of the second special symbol) as the first reserved ball number command. The number of balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 as the second reserved number of balls command (see S306 or S312 in FIG. 89). The first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is executed from the main control device 110 each time the start winning is detected and the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b is incremented by 1. It is a command transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and includes data related to the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a or data related to the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a hold ball of a dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the first hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command. You can get the value of each number itself. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol is held without accessing the main control device 110. Further, each time a start winning prize is detected, the voice lamp control device 113 manages by transmitting a first reserved ball number command or a second reserved ball number command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. When the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) of each special symbol deviates from the actual number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is, the deviation can be corrected by the hold ball number command received next.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits the first hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the first hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command is transmitted. In the ball number command, not only the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b added by 1, but also the trigger of the addition of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 66) is also included in accordance with the above-mentioned start winning.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main control device 110 is the first. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is set. The fluctuation effect based on each value is pre-read before the execution, and what happens to the variation effect (whether or not it becomes a big hit, what happens to the fluctuation time, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variation effect. Then, based on the judgment result by the pre-reading, the execution of various effects is decided, and the reserved symbol (execution symbol) displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 is changed. It is possible to determine the content of the production and the execution time (timing).

It should be noted that the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of each special symbol and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like are configured to be transmitted separately. May be good. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, the left side special figure 1 start port 64 or the right side special figure 1 start port 71a or special figure 2 start. A first reserved ball number command or a second reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of ball entry into the mouth 74, and commands similar to the variation pattern command and stop type command based on the entry (pre-variation pattern command and advance). A stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, regarding the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Further, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of each special symbol may be configured to be transmitted by one common reserved ball number command.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the start winning prize is detected in the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. It is a memory for storing each value of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88), the MPU 201 is detected from the counter buffer 203c. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In the first holding ball storage area 203d, four holdings are made so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the first special symbols can be stored (held) up to four times. It has areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 66).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the start winning prize is detected in the special figure 2 start port 74. This is a memory for storing each value of C3 and the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the sphere has won a prize (starting prize) in the special drawing 2 starting port 74 during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 88), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are set from the counter buffer 203c. Is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In the second holding ball storage area 203e, four holdings are made so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the second special symbols can be stored (held) up to four times. It has an area (second reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 66).

As described above, the first reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot lottery for the first special symbol that has started or is being executed, and dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a memory for storing data (each value of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of variation effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol (that is, the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol and the state other than the big hit game or the small hit game), the first special symbol Each stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d described above in order to execute processing such as a jackpot lottery of the above, dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and setting of variation effect. Among the data corresponding to the start winnings (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), the data corresponding to the starting winning of one of the data is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the dynamic display (variation effect) relating to the first special symbol is executed regardless of the suspension of the dynamic display (variation effect) relating to the second special symbol. Has been done. The shift in the fourth embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

As described above, the second reserved ball execution area 203g includes a jackpot lottery for the second special symbol that has started or is being executed, and dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a memory for storing data (each value of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of variation effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol (that is, the end of the variation effect of the second special symbol and the state other than the big hit game or the small hit game), the second special symbol Each stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above in order to execute the jackpot lottery of the above, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variation effect. Among the data corresponding to the start winnings (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), the data corresponding to the starting winning of one of the data is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 203g. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the second special symbol is executed regardless of the hold of the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first special symbol. Has been done.

Here, with reference to FIG. 66 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the second reserved ball execution area 203g will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the second reserved ball execution area 203g are a big hit lottery or a small hit lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to set the dynamic display and the fluctuation effect of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, it is used for the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect. The jackpot random number counter C1 used to determine the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the effect mode of the variation effect, and the variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern. Used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d is the counters C1 to C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a (starting prize). , CS1 are stored respectively, and the second reserved ball storage area 203e is obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 74 (starting winning). Each value of C3 and CS1 is stored.

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas), the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are stored. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

Further, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved ball storage areas 1 to 4) like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Similar to the first holding ball storage area 203d, the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) have a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. Has been done.

In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, 203e3, and the variation type counter storage area 203d4, 203e4 are set to 1. Although they are collectively provided in each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, data (counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a (starting prize). , CS1 values) are stored up to 4 times. In that case, the area number (1st to 1st) among the four reserved areas (1st reserved 1st to 4th areas) is vacant. Data is stored in order from the smallest area of 4). That is, the smaller the area number, the older the data corresponding to the start winning to the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is stored, and the time is stored in the first reserved first area. The data corresponding to the start winning prize to the oldest left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or right side special figure 1 starting port 71a will be stored.

The first reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the first reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 203f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol, the first one is irrespective of the presence or absence of data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the second reserved ball execution area 203g. When data is stored in the first hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203d, the data stored in the first hold first area is transferred to each area 203f1 to the first hold ball execution area 203f. Shift to 203f4 respectively.

Then, the data shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 92), and the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are performed based on the reference data and the game state. , Determine the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 is based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command. A variable effect of the first special symbol is performed.

The details of data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol has come, it determines whether or not the data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter of the first reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 in the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 in the first hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 is shifted, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 in the first hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the first reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the first reserved ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Shift processing is performed to pack the (held) data into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the fourth embodiment, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the data is shifted only in the first reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variation effect of the first special symbol is made is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d (first to fourth). ) Suppose that the data is stored. In this state, when the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to another area (second to fourth). Each of the data of is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data in the first reserved fourth area. To the first hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a at the time when the start determination of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is made is "2", the MPU 201 can only use the data of the first reserved second area. , 1st Hold Shifts to the 1st area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Next, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 74 (starting winning) is for a maximum of four times. In that case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (2nd holding 1st to 4th areas). Be remembered. That is, the smaller the area number, the older the data corresponding to the start winning to the special figure 2 starting port 74 is stored, and the second reserved first area is the oldest special figure 2 starting port in terms of time. The data corresponding to the start winning prize for 74 will be stored.

Further, the second reserved ball execution area 203g is composed of only one area. Similar to the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the second reserved ball execution area 203g includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203g1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 203g2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203g3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203g4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol, the second is irrespective of the presence or absence of data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d and the first reserved ball execution area 203f. When data is stored in the second reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203e, the data stored in the second reserved first area is transferred to each area 203g1 of the second reserved ball execution area 203g. Shift to 203g4 respectively.

Then, the data shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 203 g is referred to in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 95), and the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are performed based on the reference data and the game state. , Determine the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 is based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command. The second special symbol variation effect is performed.

The details of data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol has come, it determines whether or not the data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, if the data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter of the second reserved ball execution area 203g. Shift to area 203g1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203g2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 in the second hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203g3 is shifted, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 in the second hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203g4.

Then, when the data shift to the second reserved ball execution area 203 g is completed, the second reserved ball first area becomes vacant, so that the data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. Shift processing is performed to pack the (held) data into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the fourth embodiment, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data is shifted only in the second reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the variation effect of the second special symbol is made is "4", and the entire area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e (first to fourth). ) Suppose that the data is stored. In this state, when the data in the second reserved first area is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 203 g and the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to another area (second to fourth). Each of the data of is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data in the second reserved fourth area. To the second hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b at the time when the start determination of the variation effect of the second special symbol is made is "2", the MPU 201 uses only the data of the second reserved second area. , The second hold shifts to the first area, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the second hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

In this way, the data related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and the data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed are stored separately, and the other special symbol is stored based on each data. By performing the dynamic display regardless of whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. In the dynamic display of any of the special symbols, the dynamic display should not be executed during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game, that is, while the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 is open. It is configured.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. As described above, in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, when a big hit is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot opening referred to for the opening control of the common winning opening 75 is opened. The table 202f is stored.

Here, the jackpot opening table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot opening table 202f stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot opening table 202f is referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the jackpot type in which the jackpot of each special symbol is generated, the opening mode of the common jackpot 75 (number of times, maximum opening time, Maximum number of winnings) is stipulated.

The jackpot opening table 202f of the fourth embodiment is classified based on the jackpot type in which the jackpot is won. Specifically, for "probability change A" which is referred to when the jackpot type "probability change A" is won, for "probability change B" which is referred to when the jackpot type "probability change B" is won, and for the jackpot type "probability change B". The opening mode of the common prize opening 75 has changed between the "time saving A" that is referred to when winning the "time saving A" and the "time saving B" that is referred to when the jackpot type "time saving B" is won. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 77, the number of times the common prize opening 75 is opened when the jackpot type “probability change A” is won is “10 times”, and the maximum opening of 1 of the common prize opening 75 is set. The time is "30 seconds", the maximum number of prizes is "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls to the common large prize opening 75 is "15". Has been done.

Further, in the transition game state after the end of the jackpot by the jackpot type "probability change A", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the high probability state, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is also in the high probability state, and the normal electric service 71b The "time saving function" that extends the opening time is once granted, but the predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied immediately after the big hit ends, and the common big winning opening is opened based on the small hit game winning in the second special symbol. It shifts to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the ball can enter 75. In the small hit game in the second special symbol, a simpler and shorter effect (for example, only the display of "+100 shots") is executed than in the big hit game in the second special symbol.

Although the details will be described later, the "time saving function" given based on the jackpot type "probability variation A" is the second special symbol until the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot. From the end of the jackpot until the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times, or until the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total after the end of the jackpot, or , Until the common grand prize opening 75 based on the small hit game winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is operated (opened) once, it continues until any one of the conditions is satisfied, and any one of The "time saving function" is configured to end when the condition is satisfied.

Next, the number of times the common prize opening 75 is opened when the jackpot type "probability change B" is won is "4 times", and the maximum opening time for opening 1 of the common prize opening 75 is "30 seconds". The maximum number of winning balls is "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls to the common large winning opening 75 is stipulated to be "15".

Further, in the transition game state after the end of the jackpot by the jackpot type "probability change B", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the high probability state, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is also in the high probability state. Shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the winning assistance function to the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is activated until is established.

The "time saving function" given based on the jackpot type "probability variation B" is the same as the jackpot type "probability variation A" until the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot. 2 From the end of the jackpot until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total after the end of the jackpot. Until, or until the common grand prize opening 75 based on the small hit game winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is operated (opened) once, until any one of the conditions is satisfied, and eventually The "time saving function" is configured to end when the condition of 1 is satisfied.

Next, the number of times the common prize opening 75 is opened is "10 times" when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, and the maximum opening time for opening 1 of the common prize opening 75 is "30 seconds". The maximum number of winning balls is "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls to the common large winning opening 75 is stipulated to be "15". That is, in the jackpot type "time saving A", as the game value given in the jackpot, a game value equivalent to the jackpot game value that can be given in the jackpot type "probability variation A" can be given.

Further, in the transition game state after the end of the jackpot by the jackpot type "time reduction A", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, while the hit probability of the normal symbol is a high probability state, and one of the time reduction end conditions Shifts to the "time reduction state" in which the winning assist function for the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is activated until is established.

The "time saving function" given based on the jackpot type "time saving A" is the same as the jackpot type "probability variation A", until the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends. From the end of the jackpot until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total after the end of the jackpot. Until, or until the common grand prize opening 75 based on the small hit game winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is operated (opened) once, it continues until any one of the conditions is satisfied. The "time saving function" is configured to end when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

Next, the number of times the common prize opening 75 is opened when the jackpot type "time saving B" is won is "4 times", and the maximum opening time for opening 1 of the common prize opening 75 is "30 seconds". The maximum number of winning balls is "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls to the common large winning opening 75 is stipulated to be "15". That is, in the jackpot type "time saving B", as the game value given in the jackpot, a game value equivalent to the jackpot game value that can be given in the jackpot type "probability variation B" can be given.

Further, in the transition game state after the end of the jackpot by the jackpot type "time reduction B", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, while the jackpot probability of the normal symbol is high probability, as in the jackpot type "time reduction A". The state shifts to the "time reduction state" in which the winning assist function for the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is activated until any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied.

The "time saving function" given based on the jackpot type "time saving B" is the same as the jackpot type "probability variation A", until the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends. From the end of the jackpot until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total after the end of the jackpot. Until, or until the common grand prize opening 75 based on the small hit game winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is operated (opened) once, it continues until any one of the conditions is satisfied. The "time saving function" is configured to end when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

In this way, the number of prize balls that can be paid out differs depending on the winning jackpot type, so that the game value directly given according to the winning jackpot type can be different. In addition, since the gaming state that shifts after the jackpot game changes for each winning jackpot type, it is possible to make a difference in the game playability after the jackpot is completed based on the winning jackpot type. In particular, by making the end condition of the "time saving function" different for each game state, it is possible to make a difference in the game value directly given according to the winning jackpot type in this case as well. As a result, in the lottery game of the special symbol, it is possible to create a playability of which jackpot type is won or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

The opening mode of the common winning opening 75 based on the jackpot type (number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winnings, number of winning balls, and transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Is. Specifically, the number of times of opening may be the same for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum number of winnings may be changed. You can. Further, it is not necessary to shift to a different gaming state for each jackpot type, and it may be configured to shift to a common gaming state for a plurality of jackpot types.

Further, during the big hit game, the game state is once equivalent to the "normal game state", that is, the hit probability of the normal symbol is low, the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, and the normal symbol is normal. The opening time of the electric service 71b is also configured to transition to a short state. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the game value to be given (for example, the long opening of the ordinary electric service 71b) other than the opening of the common winning opening 75, and each game state. It is possible to calculate the payout rate separately from the jackpot. As a result, it becomes easy to calculate the ball output rate at the time of designing the game specification, and the man-hours for designing the game specification can be reduced.

Further, the common grand prize opening 75 may be opened and closed a plurality of times in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, for example, in one round, after the opening of the common grand prize opening 75 is started, it is temporarily closed in a predetermined number of seconds (for example, "5 seconds") less than the maximum opening time, and the predetermined closing time. After (for example, "1 second"), the common grand prize opening 75 may be opened again and closed again when the maximum opening time elapses or the maximum number of winnings is won. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games in the jackpot game and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a large winning opening other than the common large winning opening 75 may be provided, and the common large winning opening 75 and the other large winning openings may be opened at one jackpot. Specifically, for example, in one jackpot, first, the common grand prize opening 75 is opened at the start of one round, and the common grand prize opening 75 is closed at the end of the round (so-called interval). , Immediately after the closing, the other big prize openings are opened with the start of the next round, and the other big prize openings are closed at the end of the round, and thereafter, the common big prize openings 75 and others are used for each round. It is configured to open and close the big winning opening alternately (quickly). With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the state in which the common big prize opening 75 and the like are closed (that is, the interval time) during the big hit game, and it is possible to realize a quick game value.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. As described above, in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, when a small hit is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 is opened. A small hit opening table 202g referred to for control is stored.

Here, the small hit opening table 202 g will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the small hit opening table 202g stored in the ROM 202. The small hit open table 202g is referred to when the small hit of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won, and based on the special symbol type in which the small hit of each special symbol is generated, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common The opening mode (number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winnings) of the large winning opening 75 is defined.

The small hit opening table 202 g of the fourth embodiment is classified based on the type of the special symbol won in the small hit. Specifically, for "special figure 1 small hit" referred to when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. The opening mode of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 is set for the reference "special figure 2 small hit".

As shown in FIG. 78, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is set as the winning opening to be opened. Then, in the small hit game of the first special symbol, the number of times of opening the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is "1 time", and the maximum opening time of opening 1 of the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 is "1". It is "0.1 seconds", the maximum number of prizes is "10", and the number of prizes paid out based on the prize of the ball to the special figure 1 small prize opening 65 is "10". It is stipulated. Since the number of times the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is opened based on the small hit of the first special symbol is one, the interval time is not set.

As described above, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the ball to win by the obstacle member 65c (see FIG. 60) and the nail even when it is opened, and the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 is arranged. Even if the ball can flow into the mouth 65 (that is, the protruding state of the infestation plate 65a in FIG. 1), the inflowable state is "0.1 seconds", which is an extremely short time. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured so that the game value is not substantially given to the player even when the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. .. In the small hit game of the first special symbol, unlike the winning of the big hit game, the game state is not changed based on the winning of the small hit game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, a common large winning opening 75 that can be opened based on the winning of the big hit game is opened as a winning opening. Is set. That is, the common big prize opening 75 is configured to be shared by the big hit of the first special symbol and the big hit and the small hit of the second special symbol. Then, in the small hit game of the second special symbol, the number of times the common prize opening 75 is opened is "3 times", and the maximum opening time in opening 1 of the common prize opening 75 is "3.0 seconds". The maximum number of winning balls is "10", and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of balls to the common large winning opening 75 is stipulated to be "15". The interval time, which is the closing time of the common grand prize opening 75 based on the small hit of the second special symbol, is set to "0.5 seconds".

With this configuration, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the small hit game of the second special symbol frequently occurs, a ball can be won in the special figure 2 starting port 74, and the second special symbol is used. 2 To realize the playability of executing a lottery game to make the small hit game of the second special symbol appear frequently, and to win a lot of balls while opening the common large winning opening 75 based on the winning of the small hit game. Can be done. Therefore, if the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" continues for a long time, more balls can be won in the common large winning opening 75, and therefore any of the end conditions of the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". It is possible to create a playability of how to continue the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" without winning a big hit, and to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. As described above, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores a time saving end condition table 202h that is referred to for setting the ending condition of the "time saving function" that can be given for each gaming state.

Here, the time saving end condition table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the time saving end condition table 202h stored in the ROM 202. The time saving end condition table 202h is referred to at the end of the jackpot game won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (at the time of transition to the game state), and the "time saving function" given after the jackpot game ends. The end condition of is specified for each game state.

The time saving end condition table 202h of the fourth embodiment is divided according to the gaming state. Specifically, for the "normal game state" referred to at the time of transition to the "normal game state", for the "latent probability fluctuation state" referred to at the time of transition to the "latent probability fluctuation state", and at the time of transition to the "time reduction state". For the "time reduction state" referred to, for the "probability fluctuation state" referred to at the time of transition to the "probability fluctuation state", and for the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" referred to at the time of transition to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" The end condition of the "time saving function" is set for the purpose.

The "time saving function" of the fourth embodiment is obtained by deriving the lottery result of the jackpot in any of the special symbols, or by satisfying any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions shown below. It is configured to exit. As specific time-saving end conditions, "special figure 1 fluctuation number" indicating the number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol after the end of the jackpot and the number of executions of the dynamic display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot "Special figure 2 number of fluctuations" indicating the total number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the jackpot ends, and "Special figure 1 and special figure 2 total number of fluctuations" and the jackpot end. The "special figure 1 small winning opening operation count" indicating the number of operations (opening) of the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 based on the winning of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol later, and after the big hit is completed The "number of times the common large winning opening 75 is operated (opened) based on the winning of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol" is defined as "the number of times the common large winning opening 75 is operated by the special figure 2 small hit". ..

In the fourth embodiment, the "time saving function" is not terminated based on the operation of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 based on the winning of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. However, the "time saving function" is configured to end based on the number of operations (for example, 10 times) of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 based on the winning of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. May be good.

First, as shown in FIG. 79, in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state", the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state" are not provided with the "time saving function" in the first place. None of the termination conditions for the "time saving function" have been set. Therefore, in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state", the "time saving function" is configured so as not to be given or terminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79, in the "time shortened state", the "special figure 1 fluctuation number" is set to 100 times, the "special figure 2 fluctuation number" is set to "100 times", and the "special figure 1 fluctuation number" is set. -The "total number of fluctuations in special figure 2" is set to "100 times", and the "number of common large winning opening operations due to special figure 2 small hits" is set to "1 time". In the "time reduction state", "the number of times the special figure 1 small winning opening is operated" and "the number of times the special drawing 2 small winning opening is operated" are not set as the end conditions of the "time saving function".

Therefore, in the "time reduction state", after the jackpot ends, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times independently, or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times independently. Common grand prize opening 75 based on whether the dynamic display of 1 special symbol and the dynamic display of the 2nd special symbol are executed 100 times in total, or the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the 2nd special symbol. Is activated (opened) once, or the "time saving function" is terminated when any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, when the "time saving function" is completed in the "time saving state", the hit probability of the normal symbol changes from the high probability state to the low probability state, and is configured to shift to the "normal gaming state".

In the "time reduction state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is encouraged, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set to non-encouragement, and as described above. The right side special figure 1 unit 71, the first flow path member 72, and the second flow path member 73 are configured so that it is difficult for a ball to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74. That is, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed, and the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is also unlikely to occur. Therefore, the "time saving function" set in the "time saving state" is configured so as to be easily terminated by satisfying the time saving ending condition in the "special figure 1 fluctuation number". In other words, in the "time reduction state", the time saving end conditions of "special figure 2 fluctuation number", "special figure 1 / special figure 2 total fluctuation number" and "special figure 2 small hit common large winning opening operation number" are Although each is set, the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied or is configured to be difficult to be satisfied, and the "special figure 1 fluctuation number" can be satisfied before the time saving end condition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79, in the "probability fluctuation state", the "special figure 1 fluctuation count" is set to 100 times and the "special figure 2 fluctuation count" is "100 times" as in the "time reduction state". "Special figure 1 and special figure 2 total number of fluctuations" is set to "100 times", and "special figure 2 small hit common large winning opening operation number" is set to "1 time" ing. In the "time reduction state", "the number of times the special figure 1 small winning opening is operated" and "the number of times the special drawing 2 small winning opening is operated" are not set as the end conditions of the "time saving function".

Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", as in the "time reduction state", after the jackpot ends, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times independently, or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed independently. Whether it is executed 100 times, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total, or the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Based on this, the common grand prize opening 75 is configured to be operated (opened) once, or the "time saving function" is terminated when any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, when the "time saving function" is completed in the "probability fluctuation state", the hit probability of the normal symbol changes from the high probability state to the low probability state, while the jackpot probability of the special symbol continues in the high probability state. , It is configured to shift to the "latent probability fluctuation state".

In the "probability fluctuation state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is encouraged and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set to non-encouragement, as in the "time reduction state". In addition, as described above, the right side special figure 1 unit 71, the first flow path member 72, and the second flow path member 73 are configured so that the ball is unlikely to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74. That is, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed, and the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is also unlikely to occur. Therefore, the "time saving function" set in the "probability fluctuation state" is configured to be easily terminated by satisfying the time saving ending condition in the "special figure 1 number of fluctuations". In other words, in the "probability fluctuation state", as in the "time reduction state", "special figure 2 fluctuation number", "special figure 1 / special figure 2 total fluctuation number" and "special figure 2 small hit common big prize opening" Although the time saving end condition of "the number of operations" is set respectively, the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied or is configured to be difficult to be satisfied, and the "special figure 1 fluctuation number" can be satisfied before the time saving end condition. It is configured in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the "special figure 1 fluctuation number" is set to 100 times, the "special figure 2 fluctuation number" is set to "100 times", and " The "total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2" is set to "100 times", and the "number of common large winning opening operations by special figure 2 small hit" is set to "1 time". In the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the "special figure 1 small winning opening operation number" is not set as the end condition of the "time saving function".

Therefore, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", as in the "time reduction state", after the big hit ends, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times independently, or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed. Is executed 100 times independently, or the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total, or a small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. The "time saving function" is configured to end when the common grand prize opening 75 based on the winning of is activated (opened) once or when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

Here, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the dynamic display of the second special symbol ends earlier than the dynamic display of the first special symbol (dynamic display of the second special symbol is encouraged). ), And the dynamic display of the second special symbol held based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 74 during the jackpot game stops before the dynamic display of the first special symbol (). Determine. In addition, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, winning of the small hit game frequently occurs (that is, the small hit game is won at 98%), so that the dynamic display of the second symbol executed after the end of the big hit is small. A winning game is likely to occur, and the common large winning opening 75 can be opened based on the small hit winning of the second special symbol. For this reason, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is encouraged, "special figure 1 fluctuation number", "special figure 2 fluctuation number" or "special figure 1 / special figure 2 total" The time-saving end condition of "the number of times of operation of the common big prize opening by the special figure 2 small hit" is satisfied earlier than the time-saving end condition of "the number of fluctuations", and the common big winning opening 75 based on the small hit game of the second special symbol It is configured so that the "time saving function" is terminated by opening. Then, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the high probability state, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is also in the high probability state at the beginning, but "common large by special figure 2 small hit". Based on the establishment of the time saving end condition of "the number of times the winning opening is operated", the winning probability of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state with the end of the "time saving function". As a result, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the "time saving function" is completed, and the normal electric service 71b is in the non-open extension state, so that the ball launched in the right-handed game is on the right side. It flows down to the right flow path on the right side of the front view of 1 unit 71, and is in a state where it can flow into the special drawing 2 starting port 74.

With this configuration, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the small hit game of the second special symbol frequently occurs, the "time saving function" can be terminated early and the ball can be won in the special figure 2 starting port 74. The second lottery game with the second special symbol is executed to make the small hit game of the second special symbol appear frequently, and many balls are won while the common big winning opening 75 based on the winning of the small hit game is opened. It is possible to realize the playability of letting the player do it. Therefore, if the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" continues for a long time, more balls can be won in the common large winning opening 75, and therefore any of the end conditions of the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". It is possible to create a playability of how to continue the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" without winning a big hit, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, regardless of which jackpot type is won, the time saving end conditions are "special figure 1 fluctuation number", "special figure 2 fluctuation number", and "special figure 1 / special figure 2". The total number of fluctuations and the number of times the common large winning opening is operated by a special figure 2 small hit are set 100 times or once (see S6204 to S6208 in FIG. 102). With this configuration, the setting process can be standardized for the time saving end condition for each jackpot type, and the program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h is a memory for storing the normal figure per counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in connection with the detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67. When the MPU 201 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88), it acquires the value of the counter C4 per normal figure from the counter buffer 203c, and holds the sphere with a normal symbol. It is stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h indicated by the value of the normal figure holding ball number counter (not shown) for counting the number. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas (normal figure) so that data (value of counter C4 per normal figure) corresponding to one holding ball of a normal symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. It has a hold first to fourth area) (see FIG. 66).

The normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is a memory for storing data (value of random number counter C4 per normal figure) to be referred to in the process of winning lottery or variable display of a normal symbol being executed or starting execution. Is.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball is executed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery of the normal symbol and setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. One of the data (value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure) stored in the storage area 203h is shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i. The shift in the fourth embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 66 again, the details of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i will be described. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform processing such as a winning lottery for normal symbols and setting of variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. To.

As described above, the random number counter C4 per normal symbol used for the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol is used for setting the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol and the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 83. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h stores the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the through gate 67.

The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h is composed of four holding areas (the normal figure holding first to fourth areas). Each of the four holding areas (the first to fourth areas for holding the normal figure) is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure.

In this normal figure holding ball storage area 203h, data (value of random number counter C4 per normal figure) acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is stored up to four times. In that case, four times are stored. Data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area of the holding area (1st to 4th areas for holding the normal drawing). That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the passage of the sphere to the old through gate 67 in time is stored, and the first area on hold in the normal map stores the sphere to the oldest through gate 67 in time. The data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

On the other hand, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is composed of only one area. Similar to the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure. ..

When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the data stored in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203h of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203h is transferred to the normal figure hold ball execution area 203i. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is referred to in the normal figure variation processing (see S211 in FIG. 88), and based on the reference data and the game state, a winning lottery is performed and a variable display is performed. Determine the content of. In the ordinary symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main control device 110.

The details of data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the random number value of the random number counter storage area (not shown) of the normal figure hold first area of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203h. Is shifted to the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal figure in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i.

Then, when the shift of the data to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is completed, the normal figure holding ball first area becomes empty, so that it is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h. Shift processing is performed to pack the (held) data into the areas (first to third) where the area number is one smaller. In the fourth embodiment, in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h, the data is shifted only in the normal figure holding area (1st to 4th) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the normal drawing holding ball storage area 203h will be described. For example, the value of the normal figure reserved ball number counter (not shown) when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made is "4", and the entire area (1st to 1st) of the normal figure reserved ball storage area 203h It is assumed that the data is stored in the fourth). In this state, when the data in the first area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the execution area 203i for holding the normal figure and the first area for holding the normal figure becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to another area (second to fourth). Each of the data of is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the first area for holding the normal figure, the data in the third area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the second area for holding the normal figure, and the data in the fourth area for holding the normal figure is shifted. Is shifted to the third area where the data is reserved.

Further, for example, if the value of the normal figure hold ball counter (not shown) when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made is "2", the MPU 201 is the data of the normal figure hold second area. Only shifts to the first area on hold of the normal map, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the normal map holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. The probability variation flag 203j provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. The jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 67) referred to in the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is configured to be different depending on whether or not the probability variation flag 203j is turned on. Specifically, when the probability variation flag 203j is set to off in the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is referred to based on the probability setting value, while the probability variation flag 203j is set. When set to on, the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability states is referenced based on the probability set value.

This probability variation flag 203j is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and at the end of the jackpot, the jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type "probability variation A") that shifts the gaming state after the end of the jackpot to the high probability state of the special symbol Or, when "probability change B") is won, it is set to on (see S6202 in FIG. 102). On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot, if the jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B") that shifts the game state after the jackpot to the low probability state of the special symbol is won, it is off. Is set to (see S6203 in FIG. 102).

In the limit counter 203k, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or the initialization of the limit counter 203k (that is, 0 clear), the number of jackpots of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number of times (10 times in the fourth embodiment). It is a counter for counting whether or not. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, every time the number of jackpots of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (10 times in the fourth embodiment) after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, " It is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" and the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" are not selected, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit when the predetermined number of times is reached is always shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the special symbol It is equipped with a so-called "limiter function" that prohibits the transition to a high-probability state. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is configured to refer to the value of the limit counter 203k in order to count the predetermined number of times.

The limit counter 203k is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is subsequently incremented by 1 each time a jackpot of any special symbol occurs (see S5201 in FIG. 93).

On the other hand, the value of the limit counter 203k is won as a big hit or a small hit in the dynamic display of the other special symbol even if 1 is added when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol. , When the dynamic display of the other special symbol is stopped and displayed before the dynamic display of the other special symbol, the jackpot to which the value of the limit counter 203k is added disappears. Is configured to be subtracted by 1 from the value of the limit counter 203k (see S5305 or S5312 in FIG. 94 or S5505 or S5512 in FIG. 96). With this configuration, the limit number of times based on the jackpot that is not given to the player can be corrected, and only the jackpot that gives the player the game value can be counted as the limit number of times, so that a plurality of special symbols can be simultaneously counted. Even if it fluctuates, it is possible to accurately execute the game playability of the "limit function" to improve the interest of the game.

Then, when the value of the limit counter 203k is no longer smaller than "10", that is, when the value of the limit counter 203k is "10" or more, a predetermined number of jackpots are generated and predetermined. It is configured so that the value of the limit counter 203k is initialized (that is, cleared to 0) by determining that the limit number of times has been reached (see S6210 in FIG. 102).

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 confirms the value of the limit counter 203k when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, and if the value of the limit counter 203k is smaller than "10", the special symbol From the jackpot types including the jackpot types that can shift to the high probability state of, 1 jackpot type is selected based on the values of the jackpot type table 202b and the jackpot type counter C2. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203k is not smaller than "10", that is, if it is "10" or more, the jackpot type that does not include the jackpot type that can shift to the high probability state of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot type). From "Time saving A" or "Time saving B"), one jackpot type is selected based on the values of the jackpot type table 202b and the jackpot type counter C2. With this configuration, every time the number of big hits reaches the predetermined number of times, the gaming state after the end of the big hit can always be changed to the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an excessive jackpot "renso" due to the continuous high-probability state of the special symbol, and the ball output obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10. The rate can be leveled, and the game value given to the player can be configured so as not to become too high.

Each time the value of the limit counter 203k is updated (including 0 clear), a limit count command or a limit clear command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 also has a special symbol jackpot count and limit. It is configured so that the initialization of the number of times can be grasped.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured so as not to notify the player that the number of big hits has reached the limit number, and even before the number of big hits reaches the limit number, the limit is reached. It is configured so that a jackpot type (that is, a jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B") that can be selected when the number of times is reached can be selected. That is, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the limit number of jackpots has been reached. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured so as not to notify the player of the remaining limit number of jackpots. That is, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine the remaining number of jackpots until the limit number of jackpots is reached.

This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot reaches the limit number of times, the jackpot type (that is, "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state" cannot be forcibly generated (that is, "" While it is configured to win "Time saving A" or "Time saving B"), the jackpot type that generates "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state" until the number of jackpots reaches the limit number (That is, since it is configured to be able to win (that is, "probability change A" or "probability change B"), the remaining limit number of jackpots is the maximum immediately after reaching the limit number of jackpots. When the game is played in this state and the jackpot type that generates the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state" is won, the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state" While the number of winnings of the jackpot type that generates the above can be maximized (that is, 10 times), at least one or more at a timing other than immediately after reaching the jackpot limit, that is, after reaching the jackpot limit. After winning the jackpot, the remaining limit number of jackpots is not the maximum, and the number of winnings of the jackpot type that causes "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state" is less than immediately after reaching the jackpot limit number. turn into. Therefore, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 to play the game, the player who recognizes that the timing is other than immediately after reaching the jackpot limit is determined that the obtained game value is decreasing, and the pachinko machine is said to be reduced. There is a risk that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease due to avoiding the game in 10.

Therefore, the player is configured not to notify the player that the number of jackpots has reached the limit number, and the jackpot type that can be selected when the number of jackpots reaches the limit number (that is, the jackpot type) even before the number of jackpots reaches the limit number of times. It is configured so that "time saving A" or "time saving B") can be selected, and it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the limit number of jackpots has been reached. Further, the remaining number of jackpots is not notified to the player, and it is difficult for the player to determine the number of remaining jackpots until the limit number of jackpots is reached. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the limit number of jackpots has been reached, and the remaining limit number of jackpots is difficult for the player to determine, and the timing is other than immediately after reaching the limit number of jackpots. However, it is possible to prevent the game in the pachinko machine 10 from being shunned and to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when a big hit is won at the stage of reaching the maximum value of the limit number of times (that is, when the limit is reached), if it is before the limit is reached, the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". Even if the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type “probability variation A” corresponding to the above is extracted, the jackpot type “time saving A” can be generated instead of the jackpot type “probability variation A”.

Here, if a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the "time saving function" is not added in order to frequently generate the small hit of the second special symbol, and the special symbol is simply placed in a high probability state. In addition, when the normal symbol is set to the low probability state and the non-open extension state so that the small hit frequent occurrence state due to the second special symbol can occur, when the limit is reached, the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" is reached. Since the "time saving function" is not given in the situation where is derived, immediately shifts to the "normal game state" in which both the special symbol and the normal symbol are in the low probability state, instead of the "time reduction state" after the jackpot ends. It ends up.

Further, when the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" is derived when the limit is reached, the jackpot type "probability variation A" having the highest game value for the player is given before the limit is reached. Even though it was a value, it shifts to the "normal gaming state" which is the most disadvantageous for the player, so suddenly it shifts from the advantageous state for the player to the most disadvantageous state for the player. , The player loses the motivation to continue the game (awakening of the game), the game is stopped, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

Furthermore, if the player suddenly shifts to the "normal gaming state" in which the "time saving function" is not given when the limit is reached, the player will be clearly informed that the limit has been reached, and the player will be given a game when the limit is reached. There is a risk that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 will be reduced due to the motivation (trigger) to stop and the game being stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" corresponding to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the small hit of the second special symbol can occur frequently is won, It is possible to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol while giving the "time saving function" and configuring the "time saving function" to end immediately only when the small hit game in the second special symbol is won. It is possible to acquire the game value based on the small hit of the second special symbol. Then, even if the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won when the limit is reached, the "time saving function" (equivalent to) according to the jackpot type "time saving A" is given, and in this case, Since the small hit game by the second special symbol is unlikely to occur, the time saving end condition based on the small hit of the second special symbol is not satisfied (difficult), and the other time saving end condition (that is, the dynamic of the first special symbol) is not satisfied. The "time saving function" given by the establishment of the display (execution 100 times) is configured to end. With this configuration, even if the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" when the limit is reached is derived, the player can be given the "time saving function" after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game with a certain game value given to the player when the limit is reached. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be maintained in operation by maintaining the player's willingness to continue playing the game without giving the player a motive to stop the game, and providing the pachinko machine 10 that contributes to the hall management. Can be done. In addition, by configuring so that the player does not immediately shift to the "normal gaming state" when the limit is reached, it is difficult for the player to recognize the activation of the limit function (reaching the limit), and the player takes the opportunity to reach the limit. It is difficult to give a motive (trigger) to stop the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

The time saving flag 203m is a flag for determining whether or not there is a high probability state of the normal symbol and an open extension state of the normal electric service 71b, that is, a situation in which the time saving function is provided. Depending on whether or not the time saving flag 203m is on, the random number table 202i per normal symbol (see FIG. 76 (a)) referred to in the winning / failing lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be different, and the normal symbol is variably displayed. The normal electric service opening 202j (see FIG. 76 (b)) referred to when selecting the time is configured to be different, and further, the normal electric service opening referred to when selecting the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b is used. Table 202k (see FIG. 76 (c)) is configured differently.

Specifically, in the winning / failing lottery of ordinary symbols, when the time saving flag 203m is set to off, the random number table 202i per normal figure for the low probability state is referred to, while the time saving flag 203m is set to on. If so, the random number table 202i per map for high probability states is referenced. Further, when the time saving flag 203m is set to off in the selection of the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal figure fluctuation table 202j for the low probability state with a long variable display time is referred to, while the time saving flag 203m is set. When set to on, the normal map variation table 202j for high probability states with a short variable display time is referenced. Further, in the selection of the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b, when the time saving flag 203m is set to off, the ordinary electric service opening table 202k for the low probability state in which the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b is short is referred to. On the other hand, when the time saving flag 203m is set to ON, the ordinary electric service opening table 202k for a high probability state in which the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b is long is referred to.

This time saving flag 203m is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on for all jackpot types at the end of the jackpot. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, regardless of which jackpot type is won, the time saving flag 203m is once set to ON, and the "time saving function" is given (S6208 in FIG. 102). reference). On the other hand, the time saving flag 203m is the stage at which any one of the end conditions (time saving end condition) of the "time saving function" is satisfied, that is, the timing when the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203n described later becomes "0". FIG. 2 At the timing when the value of the time saving counter 203o becomes "0", the timing when the value of the total time saving counter 203p becomes "0", or the timing when the value of the special electric power 2 time saving counter 203q becomes "0". It is set to off (see S5704 or S5709 in FIG. 98 or S6405 in FIG. 105).

The special figure 1 time saving counter 203n is a counter for determining the end condition of 1 of the "time saving function", and counts whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times after the end of the big hit. It is a counter for discriminating the time saving end condition of "special figure 1 number of fluctuations". As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol reaches 100 times after the end of the jackpot game by all the jackpot types, the execution " End the "time saving function" (excluding the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the time saving ending condition by the operation of the common grand prize opening 75 is satisfied first and the "time saving function" ends), and in the "time saving state" If there is, it is configured to shift to the "normal gaming state", and if it is in the "probability fluctuation state", it shifts to the "latent probability fluctuation state".

The special figure 1 time saving counter 203n is set to “0” as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 85). Then, when one of the jackpot types is won and the jackpot is completed, "100" is set in the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203n regardless of which jackpot type is used (FIG. 102). See S6205). On the other hand, the special figure 1 time saving counter 203n is used every time the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed once when the "time saving function" is enabled, that is, when the time saving flag 203m is turned on. Is subtracted by 1 (see S5702 in FIG. 98).

Then, when the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203n becomes "0" (S5703: No in FIG. 98), it is determined that the time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the time saving end condition is turned on. The time saving flag 203m is set to off (see S5704 in FIG. 98), and the "time saving function" is terminated.

The special figure 2 time saving counter 203o is a counter for determining the end condition of 1 of the "time saving function", and counts whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times after the end of the big hit. It is a counter for discriminating the time saving end condition of "special figure 2 number of fluctuations". As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the number of times of executing the dynamic display of the second special symbol reaches 100 times after the end of the big hit game by all the big hit types, the execution " End the "time saving function" (excluding the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the time saving end condition by the operation of the common grand prize opening 75 is satisfied first and the "time saving function" ends), and in the "time saving state" If there is, it is configured to shift to the "normal game state", and if it is in the "probability fluctuation state", it shifts to the "latent probability fluctuation state".

The special figure 2 time saving counter 203o is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 85). Then, when one of the jackpot types is won and the jackpot is completed, "100" is set in the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203o regardless of which jackpot type is used (FIG. 102). (See S6206). On the other hand, the special figure 2 time saving counter 203o is used every time the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once when the "time saving function" is enabled, that is, when the time saving flag 203m is turned on. Is subtracted by 1 (see S5705 in FIG. 98).

Then, when the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203o becomes "0" (S5706: No in FIG. 98), it is determined that the time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the second special symbol is satisfied, and the time saving end condition is turned on. The time saving flag 203m is set to off (see S5704 in FIG. 98), and the "time saving function" is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" in which the "time saving function" is effective and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is encouraged, the first special symbol is used. The dynamic display of the second special symbol is easy to execute, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is difficult to execute. In addition, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the "time saving function" is effective and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is encouraged, the second special symbol is determined from the time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the second special symbol. The time-saving end condition based on the execution of the small hit game of is easier to be executed first. Therefore, the time saving end condition by the special figure 2 time saving counter 203o may be configured so as not to be substantially discriminated.

The total time saving counter 203p is a counter for determining the end condition of 1 of the "time saving function", and the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are performed 100 times in total after the jackpot ends. It is a counter for counting whether or not it has been executed and determining the time saving end condition of "special figure 1 and special figure 2 total number of fluctuations". As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, after the jackpot game for all jackpot types is completed, the total number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 100. When the number of times is reached, the running "time saving function" is terminated (the time saving end condition due to the operation of the common grand prize opening 75 is satisfied first, and the "time saving function" is terminated. ”), If it is a“ time shortened state ”, it shifts to a“ normal gaming state ”, and if it is a“ probability fluctuation state ”, it shifts to a“ latent probability fluctuation state ”.

The total time reduction counter 203p is provided separately from the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203n and the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203o, and is a special symbol different from the special symbol encouraged for each gaming state (that is, a non-encouragement special symbol). It is provided to terminate the "time saving function" even when the symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times. That is, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" in which the first special symbol is encouraged, the "time saving function" is performed even when the dynamic display of the non-encouragement second special symbol is executed 100 times. In the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" that can be invalidated and the second special symbol is encouraged, even if the dynamic display of the non-encouragement first special symbol is executed 100 times, " You can disable the "time saving function".

The total time reduction counter 203p is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 85). Then, when one of the jackpot types is won and the jackpot is completed, "100" is set in the value of the total time reduction counter 203p regardless of which jackpot type is used (see S6207 in FIG. 102). ). On the other hand, the total time saving counter 203p dynamically displays the first special symbol or moves the second special symbol when the "time saving function" is enabled, that is, when the time saving flag 203m is turned on. Each time any one of the target displays is executed, 1 is subtracted (see S5707 in FIG. 98).

Then, when the value of the total time reduction counter 203p becomes "0" (S5708: No in FIG. 98), it is determined that the time reduction end condition based on the number of executions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied. The on time saving flag 203m is set to off (see S5709 in FIG. 98), and the "time saving function" is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" in which the "time saving function" is effective and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is encouraged, the first special symbol is used. The dynamic display of the second special symbol is easy to execute, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is difficult to execute. In addition, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the "time saving function" is effective and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is encouraged, the second special symbol is determined from the time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the second special symbol. The time-saving end condition based on the execution of the small hit game of is easier to be executed first. Therefore, when the "time saving function" is enabled, the value of the total time saving counter 203p and the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203n match, and the time saving end condition by the total time saving counter 203p is satisfied. Since the time reduction end condition by the 1 time reduction counter 203n is also satisfied, the time reduction end condition by the total time reduction counter 203p may not be determined.

The special electric 2 time saving counter 203q is a counter for determining the end condition of 1 of the "time saving function", and after the big hit ends, the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the small hit game It is a counter for counting whether or not the common grand prize opening 75 has been opened once based on the winning, and for determining the time saving end condition of "the number of common grand prize opening operations by special figure 2 small hit". ..

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the common big prize opening 75 is operated once after the big hit game by all the big hit types is completed, the executing "time saving function" is terminated. In particular, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the small hit game of the second special symbol can occur, the second special symbol is small immediately after the entry of the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". It is configured to terminate the "time saving function" based on the winning game. When the "time saving function" is completed in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the state in which the normal electric service 71b of the right special figure 1 unit 71 is closed becomes long, and the ball launched in the right-handed game is the normal. It is configured so that the upper surface of the electric service 71b can be completely rolled from the left end to the right end of the normal electric service 71b, and a prize can be won in the special drawing 2 starting port 74. Then, based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 74, the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol frequently appears, and the common large winning opening 75 is opened based on the winning of the small hit game. It is possible to win a prize ball by winning a ball in the common grand prize opening 75.

The special electric power 2 time reduction counter 203q is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 85). Then, when one of the jackpot types is won and the jackpot is completed, "1" is set in the value of the special electric 2 hour reduction counter 203q regardless of which jackpot type is used (S6204 in FIG. 102). reference). On the other hand, the special electric 2 time reduction counter 203q is common based on the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the "time reduction function" is effectively set, that is, when the time reduction flag 203m is turned on. When the large winning opening 75 is opened, 1 is subtracted (see S6403 in FIG. 105).

Then, when the value of the special electric 2 time reduction counter 203q becomes "0" (S6404: No in FIG. 105), the common large winning opening 75 is opened based on the winning of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Judging that it has been opened (operated) once, the on time saving flag 203m is set to off (see S6405 in FIG. 105), and the "time saving function" (in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") is terminated. It is configured as follows.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the "time saving function" that commonly occurs in all jackpot types after the jackpot is completed is "special figure 1 fluctuation number", "special figure 2 fluctuation number", and "special figure 2 fluctuation number". When the time saving end condition of any one of "Fig. 1 and special figure 2 total number of fluctuations" or "special figure 2 small hit common large winning opening operation number" is satisfied, the "time saving function" is terminated. At the same time, the time saving end conditions that can be satisfied are different depending on the gaming state. That is, in the "time reduction state" or "probability fluctuation state", the time reduction end condition of "special figure 1 fluctuation number" is changed to another time reduction end condition (that is, "special figure 2 fluctuation number", "special figure 1 / special". While it is configured to be established earlier than "Fig. 2 total number of fluctuations" or "special figure 2 common large winning opening operation number by small hit"), in "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", "special figure 2 small hit" The time saving end condition of "common large winning opening operation count" is another time saving end condition (that is, "special figure 1 fluctuation number", "special figure 2 fluctuation number" or "special figure 1 / special figure 2 total fluctuation number"). It is configured to be established earlier. With this configuration, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed before the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed. The "time saving function" ends when the common big winning opening 75 is activated by generating a small hit game on the display, and the big hit probability of the special symbol is in the high probability state, while the hit probability of the normal symbol is in the low probability state. Transition. As a result, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the "time saving function" is completed, and the normal electric service 71b is in the non-open extension state, so that the ball launched in the right-handed game is on the right side. It flows down to the right flow path on the right side of the front view of 1 unit 71, and is in a state where it can flow into the special drawing 2 starting port 74. Further, in the gaming state having the "time saving function" other than the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped before the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is stopped. The "time saving function" is configured to end when the number of executions of the dynamic display of is reached 100 times. Therefore, by switching the special symbol that stops (encourages) first according to the game state, the end condition of the "time saving function" is different for each game state, the variation of the game is enriched, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" corresponding to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the small hit of the second special symbol can occur frequently is won, It is possible to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol while giving the "time saving function" and configuring the "time saving function" to end immediately only when the small hit game in the second special symbol is won. It is possible to acquire the game value based on the small hit of the second special symbol. Then, even if the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won when the limit is reached, the "time saving function" (equivalent to) according to the jackpot type "time saving A" is given, and in this case, Since the small hit game by the second special symbol is unlikely to occur, the time saving end condition based on the small hit of the second special symbol is not satisfied (difficult), and the other time saving end condition (that is, the dynamic of the first special symbol) is not satisfied. The "time saving function" given by the establishment of the display (execution 100 times) is configured to end. With this configuration, even if the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" when the limit is reached is derived, the player can be given the "time saving function" after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game with a certain game value given to the player when the limit is reached. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be maintained in operation by maintaining the player's willingness to continue playing the game without giving the player a motive to stop the game, and providing the pachinko machine 10 that contributes to the hall management. Can be done. In addition, by configuring so that the player does not immediately shift to the "normal gaming state" when the limit is reached, it is difficult for the player to recognize the activation of the limit function (reaching the limit), and the player takes the opportunity to reach the limit. It is difficult to give a motive (trigger) to stop the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82, in each gaming state, the through gate 67, the left side special figure 1 start port 64, the right side special figure 1 start port 71a, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65, and the special figure 2 start. The winning mode of the ball to the mouth 74, the progress of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the variable display (dynamic display; the same applies hereinafter) of the first special symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special symbol 1"). And the progress of the variation display of the second special symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special symbol 2"), and the driving mode of the ordinary electric service 71b, the special figure 1 haunting plate 65a, and the common grand prize opening opening / closing plate 75a. The relationship will be explained. FIG. 80 shows a through gate 67, a left side special figure 1 starting port 64, a right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, and a special figure 1 small winning opening 65 in a left-handed game in a “normal game state” or a “latent probability fluctuation state”. And the detection timing of the ball at the special figure 2 starting port 74, the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, the normal electric service 71b, and the special figure 1 haunting plate. It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship with the drive timing of 65a and the common grand prize opening opening / closing plate 75a. Further, FIG. 81 shows a through gate 67, a left side special figure 1 starting port 64, a right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, and a special figure 1 small winning opening in a right-handed game in a “probability fluctuation state” or a “time shortening state”. The detection timing of the sphere at 65 and the special figure 2 starting port 74, the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, the ordinary electric service 71b, and the special figure 1 haunting. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship with the drive timing of the plate 65a and the common grand prize opening opening / closing plate 75a schematically. Further, FIG. 82 shows the through gate 67, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64, the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 and the special figure 1 in the right-handed game in the “small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state”. FIG. 2 The detection timing of the ball at the starting port 74, the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol, the ordinary electric service 71b, the special figure 1 haunting plate 65a, and It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship with the drive timing of the common grand prize opening opening / closing plate 75a. In the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is not encouraged (prohibited), and the right-handed game in the game state is substantially difficult to execute. Therefore, the description of the right-handed game in the game state will be omitted. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the left-handed game is not encouraged (it is difficult for the player to obtain the game value when the left-handed game is executed). Since the left-handed game in the game state is not encouraged as a game specification, the description of the left-handed game in the game state will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 80, when the ball is launched in the left-handed game in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", the ball is not detected in the through gate 67 where the ball can pass only in the right-handed game. As a result, since the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed, the normal electric solenoid that is released based on the variable display result of the normal symbol is not driven either. Further, when the ball is launched in the left-handed game in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", the ball can pass only in the right-handed game. Right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and special figure 2 starting port 74. It is configured so that the sphere is not detected.

On the other hand, the ball launched in the left-handed game in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state" can win a prize in the left side special figure 1 starting port 64. Then, based on the winning of the left side special figure 1 starting port 64, the variation display of the special symbol 1 is executed. The variation display of the special symbol 1 is executed in "5 seconds" at the shortest and "120 seconds" at the longest, and is configured to derive either a big hit result, a small hit result, or a loss result.

Then, in the variable display of the special symbol 1, if a loss is derived, the special diagram 1 small winning opening 65 and the common large winning opening 75 are not opened. On the other hand, in the variable display of the special symbol 1, when the small hit game is won, the solenoid for the special figure 1 haunting plate is turned on for "0.1 seconds", and the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is opened. However, as described above, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is configured so that the ball launched in the left-handed game is difficult to win by the obstacle member 65c and a plurality of nails (both see FIG. 60). Even if the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is opened, the ball is configured so that it cannot substantially win a prize.

In addition, when the jackpot game is won in the variable display of the special symbol 1, the solenoid for the common jackpot opening / closing plate is used for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (10 rounds or 4 rounds, maximum 30 seconds for each round) as the jackpot game. ) Turns on and the common grand prize opening 75 is opened. At this time, it is possible to encourage the player to change the firing mode from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, to win a ball in the open common large prize opening 75, and to obtain a large number of prize balls. .. The jackpot game of 1 is executed for a maximum of "329 seconds", which is a total of 10 rounds x 30 seconds, a round interval "1 second" x 9 times, an opening time "10 seconds", and an ending time "10 seconds". It is configured to.

In the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", if a ball wins a prize at the special figure 2 starting port 74 and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is executed, the variation display of the special symbol 2 is displayed. It is configured so that the "ultra-long variation" effect mode of uniformly "600 seconds" is selected, and the variation display of the special symbol 1 is configured to be executed in a maximum of "120 seconds". Therefore, by deriving the small hit game or the big hit game in the variable display of the special symbol 1 before the result of the variable display of the special symbol 2 executed for "600 seconds" is derived, the variable effect of the special symbol 2 is produced. Can be extinguished regardless of the result. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the opening control of the common winning opening 75 from becoming complicated due to the simultaneous occurrence of big hits or small hits by each special symbol, and the player. It is possible to provide playability that is easy to understand. Then, in the "normal game state", the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished by the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol that is easily derived first, and the first It is possible to give priority to the granting of game value based on a big hit or a small hit based on the dynamic display of a special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81, when a ball is launched in the right-handed game in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortened state", first, almost all the balls launched in the right-handed game can pass through. A sphere is detected at the through gate 67 arranged in. Then, based on the passage of the sphere to the through gate 67, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. This variable display of the normal symbol is uniformly executed in "0.5 seconds" in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and is configured so that the result of either hit or loss is derived. In the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", the winning probability in the variable display of the normal symbol is high (99%), and the opening time of the normal electric service 71b in the case of winning is 5 seconds. Moreover, it is configured so that the number of times of opening is three times. Therefore, the ball launched in the right-handed game can be in an open state while rolling on the normal electric service 71b, so that the ball can roll completely on the normal electric service 71b from the left end to the right end. The right side special figure 1 starting port 71a in the right side special figure 1 unit 71 is won. When the ball is launched in the right-handed game, the ball is not detected at the left-hand side special figure 1 starting port 64 where the ball can win only in the left-handed game.

The variation display of the special symbol 1 is executed based on the winning of the right side special symbol 1 starting port 71a in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and the variation display of the special symbol 1 is "5 seconds at the shortest". , It is executed in "120 seconds" at the longest, and is configured to derive either a big hit result, a small hit result, or a loss result.

Then, if a loss is derived in the variable display of the special symbol 1, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 and the common large winning opening 75 are not opened, while the small hit game is won in the variable display of the special symbol 1. If this is the case, the solenoid for the special figure 1 haunting plate is turned on for "0.1 seconds", and the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is opened. However, as described above, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is configured so that the ball launched in the left-handed game is difficult to win by the obstacle member 65c and a plurality of nails (both see FIG. 60). Even if the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is opened, the ball is configured so that it cannot substantially win a prize.

In addition, when the jackpot game is won in the variable display of the special symbol 1, the solenoid for the common jackpot opening / closing plate is used for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (10 rounds or 4 rounds, maximum 30 seconds for each round) as the jackpot game. ) Turns on and the common grand prize opening 75 is opened. At this time, the player can be encouraged to continue the right-handed game, and a ball can be won in the open common large prize opening 75 to obtain a large number of prize balls.

In the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal game state", if a ball wins a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74 and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is executed, the variation display of the special symbol 2 is displayed. It is configured so that the "ultra-long variation" effect mode of uniformly "600 seconds" is selected, and the variation display of the special symbol 1 is configured to be executed in a maximum of "120 seconds". In particular, after a predetermined jackpot game is executed, balls can win a prize at the special figure 2 starting port 74 during the jackpot game, so that the number of reserved balls for the variable display of the special symbol 2 is accumulated. There is. Therefore, by deriving the small hit game or the big hit game in the variable display of the special symbol 1 before the result of the variable display of the special symbol 2 executed for "600 seconds" is derived, the variable effect of the special symbol 2 is produced. Can be extinguished regardless of the result. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the opening control of the common winning opening 75 from becoming complicated due to the simultaneous occurrence of big hits or small hits by each special symbol, and the player. It is possible to provide playability that is easy to understand. Then, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 tends to be accumulated after the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot or the small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is first performed. It is possible to extinguish by a big hit or a small hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol that is easy to be derived, and to give priority to the addition of the game value based on the big hit or the small hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82, when a ball is launched in a right-handed game in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", first, almost all the balls launched in the right-handed game are arranged at a position where they can pass. A sphere is detected at the through gate 67. Then, based on the passage of the sphere to the through gate 67, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. This variable display of the normal symbol is executed uniformly in "0.5 seconds" in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in the state where the "time saving function" is enabled immediately after the end of the big hit state, and either hit or lose. Is configured to derive the result of. In the state where the "time saving function" is enabled in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the winning probability in the variable display of the normal symbol is high (that is, 99%), and further, the normal electric service in the case of winning. The opening time of 71b is "5 seconds", and the number of opening times is set to 3 times. Therefore, in the state where the "time saving function" is enabled in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the ball launched in the right-handed game is released while the ordinary electric service 71b is rolling on the ordinary electric service 71b. Since it may be in a state, it cannot be completely rolled on the ordinary electric service 71b from the left end to the right end, and a prize is given to the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a in the right side special figure 1 unit 71. When the ball is launched in the right-handed game, the ball is not detected at the left-hand side special figure 1 starting port 64 where the ball can win only in the left-handed game.

Then, based on the winning of the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the variation display of the special symbol 1 is executed, and the variation display of the special symbol 1 is uniformly "600 seconds". It is configured so that the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is selected.

On the other hand, the variable display of the special symbol 2 is suspended based on the winning of the special drawing 2 starting port 74 during the previous big hit game, and after the big hit ends (that is, after the common big winning opening 75 is closed). It is executed sequentially. In the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the execution of the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is encouraged, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is executed in "5 seconds" at the shortest and "120 seconds" at the longest. It is configured so that either a big hit result, a small hit result, or a lost result appears.

Here, when the small hit game is won for the first time in the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 after entering the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the common large winning opening 75 is opened once based on the winning of the small hit game ( Based on the operation), one of the time saving end conditions, "Special Figure 2 Common Grand Prize Opening Number of Operations by Small Hit Game" is established, and "Time saving function" ends in "Small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". .. When the "time saving function" is completed in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the variable display of the normal symbol is executed in a uniform "30 seconds" which is much longer than when the "time saving function" is enabled, and the hit or loss occurs. It is configured to derive either result. In addition, in the state where the "time saving function" is no longer effective in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the winning probability in the variable display of the normal symbol is low (that is, 50%), and s et al. It is configured so that the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b is "0.1 seconds" and the number of times of opening is only once. For this reason, when the "time saving function" is no longer effective in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the closing period of the ordinary electric service 71b becomes long, and the ball launched in the right-handed game hits the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b. The special figure 2 starting port 74 provided on the lower right side of the right side special figure 1 unit 71 and the common grand prize opening 75 side provided on the left side of the front view of the special figure 2 starting port 74, which rolls completely from the left end to the right end. It becomes possible to flow down to.

Then, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, if a loss is derived, the common large winning opening 75 is not opened, while in the variable display of the special symbol 2, if the small hit game is won, the common large winning opening 75 is not opened. The solenoid for the opening / closing plate is turned on for an opening time of "3.0 seconds" and opened three times, and the common grand prize opening 75 is opened. In this case, the ball fired in the right-handed game rolls completely on the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b from the left end to the right end, and flows down to the lower right side of the right side special figure 1 unit 71, and is an open common prize opening. It is possible to win a prize in 75 and have the player win a predetermined prize ball.

In addition, when the jackpot game is won in the variable display of the special symbol 2, the solenoid for the common prize opening opening / closing plate is used for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (10 rounds or 4 rounds, for each round) as in the jackpot game of the special symbol 1. Is turned on for a maximum of 30 seconds.) The common grand prize opening 75 is opened. At this time, the player can be encouraged to continue the right-handed game, and a ball can be won in the open common large prize opening 75 to obtain a large number of prize balls.

In the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", as described above, the fluctuation display time of the special symbol 2 is configured to be executed in a much shorter time than the fluctuation display time of the special symbol 1, and the "600" By deriving the small hit game or the big hit game in the variable display of the special symbol 2 before the result of the variable display of the special symbol 1 executed for "seconds" is derived, any result of the variable effect of the special symbol 1 is derived. Even if it can be extinguished.

With this configuration, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the small hit game of the second special symbol frequently occurs, the "time saving function" can be terminated early and the ball can be won in the special figure 2 starting port 74. The second lottery game with the second special symbol is executed to make the small hit game of the second special symbol appear frequently, and many balls are won while the common big winning opening 75 based on the winning of the small hit game is opened. It is possible to realize the playability of letting the player do it. Therefore, if the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" continues for a long time, more balls can be won in the common large winning opening 75, and therefore any of the end conditions of the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". It is possible to create a playability of how to continue the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" without winning a big hit, and to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. The input / output port 205 is guided to the ball discharge path as an input side through a ball that has won each of the winning ports 63, 64, 65, 71a, 74, 75, a ball that has passed through the through gate 67, and an out port 66. Various switches 208 consisting of a switch group including a switch for detecting each of the spheres and a sensor group, a setting key 501 for setting a start-up mode when the power is turned on, and a pressing operation in the "setting change mode" As a result, the setting change switch 502 for updating the probability setting value and the RAM erase switch 503 for erasing the data stored in the RAM 203 are connected. Further, on the input / output port 205, as the output side, a solenoid for opening / closing the common large winning opening opening / closing plate (not shown) capable of opening / closing the common large winning opening opening / closing plate 75a and a special drawing 1 haunting plate 65a can be opened / closed. Special Figure 1 Various solenoids 209 consisting of a solenoid for the appearance plate (not shown), a solenoid for ordinary electric service (not shown) that can open and close the ordinary electric service 71b, a special symbol display device 37, and a normal symbol display device. 83, a normal symbol holding lamp 84, and a probability display device 504 for displaying a fixed set value are connected. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, 503 and the state of the setting key 501, and displays the display contents of the probability display device 504 as one of the execution results of the various processes. Set.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 89) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, variable effect, and continuous operation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like. Details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 will be described later.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. In the fourth embodiment, the command is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the command cannot be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured so that commands can be transmitted and received to each other.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the rear image such as the "super reach" effect mode, and the display control device 114 is displayed on the display control device 114 based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Instruct the display device 81 to display.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the variation effect of the third symbol are performed. It controls the continuous advance notice production.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 89). The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

Here, a detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a variation pattern table 222d as fixed value data. ing. These tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. The look-ahead processing can be executed based on each value of the counter CS1 and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the fluctuation pattern table 222d.

Then, what kind of effect will the pending variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead processing be as a result of this look-ahead processing (whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a "reach display", etc.). Is determined before the execution of the variable effect to determine the execution of various effects, or the effect content (and execution time) of the "hold change notice" that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db. (Timing)) is executed.

In the RAM 223, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b, the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d, the first reserved information storage area 223e, and the second reserved information At least a storage area 223f, a first execution information storage area 223g, and a second execution information storage area 223h are provided.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the variation effect of the first special symbol should be started in the on state. The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1225 in FIG. 112). .. Then, it is turned off when the variation effect of the first special symbol is set regardless of the execution on the third symbol display device 81 (see S1302 in FIG. 114).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a fluctuation effect of the first special symbol on standby when the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on. When the gaming state is not the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" (see S1306: No in FIG. 114), that is, the "normal gaming state" and "hidden" in which the variation effect of the first special symbol is encouraged. In the case of "probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", or "time reduction state", the setting process of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol for executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in standby (FIG. 114). (See S1306 to S1308).

Even when the special figure 1 change start flag 223a is turned on, when the game state is the “small hit frequent occurrence probability change state” in which the change effect of the second special symbol is encouraged (FIG. 114). Although S1306: Yes), the shift processing of the first reserved information storage area 223e and the first execution information storage area 223g, which will be described later, and the subtraction processing of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c are executed (S1303 to S1303 in FIG. 114). (See S1305), and the setting process of the variation effect of the first special symbol (see S1306 to S1308 in FIG. 114) is not executed. With this configuration, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is not encouraged, the variation effect and the number of reserved balls related to the first special symbol are executed by the third symbol display device 81. Without (displaying), it is possible to execute (display) only the encouraged variation effect of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls.

The special figure 2 variation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that the variation effect of the second special symbol should be started in the ON state. The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1235 in FIG. 113). .. Then, it is turned off when the variation effect of the second special symbol is set regardless of whether or not it is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see S1311 in FIG. 114).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a variation effect of the second special symbol on standby when the special figure 2 variation start flag 223b is turned on. In the case where the gaming state is the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" (see S1315: Yes in FIG. 114), that is, the gaming state in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is encouraged. The setting process of the variation effect of the second special symbol (see S1316 to S1318 in FIG. 114) for executing the variation effect of the second special symbol during the standby is performed.

Even when the special figure 2 change start flag 223b is turned on, the game state is the "normal game state", the "latent probability change state", and the "probability change" in which the change effect of the first special symbol is encouraged. When it is in the "state" or "time reduction state" (see S1315: No in FIG. 114), the shift processing of the second reserved information storage area 223f and the second execution information storage area 223h, which will be described later, and the sub second holding ball Although the subtraction process of the number counter 223d is executed (see S1312 to S1314 in FIG. 114), the setting process of the variation effect of the second special symbol (see S1316 to S1318 in FIG. 114) is not executed. With this configuration, the third symbol is displayed in the "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", or "time reduction state" in which the fluctuation production of the second special symbol is not encouraged. The device 81 does not execute (display) the variation effect and the number of reserved balls related to the second special symbol, but can execute (display) only the variation effect and the number of reserved balls of the encouraged first special symbol.

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a variation effect of the first special symbol that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command (held ball soot command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c displays the reserved balls. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is added by entering the ball into the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, and the main control device When the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is added in 110 and the first reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the main control device 110 included in the first reserved ball number command. The value after addition of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is stored in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c (FIG. See S1207 of 111).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted by the main control device 110. When receiving the variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command and setting the mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol regardless of execution on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the reception, the sub-th. 1 The value of the reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted (updated) by 1 (see S1305 in FIG. 114). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, so that the main control The value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110.

The sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d is a variation effect of the second special symbol that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), similarly to the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. (Dynamic display), it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d manages the number of reserved balls. It has become.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol is added by entering the special figure 2 starting port 74, and the second reserved ball number counter 203b in the main control device 110. When the second reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the value of is added, the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 included in the second reserved ball number command. The added value (that is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is stored in the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1211 in FIG. 111).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 corresponds to the variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted by the main control device 110. When the variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are received and the mode of the variation effect of the second special symbol is set regardless of whether the command is executed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the reception, the sub-number 2 The value of the reserved ball number counter 223d is subtracted (updated) by 1 (see S1314 in FIG. 114). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d, so that the main control The value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d can be updated while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110.

The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is used to display the reserved symbol and the executed symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the gaming state in which the variation effect of each special symbol is encouraged. Used. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command to the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter. Stored in the number counter 223d (see S1207 or S1211 in FIG. 111), or responds to the reception of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, or the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command. Then, at the timing of updating the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1305 or S1314 in FIG. 114), it corresponds to a special symbol encouraged according to the gaming state. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub 1st reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub 2nd reserved ball number counter 223d after storage or updating, the display 1st reserved ball number command or the display 2nd hold A ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display first hold ball number command or the display second hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub-first of the voice lamp control device 113. The reserved symbols corresponding to the values of the reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d and the execution symbol indicating the variation effect during execution are displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 64 (b)). Control the drawing of the image so that it is displayed in (see).

As described above, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is changed. The value is changed while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 64 (b)) of the third symbol display device 81 is also the number of reserved balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 regarding the recommended special symbol. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls on which the special symbol variation effect encouraged according to the gaming state is reserved.

The first hold information storage area 223e is information for performing a fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held, that is, the first hold ball acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main control device 110. It is an area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol transmitted by the number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223e and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the first special symbol. It is configured to perform a production.

The second reserved information storage area 223f is information for performing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol that is reserved, that is, the second reserved ball that is acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning in the main control device 110. This is an area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the second separate symbol transmitted by the number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold information storage area 223f and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the second special symbol. It is configured to perform the production.

The first execution information storage area 223g is executed by at least the special symbol display device 37, and depending on the game state, the information of the variation effect of the first special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main control device. In 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c and transmitted by the first reserved ball number command is stored. It is an area to do.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol, the above-mentioned first hold information storage is performed in order to execute the setting of the variation effect of the first special symbol and the like. The information (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the like) stored in the first reserved information storage first area of the area 223e for performing the variation effect is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g.

The second execution information storage area 223h is executed by at least the special symbol display device 37, and depending on the game state, the information of the variation effect of the second special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main control device. At 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c and transmitted by the second reserved ball number command is stored. It is an area to do.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol, the above-described second hold information storage is performed in order to execute the setting of the variation effect of the second special symbol and the like. The information (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the like) stored in the second reserved information storage first area of the area 223f for performing the variation effect is shifted to the second execution information storage area 223h.

Here, with reference to FIG. 84, the details of the first reserved information storage area 223e and the first execution information storage area 223g, and the second reserved information storage area 223f and the second execution information storage area 223h will be described. FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the first reserved information storage area 223e, the second reserved information storage area 223f, the first execution information storage area 223g, and the second execution information storage area 223h.

The first reserved information storage area 223e has four areas, the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and the jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored are stored. At least 223e2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Further, the second reserved information storage area 223f has four areas of the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, similarly to the first reserved information storage area 223e. In each of the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored are stored. At least 223f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Further, in the first execution information storage area 223g, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol currently being executed is stored, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter storage area 223g2 in which the value is stored, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and the variation type counter storage area 223g4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At least it is provided.

Further, in the second execution information storage area 223h, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223h1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol currently being executed is stored, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter storage area 223h2 in which the value is stored, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and the variation type counter storage area 223h4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At least it is provided.

Specifically, the first execution information storage area 223g is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol currently being executed. Further, the second execution information storage area 223h is an area related to the variation effect of the second special symbol currently being executed. Further, the first reserved information storage first area of the first reserved information storage area 223e corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol held first in time among the variation effects of the first reserved symbol. The first reserved information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second oldest reserved variation effect of the first special symbol in terms of time. , The first reserved information storage third area is an area corresponding to the third oldest reserved fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in terms of time among the reserved first special symbol variation effects, and is the first reserved area. The fourth area for storing information is an area corresponding to the fourth oldest reserved variation effect of the first special symbol in time among the reserved variation effects of the first special symbol. In addition, the second reserved information storage first area of the second reserved information storage area 223f corresponds to the variation effect of the second special symbol held first in time among the variation effects of the second special symbol held. The second area for storing the second reserved information is the area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect that is held second in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects. , The second reserved information storage third area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect, which is the third oldest in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects, and is the second hold. The information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect, which is the fourth oldest in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 first holds each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. Extract from the ball count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the hold balls included in the first hold ball number command in the corresponding first hold information storage first to fourth areas. It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the variation type counter storage area 223e4 in the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the number of variable effects of the first special symbol held at that time is X. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball count command are the fluctuation effects of the first special symbol held in the Xth time among the fluctuation effects of the first special symbol held. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 in the first hold information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first hold ball number command in the first hold X area of the first hold ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold X area of the main control device 110 are stored in the first hold information storage X area.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball count command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 sets each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. 2 Extract from the reserved ball count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the reserved balls included in the third reserved ball number command in the corresponding third reserved information storage first to fourth areas. It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, and the variation type counter storage area 223f4 in the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the second reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ Y ≦ 4), the number of variable effects of the second special symbol held at that time is Y. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command are the fluctuation effects of the first special symbol held at the Yth position in time among the fluctuation effects of the second special symbols held. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 in the first hold information storage Y area are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second hold ball number command in the second hold Y area of the second hold ball storage area 203e. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved Y area of the main control device 110 are stored in the second storage information storage Y area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the start of the variation effect of the first special symbol from the main control device 110, the first reserved information storage area 223e The process of shifting the information stored in the first execution information storage area 223g is executed. That is, when the hold information regarding the first special symbol exists, the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol held first in time is started, so that the first special symbol held first is executed. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first storage area for storing the first reserved information corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol currently being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the first execution information storage area 223g.

Then, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the first execution information storage area 223g. Moves the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage second area to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage third area.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command indicating the start of the variation effect of the second special symbol from the main control device 110, the second reserved information storage area 223f The process of shifting the information stored in the second execution information storage area 223h is executed. That is, when the hold information regarding the second special symbol exists, the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol held first in time is started, so that the second special symbol held first is executed. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first area for storing the second reserved information corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol currently being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the second execution information storage area 223h.

Then, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second reserved information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the second execution information storage area 223h. Moves the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage second area to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage third area.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored in the first execution information storage area 223g. Further, in the second execution information storage area 223h, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g of the main control device 110 are stored. Further, in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas and the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively, the first reserved first to first reserved ball storage areas 203d of the main control device 110 are stored. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the 4 areas and the 2nd reserved 1st to 4th areas of the 2nd reserved ball storage area 203e are stored. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and held by the main control device 110 are the first execution information. It is stored in the storage area 223g, the second execution information storage area 223h, the first hold information storage area 223e, and the second hold information storage area 223f.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the look-ahead process (not shown) is performed, the first special symbol or the second special symbol held from the sub first reserved ball counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is performed. Grasp the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls). Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas is suspended. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are pre-read, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect is a big hit, the fluctuation time, and the like. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is "0", the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the first special symbol is Since the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is 0 times, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read and determined for the first reserved information storage first area. I do. If the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is "4", the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the 2nd special symbol is 4 times, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read and determined for the 4th area for storing the 2nd reserved information. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the voice lamp control device 113 accesses RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. Can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first hold information storage area 223e and the second hold information storage area 223f, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol held by the main control device 110 are changed. Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effect are also stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223e and the second hold information storage area 223f are also stored. By referring to, the look-ahead process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113. That is, when the reserved 1st special symbol and / and the 2nd special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will be the variation time? Etc.) can be determined before the execution of the variable effect to determine the execution of various effects.

The shift processing described above in the first hold information storage area 223e or the second hold information storage area 223f, and the first execution information storage area 223g or the second execution information storage area 223h is the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1. Fig. 2 Number of balls on hold when the stop type command or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command are received (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 FIG. 2 First reserved information storage first to fourth areas based on the values of the sub first reserved ball count counter 223c and the sub second reserved ball count counter 223d before the update based on the reception of the stop type command is performed. Alternatively, the data is moved (shifted) only in the areas corresponding to the reserved fluctuation effects among the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas.

For example, the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c before the update when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223e. It is assumed that the data is stored in (the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first hold information storage area 1 is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223 g, the data in the first hold information storage second area is shifted to the first hold information storage first area, and the first The data in the hold information storage third area is shifted to the first hold information storage second area, and the data in the first hold information storage fourth area is shifted to the first hold information storage third area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub first reserved ball count counter 223c before the update when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received is "2", the first reserved information storage first area The data is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first hold information storage second area is shifted to the first hold information storage first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold information storage third and fourth areas where the fluctuation effect is not held, the number of data shifts can be reduced. , The control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas is stored in an area where the area number is one smaller (first execution information storage area). It may be configured to shift to 223 g or the second execution information storage area 223h, or the first hold information storage first to third areas or the second hold information storage first to third areas). In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in each of the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 83. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 111) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol variation effect and the continuous notice in the third symbol display device 81 are produced. It controls the production.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the variation mode of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is different for each gaming state, and the player is shown the launching mode of the ball encouraged for each gaming state. It is configured as follows. Specifically, as will be described later in FIG. 115, in the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the character display of "left-handed" that encourages the left-handed game is displayed in the main display area Dm. While being displayed in the lower left area, each variable symbol composed of Arabic numbers fluctuates by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form only one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm (Fig.). 115 (a)). In the "time reduction state" where right-handed games are encouraged, the characters "right-handed" that encourages right-handed games are displayed in the upper right area of the main display area Dm, and each variable symbol composed of Arabic numerals is displayed. Is displayed so as to form 5 effective lines (so-called 5 lines) in the main display area Dm as it fluctuates by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 115 (b)). Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the character display "right-handed" that encourages the right-handed game is displayed in the upper right area of the main display area Dm, and each variable symbol composed of kanji is displayed. It fluctuates with vertical scrolling and is displayed so as to form one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 115 (c)). In addition, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" where right-handed games are encouraged, the character display "right-handed" that encourages right-handed games is displayed in the upper right area of the main display area Dm, and is composed of Arabic numerals. Each variable symbol fluctuates by horizontal scrolling, and is displayed so as to form 5 effective lines (so-called 5 lines) in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 115 (d)). In this way, by clearly differentizing the display mode of the variable symbol in each game state, it is easy for the player to recognize the game state, and the game mode (launch mode) necessary for performing the encouraged game can be obtained. It can be easily recognized.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the variation effect of 1 special symbol executed (encouraged) according to the gaming state is set, and the variation effect of another (non-encouragement) special symbol is executed. It is configured not to be. Specifically, the left-handed game is encouraged and the ball can win a prize at the starting port 64 on the left side. The "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", or the right-handed game is encouraged and the right side special figure. In the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" in which the ball can win the 1 start port 71a, the third symbol display device 81 can execute only the variation effect and the hold display of the first special symbol, and the second special It is configured so that the fluctuation effect of the symbol and the hold display are not executed. In addition, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged and the ball can win the special figure 2 starting port 74, the third symbol display device 81 only displays the fluctuation effect and the hold display of the second special symbol. It is configured so that it can be executed and the variation effect and the hold display of the first special symbol are not executed. With this configuration, the player does not feel uncomfortable (bad impression) due to being executed in the main display area Dm, which is the main display area of the game result, and provides a comfortable game, and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 85 to 108. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, the initial value setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S101). For example, the access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, weight processing (“1 second” in this embodiment). Is executed (S102). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 65) provided in the main control device 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of the determination, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally. In this case, the processing is shifted to S116 in order to initialize the RAM 203. To do.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S116 even in such a case.

As will be described later in the process of S156 in FIG. 87, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

When it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on in the process of S109 (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503: is off and the setting key 501: is turned on when the power is turned on, so that the user stands up. In order to start the raising mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504 (S110), and then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S111). The "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value in the probability display device 504 is finished (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is finished, and the process is shifted to S113. To do. If the setting key 501 is not turned on in the processing of S109 (S109: No), the processing of S110 to S112 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S113 in order to start the startup mode in the "normal mode". To do.

In the process of S113, a set value command is generated based on the probability set value, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then the interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 87) described later.

The set value command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 of FIG. 88) of the timer interrupt process described later. Upon receiving this set value command, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to store (store) the probability set value indicated by the set value command in the set value memory (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. ..

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S104 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether to start the startup mode in "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode". In order to determine, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

If it is determined in the process of S115 that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process shifts to S116 in order to start the start mode in the "RAM clear mode".

In the process of S116, the initialization process (S116, S117) of the RAM 203 is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on regardless of the setting change, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 503. To. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S116, S117) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set (S105: No) or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the initial RAM 203 is also set. The conversion process (S116, S117) is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116, S117), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the initial value (for example, the first reserved ball count counter 203a) is set in the RAM 203. (Clear "0", etc.) is set (S117). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S113.

On the other hand, in the process of S115, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), the setting change process is performed in order to set the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, the setting change process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this setting change process (S118).

This setting change process (S118) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode", and is to accept and confirm the change (update) of the probability setting value from the hall related persons and the like. It is the processing of.

In this setting change process (S118), first, the probability display device 504 sets the start of display of the current probability set value (S121), and the process shifts to S122. By the start setting of the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the probability display device 504.

The probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value instead of the probability setting value set before the power is turned off. That is, when the start-up mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may always start the display with a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "3" which is an intermediate value of the probability setting values. It may be "4" or "6" which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall personnel and the like can change the probability setting value from a specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may start displaying the probability set value set before the power is turned off. .. As a result, the hall personnel and the like can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode", if the probability setting value set in the probability display device 504 before the power is turned off is "3" or more, the probability setting value is set to "3" or more. The display starts as "3", and if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is less than "3", the display starts with the probability setting value set before the power is turned off. It may be done. For example, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, such as "5" or "6", there may be many cases where the probability setting value is to be slightly reduced (for example, only 1). In such a case, if the display of the probability set value is started with the probability set value set before the power is turned off as it is, the following problems occur. That is, the update of the probability set value is added by 1 each time the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, and when the probability set value is "6" and the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, the probability set value is changed to ". It is done by returning to "1". Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability set value from "6" to "5", it is necessary to make the probability set value make one round while repeatedly turning on the RAM erase switch 503. On the other hand, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, the probability setting value is started to be displayed at "3" to set the probability while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. You can update the value.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S122), and it is not within the predetermined range, that is, an abnormal probability set value is obtained. If so (S122: No), the probability set value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. The initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which is an intermediate value of the probability setting values. It may be "6" which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability set value is within the range of "1" to "6" as a result of the processing of S122 (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so the processing of S123 Is skipped and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to the process of S122, while if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability The set value is updated (S126), and the process returns to the process of S122.

To update the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value up to that point is "1" to "5", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that point is "6". If it is, it is performed by returning the probability setting value to "1". The probability set value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device 504.

The loop processing of S122 → S123 → S124: No → S125 (and S126) → S122 continues to be executed until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on in the processing of S124 (S124: Yes). Then, when it is determined by the process of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 is used as the probability setting value to be used in the future game. (S127), and the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the probability setting value is set (S128).

After the processing of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the off state (S129). In the process of S129, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state, and the setting key 501 may be determined. By detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As a result of the processing of S129, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S129: No), the processing of S129 is repeatedly executed. Then, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off as a result of the processing of S129 (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability set value in the probability display device 504 is set (S130), and this setting change is made. The process (S118) is terminated.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 85), the process is shifted to S116, the RAM 203 initialization process is executed (S116, S117), and the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). .. In this way, the hall related persons strongly recognize that the data of the RAM 203 is erased after the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on to determine the probability set value in the processing of S124. Can be made to.

Further, in the process of S124, the probability setting value is determined by the ON detection of the RAM erase switch 503, but the probability setting value may be determined by the OFF detection of the setting key 501.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power off process are roughly classified.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the information on the occurrence of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S151: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“9999”, “99” in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S207 (see FIG. 88) of the timer interrupt process described later (S153), and the process proceeds to the process of S151.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88), which will be described later, is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, the opening and closing of the common grand prize opening 75 is controlled, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display control 83 performs the display control of the normal symbol. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state. come. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S152 and S153, which are one process of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the normal value random number counter C4 that use these as the initial value of the update can be updated. It can have randomness.

In the process of S151, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since the NMI interrupt process described later in FIG. 108 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S154 is executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to another control device (payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, or other peripheral control device). ) Is transmitted (S155). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S156), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S151 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153, which is performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88), ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the update of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed. .. Therefore, when returning from the power cut-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is set in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S151 can be started. As a result, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the fourth embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In the timer interrupt process and the main process (see FIG. 87), commands or signals to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processes. When a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and a pachinko machine 10 are connected). Outputs a signal to an external output terminal board (not shown) for the purpose. In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, and the signal is output to various devices.

After the process of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the hit process for executing the process at the time of hitting each special symbol is executed (s). S203). This hit process (S203) will be described later in FIG. 99.

After S203, next, the ordinary electric service control process for executing the drive control process of the ordinary electric service 71b is executed (S204). Briefly, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbol, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, " When the "○" symbol) appears and becomes a hit state, the normal electric service 71b is opened for a predetermined time, while when the lost symbol of the normal symbol (for example, the "x" symbol) appears, the normal electric service 71b Keep closed. This ordinary electric service control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

After the processing of S204, the reading processing of various winning switches is then executed (S205). That is, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch 208 is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“9999” in the fourth embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“99” in the fourth embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value is cleared. The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure per random number counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the random number counter C4 per normal figure are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (fourth implementation). In the form, when it reaches "9999", "99", "99", "9", "99"), respectively, it is cleared to "0", respectively. When the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number per normal figure. It is read as an initial value of the counter C4, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number counter C4 per normal figure. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, a start winning process associated with winning a prize in the left side special figure 1 starting port 64, the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, or the special figure 2 starting port 74 is executed (S208). The details of this start winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

Next, a gate passing process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). When it is determined in the gate passing process (S209) that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is acquired from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is the normal figure. It is stored in the holding ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 65), and the holding number of the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol holding lamp 84. The details of this gate passing process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 90.

After the gate passage process (S209) is executed, a process for dynamically displaying a special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 or a third symbol display device 81 based on the process content of the start winning process (S208) is performed. The special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S210). The details of the special figure variation processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

Next, it is a setting process for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not based on the processing content of the gate passing process (S209), and for performing variable display of the normal symbol based on the determination result on the normal symbol display device 83. Figure variation processing is executed (S211). In this normal figure variation processing (S211), the hit probability of the normal symbol is performed with either a high probability (for example, 9/10) or a low probability (1/10) according to the time saving flag 203m described above. Then, the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the hit / fail result, and the display result according to the hit / fail result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83. The details of the normal map variation processing (S211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

After executing the normal figure fluctuation process (S211), the launch control process is executed (S212), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S213) to end the timer interrupt process. ..

The launch control process (S212) is provided on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining whether to turn on / off the firing of a ball. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88), and in the main process, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Although the case of performing the timer interrupt processing has been described, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. .. For example, the prize ball count signal, the payout abnormality signal read process (S202), the hit process (S203), the ordinary electric service control process (S204), and the switch read process (S205) executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. ) May be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main process, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed, and each The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be randomly updated even in such a configuration.

Next, the start winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S208).

The start winning process (S208) determines whether or not the ball has won the left special figure 1 starting port 64, the right special figure 1 starting port 71a, or the special figure 2 starting port 74, and if there is a winning, each counter. The process of storing (holding) the values of C1 to C3 and CS1 in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the winning start ports 64, 71a, 74 is executed. In addition, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this start winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the special drawing 1 starting ports 64, 71a (S301). Here, the left side special figure 1 entry switch or the right side special figure 1 entry to detect the entry (winning) into the special figure 1 start ports 64, 71a read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 88). Based on the output signal of the mouth switch (not shown), the ball entering the start ports 64 and 71a in FIG. 1 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 88).

When it is determined that the ball has won the special drawing 1 starting ports 64 and 71a (there was a starting prize) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number N1) of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the fourth embodiment) (S302). Then, even if there is a prize in the special drawing 1 starting ports 64 and 71a, if the number of operation pending balls N1 <4 (S302: No), this starting winning process (S208) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (FIG. (See 88).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N1 <4 (S302: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of pending balls N1) is added by 1 (S303). Then, this time, since the special figure 1 starting port 64, 71a corresponding to the first special symbol is won, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S304). ), The process is transferred to S305.

In the processing of S305, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 66), and is set as the storage destination in S304. 1 Out of the 1st reserved 1st to 4th areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203d, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 and the jackpot type counter storage area of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the 1st reserved ball counter 203a. It is held (stored) in 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter storage area 203d4, respectively (S305).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S304 based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting ports 64 and 71a, and the first holding after the addition by the processing of S303. If the value of the ball count counter 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the first holding first area. If the value of the first reserved sphere counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved sphere counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, in each storage area of the first hold third area, if the value of the first hold ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", in each storage area of the first hold fourth area, counters C1 to C3, respectively. , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of operation reserved balls N1) after addition by the processing of S303, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (held) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d by the processing of S305, In order to transmit the first reserved ball number command including the respective values of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command is provided in the RAM 203. It is set in the ring buffer for sending the command (S306). As a result, the hold ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 88) that is executed next. When the process of S306 is completed, the start winning process (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88).

As the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball count command in the processing of S306, the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S309 may be used, or the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S305 may be used. 1 The value stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203d may be read out and used.

In the process of S301, when it is determined that the ball has not won the special drawing 1 starting port 64, 71a (S301: No), then whether or not the ball has won the special drawing 2 starting port 74 (starting winning). (S307). Here, as in the case of the special figure 1 start ports 64 and 71a, the special figure 2 entry port for detecting the entry (winning) into the special figure 2 start port 74 read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 88). Based on the output signal of the switch (not shown), the ball entering the start port 74 of the special figure 2 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 88).

When it is determined that the ball has won the special drawing 2 start port 74 (there was a start prize) (S307: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number N2) of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the fourth embodiment) (S308). Then, is there a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74 (S307: No), or even if there is a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74, if the number of balls on hold is not N2 <4 (S308: No). , The start winning process (S208) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N2 <4 (S308: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of reserved balls N2) is added by 1 (S309). Then, since the prize is won in the special figure 2 starting port 74 corresponding to the second special symbol this time, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S310). The process shifts to S311.

In the process of S311, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 66), and is set as the storage destination in S310. 2 Of the second reserved balls 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203e, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 and the jackpot type counter storage area in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b. It is held (stored) in 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3, and the variation type counter storage area 203e4, respectively (S311).

Specifically, for example, in the processing of S310 based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 74, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination, and the number of second reserved balls after addition by the processing of S309. If the value of the counter 203b is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the second hold first area. If the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved third area, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "4", counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved fourth area. , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Next, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of operating reserved balls N2) after the addition by the processing of S309, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (held) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the processing of S311. In order to transmit the second reserved ball number command including the respective values of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113, the second reserved ball number command is provided in the RAM 203. It is set in the ring buffer for sending the command (S312). As a result, the second reserved ball count command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 88) that is executed next. When the process of S312 is completed, the start winning process (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88).

As the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command in the processing of S312, the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S309 may be used, or the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S311 may be used. 2 The value stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203e may be read out and used.

Further, in the processing of S301 and S307, when a ball wins at the special drawing 1 starting ports 64 and 71a and the special drawing 2 starting port 74 at the same time, the winning processing of the ball to the special drawing 1 starting ports 64 and 71a is prioritized. In the start winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88), the waiting special figure 2 starting port 74 is waited for the ball winning process to the special figure 2 starting port 74. It may be configured to execute the winning process of the ball.

Next, the gate passing process (S209), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this gate passing process (S209). The gate passing process (S209) determines whether or not the ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67, and when the ball has passed (entered), the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is set to the normal figure holding ball. The process of storing (holding) in the storage area 203h is executed.

In this gate passing process (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S401). Here, to the through gate 67 based on the output signal of the through gate switch (not shown) that detects the passage (entry) of the ball to the through gate 67 read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 88). Passage (entry ball) is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 88).

If the sphere has not passed through the through gate 67 in the process of S401 (S401: No), the gate pass process (S209) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67 (S401: Yes), then whether or not the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", that is, left-handed. It is determined whether or not the game state is in which the launch of the ball of the game is encouraged (S402). If the result of the determination is "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" (S402: Yes), the ball fired by the non-encouragement (prohibited) right-handed game instead of the encouraged left-handed game. Has passed through the through gate 67, so an alarm sound is output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 65), and the character display "Please return to left-handed" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Right-handed error processing in normal time is executed (S403), and the processing is transferred to S404.

With this configuration, in the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", when the normal electric service 71b is difficult to open, the right-handed game is performed and the ball is won in the special figure 2 starting port 74. , The "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode can be selected, but in the variation effect of the "ultra-long variation" effect mode, the small hit game is won in the second special symbol, and the ball is fired in the right-handed game at that timing. Then, it becomes possible to win the ball in the common large winning opening 75 that is opened based on the winning of the small hit game, and the player can be given a game value that is not expected in the game specifications. It ends up. Therefore, when a ball is detected by the through gate 67 in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is not encouraged by performing error processing such as outputting an alarm sound. It is possible to make the player avoid the execution of the right-handed game in the state, eliminate as much as possible the game in the game form different from the recommended game specification, and realize the game performance expected in each game state.

In the process of S402, if the gaming state is not "normal gaming state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" (S402: No), right-handed gaming is encouraged in "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or Since it is a "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the normal right-handed error processing of S403 is not performed, the processing of S403 is skipped, and the processing is shifted to S404.

In the process of S404, the value of the normal figure reserved ball number counter (not shown) (the number of operation reserved balls HN of the variable display of the normal symbol held in the main control device 110) is the upper limit value (in the fourth embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than "4") (S404). Then, even if there is a passage (entry) to the through gate 67, if the number of balls on hold is not HN <4 (S404: No), this gate passage process (S209) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (FIG. (See 88).

On the other hand, if the number of balls on hold is HN <4 (S404: Yes), the value of the counter for the number of balls on hold (HN on hold) is added by 1 (S405). Then, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 66), and the read data is read from the normal figure hold first to fourth areas provided in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203h. It is stored in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the number of reserved balls counter (S406).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the normal figure reservation ball number counter after addition by the processing of S405 is "1", the value of the normal figure holding counter C4 is held in the normal figure reservation first area. If the value of the number of balls on hold of the normal figure after addition is "2", it is in the second area of hold of the normal figure, and if the value of the counter of the number of reserved balls of the normal figure after addition is "3", the hold of the normal figure is the second area. If the value of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure is "4" in the three areas, the value of the counter C4 for the normal figure is held in the fourth area for holding the normal figure. After the processing of S406 is completed, the gate passing processing (S209) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 88).

In the fourth embodiment, the normal symbol hold ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol is not transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, but the normal figure hold ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. It may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device 113 to produce (notify) the reserved symbol and the like related to the variable display of the normal symbol. In this case, by including the value of the counter C4 per normal figure in the normal figure hold ball number command and transmitting it, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute the so-called look-ahead processing related to the normal symbol, and the effect related to the normal symbol is produced. It may be configured to provide variations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a special figure variation process (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this special figure variation processing (S210).

This special symbol variation processing (S210) controls the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 regarding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the control related to the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. It is something to do.

In this special symbol variation processing (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently a big hit (S5001). The jackpots include during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (that is, the jackpot opening). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game (that is, the jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S5001, if the jackpot of any of the special symbols is in progress (S5001: Yes), the special symbol variation processing (S210) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 88).

In the process of S5001, when it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S5001: No), then it is determined whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently hitting the small hit. (S5002). As the small hit, the predetermined time during the small hit game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the small hit and before the start of the small hit game (that is, the small hit opening). (In the fourth embodiment, "0.5 seconds") is included, and a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game (that is, the small hit ending) is included. As a result of the determination in S5002, if any of the special symbols is in the small hit (S5002: Yes), the special figure variation process (S210) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88).

In the process of S5002, if it is determined that the small hit is not being made (S5002: No), then whether or not the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being dynamically displayed on the special symbol display device 37 is determined. If it is determined (S5003) and the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying the first special symbol (S5003: Yes), the setting process related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not performed, so that S5004 and S5005 The process is skipped and the process is transferred to S5006.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5003, if the special symbol display device 37 is not dynamically displaying the first special symbol (S5003: No), then after the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped. , It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed (S5004). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped (S5004: No), the process shifts to S5006. As a result, the stopped symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (“normal game state”, “latent probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state” or “time reduction” for a predetermined time. If it is "state", it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81), so that the player can visually recognize the stopped symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5004, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S5004: Yes), whether or not to dynamically display the first special symbol and the movement of the first special symbol The special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S5005) for performing various setting processing of the dynamic display in the case of performing the target display is performed, and then the processing is shifted to S5006.

Here, with reference to FIG. 92, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S5005), which is one process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S5005).

In this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S5005), as described above, whether or not to dynamically display the first special symbol and the setting of the dynamic display when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed. The process and the process of changing the dynamic display of the second special symbol are performed according to the dynamic display result of the first special symbol.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S5005), first, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls for dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not N1) is larger than "0" (S5101). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is not larger than "0" (S5101: No), there is no dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S5005) is finished, and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 91).

If it is determined in the process of S5101 that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S5101: No), the third symbol is determined according to the gaming state. The display device 81 is configured to perform a demonstration effect. In this demo effect, a game state in which the variation effect of the first special symbol can be executed on the third symbol display device 81, that is, a "normal game state", a "latent probability variation state", a "probability variation state", or a "time reduction" In the "state", it is executed when there is no variation effect (dynamic display) of the first special symbol to be executed.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol to be executed does not exist, the voice lamp A demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the control device 113, and the period until the value of the first hold ball number counter 203a (operation hold ball number N1) is determined to be larger than "0" is being demonstrated. Determine.

The set demo command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 88). It is transmitted toward 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control to display the effect.

In the process of S5101, if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is larger than "0" (S5101: Yes), the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is performed. It is determined that it is the execution start timing, and first, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operation pending ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S5102). This is because the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first special symbol is started by the process described later, so that the reserved ball related to the first special symbol is started. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S5103). This data shift process (S5103) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first hold first to fourth areas of the first hold ball storage area 203d toward the first hold ball execution area 203f. , 1st hold 1st area → 1st hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → The data in each area is shifted, such as the 1st hold and the 3rd area.

After the data shift processing of S5103, the special symbol display device 37 (“normal game state”, “latent probability fluctuation state”” is based on the values of various counters stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift processing. , In the case of "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", in order to perform the setting process of the dynamic display of the first special symbol executed in the third symbol display device 81), first, in order to determine the game state. , It is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203j provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S5104). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203j is not on (that is, off) (S5104: No), the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time shortened state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low. Since it is a probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5105), and the process is shifted to S5107. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203j is on (S5104: Yes), the gaming state is a "probability fluctuation state", a "latent probability fluctuation state", or a "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", and is a special symbol. Since the jackpot probability of is in the high probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S5106), and the process shifts to S5107.

In the process of S5107, a jackpot lottery for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S5105 or S5106 ( Win / fail determination) processing is performed (S5107).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability set value, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. It is determined based on the relationship between the value of and the gaming state (mode) at that time. As described above, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), the jackpot probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is defined so that the value "1" is 50/10000 and the set value "6" is 60/10000. In addition, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”, “latent probability fluctuation state”, or “small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot random number table 202a The jackpot random number value is defined so that the jackpot probability is 100/10000 when the set value is "1" and 200/10000 when the set value is "6".

In the process of S5107, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match. , Determined to be a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S5107 (S5107: Yes), then the number of winnings of the jackpot this time reaches the limit number of times since the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or after the previous limit is reached. Limit processing is performed (S5108) in order to determine whether or not the processing is performed, and then the processing is shifted to S5109.

Here, with reference to FIG. 93, in one process of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 92) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 95) described later. A certain limit process (S5108 or S5408) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this limit processing (S5108 or S5408). The limit process (S5108) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 92) and the limit process (S5408) performed in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 95) described later are the same. Since it is configured to perform the processing of S5108, the processing of S5108 will be described here, and the description of the processing of S5408 will be omitted.

In this limit processing (S5108), as described above, after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized or after the previous limit is reached, until the number of jackpots reaches 10 (that is, before the limit is reached), the special symbol has a high probability. From the jackpot types including the jackpot types that are in the state, the jackpot type table 202b that can select the jackpot type in the jackpot is set. On the other hand, every time the number of jackpots reaches 10 since the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or the previous limit, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot types that do not generate a high probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot type table 202b from which the jackpot type can be selected is set.

In the limit processing (S5108), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 92. The same applies to the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 95); the same applies hereinafter) S5107 (special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing (FIG. FIG. In (see 95), since it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the process of (see S5407), 1 is added to the value of the limit counter 203k (S5201). Then, a limit count command indicating that the limit counter 203k has been added by 1 is generated, and the limit count command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S5202). The limit number of times command set in S5202 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 of FIG. 88) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the limit number of times command, it recognizes that one big hit has occurred, and can control according to the limit number of times.

After the processing of S5202, it is then determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203k added by 1 in S5201 is less than "10" (S5203). As a result of the determination, if the value of the limit counter 203k is less than "10" (S5203: Yes), the limit number of times has not been reached in this jackpot, so the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 before reaching the limit (FIG. 68). (See) is set (S5204), and this limit processing (S5108) is terminated. After the limit processing (S5108) is completed, the process returns to the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 92).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203k is not less than "10", that is, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203k is "10" or more (S5203: No), Since the limit number of times has been reached in this jackpot, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 68) at the time of reaching the limit is set (S5205), and this limit processing (S5108) is completed. After the limit processing (S5108) is completed, the process returns to the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 92).

In this way, the value of the limit counter 203k is updated every time a jackpot occurs, and the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot types that can generate a high probability state of the special symbol according to the value of the limit counter 203k. By determining the jackpot type from the jackpot types that cannot generate the high probability state of the special symbol, it is possible to always set the special symbol to the low probability state for each jackpot limit number of times, and the high probability state of the special symbol is It is possible to prevent the occurrence of excessive jackpot "ream villas" that continue to occur.

Returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5109, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 68) corresponding to the first special symbol before the limit is reached or when the limit is reached set in the limit processing (S5108), and the first reserved ball execution area. Based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in 203f, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S5109).

In this process, according to the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds , The special symbol will be in a high probability state until the next big hit, and the "time saving function" will end immediately, and the ball can be won in the common big winning opening 75 based on the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. "Probability change A" that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state of frequent hits", or "time saving function" is effective until the special symbol is in the high probability state and the special symbol fluctuates 100 times after the big hit with the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. "Probability change B" or after a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the special symbol is in a low probability state, but the "time reduction function" is effective until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times, or the maximum number of rounds is 4 After the big hit of the round, the big hit type is determined as to whether the special symbol is in a low probability state but the winning assistance function is effective until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 (display mode of the special LED group 37b) is set.

Specifically, the jackpot type is determined from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 68) set in S5204 or S5205. Will be done.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S5110). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 73) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Then, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the jackpot, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

After the processing of S5110, the processing is shifted to S5111, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is a big hit (small hit) set in S5109 and S5110, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed. In order to determine the relationship between the destination and the back where the derivation result of the above appears, and to change the content of the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears later while maintaining the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears first, the special figure 2 is changed. The process is performed (S5111), and then the process is transferred to S5117. The details of this special figure 2 change process (S5111) will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5107, when it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot (S5107: No), subsequently, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and S5105 or S5106 A small hit lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not a small hit is performed is performed based on the set large hit random number table 202a (S5112).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, whether or not it is a small hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set to be the same in the all probability set value and the high probability state and the low probability state of the special symbol. Has been done. Specifically, in the big hit random number table 202a, the small hit random value is defined so that the small hit probability is 9800/10000 in all the settings and all the gaming states.

In the processing of S5112, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the small hit random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match. In addition, it is determined that it is a small hit of the first special symbol. When it is determined that the hit is a small hit as a result of the processing of S5112 (S5112: Yes), then the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the first special symbol (only one type in the fourth embodiment) is set. (S5113). In the process of S5113, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the small hit symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the first hold stored in the first hold ball execution area 203f. Based on the value of the ball number counter 203a and the current gaming state, as the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, and "non-reach (normal)" effect mode One of the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode is set. In the fourth embodiment, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "normal gaming state" or a "latent probability fluctuation state", a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state", or a "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit is determined (S5114). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit, first, in the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the small hit (common to the loss), it is stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. The effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

After the processing of S5114, the processing is shifted to S5111, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol which is a small hit set in S5113 and S5114 and the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed are the same as in the case of the big hit. In order to determine the predecessor-posterior relationship in which the derivation result appears with the display, and to change the content of the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears later while maintaining the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears first, the special figure 2 The change process is performed (S5111), and then the process is transferred to S5117.

On the other hand, in the process of S5112, when it is determined that the hit is not a small hit (S5112: No), the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of the loss is set (S5115). In the process of S5115, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the first hold ball stored in the first hold ball execution area 203f are set. Based on the value of the number counter 203a and the current gaming state, as the effect modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, and a "normal reach" effect mode. One of the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode is set. In the fourth embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal gaming state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", or the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", respectively. The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the effect mode is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S5116), and the process proceeds to S5117. In the process of S5116, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the process of S5115, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. Select the variation pattern associated with. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

In this way, the effect mode and fluctuation pattern setting process at the time of big hit, the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the small hit time, and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss are the same random number values C3. By making a judgment using the same judgment program using CS1, the programs can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 94, a special figure 2 change process (S5111), which is one process of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 92) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 change process (S5111).

In the special figure 2 change process (S5111), when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the first special of the big hit or the small hit set in the above special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 92). Compare each fluctuation time between the dynamic display of the symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, and perform the big hit game or small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol from which the result is derived first. While giving priority, the change process for extinguishing the big hit game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol whose result is derived later is executed.

Further, in the special figure 2 change process (S5111), when the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol both generate a big hit game, one of the special symbols is displayed. Since the jackpot game selected by the dynamic display disappears, the limit processing (see FIG. 93) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S5108) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S5408) is once accompanied by the disappearance. The process of restoring (subtracting) the value of the added limit counter 203k is executed.

In the special figure 2 change process (S5111), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5301). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not executed (S5301: No), there is no dynamic display of the second special symbol to be changed based on the dynamic display result of the first special symbol. Therefore, the special figure 2 change process (S5111) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 92).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5301: Yes), then the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is special. Whether or not it is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5110 or S5114 of the variation start process (see FIG. 92), that is, the result of the dynamic display of any special symbol comes first. It is determined whether or not it is derived (S5302).

As a result of the determination in S5302, when the remaining time of the dynamic display fluctuation time of the second special symbol being executed is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5110 or S5114 (S5302: Yes). ), That is, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is shorter and the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived earlier than the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Is to stop the dynamic display of the second special symbol at the timing when the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived while changing the content of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed. First, the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is changed to the display mode at the time of loss (regardless of the big hit result, the small hit result, or the lost result) (S5303), and then the changed second It is determined whether or not the result of the dynamic display of the special symbol is the jackpot result (S5304). As a result of the determination, when the result of the dynamic display of the changed second special symbol is the jackpot result (S5304: Yes), the value of the limit counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S5305), and the process is shifted to S5306.

In the fourth embodiment, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished by the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be extinguished is a jackpot result, the first 2 The limit number of times is added according to the jackpot result in the dynamic display of the special symbol. In this case, if only the limit number of times is increased (counted) even though the jackpot game is not given, a high probability state of the special symbol cannot occur only in the number of jackpot games less than the limit number of times, and the game specification. There is a possibility that the game value of the street cannot be given to the player, the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage, and the player may be awakened.

Therefore, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished based on the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, or when the dynamic display of the second special symbol derives the jackpot result. , The limit number of times already counted is subtracted by the amount of extinction (that is, 1) so that the number of jackpots that are not substantially given is not counted. By configuring in this way, the game value according to the game specifications is given to the player, the game machine that does not incur an unexpected disadvantage to the player is provided, and the player is suppressed from being awakened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S5304, if the jackpot result is not derived in the dynamic display of the (changed) second special symbol being executed (S5304: No), the process of S5305 is skipped and the process is shifted to S5306. ..

In the process of S5306, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is set to be equal to the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5110 (S5306). By performing this processing, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed become the same, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed. At the timing when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived, the loss result is derived by the dynamic display of the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot results from being derived in the dynamic display of the two special symbols. In addition, it is possible to prevent the situation where the dynamic display of the other special symbol is executed during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol, and during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol. It is possible to execute a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort without causing a troublesome situation as a game in which the result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol is derived.

After the processing of S5306, the display control device 114 is notified of the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S5306. Special figure 2 A fluctuation pattern command is set (S5307). Specifically, for example, if the remaining time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is "25000 milliseconds", the loss result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5303 and the first special symbol A special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating "25,000 milliseconds", which is the remaining time of the dynamic display of, is set. If the remaining time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is "5345 milliseconds", the result of the loss of the display of the second special symbol set in S5303 and the remaining time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol A special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating "5345 milliseconds" is set.

Then, after the processing of S5307, a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (that is, the loss result) set in the processing of S5303 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. The setting (S5308) is completed, the special figure 2 change process (S5111) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 92).

In this way, when changing the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 stop type command different from the executing second special symbol is transmitted again, so that the special figure 2 stop type command is transmitted. By setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type of the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the propriety. Based on the information, the stop result of the variation effect can be determined in detail.

These special figure 2 fluctuation pattern commands and special figure 2 stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 88). (See), these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 2 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command or a display special figure 2 type command according to the game state. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114.

With this configuration, when the content of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is changed based on the content of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the special figure relating to the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be changed is changed. By transmitting the 2-variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command as a set to the voice lamp control device 113, it is not necessary to change the control program on the voice lamp control device 113 side, which reduces the design man-hours and reduces the control burden. Mitigation can be achieved. Further, the variation effect of the special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different depending on the game state. Here, when the content of the variation effect of the special symbol on the non-execution side is replaced by the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect of the special symbol on the non-execution side is not executed in the first place. Even when the replacement control is executed, it is possible to provide a comfortable game without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Note that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command regarding the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be changed are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by S5307 and S5308. 2 In a gaming state in which dynamic display of a special symbol is not encouraged (that is, a "normal gaming state", a "latent probability fluctuation state", a "probability fluctuation state", and a "time reduction state"), the second special symbol Since the effect related to the dynamic display (variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, audio output in the audio output device 226, lighting display in the lamp display device 227, etc.) is not executed, the special figure 2 variation pattern set in S5307 and S5308 is executed. The command and the special figure 2 stop type command notify in advance that the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the stop type are changed, and the second special is recognized by the main controller 110. It is transmitted to grasp the consistency between the execution mode of the dynamic display of the symbol and the execution mode of the dynamic display of the second special symbol recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

As a result of the determination in S5302, when the remaining time of the dynamic display fluctuation time of the second special symbol being executed is shorter than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5110 or S5114 (S5302: No). ), That is, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is longer and the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is derived earlier than the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Next, determines whether or not the jackpot result or the small hit result is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol derived earlier (S5309). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the big hit result or the small hit result is obtained in the dynamic display of the second special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the first special symbol from which the big hit result or the small hit result is derived. Is derived, based on the jackpot result or small hit result derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot result or small hit derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be derived later It is configured to extinguish the result.

As a result of the determination in S5309, if the big hit result or the small hit result is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5309: No), the first special symbol Since it is not necessary to change the dynamic display result of, the process of S5310 to S5313 is skipped, the special figure 2 change process (S5111) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 1 variation start process (see FIG. 92). On the other hand, when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5309: Yes), the first special symbol being executed is executed. In order to stop the dynamic display of the first special symbol at the timing when the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is derived while changing the content of the dynamic display of, first, the first special being executed is executed. The dynamic display of the symbol is changed to the display mode at the time of loss (regardless of the big hit result, the small hit result or the loss result) (S5310), and then the result of the dynamic display of the changed first special symbol is It is determined whether or not it was a jackpot result (S5311). As a result of the determination, when the result of the dynamic display of the changed first special symbol is a jackpot result (S5311: Yes), the value of the limit counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S5312), and the process is shifted to S5313. In the process of S5310, if the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a loss result, it may be configured so as not to be changed to the loss result again to reduce the processing load.

In the fourth embodiment, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is extinguished by the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be extinguished is a jackpot result, the first 1 The limit number of times is added according to the jackpot result in the dynamic display of the special symbol. In this case, if only the limit number of times is increased (counted) even though the jackpot game is not given, a high probability state of the special symbol cannot occur only in the number of jackpot games less than the limit number of times, and the game specification. There is a possibility that the game value of the street cannot be given to the player, the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage, and the player may be awakened.

Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is extinguished based on the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, or when the dynamic display of the first special symbol derives the jackpot result. , The limit number of times already counted is subtracted by the amount of extinction (that is, 1) so that the number of jackpots that are not substantially given is not counted. By configuring in this way, the game value according to the game specifications is given to the player, the game machine that does not incur an unexpected disadvantage to the player is provided, and the player is suppressed from being awakened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S5311, if the jackpot result is not derived in the dynamic display of the (changed) first special symbol being executed (S5311: No), the process of S5312 is skipped and the process is shifted to S5313. ..

In the process of S5313, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is set to be equal to the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol from which the result is derived first (S5313). The special figure 2 change process (S5111) is completed, and the process returns to the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 92). By performing this processing, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed become the same, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed. At the timing when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived, the loss result is derived by the dynamic display of the first special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot results from being derived in the dynamic display of the two special symbols. In addition, it is possible to prevent the situation where the dynamic display of the other special symbol is executed during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol, and during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol. It is possible to execute a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort without causing a troublesome situation as a game in which the result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol is derived.

Returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5117, the voice lamp control device 113 is used based on the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern of the dynamic display of the first special symbol determined by the processing of S511, S5114, S5116 or S5313 (see FIG. 94). A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set (S5117). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is "probability change A", and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, the jackpot / "probability change" is selected. A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "A" and "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating the loss and "super reach" of "25 seconds" is displayed. Set. Further, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is changed based on the dynamic display result of the second special symbol, the remaining time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is "25000 milliseconds". , The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating the loss result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5310 and the remaining time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol "25000 milliseconds". Is set.

Then, after the processing of S5117, a special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S5109, S5113, S5115 or S5310 via the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. The setting (S5118) is completed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S5005) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 91).

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect in the special figure 1 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) has the first special symbol based on the propriety. It is possible to grasp the stop type of the dynamic display and determine the stop result of the variable effect in detail based on the information.

These special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next as an external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 88). (See), these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 1 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or a display special figure 1 type command according to the game state. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 91, the description will be continued. In the process of S5006, the special symbol display device 37 determines whether or not the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is being dynamically displayed (S5006), and the special symbol display device 37 dynamically displays the second special symbol. If it is being displayed (S5006: Yes), the process of S5007 and S5008 is skipped and the process is shifted to S5009 because the setting process related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not performed.

On the other hand, in the process of S5006, if the special symbol display device 37 is not dynamically displaying the second special symbol (S5006: No), then after the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped. , It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed (S5007). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped (S5007: No), the process shifts to S5009. As a result, the stopped symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (the third symbol display device 81 in the case of the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") for a predetermined time. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5007, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S5007: Yes), whether or not to dynamically display the second special symbol and the movement of the second special symbol A special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S5008) for performing various setting processes for the dynamic display in the case of performing the target display is performed, and then the process is shifted to S5009.

Here, with reference to FIG. 95, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S5008), which is a process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S5008).

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S5008), as described above, whether or not to dynamically display the second special symbol and the setting of the dynamic display when the second special symbol is dynamically displayed. The process and the process of changing the dynamic display of the first special symbol are performed according to the dynamic display result of the second special symbol.

In this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S5008), first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of operation reserved balls of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not N2) is larger than "0" (S5401). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is not larger than "0" (S5401: No), there is no dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed. The special figure 2 variation start process (S5008) is finished, and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 91).

If it is determined in the process of S5401 that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S5401: No), the third symbol is determined according to the gaming state. The display device 81 is configured to perform a demonstration effect. In this demo effect, the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed (movement) in the gaming state in which the variation effect of the second special symbol can be executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". Executed when the target display) does not exist.

Specifically, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol to be executed does not exist, a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113. , It is determined that the demonstration is in progress until the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation reserved ball number N2) is determined to be larger than "0".

The set demo command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 88). It is transmitted toward 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control to display the effect.

In the process of S5401, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is larger than "0" (S5401: Yes), the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is performed. It is determined that it is the execution start timing, and first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation reserved ball number N2) is subtracted by 1 (S5402). This is because the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic display (variable effect) related to the second special symbol is started by the process described later, so that the reserved ball related to the second special symbol is started. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S5403). This data shift process (S5403) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second hold first to fourth areas of the second hold ball storage area 203e toward the second hold ball execution area 203 g. , 2nd hold 1st area → 2nd hold ball execution area 203g, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → The data in each area is shifted, such as the second hold and the third area.

After the data shift processing of S5403, based on the values of various counters stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g by the data shift processing, the special symbol display device 37 (in the case of "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the first 3 Whether or not the probability change flag 203j provided in the RAM 203 is turned on in order to determine the game state in order to perform the setting process of the dynamic display of the second special symbol executed in the symbol display device 81). Is determined (S5404). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203j is not on (that is, off) (S5404: No), the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time shortened state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low. Since it is a probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5405), and the process shifts to S5407. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203j is on (S5404: Yes), the gaming state is "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", and a special symbol Since the jackpot probability of is in the high probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S5406), and the process shifts to S5407.

In the processing of S5407, a jackpot lottery for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S5405 or S5406 ( Win / fail determination) processing is performed (S5407).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability set value, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. It is determined based on the relationship between the value of and the gaming state (mode) at that time. As described above, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), the jackpot probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is defined so that the value "1" is 50/10000 and the set value "6" is 60/10000. In addition, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”, “latent probability fluctuation state”, or “small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot random number table 202a The jackpot random number value is defined so that the jackpot probability is 100/10000 when the set value is "1" and 200/10000 when the set value is "6".

In the processing of S5407, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match. , Determined to be a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit as a result of the processing of S5407 (S5407: Yes), then when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the jackpot result in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 92). Similarly, in order to determine whether or not the number of jackpot winnings in the dynamic display of the second special symbol has reached the limit number since the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or the previous limit reached, limit processing is performed. (S5408), and then the process shifts to S5409. Since this limit processing (S5408) is the same as the limit processing (S5108) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 92), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S5409, the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 69) corresponding to the second special symbol before or when the limit is reached set in the limit processing (S5108) and the second reserved ball execution area. Based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in 203 g, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S5409).

In this process, according to the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g, that is, after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds , The special symbol will be in a high probability state until the next big hit, and the "time saving function" will end immediately, and the ball can be won in the common big winning opening 75 based on the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. "Probability change A" that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state of frequent hits", or "time saving function" is effective until the special symbol is in the high probability state and the special symbol fluctuates 100 times after the big hit with the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. "Probability change B" or after a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the special symbol is in a low probability state, but the "time reduction function" is effective until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times, or the maximum number of rounds is 4 After the big hit of the round, the big hit type is determined as to whether the special symbol is in a low probability state but the winning assistance function is effective until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 (display mode of the special LED group 37b) is set.

Specifically, the jackpot type is determined from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 69) set in S5204 or S5205. Will be done.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S5410). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 73) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Then, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the jackpot, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

After the processing of S5410, the processing is shifted to S5411, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol which is the big hit (small hit) set in S5409 and S5410 and the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed Change special figure 1 in order to determine the relationship between the destination and the back where the derivation result of is displayed, and to change the content of the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears later while maintaining the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears first. The process is performed (S5411), and then the process is transferred to S5417. The details of this special figure 1 change process (S5411) will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5407, when it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot (S5407: No), then the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and S5405 or S5406 A small hit lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not a small hit is performed is performed based on the set large hit random number table 202a (S5412).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, whether or not it is a small hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set to be the same in the all probability set value and the high probability state and the low probability state of the special symbol. Has been done. Specifically, in the big hit random number table 202a, the small hit random value is defined so that the small hit probability is 9800/10000 in all the settings and all the gaming states.

In the process of S5412, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is compared with the small hit random number values defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match. In addition, it is determined that it is a small hit of the second special symbol. When it is determined that the hit is a small hit as a result of the processing of S5412 (S5412: Yes), then the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the second special symbol (only one type in the fourth embodiment) is set. (S5413). In the process of S5413, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the small hit symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second hold stored in the second hold ball execution area 203 g. Based on the value of the ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, as the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, and "non-reach (normal)" effect mode One of the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode is set. In the fourth embodiment, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "normal gaming state" or a "latent probability fluctuation state", a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state", or a "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit is determined (S5414). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203 g. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit, first, in the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the small hit (common to the loss), it is stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. The effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

After the processing of S5414, the processing is shifted to S5411, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol which is the small hit set in S5413 and S5414 and the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed are the same as in the case of the big hit. In order to determine the predecessor-posterior relationship in which the derivation result appears with the display, and to change the content of the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears later while maintaining the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears first, the special figure 1 Change processing is performed (S5411), and then the processing is transferred to S5417.

On the other hand, in the process of S5412, when it is determined that the hit is not a small hit (S5412: No), the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of the loss is set (S5415). In the process of S5415, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second hold ball stored in the second hold ball execution area 203 g are set. Based on the value of the number counter 203b and the current gaming state, as the effect modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, and a "normal reach" effect mode. One of the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode is set. In the fourth embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal gaming state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", or the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", respectively. The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the effect mode is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S5416), and the process proceeds to S5417. In the process of S5416, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S5415, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. Select the variation pattern associated with. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

In this way, the effect mode and fluctuation pattern setting process at the time of big hit, the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the small hit time, and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss are the same random number values C3. By making a judgment using the same judgment program using CS1, the programs can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced. Further, by determining and determining the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the same determination program, the program can be shared and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 96, a special figure 1 change process (S5411), which is one process of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 change process (S5411).

In the special figure 1 change process (S5411), when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the second special of the big hit or the small hit set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 95). Compare each fluctuation time between the dynamic display of the symbol and the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed, and perform the big hit game or small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol from which the result is derived first. While giving priority, the change process for extinguishing the big hit game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol whose result is derived later is executed.

Further, in this special figure 1 change process (S5411), when the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol both generate a big hit game, one of the special symbols is displayed. Since the jackpot game selected by the dynamic display disappears, the limit processing (see FIG. 93) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S5108) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S5408) is once accompanied by the disappearance. The process of restoring (subtracting) the value of the added limit counter 203k is executed.

In this special figure 1 change process (S5411), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5501). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed (S5501: No), there is no dynamic display of the first special symbol to be changed based on the dynamic display result of the second special symbol. Therefore, the special figure 1 change process (S5411) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 95).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5501: Yes), then the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is special. Whether or not it is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5410 or S5414 of FIG. 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 95), that is, the result of the dynamic display of which special symbol comes first. It is determined whether or not it is derived (S5502).

As a result of the determination in S5502, when the remaining time of the dynamic display fluctuation time of the first special symbol being executed is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5410 or S5414 (S5502: Yes). ), That is, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is shorter and the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is derived earlier than the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Is to stop the dynamic display of the first special symbol at the timing when the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is derived while changing the content of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed. First, the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is changed to the display mode at the time of loss (regardless of the jackpot result, the small hit result, or the loss result) (S5503), and then the changed first It is determined whether or not the result of the dynamic display of the special symbol is the jackpot result (S5504). As a result of the determination, when the result of the dynamic display of the changed first special symbol is a jackpot result (S5504: Yes), the value of the limit counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S5505), and the process shifts to S5506.

In the fourth embodiment, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is extinguished by the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be extinguished is a jackpot result, the first 1 The limit number of times is added according to the jackpot result in the dynamic display of the special symbol. In this case, if only the limit number of times is increased (counted) even though the jackpot game is not given, a high probability state of the special symbol cannot occur only in the number of jackpot games less than the limit number of times, and the game specification. There is a possibility that the game value of the street cannot be given to the player, the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage, and the player may be awakened.

Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is extinguished based on the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, or when the dynamic display of the first special symbol derives the jackpot result. , The limit number of times already counted is subtracted by the amount of extinction (that is, 1) so that the number of jackpots that are not substantially given is not counted. By configuring in this way, the game value according to the game specifications is given to the player, the game machine that does not incur an unexpected disadvantage to the player is provided, and the player is suppressed from being awakened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the processing of S5504, if the jackpot result is not derived in the dynamic display of the (changed) first special symbol being executed (S5504: No), the processing of S5505 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S5506. ..

In the process of S5506, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is set to be equal to the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5410 (S5506). By performing this process, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed become the same, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed. At the timing when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived, the loss result is derived by the dynamic display of the first special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot results from being derived in the dynamic display of the two special symbols. In addition, it is possible to prevent the situation where the dynamic display of the other special symbol is executed during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol, and during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol. It is possible to execute a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort without causing a troublesome situation as a game in which the result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol is derived.

After the processing of S5506, the display control device 114 is notified of the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S5506. Special figure 1 A fluctuation pattern command is set (S5507). Specifically, for example, if the remaining time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is "25000 milliseconds", the loss result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5503 and the second special symbol A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating "25,000 milliseconds", which is the remaining time of the dynamic display of, is set. If the remaining time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is "5345 milliseconds", the result of the loss of the display of the first special symbol set in S5503 and the remaining time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol A special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating "5345 milliseconds" is set.

Then, after the processing of S5507, a special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (that is, the loss result) set in the processing of S5503 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. The setting (S5508) is completed, the special figure 1 change process (S5411) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 95).

In this way, when changing the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 stop type command different from the executing first special symbol is transmitted again, so that the special figure 1 stop type command is transmitted. By setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the propriety. Based on the information, the stop result of the variation effect can be determined in detail.

These special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next as an external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 88). (See), these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 1 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or a display special figure 1 type command according to the game state. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114.

With this configuration, when the content of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is changed based on the content of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the special figure relating to the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be changed is changed. By transmitting the 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command to the voice lamp control device 113 as a set, it is not necessary to change the control program on the voice lamp control device 113 side, which reduces the design man-hours and reduces the control burden. Mitigation can be achieved. Further, the variation effect of the special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different depending on the game state. Here, when the content of the variation effect of the special symbol on the non-execution side is replaced by the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect of the special symbol on the non-execution side is not executed in the first place. Even when the replacement control is executed, it is possible to provide a comfortable game without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Note that, according to S5507 and S5508, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command regarding the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be changed are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. 1 In the gaming state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not encouraged (that is, the “small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state”), the effect related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol (the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81) Since the voice output in the voice output device 226, the lighting display in the lamp display device 227, etc.) are not executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command set in S5507 and S5508 are notified in advance. Notifying that the fluctuation time and the stop type of the dynamic display of the first special symbol are changed, the execution mode of the dynamic display of the first special symbol recognized by the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113. It is transmitted in order to grasp the consistency with the execution mode of the dynamic display of the first special symbol recognized by the display control device 114.

As a result of the determination in S5502, when the remaining time of the dynamic display fluctuation time of the first special symbol being executed is shorter than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5410 or S5414 (S5502: No). ), That is, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is longer and the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived earlier than the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Next, determines whether or not the big hit result or the small hit result is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol derived earlier (S5509). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the jackpot result or the small hit result is obtained in the dynamic display of the first special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the second special symbol from which the jackpot result or the small hit result is derived. Is derived, based on the jackpot result or small hit result derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot result or small hit derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be derived later It is configured to extinguish the result.

As a result of the determination of S5509, if the big hit result or the small hit result is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5509: No), the second special symbol is derived. Since it is not necessary to change the dynamic display result of, the process of S551 to S5513 is skipped, the special figure 1 change process (S5411) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 95). On the other hand, when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5509: Yes), the second special symbol being executed is executed. In order to stop the dynamic display of the second special symbol at the timing when the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived while changing the content of the dynamic display of, first, the second special being executed is executed. The dynamic display of the symbol is changed to the display mode at the time of loss (regardless of the big hit result, the small hit result or the loss result) (S5510), and then the result of the dynamic display of the changed second special symbol is It is determined whether or not the result is a jackpot (S5511). As a result of the determination, when the result of the dynamic display of the changed second special symbol is a jackpot result (S5511: Yes), the value of the limit counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S5512), and the process is shifted to S5513. In the process of S5510, if the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is a loss result, it may be configured so as not to be changed to the loss result again to reduce the processing load.

In the fourth embodiment, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished by the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be extinguished is a jackpot result, the first 2 The limit number of times is added according to the jackpot result in the dynamic display of the special symbol. In this case, if only the limit number of times is increased (counted) even though the jackpot game is not given, a high probability state of the special symbol cannot occur only in the number of jackpot games less than the limit number of times, and the game specification. There is a possibility that the game value of the street cannot be given to the player, the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage, and the player may be awakened.

Therefore, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished based on the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, or when the dynamic display of the second special symbol derives the jackpot result. , The limit number of times already counted is subtracted by the amount of extinction (that is, 1) so that the number of jackpots that are not substantially given is not counted. By configuring in this way, the game value according to the game specifications is given to the player, the game machine that does not incur an unexpected disadvantage to the player is provided, and the player is suppressed from being awakened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S5511, if the jackpot result is not derived in the dynamic display of the (changed) second special symbol being executed (S5511: No), the process of S5512 is skipped and the process is shifted to S5513. ..

In the process of S5513, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is set to be equal to the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol from which the result is derived first (S5513). , The special figure 1 change process (S5411) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 95). By performing this process, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed become the same, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed. At the timing when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived, the loss result is derived by the dynamic display of the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot results from being derived in the dynamic display of the two special symbols. In addition, it is possible to prevent the situation where the dynamic display of the other special symbol is executed during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol, and during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol. It is possible to execute a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort without causing a troublesome situation as a game in which the result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol is derived.

Returning to FIG. 95, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5417, the voice lamp control device 113 is used based on the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern of the dynamic display of the second special symbol determined by the processing of S5410, S5414, S5416 or S5513 (see FIG. 96). A special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set (S5417). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is "probability change A", and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, the jackpot / "probability change" is selected. Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "A" and "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and the "super reach" fluctuation pattern of "25 seconds" is selected, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the loss and "super reach" of "25 seconds" is displayed. Set. Further, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is changed based on the dynamic display result of the first special symbol, the remaining time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is "25000 milliseconds". , The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the loss result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5510 and the remaining time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol "25000 milliseconds". Is set.

Then, after the processing of S5417, a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S5409, S5413, S5415 or S5510 via the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. The setting (S5418) is completed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S5008) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 91).

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect in the special figure 2 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) has a second special symbol based on the propriety. It is possible to grasp the stop type of the dynamic display and determine the stop result of the variable effect in detail based on the information.

These special figure 2 fluctuation pattern commands and special figure 2 stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 88). (See), these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 2 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command or a display special figure 2 type command according to the game state. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 91, the description will be continued. In the process of S5009, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed has elapsed and whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed has elapsed. Then, a fluctuation stop process for stopping the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed according to the discrimination result, the special symbol variation process (S210) is terminated, and the timer is interrupted. Return to the process (see FIG. 88).

Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the fluctuation stop processing (S5009), which is one of the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 91) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation stop processing (S5009).

In this fluctuation stop processing (S5009), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of each special symbol has elapsed, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the stop result according to each stop type is special. It is displayed on the symbol display device 37, and each confirmation command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when the "time saving function" is in an effective gaming state, it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied according to the counting result of the number of fluctuations of the dynamic display of the special symbol. When the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied, the process of switching the "time saving function" from valid to invalid is performed.

In the fluctuation stop processing (S5009), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5601). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5601: No), the process shifts to S5608. On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 is in the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5601: Yes), the dynamic display time (variation) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol It is determined whether or not the time has passed (S5602). The display time of the first special symbol during dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 or the like (determined according to the special figure 1 variation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not elapsed (S5602: No), the display of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 is updated. (S5603), the process shifts to S5608.

In the fourth embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, the upper LED group 37b1 is lit in a predetermined lighting pattern from the start of the dynamic display of the first special symbol until the fluctuation time elapses. Alternatively, a display mode for turning off the lights is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S5602, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S5602: Yes), the special symbol display For the upper LED group 37b1 of the device 37, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped (S5604). The stop symbol is S5109, S5113 or S5115 of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 92), S5310 of the special figure 2 change process (see FIG. 94), or S5503 of the special figure 1 change process (see FIG. 96). It is preset by the process.

In the fourth embodiment, when the determination result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is lost, only the leftmost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a small hit. , When the upper LED group 37b1 is lit and displayed by one of a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns and the determination result is a jackpot, the lighting pattern corresponding to the jackpot type (type) is used upward. The LED group 37b1 is lit and displayed.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set in the process of S5604, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set. , In order to confirm and confirm the display in synchronization with the display of the special LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S5604), and the process shifts to S5606. The special figure 1 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 is in a gaming state in which the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the “normal gaming state” and the “latent probability”. In the case of "fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", or "time reduction state"), a display special figure 1 confirmation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display special symbol 1 confirmation command, the display control device 114 stops the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81, and confirms and displays the stopped symbol. It is configured as follows. When the variation effect of the first special symbol is not executed by the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the “small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state”), the voice lamp control device 113 issues the special diagram 1 confirmation command. Even if it is received, the display special figure 1 confirmation command is not transmitted to the display control device 114. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing related to the command related to the variation effect that has not been executed and reduce the processing load.

In the processing of S5606, whether or not the "time saving function" is enabled, that is, whether or not the "time saving function" is enabled in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". Determine (S5606).

If the "time saving function" is not effective in the processing of S5606 (S5606: No), the processing of S5607 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S5608. On the other hand, when it is determined that the "time saving function" is in an effective state (S5606: Yes), the time saving counting process for executing the determination processing as to whether or not the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied is executed (S5607). ), The process shifts to S5608. The details of this time saving counting process (S5607) will be described later in FIG. 98.

In the process of S5608, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5608). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not executed in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5608: No), this fluctuation stop processing (S5009) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 91). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 is in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5608: Yes), the dynamic display time (variation) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol It is determined whether or not the time has passed (S5609). The display time of the second special symbol during dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 or the like (determined according to the special figure 2 variation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not elapsed (S5609: No), the display of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 is updated. (S5610), the fluctuation stop processing (S5009) is completed, and the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 91) returns.

In the fourth embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, the lower LED group 37b2 is lit in a predetermined lighting pattern from the start of the dynamic display of the second special symbol until the fluctuation time elapses. Alternatively, a display mode for turning off the lights is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5609, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S5609: Yes), the special symbol display The lower LED group 37b2 of the device 37 is stopped from the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5611). The stop symbol is S5409, S5413 or S5415 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 95), S5510 of the special figure 1 change process (see FIG. 96), or S5303 of the special figure 2 change process (see FIG. 94). It is preset by the process.

In the fourth embodiment, when the determination result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is lost, only the leftmost LED of the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a small hit. If the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed by one of a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns and the determination result is a big hit, the lower LED group 37b2 is lit by a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit. The LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set in the process of S5611, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set. , In order to confirm and confirm the display in synchronization with the display of the special LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37 (S5612), the process shifts to S5613. The special figure 2 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 is in a gaming state in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the “small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state”). If is, a display special figure 2 confirmation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display special symbol 2 confirmation command, the display control device 114 stops the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81, and confirms and displays the stopped symbol. It is configured as follows. In a gaming state (that is, "normal gaming state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", or "time reduction state") in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is not executed by the third symbol display device 81). In some cases, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured not to transmit the display special figure 2 confirmation command to the display control device 114 even if the special figure 2 confirmation command is received. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing related to the command related to the variation effect that has not been executed and reduce the processing load.

In the process of S5613, whether or not the "time saving function" is enabled, that is, whether or not the "time saving function" is enabled in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". Determine (S5613).

If the "time saving function" is not effective in the processing of S5613 (S5613: No), the processing of S5607 is skipped, the fluctuation stop processing (S5009) is terminated, and the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 91) is performed. Return. On the other hand, when it is determined that the "time saving function" is in an effective state (S5613: Yes), the time saving counting process for executing the determination processing as to whether or not the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied is executed (S5607). ), The fluctuation stop processing (S5009) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 91).

Here, with reference to FIG. 98, a time saving counting process (S5607), which is one process of the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 97) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this time saving counting process (S5607).

In this time saving counting process (S5607), when the "time saving function" is effectively set, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, which is the end condition of the "time saving function" set for each jackpot type, is the second. The number of fluctuations of the special symbol or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is counted, it is determined whether or not the counting result satisfies the time saving end condition, and the "time saving function" is determined according to the discrimination result. Is changed from valid to invalid.

In this time saving counting process (S5607), first, the type of dynamic display of the stopped special symbol is determined (S5701). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped (S5701: "special figure 1"), the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed while the "time saving function" is enabled. Since it was executed once, the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203n is subtracted by 1 (S5702), and it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted special figure 1 time saving counter 203n is larger than "0" (S5703). ).

As a result of the determination, when the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203n is not larger than "0", that is, when the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203n subtracted in the processing of S5702 becomes "0" (S5703: No), since the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is one of the time saving end conditions of the "time saving function", was executed 100 times after the end of the big hit, the time saving flag 203m was set to off (S5704). The process shifts to S5707. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203n is larger than "0" (S5703: Yes), the process of S5704 is skipped and the process shifts to S5707.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5701, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped (S5701: "special figure 2"), the movement of the second special symbol is performed while the "time saving function" is enabled. Since the target display was executed once, the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203o was subtracted by 1 (S5705), and it was determined whether or not the value of the subtracted special figure 2 time saving counter 203o was larger than "0". (S5706).

As a result of the determination, when the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203o is not larger than "0", that is, when the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203o subtracted in the processing of S5705 becomes "0" (S5706: No), since the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is one of the time saving end conditions of the "time saving function", was executed 100 times after the jackpot ended, the time saving flag 203m was set to off (S5704). The process shifts to S5707. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203o is larger than "0" (S5706: Yes), the process of S5704 is skipped and the process shifts to S5707.

In the processing of S5707, since the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol was executed once while the "time saving function" was enabled, the value of the total time saving counter 203p was subtracted by 1 (S5707). , It is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted total time saving counter 203p is larger than "0" (S5708).

As a result of the determination, when the value of the total time reduction counter 203p is not larger than "0", that is, when the value of the total time reduction counter 203p subtracted in the processing of S5708 becomes "0" (S5708: No), " Since the total number of times of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is one of the time reduction end conditions of the "time reduction function", has been executed 100 times in total since the end of the jackpot, the time reduction flag 203m is set to off (S5709), the time saving counting process (S5607) is ended, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 97). On the other hand, when the value of the total time saving counter 203p is larger than "0" (S5708: Yes), the processing of S5709 is skipped, the time saving counting processing (S5607) is terminated, and the fluctuation stop processing (FIG. See 97).

In this way, when any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied in the state where the "time saving function" is enabled, by setting the time saving flag 203m to off, the "time saving function" is enabled or enabled according to the game state. It is possible to properly invalidate the game, increase the variety of games, and improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, a hit process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this hit process (S203).

In this winning process (S203), when a big hit of each special symbol occurs, the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the common big winning opening 75 is set according to the type of big hit, and the opening time of the common big winning opening 75 is set. To set. Then, in the case of the jackpot state (game), the jackpot opening / closing control process (S6010) for opening or closing the common jackpot 75 is executed, and the end of the jackpot state is set at the timing when the jackpot state ends. The jackpot end process (S6012) is executed.

Further, in this hit processing (S203), when a small hit of each special symbol occurs, the number of times (number of rounds) of opening of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 is set according to the small hit. At the same time, the opening time of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 is set. Then, in the case of the small hit state (game), the small hit opening / closing control process (S6014) for opening or closing the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 is executed, and the small hit state ends. At the timing of this, the small hit end process (S6016) for setting the end of the small hit state is executed.

In the hit processing (S203), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols (S6001). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is won (S6001: Yes), the number of rounds according to the jackpot type is set in the round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 in order to perform the jackpot game (S6002). .. Then, in order to transmit the jackpot opening command indicating that the jackpot is started to the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6003), and then the jackpot opening command is set. The jackpot opening time (for example, "10 seconds") is set (S6004), and the process shifts to S6009. As a result, the jackpot opening command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 88) that is executed next.

The above-mentioned round counter is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), the common big winning opening 75 or the special winning opening 75 or the special winning opening 75 or the special winning game depending on the big hit game or the small hit game. FIG. 1 While opening and controlling the small winning opening 65, the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the big hit or the small hit being executed is terminated.

In the processing of S6001, if it is determined that the big hit has not been won in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols (S6001: No), then the small hit has been won in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols. Whether or not it is determined (S6005). As a result of the determination, if a small hit is won (S6005: Yes), a winning opening (that is, special figure 1 small winning opening 65) is opened according to the special symbol won in the small hit in order to perform the small hit game. Alternatively, one of the common large winning openings 75) is set, and the number of rounds according to the small hit type (type of special symbol won in the small hit) is set in the round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203. (S6006). Then, in order to transmit the small hit opening command indicating that the small hit is started to the voice lamp control device 113, the small hit opening command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6007). Next, the opening time of the small hit (for example, "0.5 seconds") is set (S6008), and the process shifts to S6009. As a result, the small hit opening command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 88) that is executed next.

In the process of S6009, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is hit (S6009). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S6009: Yes), the jackpot opening / closing control process for executing the opening / closing control of the common winning opening 75 is executed (S6010).

Here, the jackpot opening / closing control process (S6010), which is one of the hit processes (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this jackpot opening / closing control process (S6010).

In this big hit opening / closing control process (S6010), the opening / closing control of the common big winning opening 75 is executed based on the number of times the common winning opening 75 is opened set in the winning process (S203).

In this jackpot opening / closing control process (S6010), first, it is set by the opening time set in S6004 of the hit process (S203) or by S6120 (see FIG. 101) of the common jackpot opening processing (S6107) described later. It is determined whether or not the interval time has elapsed (S6101). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the jackpot has not passed (S6101: No), it is not the opening timing of the common grand prize opening 75, and the common grand prize opening 75 is continuously closed. The process of S6105 is skipped, and the process is transferred to S6106.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6101, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the jackpot has elapsed (S6101: Yes), the opening timing of the common winning opening 75 is set, so the opening of the common winning opening 75 is set (S6102). Then, "10" is set in the winning counter (not shown) (S6103). Then, the maximum opening time (“30 seconds” in the fourth embodiment) of the common grand prize opening 75 at the time of a big hit is set (S6104), and the common grand prize opening 75 indicating that the common grand prize opening 75 has been opened is set (S6104). A release command is generated, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6105), and the process is shifted to S6106. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the common grand prize opening opening command executes the fact that the common grand prize opening 75 has been opened in the third symbol display device 81, and the common grand prize opening 75 is opened to the player. It is configured to encourage the player to win the ball through the common grand prize opening 75 that is open to the player.

In the process of S6106, it is determined whether or not the common grand prize opening 75 is open (S6106). As a result of the determination, if the common grand prize opening 75 is not open (S6106: No), the common grand prize opening 75 is not open and is in the opening time or the interval time, so the processing of S6107 is skipped. , The jackpot opening / closing control process (S6010) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 99). On the other hand, in the process of S6106, when it is determined that the common grand prize opening 75 is open (S6106: Yes), the common grand prize opening 75 is opened in order to determine the closing condition of the common grand prize opening 75 being opened. The middle process is performed (S6107), the jackpot opening / closing control process (S6010) is completed, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 99).

Here, with reference to FIG. 101, a common grand prize opening opening processing (S6107), which is one processing of the jackpot opening / closing control processing (S6010) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the process (S6107) during opening of the common grand prize opening.

In this common grand prize opening opening processing (S6107), a process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the common grand prize opening 75 being opened is satisfied is executed.

In the common grand prize opening opening processing (S6107), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the common grand prize opening 75 set in S6104 of the jackpot opening / closing control process (S6010) described above has elapsed (S6111). .. As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the common grand prize opening 75 has elapsed (S6111: Yes), the closing condition of the common grand prize opening 75 is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the common grand prize opening 75 in that round. Therefore, in order to clear the value of the winning counter to "0" (S6112) and close the common large winning opening 75, the process shifts to S6116. The closing process of the common grand prize opening 75 from S6116 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6111, if the opening time of the common grand prize opening 75 has not elapsed (S6111: No), then whether or not the common grand prize opening switch (not shown) is turned on, that is, common. It is determined whether or not the ball has won the grand prize opening 75 (S6113).

In the process of S6113, if the ball is detected by the common grand prize opening switch and the ball has won the common grand prize opening 75 (S6113: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6114), and then 1 It is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted winning counter is larger than "0" (S6115). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6115: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 or more balls are won in the common large winning opening 75 and are common. Since the closing condition of the large winning opening 75 is satisfied, the process shifts to S6116 in order to close the common large winning opening 75.

In the processing of S6113, when it is determined that the ball has not won the common large winning opening 75 (S6113: No), or in the processing of S6115, the value of the winning counter is larger than "0". If it is determined (S6115: Yes), the closing condition of the common grand prize opening 75 is not satisfied, and in order to continue opening the common grand prize opening 75, the processing of S6116 to S6120 is skipped. This common large winning opening opening processing (S6107) is completed. After the completion of the common grand prize opening opening processing (S6107), the process returns to the jackpot opening / closing control processing (see FIG. 99).

In the closing process of the common grand prize opening 75 from S6116, first, the common grand prize opening 75 is set to be closed (S6116), and then the common grand prize opening 75 is closed to the voice lamp control device 113. The common grand prize opening closing command is set (S6117), and the process shifts to S6118. The common grand prize opening closing command set in the process of S6117 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next. The external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 88). (See), the sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, in the processing of S6118, since one round of the common grand prize opening 75 was digested, the value of the round counter was subtracted by 1 (S6118), and the value of the round counter subtracted by 1 was greater than "0". Whether or not it is determined (S6119). When the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S6119: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (the number of remaining open times of the common prize opening 75) remains, so the next common size An interval time (for example, "2 seconds") until the winning opening 75 is opened is set (S6120), the common large winning opening opening process (S6107) is completed, and the jackpot opening / closing control process (see FIG. 99) is performed. Return.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6119, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S6119: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the common jackpot 75 in this jackpot 75 Since all the opening operations of are completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the interval time is not set (that is, S6120 is skipped), this common winning opening opening processing (S6107) is terminated, and the jackpot is completed. The process returns to the open / close control process (see FIG. 99).

Returning to the hit process (S203) of FIG. 99, the description will be continued. After the jackpot opening / closing control process (see FIG. 100) of S6010 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S6011). As a result of the determination, if the round counter has a value larger than "0" (S6011: Yes), the jackpot state is continued, so that the jackpot end setting process S6012 is skipped and this hit process (S203). To finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6011, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S6011: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the common jackpot 75 in this jackpot 75 Since all the opening operations of the above have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the jackpot end process (S6012) is performed, and this hit process (S203) is terminated.

Here, the jackpot end process (S6012), which is one of the hit processes (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S6012).

In this jackpot end processing (S6012), based on the winning jackpot type, the probability variation flag 203j, the special electric 2 time reduction counter 203p, the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203n, the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203o, the total time reduction counter 203p and the time reduction flag 203m In addition to making settings, when the number of jackpots has reached the limit, the process of clearing the limit number of "0" and initializing the limit number of jackpots is executed.

In this jackpot end processing (S6012), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot this time is the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "probability variation B" (S6201). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot type is "probability change A" or "probability change B" (S6201: Yes), the game state after the jackpot ends is changed to a high probability state of the special symbol until the next jackpot occurs. The flag 203j is set to on (S6202), and the process shifts to S6204. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is not "probability variation A" or "probability variation B" (S6201: No), the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" is won, and the game state after the jackpot ends is the next jackpot. The probability variation flag 203j is set to off (S6203) and the process shifts to S6204 in order to keep the special symbol in the low probability state until the occurrence of.

Next, in the processing of S6204, in order to activate the "time saving function" as the game state after the jackpot ends, first, "1" is set to the value of the special electric 2 time saving counter 203q (S6204), and the special drawing 1 time saving is also performed. Set "100" to the value of the counter 203n (S6205), set "100" to the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203o (S6206), and set "100" to the value of the total time saving counter 203p. (S6207). Then, the time saving flag 203m is set to ON (S6208), and the process shifts to S6209. As a result, the "time saving function" can be enabled by a common process after the end of the big hit game of all jackpot types, so that various game states can be started at the end of the big hit and the "time saving function" is enabled. The program set to can be standardized, and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

Next, in the process of S6209, it is determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203k is less than "10" (S6209). The value of the limit counter 203k is updated (1 addition or 1 subtraction after 1 addition) at the start of fluctuation when a jackpot is won (S5201 in FIG. 93, S5305 or S5312 in FIG. 94, or S5505 in FIG. 96 or (See S5512), if the value of the limit counter 203k updated there is not less than "10", that is, if it is "10" or more and the limit number of times has been reached (S6209560: Yes), the limit number of jackpots is set. In order to initialize, the value of the limit counter 203k is cleared to "0" (S6210), and a limit clear command indicating that the value of the limit counter 203k has been initialized (that is, the limit number of times has been initialized) is generated. Then, the limit clear command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6211), and the process is shifted to S6212. The limit clear command set in S6211 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 of FIG. 88) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the limit clear command, it recognizes that the limit number of jackpots has been initialized, and does not notify various processes (in the fourth embodiment, the notification that the limit number has been cleared is not performed). However, various suggestion effects related to the limit number of times (for example, suggestion effect of the number of jackpots after reaching the limit) are executed.

In the processing of S6209, if the value of the limit counter 203k is less than "10" (S6209: Yes), the limit number of times has not been reached yet, so the processing of S6210 and S6211 is skipped and the processing is performed to S6212. Move to.

In this way, in the jackpot end process (S6012), when the limit number of jackpots has been reached, by initializing the limit number of times, it is possible to execute the effect when the limit is reached during the execution of the jackpot. While configuring, the number of jackpots can be counted from the initial value of the limit number of times after the end of the jackpot.

In the process of S6212, an ending command indicating the start of the ending effect of the jackpot is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6212). The ending command set in the process of S6212 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 88). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the ending effect of the jackpot.

After the processing of S6212 is completed, the jackpot end setting process for setting the ending time and the like is performed (S6213), the jackpot end process (S6012) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 99).

Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. In the process of S6009, if it is not a big hit (S501: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S6013). As a result of the determination, if it is not a small hit (S6013: No), this hit process (S203) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88), while if it is a small hit (S6013: Yes). ), Then, the small hit opening / closing that executes the opening / closing control of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 according to the small hit game of the first special symbol or the common large winning opening 75 according to the small hit game of the second special symbol. The control process is executed (S6014).

Here, the small hit opening / closing control process (S6014), which is one of the hit processes (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this small hit opening / closing control process (S6014).

In this small hit opening / closing control process (S6014), the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 65 is opened based on the number of times of opening the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 set in the hit processing (S203). The opening / closing control of the winning opening 75 is executed.

In this small hit opening / closing control process (S6014), first, the opening time set in S6008 of the hit process (S203), or S6330 (see FIG. 104) of the small winning opening opening process (S6312) described later, or It is determined whether or not the interval time set in S6120 (see FIG. 101) of the above-mentioned common grand prize opening opening processing (S6107) has elapsed (S6301). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the small hit has not passed (S6301: No), it is not the opening timing of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75, so that special figure 1 small In order to keep the winning opening 65 and the common large winning opening 75 closed, the processing of S6302 to S6309 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S6310.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6301 if the opening time or interval time at the time of big hit has passed (S6301: Yes), it is the opening timing of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75, so first, the winning counter (S6301: Yes). (Not shown) is set to "10" (S6302), and then it is determined which special symbol is the small hit game (S6303).

If, as a result of the determination of S6303, it is determined that the game is a small hit game in the first special symbol (S6303: "special figure 1 small hit"), the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is set to be open (S6304). The maximum opening time (“0.1 seconds” in the fourth embodiment) of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 at the time of a small hit of the first special symbol is set (S6305). Then, a special figure 1 small winning opening opening command indicating that the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 has been opened is generated, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6306), and the process is performed in S6310. Move to. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the special figure 1 small winning opening opening command recognizes that the special drawing 1 winning opening 65 has been opened, but the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 have special features. It is configured not to notify (suggest). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the special figure 1 prize winning opening 65 has been opened.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S6303, if it is determined that the game is a small hit game in the second special symbol (S6303: "Special figure 2 small hit"), the common large winning opening 75 is set to be open (S6307). Set the maximum opening time (“3 seconds” in the fourth embodiment) of the common large winning opening 75 at the time of a small hit (S6308), and open the common large winning opening 75 indicating that the common large winning opening 75 has been opened. A command is generated, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6309), and the process is shifted to S6310. In this way, when the small hit game is won in the second special symbol, the common large winning opening 75 that can be opened when the big hit game is won in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is opened, so that the small prize can be opened. It is possible to standardize the winning openings that can be opened in the winning game and the big hit game, reduce the number of parts, and reduce the cost related to the pachinko machine 10.

In the process of S6310, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 is open at the time of a small hit (S6310). As a result of the determination, if the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 is not open at the time of small hit (S6310: No), the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening is not open at the time of small hit. Since 75 is not open but during the opening time or the interval time, the processing of S6311, S6312 and S6107 is skipped, the small hit opening / closing control processing (S6014) is terminated, and the hit processing (see FIG. 99). Return to. On the other hand, in the processing of S6310, if it is determined that the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 is open at the time of a small hit (S6310: Yes), then the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 Alternatively, it is determined which of the common grand prize openings 75 is open (S6311).

As a result of the determination, if the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is opened based on the small hit of the first special symbol (S6311: "special drawing 1 small winning opening"), the opening special figure 1 small winning opening In order to determine the closing condition of 65, the small winning opening opening processing is performed (S6312), the small hit opening / closing control processing (S6014) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning processing (see FIG. 99). On the other hand, in the processing of S6311, if the common grand prize opening 75 is opened based on the small hit of the second special symbol (S6311: "common grand prize opening"), the common grand prize opening 75 being opened is closed. In order to determine the condition, the common large winning opening opening processing is performed (S6107), the small hit opening / closing control processing (S6014) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning processing (see FIG. 99). Since the common large winning opening opening processing (S607) is the same as the common large winning opening opening processing (see FIG. 101) at the time of a big hit, the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, a small winning opening opening processing (S6312), which is one processing of the small hit opening / closing control processing (S6014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the small winning opening (S6312).

In the process of opening the small winning opening (S6312), a process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 being opened is satisfied is executed.

In the small winning opening opening processing (S6312), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 set in S6305 of the small hit opening / closing control processing (S6014) described above has elapsed (S. S6321). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 has elapsed (S6321: Yes), the closing condition of the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 is satisfied, and the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 in that round is satisfied. Since it is the closing timing of 65, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S6322), and the process shifts to S6326 in order to close the special figure 1 small winning opening 65. The closing process of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 from S326 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6321, if the opening time of the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 has not elapsed (S6321: No), then whether or not the small winning opening switch (not shown) is turned on, that is, It is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize in the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 (S6323).

In the process of S6323, if the ball is detected by the small winning opening switch and the ball has won the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 (S6323: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6324), and then It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter subtracted by 1 is larger than "0" (S6325). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6325: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 or more balls are won in the special figure 1 small winning opening 65. Since the closing condition of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is satisfied, the process shifts to S6326 in order to close the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65.

In the processing of S6323, when it is determined that the ball has not won the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 (S6323: No), or in the processing of S6325, the value of the winning counter is larger than "0". If it is determined that (S6325: Yes), the closing condition of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is not satisfied, and in order to continue opening the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65, S6326 to S6328 The process is skipped, and the process during opening of the small winning opening (S6312) is terminated. After the completion of the small winning opening opening processing (S6312), the process returns to the small hit opening / closing control processing (see FIG. 103). In the small hit game of the first special symbol in the fourth embodiment, the ball is hard to win in the special figure 1 small winning opening 65, and the opening time of the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 is set to be extremely short. (That is, "0.1 seconds"), so that the ball does not actually win the special figure 1 small winning opening 65, and it is not a closing condition based on the winning number condition, but a preset special figure 1 small winning. It is configured so that the closing condition of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 based on the passage of the opening time of the opening 65 is satisfied.

In the closing process of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 from S6326, first, the closing setting of the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 is set (S6326), and then the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 is set for the voice lamp control device 113. A special figure 1 small winning opening closing command indicating that the is closed is set (S6327), and the process shifts to S6328. The special figure 1 small winning opening closing command set in the process of S6327 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next as an external output process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). In (see S201), the sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, in the processing of S6328, since one round of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 was digested, the value of the round counter was subtracted by 1 (S6328), and the processing during opening of the small winning opening (S6312) was completed. Then, the process returns to the small hit opening / closing control process (see FIG. 103). In the small hit game of the first special symbol, since the number of times of opening the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is set to 1, the closing condition of the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 in the processing during opening of the small winning opening (S6312) If is satisfied once, the interval time and the like are not set, and the process of ending the small hit game is executed.

Returning to the hit process (S203) of FIG. 99, the description will be continued. After the small hit opening / closing control process (see FIG. 103) of S6014 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S6015). As a result of the determination, if the round counter is a value larger than "0" (S6015: Yes), the small hit is continued, so the processing of S6016, which is the end setting processing of the small hit, is skipped and this hit processing (S203). ) Is finished.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6015, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S6015: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the special figure 1 small in this small hit. Since all the opening operations of the winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 have been completed, the small hit ending process (S6016) is performed and the winning process (S203) is terminated in order to end the small hit state.

Here, the small hit end process (S6016), which is one of the hit processes (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this small hit end process (S6016).

In this small hit end processing (S6016), it is determined whether or not the common large winning opening 75 has been opened based on the small hit winning of the second special symbol, which is one of the time saving end conditions of the "time saving function", and the said. The process of terminating the "time saving function" is executed based on the determination result.

In this small hit end process (S6016), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the small hit game based on the second special symbol ends (S6401). As described above, the small hit game by the second special symbol is likely to occur in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", and is "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction". It is configured so that it is unlikely to occur in the "state". In the process of S6401, when it is determined that it is the timing when the small hit game of the second special symbol ends (S6401: Yes), the small hit game based on the second special symbol in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is performed. Since it is finished, next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203m is on, that is, whether or not the "time saving function" is still valid (S6402).

In the process of S6402, if the time saving flag 203m is turned on (S6402: Yes), the "time saving function" is in the effective state in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", so that the "time saving function" should be terminated. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special electric power 2 time reduction counter 203q (S6403), and it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted special electric power 2 time reduction counter 203q is greater than "0" (S6404). As a result of the determination, if the value of the special electric power 2 time reduction counter 203q is not larger than "0" (S6404: No), it is based on the small hit game of the second special symbol which is one of the time reduction end conditions of the "time reduction function". Since the common grand prize opening 75 is opened, the time saving flag 203m is set to off (S6405), and the process shifts to S6406. As a result, the "time saving function" can be invalidated by the small hit game of the second special symbol occurring in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", and the closing period of the ordinary electric service 71b (see FIG. 60). The ball fired in the right-handed game can be made to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74.

In the process of S6401, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the small hit game based on the second special symbol ends (S6401: No), that is, when it is the timing when the small hit game based on the first special symbol ends. Since the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the process of S6402 to S6405 is skipped and the process is shifted to S6406. Further, in the processing of S6402, if the time saving flag 203m is not turned on (S6402: No), the time saving flag 203m is already set to off based on the small hit game of the second special symbol, and "small hits frequently occur". Since the "time saving function" has already been disabled in the "probability fluctuation state", the processing of S6403 to S6405 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S6406. Further, in the processing of S6404, when it is determined that the value of the special electric power 2 time reduction counter 203q is larger than "0" (S6404: Yes), the special electric power 2 time reduction is subtracted by 1 due to some abnormality (for example, noise). Since an abnormal value is set in the value of the counter 203q, the process of S6405 is skipped in this case as well, and the process is shifted to S6406. When it is determined that the value of the special electric power 2 time reduction counter 203q is larger than "0" (S6404: Yes), an abnormality process (for example, abnormality notification) indicating that an abnormality has occurred should be performed. It may be configured.

In the processing of S6406, the small hit end setting process for setting the ending time and the like is performed (S6406), the small hit end process (S6016) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 99).

In this way, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the small hit game of the second special symbol can occur, immediately after the entry of the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", based on the small hit game of the second special symbol. It is configured to terminate the "time saving function". When the "time saving function" is completed in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the state in which the normal electric service 71b of the right special figure 1 unit 71 is closed becomes long, and the ball launched in the right-handed game is the normal. It is configured so that the upper surface of the electric service 71b can be completely rolled from the left end to the right end of the normal electric service 71b, and a prize can be won in the special drawing 2 starting port 74. Then, based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 74, the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol frequently appears, and the common large winning opening 75 is opened based on the winning of the small hit game. It is possible to make the common grand prize opening 75 win a ball so that the prize ball can be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, a normal figure variation process (S211), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this normal map variation processing (S211).

This normal symbol variation processing (S211) controls the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83 due to the passage of the sphere through the through gate 67.

In this normal figure variation processing (S211), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric service 71b is currently protruding (operating), that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit (S701). As a result of the determination, if the normal electric service 71b is protruding (S701: Yes), the normal symbol is hit, so the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88). ) Return.

On the other hand, if the normal electric service 71b is not protruding (S701: No), the normal symbol is not hit. Next, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is the variable display of the normal symbol. Determine (S702). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is not during the variable display of the normal symbol (S702: No), then the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, "1 second"). ") It is determined whether or not it has passed (S703). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S703: No), the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88). As a result, the stop symbol in the variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S703, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S703: Yes), the value of the normal figure reserved ball count counter (not shown) (held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number HN) of the variable display relating to the normal symbol is larger than "0" (S704).

As a result of the processing of S704, if the value of the normal figure holding ball number counter (operating holding ball number HN) is not larger than "0" (S704: No), there is no holding ball number of the variable display of the normal symbol to be executed. Therefore, the normal map variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, if the value of the normal figure reserved ball counter (HN of operating reserved balls) is larger than "0" (S704: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the variable display related to the reserved normal symbol. Then, first, the value of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure (the number of reserved balls for operation HN) is subtracted by 1 (S705). This is because the number of reserved balls related to the normal symbol is reduced by one as the execution of the variable display of one of the reserved variable displays related to the normal symbol is started by the processes (S706 to S713) described later. Because.

Next, the data stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h is shifted (S706). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the normal figure holding first to fourth areas of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h toward the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i. Hold 1st area → Fuzu hold ball execution area 203i, Fuzu hold 2nd area → Fuzu hold 1st area, Fuzu hold 3rd area → Fuzu hold 2nd area, Fuzu hold 4th area → Fuzu The data in each area is shifted, such as the hold third area.

After the data shift processing of S706, the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83 can be changed based on the data stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i by the data shift process (that is, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure). In order to execute the display, first, whether or not the time saving flag 203m is on, that is, the "time saving function" when the gaming state is "normal gaming state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" or "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" It is determined whether or not the state is invalid (S707). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is not on (S707: No), the "time saving function" is disabled, so the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "30 seconds" (S708). ), The process shifts to S710. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is on (S707: Yes), the "time saving function" is in the enabled state, so the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" (S709). , The process shifts to S710.

As a result, while the "time saving function" is enabled and the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state" in the right-handed game (that is,). (About 3 seconds), when the fluctuation of the variable display of the normal symbol stops and the variable display hits, the normal electric service 71b is released and the sphere that rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric service 71b. Almost all of them fall downward in front view and flow into the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. On the other hand, in the state where the "time saving function" is disabled and the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in the right-handed game, the normal symbol is variably displayed while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 71b. May not stop, and it is configured so that the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b can be completely rolled from the left end to the right end and flow down to the special drawing 2 starting port 74 and the common grand prize opening 75 side. Therefore, even in the same right-handed game, it is possible to create a game state in which the game state flows into the special figure 2 starting port 74 and the common grand prize opening 75 and a game state in which the game does not flow in. Can be improved.

In the process of S710, the stop symbol in the variable display of the normal symbol, that is, whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is appropriate is determined by referring to the random number table 202i per normal symbol according to the game state (S710). Specifically, when the "time saving function" is disabled in the "normal game state", the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", that is, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol hits. With reference to the group for the low probability state in the random number table 202i, the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is determined, and the variable display stop symbol of the normal symbol (that is, that is). Whether or not the normal symbol is correct) is determined. In addition, when the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" and the "time saving function" of the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" are enabled, that is, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the high in the random number table 202i per normal figure. With reference to the group for the probability state, the value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i is determined, and the variable display stop symbol of the normal symbol (that is, whether the normal symbol is correct or not) is determined. To determine. After the process of S710, the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88).

As a result, by changing the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol according to the game state, whether or not the normal electric service 71b is easily opened when the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the player hits right. Can make a difference. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, is it a situation in which the ordinary electric service 71b is easily opened (that is, a high probability state of the ordinary symbol) and is likely to flow into the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a side? , The normal electric service 71b is difficult to open (that is, the low probability state of the normal symbol), and the upper surface of the closed (protruding) normal electric service 71b is completely rolled from the left end to the right end, and the special figure 2 is started. By making the situation where the mouth 74 and the common grand prize mouth 75 can flow into the mouth 74 and the common grand prize mouth 75 side different depending on the gaming state, it is possible to create different game characteristics for each gaming state.

In the process of S702, when it is determined that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is in variable display (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (S711). The variable display time of the normal symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game state by the processing of S708 or S709, and if this variable display time has not elapsed (S711: No), the display of the normal symbol display device 83 is performed. Is updated (S712), the normal map variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88).

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S711: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol preset by S710 is set for the normal symbol display device 83. (S713), the normal map variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88).

As a result, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 is set based on the normal symbol variation process (S211), and the variable display is started in the normal symbol display device 83. Until the variable display time elapses, the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are alternately lit. Then, when the variable display result is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit, while when the variable display result is a loss, the symbol "x" is lit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a normal electric service control process (S204), which is a process of a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this ordinary electric service control process (S204).

This ordinary electric service control process (S204) executes drive control for opening / closing (protruding and immersing) the ordinary electric service 71b according to the game state when a hit of the normal symbol occurs. That is, the opening (immersion) time of the ordinary electric service 71b is set according to the game state, and the ordinary electric service 71b is opened and driven based on the set time, and is released when the set protrusion time elapses. The control for closing (protruding) the ordinary electric service 71b during (immersion) is executed.

In this ordinary electric service control process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric service 71b is open (immersed), that is, whether or not the normal symbol is hit (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the ordinary electric service 71b is not open (S801: No), that is, if it is determined that the ordinary symbol is not hit, then whether the variable display of the ordinary symbol is completed? Whether or not it is determined (S802).

As a result of the determination in S802, if the variable display of the normal symbol is not completed (S802: No), the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88). If the variable display of the normal symbol is completed (S802: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a winning is won in the variable display (S803).

As a result of the determination in S803, if it is determined that the variable display does not win (S803: No), the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88). Return to. On the other hand, if it is determined in the variable display that the winning is won (S803: Yes), first, in order to execute the control regarding the winning, whether or not the time saving flag 203m is turned on, that is, winning. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol at the time of this is in the high probability state (S804).

As a result of the determination in S804, when the time saving flag 203m is not turned on, or when it is determined that the state is not in the high probability state of the normal symbol (S804: No), the gaming state is "normal gaming state" or "latent probability fluctuation". Since the "state" or the "time saving function" of the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is disabled, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b in the normal electric service opening table 202k is set to "0. Set to "1 second" (S805), and set "1" to the value of the electric service counter (not shown) in order to open the ordinary electric service 71b once based on the corresponding situation (S806). The process shifts to S809.

On the other hand, in the processing of S804, when the time saving flag 203m is turned on, that is, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the high probability state (S804: Yes), the normal electric service opening table 202k The opening (immersion) time of the ordinary electric service 71b in the hit state is set to "5 seconds" based on the specified contents (S807), and the number of times the ordinary electric service 71b is opened based on the corresponding situation is set to 3 times. Set "3" to the value of (S808), and shift the process to S809.

In the processing of S809, the ordinary electric service 71b is opened (immersed) (S809), the ordinary electric service 71b that was in the closed (protruding) state is driven to the open state, and the ordinary electric service control process (S204) is performed. The process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88).

As a result, when the player hits the right side, whether the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the arrangement position of the ordinary electric service 71b and the ordinary electric service 71b is open for a long time or a short time. Can make a difference. As a result, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is likely to be guided to the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a side, or the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 71b is completely rolled from the left end to the right end in the closed state of the ordinary electric service 71b. Therefore, by making the situation in which the ball can flow down to the special drawing 2 starting port 74 and the common grand prize opening 75 side depending on the gaming state, different game performance can be produced for each gaming state.

In the process of S801, when it was determined that the ordinary electric service 71b was open (S801: Yes), that is, when it was determined that the ordinary symbol was hit, it was then set in S805 or S807. It is determined whether or not one opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b has elapsed (S810). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that one opening time of the set ordinary electric service 71b has not elapsed (S810: No), in order to maintain the open state of the ordinary electric service 71b, S811 to S813 The process is skipped, the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88).

On the other hand, in the process of S810, when it is determined that one opening time of the set ordinary electric service 71b has elapsed (S810: Yes), first, the process of closing (protruding) the ordinary electric service 71b is performed. Perform (S811), and subtract "1" from the value of the electric service counter set in the process of S806 or S808 (S812). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted electric service counter is larger than "0" (S813). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the electric service counter is larger than "0" (S813: Yes), the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric service 71b based on the corresponding situation remains, so the process is performed. After shifting to S809 and performing a predetermined interval process (in the fourth embodiment, a closing period of "0.5 seconds"), the opening process of the ordinary electric service 71b is performed again. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the electric service counter is not larger than "0" (S813: No), that is, when the value of the electric service counter is "0" or less, the ordinary electric service based on the corresponding situation Since all the releases of 71b have been completed, the normal electric service 71b is not reopened, the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 88).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the through gate 67 is obtained by making the winning probability and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol different from the opening time of the normal electric service 71b accompanying the winning according to the game state. In a right-handed game in which the ball can pass through, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the open state of the normal electric service 71b is configured to occur frequently, and the ball is almost on the right side. It can flow into 71a. On the other hand, even in the same right-handed game, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the closed state of the ordinary electric service 71b is configured to be long, and the upper surface of the closed ordinary electric service 71b is set from the left end to the right end. The ball may flow into the special drawing 2 starting port 74 and the common grand prize opening 75. Therefore, the winning openings 71a, 74, 75 that can be won in each game state at the time of right-handed game are different, and the game value given to the player is different, the variation of the game is enriched, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the NMI interrupt process executed in the main control device 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110.

The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S901) as the setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 114. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 109) that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 110) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1116 (see FIG. 110) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 110, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1113 in FIG. 110), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1116. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1116 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

Further, in the process of S1002, if the power off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure and is in the middle of executing the power off process of S1116. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 of FIG. 110). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the operation is started after the power failure of S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (S1009) in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process shifts to S1012. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1008 is performed via the processes of S1004 to S1006. This is the case where the process is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process shifts to S1012.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the processing of S1008 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, the processing of S1004 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not the set value command is received from the main control device 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed and waits until the set value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when the set value command is received from the main control device 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability set value indicated by the set value command is stored in the set value memory (not shown), and the main process (see FIG. 110). Move to.

In this way, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113, the main process (see FIG. 110) continues until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 85) is received. By waiting for the transition, the probability set value set by the main control device 110 can be reliably grasped by the voice lamp control device 113, and the processes after the main process can be executed based on the probability set value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main control device 110, the start-up process of the main control device 110 has not been reached until the end of the start-up process, and the start-up process of the main control device 110 has not been normally completed. The start-up process of the lamp control device 113 is not normally completed, and the process is not shifted to the main process. With this configuration, it is possible to grasp whether or not the start-up process of the main control device 110 is normally executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the main control device 110 is normally started up. It is possible to prevent the runaway of the voice lamp control device 113 in the absence state.

In the process of S1012, a process of waiting until a set value command is received from the main control device 110 is performed, but in this case, only the voice lamp control device 113 is performed due to a momentary power failure (so-called momentary power failure). If the power is turned off and the main control device 110 continues to keep the power on, the voice lamp control device 113 may repeatedly execute the process of S1012 and may not be able to return to normal control. Therefore, in the process of S1012, for example, when the set value command is not received from the main control device 110 for a predetermined period, the voice lamp control device 113 is in the safe mode in which the control related to the set value is not executed and other control is started. May be configured to start up.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1101: No). , The process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to process S1102 to S1109 in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond) to determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas the variation effect processing of S1110 This is because the command determination process of S1111 or S1111 is preferably executed in a short cycle. Specifically, by executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, a command determination process is performed. Based on the command received by, the setting related to the fluctuation effect can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 109, the process proceeds to the process of S1102 as it is.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a hit effect process for executing an effect related to a big hit or a small hit set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106. In the fourth embodiment, the production related to the small hit game by the first special symbol is not performed, while the production related to the small hit game by the second special symbol is performed during the opening of the common grand prize opening 75 (for example, common). It is configured to perform an effect indicating that the grand prize opening 75 has been opened and a right-handed notification effect).

Next, in the process of S1106, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the period of the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation", the stage is changed and the display control is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the rear image change command for the device 114. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation production, the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation for the jackpot can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the "reach display". The effect may be changed to give a feeling, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1106 is omitted (skipped).

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to the process of S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Runs in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command received from the main control device 110, or the special figure 2 variation pattern command and Special figure 2 The variation effect process, which is a process for starting the variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, is executed based on the stop type command. The details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 114. Then, after the variation effect processing, a command determination process for performing processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to the process of S1112. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111.

In S1112, a counter update process for updating various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1112).

When the processing of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped indefinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for the repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111).

This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main control device 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if a command is received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed, and the first command from the main control device 110 is analyzed. 1 It is determined whether or not a command related to dynamic display (variation effect) of a special symbol (that is, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command, a special figure 1 stop type command, a special figure 1 confirmation command, etc.) has been received (S1202). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol has been received (S1202: Yes), the special figure 1 command process for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1203). The command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 110).

Here, a special figure 1 command process (S1203) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 command processing (S1203).

In this special figure 1 command process (S1203), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are executed.

In the special figure 1 command process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S1221). As a result of the determination, if the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S1221: Yes), the variation pattern type of the first special symbol included in the received special figure 1 variation pattern command is extracted (S1222).

The variation pattern type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 114) described later, the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the display control device 114 according to the game state. Special figure 1 for display that notifies the start of the effect and its variation pattern type Used when setting the variation pattern command. After that, the special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1221: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1223). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command has been received (S1223: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command (S1224).

The stop type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 114) described later, the variation effect of the first special symbol is applied to the display control device 114 according to the game state. Special figure for display to notify the stop type of Fig. 1 Used when setting the stop type command. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect of the first special symbol is started is set to on (S1225), the special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the command determination process is completed. Return to (see FIG. 111).

As for the special figure 1 stop type command, the fluctuation pattern is indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command when the variation effect of the first special symbol is started. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main control device 110 to indicate the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol. By setting the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the processing of S1225, the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the first reserved ball number command first in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 114) executed later. Judgment as to whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the first special symbol extracted based on is the same as the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the first special symbol extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command. I do. In addition, the stop type of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the first reserved ball count command, and the first stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command. It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variation effect of the special symbol matches. As a result of these determinations, in the variation effect of the first special symbol of 1, the variation pattern based on the first reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command do not match, or the first If the stop type based on the held ball count command and the stop type based on the special figure 1 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and the abnormality is detected. It is configured to handle errors to indicate.

When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1223 (S1223: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1223: No). S1226). The special figure 1 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S1226: Yes), the change of the first special symbol is changed when the change effect of the first special symbol is executed for the display control device 114. A display special figure 1 confirmation command for confirming the effect is set (S1227), the special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 111).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 1 confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, and the third symbol display device 81 executes the variation effect of the first special symbol, the first special figure 1 While the symbol variation effect is confirmed and displayed, if the first special symbol variation effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the display special symbol 1 confirmation command is ignored (the processing based on is not executed). , The display content is not changed based on).

As a result of the processing of S1226, when it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S1226: No), other processing related to the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed (S1228), and this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 111).

Returning to FIG. 111, the description will be continued. In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol has not been received (S1202: No), then the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed by the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command related to display (variation effect) (that is, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command, a special figure 2 stop type command, a special figure 2 confirmation command, etc.) has been received (S1204). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol has been received (S1204: Yes), the special figure 2 command process for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1205). The command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 110).

Here, a special figure 2 command process (S1205) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 command processing (S1205).

In this special figure 2 command process (S1205), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are executed.

In the special figure 2 command processing (S1205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S1231). As a result of the determination, if the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received (S1231: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type of the second special symbol included in the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is extracted (S1232).

The variation pattern type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 114) described later, the variation of the second special symbol with respect to the display control device 114 according to the game state. Special figure 2 for display that notifies the start of the effect and its variation pattern type Used when setting the variation pattern command. After that, the special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1231: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1233). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S1233: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command (S1234).

The stop type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect process (see FIG. 114) described later, the display control device 114 is subjected to the variation effect of the second special symbol according to the game state. Special figure 2 for display that notifies the stop type of No. 2 Used when setting the stop type command. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b indicating that the variation effect of the second special symbol is started is set to on (S1235), the special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the command determination process is completed. Return to (see FIG. 111).

As for the special figure 2 stop type command, the fluctuation pattern is indicated by the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command when the variation effect of the second special symbol is started. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main control device 110 to indicate the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol. By setting the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b to ON by the processing of S1235, the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the second reserved ball count command first in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 114) executed later. Judgment as to whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the second special symbol extracted based on is the same as the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the second special symbol extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command. I do. In addition, the stop type of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the second reserved ball count command, and the second stop type extracted from the received special figure 2 stop type command. It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variation effect of the special symbol matches. As a result of these determinations, in the variation effect of the second special symbol of 1, the variation pattern based on the second reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 2 variation pattern command do not match, or the second If the stop type based on the held ball count command and the stop type based on the special figure 2 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and the abnormality is detected. It is configured to handle errors to indicate.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1233 (S1233: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1233: No). S1236). The special figure 2 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S1236: Yes), the change of the second special symbol is changed when the change effect of the second special symbol is executed for the display control device 114. A display special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming the effect is set (S1237), the special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 111).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 2 confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, and the third symbol display device 81 executes the variation effect of the second special symbol, the second special figure 2 While the symbol variation effect is confirmed and displayed, if the second special symbol variation effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the display special symbol 2 confirmation command is ignored (the processing based on is not executed). , The display content is not changed based on).

When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1236 (S1236: No), another process related to the variation effect of the second special symbol is performed (S1238), and this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 111).

Returning to FIG. 111, the description will be continued. In the process of S1204, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol has not been received (S1204: No), then the first reserved ball number command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S1206). Then, when it is determined that the first reserved ball number command has been received (S1206: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (see FIG. 65) of the main controller 110 included in the first reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted and stored in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1207). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 also included in the first reserved ball number command is updated in S1207 with the sub-first reserved ball number. It is stored in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the first reserved information storage area 223e indicated by the value of the counter 223c (S1208). Then, a display first reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number of the variation effect of the first special symbol is set (S1209), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , Return to the main process (see FIG. 110).

Here, the first reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a (starting prize). Every time there is a start prize, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 by the process of S1207. Therefore, even if the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the sound is heard when the start winning prize is detected. The value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c of the lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control device 110.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first hold information storage area 223e. That is, before the execution of the variable effect, what will be the result of the variable effect (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) when the reserved variable effect of the first special symbol is executed. It is possible to decide the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

When it is determined that the first reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1206 (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not the second reserved ball count command has been received from the main controller 110. (S1210). Then, when it is determined that the second reserved ball number command has been received (S1210: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (see FIG. 65) of the main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1211). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 also included in the second reserved ball count command is updated in S1211, and the sub-second reserved ball count. It is stored in the second hold information storage first to fourth areas of the second hold information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the counter 223d (S1212). Then, a display second reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number of the variation effect of the second special symbol is set (S1213), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , Return to the main process (see FIG. 110).

Here, since the second reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 74 (starting winning), every time there is a starting winning, S1211 By the processing, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the sound is heard when the start winning prize is detected. The value of the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d of the lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the second hold information storage area 223f. That is, before the execution of the variable effect, what will be the result of the variable effect (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) when the reserved second special symbol variation effect is executed. It is possible to decide the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

If it is determined that the second reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1210 (S1210: No), then it is determined whether or not the limit number of times command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1214). ). Then, when it is determined that the limit number command has been received (S1214: Yes), the limit number included in the limit number command, that is, the total number of jackpots since the limit is cleared is stored (S1215), and this command The determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 110).

The voice lamp control device 113 can change the effect balance of the variation effect based on the limit number of times stored (stored) in S1215.

If it is determined that the limit number of times command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1214 (S1214: No), the processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S1216), and this command determination processing (S1111) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 110). Here, if the other command received is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. For example, the demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1216, temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then the command output of the main process. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process (S1102).

Next, the variation effect process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this variation effect processing (S1110).

This variation effect processing (S1110) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 110), and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 64) of the third symbol display device 81 according to the gaming state. 2 Execute various processes for executing the variation effect of the special symbol. Specifically, if the gaming state is a "normal gaming state", a "latent probability fluctuation state", a "probability fluctuation state", or a "time shortened state", the third symbol display device 81 has a third display area Dm. It is configured so that the 1st special symbol variation effect is performed, while the display related to the 2nd special symbol variation effect is not performed. If the game state is the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the second special symbol variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, while the display related to the first special symbol variation effect is displayed. Is configured not to do.

In the variation effect processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1301). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1301: Yes), both the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, so that the first special In order to start the fluctuation effect of the symbol, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off (S1302), and then the data included in the first hold information storage first area provided in the first hold information storage area 223e is set. 1 Shifts to the execution information storage area 223g (S1303), and further, the data included in the first hold information storage second to fourth areas provided in the first hold information storage area 223e is stored in the first hold information storage first 1st. The process shifts to the third area (S1304), the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (S1305), and the process shifts to S1306.

That is, in this case, the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol held first in time is started, so that the first special symbol is held first. 1st Hold Information Corresponding to the Variable Effect of 1st Area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the 1st area are set to correspond to the variation effect of the first special symbol being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of 1 execution information storage area 223g. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage third area.

As a result, in the first execution information storage area 223g, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored, and the first hold In the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the information storage area 223e, each counter C1 stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110, respectively. The same values as ~ C3 and CS1 will be stored.

In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" (S1306). As a result of the determination, if it is a "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" (S1306: Yes), it is a gaming state in which the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the first Since the variation effect of the special symbol is not performed, the processes of S1307 to S1309 are skipped, the variation effect process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 110).

On the other hand, in the process of S1306, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" (S1306: No), that is, the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" and the "latent probability fluctuation". If it is a "state", a "probability fluctuation state", or a "time reduction state", it is a gaming state in which the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The display first reserved ball number command is set based on the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c subtracted in the process (S1307), and the process is shifted to S1308.

The display first reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 110). Will be sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 according to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect of the first special symbol indicated by the first display reserved ball number command. Do.

Next, in the process of S1308, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first execution information storage area 223g, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the variation pattern is acquired. In order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern, the display special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S1308), and the process shifts to S1309. ..

The special display 1 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 110). Will be sent. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display special diagram 1 variation pattern command. In addition, the display control of the variation effect of the first special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1309, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first execution information storage area 223g, the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the stop type is acquired. A display special figure 1 stop type command is set in order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type (S1309), and this variation effect process (S1110). ), And the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 110).

The special display 1 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 110). Will be sent. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect of the first special symbol executed by the display special diagram 1 variation pattern command set by the process of S1309 is confirmed and displayed, the display special diagram 1 stop type command is used. Set the stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (S1301: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1310). ). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1310: Yes), both the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are received, so that the second special In order to start the fluctuation effect of the symbol, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S1311), and then the data included in the second hold information storage first area provided in the second hold information storage area 223f is set. 2 Shift to the execution information storage area 223h (S1312), and further, the data included in the second hold information storage second to fourth areas provided in the second hold information storage area 223f is stored in the first hold information storage first 1st. The process shifts to the third area (S1313), the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S1314), and the process shifts to S1315.

That is, in this case, the change effect of the second special symbol held is reduced by one, and the execution of the change effect of the second special symbol held first in time is started, so that the change effect is held first. 2nd Hold Information Corresponding to the Variable Effect of 1st Area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the 1st area are set to the variation effect of the second special symbol being executed. 2 It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage third area.

As a result, in the second execution information storage area 223h, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold ball execution area 203g of the main control device 110 are stored, and the second hold In the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the information storage area 223f, each counter C1 stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control device 110, respectively. The same values as ~ C3 and CS1 will be stored.

In the process of S1315, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" (S1315). As a result of the determination, if it is not "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" (S1315: No), that is, the current gaming state is "normal gaming state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction". If it is "state", it is a gaming state in which the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation effect of the second special symbol is not performed. Therefore, the processes of S1316 to S1318 are performed. Is skipped, the variation effect process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 110).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1315, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" (S1315: Yes), the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Since it is a gaming state in which the variation effect is performed, first, the second reserved ball number command for display is set based on the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d subtracted in the process of S1314 (S1316), and the process is performed. Move to S1317.

The display second reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 110). Will be sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 according to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect of the second special symbol indicated by the second reserved ball number command for display. Do.

Next, in the process of S1317, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second execution information storage area 223h, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the variation pattern is acquired. In order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern, the display special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (S1317), and the process shifts to S1318. ..

The display special figure 2 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 110). Will be sent. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display special diagram 2 variation pattern command. In addition, the display control of the variation effect of the second special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1318, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second execution information storage area 223h, the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the stop type is acquired. A display special figure 2 stop type command is set in order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type (S1318), and this variation effect process (S1110). ), And the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 110).

The special display 2 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 110). Will be sent. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect of the second special symbol executed by the display special diagram 2 variation pattern command set by the process of S1317 is confirmed and displayed, the display special diagram 2 stop type command is used. Set the stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

When it is determined in the processing of S1310 that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, off) (S1310: No), at least the special figure 1 stop type command and special figure 1 stop type command and special FIG. 2 Since the stop type command has not been received, the variation effect process (S1110) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 110).

As a result, it is possible to execute only the variation effect of the special symbol encouraged in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state, and it is extinguished based on the variation effect result of the encouraged special symbol. By not performing the effect based on the dynamic display of the non-encouragement special symbol to be obtained in the main display area Dm, it is possible to prevent the troublesome situation that the variable effect of a plurality of special symbols is performed in the main display area Dm. It is possible to execute a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort. The fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 that can be changed in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds3 to the right of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. And the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 which can be changed in synchronization with the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls, the execution mode and the reserved balls of each special symbol in the third symbol display device 81. The number is recognizable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a variation mode of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 for each game state will be described. FIG. 115 is a diagram schematically showing an execution mode of the variation effect in each game state in the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 115 (a) shows a “normal game state” or a “latent probability variation state”. FIG. 115 (b) is a diagram showing an execution mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the above, and FIG. 115 (b) is a diagram showing an execution mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “time shortened state”. (C) is a diagram showing an execution mode of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state", and FIG. 115 (d) is a variation of the first special symbol in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". It is a figure which showed the execution mode of an effect.

As shown in FIG. 115 (a), in the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the character display of "left-handed" that encourages the left-handed game is displayed in the lower left of the main display area Dm. Displayed in the area. Further, each variable symbol composed of Arabic numerals is changed by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form only one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), in the "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the character display "right-handed" that encourages the right-handed game is displayed in the upper right area of the main display area Dm. .. Further, as in the "normal game state", each variable symbol composed of Arabic numerals is changed by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form 5 effective lines (so-called 5 lines) in the main display area Dm. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (c), in the "probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the character display "right-handed" that encourages the right-handed game is displayed in the upper right area of the main display area Dm. .. In addition, each variable symbol composed of Chinese characters fluctuates by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (d), in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the character display of "right-handed" inviting the right-handed game is displayed in the upper right area of the main display area Dm. Is displayed. In addition, each variable symbol composed of Arabic numerals fluctuates by horizontal scrolling, and is displayed so as to form 5 effective lines (so-called 5 lines) in the main display area Dm.

In this way, by clearly differentizing the display mode of the variable symbol in each game state, it is easy for the player to recognize the game state, and the game mode (launch mode) necessary for performing the encouraged game can be obtained. It can be easily recognized.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won at the stage of reaching the maximum value of the limit number of times (that is, when the limit is reached), if it is before the limit is reached, " Even if the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" corresponding to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is extracted, the jackpot type "time reduction A" can occur instead of the jackpot type "probability variation A". It is configured in.

Here, if a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the "time saving function" is not added in order to frequently generate the small hit of the second special symbol, and the special symbol is simply placed in a high probability state. In addition, when the normal symbol is set to the low probability state and the non-open extension state so that the small hit frequent occurrence state due to the second special symbol can occur, when the limit is reached, the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" is reached. Since the "time saving function" is not given in the situation where is derived, immediately shifts to the "normal game state" in which both the special symbol and the normal symbol are in the low probability state, instead of the "time reduction state" after the jackpot ends. It ends up.

Further, when the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" is derived when the limit is reached, the jackpot type "probability variation A" having the highest game value for the player is given before the limit is reached. Even though it was a value, it shifts to the "normal gaming state" which is the most disadvantageous for the player, so suddenly it shifts from the advantageous state for the player to the most disadvantageous state for the player. , The player loses the motivation to continue the game (awakening of the game), the game is stopped, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

Furthermore, if the player suddenly shifts to the "normal gaming state" in which the "time saving function" is not given when the limit is reached, the player will be clearly informed that the limit has been reached, and the player will be given a game when the limit is reached. There is a risk that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 will be reduced due to the motivation (trigger) to stop and the game being stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" corresponding to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the small hit of the second special symbol can occur frequently is won, It is possible to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol while giving the "time saving function" and configuring the "time saving function" to end immediately only when the small hit game in the second special symbol is won. It is possible to acquire the game value based on the small hit of the second special symbol. Then, even if the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won when the limit is reached, the "time saving function" (equivalent to) according to the jackpot type "time saving A" is given, and in this case, Since the small hit game by the second special symbol is unlikely to occur, the time saving end condition based on the small hit of the second special symbol is not satisfied (difficult), and the other time saving end condition (that is, the dynamic of the first special symbol) is not satisfied. The "time saving function" given by the establishment of the display (execution 100 times) is configured to end. With this configuration, even if the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A" when the limit is reached is derived, the player can be given the "time saving function" after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game with a certain game value given to the player when the limit is reached. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be maintained in operation by maintaining the player's willingness to continue playing the game without giving the player a motive to stop the game, and providing the pachinko machine 10 that contributes to the hall management. Can be done. In addition, by configuring so that the player does not immediately shift to the "normal gaming state" when the limit is reached, it is difficult for the player to recognize the activation of the limit function (reaching the limit), and the player takes the opportunity to reach the limit. It is difficult to give a motive (trigger) to stop the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, even if the value of the limit counter 203k is added by 1 when a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol, the movement of the other special symbol is performed. When a big hit or a small hit is won in the target display and the dynamic display of the other special symbol is stopped and displayed before the dynamic display of the one special symbol, the value of the limit counter 203k is added. Since the jackpot disappears, the value of the limit counter 203k is subtracted by 1 in order to cancel the addition (see S5305 or S5312 in FIG. 94 or S5505 or S5512 in FIG. 96). With this configuration, the limit number of times based on the jackpot that is not given to the player can be corrected, and only the jackpot that gives the player the game value can be counted as the limit number of times, so that a plurality of special symbols can be simultaneously counted. Even if it fluctuates, it is possible to accurately execute the game playability of the "limit function" to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, regardless of which jackpot type is won, the time saving end conditions are "special figure 1 fluctuation number", "special figure 2 fluctuation number", and "special figure 1 / special figure 2". It is configured so that the "total number of fluctuations" and the "number of common large winning opening operations due to the special figure 2 small hit" are set 100 times or once, respectively (see S6204 to S6208 in FIG. 102). With this configuration, the setting process can be standardized for the time saving end condition for each jackpot type, and the program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

Further, the total time reduction counter 203p is provided separately from the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203n and the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203o, and is different from the special symbol encouraged for each gaming state (that is, non-encouragement). It is provided to terminate the "time saving function" even when the special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times. That is, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" in which the first special symbol is encouraged, the "time saving function" is performed even when the dynamic display of the non-encouragement second special symbol is executed 100 times. In the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" that can be invalidated and the second special symbol is encouraged, even if the dynamic display of the non-encouragement first special symbol is executed 100 times, " You can disable the "time saving function".

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured so as not to notify the player that the number of big hits has reached the limit number, and even before the number of big hits reaches the limit number, when the limit number is reached. The jackpot type that can be selected (that is, the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B") is configured to be selectable so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the maximum number of jackpots has been reached. Constitute. Further, the remaining number of jackpots is not notified to the player, and it is difficult for the player to determine the number of remaining jackpots until the limit number of jackpots is reached. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the limit number of jackpots has been reached, and the remaining limit number of jackpots is difficult for the player to determine, and the timing is other than immediately after reaching the limit number of jackpots. However, it is possible to prevent the game in the pachinko machine 10 from being shunned and to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, by switching the special symbol that stops (encourages) first according to the gaming state, the end condition of the "time saving function" is changed, and the ordinary electric service 71b is opened. It can make a difference whether it is easy to (immerse) or not. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 71b is likely to be opened (immersed), so that the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a can win a prize, or the normal electric service 71b It is difficult to open (immerse) the ball, so it is difficult for the ball to win the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, and it is possible to win the special figure 2 starting port 74 and the common large winning opening 75 side. By making it different depending on the state, it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

In particular, among the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" in which right-handed games are encouraged, the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" of the "time reduction function" By configuring so that only the time saving end condition based on the number of fluctuations of each special symbol can be satisfied among the ending conditions, the "time saving function" is maintained, the "normal symbol high probability state" is set, and the ordinary electric service 71b becomes It is configured so that the ball can be easily opened and the ball launched by the right-handed game can easily win a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. In other words, a ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state" is configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74. There is. On the other hand, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", after the big hit ends, among the end conditions of the "time saving function", the time saving ending condition based on the common big winning opening 75 operating once can be satisfied at an early stage. By configuring, the end condition of the "time saving function" is established early after the big hit ends, it becomes a "normal symbol low probability state", the normal electric service 71b is difficult to open, and the ball fired by the right-handed game It is configured so that it can roll completely on the ordinary electric service 71b from the left end to the right end and flow down to the special figure 2 starting port 74 side. In other words, it is difficult for a ball hit right in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 74 from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state", and the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a It is structured so that it is easy to win a prize. Then, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the small hit game is configured to frequently occur in the dynamic display of the encouraged second special symbol. Therefore, even in the same right-handed game, the game state is whether the ball is likely to win the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a or the special figure 2 starting port 74 and the common large winning opening 75. By making it different depending on the game state, it is possible to create different game characteristics for each game state, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol acquired in the "normal symbol high probability state" in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is suspended during the jackpot game. It is immediately extinguished by a small hit game or a big hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and while suppressing the appearance of unintended game results, the transition of the game state is smoothly performed, and the game that does not cause a sense of discomfort is given to the player. Can be provided.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, five combinations of a high-probability state or a low-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state or a low-probability state of a normal symbol, and a left-handed game or a right-handed game, respectively. By providing gaming states (that is, "normal gaming state", "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state"), each gaming state has playability. It is possible to provide a game with abundant variations by changing the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot type based on the jackpot of the second special symbol selected when the limit is reached, a "time reduction state" is generated in all jackpots and a "time reduction function" is added. Configure to do. With this configuration, even after the jackpot when the limit is reached, the height of the special symbols of the jackpot types "Probability Change A" and "Probability Change B" will be high again while the "Time saving function" is operating. By winning a jackpot that generates a probabilistic state, it is possible to create a playability that indicates whether or not to generate a consecutive villa state again, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when a big hit or a small hit is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol (for example, the second special symbol), the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is won. When a big hit or a small hit is won even in the dynamic display of the special symbol), the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol whose dynamic display stops first is given priority, and the winning result of the priority big hit or the small hit is used. Therefore, it is configured to stop (disappear) the big hit or small hit of the special symbol whose dynamic display is stopped later. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the opening control of the common winning opening 75 from becoming complicated due to the simultaneous occurrence of big hits or small hits by each special symbol, and the player. It is possible to provide playability that is easy to understand. Then, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", unlike the "normal game state", the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol is dynamically displayed of the second special symbol which is easy to be derived first. It is possible to extinguish by a big hit or a small hit based on the above, and give priority to the addition of the game value based on the big hit or the small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol. As a result, in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", and "time reduction state", the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is accumulated (for example, the dynamic display of the first special symbol). Even if the player enters the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" with the number of holdings of 4), the dynamic display of the second special symbol is small before the dynamic display of the first special symbol is confirmed. When the winning game occurs frequently, the big hit game and the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol that is held can be eliminated. In addition, when shifting from the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" to the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", that is, the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". Even if the player enters the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" in the state where the second special symbol is held (for example, the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol is four), the dynamic display of the second special symbol is dynamic. By frequently performing small hit games in the dynamic display of the first special symbol before the display is confirmed, the large hit games and small hit games in the pending dynamic display of the second special symbol are extinguished. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the effect mode in the "latent probability fluctuation state" (for example, the content of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81) and the effect mode in the "normal game state" are the same. It is configured so that it is difficult or impossible for the player to determine which gaming state the game state is based on only by visually recognizing the effect mode by executing the content. Then, even when the jackpot type "probability variation B" that generates the "probability fluctuation state" is won, the same effect as the jackpot type "time reduction B" that generates the "time reduction state" is executed (so-called). , Dummy time saving state), after the dummy time saving state ends, even though it is a "latent probability fluctuation state", by executing the same effect as the "normal game state", the "time shortening state" can be set. After the game is finished, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess which game state it is. Therefore, even when the apparent "time reduction state" is completed, the operating status of the pachinko machine 10 is improved by making the player guess that it may be the "latent probability fluctuation state" and continuing the game. While making it possible, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the variation effect of 1 special symbol executed (encouraged) according to the gaming state is set, and the variation effect of another (non-encouragement) special symbol is executed. It is configured not to be. Specifically, the left-handed game is encouraged and the ball can win a prize at the starting port 64 on the left side. The "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", or the right-handed game is encouraged and the right side special figure. In the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" in which the ball can win the 1 start port 71a, the third symbol display device 81 can execute only the variation effect and the hold display of the first special symbol, and the second special It is configured so that the fluctuation effect of the symbol and the hold display are not executed. In addition, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged and the ball can win the special figure 2 starting port 74, the third symbol display device 81 only displays the fluctuation effect and the hold display of the second special symbol. It is configured so that it can be executed and the variation effect and the hold display of the first special symbol are not executed. With this configuration, the player does not feel uncomfortable (bad impression) due to being executed in the main display area Dm, which is the main display area of the game result, and provides a comfortable game, and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the winning of the small hit of the first special symbol, which is not given the game value to the player due to the game specifications, is displayed to the player with the same display result as the lost eye. By not explicitly indicating it, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the right-handed game is allowed only in the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", and in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state". When a right-handed game is played, it has a predetermined alarm function in order to prevent the player from performing the right-handed game. Specifically, when the passage of the ball is detected by the through gate 67 arranged on the right side of the front view of the game board 13 in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, It is determined that the right-handed game is being executed, and the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 65) is configured to output an alarm sound, while the right-handed game is encouraged in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state". In the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the alarm sound is not output even if the ball passes through the through gate 67. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of the right-handed game by the player in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is not encouraged.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment is provided by adding a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment to the embodiment or exchanging a part or a plurality of parts of the structure of the embodiment with each other. The embodiment may be modified to form the configuration. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification example 1>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, the big hit or small hit in the dynamic display of the special symbol that can be stopped first is extinguished (stopped) by the big hit or small hit in the dynamic display of the special symbol that can be stopped later. It is configured. Instead, the dynamic display of the special symbol that can generate a big hit or small hit that can be stopped later is temporarily suspended (stopped) by the big hit or small hit in the dynamic display of the special symbol that can be stopped first. It may be configured.

With this configuration, it occurs based on the maximum execution time (maximum fluctuation time, that is, 120 seconds) of the dynamic display of 1 of the special symbol encouraged in each gaming state and the dynamic display of the 1. The maximum execution time of the jackpot to be obtained (that is, opening time 10 seconds + 10 rounds x maximum opening time 30 seconds + interval time 1 second x (10 rounds-1) + ending time 10 seconds = 329 seconds) and the game after the jackpot ends. From the total time (ie 120 seconds + 329 seconds + 120 seconds = 569 seconds) with the maximum execution time (maximum fluctuation time, i.e. 120 seconds) of the first dynamic display of 1 executed for the special symbol encouraged in the state. , The maximum execution time (that is, 600 seconds) of the dynamic display of 1 of the special symbol that is not encouraged in each game state is configured to be shorter, and the dynamic display of the non-encouragement special symbol is executed. In the meantime, the dynamic display of the encouraged special symbol is performed at least 5 times (that is, maximum fluctuation time 120 seconds x 5 times = 600 seconds) and at most 120 times (that is, minimum fluctuation time 5 seconds x 120 times = 600 seconds). ) When it is configured to be feasible, and as a result, for example, in the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the encouragement side and the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the non-encouragement side are executed at the same time. , When the jackpot type "probability change B" is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the game transitions to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends, the jackpot in the dynamic display of the first special symbol that generates the jackpot The dynamic display of the second special symbol is interrupted (stopped) based on the occurrence, the jackpot is executed, and then the jackpot or the small hit is won in the encouraged dynamic display of the first special symbol executed after the jackpot. By doing so, it becomes possible to suspend (stop) the dynamic display of the second special symbol that is not encouraged again. This delays the timing at which the dynamic display of the special symbol on the non-encouragement side is confirmed, and makes it easier to prioritize the granting of the game value by the special symbol on the encouragement side over the game value by the special symbol on the non-encouragement side. It is possible to play an efficient game and improve the interest of the game. In addition, all the winning roles (game value) can be provided to the player, and the phenomenon that the game value is not given even though the role is won (so-called loss) can be eliminated, and the player can do so. You can prevent the game from getting excited.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, the end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied with the operation (opening) of the common large winning opening 75 based on the winning of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. There is. Instead of this, it is configured so that the end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied with the operation (opening) of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 based on the winning of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. You may. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of end conditions of the "time saving function" and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification example 3>
In the above embodiment, the small hit type of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the small hit type of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is each one type, that is, the first type. Based on the winning of the small hit game in the special symbol, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is opened once and for 0.1 seconds, and the common large winning opening 75 is based on the winning of the small hit game in the second special symbol. Is configured to open 3 times and for 3.0 seconds. Instead of this, a plurality of small hit types of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and / and a small hit type of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol are provided. You may. Further, it may be configured so that whether or not the "time saving function" is terminated differs depending on the small hit type. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification example 4>
In the above embodiment, as a condition for ending the "time saving function", the "time saving function" is configured to end on the condition that the common grand prize opening 75 is operated (opened) once. Instead of this, the "time saving function" may be terminated on condition that the common large winning opening 75 (or the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65) is operated (opened) a predetermined number of times of 2 or more. .. With this configuration, for example, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", it is possible to provide a state in which the "time saving function" is enabled and a state in which the "time saving function" is disabled for a predetermined period, respectively, and a wide variety of gaming states can be provided. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 5>
In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number table 202a common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, and the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are configured to be the same for each special symbol. Instead of this, a jackpot random number table 202a may be provided for each special symbol, and the jackpot probability and / or the small hit probability may be configured to be different for each special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, the "time saving function" is terminated on the condition that the common grand prize opening 75 is operated based on the winning of the small hit game in the second special symbol. Instead, it is based on the number of operations of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 (may be the common large winning opening 75) based on the winning of the small hit game in the first special symbol, and the winning of the small hit game in the second special symbol. The "time saving function" may be terminated on condition that the total number of operations is the same as the number of operations of the common grand prize opening 75. Specifically, for example, when the total number of operations of the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 or the common large winning opening 75 based on the small hit game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches 50 times, "time reduction". Configure so that the "function" ends. Then, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is activated once based on the small hit game of the first special symbol, and the common large winning opening 75 is activated three times based on the small hit game of the second special symbol. When the small hit game is won in the first special symbol, the number of operations is added by 1, while when the small hit game is won in the second special symbol, the number of operations is added by 3, and the total number of operations is added. Is configured to end the "time saving function" when the number reaches 50 times. With this configuration, the period until the end of the "time saving function" can be made variable depending on the type (type) of the small hit game, the variation of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 7>
In the above embodiment, not only when the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" occurs, but also when the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" occur, the "special figure 2 common large winning opening operation number by small hit" Is configured to be commonly set as a time saving end condition. Instead of this, only when the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" occurs, "special figure 2 common large winning opening operation number by small hit" is set as a time saving end condition, while dynamic display of the second special symbol is encouraged. When the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" that have not been performed occur, the "common large winning opening operation number by special figure 2 small hit" may be configured not to be set as the time reduction end condition. With this configuration, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not generated in the "profit fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not encouraged, and the second special symbol is not generated. A situation occurs in which the "time saving function" is terminated by waiting for the game until the "ultra-long fluctuation" production mode of the dynamic display of the symbol is completed, and the ball is won in the special figure 2 starting port 74 and the common large winning opening 75. It is possible to prevent this from happening, prevent a game that is different from the expected game specifications, and reduce the occurrence of a disadvantage to the hall.

<Modification 8>
In the above embodiment, a limit is set for the number of big hits so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur when the number of big hits reaches the limit. Instead of this, a limit may be set for the number of small hits, and when the number of small hits reaches the limit, a predetermined restriction may be generated for the game. Specifically, for example, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", when the number of small hits reaches 100 times, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" of the transition, no small hit occurs, or Even if a small hit occurs, the game specifications may be set such that the number of times the common large winning opening 75 is opened is smaller than before the limit is reached. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" from continuing and the game value from being given due to excessive small hits, and the player can continuously use the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to equalize the payout rate obtained when playing a game, and it can be configured so that the game value given to the player does not become too high.

<Modification 9>
In the above embodiment, when a jackpot of a predetermined special symbol is won, the limit number of times is updated, the jackpot type is set based on the limit number of times, and then the dynamic display of the other special symbol is derived first. It is determined whether or not the dynamic display in which the jackpot can occur disappears. Instead, when a jackpot of a predetermined special symbol is won, the dynamic display of the predetermined special symbol becomes the dynamic display of the other special symbol before setting the jackpot type based on the limit number of times. It may be configured to determine whether or not it disappears based on the above, and then set the jackpot type after updating the limit number of times. Specifically, for example, before the limit process (S5108 or S5408) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (special figure 2 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 95) shown in FIG. 92, the special figure 2 change process (S5411) of S5111 is performed. It is determined whether or not the jackpot has disappeared in the special figure 1 change process), and the limit number is updated when the jackpot does not disappear, while the limit number is not updated when the jackpot disappears. After that, the jackpot type is selected based on the limit processing based on the limit number of times. With this configuration, after updating the limit number of times, it is determined whether or not the jackpot disappears, and if the jackpot disappears, it is not necessary to re-update the limit number of times, reducing the control burden. Can be done. In addition, the jackpot type can be set according to an appropriate limit number of times, and the game can be performed according to the assumed game specifications to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification example 10>
In the above embodiment, the variation effect of the special symbol encouraged for each gaming state is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation effect of the special symbol that is not encouraged is performed by the third symbol display device 81. It is configured not to be executed in the main display area Dm. Instead of this, the variation effect of the special symbol, which is not encouraged, may be configured to be executed in a predetermined mode in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, the encouraged special symbol variation effect is conspicuous in the main display area Dm (center part, most, the area larger than the non-encouragement special symbol variation effect, and the symbol display mode is darkened. (Execution, etc.) While executing, make the variation effect of the special symbol that is not encouraged less noticeable than the variation effect of the encouraged special symbol in the main display area Dm (corner, small part, encouraged special symbol) Area smaller than the fluctuation effect of, the pattern display mode is thin, etc.) It is configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible for the third symbol display device 81 to grasp the execution mode of the variation effect of a plurality of special symbols.

<Modification 11>
In the above embodiment, the big hit game and the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later are extinguished by both the big hit game and the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol derived earlier. It is configured. Instead, either the jackpot game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol derived earlier will eliminate the jackpot game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later. It may be configured as. Specifically, for example, the big hit game (or small hit game) of the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later only when the dynamic display of the special symbol derived first is the big hit game (small hit game). If the dynamic display of the special symbol derived first is a small hit game (big hit game), the big hit game (or small hit game) of the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later will not be extinguished. Configure to. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the derived game results and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification example 12>
In the above embodiment, when the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 dedicated to the small hit game of the first special symbol is operated. Instead of this, when the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 is not provided and the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Similarly, the common grand prize opening 75 may be configured to operate. With such a configuration, the number of parts can be reduced, the degree of freedom in designing the board surface of the game board 13 can be improved, and the cost related to the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Modification example 13>
In the above embodiment, when the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, when the big hit game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and when the big hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. When the game is won, the common large winning opening 75 is operated, and when the small hit game of the first special symbol is won, the special drawing 1 small winning opening 65 is operated. Instead of this, a special special figure 2 small winning opening that operates when the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is provided, and the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Only in the case, the special figure 2 small winning opening is operated, while the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the big hit game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and When the jackpot game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the common grand prize opening 75 may be activated.

<Modification 14>
In the above embodiment, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" of the right-handed game, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the derivation probability is low and the derivation probability is high. It is configured so that a common effect (similar variation effect of fluctuation time, etc.) is executed when the small hit game is derived. Instead of this, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" of the right-handed game, when a loss result with a low derivation probability is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the derivation probability is high. An effect different from the case where the winning game is derived may be executed, and the game value given to the player may be different based on the execution result.

Specifically, for example, when the loss result of the first special symbol is derived in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" of the right-handed game, the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is selected. The variation time of the dynamic display of the encouraged first special symbol can be derived after the dynamic display of the second special symbol that is not encouraged, and the jackpot game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be derived. May be configured so that In this case, the common grand prize opening 75 based on the small hit game is opened in the dynamic display of the second special symbol despite the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state", and the common grand prize opening 75 is opened. It is possible to add game value based on winning a prize. By constructing in this way, by winning the so-called "pure loss" with a low derivation probability, a different effect and game value from the big hit game or the small hit game are given, and the variation of the game is enriched. It is possible to improve the interest.

<Modification 15>
In the above embodiment, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the other special symbol derived later is changed based on the winning of the big hit game or the small hit game of the dynamic display of one special symbol derived earlier. The fluctuation time of the dynamic display of one special symbol derived earlier and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the other special symbol derived later are configured to be the same. Instead of this, when changing the variation time of the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later based on the winning of the big hit game or the small hit game of the dynamic display of one of the special symbols derived earlier, later The fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the derived special symbol is set to be approximately shorter than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the special symbol derived earlier, and the confirmation time of the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later is set. By diversifying the types of and adjusting the confirmation time, the confirmation time (big hit or small hit start timing) of the dynamic display of the special symbol that can be derived first and the dynamic display of the special symbol that can be derived later It may be configured so that the fixed time is the same. With this configuration, when the fluctuation time is changed, it is not necessary to set a fine fluctuation time, and the control load of each of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Modification 16>
In the above embodiment, in the small hit game of the second special symbol, it is configured to determine whether or not the end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied at the end of the small hit game. Instead of this, in the small hit game of the second special symbol, it may be configured to determine whether or not the end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied at the start or during the execution of the small hit game.

<Modification 17>
In the above embodiment, the transition of the limit number of jackpots (the limit number and when the limit is reached) is not suggested to the player. Instead of this, it may be configured so that the transition of the limit number of jackpots can be directly or indirectly suggested to the player. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is won or when a predetermined number of fluctuations is reached), the limit number of times is directly or indirectly displayed to the player on the third symbol display device 81 by lottery. It may be configured to do so.

<Modification 18>
In the above embodiment, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is not suggested to the player. Instead of this, it may be configured so that it can directly or indirectly suggest to the player whether or not it is in the “latent probability fluctuation state”. Specifically, for example, the third symbol display device directly or indirectly tells the player whether or not the player is in the "latent probability fluctuation state" by lottery when a predetermined game condition is satisfied (for example, when the predetermined number of fluctuations is reached). It may be configured to be displayed on 81.

<Modification 19>
In the above embodiment, as "when the limit is reached", every time the number of jackpots of the special symbol reaches 10, only the jackpot type that does not generate the "probability fluctuation state" in the 10th jackpot is selected. Was there. On the other hand, as "when the limit is reached", a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" up to the 10th jackpot of the special symbol can be selected, and the next jackpot is won, that is, the 11th jackpot. In selecting the jackpot type at the time of jackpot winning, it may be configured to select only from the jackpot types that do not generate a "probability fluctuation state".

<Modification 20>
In the above embodiment, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol changes according to the number of balls. In other words, the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol affects only the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is configured to affect only. Alternatively, the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of one special symbol may be configured to affect the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the other special symbol. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set to the total number of reserved balls of the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is configured to change accordingly. With this configuration, a peculiar fluctuation time can be selected in a state where the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol are mixed. By configuring it, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 21>
In the above embodiment, the probability setting value can be changed in 6 steps of "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value can be changed. Is not limited to 6 stages, and may be changed to any stage.

<Modification 22>
In the above embodiment, the case where the jackpot probability is changed by changing the probability setting value has been described, but the winning probability of a normal symbol or the winning probability of a small hit may be changed.

<Modification example 23>
In addition, when it is determined in the startup process that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") is set from the range of "1" to "6". It may be forcibly set as a value. If it is determined that the probability set value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during the timer interrupt process), it is better not to forcibly set the probability set value to a specific probability set value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to the sudden change in the jackpot probability during the game.

<Modification 24>
In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal (S107 in FIG. 85), it is determined whether the probability set value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, it is forced. Is executed to change the setting and prompts the hall personnel to change the probability setting value, or prompts the hall personnel to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and is normal as the probability setting value. A specific probability setting value within the range may be forcibly set.

<Modification 25>
In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included from the calculation of the RAM determination value.

<Modification 26>
In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. As described above, this may be performed by the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 can be rotated from the on state to the setting change position provided in the direction opposite to the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. It is configured to urge the setting key 501 to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. Also by this, the probability setting value can be easily changed.

<Modification 27>
In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by operating a switch provided separately, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the "setting change mode", and is provided so as to project from the main board through the hole provided in the board box 100. Even if the board box 100 is not opened, it may be operated by a person involved in the hall or the like. This also makes it possible to easily determine the probability set value.

<Modification 28>
In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode" when the power is turned on, the start-up mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an indispensable condition, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Further, it may be configured so that the hall can select whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 is a condition for changing the setting or confirming the setting.

<Modification 29>
In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 is mounted on the main control device 110. On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 503 may be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111.

<Modification 30>
In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and the like can be changed by the setting key 501. On the other hand, the setting key 501 is used to drive the number of prize balls (for example, change from 3 to 5) to be paid out when one prize is won, and the movable accessory that assists the prize in the prize opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), drive width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or member that affects the flow mode of the ball (for example, a stage or croon where the ball can roll) It is possible to change the settings related to the degree of advantage to the player, such as the tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the tilt mode of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). It may be configured.

<Modification 31>
In each of the above embodiments, the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the lateral direction (left direction or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the diagonal direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. You may.

<Modification 32>
In the above embodiment, the big hit random values, the small hit random values, and the lost random values are set as continuous values, and whether or not they are big hits or whether or not they are small hits is range-determined (for example, "0" or more). It was configured to be possible (whether or not it was "49" or less), and was configured to reduce the control load of the main control device 110. On the other hand, each random number value giving the game value (that is, a big hit random value and a small hit random value) may be arranged so as to be distributed (dissipated) instead of being arranged continuously. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated by "0 to 999", the jackpot random number value is set to "7,341,555,777,831" and the small hit random number value is set to "77,175". , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845 ".

Here, if a value that becomes a jackpot random number value (for example, a jackpot if it is "0 to 50" in the low probability state and the high probability state) exists continuously regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is that. There is a possibility that the value can be predicted from the outside, and there is a high possibility that a jackpot will be illegally assigned. Therefore, by configuring as in the above-described modification, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random value that gives the game value from the outside, enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the above-described modification, the jackpot random number value for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a are not duplicated. The jackpot random number value may be set. By configuring in this way, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot can be changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Can be made difficult to predict, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 33>
In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type random number C2 are updated by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 88) (so-called soft random number). On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be updated by a random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random number (so-called hard random number). With such a configuration, it is difficult to grasp the random number value being updated from the outside, and the security performance can be improved.

<Modification 34>
In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is configured to increase evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, each time the set value increases, the jackpot random number value (or small hit random number value) may be increased unevenly or at a predetermined rate. Specifically, for example, the jackpot random number value is increased by "2" for the set values "1" to "3", while the jackpot random number value is increased to "5" for the set values "4" to "6". Increase in increments. With this configuration, the game value that can be given by the setting difference changes greatly, and it is possible to provide a game with intonation (sharpness) due to the setting difference, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 35>
In the above embodiment, the corresponding combination in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the jackpot type counter (not shown) that determines the content of the jackpot is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the jackpot type is changed. It may be configured so that a setting difference occurs due to the change.

<Modification 36>
In the above embodiment, the random number value that gives the game value (that is, the jackpot random number value) is changed according to the setting change, and the changed amount is compensated from the random number value that does not give the game value (that is, the lost random number value). It was configured like this. On the other hand, when the random number value to which the game value is given (for example, the jackpot random number value) is changed due to the setting change, the changed amount is used as the random value to give another game value (for example, the small hit random value). ) May be supplemented. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a difference in the game value that can be given for each setting, provide a game with intonation (sharpness) for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 37>
In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be in the order of "range of jackpot random number value", "range of lost random number value", and "range of small hit random number value". Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "the range of the jackpot random number value", "the range of the small hit random number value", "the range of the jackpot random number value (hereinafter referred to as" the range of the re-big hit random number value ")", " Each random number value may be defined (set) so as to be in the sequence of "range of lost random number values". Here, as the "range of the re-big hit random value", the increase in the big hit random value due to the setting change is configured to correspond. By configuring in this way, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and as the setting is changed. The range of random numbers that do not change (that is, big hit random values and small hit random values that do not change even if the settings are changed) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the hit / fail judgment control program, the basic hit / fail judgment of the fixed random number value is standardized for all the set values, and the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is additionally added according to the set value. It is possible to facilitate the design of the control program and reduce the development man-hours.

<Modification 38>
In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be in the order of "range of jackpot random number value", "range of lost random number value", and "range of small hit random number value". Was. On the other hand, each random number value may be defined (set) in descending order (or small number) of random number values.

<Modification 39>
In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be in the order of "range of jackpot random number value", "range of lost random number value", and "range of small hit random number value". Was. On the other hand, the "big hit random number range" that increases with the setting change is adjacent (adjacent) to the random number value that decreases with the setting change (that is, the "missing random number range"). It may be configured to be specified (set) in the table 202a. Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be in the order of "range of small hit random number value", "range of jackpot random number value", and "range of lost random number value". .. By configuring in this way, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and as the setting is changed. The range of random values that do not change (that is, small hit random values) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the control program for determining whether the small hit is correct or not, the determination of the small hit random value is standardized for all the set values, and the increase in the large hit random value due to the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value. It is possible to facilitate the design of the control program and reduce the development man-hours.

<Modification example 40>
In the above embodiment, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is improved (doubled or more). On the other hand, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the small hit probability of the special symbol may be improved. Further, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the degree of increase in the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be set to twice or more (for example, 10 times). Furthermore, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", even if both the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are set to be improved (for example, the jackpot probability is 5 times and the small hit probability is also 5 times). Good.

<Modification 41>
In the above embodiment, the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol and the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol are configured to be equal to each other. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol, or the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol may be set. The probability may be configured to be lower than the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol.

<Modification 42>
In the above embodiment, when the player enters the "probability fluctuation state", the so-called loop type game specification is configured in which the "probability fluctuation state" is maintained until the next big hit occurs. On the other hand, no matter which jackpot is won after the jackpot ends, a game in which a "probability fluctuation state" (so-called ST type) is given with the execution of a predetermined number of dynamic displays as the end condition after the jackpot ends. It may be configured by specifications. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and contribute to improving the interest of the games.

<Modification 43>
In the above embodiment, in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol, the setting difference is generated in the jackpot probability in both states. On the other hand, the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low probability state or the high probability state) is eliminated, and the setting difference is provided in the jackpot probability in the other state (high probability state or the low probability state). You may.

<Modification 44>
In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated from the lost random number value. On the other hand, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value may be compensated from the small hit random number and the lost random number value. With this configuration, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of jackpot random numbers due to setting changes from each of the small hit random numbers and the lost random numbers, and the changes in the jackpot random numbers are fixed. It is not necessary to supplement from the predetermined random number value of 1. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from the predetermined random number value of 1 by the change of the jackpot random number value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification example 45>
In the above embodiment, a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (that is, a jackpot type “probability A” or “probability variation B”) and a disadvantageous jackpot that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous jackpot (that is, a jackpot type “time reduction”). Regardless of whether it is a big hit with "A" or "time saving B"), the number of big hits is counted, and when the number of big hits reaches the limit number, a disadvantageous big hit is forcibly selected. It was. On the other hand, it may be configured so that it is added to the limit number of times only for a specific jackpot, and the limit number of times is not counted for other jackpots other than the specific jackpot. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot type "probability variation A" or a jackpot type "probability variation B", which are jackpots that are highly advantageous to the player, occur, the number of jackpots is counted and the total number is predetermined. When the limit number of times is reached, the unfavorable jackpot is forcibly selected. On the other hand, when a jackpot type "time reduction A" and a jackpot type "time reduction B" (or a small hit), which are jackpots (hits) that are less advantageous for the player, occur, the number of jackpots is not counted and is limited. Configure so that it does not affect the number of times. With this configuration, when a jackpot type that is less advantageous to the player is won, the jackpot that is advantageous to the player can be given up to the limit number of times without counting as the limit number of times. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction due to the appearance of a jackpot, which is less advantageous to the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 46>
In the above embodiment, when the number of big hits reaches the limit number of times, a disadvantageous big hit (that is, a big hit type "time saving A" or "time saving B") is selected with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, when the number of jackpots reaches the limit number, the disadvantageous jackpot is not always selected, and the selection probability of the disadvantageous jackpot before the limit number is reached is used to select the disadvantageous jackpot when the limit number is reached. It may be configured to increase the probability. Specifically, for example, before the limit is reached, the selection rate for the advantage is 80% and the selection rate for the disadvantage is 20%, while when the limit is reached, the selection rate for the advantage is 20% and the selection for the disadvantage is 20%. The ratio is set to 80%. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 47>
In the above embodiment, the ordinary electric service 71b is arranged with respect to the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, and the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a (special figure 2 starting port 74) is arranged according to the opening / closing mode of the ordinary electric service 71b. It is configured so that the inflow mode of the ball into the ball is different. On the other hand, the ordinary electric service 71b is arranged with respect to the left side special figure 1 starting port 64, and the inflow mode of the ball into the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 differs depending on the opening / closing mode of the ordinary electric service 71b. It may be configured as. Further, the ordinary electric service 71b is arranged with respect to the special figure 2 starting port 74, and the flow mode of the ball into the special figure 2 starting port 74 is configured to be different depending on the opening / closing mode of the ordinary electric service 71b. May be good.

<Modification 48>
In the above embodiment, the ball is prevented from flowing into the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a in the closed state of the ordinary electric service 71b, and the ball is allowed to flow into the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a in the open state. doing. On the other hand, in the open state of the ordinary electric service 71b, the inflow of the ball into the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a is blocked (impossible or difficult), and in the closed state, the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a. It may be configured to allow the inflow of balls into.

<Modification 49>
In the above embodiment, the normal electric service 71b that is displaced between the protruding state and the immersive state is used, and the gametability of the present invention is realized by changing the immersion timing and the immersion time of the ordinary electric service 71b in each gaming state. It is configured in. On the other hand, the gameability of the present invention may be realized by using a rotary blade member and changing the operation timing and operation time of the blade member in each gaming state. Specifically, for example, when the blade members are arranged on the left and right sides of the right side special drawing 1 starting port 71a and the blade members are in the non-operating state (for example, the upright state), the ball is outside the blade member (non-rolling side). It is configured to collide with and flow down to the downstream side as it is. On the other hand, in the operating state in which the blade member is rotated (in a state of tilting 120 degrees to the right from the upright state), the ball collides with the inside of the blade member (rolling side), and the inside of the blade member is the right side special drawing 1 starting port. It is configured to roll toward the 71a side. With this configuration, the rotation mode of the blade member is easier to recognize whether or not the region in which the blade member itself operates is driven larger than the drive mode due to the appearance of the normal electric service 71b. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether or not the player has won the prize with the variable display.

<Modification example 50>
In the above embodiment, as the arrangement position of the left side special figure 1 starting port 64, only the ball fired in the left-handed game can win a prize, and the ball fired in the right-handed game is difficult or impossible to win. It is arranged at the position. On the other hand, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 is arranged, or the winning auxiliary member is arranged so that the ball launched in the right-handed game can win a prize in the left side special figure 1 starting port 64. It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to store the maximum number of reserved symbols for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the jackpot where the right-handed game is performed, and the reserved ball of the first special symbol after the jackpot ends. It is possible to suppress the event that the small hit game of the second special symbol may appear due to the fact that the number is not stored, and to realize the game playability according to the game specifications.

<Modification 51>
In the above embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a high probability state of a special symbol is generated according to the jackpot type of the jackpot. On the other hand, a probability variation region is provided inside a predetermined winning opening (for example, the common grand prize opening 75), and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is determined by whether or not the ball passes through the probability variation region with a high probability state of the special symbol. You may decide whether or not to. Further, instead of the probability variation area inside the common large winning opening 75, a V winning opening is provided, and the game value different from the high probability state of the special symbol depending on whether or not the ball enters the V winning opening, for example, V A jackpot may be generated by winning a ball into the winning opening.

<Modification 52>
It may be configured so that the number of time reductions given is different based on each jackpot type. Specifically, for example, in "time saving A" where the "time saving function" ends based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the time saving number is given 100 times, while in "time saving B", the time saving number is given 50 times. Constitute. Further, in the "time saving function" in which the "time saving function" ends based on the number of times the special symbol changes, the number of times the first special symbol changes 100 times or the number of times the second special symbol changes 50 times. While the "time saving function" is configured to end when the condition ends first, in "time saving B", the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 50 times, or the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 100 times. It is configured so that the "time saving function" is terminated when any of the conditions of is terminated first. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification example 53>
Special figure 2 In "Probability change A" where the "time saving function" ends based on the number of operations of the common large winning opening 75 due to a small hit, the "time saving function" is activated by operating the common large winning opening 75 once. A "probability change A1" that ends and a "probability change A2" that ends the "time saving function" when the common grand prize opening 75 is operated 10 times may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to make a difference whether or not the "time saving function" ends according to the number of times the small hit game of the second special symbol is won. Therefore, for example, "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". In, the "time saving function" can be extinguished depending on how quickly a large number of small hit games are won, and the game value given to the player can be different. Therefore, the variety of games can be enriched and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest.

<Modification 54>
The display mode and display position of the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 are changed to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in which the main display area Dm is used to vary. It may be configured to be changed accordingly. Specifically, for example, corresponding to the special symbol executed in the main display area Dm, the executed fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are positioned on the upper side or displayed in Arabic numerals or red. The 4th symbol display areas 88 and 87 that are not executed are displayed on the lower side, displayed in a notation different from the above Arabic numerals (for example, Chinese numerals and Roman numerals), and in a color different from red (for example, Chinese numerals and Roman numerals) For example, it is configured to be displayed in blue). With this configuration, it is difficult to recognize which special symbol is being executed while identifying and displaying the variable effect being executed, and the player is aware of the currently staying gaming state. By making it difficult to configure, it is possible to create a playability for guessing the game state and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 55>
Regarding the alarm sound, the alarm sound is not output when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the gaming state where the left-handed game is recommended, but is output when a specific condition is satisfied. May be good. Specifically, for example, due to the restrictions of the board surface design of the game board 13, in the left-handed game, it is difficult or impossible to win the special figure 1 small winning opening 65, while in the right-handed game, the special figure 1 small In the case of a board configuration that had to be configured so that the winning opening 65 could be won, a malicious player first, in a gaming state in which the right-handed game is not encouraged, first, the first special symbol by the left-handed game. While winning the small hit game, the right-handed game is performed at the timing when the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 can be opened based on the winning of the small hit game, and the ball launched in the right-handed game is special. FIG. 1 There is a possibility that an illegal game is performed in which the small winning opening 65 is won. In this case, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 based on the small hit game winning of the first special symbol by the left-handed game can be opened (for example, during the variable production of the small hit game winning, or It is configured to output an alarm sound on condition that the derivation of the result of the small hit game is determined) and the through gate 67 is passed by the right-handed game. With this configuration, an alarm sound is output only for the malicious player's act of intentionally trying to get more balls than the game specification, and the right of good intentions due to an unfamiliar player or an operation error. By not outputting an alarm sound for a hitting game, it is possible to suppress an illegal game and also suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 56>
Special figure 1 small winning opening 65 (common large winning opening 75) can be opened in the predetermined first opening mode, and left-handed game is encouraged in a small advantageous gaming state, and special figure 1 small winning opening 65 (common large winning opening 65) There is a case where the mouth 75) can be opened in the second opening mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the first opening mode, and a right-handed game is encouraged, and due to the limitation of the board surface configuration, Special Figure 1 Small winning opening 65 (common large winning opening 75) is configured so that right-handed games are easier to win than left-handed games, and malicious players are encouraged to play right-handed games. In the small advantageous game state that has not been played, first, while winning the small hit game of the first special symbol by the left-handed game, the timing at which the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 can be opened based on the winning of the small hit game is set. A right-handed game is played in anticipation, and the ball fired in the right-handed game is made to win a prize in the special figure 1 small winning opening 65, and an illegal game is performed in an attempt to obtain more balls than the expected game specifications. There is a risk of being damaged. In this case, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small winning opening 65 based on the small hit game winning of the first special symbol by the left-handed game can be opened only in the small advantageous game state (for example, the small hit game winning). It is configured to output an alarm sound on condition that the through gate 67 is passed by the right-handed game while the fluctuation effect is being produced or the result of the small hit game is determined). With this configuration, an alarm sound is output only for the malicious player's act of intentionally trying to get more balls than the game specification, and the right of good intentions due to an unfamiliar player or an operation error. By not outputting an alarm sound for a hitting game, it is possible to suppress an illegal game and also suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 57>
The probability of hitting a normal symbol may be set to be about the same in any gaming state. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" or "time shortened state" where the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low, the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to 50/100 and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high "probability fluctuation". In the "state" and "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to be 50/100, 51/100, etc., which is the same as or equal to the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal game state". To do. With this configuration, regarding the opening of the ordinary electric service 71b based on the hit of the ordinary symbol, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the ordinary electric service 71b are taken into consideration, and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is not taken into consideration. By making it possible to calculate the ball output rate and the like, it is possible to facilitate the design of game specifications in each game state.

<Modification example 58>
The variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbol selected after the jackpot may be different for each jackpot symbol won by the jackpot. Specifically, for example, if one of the 1 symbol, 3 symbols, 5 symbols, and 7 symbols, which are jackpot symbols that can generate a "probability fluctuation state", is won, the first symbol in the "probability fluctuation state". Both the special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to shift to the "both long fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which a relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected. Further, when three symbols are won, the first special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively long fluctuation time in the "probability fluctuation state", while the second special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively short fluctuation time. It is configured to shift to "1 long special 2 short fluctuation probability fluctuation state". Furthermore, if 5 symbols are won, both the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol will shift to the "both short fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which a relatively short fluctuation time can be easily selected in the "probability fluctuation state". Configure to. Further, when the 7 symbols are won, the first special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively short fluctuation time, while the second special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively long fluctuation time. It is configured to shift to "special 1 short special 2 long fluctuation probability fluctuation state". With this configuration, the special symbols that can be derived first can be different depending on the type of the jackpot symbol in the game state after the jackpot. For example, which special symbol stops first or not. Therefore, the probability that the jackpot will appear first can be different for each game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 59>
The fluctuation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbol may be configured to be different based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation effect of the first to tenth special symbols after the end of the jackpot is configured so that a relatively long fluctuation time can be easily selected. Regarding the variation effect of the special symbol after the first time, it is configured so that a relatively short variation time can be easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by enriching the variation of the game while providing the game with sharpness.

<Modification example 60>
A plurality of types of hits for ordinary symbols may be provided. Specifically, for example, the ordinary electric service 71b is opened once, the ordinary electric service 71b is opened three times, and the ordinary electric service 71b is opened three times and for a long time. 3 times long open hit. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification example 61>
In the above embodiment, the gaming state is advantageous for the player in the order of "normal game state"->"time reduction state"->"latent probability fluctuation state"->"probability fluctuation state"->"small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". .. On the other hand, the game specifications may be set so that the "time shortening state", the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the "probability fluctuation state" are positioned as the game states that are more disadvantageous to the player than the "normal game state". .. Specifically, for example, the start port of the first special symbol is provided on the upstream side of the start port of the second special symbol to which the normal electric service 71b is attached, and in the "normal game state", the normal electric service 71b operates. Due to the difficulty, it is easier for the player to receive a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, which is more advantageous for the player than the second special symbol. It is configured so that it is easy to receive a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the person. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification example 62>
In the above embodiment, when the "time saving function" is given, it is configured to end depending on whether the number of times the special symbol is changed is performed a predetermined number of times or the common grand prize opening 75 is operated a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the "time saving function" is given, the "time saving function" ends only when a big hit of a special symbol occurs, and the "time saving function" does not end under other conditions, that is, the "time saving function" until the next big hit. May be configured to be given indefinitely. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification example 63>
In the above embodiment, by winning a predetermined jackpot, a game value advantageous to the player such as a "time saving function" is given. On the other hand, when a predetermined condition other than the jackpot is satisfied, a "time saving function" that is advantageous for the player and a so-called ceiling function that causes a jackpot state may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification example 64>
In the above embodiment, it is configured so that the player can be clearly identified when the state shifts to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". On the other hand, it may be difficult for the player to identify the transition to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". In this case, the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is configured in the same manner as the execution mode of the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" to make it difficult to identify, and as a special figure as an end condition of the "time reduction function". The number of operations of the common large winning opening 75 based on the two small hits is set to a plurality of times (for example, 50 times). Then, before the number of operations of the common large winning opening 75 based on the special figure 2 small hit reaches the expiration (that is, 50 times), a predetermined lottery result (for example, a specific symbol (7 symbols, etc.) in the first special symbol). ), It is configured to shift to the gaming state having the highest gaming value for the player. With this configuration, how to achieve the above condition by the time the number of operations of the common big prize opening 75 based on the special figure 2 small hit expires at the end of the big hit (so-called ceiling preparation mode). It is possible to create gameplay, enrich the variety of games, and improve the interest of games.

<Modification 65>
In the above embodiment, a so-called probability variation limiter function is provided in which a jackpot type in which a "probability fluctuation state" does not occur is selected for each predetermined number of jackpots. On the other hand, a so-called time saving limiter function may be provided in which a jackpot type that does not generate the "time saving function" is selected for each predetermined number of jackpots. By installing the time saving limiter function, it becomes difficult for the ordinary electric service 71b to operate every predetermined number of big hits, and even if the "probability fluctuation state" is won, the game value equivalent to the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" is achieved. It can be in an acquireable state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 66>
When a right-handed suggestion display suggesting a right-handed game appears, the display positions of the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 may be changed. Specifically, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, while the right-handed game is encouraged. In the "probability fluctuation state" or the like, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed in the right small area Ds3, while the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the left small area Ds1. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game specifications according to the game state.

<Modification 67>
In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 transmits a limit number of times command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a jackpot is won. On the other hand, it may be configured to send a limit number of times command when the power is turned on. Since the voice lamp control device 113 does not have a so-called backup function, once the power is cut off, the limit number of times cannot be recognized until the next jackpot is won and the limit number of times command is transmitted. It ends up. Therefore, by transmitting the limit number of times command when the power is turned on and executing the effect recognizing the limit number of times in the voice lamp control device 113 from the time when the power is turned on, there is no discrepancy in the effect contents and the variation of the effect is enriched. be able to.

<Modification example 68>
In the above embodiment, regarding the dynamic display of a plurality of special symbols that can be executed at the same time, the variation effect of the special symbol encouraged according to the game state is performed in the main display area Dm, and the variation effect of the non-encouragement special symbol is mainly performed. It is configured not to be performed in the display area Dm. On the other hand, regarding the production of a plurality of symbols (for example, a special symbol and a normal symbol) that can be executed at the same time, the priority order of the effects to be executed is determined by the game state, the game specifications, the game value to be given, the execution frequency, and the like. Is provided in advance, and the production according to the priority order is preferentially executed, and for the production with a low priority order, the player has a higher priority than the production such as reducing the scale of the production or not executing the production itself. It may be configured to be difficult to recognize. Specifically, when the variable effect of the first special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the effect related to the variable display of the normal symbol having a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special symbol is displayed. 3 If the symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226 does not execute or the effect scale is reduced, or if the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the game is played from the second special symbol. The effect related to the variable display of the ordinary symbol having a low game value that can be given to the person may not be executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226, or the effect scale may be reduced. By configuring in this way, the player does not feel annoyed by reducing (eliminating) the scale of the low-priority production while preferentially executing the production that the player wants to recognize when performing the game. The production can be executed.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be transmitted directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S1111) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a case where the corresponding fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b are always set to ON when any stop type command is received will be described. However, when each variation pattern command is received and the corresponding stop type command is received, the variation start flags 223a and 223b may be set to ON. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a strange variation effect when one of the stop type commands is received without receiving each variation pattern command.

Further, the fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b may be set to ON at the timing when each fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation effect process (S1110) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by each variation pattern command is displayed by the display control device based on the fact that the variation start flags 223a and 223b are turned on. Each display variation pattern command to be notified to 114 may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive each stop type command, each variation effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 based on the respective display variation pattern commands to the third symbol display device 81. Can be executed. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing when each stop type command is received. , May be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, in the demonstration effect, the third symbol composed of the main symbols not given the numbers "0" to "9" may be stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbol with a number or the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided and the third symbol is provided. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the display device 81. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous advance notice effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37) performs the variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. Alternatively, the sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are lit or blinked, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. In addition, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but displays the symbols by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is performed, so that the player is given an effect different from the usual one. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, audio output from audio output device 226, or lighting / blinking of illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning prize is obtained. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the winning / failing determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation effect. When performing the advance notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. As a result, a wider variety of continuous notice effects can be executed. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). , Or a combination thereof), a plurality of continuous advance notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect may be prepared.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous advance notice effect different from the variable effect effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or when the continuous advance notice effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbol, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the reception of the continuous advance notice command is determined by the command determination process executed by the MPU of the display control device 114, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on and the other stop symbol determination flags are turned off. It may be set to. In the command judgment processing, after the stop identification command processing, the processing corresponding to the continuous warning command is executed in the other command processing, so the chance eye is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. It is set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect, the player can have a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 adds "1" when there is a prize (starting prize) in the left side special figure 1 starting port 64, the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a or the special figure 2 starting port 74. In response to the hold ball number command that notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the held ball number, the voice lamp control device includes the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer as they are in connection with the start winning. Although the case of transmitting to 113 has been described, the type of counter included in the hold ball count command may be a part of counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of these values by including information indicating the values of each counter in a command other than the reserved ball count command. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is included in the command in any of the look-ahead information first to fourth areas corresponding to the hold count based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the hold ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a hold ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, whether it is a jackpot or not, a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and a loss based on the value of each counter indicated by the command. In the case of, a part or all of the deviation type, etc. is judged, and these judgment results are replaced with the value of each counter indicated by the command, or together with a part or all of the value of the counter. It may be stored in RAM 223.

In the above embodiment, the left side special figure 1 start port 64, the right side special figure 1 start port 71a, the special figure 2 start port 74, and three start ports are game as start ports for starting the big hit lottery when the ball is entered. The case where it is arranged on the board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one, two, or four or more. There may be more than one. When there are four or more starting ports, a corresponding reserved ball count counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting port, and each starting port is held with a winning ball to the corresponding starting port. You may want to count the number. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held may be set for each starting port in accordance with the starting winning prize to the corresponding starting port.

Further, when there are four or more starting ports, the number of reserved balls command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in order to notify that the holding has been performed due to the winning of the starting port It may include information indicating whether the hold was made by winning a prize at the starting port of. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started may also include information indicating which start port holds the fluctuation effect. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each start port, and when a hold ball number command is received, a hold ball number counter for the start port indicated by the hold ball number command is provided. When the number of reserved balls is set in, and the fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of reserved balls can be counted for each starting port by decrementing the number of reserved balls counter for the starting port indicated by the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, when a plurality of starting ports are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in association with the winning of each starting port (starting winning) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning is the command acquired in connection with the start winning in any of the starting ports. Information indicating the existence may be included. Further, the variation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may also include information indicating which start port the variation effect is associated with the start winning. .. Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area is prepared for each start port, and each counter value transmitted from the main control device 110 in association with the start winning to the corresponding start port is supported. It may be stored in the look-ahead information storage area. As a result, each time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the start port that has detected the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. it can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending fluctuation effect can be held in the voice lamp control device 113 for each start port. Therefore, when the probability of winning a jackpot, the probability of sorting a jackpot type, the probability of sorting a missed type, etc. differ depending on the starting port that won the starting prize, whether or not each variation effect is a jackpot in the look-ahead processing. It is possible to correctly determine the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the loss type in the case of a miss, etc. based on which starting port the starting prize is awarded. Further, when the variation effect based on the start prize for 1 start port is performed in preference to the variation effect based on the start prize for other start ports, the variation based on the start prize for 1 start port is performed. The look-ahead processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the effect, and the number of hold times of the variable effect that is the most recent big hit can be correctly determined.

Further, when a plurality of start ports are provided, the voice lamp control device 113 continuously gives notice when the value of each counter acquired based on the start winning to the start port is received from the main control device 110 by a command. When the start of the effect is decided, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed over all the variable effects (holding balls) held at that time regardless of the start opening where the start winning is given. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a plurality of starting ports are provided and a variable effect for winning a prize at one starting port is preferentially executed over a variable effect for winning a prize at another starting port, the variation effect is given priority. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the pre-reading result of the counter value acquired for the winning of the starting port where the variable effect is executed. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is not started for this variable effect. If the continuous advance notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the low-priority start port and the variable effect is continuously held at the high-priority start port, the continuous advance notice effect is quite finished. There is a risk of not doing so. On the other hand, in this modification, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is applied to this variable effect. Is not started, so it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, winning a prize and passing through the through gate 67 to the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and the special figure 2 starting port 74 are respectively suspended up to four times. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Further, for winning a prize in the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and the special figure 2 starting port 74, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port. The maximum number of reserved balls at the starting port of the above may be any number other than "4". Further, the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, but may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on winning a prize in the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a and the special figure 2 starting port 74 is numerically displayed in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, the areas divided into four may be displayed in different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns) by the number of reserved balls, and may emit light from a lamp or the like separately from the special symbol display device 37. A member may be provided, and the light emitting member may be configured to notify the number of reserved balls.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is horizontally The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed when the fluctuation effect is executed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed fluctuation. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Group A: Time saving ends with special electric operation>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area. Based on this, a winning / failing lottery is performed, and when an advantageous state such as a win is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed specific ball-entry means is opened and the player is given a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A predetermined ball entry means (for example, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, or the special figure 2 starting port 74) through which a game ball can enter.
A state in which the game ball is difficult to flow into or cannot flow into the predetermined ball entry means (for example, a closed state) and a state in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined ball entry means (for example, an open state). A variable first movable means (for example, ordinary electric service 71b) and
A first driving means (for example, ordinary electric service control processing (S204)) capable of changing the first movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state
Information acquisition means (for example, first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage area 203e) for acquiring predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Specific ball-entry means different from the predetermined ball-entry means (for example, common large winning opening 75) and
A second movable means (for example, a common large) that can be changed into a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the specific ball entry means or a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific ball entry means. Winning opening opening / closing plate 75a) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second drive means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of changing the second movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state, and
The gaming state can be changed to at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a state without the "time saving function") and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state (for example, a state with the "time saving function"). In a game machine equipped with a game state changing means (for example, a time saving flag 203 m)
The first driving means is
When a predetermined condition (for example, winning in a variable display of a normal symbol) is satisfied in the first gaming state, the first movable means can be moved for a first period (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time). 1 Drive mode means (for example, a normal electric service opening table 202k in a state without "time saving function") and
A second driving mode means (for example, 5.0 seconds × 3 times) capable of moving the first movable means for a second period (for example, 5.0 seconds × 3 times) longer than the first period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. For example, it is equipped with a normal electric service opening table 202k) with the "time saving function".
The game state changing means
It is characterized by including a driving mode changing means (for example, S6405 of the small hit end processing (S6016)) capable of changing the gaming state based on the driving mode of the second movable means by the second driving means. Game machine A0 to play.

According to the game machine A0, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and the game ball is difficult to flow into the predetermined ball entry means or cannot flow into the predetermined ball entry means by the first movable means. It is configured to be changeable to an inflowable state in which the game ball can flow into the ball means, and the first movable means is configured to be changeable to an inflow difficult state or an inflowable state by the first driving means. Then, the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means, and the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a specific ball entry means different from the predetermined ball entry means is provided, and the second movable means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means or the inflow difficult state in which the ball cannot enter, and the game to the specific ball entry means. It is configured to be changeable to an inflowable state in which a sphere can flow. Then, by using the determination result by the determination means, the second movable means can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by the second driving means. Further, the game state can be changed to at least a predetermined first game state and a second game state different from the first game state by the game state changing means. Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, the first movable means can be moved for the first period by the first driving mode means provided in the first driving means, and is predetermined in the second gaming state. When the condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for a second period longer than the first period by the second drive mode means provided in the first drive means. Then, the driving mode changing means provided in the gaming state changing means is configured so that the gaming state can be changed based on the driving mode of the second movable means by the second driving means. As a result, the game state is changed based on the inflow mode of the game ball into the specific entry means which can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by using the determination result of the determination means. The inflow mode of the game ball into the ball means can be changed. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine A0
By using the determination result of the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol). A dynamic display execution means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) is provided.
The game state changing means
It is characterized by comprising an execution number changing means (for example, special figure 1 time saving counter 203n) capable of changing the game state based on the execution number of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means. Game machine A1.

According to the game machine A1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A0, the following effects are played. That is, by using the determination result of the determination means by the dynamic display execution means, the display means executes the dynamic display of the identification information. Then, the execution number changing means is configured so that the game state can be changed based on the execution number of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means. As a result, in addition to the inflow mode of the game ball into the specific entry means, the game state can be changed depending on the number of times the dynamic display is executed, so that the inflow mode of the game ball into the predetermined entry means can be changed. This has the effect of increasing the variety of games and improving the enjoyment of the games.

In the game machine A0 or A1
The determination means
Based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, at least a first result (for example, a loss result) that does not give the player a game value and a first result that can give the player a predetermined first game value can be given. Derivation of one of two results (for example, a small hit game) and a third result (for example, a big hit game) that can give the player a second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value. Configured to be possible
The driving mode changing means
At least, when the second result is derived by the determination means, the gaming machine A2 is characterized by changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A0 or A1, the following effects are played. That is, at least the first result in which the player is not given a game value and the second result in which the player can be given a predetermined first game value based on the predetermined information acquired by the determination means. And a third result that can give the player a second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value can be derived. Then, at least when the second result is derived by the determination means, the driving mode changing means changes the second gaming state to the first gaming state. As a result, at least when the second result is derived based on the predetermined information acquired based on the entry into the predetermined ball entry means, the second gaming state can be changed to the first gaming state. Since the inflow mode of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means can be changed from the inflowable state to the inflowable difficult state, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine A1 or A2
When the third result is derived by the determination means, the number-of-times priority gaming state (for example, "probability fluctuation state" or "time" in which the game state is easily changed by the execution number changing means from the driving mode changing means. A game that can at least generate a "shortened state") and a drive priority gaming state (for example, a "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") in which the gaming state is more likely to be changed by the driving mode changing means than the execution number changing means. The gaming machine A3 comprising a state generating means (for example, a jackpot end processing (S6012)).

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the third result is derived by the determination means, at least the number-priority gaming state in which the game state is more likely to be changed by the execution number changing means than the driving mode changing means, and the driving mode changing means by the execution number changing means. The drive priority game state in which the game state is easily changed by the game state is configured to be able to be generated by the game state generation means. As a result, by making the conditions under which the gaming state can be changed different according to the gaming state, it is possible to create a game property as to which of the changing conditions of the gaming state is satisfied. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine A3
The game state generating means
A common setting means (for example, S6204 to S6208 of the jackpot end processing (S6012)) for setting both the execution number changing means and the driving mode changing means in the number-of-times priority gaming state and the driving priority gaming state is provided. A game machine A4 characterized by being.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A3, the following effects are played. That is, the common setting means provided in the game state generating means sets both the execution number changing means and the driving mode changing means in the number-of-times priority gaming state and the driving priority gaming state. As a result, it is possible to standardize the setting process in which the game state can be changed regardless of which game state is generated, and it is possible to simplify the program and reduce the processing load.

In any of the game machines A2 to A4
The predetermined ball entry means
With a predetermined predetermined first ball entry means (for example, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a).
A predetermined second ball entry means (for example, a special figure 2 starting port 74) different from the predetermined first ball entry means is provided.
The second driving means is
When the third result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is brought into a flowable state. And at the same time
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second result is derived based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is made available for inflow. A5.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines A2 to A4, the following effects are played. That is, as the predetermined ball entry means, a predetermined predetermined first ball entry means and a predetermined second ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means are provided. Then, when the third result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means flows in by the second drive means. In addition to being in a possible state, when the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means can also flow in by the second drive means. Be in a state. As a result, the game value can be given to the player by the specific ball-entry means common to the case where the third result is derived and the case where the second result is derived, the number of parts is reduced, and the game machine can be used. It has the effect of reducing such costs.

In the game machine A5
The first driving means is
In the number-of-times priority gaming state, the first movable means is driven so that the game ball can easily enter the predetermined first ball entry means from the predetermined second entry means.
The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in the drive priority gaming state, the first movable means is driven so that the game ball can easily enter the predetermined second entry means from the predetermined first entry means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A5, the following effects are played. That is, the first driving means drives the first movable means so that the game ball can easily enter the predetermined first entering means from the predetermined second entering means in the number-of-times priority gaming state, and in the driving priority gaming state. , The first movable means is driven so that the game ball can easily enter the predetermined second entry means from the predetermined first entry means. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved by changing the predetermined ball entry means that the game ball can easily enter according to the game state.

In the game machine A5 or A6
Inflow when the second result is derived based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, which is provided differently from the predetermined entry means or the specific entry means. Equipped with a special ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 small winning opening 65) that can change from a difficult state to an inflowable state
When the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, the inflow mode of the game ball into the special entry means is changed.
The game state changing means
The gaming machine A7 is characterized by comprising a gaming state maintaining means for maintaining the gaming state regardless of the inflow mode of the special ball entering means.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5 or A6, the following effect is produced, that is, a special ball entry means provided different from the predetermined ball entry means or the specific ball entry means is determined by the determination means. When the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means, the inflow difficult state can be changed to the inflowable state. Then, when the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, the inflow mode of the game ball into the special entry means is changed. Here, the game state is maintained by the game state maintaining means provided in the game state changing means, regardless of the inflow mode of the special ball entry means. As a result, the second result regarding the predetermined first ball entry means and the second result regarding the predetermined second entry means can be different from each other in the ball entry means in which the game ball can flow in. It has the effect of creating a playability of whether or not the game state is changed depending on whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, enriching the variation of the game, and improving the interest of the game. is there.

In any of the game machines A7
The gaming machine A8 comprising an inhibiting means (for example, an obstacle member 65c or a nail) for inhibiting the inflow of the gaming ball into the special ball entering means.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A7, the following effects are played. That is, the inhibition means inhibits the inflow of the game ball into the special entry means. As a result, even if the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means, the special entry is in a state where the inflow is possible based on the second result. The inflow of game balls into the ball means can be blocked by the blocking means. Therefore, by making the second result regarding the predetermined first ball entry means and the second result regarding the predetermined second ball entry means different whether or not the game ball can flow into the ball entry means, the variation of the game can be changed. It has the effect of enriching the game and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines A5 to A8
The first movable means is
When the predetermined first ball entry means is in a difficult inflow state, the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface of the first movable means.
The predetermined second ball entry means
The game machine A9, characterized in that the game ball rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means is arranged at a position where it flows down.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines A5 to A8, the following effects are played. That is, when the predetermined first ball entry means is in a difficult inflow state, the game ball can roll on the upper surface of the first movable means. Then, the predetermined second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the predetermined second entry means only when the first movable means is in the inflow difficult state, and when the first movable means can be in the inflowable state, the predetermined first It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means and the game ball to enter the predetermined second ball entry means. As a result, by making the predetermined ball-entry means on which the game ball is easy to enter different according to the game state in which the driving mode of the first movable means is different, the variation of the game is enriched and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine A9
The specific ball entry means
At least, the game machine A10 is arranged at a position where a game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, the following effects are played. That is, the specific ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down. As a result, whether or not the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means is different depending on the game state in which the driving mode of the first movable means is different, so that the variation of the game is enriched and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Group B: Simultaneous fluctuation x Fluctuation result derived according to the game state is different, and the time is shortened with the fluctuation result>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area. Based on this, a winning / failing lottery is performed, and when an advantageous state such as a win is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed specific ball-entry means is opened and the player is given a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group B was made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A predetermined first ball entry means (for example, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a) through which a game ball can enter.
A predetermined second ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means (for example, the special figure 2 starting port 74) and
A difficult inflow state (for example, a closed state) in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to flow into the predetermined first ball entry means, and an inflowable state (for example, open state) in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined first entry means. A first movable means (for example, ordinary electric service 71b) that can be changed to a state),
A first driving means (for example, ordinary electric service control processing (S204)) capable of changing the first movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state
Information acquisition means (for example, first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage) that acquires predetermined information based on the game ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means or the predetermined second ball entry means. Area 203e) and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A specific ball-entry means (for example, a common large winning opening 75) different from the predetermined first ball-entry means and the predetermined second ball-entry means,
A second movable means (for example, a common large) that can be changed into a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the specific ball entry means or a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific ball entry means. Winning opening opening / closing plate 75a) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second drive means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of changing the second movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state, and
A game state changing means (for example, a time saving flag 203 m) capable of changing the game state, and
By using the determination result of the determination means, the display means (for example, the special symbol display device 37) executes the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol). In a gaming machine provided with a dynamic display execution means (for example, main control device 110).
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic execution means (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) which is the dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Upper LED group 37b1) and
It is possible to execute the second dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol) which is the dynamic display and is different from the first dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined second ball entry means. With the second dynamic execution means (for example, the lower LED group 37b2),
The same-time execution means (for example, the first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means at the same time. The dynamic display and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel).
The game state changing means
Of the first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means, the first dynamic display or the second movement derived first. The gaming machine B0 is characterized by including a destination derivation changing means (for example, S6405 of the small hit end process (S6016)) that changes the game state based on the derivation result of the target display.

According to the game machine B0, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined first ball entry means, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined second entry means different from the predetermined first entry means. It is configured to be changeable between a state in which the game ball is difficult to flow into the predetermined first ball entry means or a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the predetermined first ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined first ball entry means. , The first driving means is configured so that the first movable means can be changed to a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state. Then, the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined first ball entry means or the predetermined second ball entry means, and the determination means acquires the predetermined information by the information acquisition means. Is determined. In addition, a specific ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means and the predetermined second ball entry means is provided, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means or the inflow is impossible due to the second movable means. It is configured to be changeable between a state and an inflowable state in which a game ball can flow into a specific ball entry means. Then, by using the determination result by the determination means, the second movable means can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by the second driving means. In addition, the game state can be changed by the game state changing means. Further, by using the determination result of the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means. Here, the first dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, is configured to be executable by the first dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means, based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Similarly, the second dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means is configured to enable the second dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, based on the entry of the ball into the predetermined second entry means. Further, the simultaneous execution means makes it possible to execute the first dynamic display by the first execution means and the second dynamic display by the second execution means at the same time. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means are derived first by the advance derivation change means provided in the game state changing means. The game state is changed based on the derivation result of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display. As a result, the game state is changed depending on which dynamic display that can be executed at the same time is derived first, and thus the game property of which dynamic display is derived first. Can be created. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine B0
The game state changing means is at least
A predetermined predetermined gaming state (for example, "normal gaming state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state") and a specific gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state (for example, "small hit"). The game state can be changed to "Frequent probability fluctuation state"),
The dynamic display execution means
In the predetermined gaming state, in the first dynamic short-term means (for example, in the "normal gaming state"", it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display. The maximum fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds <the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 600 seconds),
In the specific game state, as the execution time of the second dynamic display, it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 600 seconds> the maximum fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 120 seconds).

According to the game machine B1, in addition to the effect of the game machine B0, the following effects are played. That is, the game state can be changed to at least a predetermined predetermined game state and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state by the game state changing means. Then, the first dynamic short-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means makes it easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display in the predetermined gaming state. It is composed. Further, the second dynamic short-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means makes it easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the specific game state. It is composed. As a result, it is possible to create a game property of which dynamic display is derived first according to the game state. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine B1
The determination means
Based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, at least a first result (for example, a loss result) that does not give the player a game value and a first result that can give the player a predetermined first game value can be given. Derivation of one of two results (for example, a small hit game) and a third result (for example, a big hit game) that can give the player a second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value. Configured to be possible
The game state changing means is at least
A game state can be changed between a predetermined first game state (for example, a state without "time saving function") and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, a state with "time saving function").
The first driving means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the variable display of a normal symbol) is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for the first period (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time). The first driving mode means (for example, the ordinary electric service opening table 202k in the state without the "time saving function") and
In the second gaming state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for a second period (for example, 5.0 seconds × 3 times) longer than the first period. (For example, a normal electric service opening table 202k in a state with a "time saving function")
The destination derivation change means
At least, when the second result is derived before any of the results of the first dynamic display in the second dynamic display, the second game state is changed to the first game state. A game machine B2 characterized by this.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, at least the first result in which the player is not given a game value and the second result in which the player can be given a predetermined first game value based on the predetermined information acquired by the determination means. And a third result that can give the player a second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value can be derived. Further, the game state can be changed to at least a predetermined first game state and a second game state different from the first game state by the game state changing means. Then, in the first gaming state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for the first period by the first drive mode means provided in the first drive means. Further, in the second gaming state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for a second period longer than the first period. Then, when the second result is derived at least in the second dynamic display before any of the results of the first dynamic display by the first derivation changing means, the second game state to the first game state Is changed to. As a result, at least when the second result is derived in the second dynamic display executed based on the entry into the predetermined second entry means, the second gaming state can be changed to the first gaming state. As a result, the inflow mode of the game ball into the predetermined first ball entry means can be changed from the inflowable state to the inflow difficult state, so that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the game machine B2
When the second result or the third result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display previously derived by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means. In addition, the execution stopping means for stopping the execution of the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display which can be derived later (for example, the dynamic of the second special symbol based on the winning of the small hit game in the first special symbol) The game machine B3, characterized in that the display disappears).

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2, the following effects are played. That is, when the second result or the third result is derived by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display that can be derived later by the execution stop means. Is stopped. As a result, the second result or the third result is derived for both the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display that can be executed at the same time, so that control related to the specific ball entry means occurs in parallel. This has the effect of preventing the control of the specific ball-entry means from becoming complicated and providing the player with easy-to-understand playability.

In the game machine B2 or B3
The second driving means is
When the third result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is brought into a flowable state. And at the same time
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second result is derived based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is made available for inflow. B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are played. That is, when the third result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means flows in by the second drive means. In addition to being in a possible state, when the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means can also flow in by the second drive means. Be in a state. As a result, the game value can be given to the player by the specific ball-entry means common to the case where the third result is derived and the case where the second result is derived, the number of parts is reduced, and the game machine can be used. It has the effect of reducing such costs.

In any of the game machines B2 to B4
The first driving means is
In the first gaming state, the first movable means is driven so that the game ball can easily enter the predetermined first entry means from the predetermined second entry means.
The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, the first movable means is driven so that the game ball can easily enter the predetermined second entering means from the predetermined first entering means.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B2 to B4, the following effects are played. That is, in the first gaming state, the first driving means drives the first movable means so that the game ball can easily enter the predetermined first entering means from the predetermined second entering means, and in the second gaming state. , The first movable means is driven so that the game ball can easily enter the predetermined second entry means from the predetermined first entry means. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved by changing the predetermined ball entry means that the game ball can easily enter according to the game state.

In any of the game machines B2 to B5
The first ball is provided differently from the predetermined first ball entry means, the predetermined second ball entry means, or the specific ball entry means, and is based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined first ball entry means by the determination means. 2 When a result is derived, a special ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 small winning opening 65) that can change from a difficult inflow state to an inflowable state is provided.
When the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, the inflow mode of the game ball into the special entry means is changed.
The game state changing means
The gaming machine B6 is characterized by comprising a gaming state maintaining means for maintaining the gaming state regardless of the inflow mode of the special ball entering means.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B2 to B5, the following effects are played. That is, a special ball entry means provided differently from the predetermined first ball entry means, the predetermined second ball entry means, or the specific ball entry means is based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means. When the second result is derived, the inflow difficult state can be changed to the inflowable state. Then, when the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, the inflow mode of the game ball into the special entry means is changed. Here, the game state is maintained by the game state maintaining means provided in the game state changing means, regardless of the inflow mode of the special ball entry means. As a result, the second result regarding the predetermined first ball entry means and the second result regarding the predetermined second entry means can be different from each other in the ball entry means in which the game ball can flow in. It has the effect of creating a playability of whether or not the game state is changed depending on whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, enriching the variation of the game, and improving the interest of the game. is there.

In the game machine B6
The gaming machine B7 is provided with an obstructing means (for example, an obstacle member 65c or a nail) that inhibits the inflow of the gaming ball into the special ball entering means.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B6, the following effect is played, that is, the inflow of the game ball into the special ball entry means is blocked by the inhibiting means. As a result, even if the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means, the special entry is in a state where the inflow is possible based on the second result. The inflow of game balls into the ball means can be blocked by the blocking means. Therefore, by making the second result regarding the predetermined first ball entry means and the second result regarding the predetermined second ball entry means different whether or not the game ball can flow into the ball entry means, the variation of the game can be changed. It has the effect of enriching the game and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines B0 to B7
The first movable means is
When the predetermined first ball entry means is in a difficult inflow state, the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface of the first movable means.
The predetermined second ball entry means
The game machine B8 is characterized in that the game ball rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means is arranged at a position where it flows down.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B0 to B7, the following effects are played. That is, when the predetermined first ball entry means is in a difficult inflow state, the game ball can roll on the upper surface of the first movable means. Then, the predetermined second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the predetermined second entry means only when the first movable means is in the inflow difficult state, and when the first movable means can be in the inflowable state, the predetermined first It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means and the game ball to enter the predetermined second ball entry means. As a result, by making the predetermined ball-entry means on which the game ball is easy to enter different according to the game state in which the driving mode of the first movable means is different, the variation of the game is enriched and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine B8
The specific ball entry means
At least, the game machine B9 is arranged at a position where the game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8, the following effects are played. That is, the specific ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down. As a result, whether or not the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means is different depending on the game state in which the driving mode of the first movable means is different, so that the variation of the game is enriched and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Group C: Maximum jackpot time + Maximum fluctuation time after jackpot of dynamic display of encouraged special figure <Minimum fluctuation time of dynamic display of non-encouragement special figure>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area. Based on this, a winning / failing lottery is performed, and when an advantageous state such as a win is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed specific ball-entry means is opened and the player is given a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group C has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A predetermined first ball entry means (for example, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a) through which a game ball can enter.
A predetermined second ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means (for example, the special figure 2 starting port 74) and
A difficult inflow state (for example, a closed state) in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to flow into the predetermined first ball entry means, and an inflowable state (for example, open state) in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined first entry means. A first movable means (for example, ordinary electric service 71b) that can be changed to a state),
A first driving means (for example, ordinary electric service control processing (S204)) capable of changing the first movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state
Information acquisition means (for example, first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage) that acquires predetermined information based on the game ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means or the predetermined second ball entry means. Area 203e) and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A specific ball-entry means (for example, a common large winning opening 75) different from the predetermined first ball-entry means and the predetermined second ball-entry means,
A second movable means (for example, a common large) that can be changed into a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the specific ball entry means or a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific ball entry means. Winning opening opening / closing plate 75a) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second drive means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of changing the second movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state, and
A game state changing means (for example, a time saving flag 203 m) capable of changing the game state, and
By using the determination result of the determination means, the display means (for example, the special symbol display device 37) executes the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol). In a gaming machine provided with a dynamic display execution means (for example, main control device 110).
The determination means
Based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, at least a first result (for example, a loss result) that does not give the player a game value and a second result that can give the player a predetermined game value. (For example, a jackpot game) and any result can be derived,
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic execution means (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) which is the dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Upper LED group 37b1) and
It is possible to execute the second dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol) which is the dynamic display and is different from the first dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined second ball entry means. With the second dynamic execution means (for example, the lower LED group 37b2),
The same-time execution means (for example, the first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means at the same time. The dynamic display and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel).
The second driving means is
When the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is used for a maximum specific period. For a specific period of time that can be inflowable (for example, open for up to 30 seconds per round),
An N-time execution means (for example, a jackpot of 10 rounds) for executing the specific period N times (N is a natural number) by the specific period inflowable state means
The game state changing means is at least
A predetermined predetermined gaming state (for example, "normal gaming state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state") and a specific gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state (for example, "small hit"). The game state can be changed to "Frequent probability fluctuation state"),
The dynamic display execution means
In the predetermined gaming state, in the first dynamic short-term means (for example, in the "normal gaming state"", the execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display can be selected as the execution time of the first dynamic display. The maximum fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds <the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 600 seconds),
In the specific gaming state, as the execution time of the first dynamic display, a first dynamic long-term means (for example, a "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") in which an execution time longer than the execution time of the second dynamic display can be selected can be selected. ”, The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 600 seconds> the maximum fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 120 seconds).
In the predetermined gaming state, in the second dynamic long-term means (for example, in the "normal gaming state"", the execution time longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display can be selected as the execution time of the second dynamic display. The maximum fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds <the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 600 seconds),
In the specific game state, as the execution time of the second dynamic display, a second dynamic short-term means (for example, "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state") in which an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display can be selected can be selected. ”, The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 600 seconds> the maximum fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 120 seconds).
The first dynamic long-term means is
As the execution time of the first dynamic display, at least
The sum of the execution time that can be selected by the second dynamic short-term means and the N times specific period obtained by multiplying the specific period in the specific period inflowable state means by N by the N times execution means. A game machine C0 characterized by being provided with a first total period setting means (for example, 10 jackpot rounds x maximum 30 seconds = 300 seconds + maximum fluctuation time 120 seconds <600 seconds) in which 1 total period can be set. ..

According to the game machine C0, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined first entry means, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined second entry means different from the predetermined first entry means. It is configured to be changeable between a state in which the game ball is difficult to flow into the predetermined first ball entry means or a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the predetermined first ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined first ball entry means. , The first driving means is configured so that the first movable means can be changed to a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state. Then, the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined first ball entry means or the predetermined second ball entry means, and the determination means acquires the predetermined information by the information acquisition means. Is determined. In addition, a specific ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means and the predetermined second ball entry means is provided, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means or the inflow is impossible due to the second movable means. It is configured to be changeable between a state and an inflowable state in which a game ball can flow into a specific ball entry means. Then, by using the determination result by the determination means, the second movable means can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by the second driving means. In addition, the game state can be changed by the game state changing means. Further, by using the determination result of the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means. Here, at least, a first result in which the player is not given a game value and a second result in which the player can be given a predetermined game value based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means by the determination means. Any of the results can be derived. Then, the first dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, is configured to be executable based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means by the first dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. The second dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, can be executed by the second dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means based on the ball entering the predetermined second ball entry means. Further, the simultaneous execution means makes it possible to execute the first dynamic display by the first execution means and the second dynamic display by the second execution means at the same time. Here, when the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the inflow for a specific period provided in the second drive means The possible state means can allow the specific ball entry means to flow in for a maximum period of time. Further, the N times execution means provided in the second driving means executes the specific period N times by the Ryukyu enable state means for a specific period. Then, the game state can be changed to at least a predetermined predetermined game state and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state by the game state changing means. Further, by the first dynamic short-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means, an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display can be selected as the execution time of the first dynamic display in the predetermined gaming state. .. Further, by the first dynamic long-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means, an execution time longer than the execution time of the second dynamic display can be selected as the execution time of the first dynamic display in the specific gaming state. .. Further, by the second dynamic long-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means, an execution time longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display can be selected as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the predetermined gaming state. .. Further, by the second dynamic short-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means, an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display can be selected as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the specific gaming state. .. Then, by the first total period setting means provided in the first dynamic long-term means, at least the execution time that can be selected by the second dynamic short-term means as the execution time of the first dynamic display and the execution time that can be inflowed for a specific period are possible. A first total period equal to or greater than the total period of N times specific period obtained by multiplying the specific period in the state means by N by N times execution means can be set. As a result, in the specific game state, the first total period, which is the total period of the execution time of the second dynamic display and all the specific periods of the specific ball entry means, is shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display. As a result, even if the second result is derived in the second dynamic display in the specific game state, if the specific game state is reached again after the end of all the specific periods of the specific ball entry means based on the second result. , The result of the second dynamic display can be easily derived before the result of the first dynamic display. As a result, it is possible to preferentially derive the lottery result in the short dynamic display, and it is possible to execute an efficient game and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine C0
The second dynamic long-term means is
As the execution time of the second dynamic display, at least
The sum of the execution time that can be selected by the first dynamic short-term means and the N times specific period obtained by multiplying the specific period in the specific period inflowable state means by N by the N times execution means. 2 Game machine C1 characterized by being provided with a second total period setting means (for example, 10 jackpot rounds x maximum 30 seconds = 300 seconds + maximum fluctuation time 120 seconds <600 seconds) capable of setting a total period. ..

According to the game machine C1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C0, the following effects are played. That is, by the second total period setting means provided in the second dynamic long-term means, the execution time of the second dynamic display can be at least selected by the first dynamic short-term means and can flow in for a specific period. A second total period equal to or greater than the total period of the N times specific period obtained by multiplying the specific period in the state means by N by the N times execution means can be set. As a result, in the predetermined gaming state, the second total period, which is the total period of the execution time of the first dynamic display and all the specific periods of the specific ball entry means, is shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display. As a result, even if the second result is derived in the first dynamic display in the predetermined game state, if the predetermined game state is reached again after the end of all the specific periods of the specific ball-entry means based on the second result. , The result of the first dynamic display can be easily derived before the result of the second dynamic display. As a result, it is possible to preferentially derive the lottery result in the short dynamic display, and it is possible to execute an efficient game and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine C0 or C1
The second driving means is
A start period execution means for executing a predetermined start period (for example, an opening time) before the specific period is started by the specific period inflowable state means.
The first total period setting means
As the execution time of the first dynamic display, at least
The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that a period equal to or greater than the sum of the first total period and the start period in the start period executing means can be set.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C0 or C1, the following effects are played. That is, the start period executing means provided in the second driving means executes a predetermined start period before the specific period is started by the specific period inflowable state means. Then, the first total period setting means can set at least a period equal to or greater than the sum of the first total period and the start period in the start period execution means as the execution time of the first dynamic display. As a result, in the specific game state, the total period of the first total period and the start period is shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display, so that the second dynamic display in the specific game state is the second. Even if the result is derived, if the specific game state is reached again after the end of all the specific periods and the start period of the specific ball entry means based on the second result, the result of the second dynamic display is the first action. It can be easily derived before the result of the target display. As a result, it is possible to preferentially derive the lottery result in the short dynamic display, and it is possible to execute an efficient game and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines C0 to C2
The second driving means is
An end period execution means for executing a predetermined end period (for example, an ending time) after the end of the specific period by the specific period inflowable state means.
The first total period setting means
The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that a period equal to or greater than the sum of the first total period and the end period in the end period execution means can be set.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines C0 to C2, the following effects are played. That is, the end period executing means provided in the second driving means executes a predetermined end period after the specific period ends by the Ryukyu enable state means for a specific period. Then, the first total period setting means can set a period equal to or greater than the total of the first total period and the end period in the end period execution means. As a result, in the specific game state, the total period of the first total period and the end period is shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display, so that the second dynamic display in the specific game state is the second. Even if the result is derived, if the specific game state is reached again after the end of all the specific periods and the end period of the specific ball entry means based on the second result, the result of the second dynamic display is the first action. It can be easily derived before the result of the target display. As a result, it is possible to preferentially derive the lottery result in the short dynamic display, and it is possible to execute an efficient game and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines C0 to C3
The second driving means is
A suspension period execution means for executing a suspension period (for example, an interval time) that makes the specific ball entry means difficult to flow in between the specific period of 1 by the specific period inflowable state means and the next specific period. With,
The first total period setting means
The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a period equal to or greater than the total of the first total period and the suspension period in the suspension period executing means can be set.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines C0 to C3, the following effects are played. That is, the interruption period executing means provided in the second driving means provides an interruption period during which the specific entry means is made difficult to flow in between one specific period by the specific period inflowable state means and the next specific period. Will be executed. Then, the first total period setting means can set a period equal to or greater than the total of the first total period and the suspension period in the suspension period execution means. As a result, in the specific game state, the total period of the first total period and the interruption period is shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display, so that the second dynamic display in the specific game state is the second. Even if the result is derived, if the specific game state is reached again after the end of all the specific period and the suspension period of the specific ball entry means based on the second result, the result of the second dynamic display is the first action. It can be easily derived before the result of the target display. As a result, it is possible to preferentially derive the lottery result in the short dynamic display, and it is possible to execute an efficient game and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines C0 to C4
When the second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display previously derived by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, at least the said Execution suspending means (for example, the first special symbol) that interrupts the execution of the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display derived later while the second movable means by the second driving means is in the inflowable state. The game machine C5 is characterized in that the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is interrupted based on the winning of the jackpot game in the above.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines C0 to C4, the following effects are played. That is, when the second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display previously derived by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, at least by the execution interruption means. , While the second movable means by the second driving means is in the inflowable state, the execution of the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display derived later is interrupted. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with all the winning contents without extinguishing the dynamic display of the other as a result of the dynamic display of one. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the phenomenon that the game value is not given even though the player wins some role (so-called loss), and it is possible to prevent the player from getting excited about the game.

In any of the game machines C0 to C5
The second result is
A predetermined second result (for example, a small hit game) that can give a predetermined predetermined game value, and
The game machine C6 is characterized by having a specific second result (for example, a jackpot game) that can give a specific game value that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game value.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines C0 to C5, the following effects are played. That is, as the second result, a predetermined second result that can give a predetermined predetermined game value and a specific second result that can give a specific game result that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game value are provided. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game value given to the player can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines C0 to C6
The game state changing means is at least
A game state can be changed between a predetermined first game state (for example, a state without "time saving function") and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, a state with "time saving function").
The first driving means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the variable display of a normal symbol) is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for the first period (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time). The first driving mode means (for example, the ordinary electric service opening table 202k in the state without the "time saving function") and
In the second gaming state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for a second period (for example, 5.0 seconds × 3 times) longer than the first period. (For example, a normal electric service opening table 202k in a state with a "time saving function")
The game state changing means
It is characterized by including a drive mode changing means (for example, S6405 of the small hit end process (S6016)) that changes the gaming state based on the drive mode of the second movable means by the second drive means. Game machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects played by the game machines C0 to C6, the following effects are played, that is, at least a predetermined first game state and a first game state different from the first game state are obtained by the game state changing means. 2 The game state can be changed to the game state. Then, in the first gaming state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for the first period by the first drive mode means provided in the first drive means. Further, in the second gaming state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for a second period longer than the first period. Then, the driving mode changing means provided in the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state based on the driving mode of the second movable means by the second driving means. As a result, the game state is changed based on the inflow mode of the game ball into the specific entry means which can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by using the determination result of the determination means. The inflow mode of the game ball into the ball means can be changed. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines C0 to C7
The game state changing means
A game characterized by comprising an execution number changing means (for example, special figure 1 time saving counter 203n) for changing a game state based on the execution number of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means. Machine C8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects played by the game machines C0 to C7, the following effects are played. That is, the execution number changing means changes the game state based on the number of times the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means. As a result, in addition to the inflow mode of the game ball into the specific entry means, the game state can be changed depending on the number of times the dynamic display is executed, so that the inflow mode of the game ball into the predetermined entry means can be changed. This has the effect of increasing the variety of games and improving the enjoyment of the games.

<Group D: One small hit clearly suggests, the other small hit does not suggest in any case>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area. Based on this, a winning / failing lottery is performed, and when an advantageous state such as a win is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed specific ball-entry means is opened and the player is given a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group D has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A predetermined ball entry means (for example, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, or the special figure 2 starting port 74) through which a game ball can enter.
A state in which the game ball is difficult to flow into or cannot flow into the predetermined ball entry means (for example, a closed state) and a state in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined ball entry means (for example, an open state). A variable first movable means (for example, ordinary electric service 71b) and
A first driving means (for example, ordinary electric service control processing (S204)) capable of changing the first movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state
Information acquisition means (for example, first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage area 203e) for acquiring predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Specific ball-entry means different from the predetermined ball-entry means (for example, common large winning opening 75) and
A second movable means (for example, a common large) that can be changed into a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the specific ball entry means or a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific ball entry means. Winning opening opening / closing plate 75a) and
In a gaming machine provided with a second driving means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of changing the second movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state by using the determination result by the determination means. ,
Special ball-entry means different from the predetermined ball-entry means and the specific ball-entry means (for example, special figure 1 prize winning opening 65), and
A third movable means (for example, a special figure) that can be changed into a state in which the game ball is difficult to flow into or cannot flow into the special ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the special ball entry means. 1 Haunting board 65a) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the third drive means (for example, the solenoid for the appearance plate in FIG. 1) capable of changing the third movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state, and
A production means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect is provided.
The production means
A first aspect execution means (for example, a jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81) that executes the second movable means in a first aspect that can suggest to the player that the second movable means is driven by the second driving means.
A second aspect executing means (for example, a first special symbol) that executes the fact that the third movable means is driven by the third driving means in a second aspect that is difficult or unrecognizable to the player from the first aspect. The game machine D0 is characterized in that the small hit winning in the above is executed in the same manner as the loss result).

According to the game machine D0, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and the game ball is difficult to flow into the predetermined ball entry means or cannot flow into the predetermined ball entry means by the first movable means. It is configured to be changeable to an inflowable state in which the game ball can flow into the ball means, and the first movable means is configured to be changeable to an inflow difficult state or an inflowable state by the first driving means. Then, the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means, and the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a specific ball entry means different from the predetermined ball entry means is provided, and the second movable means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means or the inflow difficult state in which the ball cannot enter, and the game to the specific ball entry means. It is configured to be changeable to an inflowable state in which a sphere can flow. Then, by using the determination result by the determination means, the second movable means can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by the second driving means. Here, a special ball entry means different from the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means is provided, and the game ball is difficult to flow into the special ball entry means or cannot flow into the special ball entry means by the third movable means. It is configured to be changeable to an inflowable state in which a game ball can flow into the ball means. Further, by using the determination result by the determination means, the third movable means can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by the third driving means. Then, a predetermined effect can be executed by the effect means. Here, the first aspect executing means provided in the effect means executes in the first aspect that can suggest to the player that the second movable means is driven by the second driving means. Further, the fact that the third movable means is driven by the third driving means by the second aspect executing means provided in the effect means is executed in the second aspect which is harder or unrecognizable to the player than the first aspect. Will be done. As a result, the suggestion mode to the player that the game ball can flow into the specific ball entry means and that the game ball can flow into the special ball entry means is different, and the effect mode is changed. It has the effect of increasing the variety and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine D0
The determination means
Based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, at least a first result (for example, a loss result) that does not give the player a game value and a first result that can give the player a predetermined first game value can be given. Derivation of one of two results (for example, a small hit game) and a third result (for example, a big hit game) that can give the player a second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value. Configured to be possible
The second driving means is
When the third result is derived, the second movable means is changed to an inflowable state.
The third driving means is
A game machine D1 characterized in that when the second result is derived, the third movable means is changed to an inflowable state.

According to the game machine D1, in addition to the effect of the game machine D0, the following effects are played. That is, at least the first result in which the player is not given a game value and the second result in which the player can be given a predetermined first game value based on the predetermined information acquired by the determination means. And a third result that can give the player a second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value can be derived. Here, when the third result is derived, the second movable means is changed to the inflowable state by the second driving means, and when the second result is derived, the third movable means is moved by the third driving means. The means is changed to an inflowable state. As a result, the game ball can flow into the specific ball entry means based on the derivation of the third result, and the game ball can flow into the special ball entry means based on the derivation of the second result. There is an effect that it is possible to make the suggestion mode different from that of the player, to increase the variation of the production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine D0 or D1
By using the determination result of the determination means, the dynamic display execution means (for example, voice) that executes the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the effect means. The lamp control device 113) is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
When the first result is derived, the first result suggestion mode (for example, the loss result in the variation effect of the first special symbol) that suggests to the player that it is the first result in the dynamic display is shown. First result suggestion mode to be issued
When the third result is derived, the third result mode (for example, the jackpot result in the variation effect of the first special symbol) that suggests to the player that it is the third result in the dynamic display appears. 3rd result suggestion mode manifestation means and
The gaming machine D2 is characterized by comprising a first result suggestion mode equivalent means for displaying the first result suggestion mode when the second result is derived.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D0 or D1, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in the effect means by using the determination result of the determination means. Then, when the first result is derived, the first result suggesting mode expressing means provided in the dynamic display executing means suggests to the player that the first result is the first result in the dynamic display. The suggestion aspect appears. Further, when the third result is derived, the third result suggesting mode expressing means provided in the dynamic display executing means suggests to the player that the third result is the third result in the dynamic display. Aspects are revealed. Then, when the second result is derived, the first result suggestion mode appears by the first result suggestion mode equivalent means provided in the dynamic display execution means. As a result, when the second result is derived, by suggesting to the player in the same manner as when the first result is derived, the derivation of the second result becomes difficult or unrecognizable to the player. can do. Therefore, when the first result suggestion mode appears, it is possible to create a game property for guessing whether or not the second result is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines D0 to D2
The game machine D3 is provided with an obstructing means (for example, an obstacle member 65c or a nail) that inhibits the inflow of the game ball into the special ball entry means.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D0 to D2, the following effects are played. That is, the inhibition means inhibits the inflow of the game ball into the special entry means. As a result, even if the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means, the special entry means in the inflowable state based on the second result. It is possible to block the inflow of game balls into the game by means of inhibition. Therefore, by executing the second result, which is difficult to give the player the game value, in the same manner as the first result, and not clearly indicating it to the player, the player can be awakened to the game. It has the effect of preventing it and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines D0 to D3
The predetermined ball entry means
With a predetermined predetermined first ball entry means (for example, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a).
A predetermined second ball entry means (for example, a special figure 2 starting port 74) different from the predetermined first ball entry means is provided.
The second driving means is
When the third result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is brought into a flowable state. And at the same time
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second result is derived based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is made available for inflow. D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D0 to D3, the following effects are played. That is, as the predetermined ball entry means, a predetermined predetermined first ball entry means and a predetermined second ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means are provided. Then, when the third result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means flows in by the second drive means. In addition to being in a possible state, when the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means can also flow in by the second drive means. Be in a state. As a result, the game value can be given to the player by the specific ball-entry means common to the case where the third result is derived and the case where the second result is derived, the number of parts is reduced, and the game machine can be used. It has the effect of reducing such costs.

In any of the game machines D2 to D4
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic execution means (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) which is the dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Upper LED group 37b1) and
A second dynamic execution means (for example, a dynamic display of a second special symbol) capable of executing a second dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display of a second special symbol) different from the first dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined second ball entry means ( For example, the lower LED group 37b2) and
The first dynamic execution means is
When the second result is derived in the first dynamic display, the second aspect is executed by the second aspect executing means, and the second aspect is executed.
The second dynamic execution means is
The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the first aspect is executed by the first aspect executing means when the second result is derived in the second dynamic display.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D2 to D4, the following effects are played. That is, the first dynamic display provided in the dynamic display executing means is configured to be able to execute the first dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entering means. A second dynamic display different from the first dynamic display can be executed by the second dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means based on the ball entering the predetermined second ball entry means. Then, when the second result is derived in the first dynamic display, the second aspect is executed by the first dynamic execution means and the second aspect execution means, and the second result is derived in the second dynamic display. When this is done, the first aspect is executed by the second dynamic execution means and the first aspect execution means. As a result, even if it is the second result, depending on whether it is the second result in the first dynamic display or the second result in the second dynamic display, the special entry means is in a state where the specific ball entry means can flow in. There is an effect that the suggestion mode to the player that the ball means is in the inflow state can be different, the variation of the production mode can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines D0 to D5
Equipped with a game state changing means (for example, a time saving flag 203 m) capable of changing the game state.
The second aspect execution means is
The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the second aspect is executed when the second result is derived in the first dynamic display regardless of the gaming state.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D0 to D5, the following effects are played. That is, the game state can be changed by the game state changing means. Then, the second aspect is executed when the second result is derived in the first dynamic display regardless of the gaming state by the second aspect executing means. As a result, it is possible to standardize the suggestion mode when the second result in the first dynamic display is derived in each game state, and to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. As a result, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being awakened to the game and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine D6
The game state changing means is at least
A game state can be changed between a predetermined first game state (for example, a state without "time saving function") and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, a state with "time saving function").
The first driving means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the variable display of a normal symbol) is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for the first period (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time). The first driving mode means (for example, the ordinary electric service opening table 202k in the state without the "time saving function") and
In the second gaming state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for a second period (for example, 5.0 seconds × 3 times) longer than the first period. (For example, a normal electric service opening table 202k in a state with a "time saving function")
The game state changing means
It is characterized by including a drive mode changing means (for example, S6405 of the small hit end process (S6016)) that changes the gaming state based on the drive mode of the second movable means by the second drive means. Game machine D7.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the game D6, the following effect is played, that is, at least a predetermined first game state and a second game state different from the first game state by the game state changing means. The game state can be changed. Then, in the first gaming state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for the first period by the first drive mode means provided in the first drive means. Further, in the second gaming state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for a second period longer than the first period. Then, the driving mode changing means provided in the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state based on the driving mode of the second movable means by the second driving means. As a result, the game state is changed based on the inflow mode of the game ball into the specific entry means which can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by using the determination result of the determination means. The inflow mode of the game ball into the ball means can be changed. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine D6 or D7
The game state changing means
A game characterized by comprising an execution number changing means (for example, special figure 1 time saving counter 203n) that changes a game state based on the execution number of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means. Machine D8.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6 or D7, the following effects are played. That is, the execution number changing means changes the game state based on the number of times the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means. As a result, in addition to the inflow mode of the game ball into the specific entry means, the game state can be changed depending on the number of times the dynamic display is executed, so that the inflow mode of the game ball into the predetermined entry means can be changed. This has the effect of increasing the variety of games and improving the enjoyment of the games.

<Group E: Limit x Simultaneous fluctuation x Small hit rush>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area. Based on this, a winning / failing lottery is performed, and when an advantageous state such as a win is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed specific ball-entry means is opened and the player is given a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group E has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A predetermined ball entry means (for example, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, or the special figure 2 starting port 74) through which a game ball can enter.
A state in which the game ball is difficult to flow into or cannot flow into the predetermined ball entry means (for example, a closed state) and a state in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined ball entry means (for example, an open state). A variable first movable means (for example, ordinary electric service 71b) and
A first driving means (for example, ordinary electric service control processing (S204)) capable of changing the first movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state
Information acquisition means (for example, first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage area 203e) for acquiring predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, a special game generation means (for example, a big winning opening opening / closing control process (S509)) that generates a special game state (for example, a big hit game) that can give a predetermined game value to the player )), In a game machine equipped with
When a predetermined first lottery result (for example, jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B") is derived by the determination means, a predetermined game state after the special game state is shifted to a predetermined predetermined game state. Transition means (for example, transition to "time saving state") and
When a predetermined second lottery result (for example, jackpot type "probability variation A" or "probability variation B") different from the first lottery result is derived by the determination means, the gaming state after the special gaming state is determined. Specific transition means (for example, transition to "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" or transition to "probability fluctuation state") and a specific transition means for transitioning to a specific gaming state different from the gaming state.
A counting means (for example, a limit counter 203k) for counting the number of times the special gaming state is generated, and
When the number of occurrences counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the counting updating means (for example, "0" of the limit counter 203k) updates (initializes) the counting result of the counting means. Clear) and equipped with
The determination means
When the number of occurrences of the special gaming state by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the normal time determination means (for example, the limit counter 203k is less than "10") capable of deriving the first lottery result or the second lottery result. Judgment of success or failure in the case of
When the number of occurrences of the special gaming state by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the arrival determination means (for example, the limit counter 203k is "10" or more" capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result. In the case of),
The first driving means is
When the first predetermined condition (for example, winning in the variable display of the normal symbol when the "time saving function" is disabled) is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for the first period (for example, 0.1 second x 1 time). A possible first drive mode means (for example, a normal electric service opening table 202k in a state without the "time saving function") and
When a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition (for example, winning in a variable display of a normal symbol when the "time saving function" is enabled) is satisfied, the first movable means is set to a second longer than the first period. A second drive mode means that can be moved for a period (for example, 5.0 seconds × 3 times) (for example, a normal electric service opening table 202k in a state with a “time saving function”) and
A plurality of specific conditions different from the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition (for example, "special figure 1 fluctuation number", "special figure 2 fluctuation number", "special figure 1 / special figure 2 total fluctuation number", or , "Special figure 2 Common large winning opening operation number by small hit") and specific condition setting means,
Switching means for switching from the second drive mode means to the first drive mode means (for example, a time saving flag) when any one of the specific conditions set by the specific condition setting means is satisfied. 203m), and a game machine E0 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine E0, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and the game ball is difficult to flow into the predetermined ball entry means or cannot flow into the predetermined ball entry means by the first movable means. It is configured to be changeable to an inflowable state in which the game ball can flow into the ball means, and the first movable means is configured to be changeable to an inflow difficult state or an inflowable state by the first driving means. Then, the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means, and the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, by using the determination result by the determination means, the special game generation means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when a predetermined first lottery result is derived by the determination means, the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the predetermined predetermined gaming state by the predetermined transition means. Further, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived by the determination means, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the specific game state different from the predetermined game state by the specific transition means. Here, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state is counted by the counting means and the number of occurrences counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the counting result of the counting means is updated by the counting updating means. (Initialized). Then, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived by the normal time determination means provided in the determination means. Further, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, a lottery result other than the second lottery result can be derived by the arrival determination means provided in the determination means. Here, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for the first period by the first drive mode means provided in the first drive means. Further, when a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for a second period longer than the first period by the second drive mode means provided in the first drive means. Then, when a plurality of specific conditions different from the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition are set by the specific condition setting means and any one of the specific conditions is satisfied, the switching means sets the first. The two drive mode means can be switched to the first drive mode means. As a result, the inflow mode of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means can be changed by satisfying any one of the plurality of specific conditions. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E0
The specific condition setting means
When the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived, the common setting means (for example, S6204 to S6208 of the jackpot end processing (S6012)) for setting the common specific condition is provided. The featured game machine E1.

According to the game machine E1, in addition to the effect of the game machine E0, the following effects are played. That is, when the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived, a common specific condition is set by the common setting means provided in the specific condition setting means. As a result, when the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived, it is possible to standardize the setting process of specific conditions that can be changed from the second drive mode means to the first drive mode means, and the program can be simplified. It has the effect of reducing the conversion and processing burden.

In the game machine E0 or E1
When the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived by the normal time determination means, the specific condition set by the specific condition setting means can be satisfied.
When a result other than the second lottery result is derived by the arrival determination means, only a part of the specific conditions set by the specific condition setting means can be satisfied. A game machine E2 characterized by.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E0 or E1, the following effects are played. That is, when the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived by the normal time determination means, the specific condition set by the specific condition setting means can be satisfied. Further, when a result other than the second lottery result is derived by the arrival determination means, only a part of the specific conditions set by the specific condition setting means can be satisfied. Thereby, the inflow mode of the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means can be changed by changing the specific condition that can be satisfied according to the number of occurrences of the special game state. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines E0 to E2
Specific ball-entry means different from the predetermined ball-entry means (for example, common large winning opening 75) and
A second movable means (for example, a common large) that can be changed into a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the specific ball entry means or a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific ball entry means. Winning opening opening / closing plate 75a) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second drive means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of changing the second movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state, and
By using the determination result of the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol). A dynamic display execution means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) is provided.
The specific condition setting means
As the specific condition, at least
A drive specific condition for whether or not the second movable means is driven by the second drive means, and
The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is possible to set an execution number specifying condition based on the execution number of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines E0 to E2, the following effects are played. That is, a specific ball entry means different from the predetermined ball entry means is provided, and the second movable means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means or the inflow difficulty state in which the ball cannot enter, and the game to the specific ball entry means. It is configured to be changeable to an inflowable state in which a sphere can flow. Then, by using the determination result by the determination means, the second movable means can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by the second driving means. By using the determination result of the determination means by the dynamic display execution means, the display means executes the dynamic display of the identification information. Here, by the specific condition setting means, at least as a specific condition, a drive specific condition as to whether or not the second movable means is driven by the second drive means, and a dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means. The execution count specific condition based on the execution count and the execution count specific condition are configured to be configurable. As a result, in addition to the inflow mode of the game ball into the specific entry means, the inflow mode of the game ball into the predetermined entry means can be changed depending on the number of times the dynamic display is executed, so that the variation of the game is enriched. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the game machine E3
The determination means
Based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, at least a first result (for example, a loss result) that does not give the player a game value and a first result that can give the player a predetermined first game value can be given. Derivation of one of two results (for example, a small hit game) and a third result (for example, a big hit game) that can give the player a second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value. Configured to be possible
The predetermined ball entry means
Predetermined first ball entry means (for example, left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or right side special figure 1 starting port 71a) and
A predetermined second ball entry means (for example, a special figure 2 starting port 74) different from the first predetermined ball entry means is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic execution means (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) which is the dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Upper LED group 37b1) and
It is possible to execute the second dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol) which is the dynamic display and is different from the first dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined second ball entry means. With the second dynamic execution means (for example, the lower LED group 37b2),
The same-time execution means (for example, the first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means at the same time. The dynamic display and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel).
The second driving means is
When the third result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is brought into a flowable state. And at the same time
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second result is derived based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is made available for inflow. E4.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the following effects are played. That is, at least the first result in which the player is not given a game value and the second result in which the player can be given a predetermined first game value based on the predetermined information acquired by the determination means. And a third result that can give the player a second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value can be derived. Then, as the predetermined ball entry means, a predetermined predetermined first ball entry means and a predetermined second ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means are provided. Here, the first dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, is configured to be executable by the first dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means, based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Similarly, the second dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means is configured to enable the second dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, based on the entry of the ball into the predetermined second entry means. Further, the simultaneous execution means makes it possible to execute the first dynamic display by the first execution means and the second dynamic display by the second execution means at the same time. Then, when the third result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means flows in by the second drive means. In addition to being in a possible state, when the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means can also flow in by the second drive means. Be in a state. As a result, the game value can be given to the player by the specific ball-entry means common to the case where the third result is derived and the case where the second result is derived, the number of parts is reduced, and the game machine can be used. It has the effect of reducing such costs.

In the game machine E3 or E4
The dynamic display execution means
In the predetermined gaming state, in the first dynamic short-term means (for example, in the "normal gaming state"", it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display. The maximum fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds <the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 600 seconds),
In the specific game state, as the execution time of the second dynamic display, it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 600 seconds> the maximum fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 120 seconds).

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E3 or E4, the following effects are played. That is, the first dynamic short-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means makes it easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display in a predetermined game state. It is composed. Further, the second dynamic short-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means makes it easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the specific game state. It is composed. As a result, it is possible to create a game property of which dynamic display is derived first according to the game state. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E4 or E5
When the third result is derived by the determination means, the number-of-times priority gaming state (for example, "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state") in which the execution number-of-times specifying condition is more likely to be satisfied than the driving-specific condition and A game state generating means (for example, a jackpot end process (S6012)) capable of generating at least a drive priority gaming state (for example, a “small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state”) in which the drive specific condition is more likely to be satisfied than the execution count specifying condition. ), A game machine E6 characterized by being provided.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4 or E5, the following effects are played. That is, when the third result is derived by the determination means by the gaming state generating means, the number-of-times priority gaming state in which the execution count specifying condition is more likely to be satisfied than the driving specific condition and the driving specific condition are satisfied from the execution number specifying condition. An easy drive priority gaming state is configured to at least be able to occur. As a result, by making the conditions for switching from the second drive mode means to the first drive mode means different according to the game state, it is possible to create a game property as to which specific condition is satisfied in which game state. .. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines E4 to E6
The first movable means is
When the predetermined first ball entry means is in a difficult inflow state, the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface of the first movable means.
The predetermined second ball entry means
The game machine E7 is characterized in that the game ball rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means is arranged at a position where it flows down.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of the game machines E4 to E6, the following effects are obtained, that is, when the predetermined first ball entry means is in a difficult inflow state, the upper surface of the first movable means is covered with the game ball. Is configured to be rollable. Then, the predetermined second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the predetermined second entry means only when the first movable means is in the inflow difficult state, and when the first movable means can be in the inflowable state, the predetermined first It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means and the game ball to enter the predetermined second ball entry means. As a result, by making the predetermined ball-entry means on which the game ball is easy to enter different according to the game state in which the driving mode of the first movable means is different, the variation of the game is enriched and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine E7
The specific ball entry means
At least, the game machine E8 is arranged at a position where the game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of the game machine E7, the following effects are played. That is, the specific ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down. As a result, whether or not the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means is different depending on the game state in which the driving mode of the first movable means is different, so that the variation of the game is enriched and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Group F: Do not count the limit number of times when the jackpot disappears (restore the count number)>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area. Based on this, a winning / failing lottery is performed, and when an advantageous state such as a win is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed specific ball-entry means is opened and the player is given a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group F has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A predetermined ball entry means (for example, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a, or the special figure 2 starting port 74) through which a game ball can enter.
Information acquisition means (for example, first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage area 203e) for acquiring predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, a special game generation means (for example, a big winning opening opening / closing control process (S509)) that generates a special game state (for example, a big hit game) that can give a predetermined game value to the player )), In a game machine equipped with
When a predetermined first lottery result (for example, jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B") is derived by the determination means, a predetermined game state after the special game state is shifted to a predetermined predetermined game state. Transition means (for example, transition to "time saving state") and
When a predetermined second lottery result (for example, jackpot type "probability variation A" or "probability variation B") different from the first lottery result is derived by the determination means, the gaming state after the special gaming state is determined. Specific transition means (for example, transition to "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" or transition to "probability fluctuation state") and a specific transition means for transitioning to a specific gaming state different from the gaming state.
A counting means (for example, a limit counter 203k) for counting the number of times the special gaming state is generated, and
When the number of occurrences counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the counting updating means (for example, "0" of the limit counter 203k) updates (initializes) the counting result of the counting means. Clear) and equipped with
The determination means
When the number of occurrences of the special gaming state by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the normal time determination means (for example, the limit counter 203k is less than "10") capable of deriving the first lottery result or the second lottery result. Judgment of success or failure in the case of
When the number of occurrences of the special gaming state by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the arrival determination means (for example, the limit counter 203k is "10" or more" capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result. In the case of),
The predetermined ball entry means
Predetermined first ball entry means (for example, left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or right side special figure 1 starting port 71a) and
A predetermined second ball entry means (for example, a special figure 2 starting port 74) different from the first predetermined ball entry means is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic execution means (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) which is the dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Upper LED group 37b1) and
It is possible to execute the second dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol) which is the dynamic display and is different from the first dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined second ball entry means. With the second dynamic execution means (for example, the lower LED group 37b2),
The same-time execution means (for example, the first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means at the same time. The dynamic display and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel).
The determination means
Based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, at least the first result (for example, the loss result) other than the first lottery result or the second lottery result that does not give the player a game value and the game. It is configured so that a result of either the first lottery result or the second result (for example, a jackpot game) as the second lottery result that can give a predetermined game value to a person can be derived.
The dynamic display execution means
When the second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, it is derived later. An execution stop means for stopping the execution of the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished based on the winning of the small hit game in the first special symbol). With
The counting means
When the second result can be derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display that can be stopped by the execution stop means, the stop non-counting means that does not count as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state ( For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is extinguished by the jackpot of the second special symbol, the jackpot of the second special symbol is not included in the limit number of times).

According to the game machine F0, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and the information acquisition means acquires the predetermined information based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. The determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, by using the determination result by the determination means, the special game generation means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when a predetermined first lottery result is derived by the determination means, the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the predetermined predetermined gaming state by the predetermined transition means. Further, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived by the determination means, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the specific game state different from the predetermined game state by the specific transition means. Here, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state is counted by the counting means and the number of occurrences counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the counting result of the counting means is updated by the counting updating means. (Initialized). Then, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived by the normal time determination means provided in the determination means. Further, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the lottery results other than the second lottery result can even be derived by the arrival determination means provided in the determination means. Then, as the predetermined ball entry means, a predetermined predetermined first ball entry means and a predetermined second ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means are provided. Here, the first dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, is configured to be executable by the first dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means, based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Similarly, the second dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means is configured to enable the second dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, based on the entry of the ball into the predetermined second entry means. Further, the simultaneous execution means makes it possible to execute the first dynamic display by the first execution means and the second dynamic display by the second execution means at the same time. Then, based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means by the determination means, at least the first result other than the first lottery result or the second lottery result that does not give the player the game value and the predetermined result to the player. A result of either the first lottery result or the second result as the second lottery result that can give the game value can be derived. Here, when the second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, the dynamic display execution means is used. The execution of the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display, which can be derived later, is stopped by the provided execution stop means. Then, when the second result can be derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display that can be stopped by the execution stop means, the special gaming state is generated by the stop non-counting means provided in the counting means. It is configured so that it is not counted as a number of times. As a result, the special gaming state that is not given to the player is not counted as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state, and only the special gaming state that can be given to the player can be counted as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state. Even when the special symbols are changed at the same time, the game property that the selection content of the lottery result changes based on the number of occurrences of the special game state can be accurately executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is.

In the game machine F0
The second result is
A predetermined second result (for example, a small hit game) that can give a predetermined predetermined game value, and
It has a specific second result (for example, a jackpot game) that can give a specific game value that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game value.
The execution stop means is
When the predetermined second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, at least later. A predetermined execution stop means for stopping the derivation of the second result in the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display that can be derived (for example, a small hit game in the first special symbol, a big hit game of the second special symbol The gaming machine F1 characterized by having (or extinguished the small hit game).

According to the game machine F1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F0, the following effects are played. That is, as the second result, it has a predetermined second result in which a predetermined predetermined game value can be given, and a specific second result in which a specific game value more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game value can be given. Then, when a predetermined second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, the execution stop means is provided. At least, the derivation of the second result in the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display, which can be derived later, is stopped by the predetermined execution stop means. As a result, the derivation of the second result derived later based on the predetermined second result derived earlier is stopped, and the special gaming state not given to the player based on the cancellation is counted as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state. Instead, only the special gaming state that can be given to the player can be counted as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state, so even if a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, a lottery based on the number of occurrences of the special gaming state can be counted. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by accurately executing the game property that the selection content of the result changes.

In the game machine F0
The second result is
A predetermined second result (for example, a small hit game) that can give a predetermined predetermined game value, and
It has a specific second result (for example, a jackpot game) that can give a specific game value that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game value.
The execution stop means is
When the specific second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, it is derived later. Specific execution stop means for stopping the derivation of the second result in the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display (for example, depending on the jackpot game in the first special symbol, the jackpot game or the small of the second special symbol). A game machine F2 characterized by having (disappearing a hit game).

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F0, the following effects are played. That is, as the second result, it has a predetermined second result in which a predetermined predetermined game value can be given, and a specific second result in which a specific game value more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game value can be given. Then, when the specific second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, the execution stop means is provided. At least, the derivation of the second result in the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display, which can be derived later, is stopped by the predetermined execution stop means. As a result, the derivation of the second result derived later based on the specific second result derived earlier is stopped, and the special gaming state not given to the player based on the cancellation is counted as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state. Instead, only the special gaming state that can be given to the player can be counted as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state, so even if a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, a lottery based on the number of occurrences of the special gaming state can be counted. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by accurately executing the game property that the selection content of the result changes.

In any of the game machines F0 to F2
When the second result can be derived in one of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display, the other second dynamic display or the first dynamic display is derived first, and the other is derived. A pre- and post-determination means for determining whether or not the second result can be derived (for example, S5301 and S5302 of the special figure 2 change process (S5111)) is provided.
The non-counting means at the time of cancellation
When it is determined by the pre- and post-determination means that the other second dynamic display or the first dynamic display can be derived first and the second result can be derived, the first dynamic display is performed. Alternatively, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the special gaming state obtained in the second dynamic display is not counted as the number of occurrences.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines F0 to F2, the following effects are played. That is, when the second result can be derived in one of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display, the other second dynamic display or the first dynamic display is derived first by the first and second determination means. Moreover, it is determined whether or not the second result can be derived. Then, when it is determined by the first-come-first-served means that the other second dynamic display or the first dynamic display can be derived first and the second result can be derived, the stop-time non-counting means makes a second. The special gaming state that could be derived in the 1st dynamic display or the 2nd dynamic display is not counted as the number of occurrences. As a result, the derivation of the second result derived later based on the second result derived earlier is stopped, and the special gaming state not given to the player based on the cancellation is not counted as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state. , Only the special gaming state that can be given to the player can be counted as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state, so even if a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, the lottery result based on the number of occurrences of the special gaming state There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by accurately executing the game property that the selection content of the game changes.

In any of the game machines F0 to F2
When the second result can be derived in one of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display, the other second dynamic display or the first dynamic display is derived first, and the other is derived. A pre- and post-determination means for determining whether or not the second result can be derived (for example, S5301 and S5302 of the special figure 2 change process (S5111)) is provided.
The non-counting means at the time of cancellation
When it is determined by the pre- and post-determining means that the other second dynamic display or the first dynamic display can be derived first and the second result can be derived, the counting means is counted. The gaming machine F4 is provided with a correction means (for example, S5305 of the special figure changing process (S5111)) for correcting the number of occurrences.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines F0 to F2, the following effects are played. That is, when the second result can be derived in one of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display, the other second dynamic display or the first dynamic display is derived first by the first and second determination means. Moreover, it is determined whether or not the second result can be derived. Then, when it is determined by the first-come-first-served means that the other second dynamic display or the first dynamic display can be derived first and the second result can be derived, the non-counting means at the time of cancellation is provided. The correction means corrects the number of occurrences counted by the counting means. As a result, the derivation of the second result derived later based on the predetermined second result derived earlier is stopped, and the number of occurrences of the special gaming state is corrected for the special gaming state not given to the player based on the cancellation. , Only the special gaming state that can be given to the player can be counted as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state, so even if a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, the lottery result based on the number of occurrences of the special gaming state There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by accurately executing the game property that the selection content of the game changes.

In any of the game machines F0 to F4
At least, a predetermined predetermined gaming state (for example, "normal gaming state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state") and a specific gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state (for example, "" A game state changing means (for example, a time saving flag of 203 m) that can change the game state is provided in addition to the small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state.
The dynamic display execution means
In the predetermined gaming state, in the first dynamic short-term means (for example, in the "normal gaming state"", it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display. The maximum fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds <the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 600 seconds),
In the specific game state, as the execution time of the second dynamic display, it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 600 seconds> the maximum fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 120 seconds).

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines F0 to F4, the following effects are played. That is, the game state can be changed to at least a predetermined predetermined game state and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state by the game state changing means. Then, the first dynamic short-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means makes it easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display in the predetermined gaming state. It is composed. Further, the second dynamic short-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means makes it easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the specific game state. It is composed. As a result, it is possible to create a game property of which dynamic display is derived first according to the game state. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5
Specific ball-entry means different from the predetermined ball-entry means (for example, common large winning opening 75) and
A second movable means (for example, a common large) that can be changed into a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the specific ball entry means or a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific ball entry means. Winning opening opening / closing plate 75a) and
A second driving means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of changing the second movable means from a difficult inflow state to an inflowable state by using the determination result by the determination means is provided.
The second driving means is
When the specific second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means can flow in. And at the same time
A game characterized in that when the predetermined second result is derived based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is made available for inflow. Machine F6.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines F1 to F5, the following effects are played. That is, a specific ball entry means different from the predetermined ball entry means is provided, and the second movable means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means or the inflow difficulty state in which the ball cannot enter, and the game to the specific ball entry means. It is configured to be changeable to an inflowable state in which a sphere can flow. Then, by using the determination result by the determination means, the second movable means can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by the second driving means. When the specific second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means can flow in by the second driving means. When the state is set and the predetermined second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means can also flow in by the second drive means. Be in a state. As a result, the game value can be given to the player by the specific specific ball-entry means common to the case where the specific second result is derived and the case where the predetermined second result is derived, the number of parts is reduced, and the game is played. It has the effect of reducing the cost of the machine.

In the game machine F6
The first ball is provided differently from the predetermined first ball entry means, the predetermined second ball entry means, or the specific ball entry means, and is based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined first ball entry means by the determination means. 2 When a result is derived, a special ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 small winning opening 65) that can change from a difficult inflow state to an inflowable state is provided.
When the predetermined second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, the inflow mode of the game ball into the special entry means is changed.
The game state changing means
The gaming machine F7 is characterized by comprising a gaming state maintaining means for maintaining a gaming state regardless of the inflow mode of the special ball entering means.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F6, the following effect is played, that is, a special entry provided different from the predetermined first entry means, the predetermined second entry means, or the specific entry means. The ball means is configured to be changeable from a difficult inflow state to an inflowable state when a second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means. Then, when the predetermined second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, the inflow mode of the game ball into the special entry means is changed. Here, the game state is maintained by the game state maintaining means provided in the game state changing means, regardless of the inflow mode of the special ball entry means. As a result, the predetermined second result regarding the predetermined first ball entry means and the predetermined second result regarding the predetermined second entry means can be different from each other in the ball entry means in which the game ball can flow in. It is said that it is possible to create a playability of whether or not the game state is changed depending on which ball entry means the game ball enters, to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the game machine F7
The gaming machine F8 is provided with an obstructing means (for example, an obstacle member 65c or a nail) that inhibits the inflow of the gaming ball into the special ball entering means.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, the following effects are played. That is, the inhibition means inhibits the inflow of the game ball into the special entry means. As a result, even if a predetermined second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means, the inflow is possible based on the predetermined second result. It is possible to block the inflow of game balls into the special ball entry means by the blocking means. Therefore, by making the predetermined second result regarding the predetermined first ball entry means and the predetermined second result regarding the predetermined second ball entry means different whether or not the game ball can flow into the predetermined ball entry means, the game can be played. It has the effect of increasing the variety and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F8
A difficult inflow state (for example, a closed state) in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to flow into the predetermined first ball entry means, and an inflowable state (for example, open state) in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined first entry means. A first movable means (for example, ordinary electric service 71b) that can be changed to a state),
A first driving means (for example, ordinary electric service control processing (S204)) capable of changing the first movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state is provided.
The first movable means is
When the predetermined first ball entry means is in a difficult inflow state, the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface of the first movable means.
The predetermined second ball entry means
The game machine F9 is characterized in that the game ball rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means is arranged at a position where it flows down.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines F0 to F8, the following effects are played. That is, the first movable means can change between a difficult inflow state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to flow into the predetermined first entry means and an inflowable state in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined first entry means. The first movable means can be changed to a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state by the first driving means. Further, when the predetermined first ball entry means is in a difficult inflow state, the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface of the first movable means. Then, the predetermined second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the predetermined second entry means only when the first movable means is in the inflow difficult state, and when the first movable means can be in the inflowable state, the predetermined first It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means and the game ball to enter the predetermined second ball entry means. As a result, by making the predetermined ball-entry means on which the game ball is easy to enter different according to the game state in which the driving mode of the first movable means is different, the variation of the game is enriched and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine F9
The specific ball entry means
At least, the game machine F10 is arranged at a position where the game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F9, the following effects are played. That is, the specific ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the first movable means flows down. As a result, whether or not the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means is different depending on the game state in which the driving mode of the first movable means is different, so that the variation of the game is enriched and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Group G: Game state transition when special figure 2 appears first in a specific game state and the result of dynamic display of special figure 2 appears>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area. Based on this, a winning / failing lottery is performed, and when an advantageous state such as a win is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed specific ball-entry means is opened and the player is given a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the G group was made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A predetermined first ball entry means (for example, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a) through which a game ball can enter.
A predetermined second ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means (for example, the special figure 2 starting port 74) and
Information acquisition means (for example, first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage) that acquires predetermined information based on the game ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means or the predetermined second ball entry means. Area 203e) and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A predetermined predetermined game state (for example, "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state") and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, "small hit"). A game state changing means (for example, a time saving flag of 203 m) that can change the game state to the "frequent probability fluctuation state"),
By using the determination result of the determination means, the display means (for example, the special symbol display device 37) executes the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol). In a gaming machine provided with a dynamic display execution means (for example, main control device 110).
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic execution means (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) which is the dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Upper LED group 37b1) and
It is possible to execute the second dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol) which is the dynamic display and is different from the first dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined second ball entry means. With the second dynamic execution means (for example, the lower LED group 37b2),
The first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means can be executed at the same time (for example, the first special symbol). Dynamic display and dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel),
In the predetermined gaming state, in the second dynamic long-term means (for example, in the "normal gaming state"", it is easy to select an execution time longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display. The maximum fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds <the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 600 seconds),
In the specific game state, as the execution time of the second dynamic display, it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display. ”, The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 600 seconds> the maximum fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 120 seconds).
The game state changing means
When the result of the second dynamic display is derived before the result of the first dynamic display, the destination derivation changing means for changing the game state (for example, S6405 of the small hit end process (S6016)). A game machine G0 characterized by being equipped.

According to the game machine G0, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined first entry means, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined second entry means different from the predetermined first entry means. Then, the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined first ball entry means or the predetermined second ball entry means, and the determination means acquires the predetermined information by the information acquisition means. Is determined. Further, the game state can be changed between a predetermined predetermined game state and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state by the game state changing means. Then, by using the determination result of the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means. Here, the first dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, is configured to be executable by the first dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means, based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Similarly, the second dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means is configured to enable the second dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, based on the entry of the ball into the predetermined second entry means. Further, the simultaneous execution means makes it possible to execute the first dynamic display by the first execution means and the second dynamic display by the second execution means at the same time. Here, the second dynamic long-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means selects an execution time longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the predetermined gaming state. obtain. Further, by the second dynamic short-term means provided in the dynamic display execution means, an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display can be selected as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the specific game state. .. Then, when the result of the second dynamic display is derived before the result of the first dynamic display, the game state is changed by the advance derivation changing means provided in the game state changing means. As a result, whether the second dynamic display is derived first by changing the game state depending on whether or not the result of the second dynamic display whose execution time differs depending on the game state appears. It is possible to create a playability of whether or not. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine G0
The gaming machine G1 is provided with a gaming state maintaining means for maintaining a gaming state when the result of the first dynamic display is derived before the result of the second dynamic display.

According to the game machine G1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G0, the following effects are played. That is, when the result of the first dynamic display is derived before the result of the second dynamic display, the game state is maintained by the game state maintaining means. As a result, unlike the second dynamic display, when the result of the first dynamic display is derived before the result of the second dynamic display, the game state is maintained by configuring the first movement. By changing the game state depending on whether or not the second dynamic display that can be executed at the same time as the target display is derived first, the game property of which dynamic display is derived first. Can be created. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine G0 or G1
The determination means
Based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, at least a first result (for example, a loss result) that does not give the player a game value and a first result that can give the player a predetermined first game value can be given. Derivation of one of two results (for example, a small hit game) and a third result (for example, a big hit game) that can give the player a second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value. Configured to be possible
The game state changing means
The gaming machine G2, characterized in that the gaming state is changed when a result other than the first result appears.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G0 or G1, the following effects are played. That is, at least the first result in which the player is not given a game value and the second result in which the player can be given a predetermined first game value based on the predetermined information acquired by the determination means. And a third result that can give the player a second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value can be derived. Then, when a result other than the first result appears, the game state is changed by the game state changing means. As a result, the gaming state is changed according to whether or not a result other than the first result appears, and whether or not a result other than the first result is derived first in the second dynamic display. It is possible to create playability. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine G2
The determination means
The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the second result can be easily derived from the first result or the third result.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the following effects are played. That is, the determination means makes it easy to derive the second result from the first result or the third result. As a result, the gaming state is changed according to whether or not the second result, which is most easily derived, appears, so that the game property of whether or not the second result is derived first in the second dynamic display. Can be created. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3
The dynamic display execution means
A mode execution means (for example, the small hit winning in the second special symbol is simpler and shorter than the big hit winning) to execute the fact that the second result is derived in a manner that is difficult or unrecognizable to the player from the third result. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that it is executed by directing, or the small hit winning in the first special symbol is executed in the same manner as the loss result).

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G1 to G3, the following effects are played. That is, the fact that the second result is derived by the mode executing means provided in the dynamic display executing means is executed in a mode that is difficult or unrecognizable to the player from the A2 result. As a result, when the second result, which has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the third result, is derived, it is executed in a manner that is more difficult for the player to recognize or is unrecognizable than the third result is derived. Therefore, the appearance of the second result can be suggested to the player in a simpler manner than the third result. Therefore, there is an effect that the second result, which is easier to appear than the third result but has a low game value, is not expressed, does not cause discomfort to the player, and can improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4
The dynamic display execution means
When the first result is derived, the first result suggestion mode (for example, the loss result in the variation effect of the first special symbol) that suggests to the player that it is the first result in the dynamic display is shown. First result suggestion mode to be issued
When the third result is derived, the third result mode (for example, the jackpot result in the variation effect of the first special symbol) that suggests to the player that it is the third result in the dynamic display appears. 3rd result suggestion mode manifestation means and
The gaming machine G5 is characterized by comprising a first result suggestion mode equivalent means for displaying the first result suggestion mode when the second result is derived.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G1 to G4, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means by using the determination result of the determination means. Then, when the first result is derived, the first result suggesting mode expressing means provided in the dynamic display executing means suggests to the player that the first result is the first result in the dynamic display. The suggestion aspect appears. Further, when the third result is derived, the third result suggesting mode expressing means provided in the dynamic display executing means suggests to the player that the third result is the third result in the dynamic display. Aspects are revealed. Then, when the second result is derived, the first result suggestion mode appears by the first result suggestion mode equivalent means provided in the dynamic display execution means. As a result, when the second result is derived, by suggesting to the player in the same manner as when the first result is derived, the derivation of the second result becomes difficult or unrecognizable to the player. can do. Therefore, when the first result suggestion mode appears, it is possible to create a game property for guessing whether or not the second result is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines G1 to G5
Specific ball-entry means different from the predetermined ball-entry means (for example, common large winning opening 75) and
A second movable means (for example, a common large) that can be changed into a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the specific ball entry means or a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific ball entry means. Winning opening opening / closing plate 75a) and
A second driving means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of changing the second movable means from a difficult inflow state to an inflowable state by using the determination result by the determination means is provided.
The second driving means is
When the third result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is brought into a flowable state. And at the same time
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second result is derived based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is made available for inflow. G6.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G1 to G5, the following effects are played. That is, a specific ball entry means different from the predetermined ball entry means is provided, and the second movable means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means or the inflow difficulty state in which the ball cannot enter, and the game to the specific ball entry means. It is configured to be changeable to an inflowable state in which a sphere can flow. Then, by using the determination result by the determination means, the second movable means can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by the second driving means. When the third result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means can flow in by the second drive means. In addition, when the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means can flow in by the second drive means as well. Will be done. As a result, the game value can be given to the player by the specific specific ball-entry means common to the case where the specific second result is derived and the case where the predetermined second result is derived, the number of parts is reduced, and the game is played. It has the effect of reducing the cost of the machine.

In any of the game machines G1 to G6
The first ball is provided differently from the predetermined first ball entry means, the predetermined second ball entry means, or the specific ball entry means, and is based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined first ball entry means by the determination means. 2 When a result is derived, a special ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 small winning opening 65) that can change from a difficult inflow state to an inflowable state is provided.
When the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, the inflow mode of the game ball into the special entry means is changed.
The game state changing means
The gaming machine G7 is characterized by comprising a gaming state maintaining means for maintaining a gaming state regardless of the inflow mode of the special ball entering means.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines G1 to G6, the following effects are produced, that is, different from the predetermined first ball entry means, the predetermined second ball entry means, or the specific ball entry means. When the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, the special entry means can be changed from the difficult inflow state to the inflowable state. Then, when the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, the inflow mode of the game ball into the special entry means is changed. Here, the game state is maintained by the game state maintaining means provided in the game state changing means, regardless of the inflow mode of the special ball entry means. As a result, the second result regarding the predetermined first ball entry means and the second result regarding the predetermined second entry means can be different from each other in the ball entry means in which the game ball can flow in. It has the effect of creating a playability of whether or not the game state is changed depending on whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, enriching the variation of the game, and improving the interest of the game. is there.

In the game machine G7
The gaming machine G8 is characterized by comprising an inhibiting means (for example, an obstacle member 65c or a nail) that inhibits the inflow of the gaming ball into the special ball entering means.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G7, the following effects are played. That is, the inhibition means inhibits the inflow of the game ball into the special entry means. As a result, even if the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means, the special entry is in a state where the inflow is possible based on the second result. The inflow of game balls into the ball means can be blocked by the blocking means. Therefore, by making the second result regarding the predetermined first ball entry means and the second result regarding the predetermined second ball entry means different whether or not the game ball can flow into the ball entry means, the variation of the game can be changed. It has the effect of enriching the game and improving the interest of the game.

<Group H: Dynamic display for the maximum number of reserved balls for encouragement can be executed in 1 dynamic display time for non-encouragement>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area. Based on this, a winning / failing lottery is performed, and when an advantageous state such as a win is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed specific ball-entry means is opened and the player is given a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the H group was made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A predetermined first ball entry means (for example, the left side special figure 1 starting port 64 or the right side special figure 1 starting port 71a) through which a game ball can enter.
A predetermined second ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means (for example, the special figure 2 starting port 74) and
Information acquisition means (for example, first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage) that acquires predetermined information based on the game ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means or the predetermined second ball entry means. Area 203e) and
A storage means for storing predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, first reserved first to fourth areas or second reserved first to fourth areas) with a predetermined number N (N is a natural number) as an upper limit. )When,
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A predetermined predetermined game state (for example, "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state") and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, "small hit"). A game state changing means (for example, a time saving flag of 203 m) that can change the game state to the "frequent probability fluctuation state"),
By using the determination result of the determination means, the display means (for example, the special symbol display device 37) executes the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol). In a gaming machine provided with a dynamic display execution means (for example, main control device 110).
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic execution means (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) which is the dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Upper LED group 37b1) and
It is possible to execute the second dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol) which is the dynamic display and is different from the first dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined second ball entry means. With the second dynamic execution means (for example, the lower LED group 37b2),
The first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means can be executed at the same time (for example, the first special symbol). Dynamic display and dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel),
In the specific game state, as the execution time of the first dynamic display, it is easy to select an execution time longer than the execution time of the second dynamic display (for example, "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state"). ”, The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 600 seconds> the maximum fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 120 seconds).
In the specific game state, as the execution time of the second dynamic display, it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display. ”, The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 600 seconds> the maximum fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 120 seconds).
The first dynamic long-term means is
The gaming machine H0 is characterized in that an execution time longer than N execution times obtained by multiplying the execution time that can be selected by the second dynamic short-term means by a predetermined number N can be selected.

According to the game machine H0, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined first entry means, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the predetermined second entry means different from the predetermined first entry means. Then, the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined first ball entry means or the predetermined second ball entry means. Further, the game state can be changed between a predetermined predetermined game state and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state by the game state changing means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, the storage means stores predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number. Then, by using the determination result of the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means. Here, the first dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, is configured to be executable by the first dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means, based on the ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means. Similarly, the second dynamic execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means is configured to enable the second dynamic display, which is a dynamic display, based on the entry of the ball into the predetermined second entry means. Further, the simultaneous execution means makes it possible to execute the first dynamic display by the first execution means and the second dynamic display by the second execution means at the same time. Here, the first dynamic long-term means makes it easy to select an execution time longer than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display in the specific gaming state, and the second movement. By the short-term means, the execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display can be easily selected as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the specific game state. Then, the first dynamic display means is configured to be able to select an execution time longer than N execution times obtained by multiplying the execution time that can be selected by the second dynamic short-term means by a predetermined number N. As a result, in the specific game state, it is possible to execute all the second dynamic displays stored in the storage means while executing the first dynamic display of 1, and all of the second dynamic displays. The result can be derived before the result of the first dynamic display. As a result, it is possible to easily derive a dynamic display having a short execution time earlier than a dynamic display having a long execution time, and it is possible to execute an efficient game and improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the game machine H0
In the predetermined gaming state, in the second dynamic long-term means (for example, in the "normal gaming state"", it is easy to select an execution time longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display. The maximum fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds <the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 600 seconds),
In the first dynamic short-term means (for example, in the "normal gaming state"), in the predetermined gaming state, it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display. The maximum fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds <the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 600 seconds).
The second dynamic long-term means is
The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that an execution time longer than N execution times obtained by multiplying the execution time that can be selected by the first dynamic short-term means by a predetermined number N can be selected.

According to the game machine H1, in addition to the effect of the game machine H0, the following effects are played. That is, the second dynamic long-term means makes it easy to select an execution time longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the predetermined gaming state, and the first dynamic display. By the short-term means, the execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display can be easily selected as the execution time of the first dynamic display in the predetermined gaming state. Then, the second dynamic display means is configured to be able to select an execution time longer than N execution times obtained by multiplying the execution time that can be selected by the first dynamic short-term means by a predetermined number N. As a result, in the predetermined gaming state, while executing the second dynamic display of 1, it becomes possible to execute all the first dynamic displays stored in the storage means, and all of the first dynamic displays. The result can be derived before the result of the second dynamic display. As a result, it is possible to easily derive a dynamic display having a short execution time earlier than a dynamic display having a long execution time, and it is possible to execute an efficient game and improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the game machine H0 or H1
Specific ball-entry means different from the predetermined first ball-entry means and the predetermined second ball-entry means (for example, common large winning opening 75),
A second movable means (for example, a common large) that can be changed into a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the specific ball entry means or a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific ball entry means. Winning opening opening / closing plate 75a) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second movable means is provided with a second driving means (for example, a hit process (S203)) capable of changing the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state.
The determination means
Based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, at least a first result (for example, a loss result) that does not give the player a game value and a second result that can give the player a predetermined game value. (For example, a jackpot game) and any result can be derived,
The dynamic display execution means
When the second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display previously derived by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, at least the said Execution suspending means (for example, the first special symbol) that interrupts the execution of the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display derived later while the second movable means by the second driving means is in the inflowable state. The game machine H2 is characterized in that the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is interrupted based on the winning of the jackpot game in.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H0 or H1, the following effects are produced. That is, a specific ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means and the predetermined second ball entry means is provided, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter or cannot enter the specific ball entry means by the second movable means. It is configured to be changeable between a state and an inflowable state in which a game ball can flow into a specific ball entry means. Then, by using the determination result by the determination means, the second movable means can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by the second driving means. Here, at least, a first result in which the player is not given a game value and a second result in which the player can be given a predetermined game value based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means by the determination means. Any of the results can be derived. Then, when the second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, the dynamic display execution means is used. The execution suspending means provided suspends the execution of the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display derived later, at least while the second movable means by the second driving means is in the inflowable state. This makes it possible to execute all the other dynamic displays stored in the storage means while executing one dynamic display, and all the results of the other dynamic display are displayed in one dynamic display. Can be derived before the result of. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with all the winning contents without extinguishing the dynamic display of the other as a result of the dynamic display of one. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the phenomenon that the game value is not given even though the player wins some role (so-called loss), and it is possible to prevent the player from getting excited about the game.

In any of the game machines H0 to H2
A difficult inflow state (for example, a closed state) in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to flow into the predetermined first ball entry means, and an inflowable state (for example, open state) in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined first entry means. A first movable means (for example, ordinary electric service 71b) that can be changed to a state),
A first driving means (for example, ordinary electric service control processing (S204)) capable of changing the first movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state is provided.
The first driving means is
When a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the variable display of a normal symbol) is satisfied in a predetermined first game state (for example, a state without the "time saving function"), the first movable means is set to the first period (for example, 0). 1 second drive mode means that can be moved (for example, a normal electric service opening table 202k in a state without the "time saving function") and
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in a second gaming state different from the first gaming state (for example, a state with "time saving function"), the first movable means is moved to a second period (for example, 5) longer than the first period. A second drive mode means (for example, a normal electric service opening table 202k in a state with a "time saving function") that can be moved (0.0 seconds x 3 times) is provided.
The game state changing means
It is characterized by including a driving mode changing means (for example, S6405 of the small hit end processing (S6016)) capable of changing the gaming state based on the driving mode of the second movable means by the second driving means. Game machine H3 to play.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines H0 to H2, the following effects are played. That is, the first movable means can change between a difficult inflow state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to flow into the predetermined first entry means and an inflowable state in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined first entry means. The first movable means can be changed to a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state by the first driving means. Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, the first movable means can be moved for the first period by the first driving mode means provided in the first driving means, and is predetermined in the second gaming state. When the condition is satisfied, the first movable means can be moved for a second period longer than the first period by the second drive mode means provided in the first drive means. Then, the driving mode changing means provided in the gaming state changing means is configured so that the gaming state can be changed based on the driving mode of the second movable means by the second driving means. As a result, the gaming state is changed based on the inflow mode of the game ball into the specific entry means which can be changed to the inflow difficult state or the inflow possible state by using the determination result of the determination means. 1 The mode of inflow of the game ball into the ball entry means can be changed. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine H3
The second result is
A predetermined second result (for example, a small hit game) that can give a predetermined predetermined game value, and
It has a specific second result (for example, a jackpot game) that can give a specific game value that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game value.
The second driving means is
When the specific second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means can flow in. And at the same time
A game characterized in that when the predetermined second result is derived based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is made available for inflow. Machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H3, the following effects are played. That is, as the second result, a predetermined second result that can give a predetermined predetermined game value and a specific second result that can give a specific game result that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game value are provided. Then, when the specific second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is provided by the second drive means. When the inflow is possible and the predetermined second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is also provided by the second drive means. It is considered to be inflowable. As a result, the game value can be given to the player by the specific ball-entry means common to the case where the third result is derived and the case where the second result is derived, the number of parts is reduced, and the game machine can be used. It has the effect of reducing such costs.

In any of the game machines H2 to H4,
The first ball is provided differently from the predetermined first ball entry means, the predetermined second ball entry means, or the specific ball entry means, and is based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined first ball entry means by the determination means. 2 When a result is derived, a special ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 small winning opening 65) that can change from a difficult inflow state to an inflowable state is provided.
When the predetermined second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, the inflow mode of the game ball into the special entry means is changed.
The game state changing means
The gaming machine H5 is characterized by comprising a gaming state maintaining means for maintaining a gaming state regardless of the inflow mode of the special ball entering means.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines H2 to H4, the following effects are played. That is, a special ball-entry means provided differently from the predetermined first ball-entry means, the predetermined second ball-entry means, or the specific ball-entry means is based on the ball of the game ball into the predetermined first ball-entry means by the determination means. When a predetermined second result is derived, the inflow difficult state can be changed to the inflowable state. Then, when the predetermined second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means by the determination means, the inflow mode of the game ball into the special entry means is changed. Here, the game state is maintained by the game state maintaining means provided in the game state changing means, regardless of the inflow mode of the special ball entry means. As a result, the predetermined second result regarding the predetermined first ball entry means and the predetermined second result regarding the predetermined second entry means can be different from each other in the ball entry means in which the game ball can flow in. It is said that it is possible to create a playability of whether or not the game state is changed depending on which ball entry means the game ball enters, to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the game machine H5
The gaming machine H6 is provided with an inhibiting means (for example, an obstacle member 65c or a nail) that inhibits the inflow of the gaming ball into the special ball entering means.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H5, the following effects are played. That is, the inhibition means inhibits the inflow of the game ball into the special entry means. As a result, even if a predetermined second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means, the inflow is possible based on the predetermined second result. It is possible to block the inflow of game balls into the special ball entry means by the blocking means. Therefore, by making the predetermined second result regarding the predetermined first ball entry means and the predetermined second result regarding the predetermined second ball entry means different whether or not the game ball can flow into the predetermined ball entry means, the game can be played. It has the effect of increasing the variety and improving the interest of the game.

For any of the configurations of the game machines A0 to A10, any of the game machines B0 to B9, C0 to C8, D0 to D8, E0 to E8, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and H0 to H6. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the game machines B0 to B9, any of the game machines A0 to A10, C0 to C8, D0 to D8, E0 to E8, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and H0 to H6. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the game machines C0 to C8, any of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B9, D0 to D8, E0 to E8, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and H0 to H6. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the game machines D0 to D8, any of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B9, C0 to C8, E0 to E8, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and H0 to H6. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the game machines E0 to E8, any of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B9, C0 to C8, D0 to D8, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and H0 to H6. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the game machines F0 to F10, any one of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B9, C0 to C8, D0 to D8, E0 to E8, G0 to G8, and H0 to H6. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the game machines G0 to G8, any of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B9, C0 to C8, D0 to D8, E0 to E8, F0 to F10, H0 to H6. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the game machines H0 to H6, any of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B9, C0 to C8, D0 to D8, E0 to E8, F0 to F10, and G0 to G8. The configuration limited in 1 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B9, C0 to C8, D0 to D8, E0 to E8, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and H0 to H6, the game machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B9, C0 to C8, D0 to D8, E0 to E8, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and H0 to H6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B9, C0 to C8, D0 to D8, E0 to E8, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and H0 to H6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being fused. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
37b1 Upper LED group (part of the first dynamic execution means)
37b2 Lower LED group (part of the second dynamic execution means)
64 Left side special figure 1 starting port (part of predetermined ball entry means, part of predetermined first ball entry means)
65 Special Figure 1 Small prize opening (part of special ball entry means)
65a Special figure 1 Haunting board (part of the third movable means)
65c Obstacle member (part of inhibitory means)
71a Right side special figure 1 starting port (part of the predetermined ball entry means, part of the predetermined first ball entry means)
71b Ordinary electric service (part of the first movable means)
74 Special Figure 2 Starting port (part of the predetermined ball entry means, part of the predetermined second ball entry means)
75 Common Grand Prize (part of specific ball entry means)
75a Common Grand Prize Opening / Closing Plate (Part of Second Movable Means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of display means, part of first dynamic execution means, part of second dynamic execution means, part of effect means)
110 Main controller (part of dynamic display execution means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of dynamic display execution means)
201 MPU (part of judgment means)
202k Ordinary electric service opening table (part of the first drive mode means, part of the second drive mode means)
203d 1st reserved ball storage area (part of information acquisition means, part of storage means)
203e Second reserved ball storage area (part of information acquisition means, part of storage means)
203k limit counter (part of counting means)
203m time saving flag (part of game state changing means, part of switching means)
203n Special figure 1 time reduction counter (part of means for changing the number of executions)
Processing per S203 (part of the second driving means)
S204 Ordinary electric service control processing (part of the first driving means)
S509 Grand prize opening opening / closing control process (part of special game generation means)
S5111 Special figure 2 change processing (part of pre- and post-discrimination means)
S5301 (part of the first and second discrimination means)
S5302 (part of the first and second discrimination means)
S5305 (part of correction means)
S6012 Big hit end processing (part of game state generating means, part of common setting means)
S6016 Small hit end processing (part of driving mode changing means, part of pre-deriving changing means)
S6405 (part of the driving mode changing means, part of the prior derivation changing means)

Claims (5)

A predetermined first ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, and
A predetermined second ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means,
A first movable means that can be changed into a state in which the game ball is difficult to flow into or cannot flow into the predetermined first ball entry means, and a state in which the game ball can flow into the predetermined first ball entry means. ,
A first driving means capable of changing the first movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state,
An information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information based on a game ball entering the predetermined first ball entry means or the predetermined second ball entry means.
A determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A specific ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means and the predetermined second ball entry means,
A second movable means that can be changed into a state in which the game ball is difficult to flow into or cannot flow into the specific ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific ball entry means.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second drive means capable of changing the second movable means into a difficult inflow state or an inflowable state, and
A game state changing means that can change the game state,
In a gaming machine provided with a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information in the display means by using the determination result of the determination means.
The determination means
Based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, at least one of the first result in which the player is not given the game value and the second result in which the player can be given the predetermined game value are obtained. Derivable, configured
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic execution means capable of executing the first dynamic display, which is the dynamic display, based on the entry into the predetermined first ball entry means.
A second dynamic execution means capable of executing a second dynamic display different from the first dynamic display, which is the dynamic display based on the ball entering the predetermined second ball entry means.
The first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means and the same-time execution means capable of executing the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means at the same time are provided.
The second driving means is
When the second result is derived based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined first entry means or the predetermined second entry means by the determination means, the specific entry means is used for a maximum specific period. For a specific period of time, which can be inflowable,
It is provided with N times execution means for executing the specific period N times (N is a natural number) by the specific period inflowable state means.
The game state changing means is at least
It is configured so that the gaming state can be changed between a predetermined predetermined gaming state and a specific gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state.
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic short-term means capable of selecting an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display in the predetermined gaming state.
In the specific gaming state, as the execution time of the first dynamic display, a first dynamic long-term means capable of selecting an execution time longer than the execution time of the second dynamic display, and
A second dynamic long-term means capable of selecting an execution time longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the predetermined gaming state.
In the specific gaming state, a second dynamic short-term means capable of selecting an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display is provided.
The first dynamic long-term means is
As the execution time of the first dynamic display, at least
The sum of the execution time that can be selected by the second dynamic short-term means and the N times specific period obtained by multiplying the specific period in the specific period inflowable state means by N by the N times execution means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with (1st total period setting means) capable of setting 1 total period. The second dynamic long-term means is
As the execution time of the second dynamic display, at least
The sum of the execution time that can be selected by the first dynamic short-term means and the N times specific period obtained by multiplying the specific period in the specific period inflowable state means by N by the N times execution means. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a second total period setting means capable of setting a total period. The second driving means is
A start period execution means, which executes a predetermined start period before the specific period is started by the specific period inflowable state means, is provided.
The first total period setting means
As the execution time of the first dynamic display, at least
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a period equal to or greater than the sum of the first total period and the start period in the start period executing means can be set. The second driving means is
An end period execution means for executing a predetermined end period after the end of the specific period by the specific period inflowable state means.
The first total period setting means
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein a period equal to or greater than the sum of the first total period and the end period in the end period executing means can be set. .. The second driving means is
A suspension period execution means for executing a suspension period (for example, an interval time) that makes the specific ball entry means difficult to flow in between the specific period of 1 by the specific period inflowable state means and the next specific period. With,
The first total period setting means
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein a period equal to or greater than the total of the first total period and the suspension period in the suspension period executing means can be set. ..

Images